Copyright: (c) 1992 - 1997 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved
Citation: (c) 1992 - 1997 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved


Character Sets and Codes
Character Sets and ANSI Codes

The Windows character sets Corel VENTURA supports includes many special characters such as mathematical symbols and letters from other languages, which aren't available on most keyboards. You can enter these characters by using the Insert, Symbol command in the Insert menu from within VENTURA, or by typing an ANSI code for that character also from within VENTURA. In addition, VENTURA provides a number of keyboard shortcuts for more commonly used symbols, (e.g.,  and ).

What you want to do?

See a list of keyboard shortcuts for commonly used symbols

See information on entering ANSI codes in VENTURA and in non-Windows word processors

See the table of ANSI codes


Entering ANSI codes

Windows reads all keyboard entries as ANSI code characters and passes the code to VENTURA. To enter characters not available on the keyboard, press the ALT key and enter the ANSI equivalent of the desired character. (Or, better yet, use the Insert, Symbol command in the Insert menu.) You must enter the full ANSI code as it is listed in the ANSI Codes table.

The ANSI code must be entered using the numeric keypad. The ANSI code cannot be entered using the number keys across the top of the keyboard.

When using a non-Windows word processor to create text files for importing into VENTURA, you must enter characters above ANSI  0127 by enclosing the ANSI code in angle brackets < >, with the 0 in the ANSI code replaced by the @ character, e.g. <@162> for ¢.

For word processors which support foreign characters, Corel VENTURA will accept these characters without placing numbers inside of angle brackets. However, the ANSI equivalent of these characters must be less than 0169, and the foreign characters in your word processor must have the same ANSI equivalents as those shown on the following pages. For characters above 169, use the @ code inside of brackets, e.g., <@185> for §.


ANSI Codes

The following table lists the ANSI codes for the character sets used in Windows-based applications.

For information on entering ANSI codes in VENTURA, and in non-Windows word processors, click [image].

ANSI No.	Symbol

032	space

033	!

034	"

035	#

036	$

037	%

038	&

039	'

040	(

041	)

042	*

043	+

044	,

045	-

046	.

047	/

048	0

049	1

050	2

051	3

052	4

053	5

054	6

055	7

056	8

057	9

058	:

059	;

060	<

061	=

062	>

063	?

064	@

065	A

066	B

067	C

068	D

069	E

070	F

071	G

072	H

073	I

074	J

075	K

076	L

077	M

078	N

079	O

080	P

081	Q

082	R

083	S

084	T

085	U

086	V

087	W

088	X

089	Y

090	Z

091	[

092	\

093	]

094	^

095	_

096	`

097	a

098	b

099	c

0100	d

0101	e

0102	f

0103	g

0104	h

0105	i

0106	j

0107	k

0108	l

0109	m

0110	n

0111	o

0112	p

0113	q

0114	r

0115	s

0116	t

0117	u

0118	v

0119	w

0120	x

0121	y

0122	z

0123	{

0124	|

0125	}

0126	~

0127

0128

0129

0130

0131

0132

0133

0134

0135

0136

0137

0138

0139

0140

0141

0142

0143

0144

0145

0146

0147

0148

0149

0150

0151

0152

0153

0154

0155

0156

0157

0158

0159

0160

0161	¡

0162	¢

0163	£

0164

0165	¥

0166	¦

0167	§

0168	¨

0169	©

0170	ª

0171	«

0172	¬

0173	­

0174	®

0175	¯

0176	°

0177	±

0178	²

0179	³

0180	´

0181	µ

0182	¶

0183	·

0184	¸

0185	¹

0186	º

0187	»

0188	¼

0189	½

0190	¾

0191	¿

0192

0193	Á

0194	Â

0195	Ã

0196	Ä

0197	Å

0198	Æ

0199	Ç

0200	È

0201	É

0202	Ê

0203	Ë

0204	Ì

0205	Í

0206	Î

0207	Ï

0208	Ð

0209	Ñ

0210	Ò

0211	Ó

0212	Ô

0213	Õ

0214	Ö

0215	×

0216	Ø

0217	Ù

0218	Ú

0219	Û

0220	Ü

0221	Ý

0222	Þ

0223	ß

0224	à

0225	á

0226	â

0227	ã

0228	ä

0229	å

0230	æ

0231	ç

0232	è

0233	é

0234	ê

0235	ë

0236	ì

0237	í

0238	î

0239	ï

0240	ð

0241	ñ

0242	ò

0243	ó

0244	ô

0245	õ

0246	ö

0247	÷

0248	ø

0249	ù

0250	ú

0251	û

0252	ü

0253	ý

0254	þ

0255	ÿ


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you made.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you made.


Click this button to display an overview of this dialog box.

For Help on an item, click ? at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item.


Click this button to apply the settings you selected without closing the dialog box. To close the dialog box and apply the settings, click OK.


Shows the name of the tag used to format the selected text. Changes you make in this dialog box apply to that tag. To edit a different tag, select it from this list.


Click this button to add a new tag.


Click this button to delete the selected tag.


For help on an item in this group, click the ? button at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item.


No Help topic is associated with this item.


This .RTF contains all the context-sensitive help for the commands and dialogs accessed from Ventura's Edit menu


menu commands


Reverses the last text, tag, graphic object, or frame editing action you performed. Immediately after you undo an action, the Redo command becomes available, allowing you to restore what you reversed.

You can set the number of actions that can be undone, using the Tools, Options command (Selection tab).


Restores what the Undo command reversed.


Repeats your last command or action, if possible.


Removes the selected text, frame, or graphic object, and places it on the Clipboard.


Copies the selected text, frame or graphic object, and places it on the Clipboard.


Places the contents of the Clipboard on the current page. Text is pasted at the insertion point, replacing any currently selected text.


Pastes, embeds or links the contents of the Clipboard. Embedding an object allows you to edit it in the originating application, without leaving VENTURA. Linking updates the object whenever changes are made to it in the originating application.


Removes the selected text, frame, graphic object or table.


Duplicates the selected frame or graphic object. Use the Tools, Options command (Selection tab) to set the amount the duplicate is offset from the original.


Extends the current selection to all text in the current chapter, all frames and graphic objects on the current page, or all cells in the selected table.


Searches for, and optionally replaces, specified text, formatting or special items (index entries, cross-references, etc.) in the active document.


Edits items such as cross-reference and index markers inserted using the Insert Item command in the Insert menu. The command becomes available when you place the insertion point immediately before or after the item.


Places the selected frame or graphic object in front of, or in back of, other objects. The Reverse Order command becomes available when you select two or more frames or graphic objects.


Groups all selected frames of graphic objects together, so they can be selected and manipulated as a single object.


Breaks up the selected group into its individual objects. If you have more than one sub-level of grouping, the Ungroup command breaks up one level of grouping at a time.


Converts the selected frame or graphic object into a series of curves and/or lines that you can edit with the Node Edit tool. Once an object is converted to curves, it is not possible to return it to its original object type, except with the Undo command in the Edit menu.


Removes formatting applied using the Format, Paragraph Overrides command or adds it to a paragraph tag.


Lists linked objects in the active document and allows you to change, update and break the links as well as open the application used to create the object. This command is not available if the current document contains no links.


Displays commands for editing the selected embedded object or converting into another object type.


Paste Special dialog box (Windows help)


Find and Replace dialog box


Find and Replace, Text/Attributes dialog box
Find and Replace dialog box, Text/Attributes

Searches for and optionally replaces text, tags and formatting. You can also search and replace special characters such as discretionary hyphens, em dashes and tabs plus special items such as footnotes, index entries and hidden text.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Enter the text you want to search for, or click the down arrow and select from the most recent entries. To search for text attributes (font, color, underlining, etc.) only, leave the Find box empty.

You can search for text with letters in common by using a wildcard:

To find	Example

Any single character, use ?	b?t finds "bat" and "bet."

Any string of characters, use *	b*d finds "bad" and "battered."

To search for the characters *, ?,<, > and \ precede the character with \ [image] for example to search for ? type \?.


Enter the replacement text, or click the down arrow and select from the most recent entries. To delete the text in the Find box, leave the Replace box empty.


Click this button to find the next instance of the text, and/or attribute specified in the Find box.


Click this button to change the selected text, and/or attributes to whatever is in the Replace box and find the next occurrence.


Click this button to find and replace all occurrences of the text, and/or attributes in the Find box with the text and/or attributes in the tag in the Replace box.


Click this button to search for special items (cross-references, footnotes, frame anchors, etc.). You can also use this button to search for text on the Clipboard, or to replace the found text with the contents of the Clipboard.


Click this button to search for text attributes (font, color, underlining etc.) and replace them with other attributes.


Click this button to remove all formatting specified below the Find or Replace box.


Click this button to specify the direction and scope of the search, whether you want VENTURA to search for whole words only and words with the same capitalization as the Find text.


Click this button to display a list of special characters you can search for, then click the character you want.


Options dialog box (Find and replace)
Options dialog box

Controls the direction and scope (the entire document or the current chapter only) of the search and whether VENTURA searches for whole words only and words with the same capitalization as the Find text.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Searches the current chapter only as opposed to all chapters in a multi-chapter document.


Searches from the beginning of the document or current chapter if Current Chapter is selected.


Searches backward toward the beginning of the document or current chapter if Current Chapter is selected. When VENTURA reaches the beginning of the chapter or document, it continues searching backward from the last page.


Gives the replacement text the same capitalization as the found text.


Searches for text with the same capitalization as the found text.


Searches for complete words not part of a larger word. For example, use this option to find the word "place" but not words containing "place" such as "replace" or "placement."


Find and Replace, Tags dialog box
Find and Replace, Tags

Finds and changes character and paragraph tags applied to text.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Click the tag you want to search for.


Click the tag you want to apply to the found text. To leave the text unchanged, click the tag you are searching for.


Click this button to find the next instance of the tag specified in the Find box.


Click this button to change the selected text's tag to the tag in the Replace box and find the next occurrence.


Click this button to find and replace all occurrences of the tag in the Find box with the tag in the Replace box.


Enable this option to search for and replace paragraph tags.


Enable this option to search for and replace character tags.


Insert Hidden Text dialog box


Insert Hidden Text dialog box

Enables you to insert text such as notes or comments that neither prints nor displays except in Copy Editor view where it appears preceded by the code <$!.

Note

·	Hidden text appears as an icon in an Adobe Acrobat document. Clicking the icon displays the hidden text in a window.


Type text you don't want to appear when you print the document or view it in Page Layout view.


Footnote/Endnote dialog box (not in Rev A)


Manage Overrides dialog box


Manage Overrides dialog box

Controls overrides applied to the selected paragraph. You can copy the overrides to the paragraph's tag (or any other tag) so that they are no longer considered overrides. You can also remove the overrides so that only the formatting attributes in the tag remain.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Enable this option to remove attributes overriding the tag for the selected paragraph.


Enable this option to make the overrides part of the tag selected in the adjacent list.  When you choose a tag other than the tag applied to the selected paragraph, VENTURA transfers not only the overrides but the formatting attributes in the selected paragraph's tag as well. The tag you select will also be applied to the selected paragraph.


Click the tag you want to copy overrides to. This list becomes available when the Copy To option is enabled. See Help for the Copy To option for more information about copying overrides.


Check the attributes you want to remove or transfer and clear those you want to keep in the selected paragraph. To quickly check any unchecked attributes, click All.

When you are removing overrides, VENTURA will not change formatting in the tag. When you are copying overrides, however, VENTURA transfers every attribute that is checked, whether it's an override or part of the tag.


Overrides dialog box


Overrides dialog box

The selected paragraph contains formatting overrides. You can either reapply the paragraph's tag, which removes the overrides, or redefine the tag to include the overrides.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Reverts to the formatting defined in the paragraph's tag.


Redefines the tag to include the formatting overrides in the selected paragraph.


Links dialog box (appears to be Windows)


Uniform Fill dialog box

No Help button is dialog


Click the color model radio button to use a model for color editing. Color models are listed in the Model list box. Your choice of model is based on whether you are working with a drawing or an image. If you're working with an image, you choice is further limited by the image mode. When you choose a model, number boxes for the model's digital components are displayed to the left of the Model drop-down list.

For more information about color models, click


Click the palettes radio button to use a color matching palette. Palettes are listed in the Type list box. You may want to use the palettes if you are working with spot or process color systems by DIC, DuPont, FOCOLTONE, PANTONE, TOYO, or TRUMATCH, or the PANTONE high-fidelity color system. By using these palettes along with a color reference book, you can be reasonably certain of how the colors will look when printed. The Uniform palette is also provided, with colors based on the RGB color model.

For more information about color palettes, click


Click the mixers radio button to use either the Color Blend or the Mixing area to create a custom color. The mixing modes are listed in the Mode list box.

For more information about color mixers, click


Click the mixers radio button to use either the Color Blend or the Mixing area to create a custom color. The mixing modes are listed in the Mode list box.

For more information about color mixers, click


Lists the color models, color matching palettes, and mixing modes, depending on the radio button that you enable. The label changes to "Model" for color models, "Type" for palettes, and "Mode" for mixers. Click this box to display the available models, types, and modes.


The uniform palette offers 255 standard RGB colors for quick selection. Colors are expressed as RGB values to the right of the Type box. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name through the Color Options menu (the color names correspond to the R, G, and B values).


Offers colors that are available through the DIC Color Guide, DIC Color Guide Part II, and DIC Traditional Colors of Japan. Colors in these palettes are created by mixing DIC brand inks. Reproduction through Corel applications is achieved through the CMYK color space. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu. Swatches are identified by palette and color ID code:

·	DIC id# for DIC Color Guide

·	DIC Part II id# for DIC Color Guide Part II

·	DIC Traditional id# for DIC Traditional Colors of Japan


Offers colors that are available through the DuPont Spectramaster solid color library. This library was developed to provide a paint color selection and matching tool for industrial coatings and colorants. Colors are based on L*a*b* and are converted to RGB for display and CMYK for printing. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


Offers colors that are available through the FOCOLTONE color system. Colors are based on CMYK, and therefore do not add additional color separation plates. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


Offers colors from the PANTONE Spot Color system (also known as the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM®). You define tint through the Tint Number Box, ranging from 0 (lightest) to 100 (darkest) to control saturation. You can also define PostScript options. Since spot colors correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based, each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate. In Corel DRAW, you can use spot colors freely. In PHOTO-PAINT, you can use spot colors only in CMYK images to affect duotones. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


Offers colors from the PANTONE Process Color System®, which is based on the CMYK color model. The first 2,000 colors are two-color combinations; the remainder are three- and four-color combinations. This system is based on the CMYK color model, so colors do not add additional color separation plates. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


Offers colors from  the TOYO 88 Color Finder system. The range of colors offered here includes those created using TOYO process inks and those that are reproduced using TOYO standard inks. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


Offers from the TRUMATCH color system. This system is based on the CMYK color model, so colors do not add additional color separation plates. Colors are organized by hue (red to violet), saturation (deep to pastel), and brightness (adding or removing black). Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


Offers colors from the PANTONE® Hexachrome Color System which uses six process inks to produce high-fidelity color. Using six inks yields a range of color unattainable by CMYK inks. Consult with your service bureau or commercial printer about using high-fidelity color since special equipment is required to produce it For more information, click


The Reference Color swatch shows the color of the selected object when you open the dialog box, or the last color placed in the reference area from the color models, color matching palettes, mixers, or the custom palette. This swatch remains unchanged while you edit color, until you update it by clicking the Update Reference Color Button.


The New Color swatch shows the color of the selected object when you open the dialog box, or the last color selected from the color models, color matching palettes, mixers, or the custom palette. If this color is not available in the color gamut of the delivery system (which is usually your printer), the Printable Color swatch appears below it to show the color you'll print in place of the New Color. You can update the New Color with the Printable Color by clicking the Update New Color button.


Click this button to use the New Color as the Reference Color. This is useful when you are matching colors and wish to update your reference point. To swap the Reference and New Colors, use the Color Options, Swap Color menu selection.


Click the update new color button to use the Printable Color as the New Color, which you can then edit. This button appears only if the New Color is not available in the printer's color space and a Printable Color swatch is displayed.


The color component fields show the numeric values of the selected color. These fields are accessible when you have edited the New Color through a color model or a mixer. They are inaccessible (grayed out) if the color is selected from a color matching palette. Components change for each color model and palette selected. For colors in the custom palette, the components correspond to the color model or color matching palette through which the color was edited.


Cyan, Magenta, Yellow. Use this color model if the drawing or image will be produced on a CMY device, such as a 3-ink printer. C, M, and Y values range between 0 and 255. The three-dimensional visual selector defines the C, M, and Y values; the vertical visual selector scales all current C, M, and Y values geometrically.


Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black ("K" is used to indicate black). Use this color model to use CMYK values on a percentage scale (0 to 100). Color values correspond to CMYK swatches. The three-dimensional visual selector defines the level of cyan, magenta, and yellow; the vertical visual selector defines the level of black. This model is based on the printer primary colors.


Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black ("K" is used to indicate black). Use this color model to use CMYK values on a computer-based scale (0 to 255). The three-dimensional visual selector defines the level of cyan, magenta, and yellow; the vertical visual selector defines the level of black. This model is based on the printer primary colors.


Red, Green, Blue. Use this color model if the drawing or image will be produced on a radiant device, such as a computer monitor or a television screen, or on a transparent media such as slides. R, G, and B values range between 0 and 255. The three-dimensional visual selector defines the R, G, and B values; the vertical Visual adjusts color brightness by scaling all current R, G, and B values geometrically. This model is based on the light primary colors.


Hue, Saturation, Brightness. An alternative to RGB. Hue determines color, saturation determines color depth, and brightness determines the percentage of white used to make the color lighter or darker. This model is the closest approximation to how we perceive color. There are two visual selectors. The circular selector is for hue (0 to 360), and the triangular selector is used to simultaneously adjust saturation (0 to 100) and brightness. Also known as HSV (hue, saturation, value). The HLS color model is a variant.


Hue, Lightness, Saturation. A variation on HSB and an alternative to RGB. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, etc.), lightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color), and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense). The circular visual selector defines the H value (0 to 360) and the S value (0 to 100); the vertical visual selector defines the L value (0 to 100).


The color model developed by Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage (CIE) based on three parameters: lightness (L*), green to red chromaticity (a*), and blue to yellow chromaticity (b*). The square two-dimensional visual selector defines the a* and b* coordinates from -60 to 60; the vertical visual selector defines the L* value from 0 to 100. This model is device-independent, and encompasses the color gamuts of both the CMYK and the RGB color models.


YIQ is the color model used in television broadcast systems (North American video standard - NTSC). Colors are split into a luminance value (Y) and two chromaticity values (I and Q). On a color monitor, all three components are visible; on a monochrome monitor, only the Y component is visible. The square two-dimensional visual selector defines the I and Q values, and the vertical visual selector defines the Y value. All values are scaled from 0 to 255. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the Y component of the splitting process produces a grayscale image that is often superior to results obtained with a grayscale conversion using the Convert To command from the Image menu.


Use grayscale to choose from 256 shades of gray. Each color is defined as a single value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white). A single visual selector is used. A grayscale value can also be thought of in terms of the other color models: in RGB, a grayscale value corresponds to equal amounts of all RGB colors; in CMYK, a grayscale value corresponds to zero C, M, and Y values with a positive K value; in HSB, a grayscale value corresponds to zero H and S values with a positive B value.


The color name field shows the name of the selected color, if a name is available. Color names are shown only for the color matching palettes, the custom palette, and the color buttons for the Color Blend (which correspond to swatches in the custom palette). Use this field to name a new color or to rename the selected color in the custom palette. Colors in the color matching palettes cannot be renamed.


Shows the colors in the current custom palette. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. You can create new custom palettes and save them to create a library of palettes.

For more information about custom palettes, click


Click this button to open the Color Options menu. Use this menu to add the selected color to the custom palette, to swap the Reference Color with the Selected Color, and to use the features of the color model, palettes, and mixers.

The Use Printer Circuits command controls whether CMYK color is treated as printer dependent or independent. When treated as printer dependent, a printer profile is used for the conversion and gamut mapping. When disabled, CMYK is treated as an independent color, so conversions to/from CMYK have no gamut mapping. Printer profiles are created using a Color Management System included with VENTURA. For more information, click [image].


Click this button to open the Palette Options menu. Use this menu to rename or delete the selected color on the custom palette, to open and save the custom palette, and to start a new custom palette.


Click the Search field to find a color in the palette using the color name. You can search on a full or partial name. Color names consist of two parts: the first is the palette name, and the second is the color name or code. A search can be done using only the color name or code.


Use the color blend to create a four-way blend of color and choose from the range of color variations. Grids are square, ranging in size from 3x3 to 25x25. Smaller grids produce more distinct colors while larger grids produce more subtle color variations. Colors are selected from the custom palette and can be mapped to the CMYK, RGB, and HSB color models.


The color button displays the color chosen for this corner of the grid. Click the color button in each corner to display the custom palette from which you can choose a new color.


Click this button to enable or disable automatic blending. When this option is enabled, colors are automatically blended in the grid when a new color is selected in the color boxes. When it is disabled, colors are not automatically blended in the grid.


Use the mixing area to mix colors from the color models, palettes, or color blend. The color in the New Color swatch is the active color in the mixing area.


Use the paint brush to apply color to the mixing area. Adjust the blend value using the Blend number box (this is a means of controlling color saturation). You can adjust the size and texture of the brush through the Color Options button.


 Used to pick up color from the mixing area.


The Printable Color swatch shows the color that will print if the color in the New Color swatch is not possible in the printer's color space. The gamut mapping used to do this is determined using the Color Manager. Change the printable color to the new color by clicking the Update New Color button. When the edited color does fall within the printer's color space, this color does not display.


Fountain fills
Fountain fill dialog box

A fountain fill is a progression of colors following a circular, square, straight, or radial path. You can have a direct blend from one color to another, a rainbow of several colors, or a set of color peaks and highlights. You can use pre-generated fountain fills to create neon tubes, metal cylinders, and a variety of similar effects.

You can change the number of color steps in a fill to give it a smoother or rougher appearance. However, since a large number of steps is slow to draw, you might want to limit how the fill appears on screen and how it prints.

·	The Preview Fountain Steps option in the Display section of the Options dialog box sets the number of steps that are drawn on screen.

·	The Fountain Steps option in the Options section of the Print Options dialog box sets the number of steps that are printed.

·	The Steps option in the Fountain Fill dialog box overrides these two settings when unlocked (see Related Topics).

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

·	Applying fountain fills to large quantites of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.

 Related Topics


Displays the current fountain fill type. Click in this field to choose one of the four fountain fill types.

A Linear fountain fill changes color in one direction. A Radial fountain fill changes color in concentric circles from the center of the object outwards. A Conical fountain fill radiates from the center of the object like rays of light. A Square fountain fill changes color in concentric squares from the center of the object outwards.


Repositions the center of a radial, conical, or square fountain fill so that it no longer coincides with the center of the object. Negative values shift it to the left; positive values shift it to the right.


Repositions the center of a radial, conical, or square fountain fill so that it no longer coincides with the center of the object. Negative values shift the center down, positive values shift it up.


Changes the angle of linear, conical, and square fountain fills. Positive values rotate the fill counter-clockwise; negative values rotate it clockwise.


Changes the number of bands used to display and print the fountain fill. For a smoother gradation, increase the number of steps.


Toggles the lock on the Steps box.


Increases the amount of From and To color in your fountain fill. The ends of a fountain fill will often be obscured by the edges of circular and irregular objects. Padding the edges will allow more of the end colors to show.

The Edge Pad option is not available for conical fills.


Previews the selected fountain fill.

You can change the fill's orientation by dragging the pointer in the preview box. Left-click to move the center of radial, conical and square fills. Right-click to change the angle of linear, conical, and square fills. Holding down the CTRL key while dragging constrains your adjustments to 15-degree increments.


These controls let you modify the intermediate colors of your fill.


Determines the intermediate fill colors from a straight line beginning at the From color and continuing across the color wheel to the To color.

This option produces a color series composed of blends of your From and To colors.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a starting color for your fill.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose an ending color for your fill.


Displays controls to set the starting and ending colors of your fill, and the color wheel path that the intermediated colors follow. You can create a direct blend containing only two colors, or a multi-colored rainbow blend.


Determines the intermediate colors from a counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.


Determines the intermediate colors from a clockwise path around the color wheel.


Shows the color path that determines your intermediate fill colors.


Adjusts the midpoint of the color blend.


Displays controls that let you manually determine the intermediate colors of your fountain fill. You can add up to 99 color markers to control your blend.


Shows the position of the current color marker. You can change a marker's position by editing its position value.


Opens a flyout from which you can change the current color.


Changes the current color. Click the color you want, or use the scroll bars to see more of the palette.


Previews your custom fountain fill. You can add, remove, or edit color markers by clicking in the marker bar just above the preview ribbon.


Shows the positions of your color markers. Each triangle marks a peak of color in your fountain fill. Once you have selected a color marker by clicking it, you can change its color with the on-screen palette.

You reposition a peak by dragging it along the marker bar, and you delete it by double-clicking. You can add a new peak by double-clicking a blank spot on the bar.


Displays a list of pregenerated fountain fills. You can save a modified fill by typing a name in this field and clicking the Add button.


Saves the current fountain fill. If you have created the fill from scratch, you must first type a name in the Presets field.


Deletes the selected fill from the Presets list.


Opens the PostScript Options Dialog Box, where you can adjust the halftone screen settings for spot colors.


PostScript Options dialog box

Controls halftone screens used to print a selected object's fill or outline. The effect of varying the halftone screen settings will not appear on screen, but they will show up when printed.

All other objects except those whose screen settings you specify in this dialog box print using the screen settings specified in the Print Options dialog box.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Lists the types of screens by the shape of the halftone dots. The Default type uses the printer's default screen setttings, unless overridden in the Print dialog box. A dot screen with 60 lines per inch at 45 degrees are typical screen settings for a 300 dpi laser printer.


Controls the resolution of the screen. The lower the frequency, the more apparent the screen will appear when printed. A 60-line screen (LPI) will appear quite coarse. 80 to 100 is suitable for imaging art to be printed on newsprint. Magazines use a 133- or 150-line screen. High quality photography books use up to a 300-line screen.


Controls the angle of the screen. Screen angle does not change when you rotate or skew an object.


Pattern fills

Pattern fills are pre-generated, symmetrical images that lend themselves to tiling. You can fill an object completely with one image, but you would more often use a series of repeating images to form a tiled fill. You can import bitmaps or vector pictures to use as pattern fills, and you can create simple two-color bitmap patterns using the built-in pattern editor.

For information on a specific type of pattern fill, click the appropriate button:

Two-color bitmap patterns

 	Full-color bitmap patterns

Vector patterns


Two-color bitmap patterns
Two-color bitmap patterns dialog box

A two-color bitmap is a very simple picture composed of only "on" and "off" pixels. There are no colors in the bitmap except for the two you define. The pre-generated patterns are designed so that they will interlock to fill an object with seamless tiles.

You can import an external bitmap to use as a two-color pattern, providing it is composed of just two colors. To import a multi-colored pattern, use the Full-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box (see Related Topics for instructions).

Transformations applied to objects with two-color bitmap pattern fills do not affect the pattern. For example, if you rotate the object, the orientation of the pattern remains constant. However, you can have the designs maintain their aspect ratio when you scale or stretch the object.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

·	Applying pattern fills to large quantites of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.

 Related Topics


Opens the Two-Color Pattern Editor, where you can create two-color patterns.


Opens the Import dialog box, where you can import a graphic to use as your pattern.


Permanently removes the current pattern from the pattern list.


Previews the current pattern. Click the preview box to display a list of available patterns.


Sets the tile size to 0.25 x 0.25 inches, or to 25% if Scale pattern with object is enabled.


Sets the tile size to 0.50 x 0.50 inches, or to 50% if Scale pattern with object is enabled.


Sets the tile size to 1.00 x 1.00 inches, or to 100% if Scale pattern with object is enabled.


These controls let you choose the foreground and background colors of your pattern.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new background color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new foreground color.


Opens the PostScript Options Dialog Box, where you can adjust the halftone screen settings for spot colors. This button is only active when there is a spot color selected for both the background and foreground.


Displays controls for editing the pattern's tiling properties.


Sets the size of your pattern tiles. You can choose one of the pre-set sizes, or enter custom dimensions.


The width of each tile. You can specify new tile widths from 0.1 to 15 inches.


The height  of each tile. You can specify new tile heights from 0.1 to 15 inches.


Displays the units you are using to measure the tile. Click in this field to display a list of available units. The value is automatically converted when you change units.


Toggles between absolute and proportional tile sizes. When the option is enabled, the tiles will grow and shrink with the object.


Alters the pattern tiles so that they seem to be continuous.


Sets the offset of the first tile (and therefore, the rest of the pattern) relative to the top right-hand corner of the object. If you want the pattern to start flush with the corner, set these two values to zero.


Sets the horizontal position of the first pattern tile relative to the left side of the object.


Sets the vertical position of the first pattern tile relative to the top of the object.


Shifts rows or columns of tiles so that the pattern is staggered, rather than continuous.


Shifts alternating rows of tiles by the amount specified.


Shifts alternating columns of tiles by the amount specified.


Shifts alternating rows or columns by the amount specified.


Two-Color Bitmap Pattern Editor

This dialog box lets you create your own two-color bitmap patterns. A two-color bitmap is a very simple picture composed of only "on" and "off" pixels. There are no colors in the bitmap except for the two you define in the Two-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box.

Remember that two-color bitmap patterns are meant to be tiled. If the pattern you create is not symmetrical, it might not look very good as a tiled fill.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

·	Applying pattern fills to large quantites of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.

 Related Topics


Displays a magnified, editable image of your pattern as you draw it. Left-click to add a colored area to the grid, right-click to erase.


Changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 16 x 16 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolutions.


Changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 32 x 32 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolutions.


Changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 64 x 64 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolutions.


Changes the pen size to a 1 grid square.


Changes the pen size to a 2 x 2 square.


Changes the pen size to a 4 x 4 square.


Changes the pen size to an 8 x 8 square.


Vector patterns
Vector pattern dialog box

A vector pattern is a picture composed of lines and fills, instead of just dots of color like a bitmap. These pictures are smoother and more complex than bitmap images, and are generally easier to manipulate.

You can import any CorelDRAW file to use as a vector pattern.

Transformations applied to objects with vector pattern fills do not affect the pattern. For example, if you rotate the object, the orientation of the pattern remains constant. However, you can have the designs maintain their aspect when you scale or stretch the object.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

·	Applying pattern fills to large quantites of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.

 Related Topics


Opens the Load dialog box, where you can load a new vector pattern file.


Remaining controls aliased to ids for Two Color Bitmap pattern db controls.


Texture fills
Texture fill dialog box

A texture fill is a fractally-generated picture that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. There are more than three hundred pre-generated textures, and each texture has a set of parameters that you can change to create millions of variations.

Texture fills add significantly to the size of your file and the time it takes to print. As such, you should avoid filling numerous or large objects with them.

When you rotate an object with a texture fill, the fill does not rotate. Re-sizing an object with a texture fill can distort the texture. To restore its appearance, apply the texture to the object a second time.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

·	You can use colors from any color model or palette for texture fills. However, if you apply a Spot color to a texture fill, it is converted to a Process color (CMYK) when you create color separations. Since the conversion may not reproduce exactly the same color, and since you would necessarily have four color plates in a CMYK separation, it's best to apply Process colors to texture fills.

·	Applying texture fills to large quantites of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.

 Related Topics


Shows the current texture library. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of available texture libraries.


Opens the Save Texture As dialog box, where you can add a new texture to one of your libraries, or overwrite an existing texture with the current one.

You cannot overwrite textures in the Style Library, but you can modify them and then save the modified textures in other libraries.


Deletes the selected texture. You can delete textures from any Library except the Styles library.


Shows a list of the textures in the current texture library. Click the texture you want, or use the scrollbars to see the entire list.


Displays a preview of the texture with the current parameters. Click the Preview button to update the preview after making changes to the texture parameters.


Updates the texture preview to reflect any changes you made to the texture parameters.

If you have not made any changes, the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Click a parameter's Lock icon to lock or unlock it.


Opens the Texture Options dialog box, where you can set the resolution and maximum tile width of your texture fill.


Lists parameters for the current texture. Changing one or more of these parameters alters the appearance of the texture.

To see the effect of your changes to the texture parameters, click the Preview button. If you have not made any changes since the last time you updated the preview, clicking the Preview button randomizes all unlocked parameters. Click a parameter's Lock icon to lock or unlock it.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven color parameters that control the different shades used to create a texture. To change a color, click the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not changed when you click the Preview button.


Texture Options dialog box

No Help button in dialog


Sets the resolution at which your pattern will print.


Sets the maximum width of your pattern at full resolution. Larger tile widths take more memory to draw.


The amount of memory your bitmap will use at its maximum tile width. Reduce the Maximum Tile Width value to conserve memory.


Returns the texture options to their default settings.


Save Texture As dialog box

No Help button in dialog


The name of your texture. It can be up to 32 characters long, including spaces.

You cannot save new textures or overwrite existing textures in the Style Library.


The name of the library where you want to store your texture. It can be up to 32 characters long, including spaces.

You cannot save new textures or overwrite existing textures in the Style Library.


Full-color bitmap patterns
Full-color bitmap pattern dialog box

A full-color bitmap is a regular color picture such as you might get with an electronic photograph. They can vary widely in complexity, and it is best to use simpler bitmaps for fill patterns, since complex ones will be very memory-intensive and slow to draw. The pre-generated patterns are designed so that they will interlock to fill an object with seamless tiles.

You can import external bitmaps to use as full-color bitmap patterns. If you want to import a simple two-color or black and white bitmap, you might want to use the Two-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box (see Related Topics for instructions).

Transformations applied to objects with full-color bitmap pattern fills do not affect the pattern. For example, if you rotate the object, the orientation of the pattern remains constant. However, you can have the designs maintain their aspect when you scale or stretch the object.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

·	Applying pattern fills to large quantites of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.

 Related Topics


PostScript textures
PostScript texture dialog box

The PostScript Texture Fill dialog box fills the selected object with a special type of pattern fill designed using the PostScript language. Adjustable parameters allow you to change the pattern's appearance.

Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to print or to update on screen. Therefore, PostScript fills display as the letters "PS" rather than the actual texture. The PostScript Texture dialog box contains a section where you can preview your texture.

When printing color separations, PostScript textures print as black and opaque; objects behind the texture will not show through even if you have made the texture transparent. If you print directly to a color printer, the background object will show through the transparent texture.

Textures may be exported in Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) format for use in other programs.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

·	PostScript fills print on any type of printer.

·	Applying texture fills to large quantites of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.

 Related Topics


Lists the available textures by name. Click a texture, or use the scroll bars to see the entire list.

Note: In the document window, PostScript textures are represented by the letters PS instead of the actual pattern.


Shows the current texture if the Preview fill check box is enabled or the name of the texture if the check box is disabled. Click Refresh to regenerate the texture after changing the parameters.

Note: Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to generate. In the document window, PostScript textures are represented by the letters PS instead of the actual pattern.


Enable this checkbox to display a sample of the texture. Disable it to display the name of the texture.


Regenerates the texture preview with the current parameters.

Note: Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to generate.


Lists parameters for the current texture. Changing one or more of these parameters alters the appearance of the texture. To see the effect of your changes to the texture parameters, enable Preview fill and click the Refresh button.


Change Default Fill dialog box

Changes the fill VENTURA applies to new frames or graphic objects you create in this session and in future sessions. The fill you select remains the default until you change it again.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Specify whether you want to change the default fill for new frames, new graphic objects, or both by enabling the corresponding check boxes.


Enable this check box to change the fill VENTURA applies to new frames you create.


Enable this check box to change the fill VENTURA applies to new graphic objects you draw.


This .RTF contains all the context-sensitive help for the commands and dialogs accessed from Ventura's File menu


menu commands


Creates a new document based on the default stylesheet and master page, or a built-in template.


Opens an existing document in a new window. You can quickly open one of the last documents you worked on by clicking its name at the bottom of the File menu.


Closes the active document without exiting Corel VENTURA.


Creates a new library. Libraries can contain items such as text, pictures, tags, and even entire chapters. You can move items from pages into an open library, from an open library onto pages, and between open libraries.


Opens an existing library. Libraries can contain items such as text, pictures, tags and even entire chapters. You can move items from pages into an open library, from an open library onto pages, and between open libraries.


Saves the active document with the name, and in the location specified, when the document was first saved. When you save document for the first time, the Save As dialog box appears, where you type name and choose location. If you want to rename or relocate document, use the Save As command or the Navigator in the Tools menu. By default, VENTURA makes backup copies of documents each time you save them, and autosaves at regular intervals while you're working on them. You can turn the backup and autosave features off using the Tools, Options command, although it is best to leave them on to save yourself from losing work.


Saves the active document with the name and the location you specify. By default, VENTURA makes backup copies of documents each time you save them, and autosaves at regular intervals while you're working on them. You can turn the backup and autosave features off using the Tools, Options command, although it is best to leave them on to save yourself from losing work.


Saves the current page as an Encapsulated PostScript picture, which you can then place in a document using the File, Import Picture command.


Imports text in many word processor file formats and from programs that save text in industry-standard ASCII, ANSI and RTF (Rich Text Format) format.


Imports pictures [image] illustrations, photographs, charts, etc.created with paint, draw, charting and scanning programs.


Exports selected text files in industry-standard ASCII, ANSI and RTF formats. When you export a text file, you have the option of retaining, or discarding, the formatting codes and other information VENTURA inserts in the text.


Saves a copy of the active document in an archive. For more information, click [image].


Opens an archived version of the active document. You can retrieve any archived version of a document, and you can compare them to see the changes that were made. For more information, click [image].


Opens a previously saved version of a document. You can retrieve any archived version of a document, and you can compare them to see the changes that were made. For more information, click [image].


Selects a TWAIN image input source such as Corel Image Source or HP's Deskscan II. The list of available sources depends on the scanner driver(s) installed on your system.


Accesses external devices and control input devices, such as scanners or video capture boards, without leaving VENTURA.


Opens a scanned image from a file so that you can apply color correction to it.


Allows you to publish your VENTURA document to HTML (HyperText Markup Language), suitable for the World Wide Web. You can have your document automatically converted, or you can customize the conversion as required.


Converts the active document into a portable electronic document. VENTURA's built-in support for the two leading portable document technologies, Adobe Acrobat and Envoy, enables you to create an electronic document complete with text, graphics, and photos that anyone with the appropriate viewing software can read.


Saves the current document in a format suitable for the World Wide Web. Use this command instead of the Publish As, HTML command when you want to preserve the look of the VENTURA document. For more information, click [image].


Displays printing options and prints all or parts of the active document.


Provides a list of installed printers you can use to print and access to printing options for those printers.


Shows how the active document will look when you print it. Use the Print Preview toolbar and menu commands to set printing options before you print.


Reduces printing time by printing the document minus complex fills such as fountains and with image headers (bitmaps) instead of EPS pictures. If an EPS picture lacks a header, a gray rectangle prints instead of the picture. Use Quick Print to produce a proof copy to check the layout of you document before printing the final version. When using Quick Print to print multiple pages, all pages print with the same orientation (portrait or landscape) as the current page or the first page in the range you specify. If the document contains a mix of portrait and landscape pages, use the Print command to ensure that they print with correct orientation.


Attaches the document to an electronic mail message (email) or sends it to a fax machine. You can also use this command to copy a document to a file folder. To email or copy the entire document all of its component files must be embedded rather than linked.


Closes Corel VENTURA.


Displays the filenames of the last four documents opened. To open a document, display the File menu, then type the document's number, or click its name.


New Ventura Publication dialog


New Ventura Document dialog box
New Ventura Publication dialog box

Enables you to create a new document based on the professionally-designed templates supplied with Corel VENTURA. The Default.vp template is an all-purpose template suitable for any type of document. You can alter the Default template (or any of the other templates) to change the default formatting of documents that use it.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Click a tab, then click the name of the document you want to use as a template for your new document. To create a new document from scratch, click Default.vp in the General tab.

To add your own documents to those listed here, save them in the Ventura/Samples folders. Those saved directly in the Samples folder appear on the General tab. If you create a new folder in the Sample folder, the name of the folder appears as a separate tab.


Click to display large icons.


Click to display small icons.


Click to display details such as file size.


Enable this option to use an existing document as a template for the new document. Click a tab, then click the name of the document you want to use as a template. If the document does not appear in this dialog box use Browse button to locate it. For more information, click [image].


Enable this option to use the content and formatting of an existing document as the starting point for the new document.


Click this button to locate the document you want to use as a template for the new document.


Select Components from dialog box

Enables you to start a new document using some, or all, of the chapters, text files and pictures from another document.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enable the check box next to the items you want to include in the new document. Excluding a chapter automatically excludes the text and picture files in it.


Open dialog (all controls but three are CDRFLT)


Enable this check box to suppress the graphics in the file you are opening. This makes the document load faster. To display the graphics once the file is open, disable the Hide All Pictures command in the View menu.


Enable this option if you want VENTURA to alert you when a version 5.0 document saved in version 7 uses fonts not available on your system. The substitution of missing fonts for available ones still takes place provided PANOSE Font Matching is enabled in the Options, General dialog box (Tools menu).

For more information about PANOSE Font Matching click [image].


Enable this option to continue using the document's current master page rather than one in the new style sheet.


New Library dialog (CDRFLT's Save dialog)


Open Library dialog (CDRFLT's Open dialog)


Ventura Library dialog


VENTURA Library

The VENTURA Library stores items such as text, pictures, tags and tables and displays them as thumbnails. If you frequently use a particular item, add it to the library to make it available for placement in any document. You can build a library by dragging items from the following places:

•	a document

•	the Navigator

•	other libraries

•	certain dialog boxes, such as the Tags dialog box, which must be added to a menu using the Tools, Customize command.

•	the Windows Desktop or Explorer

When you add stylesheets, chapters or text or picture files stored in a library to a document you can maintain a link to the item. By linking the item, any changes you make to it will be reflected in every document with links to that item. For example, suppose you opened a Library and made changes to a stylesheet, which was linked to other documents. Because the stylesheet in the other documents is a linked copy of the first, the changes made to the first stylesheet are automatically updated in the others.

Right-clicking an item in the library displays commands for cutting, copying and deleting the item, and for attaching information to the item. The information can include a name to help you locate items as the library expands.

Other commands displayed by right-clicking the library background enable you to change the size of the thumbnail, sort the items by name, type, date and size and limit the display to certain types of items.


Save As dialog (CDRFLT)


Save Page As EPS dialog (CDRFLT)


Import Text dialog (CDRFLT)


Load Files into Chapter(s) dialog box


Load Files into Chapter(s) dialog box

Adds the imported files to selected chapters in the current document. This dialog box appears when you do not select a page, or frame, before clicking the Import command.

The files are added to the Files List in the specified chapter. To place the files on the page or in a frame, select the page or frame, then click the name of the file in the Files List.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Lists the names of the chapters in the current document. Click the chapters you want the file(s) to appear in. To add the file to multiple chapters, hold down the CTRL key as you click on each chapter.

The files are added to the Files List in the specified chapter. To place the files on the page or in a frame, select the page or frame then click the name of the file in the Files List.


Click this button to add the file to all chapters in the current document.

The files are added to the Files List in each chapter. To place them on the page or in a frame, select the page or frame, then click the name of the file in the Files List.


Import Picture dialog (CDRFLT)


Crop Image dialog box


Crop Image dialog box

The Crop Image dialog box allows you to crop an image before loading. The cropping is permanent and creates a new, smaller image.

•	For more information on the options included in this dialog box, use the What’s This? online Help tool.


These controls allow you to define and perfect the cropping area.


Displays the path, filename, and extension of the image.


Displays the image with a cropping box around it. Click and drag the nodes to perfect the size of the cropping box. Use the Hand tool to move the cropping box to a different part of the image.


Displays the height of the cropping box. To change the height, type in a value or adjust the existing one using the scroll arrows.


Defines the height of the cropping box. To adjust the height of the cropping box, type in a value or adjust the existing one using the scroll arrows.


Defines the height of the cropping box. To adjust the height of the cropping box, type in a value or adjust the existing one using the scroll arrows.


Displays the width of the cropping box. To change the width, type in a value or adjust the existing one using the scroll arrows.


Displays the height of the area to be cropped off. A larger value results in a smaller cropping box.


Displays the width of the area to be cropped off. A larger value results in a smaller cropping box.


Displays the width of the area to be cropped off. A larger value results in a smaller cropping box.


Displays the width of the area to be cropped off. A larger value results in a smaller cropping box.


Click to select the entire image.


Displays the unit of measurement used to calculate the size and position of the cropping box. To use another, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.


Displays the unit of measurement used to calculate the size and position of the cropping box. To use another, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.


Displays the size of the new, cropped image.


Displays the size of the new, cropped image.


Displays the size of the new, cropped image.


Resample dialog box


Resample dialog box

The Resample dialog box creates a new image, resampled to a smaller size.

•	For more information on the options included in this dialog box, use the What’s This? online Help tool.


Displays the path, filename, and extension of the image.


Displays the width of the image using the unit of measurement selected in the units box. You can adjust the width using either of two methods: you can type in a new value or use the scroll arrows to adjust the current value in the number box, or you can type in a value in the Percentage box. The change is reflected in both boxes.


Displays the width of the image using the unit of measurement selected in the units box. You can adjust the width using either of two methods: you can type in a new value or use the scroll arrows to adjust the current value in the number box, or you can type in a value in the Percentage box. The change is reflected in both boxes.


Displays the height of the image using the unit of measurement selected in the units box. You can adjust the height using either of two methods: you can type in a new value or use the scroll arrows to adjust the current value in the number box, or you can type in a value in the Percentage box. The change is reflected in both boxes.


Displays the height of the image using the unit of measurement selected in the units box. You can adjust the height using either of two methods: you can type in a new value or use the scroll arrows to adjust the current value in the number box, or you can type in a value in the Percentage box. The change is reflected in both boxes.


Displays the current width of the image as a percentage of its original width.


Displays the current height of the image as a percentage of its original height.


Displays the current width of the image as a percentage of its original width.


Displays the current height of the image as a percentage of its original height.


Displays the image's current width.


Displays the image's current height.


Displays the unit of measurement used to calculate image height and width.


Displays the unit of measurement used to calculate image height and width.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the vertical resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the vertical resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the vertical resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the original horizontal resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi).


Displays the original vertical resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi).


Enable this check box to force the horizontal and vertical resolution values to be identical. When you enter a value in one box, the other changes automatically.


Displays the original file size of the image in bytes.


Displays the size the file will be after resampling.


Displays the original file size of the image in bytes.


Displays the size the file will be after resampling.


These controls allow you to change the resolution of your image.


Export Text dialog (all controls but one are CDRFLT)


Export without VEnable this check box to export a copy of the text file without Corel VENTURA's formatting information and the codes it inserts to mark the location of index entries, footnote references, frame anchors and other items. The markup codes in the original file remain intact.


New Archive Properties dialog (Corel Versions help)


Version Control, Retrieve Current dialog (Corel Versions help)


Choose Version to Retrieve dialog (Corel Versions help)


Select Source dialog (TWAIN)


Acquire dialog (TWAIN)


Publish as HTML dialog


Publish as HTML dialog box

Converts your document in a format suitable for the World Wide Web. You can let VENTURA convert the document for you, or you can customize the conversion by specifying how text formatting in the document is translated.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item.

 Related Topics


Enter the filename you want to save the HTML document with or click the button to specify a location and filename.


Enable this check box to have VENTURA convert your document into the closest HTML approximation.


Enable this check box to display the converted document in your Web browser when you click Publish.


Click this button to show or hide the HTML Setup controls used to customize the conversion to HTML format.


Click this button to publish your HTML document using the conversion options you've specified.


Disable the Auto HTML Tags check box, and then click this button if you want to customize the mapping of VENTURA tags to HTML tag.


Click this button to specify how you want to convert pictures in the document.


Click this button to specify how you want to convert the Table of Contents, cross-references, and index in the document.


Click this button to further customize the conversion and to include additional information in the resulting HTML document such as the document's address (i.e., URL) on the World Wide Web.


Click this button to use the HTML conversion information from another document as the basis for publishing the active document. You must have the other document open to proceed with the setup.


Click this button to view information about the composition of the VENTURA document you are converting to HTML format.


Specify whether you want to convert the entire document to HTML format or the current page or chapter only.


HTML Text Conversion Rules dialog box

Maps (matches) tags in the VENTURA document with HTML tags allowing you to control the formatting of text in the HTML document. You can also use this dialog box to:

•	specify the font attributes and alignment of text in the HTML document,

•	format list

•	add ruling lines or pictures above/below paragraphs

•	add icons on the same line as the first or last line of paragraphs

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Select the type of VENTURA tags (paragraph or character) you want to match to HTML tags.


Choose the HTML tag you want to map to the VENTURA tag selected from the list below.


Lists the names of the paragraph or character tags in the VENTURA document and the HTML tag they are currently mapped to. To change the mapping, select a tag in the Tag Name column, then click a tag in the Main HTML tag list.


Click this button to change the HTML paragraph attributes.


Click this button to undo changes to selected tag's mapping.


Click this button to remove all current HTML tag assignments.


Displays the formatting attributes currently defined in the HTML tag. You can change these attributes using the Attributes button.


Paragraph HTML Properties, Font dialog box
Paragraph HTML Properties, Font

Sets the font attributes for the HTML tag selected in the Text HTML Formatting dialog box.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enable the Absolute button to set the font size of the HTML tag to one of seven browser-dependent sizes. A value of 1 displays text using the browser's smallest font size; a value of 7 uses the largest font size.


Enable the Relative to Base button to base the font size of the selected HTML tag on the browser-dependent size you designate as the base font. The value you select from the list sets the size of the text relative to the base font. Choosing +1 for example, selects a size that's one size larger than the base font size. You specify which of the seven sizes is the base size via the Options button in the Publish as HTML dialog box.

Specifying relative font sizes for all the HTML tags, enables you to change the font sizes in your entire HTML document by changing the base font size.


Enable this button to set the font size of the selected HTML tag to the current base font size. You specify which of the seven sizes is the base size via the Options button in the Publish as HTML dialog box.


Specify the font attributes you want in the selected HTML tag.


Enable the Font check box, then choose the font you want the selected HTML tag to use. If you disable the check box, the browser will determine the font text formatted with the selected tag displays in.


Enable the Color check box, then click the color button followed by the color you want the HTML tag to use. If you disable the check box, the browser will determine the color text formatted with the selected tag displays in.


Paragraph HTML Properties, Align/Space dialog box
Paragraph HTML Properties, Align/Space

Sets the horizontal alignment and spacing for the HTML tag selected in the Text HTML Formatting dialog box.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Specify the paragraph alignment you want for the selected HTML tag.


Specify whether you want a blank line inserted above and/or below paragraphs formatted with the selected HTML tag. Adding blank lines between paragraphs can make the document easier to read.


Paragraph HTML Properties, Ruling Lines dialog box
Paragraph HTML Properties, Ruling Lines

Adds or removes ruling lines or pictures used to delineate areas of your HTML document.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enable the Above check box to add a ruling line above the paragraph.


Select a horizontal alignment for the ruling line.


Enable the height and/or the width check boxes, and enter value in the text boxes.

Height refers to the thickness of the ruling line, and is specified in pixels.

The width refers to how long the ruling line is; width can be specified in terms of the percentage of the page covered by the line (for example, 50% would mean that the ruling line was half the width of the page), or it can be specify as an exact width in pixels.


Enable this check box to apply 3D shading to the horizontal rule.


Enable the Above or Below check box, and then enable this check box to use a graphic as a ruling line. Enter the filename of the graphic in the text box, or click the browse button to find a JPG or GIF file.


Enable this check box to include a ruling line below the paragraph.


Paragraph HTML Properties, Icons dialog box
Paragraph HTML Properties, Icons

Adds an icon to the beginning and/or end of paragraphs formatted with the selected HTML tag.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enable this check box to add an icon at the beginning of the paragraph.


Enable the Icon check box, then type the icon's location and filename in the File box, or click the Browse button to find the folder which contains the icon.


Enable this check box to add an icon at the end of the paragraph.


Paragraph HTML Properties, List Items dialog box
Paragraph HTML Properties, List Items

Changes the formatting of paragraphs formatted with the <LI> List Item tag. You must select the <LI> tag in the Text HTML Formatting dialog box before you can change the formatting.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Specify which level in the list you want to format.


Enable this check box to remove spaces at the beginning of each paragraph in the list.

Note: Because HTML does not support tabs, those in the VENTURA document are converted to spaces.


Enable this button to add a bullet before each paragraph in the list. The browser used to view the HTML document determines which character or symbol is used for the bullet.


Enable this button to number the paragraphs in the list. Choose a numbering format from the Numbering list.


Enable the Numbered List button, and then select the type of numbering to apply to the list.


Paragraph HTML Properties, Custom Tags dialog box
Paragraph HTML Properties, Custom Tags

Allows you to include additional HTML tags not available in VENTURA. Add the tag in this dialog box, and then specify where it should be placed with respect to the paragraph text. When your HTML document is opened with a browser that recognizes this custom tag, the characteristics will be used; otherwise, the tag will be ignored.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Type the opening tag of the custom tag pair.


Type the closing tag of the custom tag pair.


Specify where the custom tag pair should occur with respect to the paragraph tags.


HTML Graphics dialog box

Determines if and how graphics (pictures) in the VENTURA document display in the HTML document. By default, VENTURA embeds graphics in your HTML document, converting them to JPEG format. If you prefer, you can convert the graphics to GIF format or leave them out.

You also have the option of linking to graphics using text or thumbnail links, rather than embedding them. If you have large graphics, linking to them reduces the time required to download the file. Readers can still view the graphics by clicking the text or thumbnail.

You can also specify the text you want to display in your HTML document in the event that a browser cannot display a particular graphic.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enable this check box to include the graphics in your VENTURA document in your HTML document.


Enable the Publish Graphics check box, then select a file type to which your graphics will be converted. GIF graphics generally display faster than JPEG graphics, whereas JPEG will compress the graphic to a smaller size.


Enable this check box to copy linked GIF or JPEG files to the HTML directory with no processing. Any scaling you perform in VENTURA will have no effect. Embedded graphics and file formats other than GIF or JPEG are not effected.


Enable the Publish Graphics check box, then specify how you want pictures to appear in the HTML document. You can:

•	embed the graphic as a full-size inline image (default)

•	display a thumbnail (miniature), which readers can click to display the graphic at full size

•	use a text hotspot to access the graphic (which is stored in a separate file)


Specify the text to be displayed if the graphic is unavailable. Enter the appropriate phrase.


Specify the default width of the border surrounding a graphic, in pixels.


Specify the amount of space placed above and below the graphic, in pixels.


Specify the amount of space placed on each side of the graphic, in pixels.


To specify thumbnail size as a percentage of the original graphic size, enable the Publish Graphics check box and then select this button. Enter the percentage in the box provided.


To specify an exact thumbnail size, enable the Publish Graphics check box, and then select this button. Enter the Vertical and Horizontal measurements, in pixels, in the boxes provided.


HTML Links Options, Main TOC dialog box
HTML Links Options, Main TOC

Converts the table of contents in the VENTURA document (if it has one) into a list of hyperlinks and sets the format and background of the list.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Tip

•	You can have the table of contents display in a frame beside the main text of the HTML document or on its own page. Indicate your preference via the Options button in the Publish as HTML dialog box. Keep in mind that not all Web browsers support frames. The frames feature is unavailable when converting single pages or single chapters to HTML format.

 Related Topics


Enable this check box and select the table of contents to include as a list of hyperlinks in your HTML document. For more information about hyperlinks, click [image].


Specify whether you want the table of contents in the HTML document formatted as a numbered or bulleted list.


Enable the Color button to add a color background to the table of contents in the HTML document. Click the color button and select the color you want.


Enable this button to use a graphic (picture) as the background for the table of contents in the HTML documents. Type the graphic's location and filename or click the Browse button to find it.


HTML Links Options, Index/Cross-references dialog box
HTML Links Options, Index/Cross-references

Converts the index and cross-references in the VENTURA document into hyperlinks.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Tip

•	You can have the index display in a frame beside the main text of the HTML document or on its own page(s). Indicate your preference via the Options button in the Publish as HTML dialog box. Keep in mind that not all Web browsers support frames. The frames feature is unavailable when converting single pages or single chapters to HTML format.

 Related Topics


Enable this check box to convert the document's index into a list of hyperlinks in the HTML document. For more information about hyperlinks, click [image].


Enable this button to convert cross-references in the VENTURA document to hyperlinks. For more information about hyperlinks, click [image].


Enable the Create HTML Index check box and select the index file you want to include as a list of hyperlinks in your HTML document. For more information about hyperlinks, click [image].


HTML Options, General dialog box
HTML Options, General

Controls whether the table of contents, index and the list of chapters and figures (pictures) displays in frames or on a page with the main text of the HTML document. Displaying these lists in frames keeps them visible, allowing readers to move through the document more easily. When displayed on a page, the reader must use the browser's navigation tools (e.g., Back/Forward buttons) to return to the lists.

You can also use this dialog box to map font sizes in the VENTURA document to the seven font sizes HTML supports. The actual size varies depending on the browser used to view the document. For example, the largest font size (size 7) might be 36 points in one browser and 30 points in another. Mapping occurs when you use the automatic conversion to translate a VENTURA document into its HTML equivalent.

If you choose to customize the conversion process, you can designate one of seven HTML font sizes as the base font size and then set the font sizes in each of the HTML tags relative to it. Specifying font sizes for all the HTML tags this way, enables you to change the font sizes in the entire HTML document by changing the size of the base font.

Note

•	If the browser does not support frames, the table of contents and other items will display on pages.

 Related Topics


Enable this check box to display the table of contents, index and other lists in the HTML document in frames instead of on the page. Displaying these lists in frames keeps them visible, allowing readers to move through the document more easily.

Note: The frames feature is unavailable when converting single pages or single chapters to HTML format.


If you choose to customize the HTML conversion process, you can designate one of seven HTML font sizes as the base font size and then set the font sizes in each of the HTML tags relative to it. The values listed are unitless; they rank the HTML font sizes from largest (7) to smallest (1). The size at which text actually displays varies depending on the browser used to view the HTML document.

For more information, click the Help button at the bottom of this dialog box.


If you choose the automatic conversion method to translate your document to HTML format, map the font sizes in the document to the seven HTML font sizes.

The values listed under HTML sizes are unitless; they rank the font sizes from largest (7) to smallest (1). The size at which text actually displays varies depending on the browser used to view the HTML document.


HTML, Options dialog box
HTML Options, Header

Lets you add information to the header of your HTML document. People reading your document can't see the header unless they view the document's source code in their Web browser or a text editor. You can also use this dialog box to reload the current document at regular internals or a different document after the time you specify elapses.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enter a comment in this text box, to explain the purpose of the elements you've added to the document's header.


Enter a title for the HTML document. The default title is the name of the document.


Enter a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) here. All relative addressing will reference this base address.


Provides a space for you to type a META tag, which allows you to specify the refresh properties for your HTML page. For example, you can set the browser to reload (update) this document every five minutes, or you can have the browser display this document for a certain period of time, and then load another document.


HTML Options, Frame Backgrounds dialog box
HTML Options, Frame Backgrounds

Changes the background of the pages in the HTML document. You can use any of the fill types available in VENTURA or a graphic as the background.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click this button to use a solid color as the background for the page or frame containing the indicated content.


Enable the Graphic check box to use a graphic as the background. Type the location and filename of the graphic or click the Browse button to locate it.


Enable this check box to use the background applied to the document's base page as the background for the browser's main pane.


Import HTML Setup dialog box

Lets you use another VENTURA document previously converted to HTML format as a model for translating the active document. You can make the structure and appearance of the active document identical to the previously converted document by using all its conversion settings. Or, you can use just certain groups of settings and use the default values for the remaining settings or customize them.

The document you want to use as the model must be open.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Lists open VENTURA documents that have been previously converted to HTML format. Select the one you want to use as the model for converting the active document.


Enable this check box to use the selected document's HTML Text settings.


Enable this check box to use the selected document's Graphics settings.


Enable this check box to use the selected document's HTML Links settings.


Enable this check box to use the selected document's Options settings.


HTML Report (HTML Setup)
HTML Publishing Summary

Shows where the HTML version of the VENTURA document is located and information about the presence of empty frames, unanchored frames and graphic objects in the VENTURA document.

Empty frames are drawn frames with no content. VENTURA ignores these frames when the document is converted to HTML.

Unanchored frames are drawn frames which have not been attached to text. These frames are always placed at the bottom of the page in the HTML document, although they may appear elsewhere in the VENTURA document [image] for example, above a particular paragraph.

Graphic objects are objects you create with the drawing tools; they don't appear in the HTML document.

 Related Topics


Shows where the HTML version of the VENTURA document is located.


Displays information about the composition the VENTURA document, such as the number of empty frames and objects created with the drawing tools it contains. For information about the relevance of this information, click the Help button.


Export Cascading Style Sheet dialog box


Export Cascading Style Sheet dialog box

Allows you to exports all paragraph tags to cascading style sheet format. You can map any VENTURA tags as the  <BODY> style in the cascading style sheet, export only tags that are HTML elements, or specify only styles that are different from the <BODY> style.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Displays the name and location of the cascading style sheet file. To save the file to another location, click Browse, and locate the file on your system.


Click to open the Save As dialog box, which allows you to change the save location of the cascading style sheet.


Displays the VENTURA tag currently selected as the <BODY> style in the cascading style sheet. To use another, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.


Enable this option to export only tags that are HTML elements.


Enable this option to specify only styles that are different from the <BODY> style.


Publish as Adobe Acrobat dialog box


Publish as Adobe Acrobat dialog box

Converts the active document into a PostScript file which can you process to create an Adobe Acrobat PDF (Portable Document Format) file. The PDF file preserves the appearance of the original document and can be viewed on-screen or printed using one of the Adobe Acrobat viewers: Reader or Exchange. Neither of these viewers nor the Acrobat Distiller program, which is needed to create the PDF file, are included with VENTURA.

 Notes

•	You should only enable the Include URLs check box if you are running Adobe Acrobat Distiller 3. If you are using version 2.0, you should disable this check box.

•	Creating files for processing into an Adobe Acrobat document requires a PostScript printer driver. If the document you are converting contains color and you want the colors to appear in the Acrobat document, use a driver for a color printer such as the QMS Color Script or one of the Tektronix models. (Drivers for these printers come with Windows).

 Related Topics


Enable this check box if the document contains hidden text that you want to appear in the Acrobat document. The hidden text will appear as an icon in the left margin of the Acrobat document. Clicking the icon displays the text in a separate window.


Enable this check box to include URLs. You should only enable this check box if you are running Adobe Acrobat Distiller 3. If you are using version 2.0, you should disable this check box.


Publish as Corel Barista dialog


Publish As, Corel Barista dialog box
Publish As Corel Barista dialog box

Publishes the current document to an HTML file for viewing in a Java-enabled Web browser such as Netscape Navigator 2.0 or later.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enable this option to save the entire document in a single file. If the document contains many pages or pictures that would take a long time to download, consider saving each page as a separate file.


Enable this option to save each page in the document as a separate file. This is recommended for large documents, where downloading the entire document would be time-consuming.

VENTURA will link the individual pages together so that reader can move between them using the navigation tools provided with Corel Barista.


Shows the filename and location the HTML file will be saved with. By default, the file is saved in the COREL\BARISTA folder and with the same name as the VENTURA document but with an HTM extension. You can type another location or filename or use the Browse button to find the folder you want to save the file in.

Note: If you choose to save the HTML file in a different folder, you will need to copy the contents of the BARISTA folder to that folder.


Specify the file format VENTURA converts pictures to. GIF graphics generally display faster than JPEG graphics, whereas JPEG will compress the picture to a smaller size.


Specify the range of pages you want to publish to Corel Barista.


Click this button to save the document with the filename, location and settings you specified.


Enable this check box to have the fonts used in your document saved as .PFR files. Then, if the required fonts are not available on a user's computer, the .PFR files are downloaded to supply the fonts.

For more information about TrueDoc, click [image].


Enable this check box to display the converted document in your Web browser when you click Publish.

Note: Windows controls which browser is used to open the converted document. If the wrong browser launches, change to the one you want using the View, Options command in the Windows Explorer.


Print dialog (top of dialog is CDRGFX, bottom is Ventura-specific)


Print dialog box

You can use the Print dialog box to specify print settings and print your work. It controls include the following:

•	which device driver to use

•	whether to print to the device or to a file instead

•	which pages to print

•	how many copies you require

•	whether to collate the pages

•	which printer color profile to use

•	which printing style to use

You can also choose the following:

•	To change or to review your printer settings

•	To set more complex parameters, including color separation specifications, and preview your print job

•	To print using the settings you have chosen

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Opens a Windows dialog box which you can use to set printing options not controlled by Corel.


Opens the Print Options dialog box which you can use to set advanced printing parameters such as sizing and positioning, halftone screening, color separations, etc.


Identifies the selected printer.


Provides information about status of the selected printer [image] for example, idle or busy.


 Identifies the selected printer.


Provides information about the selected printer's location.


Provides information about the selected printer.


Creates a .PRN file from your print job (instead of actually printing).


Prepares the .PRN file for printing from a Macintosh computer.


Prints the entire active document.


Prints only the page currently displayed.


Prints the chapters or range of chapters to print.

•	A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential chapters (e.g., 1-5 will print chapters 1 to 5).

•	A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential chapters (e.g., 1,5 will print chapters 1 and 5 only).

•	Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 will print chapters 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11 and 12).


Specifies the pages, or the range of pages, to print.

•	A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (e.g., 1-5 will print pages 1 to 5).

•	A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential pages (e.g., 1,5 will print pages 1 and 5 only).

•	Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 will print pages 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11 and 12).

•	Inserting a tilde (~) between two numbers will cause those two pages plus every second page in between to print. For example, 1~6 will print pages 1, 3, 5 and 6. If you enter 2~6, pages 2, 4 and 6 will print.

The option works in conjunction with the Print Left/Right Pages option.


Use to specify whether left, right, or both left and right pages will be printed.


Specifies the number of copies that will be printed.

Note: When printing to file, request one copy only, with no collation.


Enable this option to print one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set (e.g., a first set of pages 1 to 10 will print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 will print, and so on).


Stores a configuration of print settings that can be used again.


Shows how the document will look when printed and displays a dialog box where you can set the printing options you want to use.


Ensures that colors will print as expected. The printer color profile shown here matches the printer that was chosen in the System Profile (Color Manager). If you want your print job to use a different profile, go back to the Color Manager, select the appropriate printer, and generate a new System Profile.


Enable this option to print hidden pictures in the active document.


Enable this option to print each chapter in the active document to a separate disk file. This option becomes available when you enable the Print to File option.

Printing chapters to separate files is recommended for large documents you intend to take to a service bureau or commercial printer for output.


Enable this option to print memos attached the document using the Insert, CorelMEMO dialog box.


Enable this option if you're publishing an Envoy or Adobe Acrobat document and want to generate hyperlinks from cross-references and entries in the table of contents and index.

Note: The File, Publish As command is the recommended method of publishing Envoy or Adobe Acrobat command. Use the Print command only if you need to resize the VENTURA document for more comfortable viewing on screen.


Print Options dialog box


Print Options dialog box

Sets printing parameters, including color separation specifications.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Layout page

Sets the layout style (book, booklet, card etc.) of the document, the size at which pages print and their position on the sheet of paper or film. You can also use this command to create bleeds, print oversized pages on multiple sheets, print thumbnails (miniatures) of your document pages and print multiple copies of a page per sheet.

Separations page

Enables or disables the printing of color separations, which prints a separate sheet (paper or film) for each color or color component on a page. You also use this page to specify which color plates to print, whether to use automatic trapping, and to adjust the halftone screen settings.

Options page

Sets a variety of printing parameters including the default screen frequency and the number of bands used to print fountain fills . You can also use this command to access proofing options that speed printing by omitting bitmaps or text and printing color as black or shades of gray.

 Related Topics


Print Options, Options page


This value reflects the number of steps that will be used to render fountain fills in your document. A low value (less than 20) will print faster but the transition between shades may be coarse, which causes what is known as banding. A higher value (over 40) will result in a smoother blend but longer printing times.


Sets the basic halftone screen frequency that your job will print at. Screen frequency is expressed as a number of lines per inch (lpi). This value refers to the number of lines of dots (or other shapes) that make up the halftone screen.

Note: Check with your service bureau for the optimum setting for your print job.


Opens the Postscript Preferences dialog box.


Prints using the full color capabilities of the selected printing device.


Prints all colors in black.


Prints all colors in grayscale.


Scales everything that will be printed so that it fits within the printable page of the current printer. Use this setting to proof a large layout on your desktop printer.

This option is only intended for proofing, and should be disabled for the final output. If you wish to scale your document to fill the printable page, you should use the fit to page option. Position and size measurements reflect the size of the final output, not the size of the proof.


Prints only bitmaps unless combined with Print text.


Prints only text unless combined with Print bitmaps.


Prints all text in black.


Prints a job information sheet with your print job. This report contains information about the application that produced the job, the driver that was used, the print settings, the font information, and the file links.


Opens the Job Information Sheet dialog box, which allows you to specify which categories of information you want included in the report.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it. For more information, click [image].


Print Options, Separations page


Separates a color document into its component colors, causing each component color to print out on a separate sheet.

If you used a process color model (which uses four colors to simulate any color), you'll get up to four sheets per page.

If you used spot colors, one sheet per color is printed for each page on which a particular color appears.


Allows you to print the separations in color (i.e., on a color printer). Separations are usually printed in black, with a screen to represent shading. This option allows you to print the separations in color instead.


Allows you to print high-fidelity color separations which entails the use of additional process inks to produce more vivid colors. Consult with your service bureau or commercial printer about using high-fidelity color since special equipment is required to produce them. For more information, click


Enable this option if you are printing high-fidelity color separations and the printing press uses high density ink. Consult with your service bureau or commercial printer about using high-fidelity color since special equipment is required to produce them. For more information, click


Converts any spot colors present in your document to process colors. This does not affect the document itself, only the way it is printed.

Note: Spot colors in Encapsulated PostScript pictures won't print if converted to CYMK.


Prints all plates, including those that contain no image.

Note: Printing empty plates wastes film and adds to the cost of your job. Generally, you'll want to leave this option disabled.


Allows you to adjust the advanced settings of your color separations, which includes setting halftone screens and creating color trapping.

Note: Do not adjust these settings without first talking to your service bureau or printing shop.


Opens the Advanced Separations Setting dialog box that allows you to set advanced screening parameters such as screening technology, screen frequency and angle per color plate, overprinting per plate, halftone dot type, etc.


Specifies which color separation(s) to print.

The list of colors shows all separations used in your document. You can choose to print all separations, one separation only, or any combination of separations.


Causes any object that contains 95% black or more to overprint underlying objects.

Note: This is a useful option for document containing a lot of black text, but it should be used with caution on document with a high graphics content.


Enable this option to apply automatic color trapping to objects. To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

•	not already have an outline

•	be filled with a uniform fill

•	not already be designated to overprint

For more information about trapping, click [image].


Defines the amount of spread that VENTURA assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

For more information about trapping, click [image].


Determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.

For more information about trapping, click [image].


Print Options, Layout page


These options allow you to resize and reposition your document.

Note: These options do not affect the document itself, only the way it is printed.


Applies positioning and sizing to all pages.


Identifies the unit of measurement that is used when you specify the layout of your document.


Specifies the placement of your document on the page. The Top value indicates the distance from the top edge of the printable page.


Specifies the placement of your document on the page. The Left value indicates the distance from the left edge of the printable page.


Resizes your printed document (not the original document) according to the width specified.


Resizes your printed document (not the original document) according to the height specified.


Scales the width of your printed document (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Scales the height of your printed document (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Automatically centers your document on the page.


Automatically scales your document so that it fits the printable page.

Note: Unless Maintain aspect ratio is enabled, Fit to Page will distort your image.


Constrains resizing and scaling so that the height and width ratio of the document is maintained.


Enables a limit for bleeds. The bleed limit determines how far beyond the crop marks the content on a page can be extended when printed.

The corresponding value identifies how far beyond the crop marks the bleed can extend.


Allows you to print large document on multiple sheets, or tiles, that can later be assembled to form the whole picture.


Provides preset page layouts and allows you to store custom styles.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in the Positioning dialog box.


Opens the Edit Layout dialog box.


Opens the Positioning dialog box. This dialog box allows you to specify positioning settings that can be saved in Positioning styles.


Print Job Information dialog box

The Print Job Information dialog box allows you to specify what type of information you want included in the print job report. You can direct the report to a printer or text file or both.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	The Job Information prints when you print the entire document, not just a portion of it.


Shows the contents of the Print Job Information Sheet.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Sends the Print Job Information Sheet to a .TXT file.


Allows you to specify the .TXT file the Print Job Information Sheet is sent to.


Sends the Print Job Information Sheet to a printer.


Allows you to specify the printer the Print Job Information Sheet is sent to.


PostScript Preferences dialog box

The PostScript Preferences dialog box allows you to set advanced PostScript options. You can optimize object outlines and fills for printing, and control the way your PostScript driver handles fonts and bitmaps.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Maximum Points Per CurveSpecifies the maximum allowable number of control points per curve. Reducing this number helps alleviate printing problems caused by objects that are too complex.


Set Flatness ToIndicates the level of flatness that will be applied to curves when you print.

Tip: Increasing the flatness reduces printing time and therefore is useful when you need to produce quick proofs. Be careful however as a flatness level set too high will produce distorted curves.


Auto Increase Flatnessautomatically increase the flatness in increments of 2, as needed. Attempts to print an object will stop when the flatness value exceeds the value set in the Set Flatness To box by 10. At this point, the printer skips the problematic object and goes on to the next object.


Auto Increase Fountain StepsEnable this option to have VENTURA automatically increase the number of steps used to render fountain fills to avoid banding.

Note: This option may increase print time, but it will ensure the best possible rendering of fountain fills.


Optimize Fountain FillsEnable this option and if the number of steps in a fountain fill is greater than the number that your output device can render, the number used to render the fountain fill will be decreased automatically.


Complex Objects WarningAllows one or more warnings to be issued if objects that are too complex and could cause printing problems are detected.


Banded Fountain Fill WarningsWarns you of potential banding (the appearance of discreet strips in a fill) which is caused by to few steps in a fountain fill, when it is enabled.

Note: This warning only applies to linear fountain fills.


Use PostScript Level 2 FeaturesEnables the use of PostScript level 2 features.

Note: This option is only available to level 2 PostScript devices. If you are not certain whether you will be printing on a level 2 postscript device, DO NOT enable this option.


Download Type 1 FontsDownloads Type 1 fonts to the output device. Generally, this option is enabled because it is particularly beneficial when you want to print large tracts of text that use only a few fonts. Printing is faster as each font is first downloaded, and then only referenced by text that uses it.

If you disable this option, fonts are output as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful if the file contains a large number of fonts that would take longer to download, or not download at all, because of sheer size.


Convert True Type to Type 1Converts True Type fonts to Type 1 fonts. If you enabled the Download Type 1 Fonts option, by default the Convert True Type to Type 1 is also enabled. This ensures that True Type fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded.

Only disable this option if your output device has difficulty interpreting the Type 1 fonts.


Maintain OPI LinksTells the service bureau's OPI server to substitute the corresponding high-resolution images for the low-resolution ones in your file. This substitution is done before your print file is rasterized and imaged to film.


Output Color Bitmaps in RGBDefines bitmaps in RGB values instead of the usual CMYK values that are found in PostScript files.

Tips

•	Use this option when you are outputting to RGB devices (e.g., slidemakers).

•	Also use this option when you are printing to CMY devices. It is easier for these devices to translate from RGB to CMY than from CMYK to CMY.


Save Print Style dialog box

The Save Print Style dialog box allows you choose a name for the current print style (i.e., the current settings in Print Options). You can also change any settings you wish in Settings to save in style.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Displays the present print style and provides a place for you type a name for a new style.


Provides a list of the present print options and allows you to change them.


Edit Layout Style dialog box

The Edit Layout Style dialog box allows you to create custom layout styles. By increasing the Across and Down values, you allow space for several working pages on a single sheet of paper. The options in this dialog box allow you to place the working pages in any order.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	When you create a custom style you are creating a template for the entire print job. If your document has a lot of pages, Corel will place subsequent pages in an order based on the page order of the template. For example, if page seven is place on the right page of a booklet, page fourteen will appear on the next right page.


Displays a model of how the pages will be arranged on the printed sheet.


Provides preset page layouts and allows you to store custom styles.


Saves the present layout settings.


Deletes the selected layout style.


Specifies the number of working pages to position across the printable page.


Specifies the number of working pages to position down the printable page.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Selects a page to be placed on the layout sheet.


Allows you to specify whether the top of the selected page points up or down.


Shows the other side of a double sided layout.


Allows you to print on both sides of the page.

Note: When you enable this option, and you print to a non-double sided printer, Corel automatically runs a wizard that ensures all of the pages are ordered and oriented correctly.


Edit Positioning dialog box

The Edit Positioning dialog box allows you to place several existing printable pages on a single printable page, or to place several copies of an existing printable page on a single page. You can also set page margins in this dialog box.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in this dialog box.


Saves the present positioning settings.


Deletes the selected positioning style.


Displays a model of the printable page based on the positioning settings.


Places the current working page in each frame of the printable page.


Keeps the frame size equal to the working page size.


Specifies the number of rows of positioning frames to be placed on the printable page.


Specifies the number of columns of positioning frames to be placed on the printable page.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Automatically sets the gutters.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Makes the right margin equal to the left margin, and the bottom margin equal to the top margin.


Automatically sets the margins.


Advanced Separations Settings dialog box

The Advanced Separations Settings dialog box allows you to customize the color separations. You can specify screen technology, adjust individual color separations, create color trapping for individual color separations, and select a halftone type.

Consult your service bureau to ensure that all options are set properly.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Screening TechnologyIdentifies the imagesetter and screening technology that will be used to image your job.

Proprietary screening technologies supported by Corel include AGFA Balanced screening, Linotronic RT and, HQS screening.


ResolutionIdentifies the resolution (in dots per inch, or "dpi") the job will be printed at.


Basic ScreenIdentifies the basic screen frequency (in lines per inch, or "lpi") the job will be printed at.

Notes

•	The higher the screen frequency setting, the more intense the colors and the sharper the image. The lower the screen frequency, the lighter the colors and the less sharp the image.

•	A high frequency gives you fewer levels of gray; a low frequency gives you more levels of gray.

•	The upper limit of your screen frequency is define by the type of printing press to be used and the type of paper stock.


Shows all separations used in your document. Click each one to change frequency, angle, and to enable overprinting.


Current Selection: FrequencyThe default values are based on the imagesetter, screening technology, and basic screen frequency chosen; it is best not to change these values.

Note: Check with your service bureau before modifying these values.


Current Selection: Screen AngleScreen angles are used to offset the different films in process color separations to avoid moiré patterns. The default values are based on the imagesetter, screening technology, and basic screen frequency chosen; it is best not to change these values.

Note: Check with your service bureau before modifying these values.


Overprint Color, Graphics, TextAllows you to select a color to print over any underlying color (instead of the underlying color being knocked out), thereby making white gaps impossible. This option is best used when the top color is much darker than the underlying color, otherwise an undesirable third color might result (e.g., red over yellow would result in an orange object).

When you enable Overprint color both text and graphics are selected by default. If you do not want one of these options to overprint, disable it.


Halftone TypeAllows you to specify a halftone screen for your drawing if you are printing to a PostScript device. A halftone screen is a pattern of shapes that is used to simulate shades of colors (i.e. darker to lighter) while using the same ink. Dot, line, diamond, elliptical, and Euclidean are only a few of the available halftone types.


Saves the current print settings as a new style.


Deletes the selected style.


Print all pages in your document.


Prints only the objects that are currently selected.


Changes to a full screen preview. Click it again to return to a normal preview.


Allows you to choose whether the Preview box will display a composite view of your print job or only a specific color separation.

Note: This feature is only available when Print Separations is enabled.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note: The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note: The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note: The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Specifies the number of working pages to place on a single printable page.


Places the current layout in each frame of the printable page.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles based on a percentage of the page width.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles based on a percentage of the page width.


Specifies the placement of your document on the page. The Left value indicates the distance from the left edge of the printable page.


Resizes your printed document (not the original document) according to the width specified.


Resizes your printed document (not the original document) according to the height specified.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in the Positioning dialog box.


Prints only vector graphics unless combined with Print bitmaps or Print text.


Displays a list of documents that you can print.


Allows you to choose what to print.


Stores a configuration of print settings that can be used again.


Stores a configuration of print settings that can be used again.


Displays a list of the current device's mode settings.


Displays information about the current printing device.


Displays a list of the current device's capabilities.


Displays information about the current printing device.


Specifies which color separation(s) to print.

The list of colors shows all separations used in your document. You can choose to print all separations, one separation only, or any combination of separations.


Allows you to save this dialog box's settings.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in this dialog box.


Specifies the number of working pages to place on a single printable page.


Places the current working page in each frame of the printable page.


Allows you to choose proofing options.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note: The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device's location.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device, and allows you to change devices.


Allows you to specify the number of copies and whether to collate them.


Allows you to specify color trapping settings.


Allows you to change screening options for the selected color separation.


Provides a list of the present print options and allows you to change them.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Sets PostScript font handling.


Sets PostScript bitmap handling.


Allows you to enable PostScript warnings.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to choose the output format and destination of the Print Job Information Sheet.


Print Setup dialog


Print Setup dialog box

The Print Setup dialog box allows you to select a device driver. Click Properties to change or review your printer settings.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click this button to display information about the capabilities of the selected printer.


Printer Capabilities dialog


Printer Capabilities dialog

No Help button


No id


No id


Print dialog (accessed from Quick Print command)

appears to be Windows help


This .RTF contains all the context-sensitive help for the commands and dialogs accessed from Ventura's Format menu


menu commands


Changes the appearance of the selected paragraph and it's tag.


Changes the font properties of the selected text.


Changes the formatting properties defined in the selected Character tag. Also specifies the text VENTURA inserts before and/or after characters formatted with a specific tag.


Sets up the page layout and the numbering of pages, footnotes/endnotes, paragraphs and other items in the current chapter. You can also use this command to control widow and orphan lines, and whether the chapter uses column balancing, pair kerning, vertical justification, and discretionary hyphens.


Changes the dimensions, position, margins, columns, angle, and the way in which text flows around the selected frame. You also use this command to add, remove and reposition captions; control orphan and widow lines; and set up vertical justification.

If the frame contains a picture, you can resize and reposition the picture within the frame using this command.


Sets access rights for the current document and the conditional tags that allow you to create multiple versions of the document within the same file. You can also use this command to define the text VENTURA inserts when you use the Variable Text, and the Text Before and Text After features.


Adjusts the spacing of all letters (tracking) or selected letters pairs (kerning) for available fonts on your system. You can also use this command to import tracking information from other documents and import and export kerning pair sets.


Applies, creates and edits ruling line styles. Ruling lines are borders you can apply to paragraphs or rectangular frames.


Changes the starting number and format for the selected page or caption containing a figure or table counter. Use this command when you want to override the numbering specified using the Format, Chapter command.


Creates a table of contents and index for the current document.


Use this command to add, edit, rename, and delete tags in the active document and to merge tags from other documents which use a different stylesheet. You can also use the command to assign shortcut key combinations to paragraph tags.


Formats the selected paragraph only, leaving the formatting defined in the paragraph's tag unchanged.


Marks the selected item as belonging to one or more versions of a conditional document. You define the conditions and specify which version(s) to view or print using the Format, Publication command.


Switches the state of the active document between single-user and multiple-user. In single-user state, only you have access to the document. You can switch to single-user state only if you are the document's administrator and none of its chapters are checked out by any users, including yourself. In multiple-user state, anyone with the appropriate access rights can open the document for editing or viewing only.


Reserves the active publication so that only you can make changes to it. After checking out the publication, the name of the command changes to Check In. To save changes to the publication and allow other users to work on it, use the Check In command.


Cancels Check out operation, discarding all changes.


Defines read-write privileges for the current document making it easy for you to protect the document against unwanted changes. Giving someone write privileges means they can make changes to the document. Someone with read privileges can only view the document.


Shows whether the active document or any of its components (i.e., individual chapters and stylesheet) are checked out and by whom. This command becomes available when the Set-Multi User command is enabled.


Adjusts the brightness, contrast and intensity of a bitmap picture. The command is not available for black & white, 16-color or 256-color pictures. Use Corel PHOTO-PAINT to adjust these types of pictures.

Note: The command is not available for externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Adjusts a skewed or imperfectly aligned bitmap picture, positioning it squarely on the screen. This command is especially useful when you are working with scanned pictures that, due to imperfect alignment on the scanning surface, appear misaligned.

Note: The command is not available for externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Flips the bitmap picture in the selected frame horizontally.

Note: The command is not available for externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Adjusts the pattern of dots the printer uses to reproduce a grayscale picture.

Note: The command is not available for externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Changes the size and resolution of the bitmap picture in the selected frame.

Note: The command is not available for externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Converts the bitmap picture to black and white.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Converts the picture to a 16-color (4-bit) picture. Choose 16-colors to create non-photographic images, when printing to a low-end color printer, and/or to maximize your system's memory.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Converts the picture to a range of 255 shades of gray, so that it resembles a traditional black and white photograph. Choose Grayscale to create duotones and print to a black and white laser printer.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Converts a grayscale picture into a monotone (one ink), duotone (two ink), tritone (three ink) and quadtone (four ink) picture. This type of conversion increases the picture depth in creating additional highlights, shadows, and mid-tones, producing a rich, brilliant picture.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Converts the picture to 256-color picture. Choose 256 Colors to create non-photographic images, when printing to a low-end color printer, and/or to maximize your system's memory.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Converts a picture to 24-bit (RGB) color. The RGB color model uses percentages of three colors (red, green, and blue) to create colors. Each component has 100 levels of intensity ranging from black to the component's full intensity. RGB is the most commonly used color mode. Choose RGB Color to create high-quality photographic color pictures and when printing to an RGB or CMY printer.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Converts the picture to 32 bit (CMYK) color. The CMYK model consists of four colors, based on the colors of the inks that are used in four-color printing. Combining percentages of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, virtually any color you want can be reproduced. Choose CMYK Color to create professional-quality pictures, and when you are printing to prepress or a CMYK printer.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Updates the numbering of automatically numbered paragraphs. Use this command after adding, deleting or moving auto-numbered paragraphs.


Edits and formats text added using the [image] tool in the [image] tool flyout menu.


Wraps a selected Artistic Text object to the shape of a frame or graphic object. The text and the object become a dynamically-linked group, enabling you to edit the text or change the shape of the object and automatically refit the text.

If you want to keep the path, but prevent it from printing, click the path while holding down the CTRL key, and remove the path's fill and outline. To delete the path, use the same technique to select it, then press DELETE.


Tag Properties dialog box (is Paragraph Properties dialog)


Selected Text Properties dialog box


Selected Text Properties dialog box

Changes the font, style (such as bold and italic), font size, color and other attributes for the selected text or character tag or finds text with the attributes you specify.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Click the font you want to apply to the selected text or the font you want to find or replace.

Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly, scrolls the list one font at a time.

To see samples of the fonts, click the list with the right mouse button and select Show Font Preview.


Click the font style you want to apply to the selected text or the style you want to find or replace. The availability of styles depends on the font.


Type or select the font size you want to apply to the selected text or the font size you want to find or replace.

To change the units, click the Size box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Click the color button to change the color of the selected text, or to find or replace text with the specified color.


Enable this option to have the text print over the background color or to find or replace text with or without this attribute. This option is relevant only when printing color separations and should be enabled for most work. For more information about overprinting, click [image].


Enter a positive value to move letters further apart or a negative value to move them closer together. When finding or replacing text attributes, VENTURA will search for text kerned by the amount you specify.

This setting is specified in percentages of an em, which is a unit of measure roughly equal to the width of the letter m at the current font size.


Enter a value to move the selected text vertically, or find and replace text shifted by the specified amount. A negative number moves the text down from the baseline; a positive value moves it up.


Enable this option to underline the selected text, or to find or replace text with underlines.

The width of the underline and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box. Use the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command to change the settings for the selected tag or paragraph.


Enable this option to format the selected text with a double-underline or to find or replace text with double-underlines.

The width of the underline and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box. Use the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command to change the settings for the selected tag or the paragraph.


Enable this option to underline words (not the spaces between them) in the selected paragraph or to find or replace words with underlines.

The thickness of the underline and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box. Use the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command to change the settings for the selected tag or paragraph.


Enable this option to place a line over the selected text or to find or replace text with an overscore.

The width of the underlines and their distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box. Use the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command to change the settings for the selected tag or the paragraph.


Enable this option to place a line through the selected text or to find or replace text with a strike-thru.

The width of the underline and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box. Use the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command to change the settings for the selected tag or the paragraph.


Enable this checkbox to format the selected text as subscript or to find or replace subscript characters.

You can change the size and position of the subscript text on the Defaults page of the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box (Format menu).


Enable this checkbox to format the selected text as superscript or to find or replace superscript characters.

You can change the size and position of the superscript text on the Defaults page of the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box (Format menu).


Enable this checkbox to format the selected characters as small capitals or to find or replace text formatted as small caps.

The default size for small caps is about 20% smaller than the size of the text in the paragraph. Use the Tag Properties, Default or Paragraph Properties, Default dialog box (Format menu) to change the size of the Small Cap text.


Enable this option to display text in the selected paragraph in uppercase letters or to find or replace text in uppercase.


Character Tags dialog box, Font tab


Character Tag Properties, Font dialog box
Character Tag Properties, Font

Modifies the font, style (such as bold and italics), font size, color and attributes (such as underline and strike-thru) of the current character tag.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click the font you want to apply to the selected text. Choosing As Is reverts to the font defined in the text's paragraph tag. If you subsequently change the paragraph tag's font, the character tag font also changes.

Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly scrolls the list one font at a time.

A font with a [image] next to its name is a font that's used in the active document but is not installed on your system. The PANOSE font matching system substitutes another font (the one appearing in brackets) for the missing font.


Click the font style you want to apply to the selected text. The availability of styles depends on the font.

Choosing As Is reverts to the style defined in the text's paragraph tag. If you subsequently change the paragraph tag's font style, the character tag font style also changes.


Type or select the font size you want to apply to the selected text. To change the units, click the Size box with the right mouse button, and select Units.


Click the color button to change the color of the selected text.


Click the color button to change the background color of the selected text.


Click this button to change the color or outline of the selected text.

Note: Applying fountain, texture or pattern fills to large quantities of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.


Click this button to use one of the other types of fills [image] for example, fountains or patterns [image] as the background for the selected text.

Note: Applying fountain, texture or pattern fills to large quantities of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.


Enable this option to have the text print over the background color. This option is relevant only when printing color separations and should be enabled for most work. For more information about overprinting, click [image].


Enable this option to have the text's background print over objects beneath it. This option is relevant only when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting click [image].


Select the predefined text string you want to insert before, or after, the text formatted with the current tag. Choosing As Is retains the text previously inserted to before or after the selected text. Define the text string using the Format, Publication command.

For more information on this feature, click [image].


Enable this option to underline the selected text.

The width of the underline and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of this dialog box.


Enable this option to format the selected text with a double-underline.

The width of the underline and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of this dialog box.


Enable this option to place a line over the selected text.

The width of the underline and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of this dialog box.


Enable this option to place a line through the selected text.

The width of the underline and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of this dialog box.


Enable this option to underline words in the selected text, not the space between the words.

The width of the underline and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of this dialog box.


Enable this option to display text in uppercase letters.


Enable this checkbox to format the selected text as subscript.

You can change the size and position of the subscript text on the Defaults page of this dialog box.


Enable this checkbox to format the selected text as superscript or to find or replace superscript characters.

You can change the size and position of the superscript text on the Defaults page of this dialog box.


Enable this checkbox to format the selected characters as small capitals or to find or replace text formatted as small caps.

The default size for small caps is about 20% smaller than the size of the text in the paragraph. Use the setting on the Defaults page of this dialog box to change the size of the Small Cap text.


Click this button to apply the selected tag to the selected text. To save changes to the tag without applying it to the selected text, click OK.


Character Tags dialog box, Default tab


Character Tag Properties, Defaults dialog box
Character Tag Properties, Defaults

Customizes text attributes such as underline thickness, subscript character size and character tracking for the current character tag.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Character Tags dialog box, Hyphenation tab


Character Tag Properties, Hyphenation dialog box
Character Tag Properties, Hyphenation

Controls automatic hyphenation in text formatted with the current character tag. Automatic hyphenation takes place only when it's enabled in the paragraph containing the text formatted with the selected character tag.

You can override the automatic hyphenation at any time by inserting discretionary hyphens. However, automatic hyphenation must still be enabled in the character tag for discretionary hyphens to work.

You also have the option of using only discretionary hyphens throughout the current chapter by enabling the Use Discretionary Hyphens option in the Chapter Properties, Typography dialog box (Format menu).

If you always hyphenate a word differently than VENTURA, or don't want to hyphenate a particular word, you can customize the built-in hyphenation dictionary. For more information, click Related Topics.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Specify the minimum length of hyphenated words formatted with the current character tag. For example, enter 5 if you do not want words less than six characters in length to hyphenate.


Enable this option to have VENTURA automatically hyphenate text formatted with the current character tag.

Note: Automatic hyphenation takes place only when it's enabled in the paragraph containing the text formatted with the selected character tag.


Click the language dictionary you want VENTURA to use when hyphenating text formatted with the current character tag. If the dictionary you need is not in the list, you must run the Setup program to install it.

For information on using the appropriate hyphenation dictionary for documents created in previous version of VENTURA, click [image].


Chapter Properties dialog box, General tab


Chapter Properties, General dialog box
Chapter Properties, General

Determines whether the document has a single or double-sided layout, which page (left or right) it starts on, and the layout style.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Enable this option if you intend to print your document on one side of the paper.


Enable this option if you intend to print your document on both sides of the paper.


Specify whether to start the chapter on a right, left page or either page.

Left/Either Page and Right/Either Page applies to double-sided documents. Use these options to start the chapter on a right or left page if it's the first chapter in the document. If the chapter appears later in the document, it will begin on either side depending on where the previous chapter ended.


Lists the punctuation marks that will be set outside the margins. Hanging punctuation eliminates the visual misalignment that occurs when punctuation falls at the beginning or end of lines.

Click in the first column and choose the characters you want to hang in the margins or enter the character's ANSI number in the ANSI Value column. Specify how far into the margin you want the character to extend.

For more information, click [image].


Click this button and then type the character(s) you want VENTURA to treat as hanging punctuation.


Click this button to delete the set of characters containing the insertion point from the hanging punctuation list. To delete individual characters, click to position the insertion point next to the character you want to delete, then press the Backspace or Delete key.


Select the paragraph tag that has the inter-line spacing you want VENTURA to use as the basis for calculating spacing between elements in vertically justified documents.

For more information on Vertical Justification, click [image].


Enable the Custom button and enter the amount of vertical space you want VENTURA to use as the basis for calculating spacing between elements in vertically justified documents.

For more information on Vertical Justification, click [image].


Click this button to mark the current chapter as belonging to one or more versions of a conditional document.


Hanging punctuation

Hanging punctuation means positioning punctuation marks outside the margins. Professionally typeset documents often hang punctuation [image] especially hyphens in justified text [image] to maintain visual continuity at the margins.

Notice how the first line in the following paragraph appears indented rather than flush with the left margin.

By hanging the quotation mark, you can avoid the visual misalignment of the text.

Although used mainly for text set flush left and/or right, you might also want to hang punctuation at the beginning or end of centered text to preserve visual balance.

For instructions on how to set hanging punctuation in VENTURA, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Chapter Properties dialog box, Counters tab


Chapter Properties, Counters dialog box
Chapter Properties, Counters

Controls the format and starting number of counters used to automatically number chapters, pages, figures and tables.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click the format you want for chapter numbers appearing in the header or footer, or wherever you insert a chapter counter.


Click the format you want for page numbers appearing in the header or footer, or wherever you insert a page counter.


Click the format you want for figure numbers. Figure numbers appear in captions that have figure counters inserted in them.


Click the format you want for table numbers. Table numbers appear in captions that have table counters inserted in them.


Enable this option to continue numbering from the previous chapter.


Sets the starting number for each counter type selected. To resume numbering from the previous chapter, enable the Continue checkbox.

To restart the numbering of page, figure, or table counters within a chapter, use the Override Counter command in the Format menu.

Note: Setting zero as the start number is valid for numeric numbering styles only.


Chapter Properties dialog box, Typography tab


Chapter Properties, Typography dialog box
Chapter Properties, Typography

Controls character-to-character and line-to-line spacing for the entire chapter. You can override the chapter typography settings for any frame or manually inserted page using the Frame, Typography dialog box (Format menu). Select the frame or page before choosing the new settings.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Determines where the first line of text begins on a page or in a frame. Click Cap Height to have uppercase letters align flush with the top margin. Click Inter-Line to move the text down by an amount equal to its inter-line spacing.

Note: The setting you specify applies to the entire chapter, unless overridden for a selected frame using the Format, Frame, Typography command.


Controls the distribution of text from column-to-column in the current chapter. Select On to equalize the amount of text in each column.

Note: You should use Column Balance when you have headings formatted to extend across columns. Otherwise, the headings will interrupt the flow of text between columns when the headings occur anywhere except on the first line of a page.


Enables or disables pair kerning, which moves certain pairs of adjacent characters closer together. Selecting On activates kerning in paragraphs that have automatic kerning enabled. Manually kerned text is not affected by this option.

Note: Pair Kerning is available for fonts that have built-in kerning information. Type 1 and TrueType fonts have this information; although most Symbol fonts such as Wingdings and Dingbats do not. Any font lacking kerning information can still be kerned using the Format, Tracking & Kerning command or by manual kerning.


Enable this option to use manually inserted hyphens and those VENTURA inserts automatically. This option affects only paragraphs that have automatic hyphenation turned on in the Tag Properties, Hyphens or Paragraph Properties, Hyphens dialog box (Format menu).


Enable this option to use only manually inserted hyphens as opposed to those VENTURA inserts automatically. This option affects only paragraphs formatted to use discretionary hyphens using the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command (Hyphens tab).


Specify the minimum number of lines that can be isolated at the top of the page or column. Two is a typical number, since this will prevent the last line of the paragraph from appearing by itself at the top of a page or a column.

You can override this setting for individual frames using the Format, Frame command (Typography tab).


Specify the minimum number of lines that can be isolated at the bottom of the page or column. Two is a typical number, since this will prevent the first line of the paragraph from appearing by itself at the bottom of a page or column.

You can override this setting for individual frames using the Frame, Typography dialog box (Format menu).


Controls how VENTURA adds vertical space to make columns reach the bottom of the page. Carding adds space in increments equal to the interline spacing; feathering adds whatever space is needed and usually produces more attractive results. Use Carding if you want text in adjacent columns to line up, but make sure to set spacing for all paragraphs in multiples of the interline spacing.

You can override this setting for individual frames using the Format, Frame command (Typography tab).

For more information on Vertical Justification, click [image].


Determines whether VENTURA is allowed to move frames as it vertically justifies pages. Moveable is the best option for most types of documents. Select Fixed if it's important that frames remain in the same location on a page.

You can override this setting for individual frames using the Format, Frame command (Typography tab).

For more information on Vertical Justification, click [image].


Sets the maximum amount of space allowed between elements (frames, paragraphs and tables) during vertical justification. 100% is the usual value for this setting. A value of 200%, for example, doubles all the maximum settings specified for each element. Using this setting allows you to control how much vertical justification takes place in a chapter, just by changing one number.

Set this value to 0 to turn off Vertical Justification.

For more information on Vertical Justification, click [image].


Sets the maximum amount of space that VENTURA is allowed to add above frames in a chapter as it vertically justifies elements on a page.

You can override this setting for individual frames using the Format, Frame command (Typography tab).

For more information on Vertical Justification, click [image].


Sets the maximum amount of space that VENTURA is allowed to add below frames in a chapter as it vertically justifies elements on a page.

You can override this setting for individual frames using the Format, Frame command (Typography tab).

For more information on Vertical Justification, click [image].


Chapter Properties dialog box, Footnotes tab


Chapter Properties, Footnotes dialog box
Chapter Properties, Footnotes

Enables and disables footnotes in the current chapter. Also adjusts note placement, sets numbering options, and adds, or removes, the line separating the main text from the notes.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enable this checkbox to display footnotes and modify footnote settings. Disabling this checkbox hides existing footnotes. (The View, Footnotes command does the same.)


Enter the number you want for the first automatically numbered note.


Enable the Number Style option, then from the list box click the numbering scheme you want to use to number notes.


Specify where you want to place the note reference mark in relation to the baseline.


Enable the Custom Mark option and type the characters you want to use to number notes in the adjacent box.

Custom numbering schemes can consist of eight character strings [image] for example, *, **, ***, ****, and so on. If the number of notes exceeds the number of character strings in the numbering scheme, numbering restarts with the first string.

Separate each string you type with a space.


Specify whether you want the note mark to appear alone, or with parentheses or other enclosures.


Click this button to format the note reference mark in the text of the document.

If you want to change the attributes of the note reference at the bottom of the page (or at the end of the chapter in the case of endnotes), select the reference and click the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command.


Adds or removes a line that separates the note text from the main text.


Enter the amount of space you want between the top of the footnote frame and the separator line. To change the unit of measure, click the Space Above box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter a thickness for the separator line.

To change the unit of measure, click on the Height box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter a width for the separator line.

To change the unit of measure, click the Width box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Specify whether you want numbering of notes to start over on each page or continue in sequence throughout the chapter.


Click this button to convert footnotes to endnotes or vice versa.


Enable the Maximum Height option and specify the amount of space you want to set aside for footnote text. Text that exceeds the limit continues on the next page.


Enable this option to keep the footnote and its reference on the same page, even if it causes widows and orphans or large gaps to appear between the footnote and the main text.


Enable this option to keep footnotes in a multi-column document within the same column as the footnote reference mark. Disable this option to allow the footnotes to extend the width of the page.


Convert Notes dialog box


Convert Notes dialog box

Converts footnotes in the current chapter to endnotes and vice versa. When you convert footnotes to endnotes, VENTURA places the notes in a file called Endnotes. You must then place the file in a frame (or an inserted page) at the end of the document. For more information, click the How To button.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Moves footnotes to the end of the chapter.


Moves endnotes to the bottom of the page that contains the note's reference mark.


Chapter Properties dialog box, Endnotes tab


Chapter Properties, Endnotes

Enables and disables endnotes in the current chapter and determines how they are numbered.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enable this checkbox to display endnotes and modify endnote settings. Disable this checkbox to hide existing endnotes. (The View, Footnotes command does the same.)


Chapter Properties dialog box, Auto-Numbering tab


Chapter Properties, Auto-Numbering dialog box
Chapter Properties, Auto-Numbering

Sets up automatic numbering of paragraphs in the current chapter and turns auto-numbering on and off. Setting up auto-numbering involves specifying which paragraphs you want numbered, the number of levels, plus the numbering scheme [image] for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals or letters [image] and any additional content such as punctuation, parentheses, text etc., you want to include with the auto-numbering. You also specify the starting number and whether each subordinate level includes the numbers from the previous level.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	If you want to experiment with various preset auto-numbering formats, click Edit, Undo before applying a new one.

 Related Topics


Enable this checkbox to turn on and set up auto-numbering.


Specify how many levels of auto-numbering you want. The maximum number of levels is 10.


Shows the setup information for each level in the selected table of contents or other list.

Column	Function

Level	Shows the hierarchy of levels in the numbering scheme. The value in the No. of Levels box sets the number of levels.

Include	Enable this checkbox to include the number (or letter) of the previous level.

Prefix/Suffix	Allows you to insert text before (prefix) and/or after (suffix) the auto-number at each level.

Number Style	Determines the numbering format for each level.

Paragraph Tag	Determines which paragraphs get numbered based on the tag they use.

Start Number	Sets the starting number, or letter, for the selected level.

To change the information for a level, click it; either an edit box or a button appears. Type the information in the edit box, or click the button to display a list of options, then click the option you want.


Click this button to switch between preset auto-numbering formats and advanced controls for setting up auto-numbering the  way you want.


Enable this option to continue numbering sequentially from the previous chapter.


Click this button to insert the chapter number or a tab in the Suffix or Prefix box that contains the insertion point.


Click this button to apply character formatting to text selected in the Prefix or Suffix box. The formatting you apply overrides the formatting in the paragraph tag VENTURA automatically applies to the auto-number and the prefix and suffix text.


Auto-numbering Quick Formats dialog box


Auto-numbering Quick Formats dialog box

Provides built-in formats you can use to set up auto-numbering. The Quick Formats take care of the settings required for each level of auto-numbering. After selecting a format, specify the tags used to format the paragraphs you want to number.

 Related Topics


Click a picture to select a preset auto-numbering format.


Frame Properties dialog box, General tab


Frame Properties, General dialog box
Frame Properties dialog box, General tab

Modifies frame dimensions, position, angle, text flow and other properties. The availability of settings depends of the type of frame selected.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Set the width of the frame. To change the unit of measure, click on the Dimensions box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Set the height of the frame. To change the unit of measure, click on the Dimensions box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Set the distance you want the frame to be from the left side of the page. To change the unit of measure, click on the Frame Origin box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Set the distance you want the frame to be from the top of the page. To change the unit of measure, click on the Frame Origin box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Specify if and how text flows around a frame created with the Frame tool. For more information about the options in this list, click [image].


Click this button to switch between preset options for controlling the flow of text around frames and advanced controls for setting dimensions, position, rotation and other frame attributes.


Click a picture to apply a preset option for controlling the flow of text around frames.


Text flow options for frames

You can control the way text flows around frames using the Flow & Rotation setting in the Frame Properties dialog box (Format menu) or the Property Bar.

Click	To flow text

Above/Below	above and below the frame leaving white space on either side

Flow around Frame	so that each line stops at the edge of the frame and continues on the other side before wrapping to the next line

Text flows Left	around the frame leaving white space on the right side

Left, then Right	above, down the left side, down the right side, then below

Text under Frame	through the frame

Text flows Right	around the frame leaving white space on the left side

Note

•	The vertical order of drawn frames affects the flow of text around them. For more information, click Related Topics and choose Layering order for drawn frames and graphic objects.

 Related Topics


Specify an angle to rotate the frame and its contents. A negative value rotates counterclockwise. To rotate only the contents of the frame, use the Contents settings.


Shows the name of the file in the selected frame. Use this name (or another name you type in the box) when you want refer to the contents of the frame using a cross-reference.


Adds a caption frame into which you can type text that identifies or explains the content (e.g., picture) of the frame. To remove a caption frame, click None.

Note: When you move an existing caption to a different position, the text in the caption is lost. To retain the text, copy it to the clipboard before moving the caption. Then, paste the text into the repositioned caption.


Specify an angle to rotate the contents of the frame. A negative value rotates counterclockwise. To rotate the frame and its contents, use the Rotation setting.

Note: Although you can rotate text on the base page frame using this setting, it's primarily intended for rotating pictures in this type of frame. If you need to rotate text, place the text in a drawn frame.


Enable this option to lock the frame so that it can't be resized or moved.


Enable this option to stretch the selected header or footer frame vertically until all the text in it shows. You should enable this option when using the First, Last or Current Match features to have copy text from the document to the header or footer. For more information, click [image].


Enable this option to have the selected frame move whenever the text moves. To anchor the frame, click the Anchor button in the Toolbox, then click the point in the text where you want the frame anchored.


Specify where you want to position the frame relative to the anchor symbol.

Choose	To position the frame

In-Line	on the baseline of the text containing the anchor symbol

Above/Below Current Line	directly above or below the anchor symbol

Column Top/Bottom	at the top or bottom of the text column containing the anchor symbol

Outside Column	outside the column of text containing the anchor symbol; the frame may still be inside the page margins

Outside Frame	outside the page margins

Within Paragraph	next to the paragraph containing the anchor symbol

Same Page	at the same relative location on the page so that when text moves to a new page, the frame occupies the same location on the new page as it did on the old page.


Specify the horizontal position of the frame relative to the anchor symbol. The Binding Side options apply to double-sided documents. They place the frame either next to, or away from the inside edge of the page.


Shows the name the selected frame's anchor. Use this name (or another name you type in the box) when you want to create a link to the frame in Corel Database Publisher.


Specify how far from the baseline of the text containing the anchor symbol you want to position the frame. A negative value positions the frame below the baseline.


Frame Properties, Margins dialog box
Frame Properties, Margins

Modifies margins and the direction or point from which the text in the selected frame flows. You can also adjust inside margins by dragging the margin boundaries on the rulers.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enter the amount of space you want between the top of the frame and its contents. To change the unit of measure, click on the Inside Margins box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter the amount of space you want between the bottom of the frame and its contents. To change the unit of measure, click on the Inside Margins box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter the amount of space you want between the left side of the frame and its contents. To change the unit of measure, click on the Inside Margins box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter the amount of space you want between the right side of the frame and its contents. To change the unit of measure, click on the Inside Margins box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Specify whether you want the inside margins to apply on left pages, right pages, or both.


Click this button to mirror the inside margins of the drawn frame to the opposite page of a double-sided document. If the frame moves to the opposite page, VENTURA reflects the settings so that the right margin settings for the right page become the left margin settings for the left page and vice versa.

Note: To mirror or copy margins on the base page, switch to Master Page view, then use the commands that appear when you right-click the master page.


Enter the amount of space you want between the top of the frame and the surrounding text. To change the unit of measure, click on the Outside Margins box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter the amount of space you want between the bottom of the frame and the surrounding text. To change the unit of measure, click on the Outside Margins box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter the amount of space you want between the left side of the frame and the surrounding text. To change the unit of measure, click on the Outside Margins box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter the amount of space you want between the right side of the frame and the surrounding text. To change the unit of measure, click on the Outside Margins box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter the number of vertical rules (lines) you want to appear in the frame. Vertical rules will not show in frames containing imported pictures.


Enable this option to have the rules print over the background color. This option is relevant only when printing color separations and should be enabled for most work. For more information about overprinting click [image].


Specify the position (measured from the left side of the frame), thickness, color and style of each vertical rule. To change the position or thickness, click the current value, then type a new value. To change the color or style, click the color swatch or pen icon, then make your selection from the Color Palette or dialog box that appears.


Specify where you want text to start flowing in a frame which has been rotated or reshaped.


Click this button to switch between preset margins and advanced controls for setting margins the way you want.


Click a picture to apply preset margins.


Frame Properties, Columns dialog box
Frame Properties, Columns

Sets the number and width of columns in the selected frame. You can adjust the width of columns by dragging the column markers on the horizontal rulers.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enter the number of columns you want. The maximum number of columns you can have depends on the size of the page or frame.


Specify whether you want the column settings to apply on left pages, right pages, or both.


Click this button to make the columns and the gutters (space) between the columns the same width.


Click this button to have the same column settings apply to the drawn frame when it appears on the opposite page of a double-sided document.

Note: To copy or mirror columns on the base page, switch to Master Page view, then use the commands that appear when you right-click the master page.


Specify whether you want text to flow left to right, or right to left.


Specify whether you want VENTURA to distribute text so that columns align as closely as possible at the bottom. Selecting Default sets Column Balance to whatever has been specified for the entire chapter using the Format, Chapter command.


Specify the width of each column, the amount of space between them (called the gutter) and whether you want vertical lines (called rules) to print between columns.

To change the width or gutter, click the current value, then type a new one. To add a rule, type a value in the Rules column to set the thickness of the rule. To change the color or style of the rule, click the color swatch or pen icon, then make your selection from the Color Palette or dialog box that appears.


Shows the combined width of columns.


Shows how much the combined width of columns exceeds the frame width.


Enable this option to have inter-column  rules print over the background color. This option is relevant only when printing color separations and should be enabled for most work. For more information about overprinting click [image].


Click this button to switch between preset column formats and advanced controls for setting columns the way you want.


Click a picture to apply a preset column format.


Frame Properties, Typography dialog box
Frame Properties, Typography

Controls character-to-character and line-to-line spacing for individual frames. The settings you specify in this dialog box override the defaults VENTURA uses for all frames in the chapter, including the base page. To change the chapter defaults, use the Format, Chapter command.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Specify the minimum number of lines that can be isolated at the top of the frame. Two is a typical number, since this will prevent single isolated lines. Click Default to use the chapter-wide setting specified using the Format, Chapter command.


Specify the minimum number of lines that can be isolated at the bottom of the frame. Two is a typical number, since this will prevent single isolated lines. Click Default to use the chapter-wide setting specified using the Format, Chapter command.


Determines where the first line of text begins on a page or in a frame. Click Cap Height to have uppercase letters align flush with the top of the column or frame. Click Inter-Line to move the text down by an amount equal to its inter-line spacing. To use the chapter-wide setting specified using the Format, Chapter command, click Default.

Note: The chapter-wide setting (Default) does not apply to master page frames. To use the same setting as the chapter, select the frame in Master Page view, then select whatever setting the chapter is using. The default setting for master pages is Cap-Height while the default for chapters is Inter-Line.


Enables or disables pair kerning, which moves certain pairs of adjacent characters closer together. Clicking On activates kerning in paragraphs that have automatic kerning enabled. Manually kerned text is not affected by this option. To use the chapter-wide setting specified using the Format, Chapter command, click Default.

Note: Pair Kerning is available for fonts which have built-in kerning information. Type 1 and TrueType fonts have this information; although most Symbol fonts such as Wingdings and Dingbats do not. Any font lacking kerning information can still be kerned using the Format, Tracking & Kerning command, or by using manual kerning.


Controls how VENTURA adds space to make columns reach the bottom of the page or frame. Carding adds space in increments equal to the interline spacing; feathering adds whatever space is needed and usually produces more attractive results. Use Carding if you want text in adjacent columns to line up but make sure to set spacing for all paragraphs in multiples of the interline spacing.

To use the chapter-wide setting specified using the Format, Chapter command, click Default. Click Off to turn off Vertical Justification.

For more information on Vertical Justification, click [image].


Sets the maximum amount of space allowed between elements (paragraphs and tables) within the frame during vertical justification. 100 is the usual value for this setting. A value of 200%, for example, doubles all the maximum settings specified for each element. Use of this setting, therefore, allows you to control how much vertical justification takes place in the frame, just by changing one number.

Setting this value to 0, turns Vertical Justification off.


Determines whether VENTURA is allowed to move the frame as it vertically justifies pages. Moveable is the best option for most types of documents. Select Fixed if it is important that the frame stay in the same location on a page.

To stop VENTURA from adding any space above or below the frame, click Off. To use the chapter-wide setting specified using the Format, Chapter command, click Default.


Sets the maximum amount of space that VENTURA is allowed to add above the frame as it vertically justifies pages.

For more information on Vertical Justification, click [image].


Sets the maximum amount of space that VENTURA is allowed to add below frames as it vertically justifies pages.

For more information on Vertical Justification, click [image].


Frame Properties, Picture dialog box
Frame Properties, Picture

Controls the size and orientation of an imported picture and its position within the frame. You can also use this dialog box to adjust the halftone screening for grayscale images in TIFF format.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Sets the width of the picture if Fit to Frame is disabled. Only the width of the picture changes; the width of the frame remains the same. If you specify a width that exceeds width of the frame, VENTURA will crop (trim) the picture.


Sets the height of the picture if Fit to Frame is disabled. Only the height of the picture changes; the width of the frame remains the same.


Enable this option to have the size of the picture change as the size of the frame changes. Disabling Fit to Frame allows you to resize the picture independently of the frame. When Fit in Frame is disabled, the picture changes size to fit inside the frame while maintaining its original proportions (i.e., aspect ratio).


Enable this option to prevent the picture from distorting when it is resized.


Enter the distance you want to move the picture within the frame. A positive value  moves the picture to the left; a negative value moves the picture to the right. You can also move the picture by dragging it while holding down the CTRL key.


Enter the distance you want to move the picture within the frame. A positive value moves it up; a negative value moves it down. You can also move the picture by dragging it while holding down the CTRL key.


Specify the shape of the dots the printer uses to print the picture. The Default type uses the printer's default screen parameters unless overridden in the Print dialog box. A dot screen with 60 lines per inch at 45 degrees has typical screen parameters for a 300 dpi laser printer.

For more information about halftone screening, click [image].


Specify the angle used to print the halftone dots. For more information about halftone screening, click [image].


Specify the number of lines (or rows) of halftone dots printed per inch. The screen frequency affects the number of gray levels in the printed output: the higher the screen frequency, the higher the level of output resolution necessary to create an adequate number of gray levels.

For more information about halftone screening, click [image].


Edit Text dialog box


Edit Text dialog box

Enables you to add, edit, and format Artistic Text.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Click the font that you want to apply to the selected text. Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly, scrolls down the list one font at a time.

To see samples of the fonts, click the list with the right mouse button and select Show Font Preview.


Type or select the point size you want to apply to the selected text.


Click this button to set the font, size, alignment and other formatting attributes.


Provides a space where you can type and edit text. You select characters and format them using the controls in this dialog box.


Formats the selected text as bold. If no text is selected, bolding begins at the insertion point.


Formats the selected text as italic. If no text is selected, italics begin at the insertion point.


Underlines the selected text. If no text is selected, underlining begins at the insertion point.


Centers the text between the margins.


Stretches the last line of text to the right margin.


Aligns text at both right and left margins.


Aligns text at the left margin, removing any shifting you may have applied with the Node Edit tool.


Aligns text at the left margin without affecting any shifting you may have applied with the Node Edit tool.


Aligns text at the right margin.


Applies bullets to the selected text.


Character Attributes dialog box, Font tab


Character Attributes, Font dialog box
Character Attributes dialog box, Font tab

Sets the font, font size, style, placement (e.g., Normal, Superscript) and other attributes for the selected Artistic text object.

To change the attributes of individual characters, drag across them in the Edit Text dialog box.


Displays the names of the fonts you can choose from. Use the scroll bar to the right to scroll through the list.


Formats selected text as subscript or superscript. Choose Normal to remove subscripting or subscripting.


Formats selected text as small capitals or all capitals at the current font size.


Sets the size of the selected text.


Lists the available units of measure. Choose another if required.


Lists the type styles (weights) available for the chosen font.


Underlines selected text.

To underline each word in the selected text but not the space between words, choose Single Thin Word, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.


Click this button to change the thickness and position of the underline.


Applies a line over the selected text.

To apply an overline to each word in the selected text but not the space between words, choose Single Thin Word, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.


Click this button to change the thickness and position of the overline.


Places a line through the selected text.

To apply a strikeout to each word in the selected text but not the space between words, choose Single Thin Word, Single Thick Word, or Double Thin Word.


Click this button to change the thickness and position of the strikeout line.


Displays sample characters in the selected font and text style. The type of font you have selected, for example TrueType or PostScript Type 1, is indicated below the Preview area.


Edit Underline, Overline, and Strikeout dialog boxes


Edit Underline, Overline, and Strikeout dialog boxes

Sets the default thickness for underlines, overlines and strikeout lines and their position relative to the baseline.


Sets the thickness for Single Thin lines.


Sets thickness for Single Thick lines.


Sets thickness for Double Thin lines.


Sets thickness for Double Thin lines.


Shifts the line relative to the baseline of the text.


Choose whether you want to set a specific value for thickness and baseline shift, or a value that is a percentage of the font size.


Character Attributes dialog box, Alignment tab


Character Attributes, Alignment dialog box
Character Attributes dialog box, Alignment tab

Sets the spacing and alignment of the Artistic text object. Selecting characters individually in the Edit Text dialog box lets you to rotate and shift them horizontally and vertically.


Sets the spacing between characters as a percentage of the SPACE character in the selected font.


Sets the spacing between words as a percentage of the SPACE character in the selected font.


Sets spacing between lines of text either in points or in percentages of the character height or font size.


Specify whether you want to sets spacing between lines of text in points, or in percentages of the character height or font size.


Moves selected text horizontally along the baseline. Values are measured in percentages of the point size.


Moves selected text vertically from the baseline. Values are measured in percentages of the point size.


Rotates selected text by the specified amount.


Set the alignment of the text. Choose None if you want to use the Node Edit tool to change the position of individual characters, adjust kerning, or rotate a character without automatically repositioning the remaining text.

You can also set the alignment using the Alignment buttons in the Edit Text dialog box.


Fit Text to Path dialog box


Fit Text to Path dialog box

Enables you to shape a selected Artistic Text object to the outline of a selected non-text object. The text and object it is fitted to become a dynamically-linked group, enabling you to edit the text or change the shape of the path and automatically refit the text.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	If you want to keep the path, but prevent it from printing, click the path while holding down the CTRL key and remove the path's fill and outline. To delete the path, use the same technique to select it then press DELETE.


Specify how you want to arrange the letters on the path

rotates individual characters to follow the contours of the path.

 	vertically skews each character, creating the impression that the text is standing upright on the path. The amount of skewing varies with the slope of the path.

similar to vertical skew, but with an added effect that makes letters appear to turn into the screen as they wrap around the path. The amount of skewing varies with the slope of the path.

centers the base of each letter on the path.


Specify where you want to position the text vertically with respect to the path.

aligns the text baseline with the path.

aligns the text ascender line with the path.

aligns the descender line of the text with the path.

Centers the text on the path.

  	allows you to move the text off the path by dragging with the mouse.


Specify where you want to place the text horizontally along the path.


Flips the text to the opposite side of the path and reverses the path's start and end nodes.


Specify how far along the path you want to position the text.


Specify how far above or below the path you want to position the text.


Click the side of the path you want the text placed on.


Publication Properties dialog box


Publication Properties, General dialog box
Publication Properties, General

Changes the layout style of the active document. If you're producing a booklet or a card [image] e.g., business, greeting, invitation etc.you can use one of the "two-up" or "four-up" layout styles designed just for that purpose. Unlike the regular full-page layouts which print one page of your document per sheet of paper, the two-up and four-up layouts print either two pages or four pages per sheet.

If you want to change the dimensions, orientation or other properties of the pages in the document, modify the master page or apply a different one. Click Related Topics for more information about master pages.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click the layout style you want to use for the active document. For more information about layout styles, click the Help button.


Enable this option to disable Override mode which prevents tag formatting from being overridden.

Note: VENTURA automatically disables overriding when you choose Short/Layout-intensive publications as your working environment. You can't enable overriding in this environment using the Disable Overrides check box. For more information, click [image].


Enable this option to include TrueDoc font information in the current document. Using TrueDoc ensures the document displays and prints correctly from systems that lack the PostScript or TrueType fonts used in the document.

For more information about TrueDoc, click [image].


Click this button to regenerate the font information so that it includes only the fonts used in the document rather than all the fonts referenced by the tags in the document. Omitting font information for unused fonts reduces the document's file size.


Shows pictures of the built-in page layouts. Pictures with dashed lines represent layouts that print multiple pages per sheet.


Specify whether you want VENTURA to insert a blank page between chapters that end on the same side (left or right) as the next chapter. Inserting blank pages ensures that chapters begin on the correct side when printing on both sides of the paper. Choosing Ask Always lets you decide at print time whether you want to insert blank pages. For more information, click [image].


Publication Properties, Text Before/After dialog box
Publication Properties, Text Before/After

Defines the text string VENTURA automatically inserts when you apply a specific paragraph or character tag to text. Use this time-saving feature to insert text before and/or after frequently occurring information that may be worded differently in each instance, but is formatted with the same tag. For example, you can store the title "- - -Warning - - -" as a Text Before or Text After entry and then assign the entry to the tag used to format the text which follows the title. Whenever you apply the tag to text, VENTURA inserts "- - - Warning- - -" before or after it.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Type a name to identify the text string you want VENTURA to insert for you when you apply a specific character or paragraph tag to text. To change a name or the text string assigned to it, select the name from the list.


Lists the Text Before/After definitions in the active document.


Click this button to add the text in the Defined Text box to the list of Text Before/After definitions.


Click this button to change the name of the Text Before/After definition selected in the Name box.


Click this button to remove the Text Before/After definition in the Name box. Deleting a definition does not remove the Before/After text already in the document.


Type (or edit) the text that you want to assign to the Text Before/After definition in the Name box.


Publication Properties, Variable Definition dialog box
Publication Properties, Variable Definition

Defines variables for the current document. A variable is a placeholder for text that changes according to the variable's current definition. You would use variables to insert placeholders for items which are likely to change as you are preparing a document such as dates, document version numbers, or names of customers and products. Whenever VENTURA updates the document, it inserts the variable's current definition at all specified locations in the document.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Type a name to identify the text string you want VENTURA to insert at the variable marker locations in the document. To change a name or the text string assigned to it, select the name from the list.

You have the option of defining the variable either before or after you insert the marker, which tells VENTURA where to put the definition (i.e., the substitution text) in the document. If you have not yet inserted the marker, you can assign a name to it and then insert it using the Insert, Insert Item, Variable command.


Lists the variable markers defined in the active document.


Click this button to add the text in the Substitutions box to the list of Variable definitions.


Click this button to change the name of the Variable definition in the Name box.

Note: VENTURA does not update the names of previously inserted markers that refer to the renamed variable. You must rename them individually using the Edit, Edit Item or the Edit, Find & Replace command.


Click this button to remove the selected Variable definition from the list of Variable definitions in the current document. Deleting a definition does not remove the substitution text already in the document.


Type (or edit) the text that you want to assign to the selected Variable definition.


Publication Properties, Set Conditions dialog box
Publication Properties, Set Conditions

Defines the conditions used to identify text, frames, tables and ruling lines specific to one version of the current document. Having defined and applied the conditions, you can use this dialog box to control which version displays and prints.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	The names you type to identify the versions in your conditional documents must not contain spaces.

 Related Topics


Shows the conditions defined for the current document and whether they are on or off. When a condition is on, all elements in the document assigned that condition display. Whatever you display is what appears in the printed document.

To turn a condition on or off, click the checkbox next to its name. To define a new condition, type it in the adjacent box and then click the Add button.


Type a name for the condition you want to add to the current document, then click the Add button.

Note: The names you type must not contain spaces.


Click this button after typing a new condition to add it to the list of tags for the current document.


Click this button to delete the condition selected from the adjacent list. Any item assigned the condition become unconditional and will appear in all versions of the document.


Enter Password dialog box

Requests the password required to open the selected document. If you don't know the password, contact the person designated as the document's administrator.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Shows the name and location of the document you are opening


Shows your name or the name of the person from whose system you are opening the document.


Type the password required to open the document.


Edit Kern/Tracking dialog box


Tracking & Kerning Properties, Kerning dialog box
Tracking & Kerning Properties, Kerning

Customizes the kerning for any font installed on your system. The adjustments you make in this dialog box apply to the current document only; the fonts themselves remain unchanged. After editing the kerning for a font, you use this dialog box to apply the new values to other documents that use the same font.

Kerning takes affect when you enable Pair Kerning at the document level using the Format, Chapter command and Automatic Kerning at the paragraph level using the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command. The kerning settings in both cases are on the Typography tab.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	If you have Type 1, TrueType or printer fonts with the same name on your system, the font list in the Edit Kern/Tracking dialog box will show the Type 1 font, but not the others. To edit the TrueType font, remove the Type 1 font from your system using Adobe Type Manager, which is included with VENTURA. Similarly, to edit the printer font, remove the other two. (Use the Windows Control Panel to remove TrueType fonts).

•	VENTURA does not import CorelKERN (or LetrTuc) kerning pair text files.

 Related Topics


Click a font to edit its tracking and kerning. If the font has kerning pairs already defined, they display in the kerning values list. Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly, scrolls the list one font at a time.


Click the font style you want to edit. Most fonts have four styles or variations: normal, bold, italic and bold-italic. Each style has its own set of kerning values which you edit separately.


Click this button to use tracking and kerning values from other documents; to transfer the values in the current document to another document; or to save kerning values in an ASCII text file.


Lists the kerning pairs and values for the selected font.


Click this button to copy the selected kerning pair. Copying a kerning pair(s) allows you to paste the pair and its kerning value to other fonts. After copying the pair, select the font you want to paste it into, then click Paste.

To select multiple consecutive pairs, click them while holding down the SHIFT. Hold down the CTRL key to select non-consecutive pairs.


Click this button to paste a copied kerning pair to the current font.


Displays the kerning pair selected in the Kerning Values list and provides a place for you to type a new pair. After typing a new pair, click the Add button to add it to the list of kerning pairs for the selected font.


Displays the current kerning value for the selected pair. You can change the value by typing a new one or by using the slider bar below the Sample window. The higher the value, the tighter the spacing.

Kerning values are specified in increments of a thousandths of an em. The em is a proportional unit of measurement that gets bigger or smaller at the same rate as the font size.


After typing a new kerning pair, click this button to add it to the list of pairs for the selected font.


Deletes the selected kerning pair from the selected font's list of pairs.


Resets the selected kern pair's kerning values and characters to the default settings.


Resets the kerning values and pairs in the selected font to their default settings.


Shows how the selected kerning pair will look with the current kerning value.


Type the text you want to see with the kerning and/or tracking values you specified, then click the Generate Example button.


Drag the bar to adjust the space between the characters of the selected kerning pair. Using the slider bar is an alternative to typing a value in the Value box.


Click this button to create a document containing sample text so that you can proof the tracking and kerning values.


Click this button to see how text looks with the kerning values specified for the selected font.


Preview dialog box

Enables you to check how the current kerning values effect the appearance of text you specify.


Shows you how text looks with the kerning values currently specified for the selected font.


Type the text that you want to see kerned.


Type a value to see how the kerning values affect the appearance of the sample text at different point sizes.


Import/Export Kerning dialog box

Adds the kerning values of all selected fonts used in another document to the current document. You can also use this dialog box to save the kerning values in the current document in an ASCII text file and add values contained in such files to the current document. Saving values in an ASCII file allows you to edit them in a word processor or other text editor. After editing the values, update them in the document using this dialog box.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	VENTURA does not import CorelKERN (or LetrTuc) kerning pair text files.


Adds the kerning values contained in an ASCII text file to the current document. If the file contains values for fonts used in the current document, the values in the file will replace them.


Replaces the kerning values in the current document with those from another document.


Saves the kerning values for the selected font in an ASCII text file which you can edit in a word processor or other text editor.


Closes the dialog box.


Tracking & Kerning Properties, Tracking dialog box
Tracking & Kerning Properties, Tracking

Customizes the tracking for any font installed on your system. The adjustments you make in this dialog box apply to the current document only; the fonts themselves remain unchanged. After editing the tracking of a particular font, you use this dialog box to apply the new values to other documents that use the same font.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	If you have Type 1, TrueType or printer fonts with the same name on your system, the font list in the Edit Kern/Tracking dialog box will show the Type 1 font, but not the others. To edit the TrueType font, remove the Type 1 font from your system using Adobe Type Manager, which is included with VENTURA. Similarly, to edit the printer font, remove the other two. (Use the Windows Control Panel to remove TrueType fonts).

 Related Topics


Enable this option to see the effect that changing the track settings has on sample text.


Enable this option to display the value of each track setting as a line on a graph. The horizontal axis of the graph represents the font size, while the vertical axis represents the track value. The height of the lines represents how loose or tight the track becomes at specific point sizes.

The current tracking values for the specified point size appear as points on the lines. Dragging the points vertically changes the tracking value; dragging horizontally changes the point size. To add a point, click a track line while holding down the ALT key. To delete a point, click the point while holding down the ALT key. To restore the default values, click the graph with the right mouse button and select Reset to Default.


Displays the currently selected track setting. You can select a new track setting from the list box or click the scroll buttons.


Displays the current value of the Very Tight track setting. To change the setting, type a value in this box or click the scroll buttons.


Displays the current value of the Tight track setting. To change the setting, type a value in this box or click the scroll buttons.


Displays the current value of the Normal track setting. To change the setting, type a value in this box or click the scroll buttons.


Displays the current value of the Loose track setting. To change the setting, type a value in this box or click the scroll buttons.


Displays the current value of the Very Loose track setting. To change the setting, type a value in this box or click the scroll buttons.


Displays the point size of the selected font. To edit the tracking for a different point size, type the size in this box or click the scroll buttons.


Adjusts the level of magnification in the graph window. Increase the magnification to make more precise adjustments to the tracking values using the graph. Increasing the magnification too much moves the tracking lines out of view. To bring them back into view, either reduce the magnification or use the scroll bars to scroll the graph window.


Click these buttons to scroll the graph window.


Provides a place for you to type text to display in the sample window or shows the highlighted text in the active document. After typing, click a control in the dialog box to update the display in the sample window.


Shows how text will look with the tracking values you specify. You can change the text that appears here by typing in the Sample box.

To restore the selected font's default tracking values, right-click the sample window, then select Reset to Default.


Import Tracking dialog box


Import Tracking dialog box

Imports tracking values from other documents for use in the current document.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Click this button to select the document containing the tracking values you want to use in the current document.


Generate Tracking/Kerning Sample dialog box

Creates a document containing sample text in specified fonts so that you proof the tracking and kerning values. To view the document, select it from the list at the bottom of the Windows menu.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


List the fonts installed on your system. To generate sample text tracked and kerned in a particular font, click the checkbox next to the font name.

Lists the available font sizes for the selected font. To generate samples at particular point sizes, click the size then click the Add button.


Lists the font sizes at which the sample text will be generated.


Click this button to generate the sample text at the selected font size.


Click this button to remove the font size from the list of sizes to generate.


Click this button to generate samples at all font sizes in the list.


Click this button to remove all font sizes from the list of sizes to generate.


Enable this option to generate sample text tracked according to the specified values. Disable it to generate kerned text only.


Ruling Lines dialog box


Ruling Lines, Ruling Line dialog box
Ruling Lines Properties, Ruling Line

Applies ruling lines (borders) to paragraphs or frames. Use the settings on this page to define basic ruling line styles consisting of a single, solid line. To define styles with as many as three lines, use the settings on the Line Style page.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Drag the button to set the width of the ruling lines selected in the preview box. The width is specified in points, a unit of measurement in which an inch equals 72 points.


Click this button to change the color of the ruling line.


Specify a preset line style for the ruling line. To create your own styles use the controls on the Advanced tab.


Puts a box around the selected paragraph or frame.

Note: A ruling box placed around a multi-line paragraph is only as wide as the first list line.


Puts a drop-shadow box around the selected paragraph or frame.

Note: The box that makes up the drop shadow is only as wide as the first list line of the paragraph.


Removes all ruling lines around the selected paragraph or frame


Puts a ruling line above the selected paragraph or along the top edge of the selected frame.


Puts a ruling line below the selected paragraph or along the bottom edge of the selected frame.


Puts a ruling line above and below the selected paragraph or along the top and bottom edges of the selected frame.


Puts a ruling line along the left side of the selected paragraph or frame.


Puts a ruling line along the right side of the selected paragraph or frame.


Shows you the results of the ruling line settings before you apply them to the selected element. To add or remove lines from the selected element, click the sides of the box in the preview.


Click this button to place the ruling line so that it extends inside the border of the frame.


Click this button to place the ruling line so that it extends outside the border of the frame.


Lists the ruling line style available on your system. To modify a style, select it from this list box. To add a new style, type a name in this box and click the + button. To remove a style, select it and click the - button.


Click this button after typing a name for a new ruling line style in the Presets box.


Click this button after selecting the ruling line style you want to delete from your system.


Specify whether you want the ruling line to extend in or out from the border of the frame.


Ruling Lines Properties, Advanced dialog box
Ruling Lines Properties, Advanced

Modifies attributes for ruling line styles consisting of as many as three lines. To define attributes for basic ruling line styles consisting of a single, solid line, use the settings on Ruling Line tab.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Note

•	If you need to remove space above a ruling line, you can enter a negative value in the number box on the bottom right. This makes the ruling line appear to be on top of the text or object to which it is assigned.


Enable this option to create a ruling line style that puts a box around the frame or paragraph. In the # column, enable the check boxes for each line you want to include in the style.


Enable this option to remove the ruling lines from the ruling line style.


Enable this option to create a custom ruling line style.


 Shows the attributes defined in the selected ruling line style.

To add a line, enable the check box in the # column. To change the size (thickness) or space above or below a line, click the current value then type a new one. To change the color or style of the rule, click the color swatch or pen icon then make your selection from the color palette or dialog box that appears.

 Note

•	If you need to remove space above a ruling line, you can enter a negative value in the number box on the bottom right. This makes the ruling line appear to be on top of the text or object to which it is assigned.


If Custom is selected in the Width list, enter the custom width for the current rule.


Defines a custom indent from the left for the current rule. This option is available only when Custom is selected under Border width.


Enable this option to have the ruling line print over objects beneath it. This option is relevant only when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting click [image].


Specify whether you want the ruling line to extend the width of the paragraph or the column or frame it's in. To specify a custom width, select Custom and type a width in the Custom Width box.


Override Counter dialog box


Override Counter dialog box

Restarts numbering of counters from the selected point to the end of the current chapter. You can also change the numbering style, but the change affects only the current page or frame.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Enable this option to continue numbering from the last counter. If this option is enabled, the Starting Number box is unavailable.


Enter a new starting number for the selected counter. Numbering continues from the number you specify through the remainder of the chapter. This option is unavailable when Increment From Last Counter is enabled.


Click a numbering style in this list. The numbering style you select applies only to the selected page or frame.


Table of Contents/Index Properties dialog box


Table of Contents/Index Properties, Table of Contents dialog box
Table of Contents/Index Properties, Table of Contents

Generates a file containing a table of contents or list such as a list of figures or tables. In addition to specifying the content of the list, you define the page numbering format that's used and the title that appears at the top of the list. After generating the list, add it to the document [image] usually in a new chapter [image] and format it as you would any other text file.

Whenever you make changes to the document that affect the table of contents or list, you can use this dialog box or the Navigator to update the table of contents or list. For example, if you add a section to the document, you need to update the table of contents so that it contains the section's headings.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Type a title for the table of contents or list, then click the [image] button. To edit the setup information for an existing list, select it from this list.

Unless you specify otherwise in the File box under Location, VENTURA uses the title you type to name the text file containing the table of contents.

Note: If you decide to change the title of the table of contents after specifying the setup information, do it using the Navigator. Otherwise, you'll need to re-enter the setup information.


After typing a title for a new table of contents or list, click this button to add it to the active document.


Click this button to delete the selected table of contents or list from the active document.


Type or select the number of levels you want to appear in the table of contents or list. The levels are determined by paragraphs tags assigned to the headings in the document. You can have up to 10 levels.


Shows the setup information for each level in the selected table of contents or list. For more details about the setup information, click


Specify which chapter you want the text file containing the table of contents added to.


Type a name for the text file containing the table of contents. By default, VENTURA uses the name you typed in the Title box as the filename.


If you want the page and/or chapter numbers to have different text attributes than the tag, select the corresponding codes in the Prefix/Suffix column, and click the Attribute button.


Specify the numbering format for each level; for example, page number only ([P#]) or chapter and page number ([P#]-[C#]).

Choose Tab Character to insert a tab (¬) which will align the page number in the table of contents or list with the right margin. If you prefer to have the number appear immediately after the text for each entry, leave the tab out. To remove a tab, click the entry under the Paragraph and press Delete.

The Insert button becomes available when you click in the Prefix or Suffix column.


Click this button to update the table of contents to reflect changes to the settings in this dialog box or the content of the document.


Table of Contents/Index Properties, Index dialog box
Table of Contents/Index Properties, Index

Sets up and compiles an index from markers inserted in the document. The setup information you specify includes the title which will appear at the beginning of the index, the numbering format and the separator (spaces, tabs or punctuation) used to separate the entry text from the page numbers and the page numbers from one another.

After generating the index, add it to the document [image] usually in a new chapter [image] and format it as you would any other text file.

Whenever you make changes to the document that affect the index, you can use this dialog box or the Navigator to re-generate it so that it's up to date. For example, if you add more index entries to the document, you need to update the index to include the new entries.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Type a title for the index, then click the [image] button. To edit the setup information for an existing index, select it from this list.


After typing a title for a new index, click this button to add it to the active document.


Click this button to delete the selected index selected from the active document.


Shows the setup information which determines the format of the entries in the index.

Click in the Number format column and choose a preset numbering format or click the Insert button and create your own. The presets show a combination of chapter [C#] and page numbers [P#] either with or without prefixes such as "Pg" and "Chp."

In the Prefix and Suffix columns, type any text you want to appear before or after the page number.


Click the character you want to use to separate the numbers in entries that occur on more than one page.


If you want the numbers to have different text attributes than the text, select the # symbol in the Index Text box and click the Attribute button.


Click this button to create a custom numbering format.

To align the page numbers in the index with the right margin, position the insertion point in front of the entry in the Number Format, then click Tab Character (¬). Leave the tab out to have the number appear immediately after the text for each entry.


Click this button to update the index to reflect changes to the settings in this dialog box or the content of the document.


Shows the current prefixes for entries which direct readers to other terms in an index. You can type another prefix if the ones provided don't suit your needs.


Enable this option to place an A before entries starting with A, a B before the B entries and so on.


Specify which chapter you want the text file containing the index added to.


Type a name for the text file containing the index. By default, VENTURA uses the name you typed in the Title box as the filename.


Shows the categories names in a segregated index. Disable the check box next to a category to exclude its entries from the index. To generate a non-segregated index [image] i.e., one that includes entries from all categories [image] enable the Default check box.

For more information about segregated indexes, click [image].


Manage Tag List dialog box


Manage Tag List
Manage Tag List dialog box

Lists all tags in the active document and provides access to other dialog boxes for adding, editing, deleting, renaming, merging tags from other documents, and assigning shortcut keys to them.

Renaming tags may affect the formatting of other documents that are linked to the same stylesheet through the Library. If, for example, you rename a paragraph tag and that tag is used in other documents, VENTURA will reformat the paragraphs in those documents with the Body Text tag. The tag will assume the attributes defined in the Body Text tag and its name will appear in uppercase letters in the Tags list.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	You cannot rename generated tags (tags with names starting with Z_).

 Related Topics


Lists the tags of the type shown on the dialog box tab that are in the current stylesheet. Clicking the tag name selects the tag. To delete or rename a tag, click the tag with the right mouse button, then click the appropriate command from the pop-up menu that appears. Clicking the Tag List button inverts the sort order of tags in the list.


Click this button to add a new tag to the current stylesheet.


Click this button to delete the selected tag from the current stylesheet.


Click this button to edit the attributes of the tag selected in the Tag List.


Click this button to add tags from other stylesheets to the current stylesheet.


Click this button to assign shortcut keys to paragraph tags.


Add Paragraph Tag dialog box


Add Tag dialog box

Adds a new tag to the current stylesheet. When you add a new tag, you must base it on an existing tag. You will end up with two tags with identical attributes. You then modify the new tag so that it has the attributes you want.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Type a name for the new tag.


Click the tag that has attributes similar to those you want in the new tag.


Click a tag type to categorize the tag according to the type of paragraph (heading, list item, table text etc.) you will be applying it to. If you're using the Tags window, you can sort the tags by type. To use the Tags window, you must add it to a menu or toolbar using the Tools, Customize command.


Click the tag you want VENTURA to apply to the next paragraph when you press ENTER.


Delete Paragraph Tag dialog box


Delete Tag dialog box

Deletes tags from the current stylesheet. Any item in the document [image] and in other documents that are linked to the same stylesheet through the Library [image] formatted with the deleted tag will be reformatted using another tag of your choice.

You cannot delete the Body Text paragraph tag or the Default frame tag.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click the tag you want to delete from the current stylesheet. You cannot delete the Body Text paragraph tag or the Default frame tag.


Click the tag you want to use to format items assigned the deleted tag.


Rename Tag dialog box


Rename Tag dialog box

Changes the name of tags in the active document. You cannot rename generated paragraph tags (tags with names starting with Z_), the Default frame tag, or the built-in character tags (Bold, Underline and Italic).

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Select the tag you want to rename.


Type a new name for the selected tag.


Merge Paragraph Tag(s) dialog box


Merge Tags dialog box

Adds tags in another VENTURA 7 document, chapter or in a stylesheet from previous versions of VENTURA to the current document.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Lists tags in the document, chapter or stylesheet selected using the Merge button. Click the tags you want to add to the current stylesheet.

If a tag by the same name already exists in the active document, a dialog box appears asking whether you want to overwrite the tag in the active document. Click No, to keep the tag in the active document.

You cannot merge the Body Text paragraph tag or the Default frame tag.


Click this button to select all the tags in the Tag List. To deselect a tag, click it.


Shows the location of the document, chapter or stylesheet containing the tags you are merging with the active document.


Merge Tag Information


Click No to keep the tag in the stylesheet the active document is using.


Click Yes to replace the tag in the active document with the one in the selected stylesheet.


Click Rename to keep the tag in the active document. VENTURA appends a number to the name of the merged tag to distinguish it from the identically named tag in the active document.


Shows the name of a tag that already exists in the active document.


Set Tag Shortcut Keys dialog box


Set Tags Shortcut Keys dialog box

Assigns key combinations to as many as ten paragraph tags in the current stylesheet.

The key combinations you assign for one stylesheet can be reused in another even though the tag names may differ. For example, suppose in one stylesheet, the tag name for the level 1 heading is "Heading 1", while in another it's "Level 1 Head". To assign the same key combination to both tags, use the Tools, Customize command (or the Customize button in this dialog box) to assign the combination to a Common Tag. Then use this dialog box to map that Common Tag to the Heading 1 and Level 1 Head tags.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Lists the paragraph tags in the current stylesheet and the shortcut key combinations assigned to them. To add new shortcut keys or change existing ones, click Customize.

To reassign the current shortcut keys, click in the Common Tags column, then select the name that corresponds to the shortcut key you want to reassign.


Shows the key combination assigned to the tag.


Click this button to assign a key combination to a tag.


Paragraph Properties dialog box, Font tab


Paragraph Properties, Font dialog box
Paragraph Properties, Font

Modifies the font, style (such as bold and italics), font size, color and attributes (such as underline and strike-thru) of the selected paragraph.

Changes you make using the Paragraph Tag command apply to both the selected paragraph and its tag. Changes made using the Paragraph Overrides command apply to the selected paragraph only.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click the font you want to apply to the selected paragraph. Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly, scrolls down the list one font at a time.

To see samples of the fonts, click the list with the right mouse button and select Show Font Preview.

A font with a [image] next to its name is a font that's used in the active document but is not installed on your system. The PANOSE font matching system substitutes another font (the one appearing in brackets) for the missing font.


Click the font style you want to apply to the selected paragraph. The availability of styles depends on the font.


Type or select the font size you want to apply to the selected paragraph. To change the units, click the Size box with the right mouse button, and select Units.


Click the Font color button to change the color of the text in the selected paragraph.


Click the color button to change the background color of the selected paragraph.


Click this button to change the color or outline of the text in the selected paragraph.

Note: Applying fountain, texture or pattern fills to large quantities of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.


Click this button to use one of the other types of fills [image] for example, fountains or patterns [image] as the background for the selected paragraph.

Note: Applying fountain, texture or pattern fills to large quantities of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.


Select the predefined text string, you want to insert before or after the paragraph formatted with the current tag. Define the text string using the Format, Publication command.

For more information, click [image].


Enable this option to underline the selected paragraph.

The thickness of the underline and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of this  dialog box.


Enable this option to format the selected paragraph with a double-underline.

The thickness of the underlines and their distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of this dialog box.


Enable this option to apply a line over the selected paragraph.

The thickness of the overscore line and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of this dialog box.


Enable this option to apply a line through the selected paragraph.

The thickness of the strike-thru line and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of this dialog box.


Enable this option to underline words in the selected paragraph, not the space between them.

The thickness of the underline and its distance from the text are determined by settings on the Default page of this dialog box.


Enable this option to display text in the selected paragraph in uppercase letters.


Enable this option to have the paragraph print over the background color. This option is relevant only when printing color separations and should be enabled for most work. For more information about overprinting click [image].


Enable this option to have the paragraph's background print over objects beneath it. This option is relevant only when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, click [image].


Enable this option to extend the background to the edge of the column.


If you are working in Tag mode, select the paragraph tag you want to change.


Paragraph Properties dialog box, Effects tab


Paragraph Properties, Effects dialog box
Paragraph Properties, Effects

Formats the selected text with a bullet or drop cap and changes the attributes (font, size, vertical shift etc.) of the bullet character or drop cap character.

Changes you make using the Paragraph Tag command apply to both the selected paragraph and its tag. Changes made using the Paragraph Overrides command apply to the selected paragraph only.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Enable this option to add a bullet character to the paragraph or change the attributes of the paragraph's bullet character.


Click the font you want to apply to the drop cap character(s) or the font containing the character you want to use as the bullet character. (Fonts such as Zapf Dingbats, Wingdings and Common Bullets have a large selection of interesting bullet characters.)

To see samples of the fonts, click the list with the right mouse button and select Show Font Preview.


Click the font style you want to apply to the bullet character or the drop cap character(s). The availability of styles depends on the font.


Type or select the font size you want to apply to the bullet character or the drop cap character(s). To change the units, click the Size box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Click the Font color button to change the color of the bullet character or the drop cap character(s).


Click the color button to change the background color of the bullet character or the drop cap character(s).


Click this button to change the color of the bullet character or the drop cap character(s).


 Click this button to use one of the other types of fills [image] for example, fountains or patterns [image] as the background for the bullet character or the drop cap character(s).

Note: Applying fountain, texture or pattern fills to large quantities of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.


Enable this option to underline the bullet character or the drop cap character(s).


Enable this option to format the bullet character or the drop cap character(s) with a double-underline.


Enable this option to place a line over the bullet character or the drop cap character(s).


Enable this option to place a line through the bullet character or the drop cap character(s).


Displays the current bullet character. To use a different character, click this button then click the character you want to use as the bullet.


Type the ANSI number of the character you want to use as the bullet. Typing an ANSI number is an alternative to selecting the character from the Character list.

To determine a character's ANSI number select it in the Symbol dialog box (click Insert, Insert Item, Symbol) and look for the three-digit number as the top of the dialog box.


Enter the distance between the bullet character and the text. To have text after the first line begin at the left margin, enable Indent First Line Only.


Enter the distance from the baseline you want to shift the drop cap or bullet character. Positive numbers shift the character up; negative numbers shift it down.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Shift up box, then choose Units.


Enable this option to indent only the first line of text after the bullet, not the entire paragraph.


Enable this option to add a drop cap character(s) to the paragraph or change the attributes of the paragraph's drop cap character(s).


Enable this option to set the number of lines you want the character to drop. If you leave this option disabled, VENTURA will decide the number of lines based on the size of the drop cap.


Enter the number of characters in the paragraph you want to drop or raise.


Enter the number of lines you want the character to drop. To create a raised cap, set this value to one. You must enable Custom Spacing to use this setting.


Click this button to switch between preset bullet or drop cap formats and advanced controls for formatting the bullet or drop cap the way you want.


Click a picture to apply a preset bullet or drop cap format.


Enable this option to have the bullet character or drop cap character print over the background color. This option is relevant only when printing color separations and should be enabled for most work. For more information about overprinting, click [image].


Enable this option to have the background of the bullet or drop cap character print over objects beneath it. This option is relevant only when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, click [image].


Paragraph Properties dialog box, Align tab


Paragraph Properties, Alignment dialog box
Paragraph Properties, Align

Sets a paragraph's indents and alignment.

Changes you make using the Paragraph Tag command apply to both the selected paragraph and its tag. Changes made using the Paragraph Overrides command apply to the selected paragraph only.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Specify the paragraph's horizontal position within its frame, column, or page.


Specify the paragraph's vertical position within its frame, column, or page. Top is the usual alignment for text on the base page. Using Middle or Bottom on the base page forces succeeding paragraphs to the next page, frame or column.

Choose Absolute to start the paragraph a specific distance from the top of the page, then type the distance in the adjacent box. The paragraph will always start at that position, which may result in the preceding paragraphs overlapping this one.


If Absolute is selected from the Vertical list, specify the distance from the top of the page, you want the paragraph to start.

Once you have set the position, text added to the paragraph above does not push the current paragraph down; instead, the text from the two paragraphs overlaps.


Set characters specified using the Format, Chapter command (General tab) outside the margins. Hanging punctuation eliminates the visual misalignment that occurs when punctuation falls at the beginning or end of lines.

For more information, click [image].


Specify whether you want the paragraph alignment and indents to take effect on a left page, right page or both (All).


Type the amount of space you want between the paragraph and the left margin.


Type the amount of space you want between the paragraph and the right margin.


Type the number of lines in the paragraph you want to indent.


Type the amount of space you want between the left margin and the indented line(s). To make the first line hang out to the left of the other lines in the paragraph, enter a negative value.


Enable this option to indent the first line of the paragraph by an amount equal to the width of the last line of the previous paragraph.


Enter how far from the right margin you want the alignment point for decimal aligned paragraphs to be.


Type the character you want to use as the alignment character. You can type any character available on the keyboard. The default is a period. To use a character that is not available on the keyboard, enter its ANSI number in the ANSI box.

To determine a character's ANSI number, select it in the Symbol dialog box (click Insert, Insert Item, Symbol) and look for the three-digit number at the top of the dialog box.


To use an alignment character that is not available on the keyboard, type its ANSI number. To determine a character's ANSI number, select it in the Symbol dialog box (click Insert, Insert Item, Symbol) and look for the three-digit number at the top of the dialog box


Click this button to switch between preset alignments and advanced controls for aligning the paragraph the way you want.


Click a picture to apply a preset alignment or line indent.


Paragraph Properties dialog box, Defaults tab


Paragraph Properties, Defaults dialog box
Paragraph Properties, Defaults

Customizes text attributes such as underline thickness, subscript character size and character tracking for the selected paragraph. You can also use this dialog box to specify the tag VENTURA automatically applies to the next paragraph when you press ENTER.

Changes you make using the Paragraph Tag command apply to both the selected paragraph and its tag. Changes made using the Paragraph Overrides command apply to the selected paragraph only.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Enter a thickness for the overscore line.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size or style changes.


Enter the distance you want between the overscore and the baseline of the text. A positive value moves the overscore away from the baseline; a negative value moves it closer.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size or style changes.


Enter a thickness for the strike-thru line.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size or style changes.


Enter the distance you want between the strike-thru line and the baseline of the text. A positive value moves the strike-through line away from the baseline; a negative value moves it closer.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size or style changes.


Enter a thickness for the single underline or the top line of the double-underline.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size or style changes.


Enter the distance you want between the underline and the baseline of the paragraph. A positive value moves the underline away from the baseline; a negative value moves it closer.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size or style changes.


Enter a thickness for the bottom line of the double-underline.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size style changes.


Enable this option to extend underlines, strike-thru lines, and overscore lines the full width of the column regardless of how many characters are selected.


Enter the distance you want between the bottom line of the double-underline and the baseline of the text. A positive value moves the underline away from the baseline; a negative value moves it closer.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size or style changes.


Click the tracking setting you want to apply to the paragraph or selected text. Tracking is the overall spacing between characters in a paragraph.

Select an option in the list to apply predefined amounts of tracking or select Custom and enter a tracking value in the Ems box. You can adjust the predefined tracking values using the Format, Tracking & Kerning command.


Enter the amount of spacing you want between characters in the paragraph. A positive value increases inter-character spacing; a negative value decreases it.

Tracking values are specified in ems, which is a unit of measure roughly equal to the width of the widest letter in the current font.


Enter a font size for superscript character(s) formatted using the Format, Selected Text command.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size or style changes.


Enter the distance you want between superscript character(s) and the baseline of the text.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size or style changes.


Enter a font size for the subscript character(s) formatted using the Format, Selected Text command.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size or style changes.


Enter the distance you want between the subscript character(s) and the baseline of the text.

To change this value, you must disable Auto-adjust to Font; otherwise, VENTURA will automatically adjust the thickness of the line when the font size or style changes.


Enable this option to automatically update all settings in the Default dialog box when the paragraph font size or style is changed. Changes will be proportionate to the paragraph font size or style.


Click the name of the paragraph tag you want VENTURA to apply to the next paragraph. When you press ENTER to begin a new paragraph, VENTURA will format it with the tag you specify.


Specify the size you want for text formatted as small capitals using the Format, Selected Text command.


Paragraph Properties dialog box, Space tab


Paragraph Properties, Space dialog box
Paragraph Properties, Space

Controls the spacing between paragraphs and lines as well as the paragraph's angle of rotation.

Changes you make using the Paragraph Tag command apply to both the selected paragraph and its tag. Changes made using the Paragraph Overrides command apply to the selected paragraph only.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Enter the exact amount of space you want added between the current paragraph and the paragraph above it.

If the space Above setting for the current paragraph is greater than the space Below setting for the preceding paragraph, VENTURA uses the larger of the two settings. For more information about calculating total space between paragraphs, click [image].


Enter the exact amount of space you want added between the current paragraph and the one below it.

If the space Below value for the current paragraph is greater than space Above value for the preceding paragraph, VENTURA uses the larger of the two settings. For more information about calculating total space between paragraphs, click [image].


Enter the exact amount of space you want between lines of text in the paragraph. Typical values for body text (text 8 to 13 points in size) is 120 to 130%. Larger font sizes generally requires less inter-line spacing: 100 to 120%.


Enter the exact amount of space you want between identical paragraphs. This spacing only takes effect between paragraphs with identical Inter-Paragraph spacing. This setting is useful when you want the space between the body paragraphs to be greater than the space between the headings and the body paragraphs.

If the space Below value for a paragraph and the space Above value for the next paragraph differ, VENTURA sets the spacing to the larger of the two. For more information about calculating total space between paragraphs, click [image].


Use this setting in conjunction with the Auto-adjust setting to specify how VENTURA adjusts spacing when the paragraph's font size changes. See Help for Auto-adjust for more information.


Specify how you want spacing adjusted when the font size of the paragraph changes.

Select	To
Add	change the spacing by an absolute amount, so that if you increase the font size by two points, the spacing increases by two points also.
Percentage	change spacing in proportion to the font size. For example, in a paragraph with 10 point type and 12 points of inter-line spacing, increasing the point size by two points (a 20% increase) adds 2.4 points (20% of 12) to the inter-line spacing value.
None	If you don't want VENTURA to automatically update spacing if the paragraph font size changes.


Type the angle that you want to rotate the paragraph.


Enter the maximum amount of vertical space you want the paragraph to occupy. If the line length of a paragraph rotated 90 or 270 degrees exceeds the limit, VENTURA wraps the text to the next line. For paragraphs rotated 180 degrees, this setting controls the vertical position.


Enable this option to increase inter-line spacing to accommodate characters larger than the normal paragraph font.

Note: This option should be disabled to properly flow text around frames anchored in a line of text.


Enable this option to add the Above spacing above the paragraph, even if the paragraph is at the top of a column or frame.

Note: This setting must be enabled to increase space above header and footer text and text at the top of a caption or footnote frame.


Enable this option to add the Above spacing above the paragraph, only when it appears at the top of a column or frame. You might use this setting to insert additional space above headings at the top of the page.


Click this button to switch between preset formats for spacing and rotation and advanced controls for setting the spacing and rotation the way you want.


Click a picture to apply preset spacing or rotation.


Paragraph Properties dialog box, Hyphen tab


Paragraph Properties, Hyphens dialog box
Paragraph Properties, Hyphens

Controls automatic hyphenation in the selected paragraph. You can override the automatic hyphenation at any time by inserting discretionary hyphens. However, automatic hyphenation must still be enabled for a paragraph for discretionary hyphens to work.

If you always hyphenate a word differently than VENTURA, or don't want to hyphenate a particular word, you can customize the built-in hyphenation dictionary. For more information, click Related Topics.

Changes you make using the Paragraph Tag command apply to both the selected paragraph and its tag. Changes made using the Paragraph Overrides command apply to the selected paragraph only.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Specify the minimum length of hyphenated words in the paragraph. For example, if you do not want words of less than five characters hyphenated, enter four.

Note: The Hyphenation Zone settings do not apply to words containing discretionary hyphens (i.e., manually inserted hyphens).


Type the minimum number of letters that can precede a hyphen.

Note: The Hyphenation Zone settings do not apply to words containing discretionary hyphens (i.e., manually inserted hyphens).


Type the minimum number of letters that can follow a hyphen.

Note: The Hyphenation Zone settings do not apply to words containing discretionary hyphens (i.e., manually inserted hyphens).


Enable this option to allow hyphenation of the last word in a column or page.


Enable this option to allow hyphenation of the last word in a paragraph.


Enable this option to allow hyphenation of uppercase words such as a product name.


Enable this option to have VENTURA automatically hyphenate text in the paragraph using the dictionary selected in the Dictionary list. To use only discretionary hyphens instead of automatic hyphens throughout the chapter, click Format, Chapter and enable Use Discretionary Hyphens on the Typography tab.


Click the language dictionary you want VENTURA to use when hyphenating the paragraph.

To use only discretionary (manually inserted) hyphens, select Discretionary Hyphenation Only. You must also enable Override Dictionary Hyphens in Words with Discretionary in the Chapter, Typography dialog box (Format menu).


Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can end with a hyphen.


Enable this option if you do not want to place a limit on the number of lines that can end with a hyphen.


Paragraph Properties dialog box, Typography tab


Paragraph Properties, Typography dialog box
Paragraph Properties, Typography

Adjusts the spacing between letters and lines, turns automatic kerning on and off, and sets limits on the amount of spacing added to the paragraph during vertical justification.

Changes you make using the Paragraph Tag command apply to both the selected paragraph and its tag. Changes made using the Paragraph Overrides command apply to the selected paragraph only.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enter the minimum and maximum amount of space allowed between words in justified paragraphs. You can set spacing as either a proportion of the font's regular word spacing, or in fractions of an em. An em is a relative unit of measure roughly equal to the width of the capital M at the current font size. Since the value is relative to the font size, you do not need to change the word spacing values when the font size changes.

Note: In some cases, VENTURA is forced to exceed the Max Word Spacing value. When this occurs, the result is a "loose line" with unattractive word spacing. To highlight loose lines, click Tools, Options and enable the Loose Lines option on the View tab. For information about how to deal with loose lines, see Help for Automatic Letter Spacing.


Enable this option to allow VENTURA to add space between letters as well as words, when it justifies lines.

This feature is commonly used in newspapers and other documents with narrow columns. It attempts to improve the appearance of loose lines, which result when VENTURA is forced to exceed the Max Word Spacing value in order to justify the line. You can show loose lines, by clicking the Tools, Options command and enabling the Loose Lines option.

Use the Maximum Limit setting to specify the maximum amount of space that can be added between letters.

For more information about spacing of justified text, see the Help for Min Word Spacing  or Max Word Spacing.


Enter the maximum amount of space that VENTURA can add between letters in justified text when Automatic Letter Spacing is enabled.

This setting is specified in ems, which is a unit of measure roughly equal to the width of the capital M at the current font size. Since the value is relative to the font size, you do not need to change the setting when the font size changes.


Enter the maximum amount of vertical space VENTURA can add above and below the paragraph and between lines in the paragraph as it vertically justifies columns. These settings apply only when Vertical Justification is enabled using the Format, Chapter, Typography command.

For more information about Vertical Justification, click [image].


Enter the amount of space you want between words of unjustified text. A proportional value of 100 uses the default word spacing built into each font. In most instances, you do not need to change the default setting. For text set in large size, such as headlines, you may want to reduce the word spacing to fit on a single line or any other amount of space.

You can set spacing as either a proportion of the font's regular word spacing or in fractions of an em. An em is a relative unit of measure roughly equal to the width of the capital M at the current font size. Since the value is relative to the font size, you do not need to change the word spacing values when the font size changes.


Enable this option to apply pair kerning to the paragraph. Automatic Kerning adjusts the spacing between certain pairs of letters such as AW and is recommended for headlines and text set in larger type (14 points or more). For kerning to take effect, it must be enabled for the chapter, paragraph and the frame containing the paragraph.

For more information about kerning, click [image].


Paragraph Properties dialog box, Tabs tab


Paragraph Properties, Tabs dialog box
Paragraph Properties, Tabs

Controls the location and alignment of tab stops and determines the type of leader character used to fill the space created by the tab. You can also set tab stops using the tab bar on the horizontal ruler.

Changes you make using the Paragraph Tag command apply to both the selected paragraph and its tag. Changes made using the Paragraph Overrides command apply to the selected paragraph only.

 Note

•	This tab of the Paragraph Properties dialog box uses the same ansi character as the Align tab. You can modify the ansi character using the Decimal Alignment controls on the advanced page of the Align tab (click Format, Align, Advanced).

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Lists any tab stops set in the selected paragraph. To add a tab stop, click the Add Tab button, then enter a position in the highlighted box in the Position column. To change the position of a tab stop, click it then type a new position. To delete a tab, click it, then click Delete Tab. To change the alignment, click in the Align column. To add leader characters, click in the Leader column and type or select a character.

To use a character that is not available on the keyboard, hold down the ALT key and type its ANSI number using the numeric keypad. To determine a character's ANSI number, select it in the Symbol dialog box (click Insert, Insert Item, Symbol) and look for the three-digit number at the top of the dialog box.


Click this button to set evenly-spaced tab stops at the interval specified in the adjacent box.


Enter the amount of space you want between all tab stops in the selected paragraph, then click the Set Tabs Every button.


Click this button to add a tab stop at the location specified in the Position column.


Click this button to delete the selected tab stop.


Enter a number from 0 to 9 to set the space between the leader characters. The higher the number, the greater the spacing.


Click or type the character you want to use to fill the space between the end of the paragraph and the right margin.

To use a character that is not available on the keyboard, hold down the ALT key and type its ANSI number using the numeric keypad. To determine a character's ANSI number, select it in the Symbol dialog box (click Insert, Insert Item, Symbol) and look for the three-digit number at the top of the dialog box.


To use a leader character that is not available in the Leader Character list, type its ANSI number. To determine a character's ANSI number select it in the Symbol dialog box (click Insert, Insert Item, Symbol) and look for the three-digit number at the top of the dialog box.


Paragraph Properties dialog box, Breaks tab


Paragraph Properties, Breaks dialog box
Paragraph Properties, Breaks

Controls the paragraph's position relative to other paragraphs and whether two consecutive paragraphs should be kept together on the same page or in the same column.

After a break, the next paragraph can begin on a new line, at the top of a new column, at the top of a new page, or at the top of the next left or right page. The break can occur before, after, or, both before and after the paragraph.

Changes you make using the Paragraph Tag command apply to both the selected paragraph and its tag. Changes made using the Paragraph Overrides command apply to the selected paragraph only.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Specify where the page break will occur in relation to the paragraph. To force a paragraph to the next page, for example, select Before. Selecting Before/Until Left or Before/Until Right forces the paragraph to a left page or a right page, inserting a blank page if necessary.


Specify where the column break will occur in relation to the paragraph. To force a paragraph to the top of the next column, for example, select Column Break, Before.


Specify whether space is added between the paragraph and the one before or after it. Select After (the default setting for most paragraphs) to put the line break after the paragraph, forcing the next paragraph to a new line. Selecting None for one paragraph and After for the following paragraph puts them on the same line. Use this setting and the Add Width of Preceding Line setting in the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box (Alignment tab) to create a run-in heading.


Determines the vertical position of the paragraph when no line break exists between it and the one preceding it. Enable this option to place the beginning of the paragraph on the same line as the first line of the previous paragraph. Disable it to place the paragraph next to the last line.

Note: To prevent the paragraph from overlapping the one preceding it, enable Add Width of Preceding Line setting in the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box (Alignment tab).


Controls whether breaks are allowed within the paragraph. If there is not enough room for the entire paragraph at the bottom of a page or column, the paragraph will be sent to the next page or column.


Enable this option to keep the selected paragraph and the one following it together on the same page or column. If there is not enough room for both paragraphs, VENTURA moves them to the next page or column. Use this option to keep a heading with the paragraph that follows it together.


Enable this option to keep the selected paragraph and the one preceding it together on the same page (or column). If there is not enough room for both paragraphs, VENTURA moves both to the next page (or column). Use this option to keep a heading with the paragraph that follows it.


Enable this option to have the paragraph span all columns in a multi-column layout. If you use this option, you should also enable Column Balance for the frame, otherwise text may not flow properly between columns. For information about Column Balancing, click [image].

To make the paragraph span only some, rather than all columns, use the Span Columns setting in this dialog box.


Enter the number of columns you want paragraphs in a multi-column layout to span.


Click the name of the paragraph tag you want VENTURA to apply to the paragraph before or after the break.


Object Conditions dialog box


Object Conditions dialog box

Marks the selected item as belonging to one or more versions of a conditional document. You can associate an item with any number of versions by applying a condition to it. For example, to have a picture appear in each version when you view or print it, apply all the conditions to the picture's frame.

You define the conditions and specify which version(s) to view or print using the Format, Publication command.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Lists the conditions assigned to the selected item.


Lists the conditions defined for the active document using the Format, Publication command. Select a condition and click Add to apply it to the selected item.

Use the And, Or and Not buttons to include or exclude the item from each version of the conditional document. See Help for these buttons for more information.


Click this button to apply another condition to the selected item so that it appears in those versions of the document.

For example, in a document consisting of two versions [image] French and English [image] apply the French condition, click the And button, then apply the English condition.


Click this button to apply another condition to the selected item so that it appears whenever any of the versions associated with those conditions is viewed or printed.


Click this button to exclude the selected item from the specified version. For example, to exclude an item from one of four versions, double-click the conditional tag associated with the version you want to exclude then click the Not button.


Applies the selected condition to the selected item.


Click this button to define the conditions and to specify which version(s) of the conditional document you want to view or print.


Access Rights dialog box


Access Rights dialog box

Defines read-write privileges for the current document or library making it easy for you to protect the it against unwanted changes. Giving someone write privileges means they can make changes to the document or library. Someone with read privileges can only view the document, or, in the case of libraries, copy items from it. If someone with write privileges has a document or chapter open, others can only open it for viewing purposes [image] even if they have write privileges.

You can assign different privileges to chapters, and stylesheets in each document. The access rights travel with the document allowing you to protect them against unwanted changes when you move or copy it. As an added security measure you can protect your documents and libraries with passwords. Anyone [image] regardless of their read-write privileges [image] wanting to open password-protected documents or libraries must first type the correct password.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enable this checkbox to assign read-write privileges to the active document or library. After assigning the privileges, you can disable them to give all users (not just those in the list) unrestricted access to the document or library.


Shows the names of all your documents, the chapters they contain, the stylesheets plus the names of users and their read-write privileges. For libraries, only users' names and their read-write privileges appear.

To give a user read-write privileges to chapters and stylesheets or the active library, enable the check box next to them. Clear the check box if you only want to give the user read access meaning they cannot make changes.

Enabling the Admin check box gives the user authority to change the read-write privileges or other users.


Click this button to add the name of a user to whom you want to give access to the active document or library and the password they must type to open them. If you prefer, you can omit the password.


Click this button if you no longer want a user to have access to the active document or library. Select the user from the list above before clicking Delete.


Click this button to change the password a user must type to open a document or library. Select the user from the list above before clicking Password.


Add Users dialog box


Add User dialog box

Adds the names of users you want to have access to the active document or library and the passwords (if any) they must enter to open them.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Type the name of the user to whom you want to give access to the active document or library. The name you type is the one the user types to log onto the network.


Type the password the user must enter to open the document or library. If you don't want to oblige the user to enter a password, leave this box blank.


If you typed a password in the New password box, confirm it by retyping it.


Change Password dialog box


Change Password dialog box

Changes or deletes the password a user must type to access the active document or library.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Type the password the user currently enters to access the document or library.


Type a new password for the active document or library.


If you typed a password in the New password box, confirm it by retyping it.


Checkout Status dialog box


Checkout Status dialog box

Shows whether the active document or any of its components (i.e., individual chapters and stylesheet) are checked out and by whom. You must have access rights to a document to check it out. Access rights are granted by the document's creator and by users the creator designates an administrator. Use the Multi-User, Access Rights command in the Tools menu to determine the administrator for any open documents.

 Related Topics


Shows whether the active document or any of its components (i.e., individual chapters and stylesheet) are checked out and by whom.


Check-in Components dialog box


Check-in Components dialog box

The active document is checked out and has changes that have not been saved. Before closing the document, you must check it in with or without saving the changes. To save the changes, click OK. To discard them, clear the check box, then click OK.

 Related Topics


Disable this check box to check in the document without saving changes. To save the changes and check in the document, enable the check box.


Brightness/Contrast/Intensity dialog box


Brightness/Contrast dialog box
Brightness-Contrast-Intensity dialog box

Brightness and contrast represents one of the most fundamental tonal controls in any image-editing program. Almost every image with which you work will benefit from a slight increase (about 10%) in both brightness and contrast. That slight increase will give dull and flat pictures more clarity. Use Brightness to lighten or darken the overall image, or use contrast to change the distinction between light and dark areas. Use Intensity to increase or decrease the overall intensity level of the light in a picture.

•	Brightness
The only component in the color model that has nothing to do with a color value. Controls the amount of light in every pixel. Brightness can destroy an image when it is increased or decreased too much. The Brightness effect expresses values as a percentage. The extremes are -100% (solid black) and +100 (solid white).

•	Contrast
Causes the pixels that are separated by a small difference in shading to be separated by an even greater difference. The Contrast effect expresses values as a percentage. The extremes range from no contrast (-100%) and to extreme contrast (+100%). The Contrast effect only affects adjacent pixels of different shade.

•	Intensity
Similar to a combination of both brightness and contrast. Intensity increases the brightness of the lighter pixels and decreases the brightness of the darker mid-tones and dark pixels. The result is that the image looks brighter without appearing washed-out. The extremes are -100% (zero intensity—image black) and +100% (the image appears to be acceptable on-screen but tends to become grainy when printed.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Determines the amount of black included in each color in an image. Move the slider to the right to increase and to the left to decrease the effect. The number box located to the right of the slider indicates the percentage level of brightness selected in absolute values.


Determines the percentage of image contrast. Contrast refers to the visual distance between dark and light tones in an image. Move the slider to the right to increase and to the left to decrease the effect. The number box located to the right of the slider indicates the percentage level of contrast selected in absolute values.


Determines the percentage of image intensity. Intensity is similar to a combination of brightness and contrast. It increases the brightness of the lighter pixels and decreases the brightness of the darker mid-tones and dark pixels. Move the slider to the right to increase and to the left to decrease the effect. The number box located to the right of the slider indicates the percentage level of intensity selected in absolute values.


Color Halftone dialog box


Halftone dialog box
Color Halftone dialog box

Converts color images into color halftone images. Use the Max Radius slider to control the maximum radius of a halftone dot, and the Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow slider bars to control the channel angle in order to determine the color mixture and to produce a wider range of mixing patterns.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Controls the range of the halftone effect. Move the Max Radius slider bar to the right to set the maximum radius of a halftone dot.


Sets the angle of the cyan color screen. The angle of the screen determines the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Sets the angle of the magenta color screen. The angle of the screen determines the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Sets the angle of the yellow color screen. The angle of the screen determines the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Resample dialog box


Resample dialog box

Enables you to create a larger or a smaller picture. The Resample option accessed in the Import Picture dialog box does not let you enlarge the picture. To increase the picture size, open the file as a full picture and choose Image, Resample. The Resample dialog box can also be used to change the resolution of a picture.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	When resampling a picture we recommended that you leave the Maintain Aspect check box checked unless you have a specific requirement for mixed picture resolution. Also, to reduce file size and to speed up processing, do not choose a resolution that is greater than the resolution capability of your final output device.


Choose a picture measurement unit from this list. The values indicated in the Width and Height number boxes will reflect the selected unit of measurement (e.g. in inches, pixels, millimeters, etc.).


Displays the original picture width in the unit of measurement selected in the Units list.


Displays the original picture height in the unit of measurement selected in the Units list.


Indicates the horizontal dpi value of the original picture. Resolution refers to the fineness of picture detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print a picture. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct a picture. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of your monitor and printer. When you work with a picture that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print a picture, you can choose a higher resolution for increased picture detail.


Indicates the vertical dpi value of the original picture. Resolution refers to the fineness of picture detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print a picture. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct a picture. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of your monitor and printer. When you work with a picture that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print a picture, you can choose a higher resolution for increased picture detail. Enter a value in the number box or use the scroll arrows to choose a dpi value.


Enter a new horizontal resolution (dpi) value. Resolution refers to the fineness of picture detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print a picture. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct a picture. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of your monitor and printer. When you work with a picture that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print a picture, you can choose a higher resolution for increased picture detail. Enter a value in the number box or use the scroll arrows to choose a dpi value.

Note: High resolutions require large amounts of disk space.


Enter a new vertical resolution (dpi) value. Resolution refers to the fineness of picture detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print a picture. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct a picture. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of your monitor and printer. When you work with a picture that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print a picture, you can choose a higher resolution for maximum picture detail. Enter a value in the number box or use the scroll arrows to choose a dpi value.

Note: High resolutions require large amounts of disk space.


Enter an absolute value in the Width number box corresponding to the unit of measurement selected from the Units box. If a number is entered in the first box, the % box reflects the change, and vice versa. You can enter either a number or a percentage, but not both.


Enter an absolute value in the Height number box to resize the picture based upon the picture size. If a number is entered in the first box, the % box reflects the change, and vice versa. You can enter either a number, or percentage, but not both.


Enter a percentage value in the Width number box to resize the picture based upon the picture size. If a number is entered in the first box, the % box reflects the change, and vice versa. You can enter either a number, or percentage, but not both.


Enter a percentage value in the Height number box corresponding to the unit of measurement selected from the Units box. If a number is entered in the first box, the % box reflects the change, and vice versa. You can enter either a number, or percentage, but not both.


Maintains picture aspect ratio. Any value entered in one box will cause the other box to change automatically so that the picture's aspect ratio is maintained


Determines the process by which you resample the picture.

•	Anti-alias
Creates a smoother picture by removing the jagged edges from the original. This process takes longer to accomplish than the Stretch/Truncate option.

•	Stretch/Truncate
Creates a less smooth picture, but takes less time to accomplish than the Anti-alias process.


Maintains the original size of the picture on screen. Any changes made to the picture, however, will affect the printed output.


Shows the size of the original picture in bytes (excluding all objects and masks).


Shows the size of the resampled picture in bytes.


Undoes any changes made in the dialog box number boxes. The original values will appear as they were when the Resample dialog box was first opened.


Convert, Black and White dialog box


Convert To BW dialog box
Convert To Black and White dialog box

Converts a picture to black and white. You choose the picture conversion method and the conversion options.

•	Line Art produces a picture containing only black and white pixels. A pixel is either assigned a black or white value, depending on the grayscale value assigned to it (1-256) and the threshold level setting in the Threshold box. There are no intermediate steps between the two extremes. No halftone is applied to the picture.

•	Ordered controls the appearance of pictures with pixel depths greater than that of the display device. Dithering is performed at a faster rate than error diffusion by approximating pixel values using fixed dot patterns.

•	Error Diffusion controls the appearance of pictures with pixel depths greater than that of the display device. Provides the best results by calculating the value of each pixel using 256 shades of gray and spreading the calculation over several pixels.

•	Halftone produces a continuous tone picture such as a black and white photograph using dots of various sizes. On laser printers that cannot print different-sized dots, the halftone is produced by printing different numbers of dots in a given area.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Converts the picture to black and white Line Art. A Line Art picture contains only absolute black and absolute white pixels. When enabled, the Options box displays a Threshold number box. This option lets you determine the grayscale value at which each pixel in the picture is assigned either a white or black pixel.

Click [image], then click the Threshold option for more information.


The Threshold number box lets you determine the point at which pixels are assigned a white or a black pixel. A grayscale picture is comprised of 256 levels of gray, and each pixel is assigned a grayscale value, from 1 (black) to 255 (white). Using this option, you can make more of the pixels white or vice versa. Enter a low value to assign a white pixel in place of all pixels having a grayscale value above that number. Enter a high value to assign a black pixel in place of all pixels having a grayscale value below that number.


Produces a continuous tone picture (e.g., a black and white photograph) using dots of various sizes. On laser printers that cannot print different sized dots, the halftone is produced by printing different numbers of dots in a given area. When enabled, the Options box displays several halftone screen options where you choose a screen type and screen attributes. Choose Halftone when you plan to print a black and white picture to a black and white laser printer. When you use the halftone conversion method, you can match the dpi resolution of your picture with that of your printer so that the picture you see on screen is the picture you get in printed form.

See Help for the items in the Options group for more information on halftone options.


Produces a black and white picture very much like a halftone but with a higher dpi value.


Controls the appearance of pictures with pixel depths greater than that of the display device. Provides the best results by calculating the value of each pixel using 256 shades of gray and spreading the calculation over several pixels. This conversion method is best for pictures created primarily for on screen viewing, or when printing to a high-resolution black and white printer.


Displays a list of halftone screen types. In photography, a halftone screen is a sheet of glass or film with a grid pattern of lines used to convert a continuous tone picture (e.g., a black and white photograph) into dots of various sizes. The dots that are generated by the halftone screen are based on the luminosity of pixels in the picture and take the shape of the screen type you have chosen (e.g., square, cross, round).


Controls the number of lines to be used in the halftone screen. This option works in tandem with the Units box on the right.


Controls the halftone screen angle. Set the screen at different angles to produce different line patterns.


Displays a list of measurement units.


Duotone dialog box, General tab


Duotone dialog box

General tab

Converts grayscale images to monotone, duotone, tritone, and quadtone images.

A monotone is a grayscale image that is printed with a single ink. The single ink produces all the shadows, mid-tones, and highlights in the image. A duotone is a grayscale image that is printed with two inks, usually using a black ink and a colored ink. The black ink is applied to shadow areas and the colored ink is applied to mid-tone areas and highlight areas. This produces a colored tint to the black and white image, which is effective in establishing a warm or cool effect (depending on the colored ink). Tritones and quadtones are grayscale images that are printed with three and four inks respectively.

Inks tab

The Inks tab allows you to edit each ink in the image. A Position/Value list box displays the numeric values of each curve. You can also load and save ink files.

Over Prints tab

The Overprints tab displays the composite colors of the duotone, tritone, etc., image and a Color Palette that displays the actual colors as they will print to a composite (CMYK) printer.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Displays the duotone graph. The graph displays the dynamic ink curves and is structured as follows:

•	X-Axis (Horizontal plane)
Represents the 256 shades of gray that make up a grayscale image. The left-most point is 0 and corresponds to absolute white. The right-most point is 256 and corresponds to absolute black.

•	Y-Axis (Vertical plane)
Represents the intensity of an ink from 1-100. The bottom-most point is 1 and represents the minimum percentage of ink that will be applied to regions with the corresponding gray level (0-255). The top-most point is 100 and represents the maximum percentage of ink that will be applied.

By manipulating curves, you control how each ink is used in the highlights, midtones, and shadows. The highlights and shadows run from left to right across the horizontal plane of the grid. The ink density runs vertically from bottom to top.

Each ink curve is edited separately by clicking the desired ink icon located to the right of the grid. By default, each curve is straight; they run diagonally across the grid from bottom left to top right, indicating that the grayscale value of each pixel comprising the image is presently identical to the value of the selected ink.

To adjust the curve, click on a point along the curve and drag the node to the desired position. You can also click on an area of the grid; a node is instantly created and positioned.


Displays a drop-down box from which you can select from one of four modes:

•	Monotone
A monotone is a grayscale image that is printed with a single ink. The single ink produces all the shadows, mid-tones, and highlights in the image. A monotone is like a conventional grayscale image.

•	Duotone
A duotone is a grayscale image that is printed with two inks, usually using a black ink and a colored ink. The black ink is applied to shadow areas and the colored ink is applied to mid-tone areas and highlight areas. This produces a colored tint to the black and white image, which is effective in establishing a warm or cool effect (depending on the colored ink).

•	Tritone
A tritone is a grayscale image that is printed with three inks.

•	Quadtone
A quadtone is a grayscale image that is printed with four inks.


Displays the currently selected ink colors. The default ink used in a duotone is a PANTONE Process color. To select a different color than the color shown here, double-click. The Select Color dialog box opens where you can select a new color.


Displays the current ink color at various points on the grid. The ink palette reflects the color of each ink along the grayscale model, ranging from left to right, where the left-most point on the horizontal plane represents a grayscale value of 0 (white) and the right-most point on the horizontal plane represents a grayscale value of 256 (black). This palette lets you visually review the percentage of color that is assigned to each grayscale pixel in the progression from white, through various levels of gray, to black.


The functionality of the Load button depends on the duotone property sheet currently selected.

•	General Tab
Opens the Load Duotone File dialog box, where you access duotone (CPD) files.

•	Inks Tab
Opens the Load Ink File dialog box, where you access ink (CIK) files.


The functionality of the Save button depends on the duotone property sheet currently selected.

•	General Tab
Opens the Save Duotone File dialog box, where you save the current set of ink curves.

•	Inks Tab
Opens the Save Ink File dialog box, where you save the selected ink file.


Duotone dialog box, Inks tab


Duotone, Inks dialog box
Duotone dialog box, Inks tab

Edits each ink in the image. A Position/Value list box displays the numeric values of each curve. You can also load and save ink files.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Displays the ink colors used in a monotone, duotone, tritone, or quadtone image.


Position
Indicates the grayscale value (i.e., 0, 255).

Value
Indicates the percentage of ink assigned to the grayscale value (e.g., 0=50, 255=75).


Displays the relationship between a determined grayscale value and the percentage of ink assigned to it. The first value, Position, represents the sample grayscale tone (e.g., 0=white). The second, Value, represents the percentage of ink that will affect pixels of exactly that value throughout the image.

•	Example
Position	Value
0	100

0 equals all areas in the image with a grayscale value (rated from 0-256) of 0; or, absolute white.
100 indicates that the maximum percentage of ink is assigned to that grayscale pixel value.
In this case, then, we can expect each pixel with a value of 0 to be assigned a maximum (100) percentage of colored ink. The result will be a complete colonization of all pixels throughout the grayscale image.


Click to reset the currently selected ink curve to the default settings (vertically, from bottom left to top right). Only the ink color curve you are working with is reset. Each ink curve is nulled individually.


Duotone dialog box, Over Prints tab


Duotone, Over Prints dialog box
Duotone dialog box, Over Prints tab

Displays the composite colors of the duotone, tritone, etc., image and a Color Palette that displays the actual colors as they will print to a composite (CMYK) printer. Use the Overprints tab to proof the colors you have created using the Duotone dialog box.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Displays the currently selected ink colors and how they will appear printed to a composite (CMYK) printer. To select a different color than the color shown here, double-click. The Select Color dialog box opens where you can select a new color.


Opens the Select Color dialog box that lets you choose a new color to be displayed in the Overprints Color Palette. You can also access this the Select Color dialog box by clicking on a color in the Overprints color list (above).


Resets the selected item in the Overprints list to the settings it had when the Overprints tab was first opened.


Resets all items in the Overprints list to the settings they had when the tab was first opened.


Displays the current ink colors that can be reproduced by a composite printer. These may vary slightly from the ink colors visible in the General and Inks duotone tabs. This palette reflects the each ink color from 0 (white) at the top to 250 (black) at the bottom.


Enable this check box to view overprint areas onscreen.


Convert to 256 Colors dialog box


Convert to 256 Colors dialog box

The Convert To 256 Colors dialog box lets you convert images to 256 colors. You can choose the type of dithering and the palette type.

•	Dithering
Mixes pixels of various colors. Error Diffusion dithering gives the best results but it requires more time to convert an image than the faster, lower quality Ordered dithering.

•	Palette Type
Refers to the conversion of an image to indexed color. The Optimized palette contains colors that are centered on the image's spectrum of colors. Note: When converting a 24-bit image containing objects to Optimized 256-colors, the program uses only those colors that make up the background to determine the palette (e.g., if the background is completely red, the resulting palette consists of one color, red; all colors in the image will become red). The Uniform palette uses the uniform Color Palette that provides a complete 256-color spectrum even if the colors are not used by the image. The Adaptive palette samples those colors that appear most in the image and creates a palette that is based on these samples.

•	Note: When converting a 24-bit image, the program uses only those colors that make up the background to determine the palette (e.g., if the background is completely red, the resulting palette consists of one color, red; all colors in the image will become red). The Custom palette lets you create your own color table by using the Color Table dialog box.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Provides no dithering in the conversion process. Dithering controls the appearance of images with pixel depths greater than that of the display device. Dithering is not required for devices with more than 256 colors.


Provides the best dithering results by spreading color approximation over several pixels. Dithering controls the appearance of images with pixel depths greater than that of the display device. Dithering is not required for devices with more than 256 colors.


Provides the fastest dithering rate possible by approximating colors using fixed dot patterns. Dithering controls the appearance of images with pixel depths greater than that of the display device. Dithering is not required for devices with more than 256 colors.


Uses the uniform Color Palette that provides a complete 256 color spectrum (equal quantities of Red, Green, and Blue) regardless if they are used by the image or not.


Uses an optimized Color Palette. This is a palette that contains colors centered around the image's spectrum of colors. It samples the image and uses the most commonly used colors to create a palette. While this option produces the best color, it is slower than Uniform.


Opens the Color Table dialog box where you choose colors to create you own customized palette.


Samples the image and uses the first 256 colors to create a palette.


Controls the number of colors to be included in an Adaptive or Optimized palette. This option is unavailable when Uniform and Custom palette types are selected.

Note: Additional colors will not be added if you select more colors than are used in the image.  Black and white images are an exception [image] a 256 grayscale palette will be created on conversion.


Color Table dialog box


Color Table dialog box

The Color Table dialog box displays every color of the 16 or 256-color image you are working with. Use Color Table to edit individual colors or blocks of colors, to choose an alternative color table in order to apply an entirely new palette of colors to the image, or to open, create, and save custom palettes.

Table

Lists five color table options from which to choose, including:

•	Custom - Displays all the colors used to make up the selected image.

•	Black Body - Displays a range of colors based on blackbody radiation emissions.

•	Grayscale - Displays a range of tones from white to black.

•	Uniform - Displays a palette of colors based on the color spectrum. The spectrum is broken down into 256 equal steps.

•	System - Displays the conventional 16- or 256-Color Palette.

Open

Opens the Open Palette dialog box where you select and load a previously saved palette. Choose from three types of palettes, including Custom (CPL), Spot (IPL), and Process (PAL).

Save

Opens the Save Palette As dialog box where you save the palette in a specific drive and directory. By default, the custom palette is saved into the CUSTOM directory as a CPL (Custom palette) file.

Reset

Automatically undoes any changes made to the current table and reverts back to a new, unaffected custom palette.

Add

Opens the Select Color dialog box, where you can choose a new color to be added to the current palette.

Edit

Opens the Select Color dialog box, where you add a new color to the color table. This new color replaces the active color selected in the color table.

Delete

Deletes the currently highlighted color from the palette.


This .RTF contains all the context-sensitive help for the commands and dialogs accessed from Ventura's Help menu


menu commands


Displays online Help for Corel VENTURA.


Click this command, then click on an available menu command or another item on the screen, to find out what it does.


Opens the Corel VENTURA online tutorial.


Provides details on product support for Corel applications.


Displays information about which version of Corel VENTURA you are running. You can also use this command to display information about your system, display, network, printer, Corel EXEs and DLLs, and system DLLs.


About Corel VENTURA dialog box


Opens the System Info dialog box, where you can get information about your system, display, printing, Corel EXEs & DLLs and system DLLs.


Displays the disk space available on the drive where the program is installed.


Displays the name of the registered user and the serial number.


Displays information on products licensed by Corel for use in VENTURA.


Displays the name of the product, the version currently installed and copyright information.

Double-click one of the pictures to open the credits window. To exit the credits and return to your program, click the ESC button.


Click this button to enter a serial number and personal identification number.


Provides a list of system information categories. Click one of the following:

System	Displays information about your computer. For example, Windows version or processor.

Display	Displays information about your monitor. For example, driver, or driver version.

Printing	Displays information about installed printers.

Corel EXEs and DLLs	Displays information all of the Corel EXEs and DLLs.

System DLLs	Displays all of the system DLLs.


Displays the system information for the chosen category.


Saves all system information as SYSINFO.TXT. Once it's saved, a message box appears informing you of the location of the saved file.


Double-click to open the credits window. To exit the credits and return to your program, click the ESC button.


Displays information about the contents of the file.


Edit Serial Number/PIN dialog box


Type the serial number located on your proof of purchase or from your certificate of license if you have upgraded from an earlier version of this software.


Type the personal identification number Corel Customer Service provides when you call. To receive a PIN number you must register this software.


System Info dialog box


no context sensitive help?


This .RTF contains all the context-sensitive help for the commands and dialogs accessed from Ventura's Insert menu


menu commands


Insert symbols and special characters from fonts on your system.


Inserts a cross-reference to an item in the document. To mark the location of the item, use the Insert > Marker command in the Insert menu.


Inserts the date and/or time at the insertion point.


Inserts an equation at the insertion point.


Inserts a footnote reference at the insertion point. The reference appears provided the Footnotes command in the View menu is selected.


Inserts an endnote reference at the insertion point.


Insert a built-in function into the current table cell. VENTURA also provides a wizard that guides you through the steps involved in entering a function. Use the Table, Function command to open the wizard.


Inserts an index entry at the insertion point.


Inserts a cross-reference marker at the insertion point. The marker marks the location that the cross-reference points to. To insert the cross-reference use the Insert > Cross-reference command in the Insert menu.


Inserts a variable marker at the insertion point. Variables enable you to mark locations in the document that contain text that you know will change such as dates, document version numbers, and names of customers or products. Use the Format, Publication command to specify the text you want to insert at the Variable marker locations.


Inserts a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) at the insertion point. The URL appears as a hyperlink when the document is converted to HTML or Barista and viewed in a browser.


Opens the CorelMEMO dialog box, which allows you to insert notes into Corel VENTURA documents, or into documents in other programs that support Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). Use a CorelMEMO when you want to leave yourself a reminder, note a change in a document, or add a comment.


Links or embeds an object, such as a picture or chart, in the current document.


Symbol dialog box


Symbol dialog box

Displays characters from available fonts on your system. Use the Symbol dialog box as an alternative to typing codes to insert characters and typographical symbols that are not accessible from the keyboard. You can also use the Symbol dialog box to assign shortcut keys to frequently used characters or symbols.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Click a font in the list to view the characters in its character set.


Shows the selected character's ANSI code. You can insert characters by holding down the ALT key and typing the code using the numeric keypad. To insert characters above ANSI 127, type 0 (zero) followed by the three-digit code [image] for example, type ALT+0153 to insert the trademark symbol TM.


To view a character at an enlarged size, click the character's cell. The keyboard code for the character will appear at the top of the dialog box.

Double-click the character to place it at the insertion point.


Click this button to change the key, or key combination, assigned to the selected character or typographical symbol.


Double-click the special character or typographic symbol you want to insert.


Insert Cross-Reference dialog box


Insert Cross-Reference dialog box

Inserts a cross-reference at the insertion point.

Types of cross-reference

Type of reference	Description

Page number	Inserts the page number where the corresponding marker is found.

Chapter number	Inserts the chapter number where the corresponding marker is found.

Figure and table numbers	Inserts the figure or table number that appears in the caption of a frame with the name matching the specified marker.

Section number	Inserts the generated autonumber that has been applied to the paragraph where the marker is found. You generate the section numbers by using autonumbering.

Caption text	Inserts the first paragraph of the caption text from the frame that has a name corresponding to the specified marker.

Note

·	Before inserting the cross-reference, use the Insert Item > Marker command in the Insert menu to mark the location you want to refer to.

 Related Topics


Selects the type of reference to be inserted.


Displays existing markers in the document. If none exist, use the Insert Item > Marker command in the Insert menu to mark the location you want to refer to.


References all instances of the selected marker.


Defines how multiple instances of the selected marker will be rendered.

To display	Select

1, 2, 3, 4	,,,,

1, 2, 3 and 4	,,,and

1, 2, 3 or 4	,,, or

1 to 4	x to y

1 - 4	x - y


Specifies the printed format of the cross-reference. The options are: Default, Arabic Numerals, Roman Numerals, Text.


Specifies that the cross-reference and any associated prefix will be rendered using capital letters.


Specifies that the cross-reference and any associated prefix will be rendered with the first letter of each word capitalized.


Insert Date and Time dialog box


Date and Time dialog box

Inserts the date and/or time in the format you specify.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Select the date and/or time format you want.


Controls whether the date and time is updated each time the screen you save and/or reopen the document. Enable this option, and VENTURA will insert the date or time and a code which is visible in Copy Editor view. Otherwise, just the current time or date is inserted.


Select the language in which you want the date and time to appear.


Click this button to create your own date or time format.


Click this button to hide the Custom Format controls.


Displays the codes representing the date and/or time format selected in the Formats list. Create the format you want by typing the appropriate codes in the Format String box. For information about the codes, click [image].


Number format codes for dates and times

The way that a time or date inserted using the Insert Item command in the Insert menu appears in a document depends on the date and time format you select. You can choose one of the built-in formats, or create your own by typing the following codes.

Date codes

To display	Type this format code
Days as 1-31	d
Days as 01-31	dd
Days as Sun-Sat	ddd
Days as Sunday-Saturday	dddd
Days as ordinals (e.g., 13th, 3rd)	dt
Week of the year, numerical (e.g., 1-54)	w
Week of the year, numerical (e.g., 01-54)	ww
Months as 1-12	m
Months as 01-12	mm
Months as Jan-Dec	MMM (uppercase)
Months as January-December	MMMM (uppercase)
Days of the year as 1-366	y
Days of the year as 001-366	yyy
Years as 00-99	yy
Years as 1900-2099	yyyy
Days, month or years as Roman numeral	Type R or r after the day, month or year code
1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th quarter	qt 'quarter'
Time codes

To display	Type this format code
Hours as 0-23 (12-hour clock)	h
Hours as 00-23 (12-hour clock)	hh
Hours as 0-23 (12-hour clock)	H
Hours as 00-23 (12-hour clock)	HH
Minutes as 0-59	m
Minutes as 00-59	mm
Seconds as 0-59	s
Seconds as 00-59	ss
AM/PM as a or p	a
AM/PM as A or P	A
Hours as 4 AM (12-hour clock)	h AM
Time as 4:36 pm	h:mm pm


Shows how the date and/or time will appear with the format you create.


Click this button to save the currently displayed custom format. The Save button becomes available after you modify the built-in format in the Format String box.


Click this button to delete the currently selected custom formats. Built-in formats cannot be deleted.


Insert Formula dialog box


Insert Formula dialog box

Inserts a function in the table cell that contains the insertion point. Use this dialog box to insert functions for performing simple calculations such as summing a column or row of numbers. For complex functions, however, use the Function wizard to guide you in choosing the elements (functions, numeric format, etc. ) that comprise a function.

For a list of functions click Related Topics.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Type an equals sign (=) followed by the function name. For a list of functions click [image].

If you want to perform calculations on a range of cells, place the cell references in parentheses after the formula, for example: =SUM(R1C1:R4C1). Table cells are referenced as RnCn where R is the row number, C the column number and n the number of the cell.


Insert Equation dialog box


Insert Equation, Edit Equation dialog box
Insert Equation dialog box

Enables you to build and edit equations. You build equations by selecting templates and symbols and typing variables and numbers in the slots provided. Equation Editor automatically adjusts sizing, spacing and positioning of individual elements in the equation in accordance with the rules of mathematical typesetting conventions. You can also adjust these parameters for selected elements and redefine the automatic styles.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Notes

·	Editing equations created in previous versions of VENTURA automatically converts them to version 7 format. Version 7 treats equations as inserted text not as OLE objects as in version 5 or imbedded codes as in versions 3.0 to 4.2. As a result, equations created prior to version 5 will no longer appear in text files exported from the program.

·	Equations do not appear in documents converted to HTML using the File, Publish As, HTML command.


Displays the selected equation or an empty slot. A blinking line indicates where text or templates will be inserted.


Click to display a list of relational symbols.

Note: The list omits the inequality symbols < (less than) and > (greater than) since these can be entered from the keyboard.


Click to display the alignment symbol ( [image]) and a list of spacing and ellipses symbols.

Use the alignment symbol to align multiple lines of equations. Placing the symbol in each line shifts them horizontally so that the alignment symbols line up vertically.

Use the spacing symbols to override the automatic spacing between characters and templates. Additional spacing is sometimes needed to make complex equations easier to read.

Use ellipse symbols to indicate that items have been left out, usually because they are obvious from the context. These are especially useful for constructing vectors and matrices.


Click to display a list of primes, hats, bars, dots and other embellishments. To delete an embellishment, position the insertion point to the right of the embellished character and press the Backspace key. To delete all embellishments to the left of the insertion point, select No Embellishments from the list.


Click to display a list of operator symbols. The angle brackets (< >) are of fixed size; if you want expanding ones use the Angle brackets template in the Fences palette (fourth button in the first column).


Click to display a list of arrow symbols.


Click to display a list of logical symbols.


Click to display a list of Set Theory symbols.


Click to display a list of symbols for infinity, summation, product, angle and other miscellaneous symbols.


Click to display Greek characters. You can also insert Greek characters by typing Ctrl+G then typing the corresponding English character.


Click to display a list of fences or delimiters used to enclose expressions.


Click to display templates for creating fractions, radicals and long-division layouts.


Click to display templates for creating subscripts and superscripts and for placing expressions above and below one another.

Note: To attach a left-side subscript or superscript the place the insertion point to the left of the expression to which you want to attach the template.


Click to display templates for various types of sums.


Click to display templates for various kinds of integrals.


Click to display a list of bars used to create expressions that have bars either under them or over them.


Click to display templates consisting of an arrow and a slot in which you can type text.


Click to display templates for products, coproducts and set-theory intersections and unions.


Click to display templates for building column vectors, determinants, matrices and other tabular layouts.


Click this button to create equations using the equation language built into previous versions of Corel VENTURA.


Click this button to display a list of pre-formatted equations.


Click this button to redisplay the equation in the equation editing window.


Click this button to change the color of the selected item in the equation editing window.


Click a magnification factor to change the size of the equation in the equation editing window. You can enlarge the display to make it easier to edit parts of an equation, or reduce the display to view an entire equation. To display the equation at the same size as it will appear in the document, select 100%.


Assign a specific type size either to the characters or to characters that you subsequently type. To assign an explicit size click Other.

You can redefine the Subscript, Sub-subscript, Symbol and Sub-symbol sizes in the list by changing the settings on the Font page. The Normal size cannot be redefined; it's always the same as the type size of the paragraph in which the equation is inserted.


Assign a specific style or font to the selected characters or to characters that you subsequently type. Standard uses the predefined style or font which you can change by clicking Other. To use Greek characters, click Greek.


Enable this option to have the equation print over the background color. This option is relevant only when printing color separations and should be enabled for most work. For more information about overprinting click [image].


Explicit Font Properties dialog box

Allows you to assign fonts and styles directly either to selected characters or to characters that you subsequently type.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Insert Equation using Ventura EQN Language dialog box

Allows you to build equations using the equation language available in previous versions of VENTURA. For information about this language, click Related Topics.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Provides a place for you to type the equation


Click this button to add the entire equation to the equation window, not just what you typed since the last time you clicked Apply. To avoid duplication when entering multiple equations, delete those you've already applied from the Ventura EQN Language dialog box before entering the others.


Equation Presets dialog box

Provides a variety of common functions and equations which you can use as is or modify to suit your needs. You can create your own collection of presets or add to the list appearing in this dialog box. For more information click the How To button.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Click this button to open a file containing equations built using VENTURA's EQN language. For more information, click [image].


Double-click an equation to add it to the editing window in the Insert Equation dialog box.


Insert Equation, Font dialog box
Insert Equation, Font

Modifies the fonts and type sizes assigned to various equation elements, such as the symbol characters used in templates. Changes you make in this dialog box apply to the equation in the equation editing window only. Equations saved in documents will not be affected unless you edit them again with the Equation Editor.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Enter a font size for subscripts and superscripts attached to full-size characters. Also used in limits in integral, summation, and other templates. The default is 42% smaller than the font size of the paragraph containing the equation.

To change the unit of measure, click the Subscript/Superscript box with the right mouse button and choose Unit.


Enter a font size for subscripts and superscripts attached to subscript-size characters or in any other situation that requires a second level of size reduction. The default is 58% smaller than the font size of the paragraph containing the equation.

To change the unit of measure, click the Subscript/Superscript box with the right mouse button and choose Unit.


Enter a font size for the large symbols that are part of the integrals, summations, products and other templates. The default is 50% larger than the font size of the paragraph containing the equation.

To change the unit of measure, click the Subscript/Superscript box with the right mouse button and choose Unit.


Enter a font size for subscripted or superscripted symbols. The default size is the same as the font size of the paragraph containing the equation.

To change the unit of measure, click the Subscript/Superscript box with the right mouse button and choose Unit.


Resets all font size definitions to their preset sizes.


Shows the name of the font currently assigned to the style. To use a different font, click the font name, then click the font you want. The list of fonts shown depends on the default printer you have selected and the particular fonts you have installed.


Shows the character formatting currently assigned to the style. To use a different format, click the list box, then click the format you want. The list of formats depends on the font you have selected in the adjacent list.


Resets all font and style definitions to their presets.


Shows a sample equation. Font size changes you make in this dialog box apply to the highlighted element(s).


Insert Equation, Spacing dialog box
Insert Equation, Spacing

Modifies the values used by the Equation Editor's automatic spacing and formatting algorithms. These values control the positioning of equation elements such as subscripts and superscripts and the length and thickness of fraction bars.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enter a dimension for the selected parameter.


Click the unit of measurement you want to use. Select % to specify a dimension as a percentage equation characters typesize. Specifying percentages means you won't need to change the dimensions when you change the character typesizes.


Resets all spacing definitions to their Equation Editor presets.


Click the parameter whose spacing you want to change. The graphic on the left side of the dialog box shows you what the selected parameter refers to.


Shows where the spacing adjustments you make apply.


Matrix Settings dialog box

Enables you to specify the number of rows and columns in a matrix, and how rows and columns are aligned.


Specify how many rows you want in the matrix. You can up to 31 rows.


Specify how you want entries in each row to align.


Enable this option to make each row the height of the tallest row, as determined by the tallest row entry. Otherwise, VENTURA determines the height of each row individually.


Specify how many columns you want in the matrix. You can up to 31 columns.


Specify how you want entries in each column to align.

At = aligns on equals signs and other equality and inequality signs with one another.

At . aligns decimal points with one another. The decimal points may be periods or commas, depending on your country's mathematical conventions.


Enable this option to make all columns in the matrix the same width as the widest column.


Insert Index Entry dialog box


Insert Index Entry dialog box

Marks text at the insertion point as an index entry. You can also insert index entries using the Navigator which is available in the Tools menu.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Specify how many sub-entries you want to appear below the main entry. Type the sub-entries in the 1 for main entry, 2 for sub-entry, 3 for sub-sub-entry and so on


Displays the word containing the insertion point or the index entry being edited. You can change the entry by typing in the Index Entry column.

In the Sort column, specify where you want the entry to appear in the index. Use Sort to change the usual order for certain entries [image] such as those beginning with numbers [image]. For example, select "N" to have 1984 appear under "N" in the index rather than the exclamation mark heading under which non-alphabetic entries are usually listed.

Note: You cannot use the same Sort Key for different index entries. For more information, click [image].


Click this button to change the character formatting of the text selected in the Index Entry column. The formatting you specify overrides the formatting in the tag VENTURA automatically applies to index entries.


Specify whether the word appears in the index with a page number or references another index entry.

You can change the default cross-reference prefixes, See and See also, to something else using the Format, Table of Contents/Index command.


To create a segregated index, select the category you want to assign the index entry to. To create a category, type a name in this box, then click the + button.

To generate a non-segregated index [image] i.e., one that includes all entries in the document [image] assign the entry to the Default category.

For more information about segregated indexes, click [image].


To create a category, type a name in the Category box, then click this button.


Click this button to delete the Category selected from the Category box. Index entries belonging to the deleted category remain in the document, but will not appear in the index. To include these entries in the index, you must assign them to another category.


Insert Marker dialog box


Marker Name dialog box

Inserts a cross-reference marker at the insertion point or shows the name of an existing marker, so that you can change it. The marker identifies the location in the document the reader is being referred to.

 Related Topics


Type a new cross- reference marker name or click an existing one. The same name can be used for more than one marker. If "Reference All Occurrences" in the Insert Cross-Reference dialog box is enabled, all markers with the same name will be referenced. Otherwise, only the first marker of the same name will be referenced.


Insert Variable Marker dialog box


Insert Variable Marker dialog box

Inserts a variable marker at the insertion point, or shows the name of an existing marker so that you can change it. To define the variable [image] that is, the text you want to insert at the variable marker [image] use the Publication Properties command in the File menu.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Type a name for the new variable marker or change the name of the marker that is currently at the insertion point.


Click this button to specify the text you want to insert at the variable marker location(s).


Insert URL dialog box


Insert URL dialog box

Inserts a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) at the insertion point. The URL appears as a hyperlink when the document is converted to HTML or Corel Barista and viewed in a browser.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

·	You cannot create a hyperlink from a picture by inserting a URL in the picture's frame. A picture that behaves like a hyperlink displaying information when the reader clicks it, is called an image map. To create an image map, edit the HTML document VENTURA produces in a Web editor such as Netscape Navigator Gold (TM).

 Related Topics


Type the name and address of the information you want to link to from the HTML or Corel Barista document. Be sure to include the server type, for example HTTP:// or gopher://.


Type the text you want to appear in the HTML or Corel Barista document. Readers viewing the document in a browser can click the text to display the information at the specified URL address.


Click this button to change the attributes of the Display Text.


Enable this check box to have the information at the specified URL address replace the content in all browser frames. Disable the check box to replace the content in the browser's main frame, leaving the other frames alone.


Insert Object dialog box (is Windows help)


This .RTF contains all the context-sensitive help for the commands and dialogs accessed from Ventura's Page menu


menu commands


Displays or hides the header on the current page only. Use the Page, Enable Header command to control the display of headers on all pages in the document that use the same master page.


Displays or hides the footer on the current page only. Use the Page, Enable Footer command to control the display of footers on all pages in the document that use the same master page.


Turns on headers for all pages that use same master page as the current page. If you want the same information to appear in the header on all pages, enter the information on the master page. Header information entered in Page Layout view, overrides the master page header.


Turns on footers for all pages that use same master page as the current page. If you want the same information to appear in the footer on all pages, enter the information on the master page. Footer information entered in Page Layout view, overrides the master page header.


Displays or hides footnotes in the active document as well as the reference markers in the text. When you hide footnotes, text reflows to fill the space they occupied.


Adds a preset header or footer to the selected page replacing the one already there. If you want the header or footer to repeat on other pages in the document, apply the preset to the master page.


Sets up the master page which controls the page size and orientation of the document and the format of headers, footers and other elements.


Applies a new master page to the currently displayed page.


Sets up the grid for the active document and adds, deletes and repositions guidelines on the selected page. To use the same guidelines throughout the document, place them on the master page.


Adds one or more pages to the current document.

Each inserted page can have its own frame formatting which does not affect the base page. (For more control over the frame formatting of an inserted page, apply a different master page.

Text on the base page skips over pages inserted in the middle of a sequence of base pages.

By default autonumbering and number of footnotes start over on the inserted pages, rather than continuing from the previous pages.


Deletes pages inserted using the Insert Pages command in the Page menu. Named text and pictures on inserted pages remain in the Files list. Frames, graphic objects, and unnamed text are deleted with the page.


Header/Footer formats dialog box


Header/Footer Formats dialog box
Header/Footer Formats

Adds a preset header or footer to the selected page replacing the one already there. After adding the preset, you can modify its content in this dialog box or by typing the changes directly into the header or footer frame. You can also reformat the header or footer the same way you would other text.

If you want the header or footer to repeat on other pages in the document, apply the preset to the master page.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click this picture to remove the header from the selected page.


Click this picture to remove the footer from the selected page.


Describes the selected format.


Click a picture to apply a preset header format to the selected base page or master page.


Click a picture to apply a preset footer format to the selected base page or master page.


Type the text you want to appear on the first and/or second line of the header.


Type the text you want to appear on the first and/or second line of the footer.


Master Page Properties dialog box


Master Page Properties dialog box

Sets the orientation (landscape or portrait), size and layout style of the active master page.

If you're producing a booklet or a card (e.g., business, greeting, invitation etc.) you can use one of the "two-up" or "four-up" layouts designed just for that purpose. Unlike the regular full page layouts, which print one page of your document per sheet of paper, the two-up and four-up layouts print either two pages or four pages per sheet.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click the master page you want to modify.


Enable this option to print the document so that the short edge of the paper is horizontal.


Enable this option to print the document so that the short edge of the paper is vertical.


Click a standard page size or select Custom and enter the page size in the Width and Height boxes.


If you selected Custom from the Page Size list box, specify the measurements in the Width and Height boxes.


Shows how your document will look with the selected options.


Click this button to add a new master page


Click this button to delete the selected master page.


Add New Master Page dialog box


Add New Master Page dialog box

Adds a new master page to the active document. You must base the new master page on another one in the active document. This means the document will have two identical master pages. You can then format the new master page the way you want.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Type a name for the new master page in this box.


Click the master page you want to base the new one on.


Delete Master Page dialog box


Delete Master Page dialog box

Removes the selected master page from the active document replacing it with the master page you specify.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Shows the name of the selected master page.


Click the master page you want to apply to pages previously formatted with the deleted master page.


Apply Master Page dialog box


Apply Master Page dialog box (Format menu)
Apply Master Page dialog box

Enables you to change the Master Page on specified pages in the current document. You can change the Master Page on the current page only, a range of pages, or all pages that use a specified Master Page.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click the name of the Master Page that you want to apply to the specified page(s).


Enable this option to apply the selected Master Page to the current page.


Enable this option to apply the selected Master Page to the specified range of pages in the current document.


Specify which pages (left or right) you want to apply the selected Master Page to. These options apply to double-side documents and become available when the Pages option is enabled.


Enable this option to apply the specified Master Page to all pages in the current document that use the Master Page selected from the list.


Grid and Guideline Properties dialog box


Grid & Guidelines  Properties, Grid dialog box
Grid & Guideline Properties dialog box, Grid tab

Controls the spacing and display of grid lines on the selected page. Use the Tools, Options command to set the color of the grid lines and the View, Snap command to control whether objects snap to the grid.

If you change the grid spacing, frames and graphic objects in your document retain their position, even if they do not line up with the new grid line positions.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enter the number of grid lines you want per unit of measurement. To space the lines less than one whole unit apart, enter fractional values from the keyboard. For example, to space the lines at half inch intervals, enter 0.5.

To change the unit of measure, click the Horizontal or Vertical box with the right mouse button; then click Units.


Specify the horizontal (X) and vertical (y) starting point for the grid relative to the upper left corner of the page. The mouse pointer coordinates displayed in the Status Line coincide with the grid starting point.


Enable this option to display the grid. To avoid cluttering the screen, VENTURA shows only some of the grid lines at lower the Zoom levels. The more you zoom in, the more lines you'll see.


Grid & Guideline Properties, Guidelines dialog box
Grid & Guideline Properties dialog box, Guidelines tab

Controls the placement and display of guidelines on the selected page. You can vary the number and placement of guidelines from page to page. However, to give the entire document a consistent appearance, it's a good idea to add the guidelines to the Master Page.

You can also add guidelines by holding down the SHIFT key and dragging from the rulers.

Use the Tools, Options command to set the color of the guidelines and the View, Snap command to control whether objects snap to the guidelines.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Tip

•	You can open the Grid & Guidelines Properties dialog box by double-clicking a guideline.

 Related Topics


Enter how far from the upper-left corner of the page you want to place the guideline. To move an existing guideline, select it from the list, then enter the new position.


Shows the position of existing guidelines on the selected page. Click a guideline to delete it or change its position.


Adds a guideline at the location specified in the position box.


Click to move the selected guideline to the new location specified in the position box. To move another guideline in the list, click it, enter the new location, then click Move.


Click to remove the guideline at the location displayed in the position box. Continue to click Delete to remove guidelines one by one. To delete a specific guideline, click it in the list, then click Delete.


Click to remove all the horizontal or vertical guidelines on the selected page.


Enable this option to display the guidelines on the selected page. The guidelines are black by default, but you can change them to another color using the Tools. Option command.


Enable this option so that the guidelines cannot be moved with the mouse.


Insert Pages dialog box


Insert Pages dialog box

Adds blank pages to the current document. Manually inserting pages is necessary for documents in which all text is placed in frames on top of, rather than on, the base page. (VENTURA automatically creates additional pages to accommodate text on the base page). You might also insert a page at the beginning of a document to prevent text on the base page from flowing onto the cover page.

For more information about inserted pages, click Related Topics.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enter the number of pages you want to insert. If you are placing a text file on the inserted page, you only need to insert one page. Additional pages will be added automatically to accommodate the entire text file.


Enable this option to insert the page(s) before the page specified in the Page box. Text on the preceding base page skips the insert page(s) and resumes on the base page that follows it.


Enable this option to insert the page(s) after the page specified in the Page box. Text on the preceding base page skips the insert page(s) and resumes on the base page that follows it.


Enter the number of the page before or after which you want to insert the page(s).


Displays the name of the current chapter. To insert pages into another chapter in the active document, select the chapter from this list.


Click the master page you want to apply to the newly inserted page(s).


Delete Pages dialog box


Delete Pages dialog box

Removes pages manually inserted into the current chapter using the Page, Delete Pages command in the Page menu. When you remove a page, you remove the frames and graphic objects as well. However, the text and graphics files in the frames remain in the chapter's list of files.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Note

•	You cannot use this dialog box to remove pages VENTURA creates automatically. Such pages are removed for you when you delete the text, frames and other items the pages.

 Related Topics


Specify the number of the page you want to delete. The number you specify refers to the location of the page in the chapter not the whole document. So, although the page number [image] as it appears in the header or footer [image] of the fourth page in the second chapter may be 23, to delete it, enter the number 4 in the Delete Page box.


Enable this checkbox to delete a range of pages.


Specify the number of the last page in the range of pages you want to delete. The number you specify refers to the location of the page in the chapter, not the whole document. Although the page number [image] as it appears in the header or footer [image] of the fourth page in the second chapter may be 23, to delete it, enter the number 4 in the Thru Page box.


Select the chapter, if other than the current chapter, from which you want the pages deleted.


Specifies that the last page number included in the range of pages will also be deleted.


Toolbars/Toolbox menu


Show/Hide toolbars command

Displays or hides the selected toolbar. You can also use the View, Toolbars command to display or hide toolbars.


Rulers menu


Ruler Units command

Changes the unit of measurement for the ruler you clicked. Each ruler can use a different unit.


Hide Ruler command

Hides the rulers. To display them, click View, Rulers.


Properties command

Displays a dialog box where you can set the units of measurement, size, origin and default tab alignment for the rulers and whether the zero points move to coincide with the page or the selected frame.


What's This command

Display information about the rulers.


Tab stop alignment commands

Changes the alignment of the tab stop you clicked.


Remove Tab command

Deletes the tab stop you clicked from the selected paragraph.


Clear All Tabs command

Deletes all tab stops from the selected paragraph.


Status Bar menu


Hide Status Bar command

Hides the Status Bar. To display it, click Tools, Options and enable the Show Status Bar check box on the View tab.


Position command

Moves the Status Bar to the top or bottom of the VENTURA window. You can also switch the position of the Status Bar by double-clicking the blank area on the right side of the bar.


Size command

Controls the height of the Status Bar. Select Two Line if you are customizing the Status Bar and need more room to accommodate the additional information you want to display.

You can also change the height by dragging the top or bottom edge of the Status Bar.


Reset Status Bar command

Restores the Status Bar to its original size and position and cancels changes made to it using the Tools, Customize command.


Base page menu


Remove from Frame command

Removes the content from the selected frame. Text and picture files remain in the document and continue to be listed in the Files list box in the toolbar and in the Navigator. To remove the file from the document, right-click the file in the Navigator and select Remove, or press the DELETE key.


Copy to Facing Pages command

Applies the column, margin and frame typography settings of the selected master page to the facing master page.


Mirror to Facing Pages command

Applies the column, margin and frame typography settings of the selected master page to the facing master page. The margin settings are reflected so that the right margin for the right page becomes the left margin for the left page and vice versa.


Paragraph menu


Import Text at Cursor command

Imports a text file placing it at the insertion point. The imported file merges with the text file containing the insertion point.


Add New Paragraph Tag command

Adds a new paragraph tag to the active document.


Delete Paragraph Tag command

Removes paragraph tags from the active document. Items formatted with the tag you remove will be reformatted with another tag of your choice.


Rename Paragraph Tag command

Changes the name of paragraph tags in the active document.


Selected table menu


Normal Rules command

Restores the rules (borders) applied to the selected table or cell when the table was first created.


Custom Rules command

Changes the rules (borders) on all four sides of the selected table or cell. To apply different rules to each side, use the Table, Cell Borders command.


Selected drawn frame menu


Auto Wrap command

Draws a path around the perimeter of an imported picture allowing text to flow around the shape of the picture.

You can use the Node Edit tool [image] to modify the shape of the frame and thus the flow of text around the picture.


Preset Frame Shape command

Draws a pre-shaped path around the picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.

You can use the Node Edit tool [image] to modify the shape of the path and thus the flow of text around the picture.


Select All Linked Frames command

Selects all other frames containing text from the file in the selected frame.


Convert Picture to Shapes command

Converts imported pictures in vector format into objects that you can fill, outline and modify with the Node Edit tool.


Overprint Fill command

Enable this option to have the fill in the selected object print over objects below it. This option is relevant only when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting click


Convert to Flowing Text command

Displays arrows for flowing text from the selected frame into another frame. Click an arrow and drag to draw a frame. The top arrow flows from the beginning of the text file; the bottom arrow flows from the end of the file.


Show on Facing Page command

In Master Pages view, displays the selected frame on the opposite page in a double-sided document.


Add New Frame Tag command

Adds a new frame tag to the active document.


Size Frame to Object command

Resizes a frame to match the actual dimensions of the picture. The resized frame may exceed the width or height of the page, making it impossible to select the corner selection handles. When this happens, reduce the size of the frame using the Format, Frame command or enlarge the pasteboard using the Tools, Options command (Page tab).


Make Spread command

Enable this option to allow the selected drawn frame to span facing pages in a double-sided document., After selecting the frame, stretch it across the page boundary by dragging the frame by one of its selection handles. To spread frames in Page Layout view, use the Zoom tool to display facing pages.


Selected graphic object menu


Apply Default Fill command

Fills the selected object with the current default fill.


Overprint Outline command

Enable this option to have the selected object's outline print over objects below it. This option is relevant only when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting click [image].


Convert To Frame command

Converts closed shapes drawn with the Graphics tool into a frame.


Properties command

Lets you view and change the selected object's properties including its fill and outline attributes.


Navigator menus

IDs for all commands except those that appear when you right-click on a document name in Publication Manager view should be same as those on main menus.


New Publication command

Creates a new, blank document based on the default stylesheet and master page.


Open Publication command

Opens an existing document in a new window. You can quickly open one of the last documents you worked on by clicking its name at the bottom of the menu.


Retrieve Publication command

Opens an archived version of the active document. You can retrieve any archived version of a document, and you can compare them to see the changes that were made. For more information, click [image].


Properties command

Changes the attributes of the selected item. Right-clicking the Navigator background, then choosing this command let's you change how file names display in the Navigator.


Properties command

Changes the layout of the selected document and sets up conditions for publishing different versions of the document and definitions for VENTURA's automatic text insertion features.


New Chapter command

Adds a blank chapter to the end of the selected document. Drag the chapter in the Navigator to change its position in the order.


Add Chapter command

Adds a chapter from another document to the end of the selected document. Drag the chapter in the Navigator to change its position in the order.


Load Stylesheet command

Changes the stylesheet used to format text in the selected document. Tags in the new stylesheet override those with the same name in the existing stylesheet Tags in the old stylesheet that are not in the new one appear in uppercase letters in the Tags list. Formatting in the missing tags takes on the formatting of the Body Text tag in the new stylesheet.


Save command

Saves the selected document with the name, and in the location specified, when the document was first saved. When you save a document for the first time, the Save As dialog box appears, where you type a name and choose a location. If you want to rename or relocate a document, use the Save As command.


Save As command

Saves the active selected with the name and the location you specify.


Close command

Closes the selected document without quitting VENTURA.


Corel Versions, Archive command

Saves a copy of the selected document in an archive. For more information, click [image].


Corel Versions, Retrieve Publication command

Opens an archived version of the active document. You can retrieve any archived version of a document, and you can compare them to see the changes that were made. For more information, click [image].


Import Picture command

Imports pictures into the selected chapter. To place the picture on a page, drag and drop it into a selected frame, or select the picture from the Files list in the toolbar.


Import Text command

Imports a text file into the selected chapter. To place the file on a page, drag and drop it into a selected frame, or select the file from the Files list in the toolbar.


Copy command

Copies the selected item so that you can place it in another chapter, document or library. If the selected item is a document, you can use the Copy command to copy the document to a different folder in the Windows Explorer.

To paste the item, right-click the document or chapter into which you want to place the item, then choose Paste.

You can also copy and paste an item by dragging and dropping it into a new location in the Navigator.


Cut command

Removes the selected item from the document or library. To paste the item into another chapter, document or library, right-click the chapter, document, or library, then choose Paste.

You can also cut and paste an item by holding down the ALT key and dragging and dropping the item into a document or chapter in the Navigator.


Paste command

Places a previously cut or copied item in the Navigator or library into the selected document, chapter or library.

You can also copy and paste an item by dragging and dropping it into a new document or chapter in the Navigator. To cut and paste, hold down the ALT key while dragging.


New Table of Contents command

Creates a new table of contents or other list. VENTURA names the file "New Table of Contents," but you can change it by right-clicking the name and selecting Rename.

To generate the table of contents or list, use the Format, Table of Contents/Index command or right-click the table of contents or list file in the Navigator and choose Update.


New Index command (Index)

Creates a new index. VENTURA names the file "New Index," but you can change it by right-clicking the name and selecting Rename.

To generate the index, use the Format, Table of Contents/Index command or right-click the index file in the Navigator and choose Update.


Delete command

Removes the selected item from the document.


Rename command

Changes the name of the selected item. You can also type a new name in the box that appears when you click the item twice. After typing the name, press ENTER.


Rename File command

Changes the name and format of the selected text file. You can also use this command to specify that you want VENTURA to export the text file each time the document is closed so that you can edit the file in a word processor.


Text File Properties dialog box


Text File Properties dialog box

Saves the selected text file with a new name and in another file format. You can also specify that you want VENTURA to export the text file each time the document is closed so that you can edit the file in a word processor. Any changes you make to the file will appear in the document the next time you open it.

Notes

·	Although you can edit an exported text file while the document in which it appears is open in VENTURA, the changes you make will be lost when you save the VENTURA document.

·	If more than one person is working on the document (i.e., the document has Set Multi-user in the Format menu enabled), then the person editing the text file outside VENTURA must check out the document. Otherwise, changes made to the file won't appear in the document when it is re-opened.

·	When using the Copy with Links To command (available by right-clicking a document in the Windows Explorer) to copy documents, VENTURA will copy the internal version of the exported files to the specified destination. If you've made changes to the exported files outside VENTURA, re-open the document, then copy it; otherwise, the copy won't include the revised text files.

·	VENTURA automatically adds a TXT or RTF extension to the exported file, ignoring the extension you might have typed. If a file with the same name and extension already exists in the specified location, VENTURA will overwrite it without warning you.


Click this button to locate the folder into which you want to save the file.


Shows the name of the selected text file or "unnamed" if the text was typed into a frame rather than imported.


 Enable this check box to export the text file each time the document is closed. Any changes you make to the file in a word processor will appear in the document the next time you open it.


Click the file format you want to save the selected text file in. To select a format, you must enable the Export on Save check box.


Type a new name and location for the text file in this box. VENTURA adds a TXT or RTF extension to the file, ignoring other extensions you type.


End of Text Properties dialog IDs


Sort command

Sorts text and pictures files alphabetically by name or by file type as identified by the filename extension [image] for example, TXT for ASCII text files, or CDR for CorelDRAW pictures.

By default, file extensions do not appear in the Navigator. To display them, right-click the Navigator's background and choose Properties.


Go To command

Displays the page on which the selected item is located.


Update Publication command

Updates the table of contents and index along with auto-numbering and cross-references in the active document.


Update Publication dialog box (accessed through Navigator)


Update Publication dialog box

Updates the table of contents and index along with auto-numbering and cross-references in each chapter.

If you plan to publish an electronic version of the document in Adobe Acrobat or Envoy format, use this dialog box to reconcile paging numbering scheme in the VENTURA document with the page numbering scheme in the Acrobat or Envoy document.

Acrobat and Envoy documents always begin on page 1 and support only one page-numbering scheme per file. VENTURA documents, however, can start on any page number and can use multiple numbering schemes. For example, the table of contents and other front matter can have Roman numerals for page numbers with the remaining pages using Arabic numerals that restart at page 1.


Specify which items in the selected document you want to update.


If you are creating an Acrobat or Envoy document, enable this check box  to reconcile the paging numbering scheme in the VENTURA document with the scheme used in the Acrobat or Envoy document. For more information, click the Help button at the bottom of the dialog box.


Update command

Updates the Navigator to reflect changes made in the document that affect the table of contents. Since VENTURA continually updates the table of contents as you work, you only need to use this command if you've recently made changes to the document.


Update command

Updates the Navigator to reflect changes made the document that affect the index. Since VENTURA continually updates the index as you work, you only need to use this command if you've recently made changes to the document.


Update command

Updates the Navigator to reflect changes made the document that affect cross-references. Since VENTURA continually updates the cross-references as you work, you only need to use this command if you've recently made changes to the document.


Expand All command

Displays the contents of the selected item for all open documents. To display or hide the contents an item for individual documents, click the plus sign (+) or minus sign (-).


Collapse All command

Hides the contents of the selected item for all open documents.

To display or hide the contents an item for individual documents, click the plus sign (+) or minus sign (-).


Add command

Inserts an index entry at the insertion point.


Add 'Word" command

Adds the word to the right of the insertion point to the index.


New Master Page command

Adds a new master page with the same properties as the Default master page to the selected document.


Update Stylesheet command

Updates the stylesheet with changes made to the original version, which is stored in the Library.


Embed Stylesheet command

Breaks the link between the stylesheet in the Library and the copy in the document.


Script menus


Change Folder command

Click to specify the folder that contains the external scripts. For more information about script types, click [image].


Refresh View command

Click to update the internal and external script list. For more information about script types, click [image].


Edit command

Opens the Corel SCRIPT Editor and loads the selected script for editing.


Import and Export commands

Import: Copies a selected external script to the active VENTURA publication as an internal script.

Export: Saves a copy of a selected internal script as an external script in the active folder.

For more information about script types, click [image].


Libraries menus


Undo/Redo command

Reverses the last action. Immediately after you undo an action, the Undo command changes to Redo, allowing you to restore what you reversed.


Paste command

Adds the contents of the Clipboard to the library.


Cut command

Removes the selected item from the library and places it on the Clipboard.


Copy command

Copies the selected item onto the Clipboard.


Delete command

Removes the selected item from the library.


Save command

Saves the library with its current filename and location.


View commands

Changes the size of the icons in the library and shows or hides the names appearing next to the icons. You can change the names by right-clicking an icon and choosing Properties.


Filter command

Controls the display of items in the library allowing you to show certain types of items and hide others.


Sort commands

Arranges items in the Library alphabetically, by type, by date, or by size.


Find command

Searches the library for an item with the name you specify. You assign a name to an item by right-clicking its icon and choosing Properties.


Find Next command

Searches for the next item with the name specified using the Find command.


Set Multi-user command

Switches the state of the library between single-user and multi-user. In single-user state, anyone can access the library, but only the person who opens it first can make changes to it.

You can switch to single-user state only if you are the library's administrator and no one else has checked it out. In multi-user state, anyone with access rights can open the library, but only those with read/write access can make changes to it.


Access Rights command

Controls who can access and/or make changes to a multi-user library


Check Out command

Reserves a multi-user library so that only you can make changes to it. Use the Check In command to save changes to the library and make it available for others to work on.

You must have read-write access to a library to check it out.


Check In command

Makes the library available for others with appropriate access rights to modify. When you check the library in, any changes you made to its contents are saved.


Uncheck Out command

Cancels a Check out operation, reversing all changes.


Properties command

Displays information about the selected item and lets you attach a name and comment to it.

If you clicked on the library background, information about the library, such as the number of items it contains and when it was created and last modified, appears.


Properties command

Displays information about the selected item and lets you attach a name and comments to it.


Font list menu


Show Font Preview command

Hides or displays the preview which shows you a sample of the selected font.


What's This? command

Displays information about the font list.


Paragraph Properties dialog, Tab page


Add Tab command

Adds a tab stop at the position displayed in the Add Tab At box.


Delete Tab command

Removes the selected tab stop.


Clear all Tabs command

Removes all tab stops.


Grid command

Shows or hides the lines separating the rows and columns and the box that outlines a selection.


Chapter Properties dialog, Auto-numbering page

same commands also in:

Frame Properties dialog (Margins and Columns pages)

Publication Properties dialog (Conditions page)

Table of Contents/Index Properties


Apply All command

Changes all other settings in the column to match the one currently selected. This command becomes available when you right-click the column heading.


Tracking and Kerning dialog


Reset to Default command

Restores the selected font's built-in tracking values.


Preview command

Lets you type sample text so that you can see how it appears with the kerning values.


Tags Window


Copy command

Copies the selected tag so that you can add it to another document or library using the Paste command, which appears when you right-click the Tags or library window background.


Paste command

Adds the previously copied tag to the active document.


Edit Tag command

Lets you change the attributes defined in the selected tag.


Rename Tag command

Lets you change the name of the selected tag.


Show Generated Tags command

Shows or hides tags VENTURA automatically creates for formatting headers, footers, captions and other items. Generated tags use the prefix Z_.


Sort Tags commands

Arranges tags alphabetically, by point size, by type, or by shortcut key.


Edit boxes in toolbar


Clear command

Sets the selected value to zero when you press ENTER.


Restore command

Returns the active window to the size and location it had before you chose the Minimize or Maximize command from the Control menu.

You can also restore a window by clicking its Restore button [image].


Move command

Allows you to move the active window with the arrow keys. This command is unavailable if the window is maximized.

You can also use this command to move buttons of minimized document windows and dialog boxes that have a Control menu.


Size command

Allows you to resize the active window with the arrow keys.

This command is unavailable if the window is maximized.


Minimize command

Shrinks the active window to a button. If the minimized window is an application, the button is located in the Windows task bar. A minimized document window button appears at the bottom of the Corel VENTURA screen, above the Status Bar.

Using the Minimize command in the Control menu is equivalent to clicking the Minimize button [image] with the mouse.


Maximize command

Expands the active window to fill the entire screen.

Using the Maximize command in the Control menu is equivalent to clicking on the Maximize button [image] with the mouse.


Close command

Closes the active window or dialog box. If you have made changes to the current file, a dialog box appears asking you to save the file.

You can also close a window by clicking its Close button [image].


Next command

Switches between open document windows.


Document window

The area of the screen in which you view and work on documents. Each document that you open appears in a separate window. Each window has its own Control menu with commands for moving, sizing, closing, and minimizing windows. Closing or minimizing windows you are not currently working on keeps your screen from becoming too cluttered.

The appearance of a red X on the page indicates that the text, table, or other item you are creating or formatting does not fit on the page or in the selected frame. Modify the item to make it fit, or use the Edit, Undo command to reverse the formatting changes.


Invalid settings

The appearance of a red X on the page indicates that the text, table, or other item you are creating or formatting does not fit on the page or in the selected frame. For example, if you inadvertently set the font size in inches instead of points, you might specify a value which exceeds the length of the page. When this happens, modify the item to make it fit, or use the Edit, Undo command to reverse the formatting changes.


Rulers

Displays the dimensions of the document window, which is helpful for sizing and positioning objects. You can also use the rulers to change paragraph indents, adjust page margins, change the width of columns, and set tab stops using the mouse.

SHIFT + clicking a ruler and dragging brings a guideline onto the screen. Clicking on the triangle where the rulers meet and dragging toward the center of the screen brings out a set of crosshairs.

Choosing Rulers from the View menu turns the display of the rulers on and off.


 Maximize button

Expands the window to fill the entire screen. After you expand a window, the button changes to the Restore button. Use this button to return the window to its former size.


 Minimize button

Shrinks the application window to a button in the Windows task bar or, in the case of a document windows, to a button at the bottom of the VENTURA screen, immediately above the Status Bar.

As a button, the application or document stays in memory, but its window does not take up space on your screen.


 Restore button

Returns the active window to the size and location it had before you chose the Minimize or Maximize command from the Control menu.


 Close button

Closes the active window. If you have made changes to the current document, a dialog box appears asking you whether you want to save the file.

Closing Corel VENTURA is the same as choosing Exit from the File menu.


Scroll Bars

Displays portions of a document outside the current viewing area of the document window.


Status Bar

Provides information about the selected tool or command, the number of the current page, and the presence of such items as cross-reference markers and index entries. You can hide the Status Bar and change its size and position by right-clicking it. To redisplay the Status Bar, use the Options command on the Tools menu. To customize the information displayed on the Status Bar, use the Customize command on the Tools menu.


Title Bar

Shows the name of the program, plus the name and location of files in fully-expanded document windows. In document windows less than full size, the Title Bar shows the document's name where it is stored or the word "Pub1", "Pub2", etc., for new documents you have not yet saved.

The Title Bar may also contain the Close, Restore, Maximize, Minimize, and Control menu buttons for controlling the window.


Toolbar

Contains buttons that give you quick access to many of VENTURA's commands and features. To display a button's name, point to it with the mouse button. To show or hide toolbars, use the Toolbars command in the View menu or right-click the toolbar and select the appropriate command. To make an anchored toolbar a floating toolbar, or vice versa, double-click an area between the toolbar border and its buttons.


This .RTF contains all the context-sensitive help for the commands and dialogs accessed from Ventura's Table menu


menu commands


Inserts a new blank table at the insertion point.


Changes the appearance of a selected table.


Applies preset shading and borders to the selected table.


Sorts information in the selected row or column alphabetically, numerically, or by date.


Opens the Function Wizard so that you can insert a built-in function into the current table cell.


Automatically fills a row or a column with a series of data by incrementing the value in the selected cell. You can use this command, for example, to automatically fill cells with the days of the week, or months of the year.

Note: If you want to fill cells with incremented dates (e.g., 01/3/96, 02/3/96, 03/3/96), use the Table, AutoFill, Series command.


Updates the value returned by the function in the selected cell.


Inserts rows above, or below, the cell that contains the insertion point.


Inserts columns to the left or to the right of the cell that contains the insertion point.


Selects the row, column, or table that contains the insertion point.


Deletes the row, column, or table that contains the insertion point.


Combines the selected cells into one cell. The contents of the upper-left cell in the selection remains in the resulting larger cell.


Divides cells combined using the Merge Cells command into individual cells.


Changes the borders of the selected cell(s). To change the borders for the entire table, use the Format Table command in the Table menu. Or, select the entire table and use the Property Bar.


Table Properties dialog box


Table Properties dialog box
Table Properties, General

Sets the number of rows and columns, column widths, default borders and header rows for the selected table.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enter the number of rows and columns you want in the table.


Enter the number of header rows you want in the table. When a page or column break splits the table, the header rows automatically repeat in the subsequent page or column.


Type or select the number of the column you want to adjust.


Enable the Proportional button to set a width that is proportional to those of the other columns. A proportional width column uses whatever space is left over when fixed-width columns have been set.

The value you enter in the Proportional box determines how much leftover space is allocated. For example, if Column 1 is set at 4 and Column 2 at 1, the first column gets four times as much space as the second column


Enable the Fixed button to set the width of the column to a particular measurement [image] for example 1 inch. Enter the measurement in the Fixed box.

To change the unit of measurement, click the box with the right mouse button , then select Units.


Click the border style you want to apply to the perimeter of the table.


Click the border style you want to apply to the horizontal ruling lines.


Click the border style you want to apply to the vertical ruling lines.


Disable this option to keep the table together within the same column or page. When you enable the option, a table too large to fit the current page or column will automatically continue to the next one.


Table Properties, Positioning dialog box
Table Properties, Positioning

Controls spacing, alignment and vertical justification for the selected table.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enter the amount of space you want between the table and the paragraph preceding it.

To change the unit of measurement, click the Above box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter the amount of space you want between the table and the paragraph following it.

To change the unit of measurement, click the Below box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter the amount of space you want between rows.

To change the unit of measurement, click the Inter-Row box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter the amount of space between columns.

To change the unit of measurement, click the Above box with the right mouse button and select Units.


Enter the maximum amount of space VENTURA can add above and below the table as it vertically justifies columns.

Vertical Justification makes the content in columns [image] text, frames and tables [image] reach the bottom of the column. These settings apply only when Vertical Justification is enabled using the Format, Chapter command.

For more information about Vertical Justification, click [image].


Enable this option if you want to set a width different from the width of column or frame containing the table.


Enter a measurement to set the overall width of the table. To enter a measurement in this box, you must enable the Custom Width option.


Select an alignment option to set the position of the table within the column or frame.


Enter the amount of space you want between the edge of the column or frame and the table..


Table Properties, Skew dialog box

Slants the top row and/or the left column of a table.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enter the angle you want to slant the top row of cells.


Enter a measurement to set the maximum height of the top row of cells.


Shows the amount of skew as a linear measure.


Enable this option if you don't want to skew the first cell in the top row.


Enable this option to keep skewed rows or columns from extending beyond the margins of the column.


Enable the checkboxes if you want the text slanted to the same angle as cell.


Enter the angle you want to slant the cells in the left column.


Enable this option to skew the text in the left column to the same angle as the column.


Click this button to switch between preset skew formats and advanced controls for skewing rows and columns the way you want.


Click a picture to apply a preset option for skewing rows and columns.


Shading Formats dialog box


Shading Formats dialog box

Applies preset shading and borders to a table.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click a picture to apply preset shading and borders.


Sort dialog box


Sort dialog box

Sorts the contents of the selected table alphabetically, numerically or by date.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Specify which column you want to use as the basis for sorting. If you have at least two columns selected and the Sort Column Only option is disabled, VENTURA will sort the entire table based on the selection criteria you specify.


Specify the type of data (text, numbers, or dates) you want to sort.


Enable this option to sort from the first letter of the alphabet, the lowest number, or the earliest date.


Enable this option to sort from the last letter of the alphabet, the highest number, or the latest date.


Specify any additional columns you want to use as the basis for sorting.


Specify the type of data (text, numbers, or dates) you want to sort.


Enable this option to sort from the first letter of the alphabet, the lowest number, or the earliest date.


Enable this option to sort from the last letter of the alphabet, the highest number, or the latest date.


Specify any additional columns you want to use as the basis for sorting.


Specify the type of data (text, numbers, or dates) you want to sort.


Enable this option to sort from the first letter of the alphabet, the lowest number, or the earliest date.


Enable this option to sort from the last letter of the alphabet, the highest number, or the latest date.


Enable this option to sort the selected column only rather than the entire table.


Enable this option to sort a lowercase word before a capitalized word.


Function Wizard dialog box (topics in wiz_function.rtf)


Fill Series dialog box


Fill Series dialog box

Continues any series of data you entered in the selected cells, such as a series of sequential numbers or dates. For example, you can extend a series of numbers such as 1, 2, 3 to include 4, 5, 6... or a date such as 03/01/96, to include 03/02/96, 03/03/96, 03/04/96 and so on.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	You must enter dates using the Windows language and date format as specified through the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel. Otherwise, VENTURA will not be able to complete the series as expected.


Specify which direction to extend the series relative to the selection.


Enable this option to create a series of dates. Select a Date Unit option to specify which part of the date is incremented.

Note: The date in the selected cells must be entered using the Windows language and date format as specified through the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel. Otherwise, VENTURA will not be able to complete the series as expected.


Enable this option to fill empty cells in a selection with a series based on data in the selection. For more information, click [image].


AutoFill option (Fill Series dialog box)

The following table shows examples of series created using the AutoFill feature.

Data in selected cells	Resulting series

1, 2	3, 4, 5, 6,...

1, 4	7, 10, 13, 16

Mon, Wed	Mon, Wed, Fri, Sun, Tues,...

May	June, July, August,...

1996, 1997	1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,...

01/01/96 (see Note)	02/01/96, 03/01/96, 04/01/96

text 1, text 2	text 3, text 4, text 5, text 6,...

Note

•	When using Autofill to enter dates in cells, you must use the Windows language and date format as specified through the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel. Otherwise, VENTURA will not be able to complete the series as expected.


Enable this option to create a growth series or geometric growth trend.

If the Step option is enabled, each cell value is multiplied in turn by the value in the Step Value box. If the Trend option is selected, a geometric growth trend is calculated based on the values in the selected cells. This changes the original values to ones that fit the trend.


Enable this option to create a linear series or linear best-fit trend.

If the Step option is enabled, each cell value increases or decreases by the amount in the Step Values box. If the Trend option is selected, a linear trend is calculated based on the values in the selected cells. This changes the original values to ones that fit the trend.


Specify whether a series of dates will increase by days, weekdays, months, or years. These options are available when Date is selected as the series Type.


Enable this option to calculate a linear or exponential growth series. The step values for the trend are calculated from values in the top or leftmost cells in the selection. The first two cells in the selection must contain values; otherwise the data in the initial cell will repeat in the other cells in the selection.

For examples, click [image].


Trend option (Fill Series dialog box)
Trend & Series options (Fill Series dialog box)

The following tables show how the Trend and Series options affect a linear or growth series using the values 1, 3 and 7 as a example. The first table shows the series resulting from selecting the Linear option and entering a value of 2 for the Step Value.

Linear	Resulting series

Step button selected	1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, . . .

Trend button selected	0.66, 3.66, 6.66, 9.66, 12.66, 15.66, . . .

Note The Step Value is ignored when the creating a trend.

Using the same example with the Growth option selected, produces the following series.

Growth	Resulting series

Step button selected	1, 3, 9, 27, 81, 243, . . .

Trend button selected	1.04, 2.75, 7.29, 19.31, 51.09, 135.18, . . .


Enable this option to specify the amount by which to increase or decrease the series. Only one value is required in the selection but it must be in the first cell in the selection. The selection must include at least two cells; otherwise the data in the selected cell will repeat in the other cells in the selection.


Specify the amount by which to increase or decrease the series. A positive number increases a series; a negative number decreases a series.


Enable this option and specify the value at which you want a series to end. If the selection is filled before the series reaches the stop value, the series stops at that point.


Insert Row(s) dialog box


Enter the number of rows you want to add.


Inserts the new rows immediately before the row containing the insertion point.


Inserts the new rows immediately after the row containing the insertion point.


Insert Column(s) dialog box


Type the number of columns you want to add.


Inserts the column(s) immediately to the left of the column containing the insertion point.


Inserts the column(s) immediately to the right of the column containing the insertion point.


Cell Borders dialog box


Cell Borders dialog box

Changes the borders for the selected table cells. To change the borders for the entire table, use the Table, Format command instead. Or, select the entire table and use the Table Properties toolbar.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Click the border style you want to apply to the top of the selected cells.


Click the border style you want to apply to the left side of the selected cells.


Click the border style you want to apply to the bottom of the selected cells.


Click the border style you want to apply to the right side of the selected cells.


Enable the Around check box, and then select the border style you want to apply to all sides of the selected from the adjacent list.


Click this button to modify or add a border style.


Shows how the cells will look with the borders you select.


Border Tag Style dialog box


Border Tag Style dialog box

Changes the attributes of existing table border styles or adds new ones.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Shows the attributes defined in the selected border style.

To add a line, enable the check box in the # column. To change the size (thickness) or space above or below a line, click the current value then type a new one. To change the color or style of the rule, click the color swatch or pen icon then make your selection from the Color Palette or dialog box that appears.


Enable this option to have the border print over objects beneath it. This option is relevant only when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting click [image].


Lists the border styles available on your system. To modify a style, select it from this list box. To add a new style, type a name in this box and click the + button. To remove a style, select it and click the - button.


Shows how the border style will look with the settings you select.


Lists the built-in border styles. Select the style you want to use or select User-Defined to create a custom style. Although you can modify the settings defined in the built-in styles, the changes you make apply to the style selected from list in the bottom-left corner of the dialog box.


Click this button after typing a name for a new border style in the adjacent box.


Click this button after to delete the border style selected from the adjacent box..


Shows the thickness of the border line style. The thickness is calculated by adding the width of each line and the amount of space above and below them.


This .RTF contains all the context-sensitive help for the tools and associated dialog boxes on toolbars and the Toolbox


Toolbox tools


 Pick tool

Selects text, frames, tables and objects. Corel VENTURA senses the different types of objects you are working on and only requires you to change tools when you need to draw objects, edit nodes, or anchor frames.

After selecting an item, you can work with it using the mouse, commands in the menus, or the Toolbox.


 Marquee select tool

Selects multiple frames and objects created with the Graphics tools. After clicking the tool, drag a box to enclose the items you want to select.

Operations you perform on the items [image] for example, resizing [image] apply to all of the items.


 Paragraph tool

Selects paragraphs for formatting only. Use the this tool as an alternative to pressing CTRL +ALT and clicking with the [image] tool to select paragraphs.

After clicking the [image] tool, click the paragraph you want to select. Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple paragraphs.


 Zoom tool

Opens a flyout menu, which includes buttons for controlling how large or small a document appears on the screen.


 Frame tool

Draws a pre-shaped frame Hold the mouse button down on the tool to open a flyout menu with a selection of other pre-shaped frames you can add to your document.


 Graphics tool

Draws rectangles, lines, callouts, Artistic Text and other objects. Hold down the mouse button on the tool to open a flyout menu containing the complete set of drawing tools.


 Pen tool

Opens a flyout menu from which you can specify preset or custom attributes including outline thickness, line pattern, and calligraphic pen effects. Choose an icon from the flyout menu with no object selected to change the default outline pen attributes for new objects you create.


 Fill tool

Opens a flyout menu from which you can choose preset fills or set custom attributes including solid color, bitmaps, textures, and patterns. Click an icon in the flyout menu with no object selected to change the default fill attributes for new objects you create.


 Node Edit tool

Modifies the shape of lines and curves drawn with the Graphics tools and non-rectangular frames drawn with the Frame tool. Other objects you draw including rectangular frames can be modified by first converting them to curves using the Edit, Convert to Curves command.


 Frame Anchor tool

Anchors the selected frame to a location in the text so that the frame moves with the text. After clicking the Anchor button, click the location in the text you want to anchor the frame to.


Standard Toolbar


 New document

Starts a new, blank document based on the Default template.


 Magnification Level

Changes the magnification level in the active document window. Select a level from the list or type a value from 2 to 1250.

Clicking in the list and then typing F, W, H or S, changes the magnification level to Full Page (F), Page Width (W), Page Height (H), or Zoom in to selected item (S).


 Zoom to multiple pages button

Changes the number of pages displayed on screen. Click the button and  then drag to select the number of pages.


Onscreen color palette

Shows the five most recently used colors. Click the arrow to display other colors you can use.


 Go to next chapter

Displays the first page from the next chapter in the active document.


 Go to previous chapter

Displays the first page from the previous chapter in the active document.


 Side-by-Side paragraphs

Places selected consecutive paragraphs side-by-side. Select one or more consecutive paragraphs by pressing CTRL + ALT key and clicking each one in succession. After selecting the paragraphs, release the keys, then click the button.

If any of the selected paragraphs use the same tag and you're working in Tag mode, VENTURA will automatically create new tags named SideBySide_0, SideBySide_01 etc.


 Fit text vertically

Stretches a frame vertically until all the text in it shows or the bottom of the page is reached.


 Show/hide tabs & returns

Shows or hides symbols used to represent tabs, ends of paragraphs, line breaks, special spaces, discretionary hyphens plus the location of index entries, frame anchors and other hidden items.


 Insert Table

Inserts a table at the insertion point. Click the button then drag until VENTURA displays the number of rows and columns you want.


 Hide Non-printing Items button

Hides column guides, frame borders, guidelines, the grid and items the ¶ button shows or hides.

Use the View, Frame Borders command, the ¶ button, and the Tools, Options command to redisplay the items.


 Synchronize numbering button

Updates the table of contents and index along with auto-numbering and cross-references in the active document.

If you plan to publish an electronic version of the document in Adobe Acrobat or Envoy format, use button to reconcile paging numbering scheme in the VENTURA document with the page numbering scheme in the Acrobat or Envoy document.


 Application Launcher button

Click this button to display a list of other Corel applications, then click the one you want to open.

For information on adding or removing applications from this list, click [image].


 Insert Figure Counter button

Inserts a counter in the caption frame containing the insertion point. Use counters to number pictures or other items in drawn frames. To set the style and starting number of the counter, use the Format, Chapter command.


 Insert Table Counter button

Inserts a counter in the caption frame containing the insertion point. Use counters to number tables or other items in drawn frames. To set the style and starting number of the counter, use the Format, Chapter command.


Zoom Toolbar


 Zoom in

Magnifies a portion of the screen. After clicking the icon, hold down the mouse button and drag a box around the area you want to magnify.

Right-clicking after selecting the Zoom in tool, zooms out by a factor of two.


 Zoom out

Zooms out by a factor of two each time you click, or returns to the view you were at before the last zoom-in.


 Actual size

Displays the document at the size at which it will print.


 Full page

Displays the entire page.


 Full Width

Reduces or enlarges the display of the document so that fits within the left and right edges of the document window.


 Full Height

Reduces or enlarges the display of the document so that it fits within the top and bottom edges of the document window.


 Facing pages

Displays adjacent pages in a double-sided document side-by-side.


 Selected objects

Zooms in on all selected objects.


Graphic Toolbar


Rectangle tool

Draws rectangles and squares.


Ellipse tool

Draws ellipses and circles.


Polygon tool

Draws polygons.


Star tool

Draws stars.


Shape tool

Shapes frames and objects created with the Graphic tools. You must first convert non-rectangular frames and closed graphic objects (e.g., rectangles and ellipses) to curves using the Edit, Convert to Curves command to modify their shape.


Freehand tool

Selects the Freehand drawing mode, which is a click and drag style of drawing similar to moving a pencil on paper.


Bezier tool

Selects the Bezier drawing mode, which is a connect-the-dots style of drawing where you specify the start and end points of the line/curve you want to draw and how you want them connected.


Callout tool

Creates a callout consisting of a box that you type text into and a line that points to an illustration or other item of interest in the document.


Artistic text tool

Creates text that you can manipulate like other objects created with the Graphic tools.


Pen Toolbar


 Color button

Opens a dialog box from which you can choose a uniform color to outline the selected object. Click the button with nothing selected to change the default outline color for new frames or graphic objects you create.


 Pen button

Opens a dialog box from which you can choose outline attributes (color, thickness, line style, arrowheads, etc.) for the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to change the default outline attributes for new graphic objects you create.


 White outline

Applies a white outline to the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to make white the default outline color for new graphic objects you create.


 30% black outline

Applies a 30% black outline to the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to make 30% black the default outline color for new graphic objects you create.


 50% black outline

Applies a 50% black outline to the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to make 50% black the default outline color for new graphic objects you create.


 100% black outline

Applies a 100 % black outline to the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to make 100% black the default outline color for new graphic objects you create.


 No outline

Removes outlines from the selected object(s). Click this button with no object selected to have new graphic objects you create drawn without an outline.


 Hairline outline

Applies an outline 0.2 point thick to the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to make this the default outline thickness for new graphic objects you create.


 2 point outline

Applies an outline 2 points thick to the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to make this the default outline thickness for new graphic objects you create.


 8 point outline

Applies an outline 8 points thick to the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to make this the default outline thickness for new graphic objects you create.


 16 point outline

Applies an outline 16 points thick to the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to make this the default outline thickness for new graphic objects you create.


 24 point outline

Applies an outline 24 points thick to the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to make this the default outline thickness for new graphic objects you create.


Fill Toolbar


 Uniform color fill

Opens a dialog box from which you can choose a uniform color to fill the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to make the uniform color the default fill for new frames or graphic objects you create.


 Fountain fill

Opens a dialog box where you can create a fountain fill to apply to the selected object. Click this button with no object selected to make the fountain fill the default outline width for new objects you create.


 White fill

Fills the selected object with white. Click this button with no object selected to make white the default fill for new frames or graphic objects you create.


 Black fill

Fills the selected object with black. Click this button with no object selected to make black the default fill for new frames or graphic objects you create.


 Gray fill

Fills the selected object with a shade of gray. Click this button with no object selected to make the shade of gray the default fill for new frames or graphic objects you create.


 Remove fill

Removes the fill from the selected object, allowing objects behind it to show through. Click this button with no object selected to have new frames or graphic objects you create drawn without a fill.


 Two-color bitmap pattern

Opens a dialog box with a collection of two-color bitmap patterns you can use to fill the selected object. Click the icon with no object selected to make the pattern the default fill for new frames or graphic objects you create.


 Full-color bitmap pattern

Opens a dialog box with a collection of full-color bitmap patterns you can use to fill the selected object. Click the icon with no object selected to make the pattern the default fill for new objects you create.


 Vector pattern

Opens a dialog box with a collection of vector patterns you can use to fill the selected object. Click the icon with no object selected to make the pattern the default fill for new objects frames or graphic objects you create.


 Texture fill

Opens a dialog box with a collection of bitmap textures you can use to fill the selected object. Click the icon with no object selected to make the texture the default fill for new frames or graphic objects you create.


 PostScript texture fill

Opens a dialog box with a collection of PostScript textures you can use to fill the selected object. Click the icon with no object selected to make the texture the default fill for new frames or graphics you create.


Node Edit Toolbar


 Add node

Adds a node to the selected curve object. Click on the spot where you want to add a node, then click the Add button. You can marquee-select multiple nodes to insert a node between each of them.


 Delete node

Deletes node(s) from the selected curve object. Click on the node that you want to delete, and click the Delete button.


 Connect nodes

Connects end node(s) on segments that are part of the same path. Use this command to close an open path or make two different paths on the same curve object into a single continuous curve.


 Split curve

Splits the curve object into two or more subpaths at the selected node.


 Reduce nodes

Eliminates extraneous node(s) without significantly altering the shape of the selected curve object.


 Convert to line

Converts the selected curve segment to a line segment.


 Convert to curve

Converts the selected line segment to a curve segment.


 Cusp node

Changes the selected node into a cusp node. Use this command when you want to add a sharp bend to a curve object.


 Symmetrical node

Changes the selected node into a symmetrical node. Use this command when you want the same curvature on both sides of the node.


 Smooth node

Changes the selected node into a smooth node. Use this command when you want a different curvature on each side of the node.


Spell checker toolbar


 Alternatives

Displays misspelled words or words not in the selected dictionary. If the word is misspelled, select the correctly spelled word from the list. To add the word to a dictionary, click the + button (available on Spell Checker toolbar) or use the Tools, Spelling command.

If the word is correctly spelled and is in the built-in dictionary, you can replace it with a synonym from this list.


 Search forward

Continues checking forward from the currently highlighted word.


 Search backward

Continues checking backward from the currently highlighted word.


 Ignore all

Ignores all further instances of the word displayed in the Fix Mistake box.


 Proofreader options

Displays a dialog box where you can change the rules VENTURA uses to check spelling.


 Add to dictionary

Adds the word displayed in Fix Mistake box to the personal dictionary selected from the adjacent list.


 Active personal dictionary

Shows the name of the active personal dictionary. Words correctly spelled, but missing from the main dictionary, such as special terms and acronyms, can be added to a personal dictionary so that future occurrences of the word are not questioned.

You can create as many personal dictionaries as you need using the Tools, Spelling command.


 Thesaurus

Displays synonyms for the word in the Fix Mistake box. Click the [image] button to view other synonyms. Double-click the synonym to insert it in the document.


Frame/Graphic Alignment toolbar


 Align left

Aligns the left edges of the selected frames or graphic objects. The last object you select maintains its position; the others move to align with it.


 Align right

Aligns the right edges of the selected frames or graphic objects. The last object you select maintains its position; the others move to align with it.


 Align top

Aligns the top edges of the selected frames or graphic objects. The last object you select maintains its position; the others move to align with it.


 Align bottom

Aligns the bottom edges of the selected frames or graphic objects. The last object you select maintains its position; the others move to align with it.


 Center vertical

Aligns the center of the selected frame(s) or graphic object(s) with the vertical center of the page.


 Center horizontal

Aligns the center of the selected frame(s) or graphic object(s) with the horizontal center of the page.


 Equalize horizontal space between

Equalizes the horizontal spacing between three or more selected frames or graphic objects.


 Equalize vertical space between

Equalizes the vertical spacing between three or more selected frames of graphic objects.


 Make same width

Makes the selected frames or graphic objects the same width. The last object you select maintains its width.


 Make same height

Makes the selected frames or graphic objects the same width. The last object you select maintains its height.


 Make same size

Makes the selected frames or graphic objects the same width and height. The last object you select maintains its width and height.


Table Functions toolbar


 Sum

Sums the values in the cells above or to the left of the cell containing the insertion point.


 Recalculate

Updates the result of a calculation performed by inserting a mathematical formula in a table cell. To update the result of a calculation, place the insertion point to the left of the formula. When the formula name (e.g., =SUM) and cell references appear in the Table Functions toolbar, click the Recalculate button.


Formula box

Type an equals sign (=) followed by the function name. For a list of functions click

If you want to perform calculations on a range of cells, place the cell references in parentheses after the formula, for example: =SUM(R1C1:R4C1). Table cells are referenced as RnCn where R is the row number, C the column number and n the number of the cell.


Property Bar, Base Page


 Files List

Displays an alphabetical list of all text and picture files available for placement in the current chapter. Clicking a filename in the list places it in the selected frame. The selected file replaces the file already in the frame if it's the same type (i.e., two text files or two picture files). If the file types are different, the selected file is added to the existing file allowing you to superimpose text on a picture.

Note: Files placed on a master page do not appear in the Files List.


 Change columns

Changes the number of columns in the selected frame.


 Show/hide grid

Shows or hides the grid in all open documents.


 Show/hide guidelines

Shows or hides guidelines in all open documents.


 Show/hide column guides

Shows or hides column guides in all open documents.


 Master Page box

Lists the master pages available in the active document. To apply a different master page to the displayed page, select it from this list.


Property Bar, Paragraphs


 Tag List

Lists the paragraph tags in the active document. Clicking a tag name applies the formatting stored in the tag to the paragraph containing the insertion point.

When you override formatting in a tag, VENTURA places a [image] symbol next to the tag name.


 Font list

Changes the font for the selected text. Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly, scrolls the list one font at a time.

Right-click on the Font list box to show or hide the font preview.

A font with a [image] next to its name is a font that's used in the active document but is not installed on your system. The PANOSE font matching system substitutes another font (the one appearing in brackets) for the missing font.


 Font size

Changes the point size of the selected text. Type the size then press ENTER, or select it from the list. The sizes available depend on the printer and the selected font.


 Tracking

Adjusts the tracking in the selected paragraph. You can apply a preset tracking value or your own value by choosing Custom.


 Alignment

Changes the alignment of the selected paragraph.


 Tag/Override mode

Switches the Property Bar between Override and Tag modes. In Override mode, formatting changes applied using the Property Bar affect the selected paragraph only. In Tag mode, the changes affect all text formatted with the paragraph tag applied to the selected text.


 Space above paragraph

Displays the amount of space above the selected paragraph. To change the space, type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Space below paragraph

Displays the amount of space below the selected paragraph. To change the space, type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Inter line space

Displays the amount of space between lines in the selected paragraph. To change the space, type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Inter paragraph spacing

Displays the amount of space VENTURA adds between this paragraph and other paragraphs with the same amount of inter-paragraph spacing. This setting is useful when you want the space between the body paragraphs to be greater than the space between the headings and the body paragraphs.

To change the space, type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Drop Caps/Bullets

Inserts a bullet in front of the selected text or formats the first character(s) in the paragraph as a drop cap. Use the Format, Paragraph command to change the attributes of the bullet or drop cap.


 Page break button

Inserts a manual page break at the insertion point.


Property Bar, swiped text


 Character Tag list

Lists the character tags in the active document. Clicking a tag name applies the formatting stored in the tag to the selected text.


 Normal button

Removes formatting applied using the Format, Text command, or the text formatting toolbar.


 Bold button

Formats the selected text as bold. Click the button again to remove the formatting.


 Italic button

Formats the selected text as italic. Click the button again to remove the formatting.


 Single underline button

Formats the selected text with an underline. Click the button again to remove the formatting.


 Superscript

Formats the selected text as superscript. Click the button again to remove the formatting.


 Subscript

Formats the selected text as subscript. Click the button again to remove the formatting.


 Small caps

Formats the selected text as small capitals. Click the button again to remove the formatting.


 Double underline

Formats the selected text with a double-underline. Click the button again to remove the formatting.


 Strike through

Places a line through the selected text. Click the button again to remove the line.


 Overscore

Places a line above the selected text. Click the button again to remove the line.


 Uppercase

Displays the selected text in uppercase letters.


 Lowercase

Displays the selected text in lowercase letters.


 Capitalize

Capitalizes the first letter of each whole word selected.


 Tighten kerning button

Reduces spacing between selected characters by 0.01 ems.


 Looser kerning button

Adds 0.01 ems of space between the selected characters.


 Increase point size button

Increase the font size of the selected text by one point.


 Decrease point size button

Decrease the font size of the selected text by one point.


 Increase inter-line spacing button

Adds half a point of space above and below lines in the selected paragraph.


 Decrease inter-line spacing button

Removes half a point of space above and below lines in the selected paragraph.


Property Bar, Graphics


 Arrowheads (Start)

Applies an arrowhead to the start point of a line drawn with the Graphics tool. To remove an arrowhead from a line, click the first option in the list.

You can adjust the size and placement of the arrowhead using the [image] tool on the [image] tool flyout menu.


 Line styles

Changes the thickness or style of outlines on objects drawn with the Graphics tool.


 Arrowheads (End)

Applies an arrowhead to the end point of a line drawn with the Graphics tool. To remove an arrowhead from a line, click the first option in the list.

You can adjust the size and placement of the arrowhead using the [image] tool on the [image] tool flyout menu.


 Line thickness

Changes the thickness of outlines on objects drawn with the Graphics tool. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Width

Changes the width of objects drawn with the Graphics tool. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Height

Changes the height of objects drawn with the Graphics tool. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Horizontal (X) origin

Repositions objects drawn with the Graphics tool relative to the left edge of the base page frame. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Vertical (Y) origin

Repositions objects drawn with the Graphics tool relative to the top edge of the base page frame. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Frame tags list

Lists the frame tags in the active document. Clicking a tag name applies the formatting stored in the tag to the selected frame.

When you override formatting in a tag, VENTURA places a [image] symbol next to the tag name.


 Flow options

Changes the direction text flows around a drawn frame. For more information about the options in this list, click [image].


 Captions

Adds a caption to a drawn frame or removes an existing caption.


 Angle

Rotates a drawn frame and it contents. Type an angle in the box, then press ENTER.

You can rotate the contents independent of the frame using the Format, Frames command (General tab).


 Width

Changes the width of drawn frames. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Height

Changes the height of drawn frames. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Horizontal (X) origin

Repositions drawn frames relative to the left edge of the base page frame. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Vertical (Y) origin

Repositions drawn frames relative to the top edge of the base page frame. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


Property Bar, selected table


 Number of rows

Changes the number of rows in the selected table. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER.


 Number of columns

Changes the number of columns in the selected table. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER.


 Number of header rows

Changes the number of header (top) rows in the selected table. When a page or column break splits the table, the content of the header row(s) automatically repeats in the subsequent page or column.

Type a number in the box, then press ENTER.


 Number of footer rows

Changes the number of footer (bottom) rows in the selected table. When a page or column break splits the table, the content of the footer row(s) automatically repeats in the subsequent page or column.

Type a number in the box, then press ENTER.


 Horizontal grid

Adds borders to or removes borders from the top of the cells in the selected table.


 Vertical grid

Adds borders to or removes borders from the sides the cells in the selected table.


 Around grid

Adds borders to or removes borders from around the outside of the selected table.


 Ascending order sort button

Sorts the content of the selected table cells from the beginning of the alphabet or the lowest number.


 Descending order sort button

Sorts the content of the selected table cells from the end of the alphabet or the highest number.


Property Bar, selected table cells


 Column width

Sets the width of the selected column. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Top row skew angle

Sets the angle of the top row of cells in the selected table. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Top row skew height

If the top row of the selected table is skewed, use this setting to specify the height of the row. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Left column skew angle

Sets the angle of the first column of cells in the selected table. Type a number in the box, then press ENTER. To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, then choose Units.


 Left border tag

Changes the border on the left side of the selected cell. If a range of cells is selected, only the border of the uppermost cell in the range changes.


 Right border tag

Changes the border on the right side of the selected cell. If a range of cells is selected, only the border of the uppermost cell in the range changes.


 Above border tag

Changes the border on the top side of the selected cell. If a range of cells is selected, only the border of the uppermost cell in the range changes.


 Below border tag

Changes the border on the top side of the selected cell. If a range of cells is selected, only the border of the uppermost cell in the range changes


Property Bar, Header/Footer


 Chapter number

Inserts the current chapter number at the insertion point. Use the Format, Chapter command to set the numbering style and starting number.


 Page number

Inserts the current page number at the insertion point. Use the Format, Chapter command to set the numbering style and starting number.


 First match

Inserts text from the first paragraph on a page formatted with the paragraph tag you select.


 Current match

Inserts text from the first paragraph on a page formatted with the paragraph tag you select. The text will appear in the header or footer of a given page only when the text occurs at the top of the page.

Use this feature to create running headers or footers which indicate to the reader that text on a given page is part of a topic or section started earlier. For more information, click [image].


 Last match

Inserts text from the last paragraph on a page formatted with the paragraph tag you select.

If a page contains more than one paragraph with the Last Match tag, the text from the last paragraph on the page with the Last Match tag appears in the header or footer.

Use this feature to create running headers or footers which indicate to the reader that text on a given page is part of a topic or section started earlier. For more information, click [image].


 Date and time

Inserts the current date and time at the insertion point. The dialog box that appears enables you to specify the format of the date and time and whether it updates automatically.


 Time

Inserts the current time at the insertion point. The dialog box that appears enables you to specify the format of the date and time and whether it updates automatically.


 Copy to facing page

Copies the header or footer to the facing page in a double-sided document. The position of the header or footer on both pages is the same. For example, if the original is on the right side, the one copied to the facing page will be on the right side.


 Mirror to Facing Page

Reflects the header or footer on the facing page in a double-sided document. Whatever appears on the right side on one page appears on the left side on the opposite page and vice versa.


Property Bar, Copy Editor


 Text Files List

Displays an alphabetical list of all text files in the active chapter. Clicking a filename in the list displays it in the Copy Editor for editing. To edit text in another chapter, select the chapter from the adjacent list.


 Chapters List

Displays the name of the active chapter. To edit text in another chapter in the same document, select the chapter from this list.


 Show/Hide Codes button

Displays or hides formatting codes and codes for index entries, frame anchors, footnote entries etc.


 Show/Hide periods for spaces button

Displays or hides dots in the spaces between words.


Vertically docked toolbar topics


 Tags window

Displays a window with a list of the tags in the active document.


Frame properties

Displays the Frame Properties dialog box so that you can change the formatting of the selected frame.


Tag properties

Displays the Tags Properties dialog box so that you can change the formatting defined in the selected paragraph's tag.


Paragraph alignment

Opens a flyout menu, with buttons for changing the alignment defined in selected paragraph's tag.


Outline Pen properties

Displays the Outline Pen dialog so that you can change the characteristics (width, color, style etc.) of the selected graphic object's outline.


Object properties

Displays the Object Properties dialog box so that you can change the appearance and position of the selected graphic object.


Table properties

Displays the Table Properties dialog box so that you can change the format of the selected table.


Cell borders

Displays the Cell Borders dialog box so that you can change the borders around the selected cell(s).


Tools that aren't on preset toolbars


Object Properties dialog box, Fill tab


Object Properties, Fill dialog box

Enables you to change the fill properties of the selected frame or graphic object.

 Related Topics


Displays controls for choosing uniform color fills.


Displays controls for choosing and editing fountain fills.


Displays controls for choosing and editing two-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing full-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing texture fills.


Displays controls for choosing vector pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing PostScript texture fills.


Removes the selected object's fill making it transparent.


Displays a pair of boxes inside the selected object for scaling and offsetting tiles.

•	Drag the left box to offset the first tile.

•	Drag the node along the bottom edge of the boxes to scale the tiles. Hold down the CTRL key as you drag to maintain the pattern's aspect ratio.

•	Drag the right box down to offset alternating columns of tiles.

•	Drag the right box down and to the left to offset alternating rows of tiles.


Opens a dialog box where you can further refine your fill properties.


Applies your fill to the selected objects. If no objects are selected, you can define the default fill for new objects.


Shows the current starting color for the fountain fill. Click the color to change it.


Shows the current ending color for the fountain fill. Click the color to change it


Shows the current foreground color. Click the color to change it.


Shows the current background color. Click the color to change it.


Displays a linear fountain in the Preview box.

To change the angle of the linear fountain, click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Displays a radial fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a radial fountain, click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.


Displays a conical fountain in the Preview box.

•	To move the center of a conical fountain, left-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.

•	To change the angle of a conical fountain, right-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Displays a square fountain in the Preview box.

•	To move the center of a square fountain, left-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.

•	To change the angle of a square fountain, right-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Shows the current texture library. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of available texture libraries.


Previews the current fountain fill. Click the sample, or the button next to it, to display a selection of other fills.

Right-click the preview to offset the center or change the angle of the fountain. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the movement of the mouse to 10 percent increments or to multiples of 15 degrees.


Previews the current fill. Click the sample, or the button next to it, to display a selection of other fills.


Lists the available textures by name. Click a name, or use the scroll bars to see the entire list.

Each name represents a special type of pattern fill which will only print on a PostScript printer. In the Drawing Window, PostScript textures are represented by the letters PS instead of the actual pattern.


Changes the current color. Click the color you want, or use the scroll bars to see more of the palette.


Displays the current color.


Object Properties dialog box, Outline tab


Object Properties, Outline dialog box

Enables you to change the outline properties of the selected graphic object.

 Related Topics


Opens a box with a selection of arrowheads that you can apply to the start of an open path.

Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Opens a box with a selection of arrowheads you can apply to the end of an open path.

Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Displays a selection of dashed and dotted line styles.

Use the scroll bars to see other styles in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Displays a palette of outline colors. Use the scroll bars to see other colors in the list. Click the one you want.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box, where you access the Outline Pen controls.


Applies your choices to the selected objects. If no objects are selected, you can define the default outline for new objects.


Displays the current thickness of the outline. To change the width, enter a new value, or click the arrow buttons.


Specifies whether the outline is placed behind or in front of the object's fill. When placed behind, only half the outline's thickness will be visible. This option is useful for outlined text.


Specifies whether the outline thickness and nib orientation remain the same or change in proportion to the object.

If enabled, the outline thickness increases when the object is enlarged (by scaling or stretching) and decreases when the object is made smaller. If the object is rotated, the nib shape also changes accordingly.


Toggles the current outline on and off. If the button is depressed, the object will have no outline.


Object Properties dialog box, Details tab


Object Properties, Details dialog box

Displays the dimensions of the object's selection box and the object's origin [image] i.e., the position of the top-left selection handle relative to the zero points on the rulers. The dialog box also displays the center coordinates of the selection box and the coordinates of the object's center of rotation.

You can change the dimensions and origin of the object by editing the values in this dialog box. To change the center of rotation, double-click the object's border, then drag the round marker, which normally appears in the middle of the object's selection box.


Shows the dimensions of the object's selection box. Enter values in these boxes to change the dimensions of the selection box and the object itself.

Right-click the box to change the unit of measurement.


Shows the location of the object's top-left selection handle relative to the zero points on the rulers. Enter values in these boxes to change the object's origin.

Right-click the box to change the unit of measurement.


Shows the distance from the zero points on the rulers to the center of the object's selection box.


Shows the distance from the zero points on the rulers to the object's center of rotation. The center of rotation is the round marker that appears in the middle of an object when you double-click its border. It is the axis around which the frame or graphic rotates.


Object Properties dialog box, Ellipse tab


Object Properties, Ellipse dialog box

Enables you to change an ellipse to a pie wedge or an arc or vice versa.


Enable this button to turn a pie wedge or arc into an ellipse.


Enable this button to turn an ellipse or an arc into a pie wedge.


 Enable this button to turn an ellipse or a pie wedge into an arc.


Enter angles in these boxes to specify the starting and ending point of the arc or pie wedge.


Specify the direction you want to draws the pie wedge or arc.


Object Properties dialog box, Rectangle tab


Object Properties, Rectangle dialog box

Makes the corners of the selected rectangle round or square.

You can also modify the corners, by selecting the object with the [image] tool and dragging a corner selection handle.


Drag to set the roundness of the rectangle's corners or type a value from 0 to 100 in the adjacent box. The higher the setting, the more round the corners become.


Object Properties dialog box, Polygon tab


Object Properties, Polygon dialog box

Changes the number of sides in the selected polygon.


Enter the number of sides you want the polygon to have.


Shows a preview of the polygon.


Object Properties dialog box, Curve tab


Object Properties, Curve dialog box

Displays the properties of the selected curve object curve objects, including the number of nodes it has and whether it is an open (e.g., line) or closed (e.g. circle) object.


Shows the number of nodes along the curve object. The nodes appear when you click the curve with the [image] tool. Manipulating the nodes with the same tool changes the shape of the curve.


Shows the number of subpaths that make up the selected curve object. Subpaths are created by breaking the object into smaller parts using the Node Edit toolbar.


Displays the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the first node's location relative to the zero points on the rulers.


Displays the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the end node's location relative to the zero points on the rulers.


Shows whether the selected curve object is a closed shape, such as a circle, or an open shape, such as a line. Only closed shapes can be filled.


Outline Pen dialog box


Outlining objects
Outline Pen dialog box

Every object has a set of outline attributes that you can manipulate in a variety of ways. You can think of each object as being drawn with a pen that changes size, shape, and color. You can use nibs that are round or square, slanted or symmetrical, thick or thin to draw dashed, dotted, solid, or calligraphic lines.

In addition to the shape and color of the nib, you can also change the ending shape of an outline. Lines, or objects with open paths, can have ends that are rounded, square, cropped, or tipped with arrowheads and other line-ending shapes. Objects with closed paths (squares, polygons, etc.) naturally have no end-points, but you can still choose from pointed, rounded, or truncated corners.

You can change the outline of an object using the Outline tool, or the Outline Pen dialog box.

•	The Outline tool gives you quick access to the most commonly-used outline styles, and buttons to access more detailed controls.

•	The Outline Pen dialog box lets you change any aspect of your outline or line-ending shape.

If you just want to change the color of an outline, you can also use the on-screen palette (see Related Topics).

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new color.


These controls let you add arrowheads and other line-ending shapes to the ends of lines (open paths).


Opens a flyout containing a list of arrowheads you can apply to the beginning of a line. Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the flyout without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Opens a flyout containing a list of arrowheads and symbols you can apply to the end of a line. Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Opens a menu of options that you can apply to the start of the line.

•	The None option removes the current arrowhead from your line.

•	The Swap option moves the arrowhead to the other end of the line.

•	The Edit option opens the Arrowhead Editor, where you can change the size, Placement, and general shape of the arrowhead.

•	The Delete option deletes the current arrowhead.


Displays the current thickness of the outline. To change the width, enter a new value, or click the arrow buttons.


Displays the units you are using to measure the line width. Click in this field to display a list of units. The width value is automatically converted when you change units.


Opens a flyout containing a list of dashed styles that you can apply to your line. Use the scroll bars to see other line styles in the list. Click the one you want. To close the flyout without making a selection, press the ESC key

You can create dotted lines by applying round Line Caps to a line style with short, widely-spaced dashes.


Displays the available corner styles.


Draws mitered (pointed) corners for polygons, and selects a square nib shape.


Draws rounded corners for polygons, and selects a round nib shape.


Draws blunted corners for polygons, and selects a square nib shape.


Displays the available line cap styles.


Truncates the line at each endpoint.


Draws round caps extending beyond the ends of the line.


Draws square caps extending beyond the ends of the line.


Controls the nib shape and angle to create calligraphic effects.


Previews the shape and orientation of the nib, showing the effects of varying the Angle and Stretch settings. You can also change the shape of the nib by dragging in the preview box.


Changes the width of the nib. A square nib has a stretch value of 100%; smaller values will make the nib narrower, creating a calligraphy effect.


Varies the angle of the nib, creating a calligraphic effect.


Resets the Angle value to 0.0 degrees and the Stretch value to 100%.


Specifies whether the outline is placed behind of, or in front of, the object's fill. When placed behind, only half the outline's thickness will be visible. This option is particularly useful for outlined text.


Specifies whether the outline thickness and nib orientation remain the same, or change in proportion to the object.

If enabled, the outline thickness increases when the object is enlarged (by scaling or stretching) and decreases when the object is made smaller. If the object is rotated, the nib shape also changes accordingly.


Arrowhead Editor

Enables you to make changes to the existing line-ending shapes. You can stretch, scale, or move the arrowhead around in relation to the ending point of the line, but you cannot change its basic shape.

If you are looking for a specific effect, choose the line-ending shape closest to what you are looking for, and then edit it using the Arrowhead Editor.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Displays a magnified, editable image of your arrowhead. You can stretch the arrowhead with the solid markers, and move it with the hollow markers.


Flips the arrowhead horizontally.


Flips the arrowhead vertically.


Centers the arrowhead horizontally with respect to the X marker.


Centers the arrowhead vertically with respect to the X marker.


Magnifies the arrowhead by a factor of four. This is useful when positioning the arrowhead.


This .RTF contains all the context-sensitive help for the commands and dialogs accessed from VENTURA's Tools menu


menu commands


Checks the spelling of all or part of the active document text and finds possible grammatical or stylistic errors.


Replaces a word in the document with a synonym (a word with the same or similar meaning).


Corrects capitalization errors and replaces straight quotes with typographic (curly) quotes as you type. You can also use Type Assist to automatically correct words you frequently misspell or which you want replaced when you type an abbreviation of the word.


Displays a window with a list of chapters, style sheets, text files and other items in the active document. You use the Navigator to create, rename and delete chapters, style sheets and master pages. You can also use the Navigator to move through the document using the table of contents, index, or cross-references.


Launches Corel DataBase Publisher and starts a new recipe.


Begins by prompting you to choose the recipe file to be edited. Once you choose a recipe, Corel DataBase Publisher is launched and the selected recipe is loaded.


Begins by prompting you to choose the recipe to be updated. Corel DataBase Publisher will run the selected recipe and update the output file.


Launches Corel DataBase Publisher wizard.


Starts recording your VENTURA keystroke, mouse, toolbar, and menu actions. When you have finished performing the actions you want to record, click Stop Recording. You can then use the Playback Recording command to replay your actions. For recording tips, click [image].


Ends recording the actions you perform after clicking the Start Recording command. You can then use the Playback Recording command to replay your actions.


Plays the actions you recorded with the Start Recording and Stop Recording commands. If no actions have been recorded during the current VENTURA session, the command is unavailable.


Saves a recording to disk as a Corel SCRIPT script. Once you save a recording as a script, you can edit it with the Corel SCRIPT Editor. When your recorded actions are saved as a script, they are translated into Corel SCRIPT application commands.


Opens the Scripts dialog box which executes previously saved scripts or executes a selected script (from the Navigator). The Scripts dialog box also renames, deletes, imports, and exports previously saved scripts. Remember that you can also assign a keystroke, add a menu item, or add a button to the toolbar to run a script.


Opens the Corel SCRIPT Editor, which is a tool that you use to create and edit Corel SCRIPT scripts (or saved recordings).


Customizes the rulers displayed in the active document window. Use this command to change the size of the rulers, the system of measurement they use, the location of the zero points and the default alignment for new tabs added using the tab bar on the horizontal ruler.


Resets the unit of measurement in all dialog boxes to the unit you specify.


Changes settings that control the appearance of the screen, whether VENTURA makes backup copies of your documents and other options.


Customizes toolbars, menu commands, and shortcut key assignments.


Guides you through the process of creating color profiles for your monitor, scanner and printer. The profiles help Corel VENTURA more accurately capture, display and print color.


Create system color profiles for your monitor, scanner and printer. The profiles help Corel VENTURA more accurately capture, display and print color.


Adds or removes Corel Add-on programs. An Add-on program is supplemental software that extends the capabilities of Corel VENTURA by adding custom commands and features. You can obtain Add-ons from independent software developers, or you can create your own. For more information, click [image].


Spelling and Proofreading dialog box


Spell Checking

Detects and corrects the following types of errors:

A/An use (English)

Capitalization

Spelling (abbreviation errors, apostrophe errors, cognitive misspellings, and typographic errors)

Clitics (Romance languages)

Compounding (English and the other Germanic languages)

Doubled words

Hyphenation (including soft-hyphen errors and hyphenation-dependent spelling errors)

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Note

•	By default, the Spell Checker refers to the Personal Dictionary USERPD during spelling checks.

 Related Topics


Specify which part of the active document you want to check for mistakes.


Click this button to begin checking for mistakes.


Shows mistakes or words not found in the open dictionaries.


Lists all alternative spelling words found in the proofreader's databases.


Moves to the next sentence containing a questionable word.


Leaves the current word unchanged and continues checking.


Ignores all subsequent words or phrases during the current proofreading session.


Replaces the currently flagged error with the word, or phrase, in the Change To box.


Replaces all instances of the currently flagged error and continues the proofreading session.


Opens a dialog box you can use to add words to your personal dictionary.


Stops the checking session and closes the International Proofreader.


Describes errors when found. The type of rule shown depends on the proofreading level you choose.


Displays a dialog box with settings for controlling the spell checker and proofreader.


Add Word to Dictionary dialog box

Adds a word not found in the main dictionary to the main or personal dictionary you specify. Thereafter, VENTURA won't question the word provided you use the specified dictionary when checking spelling. Click How To for instructions on how to have VENTURA consult personal dictionaries during a spelling check.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Shows the word that you can add to the selected dictionary.


Click the dictionary you want to add the word to. SPLDICT is the built-in dictionary. The USERPD dictionary is the default personal dictionary.


Proofreader Options dialog box


Advanced Options dialog box
Proofreader Options, Options

Enables you to set the languages you want the Proofreader to check in your document. You can also set up which language rules and errors are displayed in, whether alternative spellings are displayed when an error is found, use of personal dictionaries, and maximum sentence elements.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Lists all available International Proofreader Rule languages.


Choose the language you want the error description at the bottom of the previous dialog box to display in.

 Note

•	To check the spelling of a multilingual document, you must select the language each paragraph is written in. For instructions, click [image].


Enable this option to search the current language database for alternative spellings when an error is encountered.


Enable this option to have the spelling checker consult personal dictionaries.


Select the dictionaries you want the spelling checker to consult. SPLDICT is the built-in dictionary. The USERPD dictionary is the default personal dictionary.


Deletes the selected dictionary.


Click this button to create a new personal spelling dictionary.


Specify the maximum number of sentence elements you want for the selected language. Sentence elements are words or punctuation that the proofreader treats as units. The default setting for each language should be acceptable for most text; you should not change the default unless you need to reduce the memory overhead required by the buffer-processing function.


New Personal Dictionary dialog box


New User Profile dialog box
New User Profile/New Personal Dictionary dialog boxes

New User Profile

Enables you to create a new custom file containing your own rule changes for the proofreader. If you turn off rules or rule types for future sessions, the Rule Manager maintains a list of these in a user profile and reloads it when the next writing session starts. By default, these settings are kept in the user profile "USERPF." Type a new name if you want to create a new file.

If you turn off a rule, or rule type, for the current session only, the Rule Manager discards the information at the end of that session.

New Personal Dictionary

Enables you to create a new custom file containing your own additional spellings for the Spell Checker. By default, these settings are kept in the personal dictionary (USERPD). Type in a new name if you want to create a new personal dictionary.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Provides a place to type a name for the new dictionary.


Provides a place to type a name for the new User Profile.


Rule Manager dialog box
Proofreader Options, Rule Manager

Customizes the proofreader by turning off specific rules, or categories of rules, called rule types.

The Rule Manager allows you to turn individual rules or entire rule types off and to use different combinations of rules or rule types when writing for different readers. It keeps track of which rules and rule types you have turned off, and whether you want to do this for the current VENTURA session and/or for future sessions. If you turn off rules or rule types for future sessions, the Rule Manager maintains a list of these in a user profile and reloads it when the next session starts. If you turn off a rule or rule type for the current session only, the Rule Manager discards the information at the end of that session.

The Rule Manager displays a description of each Rule Type when selected in the Rule Manager dialog box.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Opens a dialog box where you can enter a name for a new user profile, a file containing personal rule settings.


Lists all personal user profiles created.


Enables you to choose between Spelling, Quick Proofreading, and Full Proofreading modes for your user profile changes.


Enables you to choose between Formal, Standard, and Informal modes for your user profile changes.


Restores the default settings for the Check Mode selected.


Describes the error type highlighted in the Rule Types box.


Enable the Current checkbox to observe the corresponding rule for the current VENTURA session only. Enable the Long-Term to observe the rule for this and all subsequent sessions.


Thesaurus dialog box


Thesaurus dialog box (Tools menu)
Thesaurus dialog box

Suggests synonyms for words in your document. Use the Text tool to highlight the word you want a synonym for, and then choose the Thesaurus command. Since the Thesaurus command is always available you can use it to look up any word, not just the words in the current document.

VENTURA comes with thesauruses for several languages, including French, German, Italian and Spanish. Although you can have more than one thesaurus installed on your system, you can only look up words in one language at a time. Click the How To button and choose "Installing dictionaries and thesauruses for other languages" for information on changing the thesaurus.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Displays the word you selected before choosing the Thesaurus command. If you chose the command without selecting a word, you can look up synonyms for any word you type in the box. After typing the word, click the Look Up button.


Displays definitions for the selected word. Choose the definition that fits the context of the selected word in your document. Select a word to see a more complete definition in the Full Definition box.


Displays a synonym for the word in the Looked Up box. The list changes according to the definition selected.


Displays a list of synonyms for the word in the Looked Up box.


Replaces the word in the Looked Up box with the word selected in the Replace With box.


Replaces the word in the Looked Up box with the word you looked up most recently.


Displays the entire definition for words selected in the Definitions list.


Type Assist dialog box


Type Assist dialog box

With Type Assist, you can correct misspelled words and capitalization errors automatically. For example, you can create entries that cause Corel VENTURA to replace "teh" with "the" or choose a setting that will automatically correct two initial consecutive capitals (e.g., "RObert" would be replaced with "Robert"). You can also set VENTURA to automatically capitalize the first letter of sentences, change straight quotes to typographic quotes, and capitalize the names of days.

You can also use Type Assist to automatically insert frequently used words and phrases. For instance, you can store the phrase "as soon as possible" under the name "asap." Then, whenever you type asap followed by a space, VENTURA replaces it with "as soon as possible."

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Capitalizes the first letter following a sentence end. A sentence end is defined by a period (.), an exclamation mark (!), or a question mark (?). In Spanish, the marks ¿ and ¡ are also supported.


Changes the standard quotation marks (") included in most font sets to curly, typographical quotes typically used in newspapers and books.


Changes the second capital to lowercase if by mistake you hold down the SHIFT key too long and start a word with two capitals. No change is made if the capitals are followed by a space or period or the word contains other capital letters.


Automatically capitalizes the names of days.


Enables the Replacement Text option, shown below. Text replacement occurs when you press the Spacebar or press ENTER.


Type the code you want Type Assist to use to replace longer text strings automatically .


Type the full word, phrase or text string you want to replace the abbreviation.


Click to add Replacement text to the list.


Deletes replacement options, including the defaults provided in Type Assist if you choose.


Lists the preset strings included with your software and any new ones you've created.


Ventura Navigator dialog box


The Navigator

Displays the contents of open documents. Use the list at the top of the Navigator to select the components (table of contents, index, master pages etc.) you want to work on.

For more for information about the Navigator, click [image].


Click this button to update the selected index file so that it reflects the changes you've made to the index. To update all index files at the same time, select the document, then click Update.


Click (or double-click) a word in the document, then click Add to add the word to the selected index. To create a subentry, select the word in the index under which you want the subentry to appear, then click Add.


Choose the component (table of contents, indices, cross-references, etc.) that you want to work with or that you want to use to navigate through the active document.


Navigator features

The Navigator displays the contents of any open documents using a tree-like structure similar to the Windows 95 Explorer, or File Manager.

Navigator views and document management features

You can use the Navigator's views (selected from the list at the top of the Navigator window) to work with your documents in a variety of ways. Publication Manager view shows the chapters, style sheets and the text and picture files in the document. The other views show the document's table of contents, index, cross-references, master pages and scripts.

As its name suggests, you can use the Navigator to move through documents in any of the views except Master Pages view. In Publication Manager view, for example, you can move to specific chapters or to pages containing a particular text or picture file.

The Navigator's other features, most of which are accessible by right-clicking an item [image] such as a chapter name [image] allow you to:

•	add new or existing chapters, and rearrange their order

•	move, copy and rename files

•	update the table of contents

•	insert index entries

•	archive documents

•	set access rights for workgroup publishing

The Navigator supports multitasking, allowing you to have more than one open at the same time. And since the Navigator is modeless, you can create an index in one document and view the structure of another.

Navigator properties

Right-clicking the background in the Navigator displays a menu with commands for controlling how files names appear. For example, you can show or hide the drive letter and folder name where files are stored.

Navigator icons

Active document	File linked from Library

Document open but not active	Table of contents file

Chapter	Index file

Stylesheet	Index entry or item in a table of contents

Master page	Folder

Text file	Cross-reference marker

Embedded picture	Cross-reference

Externally-referenced picture	Unresolved cross-reference (no matching marker exists)

Externally-referenced file or file linked to document from a library not found. Right-click file to locate it.	Index, table or contents or cross-references do not exist

Multi-user file checked out. (RO) means a file is read-only. To make changes, you must check the file out.


Navigator Properties dialog box


Navigator Properties dialog box

Controls how filenames display in the Navigator.


Enable this option to show the drive letter and folder name where files are stored.


Enable this option to show filenames that extend beyond the width of the Navigator window.


Enable this option to show the file extensions for text and picture files.


Update Recipes dialog box (CDRFLT)


Edit Recipe dialog box (CDRFLT)


Save Script dialog box


Save Script dialog box

This dialog box saves VENTURA command recordings as an internal script, which is embedded in the active VENTURA document. You can also save a recording as an external script by clicking the External button. For more information about script types, click [image].

 Note

•	To get information about an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

 Related Topics


Click to save the script as an external script. External scripts are ordinary text files that are saved to disk as a separate file. Internal scripts are embedded into a publication and can only be executed, or edited, if the publication has been opened. For more information about script types, click [image].


Provides a space for you to type a description for the script you are saving. The description is stored in the script's first line as a remark (REM) statement.


Provides a space for you to type the name of the internal script you're saving. Click the External button to save as an external script. For more information about script types, click [image].


Internal scripts are embedded in a publication and can only be executed or edited if the publication has been opened.


External scripts are ordinary text files that are saved to disk as a separate file.


Save Script Recording External


Provides a space for you to type a description of the external script you're saving. The description is inserted into the first line of the script as a REM statement. For more information about script types, click [image].


Scripts dialog box


Scripts dialog box

This dialog box performs a variety of functions with scripts:

•	Run a previously saved internal or external script. Internal scripts are identified with the [image] icon while external scripts are identified with the [image] icon.

•	Rename, delete, import, and export previously saved scripts. Internal scripts can be exported to external scripts while external scripts can be copied to a VENTURA publication as an internal script.

 Note

•	Click [image] for information about the scripts included with VENTURA.

•	To get information about an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

 Related Topics


Enables the renaming of an internal script ( [image]) in the active VENTURA document. For more information about script types, click [image].


Executes the selected script in the Available Scripts list box.


Removes a selected internal script ( [image]) from the active VENTURA publication. For more information about script types, click [image].


Opens the Corel SCRIPT Editor and loads the selected script from the Available Scripts list box for editing.


Lists the internal scripts ( [image]) in the active VENTURA document and the external scripts ( [image]) in the active script folder noted beside this list box. Click the Browse button (...) to change the active script folder. For more information about script types, click [image].


Click to specify the folder that contains the external scripts ( [image]) listed in the Available Scripts list box. For more information about script types, click [image].


Specifies the active script folder that contains the external scripts listed in the Available Scripts list box. Click the Browse button (...) to change the active folder. For more information about script types, click [image].


Displays a description for the selected script in the Available Scripts list box. The description is stored in the script's first two lines as remark (REM) statements.


Closes this dialog box.


Saves a copy of a selected internal script as an external script. For more information about script types, click [image].


Copies a selected external script to the active VENTURA publication as an internal script. For more information about script types, click [image].


Ruler Properties dialog box


Properties for Rulers dialog box

Sets the units of measurement, size, origin and default tab alignment for the rulers and whether the zero points coincide with the page or the selected frame.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Click the units of measurement you want the horizontal ruler to use.


Click the units of measurement you want the vertical ruler to use.


Enter how far from the upper-left corner of the page you want to position the zero point on the horizontal ruler. Measuring objects or distances with the rulers is much easier when you move the zero points to the spot you are measuring from.

You can also drag crosshairs from the rulers and use them to set the origins. Drag the crosshairs from the white triangle in the box where the rulers meet.


Enter how far from the upper-left corner of the page you want to position the zero point on the vertical ruler. Measuring objects or distances with the rulers is much easier when you move the zero points to the spot you are measuring from.

You can also drag crosshairs from the rulers and use them to set the origins. Drag the crosshairs from the white triangle in the box where the rulers meet.


Choose the size of the rulers. Large rulers may at times be more convenient, but reduce the working space.


Enable this option to position the zero points on the rulers relative to the page.


Enable this option so that every time you select a frame or paragraph, the zero points move to coincide with it.


Click the default alignment you want for new tabs added using the tab bar on the horizontal ruler. After adding a tab, you can change its alignment by clicking the tab in the tab ruler with the right mouse button or by using the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command.


Set Global Units dialog box


Set Global Units dialog box

Resets the unit of measurement in all dialog boxes to the unit you specify.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Click the unit of measurement you want to use in all dialog boxes that contain font size settings.


Click the unit of measurement you want the Dimensions and Frame Origin settings in the Frame Properties dialog box to use.


Click the unit of measurement you want the Margins and Columns settings in the Frame Properties dialog box to use.


Click the unit of measurement you want the Vertical Rules and Rules settings in the Frame Properties dialog box to use. This setting also applies to the Line Settings in the Tag Properties, Paragraph Properties, and Character Tag dialog box (Defaults tab).


Click the unit of measurement you want the Line settings on the Default tab of the Tag Properties and Paragraph Properties dialog boxes to use.


Click the unit of measurement you want the spacing, alignment and tab settings in the Tag Properties and Paragraph Properties dialog boxes to use.


Click the unit of measurement you want the alignment settings in the Tag Properties and Paragraph Properties dialog boxes and the Footnote settings in the Chapter Properties dialog box to use. This setting also applies to the Vertical Justification settings in the Chapter, Tag, Paragraph and Table Properties dialog boxes.


Click the unit of measurement you want the Properties for Rulers dialog box to use.


Options dialog box, View tab


Options, View dialog box
Options, View

Modifies the appearance of the application and document windows such as the color of the grid and the display of the Status Line, text symbols (tabs, paragraph marks, etc.) and loose lines.

The settings you select remain in effect from one session to the next, until you change them.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Click the Color button to change the color of guidelines. Guidelines are non-printing lines used to align frames and graphics. You can add guidelines to the document window by dragging from the rulers, or by using the Tools, Grid/Guidelines Setup command. Use the same command to show or hide the guidelines.


Click the Color button to change the color of the column guides. Column guides are non-printing lines that show the areas on the base page that you can type text into. To hide the column guides, disable the Column Guides option.


Click the Color button to change the color of borders for frames you create with the Frame tool. To hide the borders, use the Hide Frame Borders command in the View menu.


Click the Color button to change the color of the grid. The grid is a network of intersecting lines used to align frames and graphics. To display the grid, use the Tools, Grid/Guidelines Setup command.


Click the Color button to change the color used to display loose lines. A loose line is any line of justified text where the word spacing exceeds the Maximum Word spacing amount defined in the paragraph tag.


Enable this option to optimize the appearance of color pictures on screen. This option is only available if your graphics card supports it. If you are more concerned with how quickly pictures display than you are with their appearance, use the Windows Dither option instead.


Enable this option to display graphics using 16 colors which may reduce the time it takes them to display. If appearance is more important than performance, use 256-Color Dithering instead.


Enable this option to display non-printing lines that show the areas on the base page that you can type text into.


Enable this option to keep the Frame tool selected after creating a frame. The tool remains selected, allowing you to continue creating frames until you click another tool in the Toolbox.


Enable this option to display the arrow indicating that the text file in the selected frame contains more text than appears in the frame.


Enable this option if you want generated tags to appear in the Tags list. Generated tags are those VENTURA automatically creates for such things as headers, footers, captions and so on. These tags begin with the letter Z.


Enable this option to stop the screen from refreshing when you click the mouse or press the ESC key. This lets you select a menu command or tool without waiting for the screen to redraw completely. Redrawing resumes when you choose the Refresh Window command in the View menu or press Ctrl + W.


Enable this option to highlight any line of justified text where the word spacing exceeds the Maximum Word spacing amount defined in the paragraph tag.


Enable this option to display the Status Line along the bottom of the VENTURA application window. The Status Line displays information about the current status of the document and application, such as the current page number and cursor position.


Enable this option to display information which identifies toolbar buttons when you move the mouse pointer over them.


Enable this option to display text symbols such as tabs, end of paragraph marks (¶) and forced line breaks.


Enter a pixel size to determine the size at which greek text is displayed. Greek text is displayed as horizontal lines rather than the individual characters. This speeds up the time required to redraw the screen. All text with a lower pixel size than the one entered in this box will appear as greek text.


Restores the original values for all settings in the this dialog box.


Options dialog box, General tab


Options, General dialog box
Options, General

Modifies settings such as automatic spelling checks and conversion of inch marks (straight quotes) in imported text files to true typographical quotation marks.

The settings you select remain in effect from one session to the next, until you change them.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Enable this option to convert double hyphens to em dashes and inch marks into one of the three types of built-in quotation marks or custom marks you specify. The conversion applies to imported text files and pre-version 7 documents. No conversion takes place in version 7 documents.

 Note

•	Use Type Assist, available from the Format menu, to convert inch marks and double dashes while you type.


Enable this option to convert inch marks to true typographical quotes.


Enable this option to convert inch marks to German-style quotes.


Enable this option to convert inch marks to French-style quotes.


Enable this option to convert inch marks to whatever characters you specify in the adjacent boxes.


Enable this check box to have the text tool always operate in Implicit Override mode. When Implicit Override mode is on, any change you make to a paragraph using the Text tool is an override and does not affect the paragraph tag. If you want to edit the paragraph tag while working in Implicit Override mode, use the Paragraph tool or the controls in the Paragraph Tag dialog box (click Format, Paragraph) to make the changes, or select the paragraph by pressing ALT while clicking.


Enable this option to have the contents of a frame rotate with the frame. If you want to rotate the contents independently of the frame, disable this option and set the angle of rotation using the Format, Frame command (General tab).


Enter the number of bands used to represent fountain fills on the screen. Choosing a lower value (less than 20) speeds up screen redrawing, but results in noticeable banding.


Enable this option to have VENTURA alert you that changes you make to tagged frame will affect other frames in the document with the same tag.


Click this button to turn PANOSE font matching on and off and to change font matching settings. Font matching occurs when (a) you open a VENTURA document from another computer system, or (b) import text or graphics files that use a font unavailable of your system.


Shows or hides memos inserted using the Insert, CorelMEMO command.


Specify how you want to display memos inserted using the Insert, CorelMEMO command. Choose Content to display the text of the memo or one of the other options to display the memo as a labeled (Icon) or unlabelled (Picture) graphic.


Enable this option to automatically resize the memo to fit the dimensions of its frame. This ensures the content of the memo remains readable when the size of the frame changes.


Specify what you want to happen when you start Corel VENTURA.

•	Start a New Document, starts a new blank document based on the default stylesheet.

•	File New Dialog, starts a new document based on the sample or template you select.

•	Open an Existing Document, displays the Open dialog box so that you can select the document you want to work on.

•	None starts VENTURA without opening a document, template or dialog box.


Options dialog box, Copy Editor tab


Options, Copy Editor

Modifies the appearance of the Copy Editor such as the font used to display text and whether text attribute codes and codes marking the location of index entries, footnote references and other items display.

The settings you select remain in effect from one session to the next, until you change them.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Note

•	In Copy Editor view, the document prints exactly as it appears on screen. If you don't want tag names and markup codes to print, hide them using the Tools, Option command.


Enter the space between tab stops. Because you can choose whatever font you want for the Copy Editor, you may need to adjust the tab stops so that text is properly spaced on screen. The tab stops apply to the Copy Editor only; they do not affect the layout of the document as it appears in Page Layout view.


Enter the width of the column where tag names display in the Copy Editor.


Click this button to change the color of the formatting codes and codes for index entries, frame anchors, footnote entries, etc. To see the codes, you must enable Show Codes.

The Code Color also applies to the degree symbol used to mark the presence of these codes in Page Layout view.


Click this list to change the font used to display text in the Copy Editor.


Enter the size of the font you want for text in the Copy Editor.


Enable this option to display formatting codes and codes for index entries, frame anchors, footnote entries etc.


Enable this option to display the spaces between characters as dots.


Options dialog box, Save tab


Options, Save dialog box
Options, Save

Specifies if and when VENTURA makes backup copies of your documents and whether they are automatically saved at regular intervals. Also sets the size beyond which VENTURA links or imbeds an imported picture rather than storing it as part of the document.

The Autosave option is not supported for multi-user publications. Multi-user publications are only backed up when the whole publication is checked in, or when you initially set it up as a multi-user publication.

If your system software does not fully support the default long file naming convention, see Turning off long file names for Autosave and Backup files to use short file names instead.

The settings you select remain in effect from one session to the next, until you change them.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Enable this option to make a backup copy of a document each time you save it.

 Note

•	Multi-user publications are only backed up when you check in the entire publication.


Enable this option to make a backup copy of a document when you close it.


Enable this option to automatically create an autosaved document at regular intervals while you work. When you enable this check box, the number box beside it becomes available. Use this box to specify the time between autosaves.

 Note

•	For multi-user publications, Auto Save is not supported.


Enter the time between backups if you have enabled the Auto-backup check box. You can specify a value between 1 and 120 minutes.


Enter the file-size threshold beyond which VENTURA asks whether you want pictures referenced externally rather than incorporated into the document. For more information about embedding and referencing files, click [image].


Specify the dictionary you want to use to hyphenate text in documents created in version 3.0 to 4.2 of VENTURA.


Options dialog box, Selection tab


Options, Selection dialog box
Options, Selection

Modifies settings such as the placement of duplicated frames and graphics, the Constrain Angle for rotating, and the size of frame handles.

The settings you select remain in effect from one session to the next, until you change them.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Specify how close you must move the mouse pointer to a frame, graphic or cell border before you can select it. If text is very close to the edge of the border, lower this setting to keep the insertion point from changing to the pointer.


Specify how close you must move a frame or graphic object to a grid line or guideline before the item snaps to the line.


Enter the amount of horizontal offset from the original when you duplicate frames and graphic objects with the Edit, Duplicate command. Positive values shift the duplicate to the right; negative values shift it to the left.

To change the unit of measure, click the right mouse button inside the Horizontal box and select Units.


Enter the amount of vertical offset from the original when you duplicate frames and graphic objects with the Edit, Duplicate command. Positive values shift the duplicate up; negative values shift it down.

To change the unit of measure, click the right mouse button inside the Vertical box and select Units.


Controls the angle of motion when you perform any of the following operations with CTRL held down: skewing or rotating; drawing straight lines in Freehand mode; adjusting control points when drawing in Bezier mode.


Controls the size of the frame selection handles.


Enter the number of actions or operations that can be reversed using the Undo command in the Edit menu. As the setting increases, so does the amount of memory VENTURA requires to operate.


Enter how far a selected object moves when you press the direction keys on the numeric keypad.

To change the unit of measure, click the right mouse button inside the Vertical box and select Units.


Enable this option if you want frames and graphics moved using the direction keys on the numeric keypad to snap to guidelines when Snap to Guidelines is enabled


Options dialog box, Page tab


Options, Page dialog box
Options, Page

Sets the size of the pasteboard, the gap between the document window and the page, the amount measurements change when you click the scroll buttons on the Units boxes, and the color of the Gamut Alarm. Any colors in pictures that are not available in the printer's color space display in the color specified for the Gamut Alarm. Color correction must be active and Simulate printer must be enabled using the View, Color Correction command for the Gamut Alarm to work.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Set the amount of space you want between the edge of the page and the document window.


Set the size of the pasteboard. The pasteboard is the area surrounding the page. It acts as a worktable on which you set your document. You can place elements [image] such as pictures [image] on the pasteboard and move them onto the page when you need them.


Enter the amount measurements change when you click the scroll buttons on Unit boxes. You can specify different increments for each of the six measurement systems.


Click the color that you want to appear in place of pixels in your image that are not in your printer's gamut. If a color is not reproducible, it will appear as the single, solid color selected from the drop-down palette. For more information about this setting, click the Help button in this dialog box.


Customize dialog box, Keyboard tab


Customize, Keyboard dialog box
Customize dialog box, Keyboard tab

Changes the built-in keyboard assignments for accessing menu commands and applying paragraph tags. You can create several sets of keyboard assignments to use for different types of projects, saving and loading sets as they are needed.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Tip

•	Other members of your workgroup can customize their environment to match yours by copying the *.CFG files in your VENTURA folder to theirs.

 Note

•	The following keys or key combinations are system keys and are not valid as part of any accelerator:

F1

Alt + F6

Alt + TAB

Alt + ESCAPE

Ctrl + ESCAPE

Ctrl + / ('/' on the numeric keypad is valid)

 Related Topics


Displays the available commands. Double-click a command category to open it.


Gives a short description of the selected command.


Type the keyboard combination you want to assign to the selected command. You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL + ALT + 1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1, 2, 3, and 4 keys in succession. If you need to make a correction, press the Backspace key.

For a list of invalid keys or key combinations, click the Help button at the bottom of the dialog box.


Displays any commands assigned to the keyboard combination you typed. You cannot have the same combination for more than one command.


Automatically resolves conflicts by erasing the old keyboard assignment, and prompting you to assign a new combination to the old command.


Displays any existing shortcut keys for the current command.


Shows the name of the current keyboard assignment set.


Assigns the new keyboard combination to the current command.


Deletes the selected shortcut keys.


Loads a new keyboard assignment table.


Saves the current keyboard assignment table.


Resets the keyboard assignments to their original configuration.


Customize dialog box, Menus tab


Customize, Menus dialog box
Customize dialog box, Menus tab

Enables you to add commands to existing menus, or add new menus to the Menu Bar. You can change the order of the menus and their commands to give you quick, easy access to the functions you use most.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Note

•	When you customize your menus, keep in mind that the help topics referring to those menus do not change.

 Tip

•	Other members of your workgroup can customize their environment to match yours by copying the *.CFG files in your VENTURA folder to theirs.

 Related Topics


Displays the available commands. Double-click a command category to open it.


Adds the selected command to the menu.


Removes the selected command from the menu.


Adds a separating line to a menu below the current selection.


Adds a new menu.


Moves the current menu, or menu entry, up.


Moves the current menu, or menu entry, down.


Lists the available menus. Click the name of the menu you want to add a command or other item to or from which you want to delete an item.


Displays the current menu structure for the selected menu. Double-click a menu or sub-menu to open it.


Gives a short description of  the selected command.


Resets the menu assignments to their original configuration.


Customize dialog box, Toolbars tab


Customize, Toolbars dialog box
Customize dialog box, Toolbars tab

Enables you to add and remove buttons and other controls on the toolbars and Property Bar as well as customize the information that appears in the Status Bar. You can also create your own toolbars containing only the buttons and controls you use most often.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

Tip

•	Other members of your workgroup can customize their environment to match yours by copying the *.CFG files in your VENTURA folder to theirs.

 Related Topics


Displays the available command categories. Click a category to display its command buttons.


Displays the command buttons for the current command category. Click a button to see its description, or drag it to add it to any toolbar on the screen.


Gives a short description of any toolbar button that you click.


Lists the available Property Bars. Click the name of the Property Bars you want to add buttons to or from which you want to remove buttons or other controls.


Corel Add-ons dialog box


Corel Add-ons dialog box

Adds or removes Corel Add-ons. An Add-on program is optional software that extends the capabilities of Corel VENTURA by adding custom commands and features. You can obtain Add-ons from independent software developers, or you can create your own using Corel SCRIPT. See Developing Corel Add-ons for VENTURA for information about writing your own Add-ons.

 Related Topics


Lists the names of Corel Add-ons installed in VENTURA. If the Add-on you want does not appear in the list, click New, and then locate the add-on. Click the + button beside the installed Add-on for a list of functions the Add-on supports. Click the - button to close the opened tree.


Click this button to load a Corel Add-on which is not currently loaded in VENTURA.


Click this button to remove the selected Corel Add-on from VENTURA.


Shows where the selected Corel Add-on is stored. You can load new Corel Add-ons by clicking the New button.


Executes a selected Corel Add-on function. Click the + button beside the installed Add-on for a list of functions the Add-on supports.


This .RTF contains all the context-sensitive help for the commands and dialogs accessed from Ventura's View menu


menu commands


Switches the active document to Copy Editor view, which speeds up text editing by displaying text without formatting, pictures, and frames.

To edit a text file in the Copy Editor, do either of the following:

·	Switch to the Copy Editor and choose the file you want to edit from the Files list.

·	Select the frame containing the text you want to edit and switch to the Copy Editor.

Note: To edit text typed into a drawn frame, as opposed to imported, click to place the insertion point in the text and then switch to the Copy Editor.


Switches the active document to Page Layout view which displays the document the way it looks when printed. This is the view you use to format your document and position items in frames. Although you can work with text in this view, editing and scrolling slows down especially when there are pictures on the page.


Switches the active document to Master Page view, allowing you to make changes to the master page.


Controls how large or small a document appears on the screen. You can enlarge the display to make the document easier to read, or reduce the display to view an entire page or several pages at once.


Moves through the document by displaying the next, previous, first or last page, or by going to a specific page. You can also jump to the page where text from a particular file starts, and then jump to the other pages that contain text from that file. Use this feature to quickly locate text in documents, such as magazines in which text flows in frames on different pages.


Displays or hides toolbars, creates new toolbars, resets them to their original settings, adds or removes buttons and changes the button size.


Enables or disables Snap to Columns, which forces frames and graphic objects to align with the column guides. Column guides are non-printing lines that show the areas on the base page that you can type text into. You can display or hide the guides using the Tools, Options command or the Property Bar displayed when the base page frame is selected.


Enables or disables Snap to Inter-Line, which forces frames and graphic objects to align with a grid that coincides with the inter-line spacing defined for Body text.


Enables or disables Snap to Grid which forces frames and graphic objects to align with the grid on the current page. Use the Grid/Guidelines Setup command in the Tools menu to specify the spacing of the grid lines and whether the grid displays.


Enables or disables Snap to Guidelines. Guidelines are non-printing lines that you can place anywhere in the document window either by dragging them from the rulers or by using the Grid/Guidelines Setup command in the Tools menu. With Snap to Guidelines on, a frame or graphic object drawn or moved near a guideline snaps to it.


Displays or hides the borders around frames. Since borders don't print, hiding them gives you a better idea how pages will look when printed.


Displays or hides all imported pictures in the document. When you hide pictures, VENTURA displays an X inside the frames containing them, which makes the screen redraw more quickly.


Displays or hides the picture in the selected frame. When you hide a picture, VENTURA displays an X inside its frame, which makes the screen redraw more quickly.


Displays or hides the rulers which you can use to set tabs, margins and columns.


Disables color correction. Choosing Fast or Accurate enables Color Correction, allowing you to see colors as they will appear when printed. For more information about Color Correction, click [image].


Adjusts the display of colors in the document to approximate colors in a white-balanced photograph. For more information about Color Correction, click [image].


Adjusts the display of colors in the document to match, as closely as possible, the colors in a white-balanced photograph. For more information about Color Correction, click [image].


Adjusts the display of colors in the document to match, as closely as possible, the colors in the printed output. For more information about Color Correction, click [image].


Shows colors in the document which cannot be reproduced by the selected printer. Such colors display as a single solid color specified using the Options command in the Tools menu. For more information about the Gamut Alarm and Color Correction, click [image].


Controls whether color correction applies to all elements in the document or to text only. This command takes effect when you enable Color Correction by selecting Fast or Accurate from the Color Correction submenu. For more information about Color Correction, click [image].


Redraws the screen removing "dirt" left over from earlier manipulations. You can also use this command to allow the screen to finishing redrawing following a display interrupt.

A display interrupt stops the screen during a redraw whenever the mouse button or a key is pressed. If you are working on a page with illustrations, interruptible refresh can save time by allowing you to select tools and commands without waiting for the screen to redraw completely. You can turn Interruptible Display on and off using the Tools, Options command.


Zoom dialog box


Zoom dialog box

Sets the magnification factor for the current document window. You can also use the Zoom tool to set the magnification factor.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.


Click any of these buttons to choose a preset zoom factor. Available preset selections range from 200% to 25%. Values above 100% zoom in closer to the document, values below 100% zoom out from the document and, 100% displays the document at its actual size.


Click to select a customized magnification factor, then enter a value in the adjacent box.


Adjusts the magnification to display the full page.


Adjusts the magnification factor to display the full width of the page.


Adjusts the magnification factor to display the full height of the page.


Displays adjacent pages in a double-sided document side-by-side.


Type the number of pages you want displayed across the width of the document window.


Go To dialog box


Go To dialog box

Moves through the document by displaying the next, previous, first or last page or by going to a specific page. You can also jump to the page where text from a particular file starts and then to the other pages that contain text from that file. Use this feature to quickly locate text in documents such as magazines in which text flows in frames on different pages.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Enter the number of the page you want to display. The page VENTURA displays depends on the option you select from the Page Mode list below. See Help for the list box for more information.


Specify which page numbers to use to locate a page. Page Number numbers coincide with the physical location of the page within the document and would differ from the Page Counter numbers when numbering is restarted at some point in the document [image] for example, at the beginning of each chapter.

The Page number area of the Status Bar displays the physical page number first followed by the page counter number in parentheses.


Enable the Chapter option and to move relative to the chapter selected from the Chapter list.


Enable the File check box to display a page containing text in a file selected from the adjacent list. Then, use the arrow buttons to display the next, previous, first or last page containing text in the file. In newsletter-style documents, this makes it easy to find the pages containing the continuation of an article or story.


Click this button to display the first page in the selected chapter or the page that text in the selected file starts.


Click this button to display the previous page in the selected chapter or the previous page containing text from the selected file.


Click this button to display the next page in the selected chapter or the next page containing text from the selected file.


Click this button to display the last page in the document or the page on which text in the selected file ends.


Displays the specified page without closing the dialog box.


Closes the dialog box.


Toolbars dialog box


Toolbars dialog box

Controls which toolbars display on the screen. You can also use this dialog box to create, customize and restore toolbars to their original configurations.

For Help on specific items in this dialog box, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about.

 Related Topics


Displays the available toolbars. Enable the checkbox next to a toolbar to activate it. Click the toolbar's name tag to rename it.


Creates a new toolbar. Click Customize to add buttons to the new toolbar.


Deletes a custom toolbar, or resets a built-in toolbar.


Opens the Customize dialog box, where you can change the configuration of your toolbar buttons.


Click this button to change the size of the buttons on the toolbar and hide or show titles on floating toolbars.


Drag the bar to change the size of the button.


Drag the bar to change the size of border around the toolbar.


 Enable this option to display titles on floating toolbars.


This .RTF contains all the context-sensitive help for the commands and dialogs accessed from Ventura's Window menu


menu commands


Opens a new document window with the same contents as the active window. If you change the contents of a document in one window, all of the other windows that contain the same document reflect those changes.


Arranges document windows so that they overlap. Select the window you want to work in by clicking its Title Bar.


Arranges document windows side by side with no overlapping.


Arranges document windows top to bottom with no overlapping.


Arranges document windows that have been reduced to icons so that they line up along the bottom of the Corel VENTURA window.


Divides the active window into two panes. Each pane scrolls independently, allowing you to work on different parts of a document at the same time or display different views of the same document.

To remove the split, double-click the bar dividing the window, or drag it to the bottom or top of the document window.


Closes all open documents at the same time prompting you to save those with any unsaved changes.


Switches to the corresponding Navigator and makes it active. Use the Tools, Navigator command to open a Navigator.


Use this command to switch between Corel VENTURA library windows. To open a Library, click File, Library.


Opens a Corel VENTURA Library. A library is a storage area for items such as text, pictures, tags and tables. If you frequently use a particular item, add it to the library to make it available for placement in any document.

You can have multiple libraries open at the same time and cut and copy items between them.


Switches to the corresponding Library and makes it active.


Switches to the corresponding document and makes it active.


Default topics


No related topics were found.


No procedure topics were found.


No topics were found.


About table functions

Table functions are the tools that enable you to turn your data into meaningful information. Each function automatically performs calculations for you. For example, you can use functions to calculate sums, averages, standard deviation, mortgage payments, or return on investments. Corel VENTURA contains hundreds of functions for conversion, date and time, engineering, financial, logical, mathematical, and statistical calculations.

Using functions will save you time and effort, since Corel VENTURA automatically performs the calculations for you. All you have to do is enter the required data and the answer will be generated.

Each function has a specific name (in uppercase) that describes what the function does. Each function also has arguments or data that you insert so that the function will calculate an answer for you. For example, the SUM function adds all the given arguments.

Arguments usually consist of numbers or references to cells that contain numbers; however, in some functions the arguments can be text or logical values (see the online Help for each function for further information).

Arguments always follow the name of the function and are enclosed in parentheses. If a function requires multiple arguments, each argument must be separated by a list separator which, depending on your system settings, is either a comma or a semi-colon. For example, if you wanted to add the numbers 1, 5, 8, and 10, you would use the SUM function by calling the Function Wizard, and typing its name and the arguments into a cell as follows:

=SUM(1,5,8,10}

Notes

•	An equals sign (=) must always precede the function name.

•	Remember to press ENTER when finished.

•	Similarly, if you wanted to add the numbers contained in the cells R1C1, R2C1, R3C1, and R4C1, you would access the Function wizard to use the SUM function as follows:

=SUM(R1C1, R2C1, R3C1, R4C1}

or you could type:

=SUM(R1C1:R4C1}

Both methods would add the values contained in the cells R1C1, R2C1, R3C1, and R4C1.

The equal sign, function name, and arguments typed into a cell in the form shown above is considered a formula. Once a formula is entered into a cell, Corel VENTURA calculates the answer and displays the result in the cell.

•	When the result is displayed in the cell, the formula is not erased. To view your formula, select the cell and look at the formula bar near the top of your screen. If you change an argument in the formula bar, a new result will be generated.

 Related Topics


Using a function within a function

Functions can be used as arguments within other function formulas. For example, if you wanted to add the numbers 220 and the square root of 100, you would use the SUM function and place the square root function (SQRT) in it as follows:

=SUM(220,SQRT(100))

Note

•	The Help for each function explains in detail how to use it.


Using the Function Wizard

The easiest way to enter functions into cells is to use the Corel VENTURA Function Wizard. The Function Wizard contains a list of all the table functions indexed by their respective categories. The Function Wizard will help guide you through the arguments and automatically fill in the commas and parentheses for you.

To use the Function Wizard

1.	Click Insert, Table, Function.

2.	Choose the appropriate category from the Function Category box.

3.	Choose the appropriate function name from the Name box.

4.	Click Next.

5.	Type each argument into its appropriate box as prompted by the text that appears in the Function Wizard.

Notes

•	Be sure to follow the instructions that appear in the Function Wizard. These instructions will change as you click different functions or arguments.

•	To display Help for any function, click Help in the bottom left hand corner of the Function Wizard.


Understanding the function Help

The Help for each function contains:

•	a basic information button, located in the top right corner, that will provide useful information on using table functions and the Function Wizard

•	a definition of the function explaining what the function does

•	the Syntax, which shows the name of the function, the order of its arguments, and which arguments are required. The required arguments are displayed in bold and the optional arguments are not bolded. Each argument in the Syntax is a short form description of the type of data that should be entered in that location.

•	a description of each argument explaining the type of data that each argument requires

•	notes and error messages that provide useful tips and identify what is wrong if specific error messages are returned

•	examples and answers

•	related topics

Note

Click dotted underlined words in the online Help to obtain more information on the term.

To keep help on top

1.	Click Options, Keep Help on Top.

2.	Click OnTop.


Conversion Functions

Converts a number from one measurement system to another.

Syntax

CONVERT(number, from_unit, to_unit)

Arguments	Definitions

number	any real number you wish to convert

from_unit	the measurement system that number is currently expressed in

to_unit	the measurement system you wish to convert number to

Notes

•	The abbreviations for all units are case-sensitive.

•	A number can only be converted from one measurement system to another in the same group. For example, a number expressed in "degrees" can only be converted to another unit of angular measurement (e.g., "radians").

•	The metric prefixes below can be used in conversion formulas involving metric measures:

Prefix (Abbreviation)	Value	Prefix (Abbreviation)	Value
EXA  (E)		DECI  (d)
PETA  (P)		CENTI  (c)
TERA  (T)		MILLI  (m)
GIGA  (G)		MICRO  (u)
MEGA  (M)		NANO  (n)
KILO  (k)		PICO  (p)
HECTO  (h)		FEMTO  (f)
DEKA  (da)		ATTO  (a)
For example, if you wish to use KILOGRAMS instead of GRAMS add the appropriate prefix KILO to GRAMS by typing KILOGRAMS or its abbreviation kg.

Similarly, if you wish to use CENTIMETERS instead of METERS add the appropriate prefix CENTI to METERS by typing CENTIMETERS or its abbreviation cm.

Error Messages

•	CONVERT returns the #VALUE! error if number is non-numeric.

•	CONVERT returns the #N/A error if the unit does not exist or is not recognized.

•	CONVERT returns the #N/A error if a metric prefix is added to a non-metric unit.

•	CONVERT returns the #N/A error if from_unit and to_unit do not belong to the same measurement group.

Examples

CONVERT(25,DEGREES,RADIANS) = 0.436332312998

CONVERT(25,deg,rad) = 0.436332312998

CONVERT(90,FAHRENHEIT,CELCIUS) = 32.222222222222

CONVERT(90,F,C) = 32.222222222222

CONVERT(150,POUNDSMASS,KILOGRAMS) = 68.03884646

CONVERT(150,lbm,kg) = 68.03884646


Date and Time Functions

Date and Time Functions are multipliers that help you compute serial values for dates and times for use in a wide range of mathematical calculations. Click any of the Date and Time Functions shown at left below for more details on how they work.

Note: DATEVALUE, DAYS360 and TIMEVALUE are the only Date and Time Functions which normally recognize alphanumeric values.

See also Entering dates and times and Using alphanumeric date and time values

Date Function	Description

DATE()	Calculates the serial value of a specified date

DATEVALUE()	Converts date values to serial values for use in formulas

DAY()	Calculates the day of the month for the given serial value, returning an integer from 1 to 31 inclusive

DAYS360()	Calculates a value for the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year

MONTH()	Converts a serial value for a month to an integer from 1 to 12 inclusive

WEEKDAY()	Calculates a day of the week for a given serial value. The value returned is a positive integer between one and seven, where one is equal to Sunday, two is equal to Monday, and so on.

YEAR()	Calculates a year between 1900 and 2077 for a given serial value

Time Functions	Description

HOUR()	Converts the serial value for a given time value to an integer representing hours from 0 to 23 inclusive

MINUTE()	Calculates a minute value from 0 to 59 inclusive for a serial value

NOW	Calculates the serial value for the current date and time held in your computer's operating system

SECOND()	Calculates seconds given as a serial value to an integer from 0 to 59 inclusive

TIME()	Calculates a serial value for a specified time. The returning value is a decimal fraction from 0 to 0.9999999999 inclusive

TIMEVALUE()	Converts the user specified time from text to a serial value

TODAY()	Calculates the serial value corresponding to the current date held in your computer's operating system


DATE

Calculates the serial value of a specified date.

Syntax

DATE(year,month,day)

Arguments	Description

year	an integer from 1900 to 2099 inclusive

month	an integer from 1 to 12 inclusive

day	an integer from 1 to 31 inclusive

Notes

•	The day value must be valid for the month; e.g., if month is 6 (June) then day cannot be greater than 30, because June has only 30 days.

•	To convert the value returned by the DATE function from a serial value to a regular date format (e.g., mm/dd/yy), select one of the predefined options listed in the Numeric Format list box.

•	Use commas as separators.

Example

DATE(1994,2,25) = 34390, the serial value for February 25, 1994

 Related Topics


DATEVALUE

Converts date values to serial values for use in formulas.

Syntax

DATEVALUE("text")

Argument	Description

"text"	any alphanumeric date enclosed in quotation marks

Note

•	To convert the value returned by the DATEVALUE function from a serial value to a regular date format, select one of the predefined options listed in the Numeric Format list box.

•	You can nest (i.e., combine) the DATEVALUE function in other Date functions to display a serial value as a regular date, for example 34346 as Jan 12, 1994. For instructions nesting, click Related Topics.

Examples

DATEVALUE("Jan 12, 1994") = 34346

 Related Topics


DAY

Calculates the day of the month for the given serial value, returning an integer from 1 to 31 inclusive.

Syntax

DAY(number)

Argument	Description

number	any serial date number

Note

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula, it can be expressed as text, such as "February 14, 1995". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

DAY(34531) = 16

DATEVALUE(34531)=July, 16, 1994

 Related Topics


DAYS360

Calculates the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year.

Syntax

DAYS360(date1,date2,method)

Arguments	Description

date1	the serial date number representing the start date

date2	the serial date number representing the end date

method	logical value which specifies whether the European or U.S. method of calculation is used.  The default is the U.S. (NASD) method, or FALSE. This argument is optional.

Notes

•	The arguments should be expressed as serial numbers. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula they can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1996". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

•	If date1 occurs after date2, the function returns a negative value.

Examples

DAYS360(33660,33690) = 31

DAYS360 (33690, 33660) = -31

DAYS360(DATEVALUE("February 15, 1996"),DATEVALUE("February 17, 1996")) = 2

 Related Topics


HOUR

Converts the serial value of a given time to an integer representing hours from 0 to 23 inclusive.

Syntax

HOUR(number)

Argument	Description

number	any serial value

Note

•	In a serial value the numbers shown to the right of the decimal point represent seconds from midnight for the day entered.

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function TIMEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "1:15:00 AM". (See the second example.) For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

HOUR(0.4999) = 11

HOUR(TIMEVALUE("1:15:00 AM")) = 1

 Related Topics


MINUTE

Calculates a minute value from 0 to 59 inclusive for a serial value.

Syntax

MINUTE(number)

Argument	Description

number	any serial value

Notes

•	In a serial value the numbers to the right of the decimal point represent seconds from midnight for the day entered.

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function TIMEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "1:15:00 PM". (See the second example.) For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

MINUTE(9.48) = 31

MINUTE(TIMEVALUE("1:15:00 PM")) = 15

 Related Topics


MONTH

Converts a serial date value for a month to an integer from 1 to 12 inclusive.

Syntax

MONTH(number)

Argument	Description

number	any serial value

Note

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1995". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

MONTH(15666) = 11

MONTH(345) = 12

MONTH(202) = 7

MONTH(DATEVALUE("July 12, 1996")) = 7

 Related Topics


NETWORKDAYS

Calculates the number of whole workdays between two dates.

Syntax

NETWORKDAYS(start, end, holidays)

Arguments	Descriptions

start	the serial date number representing the start date

end	the serial date number representing the end date

holidays	one or more serial date numbers of non-workdays to exclude from the workdays calendar, such as federal holidays and floating holidays

Notes

•	The arguments should be expressed as serial numbers. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula they can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1995". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

•	If an argument is non-numeric this function returns the #VALUE! error.

•	If holidays is left blank it is assumed to be 0.

Examples

NETWORKDAYS(34750,34850) = 73

NETWORKDAYS(DATEVALUE("May 18, 1996"),DATEVALUE("May 24, 1996")) = 5

 Related Topics


NOW

Calculates the serial value for the current date and time held in your computer's operating system.

Syntax

NOW()

Notes

•	The whole number portion of the serial number produced represents today's date; the decimal portion represents the current time.

•	To convert the value returned by the NOW function from a serial value to a regular date and time format (e.g., M/d/yy h:mm) nest (i.e, combine) it with the DATEVALUE function. For instructions on nesting functions, click Related Topics.

•	You cannot specify a number format for this function.

Example

If today's date is February 24, 1994, and the time 4:00:53 PM, the NOW function produces 34389.66573.

 Related Topics


SECOND

Calculates seconds given as a serial value to an integer from 0 to 59 inclusive.

Syntax

SECOND(serial_value)

Argument	Description

serial_value	any serial value

Notes

•	In serial values the numbers shown to the right of the decimal point are measured in seconds, beginning with 0 at midnight for the day entered.

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function TIMEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "1:15:23 PM". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

SECOND(0.4999) = 51

SECOND(555.4999) = 51

SECOND(TIMEVALUE("1:15:23 PM")) = 23

 Related Topics


TIME

Calculates the serial value for a specified time. The returning value is a decimal fraction.

Syntax

TIME(hour,minute,second)

Arguments	Description

hour	integers from 0 (representing midnight) to 23 inclusive

minute	integers from 0 to 59 inclusive

second	integers from 0 to 59 inclusive

Note

•	To convert the value returned by the TIME function from a serial value to a regular time format  (e.g., hh:mm AM/PM), select one of the predefined options listed in the Numeric Format list box.

•	To properly display the result, change your number formatting to "0.0########".

Example

TIME(16,15,50) computes the serial value for 4:15:50 PM, which is 0.6777 with the Numeric Format set to Default.

 Related Topics


TIMEVALUE

Converts a given time from text to a serial value.

Syntax

TIMEVALUE(text)

Argument	Description

text	any textual time format recognized by Ventura enclosed in double quotation marks (e.g., "1:45:00 PM")

Notes

•	Use TIMEVALUE to convert time entered as text to its serial value for use in calculations.

•	To convert the value returned by the TIMEVALUE function from a serial value to a regular time format  (e.g., hh:mm AM/PM), select one of the predefined options listed in the Numeric Format list box.

•	You can nest (i.e., combine) the TIMEVALUE function in other Time functions to display a serial value as a regular time, for example 0.572916667 as 1:45 PM. For instructions nesting, click Related Topics.

Example

TIMEVALUE("1:45 PM") produces the serial value 0.572916667

 Related Topics


TODAY

Calculates the serial value corresponding to the current date held in your computer's operating system.

Syntax

TODAY()

Notes

•	To convert the value returned by the TODAY function from a serial value to a regular date format (e.g., January 12, 1994) nest (i.e, combine) it with the DATEVALUE function. For instructions on nesting functions, click Related Topics.

•	You cannot specify a number format for this function.

Example

TODAY() produces the serial value 34346, if the current date held in your computer's operating system is Jan. 12, 1994.

 Related Topics


WEEKDAY

Calculates the day of the week for a serial date value. The value returned is a positive integer between zero and seven.

Syntax

WEEKDAY(number, type)

Arguments	Description

number	any serial value

type	an integer between 1 and 3 that determines the type of return;

1 or omitted will return the value 1 if the date falls on a Sunday, 2 if it is a Monday, and so on (Default);

2 will return the value 1 if the date falls on a Monday, 2 if it is a Tuesday, and so on;

3 will return the value 0 if the date falls on a Monday, 1 if it is a Tuesday, and so on;

Note

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1996". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

WEEKDAY(34885) = 4

WEEKDAY(TODAY())  = 3, if today is Tuesday

DATEVALUE(34567) = Sunday, August 21, 1994

 Related Topics


YEAR

Calculates a year between 1900 and 2099 for a given serial date value.

Syntax

YEAR(number)

Argument	Description

number	any serial value

Notes

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1996". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

•	If an argument is non-numeric or out of range the YEAR function returns an #INVALID DATA! error.

Examples

YEAR(34328) = 1993

YEAR(34750) = 1995

YEAR(DATEVALUE("June 30, 1995")) = 1995

 Related Topics


YEARFRAC

Calculates the year fraction representing the number of whole days between two dates.

Syntax

YEARFRAC(start_date,end_date,basis)

Argument	Description

start	the serial date number representing the start date

end	the serial date number representing the end date

basis	specifies what type of day count to use

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Notes

•	The arguments start and end should be expressed as serial numbers. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula they can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1995". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

•	If an argument is non-numeric this function returns the #INVALID DATA! error.

•	If an argument is out of the range this function returns the #NUMBER! error.

Examples

YEARFRAC(3700,3805,2) = 0.2917

YEARFRAC(DATEVALUE("February 14, 1995"),DATEVALUE("April 22, 1995"),2) = 0.1861

 Related Topics


Engineering Functions

Function	Description

BESSELI()	Calculates the modified Bessel function In(x)

BESSELJ()	Calculates the Bessel function Jn(x)

BESSELK()	Calculates the modified Bessel function Kn(x)

BESSELY()	Calculates the Bessel function Yn(x)

DELTA()	Tests whether two numbers are equal

ERF()	Calculates the error function

ERFC()	Calculates the value of the complementary error function integrated between x and infinity

GAMMA	Calculates the Gamma function, G(x)

GAMMALN()	Calculates a value for the natural logarithm of the gamma function, G(x)

GESTEP()	Compares two values; result is 1 if num is [image] step and 0 if not


BESSELI

Calculates the modified Bessel function ln(x).

Syntax

BESSELI(x, n)

Arguments	Definitions

x	any real number which specifies the value at which to evaluate the function

n	an integer which specifies the order of the Bessel function

Notes and Error Messages

If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

BESSELI returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

BESSELI returns the #NUMBER! error if n<0.

Example

BESSELI(1.2, 2) = 0.2026

 Related Topics


BESSELJ

Calculates the Bessel function Jn(x).

Syntax

BESSELJ(x, n)

Arguments	Definitions

x	any real number which specifies the value to be used in evaluating BESSELJ

n	an integer which specifies the order of the Bessel function

Notes and Error Messages

BESSELJ truncates n if it is not an integer.

BESSELJ returns the #VALUE! error if any arguement is non-numeric.

BESSELJ returns the #NUMBER! error if n is less than 0.

Example

BESSELJ(1.2, 2) = 0.1593

 Related Topics


BESSELK

Calculates the modified Bessel function kn(x).

Syntax

BESSELK(x, n)

Arguments	Definitions

x	any real number which specifies the value to be used to evaluate BESSELK

n	an integer which specifies the order of the Bessel function

Notes and Error Messages

BESSELK truncates n if it is a non-integer.

BESSELK returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

BESSELK returns the #NUMBER! error if n < 0

Example

BESSELK(1.7,1) = 0.2094

 Related Topics


BESSELY

Calculates the modified Bessel function yn(x).

Syntax

BESSELY(x, n)

Argument	Definitions

x	any real number which specifies the value to use in evaluating BESSELY

n	an integer which specifies the order of the Bessel function

Notes and Error Messages

If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

BESSELY returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

BESSELY returns the #NUMBER! error if n < 0.

Example

BESSELY(1.2, 2) = -1.2633

 Related Topics


COMPLEX

Converts real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number (x+yi or x+yj).

Syntax

COMPLEX(real_number, imaginary_number, suffix)

Arguments	Definitions

real_number	any real number which specifies the real coefficient of the complex number

imaginary_number	the imaginary coefficient of the complex number

suffix	the suffix for the imaginary component of the complex number; if the suffix is not specified, "i" is used

Notes and Error Messages

COMPLEX returns the #VALUE! error if real_number or imaginary_number is non-numeric.

COMPLEX returns the #VALUE! error if the suffix is neither "i" nor "j".

Examples

COMPLEX(1,2) = 1+2i

COMPLEX(1,2,"j") = 1+2j

COMPLEX(0,2) = 2i

COMPLEX(2,0) = 2

 Related Topics


DELTA

Compares two values and returns the value 1 if they are equal and 0 if they are not.

Syntax

DELTA(number1, number2)

Arguments	Definitions

number1	any real number

number2	any real number; if omitted, it is assumed to be zero

Notes and Error Messages

If the second argument is omitted, it is assumed to be equal to 0.

DELTA returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Examples

DELTA(11.23654, 12.253) = 0

DELTA(12.735, 12.735) = 1

 Related Topics


ERF

Calculates the value of the error function integrated between lower and upper limits.

Syntax

ERF(lower, upper)

Arguments	Definitions

lower	any real number which specifies the lower bound for integration

upper	any real number which specifies the upper bound for integration; if omitted, it integrates between zero and lower

Notes and Error Messages

ERF returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

ERF returns the #NUMBER! error for negative arguments, or if upper limit is less than lower limit.

Example

ERF(1.2, 2) = 0.085

ERF(1) = 0.8427

 Related Topics


ERFC

Calculates the value of the complementary error function integrated from x to infinity.

Syntax

ERFC(x)

Argument	Definition

x	any real number which specifies the lower limit of integration

Notes and Error Messages

ERFC returns the #VALUE! error if the argument is non-numeric.

ERFC returns the #NUMBER! error if the argument is negative.

Example

ERFC(1)	 = 0.1573

 Related Topics


GAMMA

Calculates the value of the Gamma function. Commonly used to perform real number  factorials.

Syntax

GAMMA(x)

Arguments	Definitions

x	any positive real number which specifies the value at which to evaluate the function

Notes and Error Messages

GAMMA returns the #VALUE! error if the argument is non-numeric.

GAMMA returns the #NUMBER! error if the argument is negative.

The formula for the GAMMA function is:

Example

GAMMA(6.1)= 142.4519

 Related Topics


GAMMALN

Calculates a value for the natural logarithm of the gamma function.

Syntax

GAMMALN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a positive real number for which you want to determine GAMMALN

Error Messages

GAMMALN returns the #NUMBER! error if x [image] 0.

GAMMALN returns the #VALUE! error if x is non-numeric.

Examples

GAMMALN(9) = 10.6046

GAMMALN(3) = 0.6931

 Related Topics


GESTEP

Compares two values; result is 1 if number is [image] step and 0 if not.

Syntax

GESTEP(number, step)

Arguments	Definitions

number	any real number to be compared to step

step	any real number which is the threshold value; if a value is omitted, zero is used

Notes and Error Messages

GESTEP returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Examples

GESTEP( 5, 2) = 1

GESTEP( -5, 2) = 0

GESTEP( 2.5, 2.5) = 1

GESTEP(2) = 1

 Related Topics


IMABS

Calculates the absolute value of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMABS(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the absolute value, placed between double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMABS returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMABS returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMABS("3+24i") = 24.1868

IMABS("3+24j") = 24.1868

IMABS("6+8i") = 10

 Related Topics


IMAGINARY

Calculates the imaginary coefficient of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMAGINARY(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the imaginary coefficient, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMAGINARY returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMAGINARY returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMAGINARY("5+6i") = 6

IMAGINARY("5+6j") = 6

IMAGINARY("6+8i") = 8

 Related Topics


IMARGUMENT

Calculates the angle, A, in radians, of a complex number, such that:

Syntax

IMARGUMENT(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the angle [image], placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMARGUMENT returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMARGUMENT returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMARGUMENT("5+6i") = 0.8761

IMARGUMENT("5+6j") = 0.8761

IMARGUMENT("6+8i") = 0.9273

 Related Topics


IMCONJUGATE

Calculates the complex conjugate of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMCONJUGATE(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the conjugate, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMCONJUGATE returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMCONJUGATE returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMCONJUGATE("5+6i") = 5-6i

IMCONJUGATE("5+6j") = 5-6j

IMCONJUGATE("6+8i") = 6-8i

 Related Topics


IMCOS

Calculates the cosine of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMCOS(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the cosine of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMCOS returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMCOS returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMCOS("5+6i") = 57.2191 + 193.4276

IMCOS("5+6j") = 57.2191 + 193.4276j

IMCOS("6+8i") = 1431.1138 + 416.4629i

 Related Topics


IMDIV

Calculates the quotient of two complex numbers in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMDIV(complex1, complex2)

Arguments	Definitions

complex1	the complex numerator or dividend, enclosed in double quotation marks

complex2	the complex denominator or divisor, enclosed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMDIV returns the #NUMBER! error if complex1 or complex2 is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMDIV returns the #VALUE! error if complex1 or complex2 is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMDIV("300+150i","5+6i") = 39.3443 - 17.2131i

IMDIV("300+150j","5+6j") = 39.3443 - 17.2131j

IMDIV("-100+200i","6+8i") = 10 + 20i

 Related Topics


IMEXP

Calculates the exponential of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMEXP(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the exponential, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMEXP returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMEXP returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMEXP("5+6i") = 142.5019 - 41.4689i

IMEXP("5+6j") = 142.5019 - 41.4689j

IMEXP("6+8i") = -58.6989 + 399.1356i

 Related Topics


IMLN

Calculates the natural logarithm of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj. The natural logarithm is the logarithm base e.

Syntax

IMLN(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the natural logarithm, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMLN returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMLN returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMLN("9+12i") = 2.7081 + 0.9273i

IMLN("9+12j") = 2.7081 + 0.9273j

IMLN("15+22i") = 3.2819 + 0.9724i

 Related Topics


IMLOG

Calculates the logarithm of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMLOG(complex, number)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the logarithm of, placed in double quotation marks

number	any real number, the number for which you wish to determine the base of the logarithm

Notes and Error Messages

IMLOG returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMLOG returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

If number is omitted, it is assumed to be 10.

Examples

IMLOG("9+12i", 10) = 1.1761 + 0.4027i

IMLOG("9+12j") = 1.1761 + 0.4027j

IMLOG("15+22i", 3) = 2.9874 + 0.8851i

 Related Topics


IMLOG10

Calculates the base 10 (common) logarithm of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMLOG10(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the common logarithm of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMLOG10 returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMLOG10 returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMLOG10("9+12i") = 1.1761 + 0.4027i

IMLOG10("9+12j") = 1.1761 + 0.4027j

IMLOG10("15+22i") = 1.4253 + 0.4223i

 Related Topics


IMLOG2

Calculates the base 2 logarithm of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMLOG2(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the base 2 logarithm of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMLOG2 returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMLOG2 returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMLOG2("9+12i") = 3.9069 + 1.3378i

IMLOG2("9+12j") = 3.9069 + 1.3378j

IMLOG2("15+22i") = 4.7348 + 1.4028i

 Related Topics


IMPOWER

Calculates the result of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj raised to a power.

Syntax

IMPOWER(complex, power)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to raise to a power, placed in double quotation marks

power	any real number; the power you wish to raise the complex number to

Notes and Error Messages

IMPOWER returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMPOWER returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

IMPOWER returns the #VALUE! error if power is non-numeric.

Examples

IMPOWER("6+10i",2) = -64 + 120i

IMPOWER("6+10j",2) = -64 + 120j

IMPOWER("9+11i",3) = -2538 + 1342i

 Related Topics


IMPRODUCT

Calculates the product of two or more complex numbers in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMPRODUCT(complex)

Arguments	Definitions

complexlist	any complex number; a number you wish to multiply, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMPRODUCT returns the #NUMBER! error if the arguments are not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMPRODUCT returns the #VALUE! error if the arguments are not placed in double quotation marks.

IMPRODUCT limits the number of arguments to 30.

Examples

IMPRODUCT("6+10i","2+5i") = -38 + 50i

IMPRODUCT("6+10j","2+5j") = -38 + 50j

IMPRODUCT("9+11i","3+7i","5+8i") = -1018 + 80i

 Related Topics


IMREAL

Calculates the real coefficient of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMREAL(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the real coefficient of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMREAL returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMREAL returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMREAL("9+12i") = 9

IMREAL("9+12j") = 9

IMREAL("15+22i") = 15

 Related Topics


IMSIN

Calculates the sine of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMSIN(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the sine of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMSIN returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMSIN returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMSIN("4+9i") = -3066.2171 - 2648.2645i

IMSIN("4+9j") = -3066.2171 - 2648.2645j

IMSIN("7+8i") = 979.2248 + 1123.6753i

 Related Topics


IMSQRT

Calculates the square root of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMSQRT(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the square root of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMSQRT returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMSQRT returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMSQRT("4+9i") = 2.6314 + 1.7101i

IMSQRT("4+9j") = 2.6314 + 1.7101j

IMSQRT("7+8i") = 2.9690 + 1.3472i

 Related Topics


IMSUB

Calculates the difference of two complex numbers in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMSUB(complex1, complex2)

Arguments	Definitions

complex1	any complex number; the number from which you wish to subtract complex2, placed in double quotation marks

complex2	any complex number; the number you wish to subtract from complex1, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMSUB returns the #NUMBER! error if complex1 or complex2 is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMSUB returns the #VALUE! error if complex1 or complex2 is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMSUB("6+10i","2+5i") = 4 + 5i

IMSUB("6+10j","2+5j") = 4 + 5j

IMSUB("9+11i","3+7i") = 6 + 4i

 Related Topics


IMSUM

Calculates the sum of two or more complex numbers in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMSUM(complexlist)

Arguments	Definitions

complexlist	a list of complex numbers you wish to add, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMSUM returns the #NUMBER! error if the arguments are not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMSUM returns the #VALUE! error if the arguments are not placed in double quotation marks.

IMSUM limits the number of arguments to 30.

Examples

IMSUM("6+10i","2+5i") = 8 + 15i

IMSUM("6+10j","2+5j") = 8 + 15j

IMSUM("9+11i","3+7i","5+8i") = 17 + 26i

 Related Topics


ACCRINT

Calculates interest accrued on a security that returns interest periodically.

Syntax

ACCRINT(issue, firstinterest, settlement, coupon, par, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

issue	the serial date value for the issue date of the security

firstinterest	the serial date value for the date of the security's first interest

settlement	the serial date value for the date of the security's settlement

coupon	the annual coupon rate for the security

par	the par value; if no par value is entered, $1000 is used as a default

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; for annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Issue, firstinterest, settlement, frequency, and basis are rounded to integers.

ACCRINT returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	issue, firstinterest, or settlement is not a valid serial date value (between the years 1900 and 2099)

•	coupon is less than or equal to 0 or if par is less than or equal to 0

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	issue [image] settlement [image] firstinterest

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

ACCRINT(datevalue("January 27, 1995"),datevalue("June 25, 1995"),datevalue("March 25, 1995"), 0.1,1000,4,2) = 15.8333

 Related Topics


ACCRINTM

Calculates interest accrued on a security that returns interest upon maturation.

Syntax

ACCRINTM(issue, maturation, coupon, par, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

issue	the serial date value for issue date of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

coupon	the annual coupon rate for the security

par	the par value; if no par value is entered, $1000 is used as a default

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Issue, maturation, and basis are rounded to integers.

ACCRINTM returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	issue or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	coupon < 0 or if par < 0

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	issue [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

ACCRINTM(datevalue("June 1, 1990"),datevalue("January 1, 1991"),0.1,100,1) = 5.863014

 Related Topics


COUPDAYBS

Calculates the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the date of settlement.

Syntax

COUPDAYBS(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

The arguments are rounded to integers.

COUPDAYBS returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

COUPDAYBS(datevalue("January 1, 1993"),datevalue("June 1, 1994"),2,0) = 30

 Related Topics


COUPDAYS

Calculates the duration of the coupon period (in days) when the settlement occurs.

Syntax

COUPDAYS(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

COUPDAYS returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

The arguments are rounded to integers.

Example

COUPDAYS(datevalue("January 1, 1993"),datevalue("June 3, 1994"),2,1) = 182

 Related Topics


COUPDAYSNC

Calculates the number of days between the date of settlement and the next coupon date.

Syntax

COUPDAYSNC(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

The arguments are rounded to integers.

COUPDAYSNC returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

COUPDAYSNC(datevalue("January 27, 1994"),datevalue("March 1, 1994"),2,1) = 33

 Related Topics


COUPNCD

Calculates the next coupon date following the date of settlement.

Syntax

COUPNCD(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

To learn how to convert the result of COUPNCD from a serial value to a regular date format (e.g., mm/dd/yy), click the "How to" button in the top right hand corner.

The arguments are rounded to integers.

COUPNCD returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

COUPNCD(datevalue("January 27, 1993"),datevalue("March 1, 1994"),2,1) = 34029 which is equal to March 1, 1993

 Related Topics


COUPNUM

Calculates the number of coupons payable between the date of settlement and date of maturation.

Syntax

COUPNUM(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

The arguments are truncated to integers.

The result is rounded up to the nearest whole coupon.

COUPNUM returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

COUPNUM(datevalue("January 27, 1994"),datevalue("March 1, 1995"),2,1) = 3

 Related Topics


COUPPCD

Calculates the coupon date prior to the date of settlement.

Syntax

COUPPCD(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

To learn how to convert the result from a serial value to a regular date format (e.g., mm/dd/yy), click the "How to" button in the top right hand corner.

The arguments are rounded to integers.

COUPPCD returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

COUPPCD(datevalue("January 27, 1994"),datevalue("March 1, 1994"),2,1) = 34213 which is equal to 1-Sep-1993

 Related Topics


CUMIPMT

Calculates the cumulative interest paid on a loan from the start period to the end period.

Syntax

CUMIPMT(rate, nper, pv, start, end, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the interest rate.

nper	an integer representing the total number of payment periods.

pv	a number representing the present value

start	start period in the calculation; period numbers begin at 1

end	final period in the calculation

time	the time payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

Nper, start and end are rounded to integers.

CUMIPMT returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	rate is less than or equal to 0, or nper is less than or equal to 0, or pv is less than or equal to 0

•	start < 1, end < 1, or start > end

•	time [image] •	 0 or 1

CUMIPMT returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

Let rate be 3% annual (rate = 0.03 / 12 = 0.0025 )

Term, 1 year (nper = 1*12 = 12 )

Present value $10,000

The total interest paid in the first half-year (periods 1 through 6) is:

CUMIPMT(0.0025,12,10000,1,6,0)  = -119

 Related Topics


CUMPRINC

Calculates the cumulative principal paid on a loan from the start period to the end period.

Syntax

CUMPRINC(rate, nper, pv, start_period, end_period, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the interest rate

nper	an integer representing the total number of payment periods.

pv	present value

start	an integer representing the start period in the calculation; period numbers begin at 1

end	an integer representing the end period in the calculation.

time	the payments are due(0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

Nper, start and end are rounded to integers.

CUMPRINC returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	rate is less than or equal to 0, nper is less than or equal to 0, or pv is less than or equal to 0

•	start < 1, end < 1, or start > end

•	time [image] •	0 or 1

CUMPRINC returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

Let annual interest rate be 3% (rate = 0.03 / 12 = 0.0025 )

Term, 1 year (nper = 1*12 = 12 )

Present value $10,000

The cumulative principal paid in the first half-year (periods 1 through 6) is:

CUMPRINC(0.0025,12,10000,1,6,0) = -4962.5475

 Related Topics


DB

Uses the fixed-declining balance method to calculate depreciation of assets over a given period.

Syntax

DB(cost, salvage, lifetime, periods, months)

Arguments	Definitions

cost	an integer representing the original asset cost

salvage	an integer representing the value after depreciation

lifetime	a real number specifying the number of periods, or lifetime, over which you want to determine asset depreciation

periods	the number of periods for which depreciation is calculated

months	the number of months in the first year; if omitted, it is assumed to be 12

Notes and Error Messages

DB returns the #NUMBER! error if salvage > cost, or periods > lifetime or months > 12.

DB returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Examples

If an equipment purchase costs $20000000 and is used for two years, its salvage value is $20000. The following example shows depreciation over its lifetime:

DB(20000000,20000,2,1) = 19360000

DB(20000000,20000,2,2) = 619520

 Related Topics


DDB

Uses the double-declining balance method to calculate asset depreciation.

Syntax

DDB(cost, salvage, lifetime, periods, factor)

Arguments	Definitions

cost	an integer representing original cost of the asset

salvage	an integer representing the value after depreciation

lifetime	a real number specifying the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (useful life of the asset)

periods	the number of periods for which depreciation is calculated, represented in the same units as lifetime

factor	the rate at which the balance declines; if omitted, it is assumed to be 2 (the double-declining balance method)

Notes and Error Messages

DDB returns the #NUMBER! error if salvage > cost, or periods > lifetime, or any argument is non-positive.

DDB returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Examples

A tool costs $20000000 and requires replacement every two years. The salvage value of the tool is $20000. The following example shows depreciation according to the double-declining balance method over the life of the tool.

DDB(20000000,20000,2,1) = $20000000

DDB(20000000,20000,2,2)  = $0

 Related Topics


DISC

Calculates a securities discount rate.

Syntax

DISC(settlement, maturation, price, redemption, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

price	the price for each $100 face value of the security

redemption	the redemption value for each $100 face value of the security

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Settlement, maturation and basis are rounded to integers.

DISC returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	price [image] 0 or redemption [image] 0

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

DISC(datevalue("January 1, 1994"),datevalue("June 1, 1994"),90,100) = 0.24 or 24%

 Related Topics


DOLLARDE

Converts dollar prices from fractions to decimals.

Syntax

DOLLARDE(fractional, denominator)

Arguments	Definitions

fractional	a fractional number representing a price

denominator	the fraction's denominator

Notes and Error Messages

DOLLARDE returns the #NUMBER! error if denominator is zero or negative.

DOLLARDE returns the #VALUE! error if either argument is non-numeric.

Denominator is truncated if it is not an integer.

Example

DOLLARDE(1.04,40)  = 1.1

 Related Topics


DOLLARFR

Converts dollar prices from decimals to fractions.

Syntax

DOLLARFR(number, denominator)

Arguments	Definitions

number	a real number

denominator	the fraction's denominator

Notes and Error Messages

DOLLARFR returns the #NUMBER! error if denominator is zero or negative.

DOLLARFR returns the #VALUE! error if either argument is non-numeric.

Denominator is truncated if it is not an integer.

Example

DOLLARFR(1.1,40) = 1.04

 Related Topics


DURATION

Calculates the annual duration for a security with periodic interest payments. Duration is the weighted average of the present value of the cash flows. It is used to measure a bond price's response to changes in yield.

Syntax

DURATION(settlement, maturation, coupon, yield, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of the security's settlement

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

coupon	the annual coupon rate for the security

yield	the annual yield for the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; for annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Settlement, maturation, frequency, and basis are rounded to integers.

DURATION returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	coupon is less than 0 or if yield is less than 0

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

DURATION(datevalue("January 1, 1995"),datevalue("December 31, 1995"),0.1,0.11,4,1) = 0.9610

 Related Topics


EFFECT

Calculates the effective annual interest rate, given the nominal annual interest rate and the number of compounding periods per year.

Syntax

EFFECT(nominal, npery)

Arguments	Definitions

nominal	nominal interest rate

npery	an integer representing the number of annual compounding periods

Notes and Error Messages

Npery is rounded to an integer.

EFFECT returns the #NUMBER! error if nominal is less than or equal to 0 or npery < 1.

EFFECT returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

EFFECT(0.1, 4) = 0.1038 or 10.38%

 Related Topics


FV

Calculates the future value of an investment where the interest rate and periodic payments are constant.

Syntax

FV(rate, nper, payment, pv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the interest rate for each period

nper	an integer representing the total number of payment periods

payment	is a number representing the payment you make per period.

pv	a number representing the present value; the full amount that a series of future payments is worth right now; if it is omitted, it is assumed to be 0.

time	the time payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

Units for rate and nper must be consistent. For monthly payments on a five-year loan at 15 percent annual interest, use 15%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If annual payments are made on the same loan, use 15% for rate and 5 for nper.

Cash paid out, such as deposits to savings, should be represented by negative numbers; cash received, such as dividend checks, should be represented by positive numbers.

FV returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

If you make a $100 payment each month (payment = 100) to a bank account in the bank which pays 2% annual interest (rate = 0.02/12 = 0.001667). The future value of your investment is:

FV(0.001667, 12, 100) = -$1211.0636

Suppose you have $500 in an account initially (pv=-500) and make a $100 payment each month (payment = -100). The bank pays 2% annual interest (rate = .02/12 = 0.001667) and returns in 12 months:

FV(0.001667,12,-100,-500) = $1721.1578

 Related Topics


FVSCHEDULE

Applies a series of compound interest rates and calculates the future value of the initial principal. It is used to calculate the future value of an investment with a variable or adjustable interest rate.

Syntax

FVSCHEDULE(principal, schedule)

Arguments	Definitions

principal	a number representing the initial sum

schedule	the series of interest rates charged

Notes and Error Messages

FVSCHEDULE returns the #VALUE! error if principal is non-numeric, or if schedule consists of anything other than numbers and spaces.

Example

An account with an opening balance of $100 which grows 10% each period will have the balance shown below at the end of the 12th period.

FVSCHEDULE(100,{0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1}) = $313.8428

 Related Topics


INTRATE

Calculates the interest rate for an invested security.

Syntax

INTRATE(settlement, maturation, investment, redemption, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

investment	is a number representing the sum invested in the security.

redemption	the redemption value for each $100 face value of the security.

basis	the type of day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Settlement, maturation, and basis are rounded to integers.

INTRATE returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

INTRATE(datevalue("March 1, 1994"),datevalue("May 1, 1994"),500,550) = 0.6 or 60% annually

 Related Topics


IPMT

Calculates the interest payment for an investment for a set period based on a constant interest rate and constant payments.

Syntax

IPMT(rate, period, nper, pv, fv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the rate of interest

period	the period for which interest must be found

nper	is an integer representing the total number of payment periods

pv	a number representing the present value; the full amount that a series of future payments is worth right now

fv	the future value; the full amount you want to attain after the last payment is made; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0

time	the time payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

•	The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

•	IPMT returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

•	Periods must be in the range 1 to nper inclusive.

•	Cash debits are to be represented as negative values; cash revenues are to be represented by positive values.

Example

To calculate the interest due after one year for a two-year $1,000 loan at 12% annual interest:

IPMT(0.12/12,12,24,1000)= -$5.71

 Related Topics


IRR

Calculates the internal rate of return for a series of cash flows. The internal rate of return is the rate of interest for an investment which consists of payments (negative values) and income (positive values).

Syntax

IRR(values, estimate)

Arguments	Definitions

values	an array or a reference to a range of cells containing values whose internal rate of return you wish to calculate

estimate	your estimate of the result of the function

Notes

•	An array can be expressed as a cell range such as R2C2:R6C2 or in the form {2,3,4,5,6}.

•	At least one of the values must be negative and at least one positive to calculate IRR.

•	IRR uses the order of values as the order of cash flow. You must enter your payment and income values in the sequence you want with the correct signs (positive values for cash received and negative values for cash paid).

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

•	If estimate is omitted, an estimate of 0.1 is used.

Example

Suppose you invest $1000 and expect $200, $300, $400, and $500 incomes within the next four periods respectively. Let cells R1C2 to R5C2 contain: -1000, 200, 300, 400, 500. Your internal rate will amount to:

IRR(b1:b6) = 0.128 or 12.8%

 Related Topics


MDURATION

Calculates the modified Macauley duration for a security with a par value of $100.

Syntax

MDURATION(settlement_date, maturation_date, coupon, yield, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of the security's settlement

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

coupon	the annual coupon rate for the security

yield	the annual yield for the security

frequency	an integer representing the number of annual coupon payments; for annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4

basis	an integer indicating the type of day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Settlement, maturation, frequency, and basis are rounded to integers.

MDURATION returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	coupon is less than 0 or if yield is less than 0

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

MDURATION(datevalue("January 26, 1995"),datevalue("June 20, 1995"),0.08,0.1,4,1) = 0.3827

 Related Topics


MIRR

Calculates the modified internal rate of return for a series of periodic cash flows, taking into account both the cost of the initial investment and the interest received on reinvestment of income.

Syntax

MIRR(values, finance, reinvest)

Arguments	Definitions

values	an array or a reference to cells that contain payments (negative values) and income (positive values)

finance	the interest rate paid on funds borrowed for investment

reinvest	the interest rate you receive on reinvested funds

Notes and Error Messages

•	An array can be expressed as a cell range such as B2:B6 or in the form {2,3,4,5,6}.

•	MIRR uses the order of values as the order of cash flow. You must enter your payment and income values in the sequence you want with the correct signs (positive values for cash received and negative values for cash paid).

•	At least one of the values must be negative, and at least one positive. Otherwise, the function returns the #NUMBER! error value.

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

If cells R1C2 to R5C2 contain -1000, 200, 300, 400, and 500 respectively,

MIRR(R1C2:R5C2, 0.08, 0.009) = .0906 or 9%

 Related Topics


NOMINAL

Calculates the annual nominal interest rate given the effective rate of interest and the number of compounding periods per year.

Syntax

NOMINAL(rate, npery)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the rate of interest

npery	an integer representing the number of annual compounding periods

Notes and Error Messages

•	Npery is rounded to an integer.

•	NOMINAL returns the #NUMBER! error if e_rate is less than or equal to 0 or npery is less than 1.

•	NOMINAL returns the #VALUE! error if either of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

NOMINAL(0.1,12) = 0.09569 or 9.569%

 Related Topics


NPER

Calculates the number of periods or payments needed to repay a loan based on the given payment, interest rate for each period, and amount of principal.

Syntax

NPER(rate, payment, pv, fv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the interest rate for each period

payment	a real number representing the payment you make per period

pv	a number representing the present value (the full amount that a series of future payments is worth right now)

fv	a number representing the future value (the full amount you want to attain after the last payment is made; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

time	is an integer (either 0 or 1) indicating the time payments are due:

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

•	NPER returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

This example assumes payment is made at the end of the period.

NPER(0.3/12, 100, 1000) =-9.0369

 Related Topics


NPV

Calculates the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate. Use this function when payments will not be constant.

Syntax

NPV(rate, list)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number indicating the rate of discount

list	a list of payments (negative values) and income (positive values) expressed as an array

Notes and Error Messages

•	An array can be expressed as a cell range such as R2C2:R6C2 or in the form {2,3,4,5,6}.

•	NPV returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

•	Funds paid out are to be written as negative values, funds you receive are positive.

•	NPV uses the order of the values as the order of cash flow. You must enter your payment and income values in the sequence you want with the correct signs (positive values for cash received and negative values for cash paid).

Example

NPV(0.1,{-1000,100,1000}) = ($75.1315) (assuming payment of $1000 is made at the end of the first period)

 Related Topics


PMT

Calculates the periodic payment for an annuity based on constant payments and a constant  interest rate. PMT assumes that interest is paid at the end of each period.

Syntax

PMT(rate, nper, pv, fv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number specifying the interest rate

nper	an integer representing the total number of payment periods

pv	a number representing the present value (the full amount that a series of future payments is worth right now)

fv	a number representing the future value (the full amount you want to attain after the last payment is made; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

time	an integer indicating when payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

•	PMT returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

•	Cash debits are represented by negative values; cash revenues are represented by positive values.

•	The result of PMT includes principal and interest but no taxes, reserve payments, or fees that are sometimes associated with annuities.

•	The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

Example

To calculate the monthly payment for a 5-year loan of $20,000 at an annual 12% interest rate, enter the following:

PMT(0.12/12, 5*12, 20000) = ($444.889)

 Related Topics


PPMT

Calculates the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate.

Syntax

PPMT(rate, period, nper, pv, fv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number specifying the interest rate

period	a real number specifying the period; must be from 1 to nper

nper	an integer representing the total number of payment periods.

pv	a number representing the present value (the full amount that a series of future payments is worth right now)

fv	a number representing the future value (the full amount you want to attain after the last payment is made; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

time	an integer indicating the time payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

•	The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

•	PPMT returns the #NUMBER! error if periods is outside the range 1 to nper.

•	PPMT returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

The following function returns the principal payment for the last year of an 11-year, $2500 loan at 7% annual interest:

PPMT(0.07, 11, 11, 2500) = -$311.58

 Related Topics


PRICE

Calculates the price for each $100 face value of a security that returns periodic interest.

Syntax

PRICE(settlement, maturation, rate, yield, redemption, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

rate	a real number specifying the interest rate

yield	a real number specifying the security's annual yield

redemption	a real number for the security's redemption value for each $100 face value

frequency	an integer indicating the number of annual coupon payments; for annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4

basis	an integer from 0 to 4, specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

PRICE returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	rate or yield is negative

•	basis or frequency is out of range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

PRICE returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement, maturation, frequency and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

PRICE could be used for a bond with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The semiannual coupon is 5.89%
The yield is 7.12%
The redemption value is $80
The frequency is semiannual and based on 30/360

The bond price (using the appropriate serial date values) is:

PRICE(33279, 33557, 0.0589, 0.0712, 80, 2, 0)  = 80.1289

 Related Topics


PRICEDISC

Calculates the price for each $100 face value of a discounted security.

Syntax

PRICEDISC(settlement, maturation, disc, redemption, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

disc	a real number specifying the security's discount rate

redemption	a real number indicating the security's redemption value for each $100 face value

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

PRICEDISC returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	disc or redemption is negative

•	basis is out of the range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

•	PRICEDISC returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement, maturation and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

PRICEDISC works as shown in the bond calculation below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The discount rate is 5.89%
The redemption value is $80 and based on 30/360

The bond price (using the appropriate serial date values) is:

PRICEDISC(33279, 33557, 0.0589, 80, 0)  = 76.4005

 Related Topics


PRICEMAT

Calculates the price for each $100 face value of a security that pays interest upon maturation.

Syntax

PRICEMAT(settlement, maturation, issue, rate, yield, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

issue	a serial date value specifying the security's date of issue

rate	a real number specifying the interest rate

yield	a real number specifying the security's annual yield

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

If settlement, maturation, issue and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

PRICEMAT returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement, issue or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	rate or yield is negative

•	basis is out of the range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

PRICEMAT returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

PRICEMAT could be used for a bond with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The date of issue is September 12, 1990
The semiannual coupon is 5.75%
The yield is 5.77% and based on 30/360

The price (using the appropriate serial date values) is:

PRICEMAT(33279, 33557, 33128, 0.0575, 0.0577, 0) = $99.89

 Related Topics


PV

Calculates an investment's present value (the total present worth of a series of future payments.)

Syntax

PV(rate, nper, payment, fv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number specifying the interest rate

nper	an integer specifying the total number of payment periods

payment	a real number specifying the payment made each period; it cannot change over the life of the annuity

fv	a number indicating the future value; the full amount you want to attain after the last payment is made; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0

time	is an integer indicating when payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

•	The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

•	PV returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

•	Cash debits are represented by negative values; cash revenues are represented by positive values.

Example

PV is useful in the following type of analysis. Which is better, to pay $25000 up front, or $450 per month for the next 10 years at 7.5% interest?

PV(0.075/12, 12*10, 450)  = ($37910.1342)

This tells you that the loan's present value is $12910.13 more than the initial $25000 payment.

 Related Topics


RATE

Calculates the interest rate per period of an annuity.

Syntax

RATE(nper, payment, pv, fv, time, estimate)

Arguments	Definitions

nper	a real number specifying the total number of payment periods

payment	a real number specifying the payment made each period; fixed for the life of the annuity

pv	a real number specifying the present value

fv	a real number specifying the future value; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0

time	an integer indicating the time payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

estimate	your estimate of the result; if omitted, it is assumed to be 10%

Notes and Error Messages

•	The units for specifying estimate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for estimate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for estimate and 5 for nper.

•	RATE returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

The following example shows how to calculate the rate of a three-year, $5000 loan with monthly payments of $300:

RATE(3*12, -300, 5000) = 0.049 or 4.9%

 Related Topics


RECEIVED

Calculates the amount received at maturity for a fully invested security.

Syntax

RECEIVED(settlement, maturation, investment, disc, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

investment	an integer representing the sum invested in the security

disc	a real number specifying the security's discount rate

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

RECEIVED returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	basis is out of the range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

RECEIVED returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement, maturation and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

RECEIVED could be used for a bond with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1990
The date of maturation is November 15, 1993
The discount rate is 5.75%

Amount invested in the security is $100000
and based on 30/360

The total to be received upon maturation (using the appropriate serial date values) is:

RECEIVED(32914, 34288, 100000, 0.0575, 0) = 127619.9761

 Related Topics


SLN

Calculates the straight-line depreciation of an asset for a single period.

Syntax

SLN(cost, salvage, lifetime)

Arguments	Definitions

cost	a real number specifying the original asset cost

salvage	a real number specifying the asset's salvage value after depreciation

lifetime	a real number specifying the number of periods, or lifetime, over which you want to determine asset depreciation (also called the useful life of the asset)

Notes and Error Messages

•	SLN returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

If the original purchase price of a given piece of equipment is $15000, useful lifetime is 15 years, and salvage value is $2300, the annual depreciation allowance would be:

SLN(15000, 2300, 15) = $846.67

 Related Topics


SYD

Calculates sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a given period.

Syntax

SYD(cost, salvage, lifetime, period)

Arguments	Definitions

cost	a real number specifying the original asset cost

salvage	a real number specifying the salvage value after depreciation

lifetime	a real number specifying the number of periods, or lifetime, over which you want to determine asset depreciation (also called the useful life of the asset)

period	a real number specifying the period; must use the same units as lifetime

Notes and Error Messages

•	SYD returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Examples

If the original purchase price of a given piece of equipment is $15000, useful lifetime is 15 years, and salvage value is $2300, the first-year's depreciation allowance would be:

SYD(15000, 2300, 15, 1) = $1587.50

The yearly depreciation allowance for the 12th year would be:

SYD(15000, 2300, 15, 12) = $423.33

 Related Topics


TBILLEQ

Calculates the bond-equivalent yield for a Treasury bill.

Syntax

TBILLEQ(settlement, maturation, disc)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

disc	a real number specifying the security's discount rate

Notes and Error Messages

TBILLEQ returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	disc is [image] 0

•	settlement falls after maturation, or if maturation is more than one year after settlement

TBILLEQ returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement and maturation are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

TBILLEQ could be used for a Treasury bill with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1990
The date of maturation is November 15, 1990
The discount rate is equal to 7%

The Treasury bill bond-equivalent yield is:

TBILLEQ(datevalue("February 10, 1990"),datevalue("November 15, 1990"),0.07) = 0.07408 or 7.4%

 Related Topics


TBILLPRICE

Calculates the price per $100 face value for a Treasury bill.

Syntax

TBILLPRICE(settlement, maturation, disc)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

disc	a real number specifying the security's discount rate

Notes and Error Messages

TBILLPRICE returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	disc is [image] 0

•	settlement falls after maturation, or if maturation is more than one year after settlement

TBILLPRICE returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement and maturation are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

TBILLPRICE could be used for a Treasury bill with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1990
The date of maturation is November 15, 1990
The discount rate is equal to 7%

The Treasury bill price is:

TBILLPRICE(datevalue("February 10, 1990"),datevalue("November 15, 1990"),0.07) = 94.5944

 Related Topics


TBILLYIELD

Calculates the yield for a Treasury bill.

Syntax

TBILLYIELD(settlement, maturation, price)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

price	a real number specifying the Treasury bill's price for each $100 face value

Notes and Error Messages

TBILLYIELD returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	price is a negative or 0

•	settlement falls after maturation, or if maturation is more than one year after settlement

TBILLYIELD returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement and maturation are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

TBILLYIELD could be used for a Treasury bill with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1990
The date of maturation is November 15, 1990
The price for each $100 face value is equal to 72.22

The Treasury bill yield is:

TBILLYIELD(datevalue("February 10, 1990"),datevalue("November 15, 1990"),72.22) = 0.4981 or 49.81%

 Related Topics


VDB

Calculates the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the double declining balance or any other specified method.

Syntax

VDB(cost, salvage, lifetime, start, end, factor, no_switch)

Arguments	Definitions

cost	an integer indicating the initial asset cost

salvage	an integer indicating the salvage value after depreciation

lifetime	a real number specifying the number of periods, or lifetime, over which you want to determine asset depreciation

start	an integer specifying the starting period for which depreciation is to be calculated

end	an integer specifying the ending period for which depreciation is to be calculated

factor	the rate at which the balance declines; if omitted, it is assumed to be 2 (the double-declining balance method); see DDB function

no_switch	a logical value specifying whether to switch to straight-line depreciation when depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation; to prevent a switch to straight-line depreciation, even when the depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation, use TRUE; if no_switch is FALSE or omitted, the spreadsheet will switch to straight line depreciation when the depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation

Notes and Error Messages

•	VDB returns the #NUMBER! error for negative arguments.

•	VDB returns the #VALUE! error for non-numeric arguments.

Examples

The following examples show depreciation for a pair of new microcomputers purchased for $4,000 with lifetimes of five years and salvage value of $490.

VDB(4000, 490, 5*365, 0, 1)  = $4.38, the first day's depreciation

VDB(4000, 490, 5*12, 0, 1)  = $133.33, the first month's depreciation

VDB(4000, 490, 5, 0, 1)  = $1600.00, the first year's depreciation

VDB(4000, 490, 5*12, 4, 15)  = $1087.21, the depreciation calculated between the 4th and 15th months

 Related Topics


XIRR

Calculates the internal rate of return for regular or irregular cash flow schedules.

Syntax

XIRR(values, dates, estimate)

Arguments	Definitions

values	an array of cash flows matched to a series of payments in dates

dates	an array of payment dates matched with cash flow payments

estimate	an estimate; your speculated result of XIRR; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0.1 (10%)

Notes and Error Messages

An array can be given as a cell range such as R2C2:R6C2 or in the form {2,3,4,5,6}.

Numbers in dates are truncated to integers.

XIRR returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	values and dates contain a different number of values

•	values doesn't contain at least one positive cash flow and one negative cash flow

•	dates contains numbers which are not serial value(s)

•	any serial date value is earlier than the serial date value of the starting date

XIRR returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Examples

If you invested $5000 on January 1, 1994, and the return was $1000 on the first of each month for the next 6 months, you would compute Cash Internal Rate of Return as follows:

XIRR({-5000,1000,1000,1000,1000,1000,1000}, {34335,34366,34394,34425,34455,34486,34516}) = .9082

Suppose that you invested $24000 in an enterprise on December 15, 1992 and the payment returned $3500 on March 15, 1993; $2835 on June 15, 1993; $4750 on September 15, 1993; and $6000 on December 15, 1993. Compute Cash Internal Rate of Return as follows:

XIRR({-14000,3500,2835,4750,6000},A1:A5,0.1) = 0.33958219 or - 33.9582%, if range R1C1:R5C1 contains =DATEVALUE("December 15, 1992"), =DATEVALUE("March 15, 1993"), =DATEVALUE("June 15, 1993"), =DATEVALUE("September 15, 1993"), =DATEVALUE("December 15, 1993")

 Related Topics


XNPV

Calculates the net present value for regular or irregular cash flow schedules.

Syntax

XNPV(rate, values, dates)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number specifying the discount rate to apply to cash flows

values	an array containing a series of cash flows that correspond with the schedule of payments in dates

dates	an array containing payment dates that correspond with the cash flow payments; the dates must be expressed as serial values

Notes and Error Messages

An array can be expressed as a range such as B2:B6 or in the form {2,3,4,5,6}.

Numbers in dates are truncated to integers.

XNPV returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	values and dates contain a different number of values

•	dates contains invalid serial value(s)

•	any serial date value is less than the serial date value of the starting date

XNPV returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Examples

If you invested $5000 on January 1, 1994, the investment returned $1000 on the first of each month for the next six months, and you wanted to discount the cash flow at 10%, you would compute Cash Net Present Value as follows:

XNPV(0.1,{-5000,1000,1000,1000,1000,1000,1000}, {34335,34366,34394,34425,34455,34486,34516}) = 837.7471

Suppose you invested $24000 in an enterprise on December 15, 1992 and the payment returned $3500 on March 15, 1993; $2835 on June 15, 1993; $4750 on September 15, 1993; and $6000 on December 15, 1993, based on a 5% interest rate. You would compute Cash Net Present Value as follows:

XNPV(0.05,{-14000,3500,2835,4750,6000},A1:A5,0.1) = 2518.4668 if range R1C1:R5C1 contains DATEVALUE("December 15, 1992"),DATEVALUE("March 15, 1993"),DATEVALUE("June 15, 1993"),DATEVALUE("September 15, 1993"),DATEVALUE("December 15, 1993")

 Related Topics


YIELD

Calculates the yield on a security that returns periodic interest.

Syntax

YIELD(settlement, maturation, rate, price, redemption, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

rate	a real number specifying the security's annual coupon rate

price	a real number specifying the security's price for each $100 face value

redemption	a real number representing the security's redemption value for each $100 face value

frequency	the number, or frequency, of annual coupon payments; for annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

YIELD returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is an invalid serial date value

•	price or redemption is 0 or negative

•	rate is negative

•	basis or frequency is out of range

•	settlement [image] maturation

YIELD returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

YIELD truncates settlement, maturation and basis to integers.

Example

YIELD works as shown in the bond calculation below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The coupon rate is 5.75%
The price is equal to 120.2222
The redemption value is $80
The frequency is semiannual and based on 1

The bond yield (using the appropriate serial date values) is:

YIELD(33279,33557,0.0575,120.2222,80,1) = -0.3858 or -38.58%

 Related Topics


YIELDDISC

Calculates the annual yield for a discounted security.

Syntax

YIELDDISC(settlement, maturation, price, redemption, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

price	a real number specifying the security's price for each $100 face value

redemption	a real number for the security's redemption value for each $100 face value

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

Convert dates to serial values before proceeding or type them into another cell and reference them in the formula.

YIELDDISC returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is an invalid serial date value

•	redemption or price is 0 or negative

•	basis is out of range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

YIELDDISC returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement, maturation, and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

YIELDDISC works as shown in the bond calculation below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The price is equal to 120.2222
The redemption value is $80
and based on 30/360

The bond yield (using the appropriate serial date values) is:

YIELDDISC(33279,33557,120.2222,80,0) = -0.4380 or -43.80%

 Related Topics


YIELDMAT

Calculates the annual yield of a security that pays interest at maturity.

Syntax

YIELDMAT(settlement, maturation, issue, rate, price, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

issue	a serial date value specifying the security's date of issue

rate	a real number specifying the security's interest rate at date of issue

price	a real number specifying the security's price for each $100 face value

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

Convert dates to serial values before proceeding or type them into another cell and reference them in the formula.

YIELDMAT returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement, issue, or maturation is an invalid serial date value

•	rate is negative

•	price is 0 or negative

•	basis is out of range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

YIELDMAT returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement, maturation, issue, and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

YIELDMAT could be used for a bond with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The date of issue is September 12, 1990
The semiannual coupon rate is 5.75%
The price is equal to 120.2222 and based on 30/360

The yield (using the appropriate serial date values) is:

YIELDMAT(33279,33557,33128,0.0575,120.2222,0) = -0.1691 or -16.91%

 Related Topics


Logical Functions

Function	Description

AND()	Result is 1 if all arguments in the list are TRUE and 0 if only one is FALSE

FALSE()	Result is the logical value 0

IF()	Result is one of the specified values depending on the logical condition

NOT()	Result is the reverse of the logical expression

OR()	Result is 1 if any argument in the list is TRUE and 0 if all arguments are FALSE

TRUE()	Result is the logical value 1


AND

Calculates the logical AND function. The result is TRUE if all arguments in the list are TRUE, and FALSE if at least one is FALSE. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

AND(condlist)

Argument	Definition

condlist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	AND returns the #INVALID DATA! error if arguments are not logical values or arrays whose references contain logical values.

Examples

AND(1+2=4, 3+4=7, 4+4=8) = FALSE

AND(TRUE, TRUE, TRUE) = TRUE

AND(TRUE, FALSE, TRUE) = FALSE

Enter the value 12 in cell R1C2, then:

AND(3< R1C2, R1C2<20) = TRUE

AND(1,2,3,4,5,0) = FALSE

AND(1,2,3,4,5,6) = TRUE

 Related Topics


FALSE

Result is the logical value FALSE. It is often used to evaluate Boolean expressions and bi-conditional responses. FALSE is evaluated as the opposite of TRUE and is a Boolean input as well as a function.

Syntax

FALSE() or FALSE

Notes and Error Messages

•	FALSE can be used with or without brackets i.e., FALSE() or FALSE.

•	Many types of spreadsheets and formulas interpret FALSE as the logical value 0.

Example

AND(TRUE(), FALSE(), TRUE()) = FALSE

AND(TRUE, FALSE, TRUE) = FALSE

NAND(TRUE(), FALSE(), TRUE()) = TRUE

 Related Topics


IF

Calculates a result based on a conditional IF statement. It returns the value contained in true_case if the condition expression is true, otherwise it returns the value contained in false_case. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

IF(test, truevalue, falsevalue)

Arguments	Definitions

test	any logical expression that can be evaluated as TRUE or FALSE

truevalue	the value that is returned if test is TRUE; if omitted and test is TRUE, TRUE is returned

falsevalue	the value that is returned if test is FALSE; if omitted and test is FALSE, FALSE is returned

Example

IF( R3C3>= 1000, "Large Cash") Large Cash will be returned if the cell reference is [image] 1000

IF( R3C3>= 1000, "Large Cash", "Small Cash") Large Cash will be returned if the cell reference is [image] 1000 and Small Cash will be returned if the cell reference is < 1000.

 Related Topics


NAND

Calculates the logical NAND function. The result is FALSE if all the arguments are TRUE and TRUE if at least one is FALSE. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

NAND(logiclist)

Argument	Definition

logiclist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	NAND returns the #VALUE! error if arguments are not logical values or arrays whose references contain logical values.

Examples

NAND(1+2=4, 3+4=7, 4+4=8) = TRUE

NAND(1+2=4, 3+4=10, 4+4=11) = TRUE

NAND(TRUE, TRUE, TRUE) = FALSE

NAND(TRUE, FALSE, TRUE) = TRUE

NAND(FALSE, FALSE, FALSE) = TRUE

Enter the value 12 in cell R1C2, then:

NAND(3<R1C2, R1C2<20) = FALSE

 Related Topics


NOR

Calculates the logical NOR function. The result is FALSE if any argument in the list is TRUE and TRUE if all arguments are FALSE. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

NOR(logiclist)

Argument	Definition

logiclist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	NOR returns the #VALUE! error if the arguments are not logical values or arrays of references containing logical values.

Examples

NOR(1+2=4, 3+4=7, 4+4=8) = FALSE

NOR((1+2=4, 3+4=10, 4+4=11) = TRUE

NOR(TRUE, TRUE, TRUE) = FALSE

NOR(FALSE, FALSE, FALSE) = TRUE

If cell R1C2 contains the value 2, then:

NOR(3< R1C2, R1C2 <20) = FALSE

 Related Topics


NOT

Result is the reverse of the logical expression. All numerical inputs not equal to 0 are evaluated as TRUE and the result of the NOT function on a TRUE input is FALSE. Inputs equal to 0 are evaluated as FALSE and the result of the NOT function on a FALSE input is TRUE.

Syntax

NOT(logical)

Argument	Definition

logical	any logical value

Examples

NOT(TRUE) = FALSE

AND(NOT(2+1=5), TRUE) = TRUE

 Related Topics


OR

Calculates the logical OR function. The result is TRUE if any argument in the list is TRUE and FALSE if all arguments are FALSE. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

OR(logiclist)

Argument	Definition

logiclist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	OR returns the #VALUE! error if the arguments are not logical values or arrays of references containing logical values.

Examples

OR(1+2=4, 3+4=7, 4+4=8) = TRUE

OR(TRUE, TRUE, TRUE) = TRUE

OR(FALSE, FALSE, FALSE) = FALSE

If cell R1C2 contains the value 2, then:

OR(3< R1C2, R1C2 <20) = TRUE

 Related Topics


TRUE

Result is the logical value TRUE. It is often used to evaluate Boolean expressions and bi-conditional responses. TRUE is evaluated as the opposite of FALSE and is a Boolean input as well as a function.

Syntax

TRUE() or TRUE

Notes and Error Messages

•	TRUE can be used with or without brackets i.e., TRUE() or TRUE.

•	TRUE is interpreted as the logical value 1 in many types of spreadsheets and formulas.

Example

OR(TRUE(),FALSE()) = TRUE

OR(TRUE, FALSE) = TRUE

NAND(TRUE(),TRUE()) = FALSE

 Related Topics


XOR

Calculates the logical XOR function. The result is TRUE if either logiclistA or logiclistB is FALSE but not both; the result is FALSE in all other cases. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

XOR(logiclistA, logiclistB)

Argument	Definition

logiclistA	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

logiclistB	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	XOR returns the #VALUE! error if the arguments are not logical values or arrays of references containing logical values.

Examples

XOR(1+2=4, 3+4=7) = TRUE

XOR(TRUE, TRUE) = FALSE

XOR(FALSE, FALSE) = FALSE

XOR(TRUE, FALSE) = TRUE

If cell R1C2 contains the value 2, then:

XOR(3< R1C2, R1C2 <20) = TRUE

 Related Topics


ABS

Calculates the absolute value of a real number. Absolute value is the positive value of a number or, in other words, the number without its sign.

Syntax

ABS(x)

Argument	Definition

x	any real number

Examples

ABS(-3) = 3

ABS(3) = 3

ABS(0) = 0

 Related Topics


ACOS

Calculates the inverse cosine (arccosine) of a number. The result is an angle measured in radians between 0 and PI.

Syntax

ACOS(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number  from -1 to 1, inclusive that specifies the cosine of the angle

Note

•	To convert the result from radians to degrees, use the RADTODEG function or multiply the result by 180/PI().

RADTODEG(ACOS(-0.75)) = 138.59038 (degrees)

ACOS(-0.75)*180/PI() = 138.59038 (degrees)

Examples

ACOS(-0.75) = 2.41886

ACOS(0.75) = 0.7227

ACOS(0) = 1.5708

ACOS(1) = 0

 Related Topics


ACOSH

Calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine (hyperbolic arccosine) of a number.

Syntax

ACOSH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number equal to or greater than 1; specifies the hyperbolic cosine of an angle

Note

•	The ACOSH function operates as the inverse function to COSH, such that ACOSH(COSH(x)) equals x.

Examples

ACOSH(1) = 0

ACOSH(12.5) = 3.21727

 Related Topics


ASIN

Calculates the inverse sine (arcsine) of a number. The result is an angle in radians bounded by - [image] /2 and [image] /2.

Syntax

ASIN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number from -1 to 1, inclusive, which specifies the sine of the angle

Note

•	To convert the result from radians to degrees, use the RADTODEG function or multiply the result by 180/PI().

RADTODEG(ASIN(-0.75)) = -48.59038 (degrees)

ASIN(-0.75)*180/PI() = -48.59038 (degrees)

Examples

ASIN(-0.75) = -0.8481

ASIN(0.75) = 0.8481

ASIN(0) = 0

ASIN(1) = 1.5708

 Related Topics


ASINH

Calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine (hyperbolic arcsine) of a number.

Syntax

ASINH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the hyperbolic sine of an angle

Note

•	The ASINH function operates as the inverse function to SINH, such that ASINH(SINH(x)) equals x.

Examples

ASINH(10.5) = 3.04678

ASINH(-0.75) = -0.6931

 Related Topics


ATAN

Calculates the inverse tangent (arctangent) of a number. The result is an angle bounded by - [image] /2 (-90 degrees) and [image] /2 (90 degrees) measured in radians.

Syntax

ATAN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the tangent of an angle

Note

•	To convert the result from radians to degrees, use the RADTODEG function or multiply the result by 180/PI().

RADTODEG(ATAN(-0.75)) = -36.8699 (degrees)

ATAN(-0.75)*180/PI() = -36.8699 (degrees)

Examples

ATAN(-0.75) = -0.6435

ATAN(0.75) = 0.6435

ATAN(0) = 0

ATAN(1) = 0.7854

 Related Topics


ATAN2

Calculates the inverse tangent (arctangent) of specified x and y coordinates. The result is an angle bounded by - [image] and [image], measured in radians.

Syntax

ATAN2(x,y)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number representing the x coordinate

y	a real number representing the y coordinate

Note

•	To convert the result from radians to degrees, use the RADTODEG function or multiply the result by 180/PI().

RADTODEG(ATAN2(3,6)) = 63. 43502 (degrees)

ATAN2(3,6)*180/PI = 63. 43502 (degrees)

Examples

ATAN2(3,6) = 1.10715

ATAN2(-3,-6) = 2.03444

 Related Topics


ATANH

Calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent (hyperbolic arctangent) of a number.

Syntax

ATANH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number between -1 to 1; specifies the hyperbolic tangent of an angle

Note

•	The ATANH function operates as the inverse function to TANH, such that ATANH(TANH(x)) equals x.

Examples

ATANH(-0.75) = -0.973

ATANH(0.9) = 1.47222

 Related Topics


CEILING

Calculates a number rounded away from zero, to the nearest integer, or multiple of significance.

Syntax

CEILING(x,significance)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to round

significance	a real number; specifies the multiple of significance [image] that is, the number by which x can be evenly divided without leaving a remainder

Note

•	Numbers are rounded away from zero.

Examples

CEILING(9,2) = 10

CEILING(1.64,0.25) = 1.75

CEILING(-1.64,-0.25) = -1.75

 Related Topics


COMBIN

Calculates the number of unordered subgroup combinations that can be formed from a given group.

Syntax

COMBIN(group,subgroup)

Argument	Definition

group	a positive integer

subgroup	a positive integer equal to or less than group

Notes and Error Messages

•	Non-integers arguments are truncated.

•	COMBIN returns the #VALUE! error if either argument is non-numeric.

•	COMBIN returns the #NUMBER! error if group < 0, subgroup < 0, or group < subgroup.

The formula to calculate combinations is as follows, where n = group and k = subgroup:

Example

You want to know the possible winning combinations in a lottery where 6 numbers out of 49 are selected. The winning lottery ticket has all 6 selected numbers. The order in which the numbers are selected does not matter. The number of potential winning combinations is 13983816.

COMBIN(49,6) = 13983816

 Related Topics


COS

Calculates the cosine of an angle in radians.

Syntax

COS(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians

Notes

•	The result of COS is between -1 and 1.

•	Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

COS(DEGTORAD(45)) = 0.7071

Example

COS(0.7) = 0.7648

 Related Topics


COSH

Calculates the hyperbolic cosine of a number.

Syntax

COSH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

Notes

•	The result of COSH is equal to or greater than 1.

•	The hyperbolic cosine formula is:

Examples

COSH(0.75) = 1.29468

COSH(-5) = 74.20995

 Related Topics


COT

Calculates the cotangent of an angle in radians. The cotangent of an angle is equal to 1 divided by the tangent of x.

Syntax

COT(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians for which you wish to determine the cotangent

Notes

Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

COT(DEGTORAD(60)) = 0.5774

Example

COT(0.5) = 1.83049

 Related Topics


CSC

Calculates the cosecant of an angle in radians.

Syntax

CSC(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians for which you wish to determine the cosecant

Notes

Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

CSC(DEGTORAD(60)) = 1.1547

Example

CSC(0.5) = 2.08583

 Related Topics


DEGTORAD

Converts degrees to radians. One degree is equal to /180 radians.

Syntax

DEGTORAD(angle_in_degrees)

Arguments	Definitions

angle_in_degrees	an angle in degrees to be converted into radians

Examples

DEGTORAD(180) = pi (3.14159)

DEGTORAD(-70.473809) = -1.23

 Related Topics


EVEN

Rounds a number away from 0 to the nearest even integer.

Syntax

EVEN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	EVEN returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric expressions.

•	Positive and negative numbers are rounded away from zero.

•	Even integers are not rounded.

Examples

EVEN(2.6) = 4

EVEN(-2.1) = -4

EVEN(6) = 6

EVEN(-10) = -10

EVEN(5) =6

 Related Topics


EXP

Raises value e to a given exponent, where e is the base of the natural logarithm which is approximated by 2.7183.

Syntax

EXP(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the exponent that e is raised to

Note

•	EXP is the inverse of the natural logarithm of number (LN).

Examples

EXP(-3.25) = 0.0388

EXP( 7.89) = 2670.44392

EXP(1) = 2.71828

EXP(0) = 1

 Related Topics


FACT

Calculates the factorial of a number. A number's factorial equals the product of all the integers from one up to and including the number itself. For example, the factorial of 5 equals 1*2*3*4*5 or 120.

Syntax

FACT(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number greater than or equal to 0; if x is a non-integer it is truncated

Notes and Error Messages

•	The mathematical symbol for a factorial is an exclamation mark (!).

•	FACT returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x is non-numeric.

•	FACT returns the #NUMBER! error if x is negative.

•	If x is not an integer then it will be truncated.

•	The factorial formula is:

Examples

FACT(5) = 120

FACT(5.3) = 120

FACT(0) = 1

 Related Topics


FACTDOUBLE

Calculates the double factorial of a number.

Syntax

FACTDOUBLE(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number greater than or equal to 0; if x is a non-integer, it is truncated

Notes and Error Messages

•	The mathematical symbol for a double factorial is two exclamation marks (!!).

•	FACTDOUBLE returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric arguments.

•	FACTDOUBLE returns the #NUMBER! error for negative arguments.

•	If x is not an integer then it will be truncated.

•	If x is even:

•	If x is odd:

Examples

FACTDOUBLE(8) = 384

FACTDOUBLE(9) = 945

FACTDOUBLE(0) = 1

 Related Topics


FLOOR

Calculates a number rounded towards zero, to the nearest multiple of significance.

Syntax

FLOOR(x,significant)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to round

significant	a real number; specifies the multiple of significance [image] that is, the number by which x can evenly be divided by without leaving a remainder

Note

•	Numbers are towards zero.

Examples

FLOOR(9,2) = 8

FLOOR(1.64,0.25) = 1.5

FLOOR(-1.64,-0.25) = -1.5

 Related Topics


GCD

Calculates the greatest common divisor of a group of numbers. The greatest common divisor is the largest integer that divides into a group of integers without leaving a remainder.

Syntax

GCD(number1,number2, ...,number30)

Argument	Definition

number1	any positive integer

number2	any positive integer

Notes and Error Messages

•	GCD truncates non-integers.

•	GCD returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric or negative.

Examples

GCD(2,4) = 2

GCD(2.5,4.01) = 2

GCD(14,56,77) = 7

GCD(13,17) = 1

GCD(R1C1:R3C1,25)=5, where R1C1=5, R2C1=10, and R3C1=15.

 Related Topics


INT

Calculates a number rounded down to the nearest integer.

Syntax

INT(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

Note

•	You should use the ROUND function to round to the nearest integer.

Examples

INT(33.27) = 33

INT(33.95) = 33

INT(99.99999) = 99

INT(-33.95) = -34

INT(-34) =-34

 Related Topics


INVERSE

Calculates the multiplicative inverse of a real number.

Syntax

INVERSE(number)

Argument	Definition

number	a real number for which you wish to determine the multiplicative inverse

Notes and Error Messages

•	INVERSE returns the #INVALID DATA! error if the argument is non-numeric.

Examples

INVERSE(4) = 0.25

INVERSE(-10) = -0.1

INVERSE(0.5) = 2

 Related Topics


LCM

Calculates the least common multiple of a group of numbers. The LCM is the smallest positive integer that can be divided by each of the arguments without leaving a remainder.

Syntax

LCM(number1,number2, ...,number30)

Argument	Definition

number1	any positive integer

number2	any positive integer

Notes and Error Messages

•	LCM truncates non-integers.

•	LCM returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric or negative.

Examples

LCM(4,8,6) = 24

LCM(3,5,2) = 30

LCM(R1C1:R3C1,25)=150, where cell R1C1=5, R2C1=10, and R3C1=15.

 Related Topics


LN

Calculates the natural logarithm of a number. The natural logarithm is the logarithm of a number with base e (2.7183).

Syntax

LN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a positive real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	LN is the inverse of the EXP function, so LN(EXP(x)) equals x.

•	LN returns the #NUMBER! error value if x is equal to or less than 0.

Examples

LN(1.2) = 0.1823

LN(30) = 3.4012

LN(1) = 0

LN(EXP(30)) = 30

 Related Topics


LOG

Calculates the logarithm of a number to a given base.

Syntax

LOG(x,base)

Argument	Definition

x	a positive real number

base	a positive real number; specifies the base of the logarithm; if omitted, it is assumed to be 10

Notes and Error Messages

•	If a base isn't specified, 10 is used as the base.

Examples

LOG(3,2) = 1.585

LOG(3,10) = 0.4771

LOG(3) =0.4771

 Related Topics


LOG10

Calculates the base 10 logarithm of a number.

Syntax

LOG10(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a positive real number

Examples

LOG10(3) = 0.4771

LOG10(100) = 2

LOG10(R1C1) = 0.4771 where cell R1C1=3

 Related Topics


LOG2

Calculates the base 2 logarithm of a number.

Syntax

LOG2(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a positive real number

Examples

LOG2(3) = 1.58496

LOG2(1) = 0

LOG2(32) = 5

 Related Topics


MOD

Calculates the modulus (or the remainder) of a number divided by another number.

Syntax

MOD(x,base)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to divide

base	a real number; specifies the divisor

Notes and Error Messages

•	The result has the same sign (+ or -) as base.

•	MOD returns the #DIV/0! error value if base equals 0.

•	MOD can be expressed in terms of the INT function: MOD(x, base) = x - base*INT(x/base)

Examples

MOD(10,3) = 1

MOD(10,3.3) = 0.1

MOD(-14, 3) = 2

MOD(14, -3) = 2

 Related Topics


MROUND

Rounds a number to the nearest specified multiple.

Syntax

MROUND(x,mult)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the value to be rounded

mult	a real number; specifies the multiple to which you want to round x

Notes

•	If the remainder of dividing x by mult is equal to or greater than half the value of the multiple, MROUND rounds up (away from zero).

•	If the remainder of dividing x by mult is less than half the value of the multiple, MROUND rounds down (towards zero).

Examples

MROUND(11,3) = 12

MROUND(10,3) = 9

MROUND(11.3,3) = 12

MROUND(11.3,3.1) = 12.4

MROUND(-10,-3) = -9

MROUND(11,-3) = #NUMBER

 Related Topics


MULTINOMIAL

Calculates the multinomial of a group of numbers. The multinomial is a ratio of the factorial of the sum of the group to the product of factorials.

Syntax

MULTINOMIAL(number1,number2, ...,number30)

Argument	Definition

list	a list of positive real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	MULTINOMIAL returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric arguments.

•	MULTINOMIAL returns the #NUMBER! error for arguments less than 1.

•	If any argument is not an integer, it will be truncated into an integer.

•	The formula of the MULTINOMIAL is:

Examples

MULTINOMIAL(5,6,7) = 14702688

MULTINOMIAL(3,5,8) = 720720

MULTINOMIAL(R1C1,R2C2,R3C2=720720 where cell R1C1=3, R2C2=5, and R3C2=8.

 Related Topics


ODD

Rounds a number away from 0 to the nearest odd integer.

Syntax

ODD(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	ODD returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric expressions.

•	Positive and negative numbers are rounded away from zero.

•	Odd integers are not rounded.

Examples

ODD(2.6) = 3

ODD(-2.1) = -3

ODD(7) = 7

ODD(-9) = -9

ODD(1.19) = 3

ODD(-1.19) = -3

 Related Topics


PCT

Divides a number argument by 100, returning the decimal version of a percentage.

Syntax

PCT(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to divide

Notes and Error Messages

•	PCT returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric arguments.

Examples

PCT(50) = 0.5

PCT(0.5) = 0.005

PCT(56) = 0.56

PCT(-20) = -0.2

 Related Topics


PI

Returns the value of the mathematical approximation constant [image] (3.141592654).  is the ratio of a circle's circumference to its diameter.

Syntax

PI()

Notes

•	PI() is most commonly used in trigonometric calculations using radian measurements such as sin(x) and cos(x).

•	You cannot specify a number format for this function.

Examples

PI()/2 = 1.5708

SIN(PI()/4) = 0.7071

 Related Topics


POWER

Returns the result of a number raised to a power.

Syntax

POWER(number,power)

Argument	Definition

number	any real number

power	any real number

Examples

POWER(10,2) = 100

POWER (-5,3) = -125

POWER (-0.25,2) = 0.0625

POWER (16,0.5) = 4

POWER (34.5,0) = 1

 Related Topics


PRODUCT

Calculates the product of a list of numbers.

Syntax

PRODUCT(number1,number2, ...,number30)

Argument	Definition

list	a list of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	References to non-numeric cells are ignored except in cases where logical values and text strings can be translated to numeric values.

Examples

PRODUCT(2,4,8) = 64

PRODUCT(2,-4,8,2) = -128

PRODUCT(3,65.3,12.4) = 2429.16

 Related Topics


QUOTIENT

Calculates the division of two numbers. Returns the integer portion of the division, discarding the remainder.

Syntax

QUOTIENT(x,y)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the dividend (numerator)

y	a real number (except 0); specifies the divisor (denominator) of x

Notes and Error Messages

•	QUOTIENT returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric arguments.

•	QUOTIENT returns the #DIV/0! error if y is equal to zero.

•	You should use the ROUND function to round a division result to the nearest integer.

Examples

QUOTIENT(7,7) = 1

QUOTIENT(33.5,3.1) = 10

QUOTIENT(-11,5.35) = -2

 Related Topics


RADTODEG

Converts radians to degrees. One radian is equal to 180/ [image] degrees.

Syntax

RADTODEG(angle_in_radians)

Arguments	Definitions

angle_in_radians	a real value in radians to be converted to degrees

Examples

RADTODEG(-1.23) = -70.47381 degrees

 Related Topics


RAND

Calculates an evenly distributed random number between 0 and 1. A new random number is calculated whenever the table is recalculated.

Syntax

RAND()

Notes

•	Use the RANDBETWEEN function to generate a random integer.

•	Use the ROUND function to set the desired decimal places on the random result.

•	You cannot specify a number format for this function.

Example

To compute a random number in a range other than 0 to 1, use the following formula:

RAND()*(y-x)+x, where y equals the largest number possible and x equals the smallest number possible.

Therefore, to calculate a random number between 10 and 60, the formula would equal:

RAND()*(60-10)+10

To calculate a random number between 0 and 100: type RAND()*100

To calculate a random number between 10 and 11: type RAND()+10

 Related Topics


RANDBETWEEN

Calculates an evenly distributed random integer between two specified numbers. A new random number is calculated whenever the worksheet is calculated.

Syntax

RANDBETWEEN(bottom,top)

Argument	Definition

bottom	an integer; specifies the smallest random value

top	an integer; specifies the largest random value

Note

•	Use the ROUND function to set the desired decimal places on the random result.

Example

To compute a random number between 1 and 100 inclusive:

RANDBETWEEN(1,100)

 Related Topics


ROMAN

Converts an Arabic numeral to a Roman numeral.

Syntax

ROMAN(x, type)

Argument	Definition

x	any Arabic numeral

type	a number specifying the type of Roman numeral to return; the types range from Classic (0) to Simplified (4); if type is omitted, it is assumed to be Classic (0)

Notes and Error Messages

•	If x is negative, ROMAN returns the #NUMBER! error.

•	If x is non-numeric, ROMAN returns the #VALUE! error.

•	If x is greater than 3999, ROMAN returns the #NUMBER! error.

Examples

ROMAN(1499,0) = MCDXCIX

ROMAN(1499,1) = MLDVLIV

ROMAN(1499,2) = MXDIX

ROMAN(1499,3) = MVDIV

ROMAN(1499,4) = MID

ROMAN(1499) = MCDXCIX

 Related Topics


ROUND

Rounds a number to a specified number of decimal places.

Syntax

ROUND(x,decimal)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to round

decimal	a real number; specifies the number of decimal places to round x to

Notes

•	ROUND truncates decimal if it is a non-integer.

•	x is rounded to the indicated number of decimal places if decimal is greater than 0.

•	x is rounded to the left of the decimal point if decimal is less than 0. For example, if decimal = -2, then x is rounded to the nearest hundred.

•	ROUND rounds the number to the nearest integer if decimal equals 0.

Examples

ROUND(3.55,1) = 3.6

ROUND(-3.1499,1) = -3.1

ROUND(-115.33,-1) = -120

ROUND(221.5,-1) = 220

 Related Topics


SEC

Calculates the secant of an angle in radians. The secant of an angle is equal to 1 divided by the cosine of the angle.

Syntax

SEC(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians for which you wish to determine the secant

Notes

Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

SEC(DEGTORAD(60)) = 2.0

Example

SEC(0.5) = 1.13949

 Related Topics


SERIESSUM

Calculates the sum of a power series. The following formula is the basis for SERIESSUM:

Syntax

SERIESSUM(x,n,m,coefficient)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the input value to the power series

n	a real number; specifies the initial degree to raise x

m	a real number; specifies the amount to increase or decrease n for each term in the series

coefficient	a real number or an array of real numbers; specifies the coefficients by which successive powers of x are multiplied

Notes and Error Messages

•	The quantity of values in coefficient dictates the number of terms in the power series.

•	SERIESSUM returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Examples

SERIESSUM(2,-1.5,0.05,2) = 0.7071

SERIESSUM(2,-1.5,0.05, R9C1:R1C1) = 3.07796 where cell R9C1 = 5.6 and R1C1 = 3

 Related Topics


SIGN

Determines the sign (+ or -) of a number and returns -1 if the number is negative, 1 if the number is positive, and 0 if the number is 0.

Syntax

SIGN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

Examples

SIGN(5) = 1

SIGN(0) = 0

SIGN(-0.021) = -1

 Related Topics


SIN

Calculates the sine of an angle measured in radians.

Syntax

SIN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians

Note

•	The result of SIN is between -1 and 1, inclusive.

Examples

Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

SIN(DEGTORAD(45)) = 0.7071

 Related Topics


SINH

Calculates the hyperbolic sine of a number.

Syntax

SINH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

Note

The hyperbolic sine formula is:

Examples

SINH(0.5) = 0.5211

SINH(-0.25) = -0.2526

 Related Topics


SQRT

Calculates the positive square root of a non-negative real number.

Syntax

SQRT(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a non-negative real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	SQRT returns the #NUMBER! error value if x is a negative number.

Examples

SQRT(4) = 2

SQRT(0.175) = 0.4183

SQRT(R1C1) = 0.4183 where cell R1C1=0.175

SQRT(-4) = #NUMBER!

 Related Topics


SQRTPI

Calculates the square root of the product of a real number and pi, [image].

Syntax

SQRTPI(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a non-negative real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	SQRTPI returns the #NUMBER! error value if x is a negative number.

Examples

SQRTPI(0.175) = 0.7415

SQRTPI(1) = 1.77245

SQRTPI(-4) = #NUMBER!

SQRTPI(PI()) = PI (3.14159)

 Related Topics


SUM

Adds the values of a list of arguments.

Syntax

SUM(number1,number2,...,number30)

Argument	Definition

list	any real number, or reference to a set of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	References to non-numeric cells are ignored except in cases where logical values and text strings can be translated to numeric values.

Examples

SUM(12,156,0.87,-10) = 158.87

SUM(5,TRUE,3) = 9, because the logical value TRUE is translated into the number 1

SUM(R1C1:R2C1) = 35 where cells R1C1=25 and R2C1=10

 Related Topics


SUMPRODUCT

Multiplies corresponding components in the given arrays and returns the sum of those products.

Syntax

SUMPRODUCT(array1, array2, array3, ..., array30)

Argument	Definition

arraylist	a list of arrays of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	Array arguments must have equal dimensions. If not, SUMPRODUCT returns the #VALUE! error.

•	Non-numeric array entries are treated as zeros.

Example

Two arrays are defined: array1(R6C11:R8C12) and array2(R6C13:R8C14).

SUMPRODUCT can be used as follows:

SUMPRODUCT(R6C11:R8C12, R6C13:R8C14) = 119

SUMPRODUCT({{1,2},{3,4},{5,6}},{{9,8},{7,6},{5,4}}) = 119

The formula for SUMPRODUCT calculates as follows for the above example:

1*9 + 2*8 + 3*7 + 4*6 + 5*5 + 6*4 = 119

 Related Topics


SUMSQ

Calculates the sum of the squares of the arguments.

Syntax

SUMSQ(number1,number2, ...,number30)

Argument	Definition

list	a list of real numbers

Note

•	You can also use an array or a reference to an array.

Examples

SUMSQ(12,-3) = 153

SUMSQ(12,3) = 153

 Related Topics


SUMX2MY2

Calculates the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays.

Syntax

SUMX2MY2(array1,array2)

Argument	Definition

array1	a range or array of real numbers

array2	a range or array of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	The expression for the sum of the difference of squares is:

•	Arrays or arguments containing text, logical values, or empty cells are excluded; however, cells with the value zero are included.

•	SUMX2MY2 returns the #N/A error value if array1 and array2 do not contain the same number of values.

Examples

SUMX2MY2({2, 3, 5}, {6, 12, 4}) = -158

SUMX2MY2(R1C1:R3C1, R1C2:R3C2) = -158 where cell R1C1=2, R2C1=3, R3C1=5, R1C2=6, R2C2=12, R3C2=4

 Related Topics


SUMX2PY2

Calculates the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays.

Syntax

SUMX2PY2(array1, array2)

Argument	Definition

array1	a range or array of real numbers

array2	a range or array of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	The expression for the sum of the sum of squares is:

•	All arguments must be numeric, but may include arrays or references containing numbers.

•	SUMX2PY2 returns the #N/A error value if array1 and array2 do not contain the same number of values.

Examples

SUMX2PY2({2, 3, 5}, {6, 12, 4}) = 234

SUMX2PY2(R1C1: R3C1, R1C2: R3C2) = 234 where cell R1C1=2, R2C1=3, R3C1=5, R1C2=6, R2C2=12, R3C2=4

 Related Topics


SUMXMY2

Calculates the sum of squares of differences of corresponding values in two arrays.

Syntax

SUMXMY2(array1,array2)

Argument	Definition

array1	a range or array of real numbers

array2	a range or array of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	The expression for the sum of squared differences is:

•	All arguments must be numeric, but may include arrays or references containing numbers.

•	SUMXMY2 returns the #N/A error value if array1 and array2 have a different number of values.

Examples

SUMXMY2({2,3,5},{6,12,4}) = 98

SUMXMY2(R1C1:R3C1,R1C2:R3C2) = 98 where cell R1C1=2, R2C1=3, R3C1=5, R1C2=6, R2C2=12, R3C2=4

 Related Topics


TAN

Calculates the tangent of an angle in radians. The tangent of an angle is equal to the sine of the angle divided by the cosine of the angle.

Syntax

TAN(x)

Argument 	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians

Notes

•	Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

TAN(DEGTORAD(60)) = 1.73205

Example

TAN(0.5) = 0.5463

 Related Topics


TANH

Calculates the hyperbolic tangent of a number.

Syntax

TANH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

Notes

•	The result of TANH is between -1 and 1, inclusive.

•	The formula for the hyperbolic tangent is:

Examples

TANH(0.75) = 0.6351

TANH(-0.5) = -0.4621

 Related Topics


TRUNC

Truncates an expression to an integer with a specified number of digits. The number is rounded towards 0.

Syntax

TRUNC(x, digits)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to truncate

digits	an integer specifying the precision of the truncation; if digits is omitted, 0 is the default value

Notes

•	TRUNC truncates digits if it is a non-integer.

•	x is rounded to the left of the decimal point if digits is less than 0. For example, if digits=-2, then x is rounded to the nearest hundred.

•	TRUNC rounds towards zero.

•	A difference exists between TRUNC and INT when x is a negative number. TRUNC(-5.4) returns -5, but INT(-5.4) returns -6. The difference is due to TRUNC rounding towards 0 while INT rounds down.

Examples

TRUNC(14.9) = 14

TRUNC(-14.9) = -14

TRUNC(A4) = 3 where cell A4=3.999

 Related Topics


AVEDEV

Calculates the mean of the absolute deviations of a list of arguments from their mean. AVEDEV measures variation in a data set.

Syntax

AVEDEV(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any list of real numbers

Note

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	AVEDEV ignores empty cells and cells containing text or logical values; however, cells containing values equal to 0 are included.

Examples

AVEDEV(2,4,6) = 1.33333

AVEDEV(1, R1C1:R2C1, {3,5,-6}) = 3.14444 where cell  R1C1 = 0.5, R2C1 = -3.4

 Related Topics


AVERAGE

Calculates the average (arithmetic mean) of a list of arguments.

Syntax

AVERAGE(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	represents any combination of real numbers

Note

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	AVERAGE ignores empty cells and cells containing text or logical values; however, cells containing values equal to 0 are included.

Examples

AVERAGE(5,10,25,30 ) = 17.5

AVERAGE(5,10,25,R1C1…R3C1) = 12.16667 where cell R1C1= 32, R2C1= 0, R3C1= 1

AVERAGE(1,R1C1:R2C1,{3,5,-6}) = 0.0167 where cell R1C1 = 0.5, R2C1 = -3.4

 Related Topics


BETADIST

Calculates the cumulative beta probability density function. The cumulative beta probability density function is used for studying the variability of a sample's percentage response. For example, many methods of a production quality estimation are based on the assumption that low quality products have a beta distribution.

Syntax

BETADIST(x,alpha,beta,A,B)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number from A to B, inclusive

alpha	a positive real number specifying the distribution parameter

beta	a positive real number specifying the distribution parameter

A	a real number specifying the lower limit of x; if A is omitted, 0 is the default value

B	a real number specifying the upper limit of x; if B is omitted, 1 is the default value.

Notes and Error Messages

•	If A and B are omitted the function returns the standard cumulative beta distribution, assuming A = 0 and B = 1.

•	BETADIST returns the #NUMBER! error if any argument is out of range.

•	BETADIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	BETADIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x is less than A, x is greater than B, or A = B.

Examples

BETADIST(3,2.3,3.5,1,8) = 0.3126

BETADIST(0.32,3,5) = 0.3987

BETADIST(0.32,3,5,0,1) = 0.3987

 Related Topics


BETAINV

Calculates the inverse value of the cumulative beta probability density function such that if p=BETADIST(x,alpha,beta,A,B), then x=BETAINV(p,alpha,beta,A,B).

Syntax

BETAINV(p,alpha,beta,A, B)

Arguments	Definitions

p	a probability value to be used with the beta distribution; a non-negative real number

alpha	a positive real number specifying the distribution parameter

beta	a number between A and B

A	a real number specifying the lower limit to the interval of x; if A is omitted, 0 is the default value

B	a real number specifying the upper limit to the interval of x; if B is omitted, 1 is the default value

Notes and Error Messages

•	BETAINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	BETAINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if p is negative or greater than 1.

•	BETAINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if any argument is out of the range.

•	If values A and B are omitted, BETAINV returns the inverse standard cumulative beta distribution, that A = 0 and B = 1.

•	BETAINV returns the #NUMBER! error if A>=B.

Examples

BETAINV(0.3126,2.3,3.5,1, 8) = 3.00007

BETAINV(0.32,3,5) = 0.2854

BETAINV(0.32,3,5,0,1) = 0.2854

 Related Topics


BINOMDIST

Calculates the magnitude of the individual term binomial probability distribution.

Syntax

BINOMDIST(num_s,num_t,prob,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

num_s	an integer which specifies the number of successes in trials

num_t	an integer which specifies the number of independent trials

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability of success of each trial

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE) which specifies the form of the function

Notes and Error Messages

•	If num_s or num_t is real, BINOMDIST rounds it to an integer.

•	BINOMDIST returns the #NUMBER! error value if prob is negative or greater than 1.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, BINOMDIST returns the binomial probability of obtaining exactly num_s successes in num_t trial; if TRUE, BINOMDIST returns the cumulative binomial function which is the probability of obtaining at most num_s successes in the num_t independent trials.

•	The binomial probability formula is:

where [image] is COMBIN(t, s), s is the number of successes in trials, t is the number of independent trials, and p is the probability of success on each trial.

Examples

BINOMDIST(0,50,0.5,FALSE) = 8.88E-016

 Related Topics


CHIDIST

Calculates the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared (2) distribution.

Syntax

CHIDIST(x,df)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a non-negative real number

df	a positive integer which specifies the number of degrees of freedom

Notes and Error Messages

•	CHIDIST returns the #NUMBER! error value if x is < 0 or if df is [image] 0.

Example

CHIDIST(1.345,9) = 0.9981

 Related Topics


CHIINV

Calculates the inverse of the chi-squared (X2)  distribution, such that if p=CHIDIST(x, df), then x=CHIINV(p, df).

Syntax

CHIINV(prob,df)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a non-negative real number between 0.0 and 1.0 which specifies the probability to be used with the chi-squared distribution

df	a positive integer which specifies the number of degrees of freedom

Notes and Error Messages

•	CHIINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if prob is negative or greater than 1, or if df is less than 1 or equal to 0.

Example

CHIINV(R1C1,9) = 1.345, if A1 contains the formula CHIDIST(1.345,9)

 Related Topics


CHITEST

Calculates the result of the test of independence. The chi-squared (X2)test can be used to verify hypothesized results.

Syntax

CHITEST(act_range,expect_range)

Arguments	Definitions

act_range	a list of values separated by commas; or an array of values which specifies the observations to test

expect_range	a list of values separated by commas; or an array of values which specifies the expected data

Notes and Error Messages

•	CHITEST returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references, or if >1 or <0.

•	CHITEST does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with values equal to 0 are included.

Example

The hypothetical example below shows the data for expected and actual results for 100 students and 100 employees taking the same training course. In this case, the expectation is that the students will retain more or less of the training information than the employees.

	Students	Employees
Actual
Improved	60	40
Worse	5	20
Unchanged	35	40
Expected
Improved	70	60
Worse	5	10
Unchanged	25	30
The result of the chi-squared test of independence computes as follows:

= CHITEST(R3C2:R5C3,R7C2:R9C3) = 0.0001151

Therefore, the return probability is low.

 Related Topics


CONFIDENCE

Calculates the confidence interval for a population mean. The confidence interval is a range on either side of a sample mean.

Syntax

CONFIDENCE(alpha,st_dev,size)

Argument	Definitions

alpha	a positive real number which is the significance level; it is used to determine the confidence level; the confidence level equals 100(1-alpha)%; e.g., if alpha = 0.03 then there is a 97% confidence level

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation for the range of data

size	a variable integer greater than 1, representing sample size

Notes and Error Messages

•	CONFIDENCE returns the #INVALID DATA! error for any non-numeric argument.

•	St_dev is assumed to be known.

•	If size contains a decimal, it is rounded down to the nearest integer.

Example

Suppose that 16 apples have an average weight equal to 120 grams with the standard mean square deviation of 15. With 90 percent of confidence, the population mean is within the interval from 113.8318 to 126.1682, because

90% = 100(1-alpha)%, therefore alpha = 0.1

CONFIDENCE(0.1,15,16) = 6.1682

113.8318 = 120 - 6.1682 which equals 113.8318

126.1682 = 120 + 6.1682 which equals 126.1682

 Related Topics


CORREL

Calculates the correlation coefficient between two ranges of data. The correlation coefficient is a standardized covariance and determines linear relationship between two random variables. The function returns the value from -1 to 1, inclusive. Two random variables are called non-correlated variables if their correlation coefficient equals 0. Two random variables have a function dependence if the correlation coefficient equals 1 or -1.

Syntax

CORREL(array1,array2)

Arguments	Definitions

array1	an array of real numbers or a data range of values

array2	an array of real number or a data range of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	CORREL returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	CORREL returns the #DIV/0! error value if the standard deviation of any random variable equals 0.

•	CORREL does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, the cells with values equal to 0 are included.

•	The correlation coefficient is expressed in the following formula:

where Cov(X,Y) is covariance (see COVAR) and [image], [image] are standard deviations.

Example

Suppose that the first array contains the height of a number of trees and the second one contains their mean diameters.

CORREL({17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25},{19,19,18,20,23,25,27,30,32}) = 0.9576, which means those two random events are interdependent.

 Related Topics


COUNT

Calculates the number of cells that contain numbers in a range.

Syntax

COUNT(valuelist)

Argument	Definition

valuelist	any combination of numbers, expressions, or cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	COUNT does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with values equal to 0 are included.

Examples

COUNT(2,3.4,5,"Hello") = 3

COUNT(R1C1,R2C1,R3C1,R4C1) = 2, if R1C1="Hello", R2C1 is empty, R3C1=2, R4C1=34

 Related Topics


COUNTA

Calculates the number of nonblank cells in a range containing data.

Syntax

COUNTA(valuelist)

Argument	Definition

valuelist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Note

•	COUNTA includes cells with values equal to 0 in its calculations.

Examples

COUNTA(2,3.4,5, "Hello") = 4

COUNTA(R1C1,R2C1,R3C1,R4C1) = 3, if R1C1="Hello", R2C1is blank, R3C1=2, R4C1=34

 Related Topics


COVAR

Calculates covariance, which is the average of the products of paired deviations of two data ranges. Use this function to determine the relationship between two sets of data. The positive value of the function means that two events have common dependencies, otherwise the events are not interdependent.

Syntax

COVAR(array1,array2)

Arguments	Definitions

array1	an array of real numbers or a range of data values

array2	an array of real number or a range of data values

Notes and Error Messages

•	COVAR returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	COVAR does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with values equal to 0 are included.

•	The formula for covariance is:

where [image], [image] are the mean values of the arrays

Example

COVAR({17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25},{19,19,18,20,23,25,27,30,32}) = 12

 Related Topics


CRITBINOM

Calculates the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. This function is usually used for quality assurance applications.

Syntax

CRITBINOM(trials,prob,alpha)

Arguments	Definitions

trials	an integer which specifies the number of Bernoulli trials

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability of success for each trial

alpha	a positive real number that defines the parameter of the distribution

Notes and Error Messages

•	If trials is real, CRITBINOM truncates it to an integer.

•	CRITBINOM returns the #NUMBER! error value if prob is greater than 1 or less than 0.

•	CRITBINOM returns the #NUMBER error value alpha is greater than  1 or less than 0.

Example

CRITBINOM(12,0.9,BINOMDIST(4,12,0.9,TRUE)) = 4

 Related Topics


DEVSQ

Calculates the sum of the squared deviations of data points from their sample mean. The returning value is always positive.

Syntax

DEVSQ(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	The formula for DEVSQ is:

where N is the number of values in the list.

Example

DEVSQ(3, -4.5, 75, 22) = 3858.1875

 Related Topics


EXPONDIST

Calculates the exponential distribution. The exponential distribution is often used to model the time between events, such as how long it takes the spreadsheet to compute a result. This function could be used to determine the probability that the process takes at most ten seconds.

Syntax

EXPONDIST(x,lambda,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a non-negative real number

lambda	a positive real number which specifies the function's parameter

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE) which specifies the form of the function

Notes and Error Messages

•	EXPONDIST returns the #NUMBER! error value if any argument is out of the range.

•	EXPONDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error value if any argument is non-numeric.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, EXPONDIST returns the value of the probability exponential distribution; if TRUE, EXPONDIST returns the cumulative probability exponential distribution function.

•	The formula of the exponential distribution function is:

Examples

EXPONDIST(2.76,3.2,TRUE) = 0.9999

EXPONDIST(2.76,3.2,FALSE) = 0.0004672

 Related Topics


FDIST

Calculates the F distribution. This function is useful in determining degrees of diversity between data ranges.

Syntax

FDIST(x,df1,df2)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a non-negative real number

df1	a positive integer which specifies the number of degrees of freedom

df2	a positive integer which specifies the number of degrees of freedom

Notes and Error Messages

FDIST returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	x is negative

•	df1 or df2 is less than 1 or if df1 or df2 is greater than or equal to

If df1 or df2 is a real number, the function truncates it to an integer.

Examples

FDIST(7.146381829,5,50) = 0.0

FDIST(3.251,2,8) = 0.0926

 Related Topics


FINV

Calculates the inverse of the F distribution, such that if p=FDIST(x, df1, df2), then FINV(p, df1, df2)=x.

Syntax

FINV(prob,df1,df2)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability of success on each trial used with the F distribution

df1	a positive integer which specifies the numerator degrees of freedom

df2	a positive integer which specifies the denominator degrees of freedom

Notes and Error Messages

•	FINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- prob is negative or greater than 1

- df1 or df2 is less than 1

•	If df1 or df2 is a real number, the function truncates it to an integer.

Examples

FINV(0.25,5,5) = 1.89466

FINV(0.09261,2,8) = 3.25096

 Related Topics


FISHER

Calculates the Fisher transformation. The transformation produces a normally distributed function approximation. It is used to perform hypothesis testing on the correlation coefficient.

Syntax

FISHER(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number from -1 to 1, exclusive

Notes and Error Messages

•	FISHER returns the #NUMBER! error if x is less than -1 or greater than 1.

•	FISHER returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x is a non-numeric value.

•	The formula of the Fisher transformation is:

Example

FISHER(0.832) = 1.1946

 Related Topics


FISHERINV

Calculates the inverse of the Fisher transformation. If FISHER(x)=y, then FISHERINV(y)=x. It is used to analyze correlations between data.

Syntax

FISHERINV(y)

Arguments	Definition

y	a real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	FISHERINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if y is non-numeric.

•	The formula for the inverse of the Fisher transformation is:

Example

FISHERINV(1.1946) = 0.832

 Related Topics


FORECAST

Calculates a predicted value of the dependent variable for the given independent variable x based on a linear regression of the values in array_X and array_Y. The values in array_X depend on values contained in array_Y. This function is useful in forecasting sales and consumer trends.

Syntax

FORECAST(x, array_X, array_Y)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number which represents a data point

array_X	the dependent array which represents a range of data values

array_Y	the independent array which represents a range of data values

Notes and Error Messages

•	FORECAST returns the #VALUE! error if x is non-numeric.

•	FORECAST returns the #N/A error if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	FORECAST does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with values equal to 0 are included.

•	FORECAST returns #DIV/0! If the variance of the array_X is equal to zero.

Example

Suppose that in a laboratory experiment the outcome of product Y (kg per hour) depends on the reaction temperature x (C). The following table shows dependence of outcome from the reaction temperature:

x: 	R1C1=51, R2C1=32, R3C1=80, R4C1=73, R5C1=64, R6C1=45, R7C1=83, R8C1=44, R9C1=93, R10C1=28, R11C1=35, R12C1=40, R13C1=29, R14C1=53, R15C1=58, R16C1=65 (independent variables)

y:	R1C2=52.7, R2C2=15.2, R3C2=89.5, R4C2=94.8, R5C2=76, R6C2=39.3, R7C2=114.8, R8C2=36.5, R9C2=137.4, R10C2=5.3, R11C2=20.7, R12C2=21.7, R13C2=9.19, R14C2=55.4, R15C2=64.3, R16C2=79.1 (dependent variables)

Predict the outcome of the product when the reaction temperature equals 75 (C).

FORECAST(75, R1C2:R16C2, R1C1:R16C1) = 93.3139, if R1C1:R16C1 contains independent variables, R1C2:R16C2 contains dependent variables.

 Related Topics


FTEST

Calculates the result of a one-tailed probability that the variances in array1 and array2 are not significantly different. The F-test tests the hypothesis that two samples have different variances by trying to reject the null hypothesis that their variances are actually consistent.

Syntax

FTEST(array1,array2)

Arguments	Definitions

array1	an array or range of real numbers

array2	another array or range of real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	FTEST returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	FTEST does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with 0 values are included.

•	FTEST returns #DIV/0! if either array1 or array2 have a variance of zero.

Examples

FTEST({5,4,7,8,12,11},{14,23,21,16,19,25}) = 0.567

FTEST({12,14,12.5},{17,18,16}) = 0.96

 Related Topics


GAMMADIST

Calculates the gamma distribution.

Syntax

GAMMADIST(x,alpha,beta,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a non-negative real number which specifies the value at which the distribution must be evaluated

alpha	a positive real number which specifies the alpha parameter of the distribution

beta	a positive real number which specifies the beta parameter of the distribution

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE) which specifies the form of the function

Notes and Error Messages

•	GAMMADIST returns the standard Gamma distribution if beta equals 1.

•	GAMMADIST returns the #NUMBER! error if x<0.

•	GAMMADIST returns the #NUMBER! error if alpha<=0 or beta<=0.

•	GAMMADIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, GAMMADIST returns the value of the distribution density function; if TRUE, GAMMADIST returns the cumulative distribution function.

•	The formula of the distribution density function is:

where [image] is the gamma function.

Examples

GAMMADIST(7,4.67,3.44,FALSE) = 0.0349

GAMMADIST(7,4.67,3.44,TRUE) = 0.0787

 Related Topics


GAMMAINV

Calculates the inverse of the gamma cumulative distribution. If p=GAMMADIST(x, alpha, beta, TRUE), then GAMMAINV(p, alpha, beta)=x.

Syntax

GAMMAINV(prob,alpha,beta)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability to be used with the gamma distribution

alpha	a positive real number which specifies the parameter of the distribution

beta	a positive real number which specifies the parameter of the distribution

Notes and Error Messages

•	GAMMAINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument value is non-numeric.

•	GAMMAINV returns the #NUMBER! error if prob is negative or greater than 1.

•	GAMMAINV returns the #NUMBER! error if alpha [image] 0 or beta [image] 0.

Example

GAMMAINV(0.07869,4.67,3.44) = 6.99996

 Related Topics


GEOMEAN

Calculates the geometric mean of the data range containing only positive values.

Syntax

GEOMEAN(numberlist)

Arguments	Definition

numberlist	any combination of positive numbers or expressions, or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	The arguments should be positive numbers or arrays that contain positive numbers.

•	If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored.

•	Cells with the value 0 are included.

•	GEOMEAN returns the #NUMBER! error value if any value in the list is negative.

•	The formula of the geometric mean is:

Examples

GEOMEAN( 2, 1, 2) = 1.5874

GEOMEAN( R1C1, 1, 2) = 1.5874, if R1C1 contains 2

 Related Topics


HARMEAN

Calculates the harmonic mean of a data range. The harmonic mean is the ratio of the number of data points in the list to the sum of the reciprocals.

Syntax

HARMEAN(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	If an array or reference argument contains text or logical values, those values are ignored.

•	HARMEAN returns the #NUMBER! error value if any value in the list is less than or equal to zero.

•	The formula of the harmonic mean is:

Examples

HARMEAN( 2, 1, 2) = 1.5

HARMEAN( R1C1, 1, 2) = 1.5, if R1C1 contains 2

 Related Topics


HYPGEOMDIST

Calculates the hypergeometric distribution. The HYPGEOMDIST function evaluates the probability of sample success based on sample size, population successes, and population size.

Syntax

HYPGEOMDIST(sample_successes,sample_size,population_successes,population_size)

Arguments	Definitions

sample_successes	a positive integer which specifies the number of successes in the sample

sample_size	a positive integer which specifies the size of the sample

population_successes	a positive integer which specifies the number of successes in the population

population_size	a positive integer which specifies the population size

Notes and Error Messages

•	The function truncates all arguments that are not integers.

•	HYPGEOMDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error value if:

- sample_successes is greater than the lesser of sample_size or population_successes

- sample_successes is less than the larger of 0 or (sample_size - population_size + population_successes)

- sample_size > population_size

 -population_successes > population_size

 -any negative arguments are used.

•	The hypergeometric distribution is calculated as follows:

where:
x is the number of successes in the sample
n is the size of the sample
M is the number of successes in the population
N is the population size

Examples

Suppose you have 25 golf balls, 6 of which are fluorescent yellow, and you randomly select 12. Find the probability that only two will turn out to be fluorescent yellow.

HYPGEOMDIST(2,12,6,24) = 0.2427

Suppose you have 14 coins in your pocket. Ten of them are nickels and the others are quarters. Find the probability that if you randomly take three coins from your pocket two will be nickels.

HYPGEOMDIST(2,3,10,14) = 0.4945

 Related Topics


INTERCEPT

Calculates the intercept of the linear regression. Calculations are based on the dependent and independent arrays of data points. The intercept value indicates the point of intersection between the linear regression and the y-axis.

Syntax

INTERCEPT(array_y,array_x)

Arguments	Definitions

array_y	the dependent array or data range of values

array_x	the independent array or range of regression variables

Notes and Error Messages

•	INTERCEPT returns the #N/A error if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	INTERCEPT does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, zero values are included.

•	INTERCEPT returns the #DIV/0! Error if the variance of array_x is zero.

•	The intercept of the linear regression has the following equation:

where

and the slope is calculated as:

Example

Evaluate the intercept of the linear regression for the following data:

x: 51, 32, 80, 73, 64, 45, 83, 44, 93, 28, 35, 40, 29, 53, 58, 65

y: 52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

INTERCEPT(R1C2:R16C2,R1C1:R16C1) = -47.98244. If R1C1:R16C1 contains independent variables, R1C2:R16C2 contains dependent variables.

 Related Topics


KURT

Calculates the kurtosis coefficient of a data range. The kurtosis coefficient reflects the relative peakedness or flatness of a distribution relative to the normal distribution. A positive result indicates a relatively peaked distribution. A negative value of the coefficient indicates a relatively flat distribution.

Syntax

KURT(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	KURT does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, zero values are included.

•	KURT returns the #DIV/0! error value if the list contains less than four numeric values.

Example

KURT({3,-4,5},{6,7.77}) = 2.43242

KURT({3,-4,5,6}) = 2.41709

KURT({1,2,-5,7,12,-21}) = 1.77431

 Related Topics


LARGE

Finds the k-th largest value in a data range.

Syntax

LARGE(array,k)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers

k	a positive integer less than or equal to the number of values in array; the position from the largest value to return.

Notes and Error Messages

•	LARGE returns the #NUMBER! error value if k is greater than the number of values in the array.

•	If the array is empty LARGE returns the #NAME! error

•	If k = 1, LARGE returns the largest value in the array.

•	If k = N, LARGE returns the smallest value in the array; where N is the number of data values in the array.

Examples

LARGE({1,2,3,4,5,6},2) = 5

If R1C1:R16C1 contains the following data:

52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

LARGE(R1C1:R16C1, 2) = 114.8

 Related Topics


LOGINV

Calculates the inverse magnitude of the lognormal distribution. If p=LOGNORDIST(x,m,s), then LOGINV(p,m,s)=x.

Syntax

LOGINV(prob,mean,st_dev)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a positive real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability to be used with the lognormal distribution

mean	a real number which specifies the mean value of the random variable

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation of the random variable.

Error Messages

•	LOGINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- st_dev is less than or equal to zero.

- prob is negative or greater than 1

•	LOGINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

LOGINV(0.118678153,3,1.75) = 2.54

 Related Topics


LOGNORDIST
LOGNORMDIST

Calculates the cumulative lognormal distribution of x, where ln(x) is normally distributed with parameters mean and st_dev. It is used to analyze data that has been logarithmically transformed.

Syntax

LOGNORMDIST(x,mean,st_dev)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a positive real number which specifies the value at which the distribution must be evaluated

mean	a real number which specifies the mean value of the random variable

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation of the random variable

Notes and Error Messages

•	LOGNORMDIST returns the #NUMBER! error if x is [image] 0 or if st_dev is [image] 0.

•	LOGNORMDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	The formula of the distribution density function is:

where [image] is the mean value and [image] is the standard deviation of the random variable.

Example

LOGNORMDIST(2.54,3,1.75) = 0.1187

 Related Topics


MAX

Returns the largest number in the data range.

Syntax

MAX(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of real numbers or expressions, or an array of values

Notes

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	MAX does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	If all arguments in the list are non-numeric, MAX returns #INVALID DATA!.

Example

MAX(3,-4,2.999, {5,4.32}) = 5

MAX(1,2,3,4,5,6) = 6

 Related Topics


MEDIAN

Calculates the median value in the data range. The median value is the value at the mid-point of a list of data points in sorted order; half the values in the list are greater than the median and half are smaller.

Syntax

MEDIAN(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values

Notes

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	MEDIAN does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, zeros are included.

Example

MEDIAN(10,20,30,40,50) = 30

MEDIAN(3,9,7.6,4.5,7.6,3,3) = 4.5

 Related Topics


MIN

Returns the smallest number in the data range.

Syntax

MIN(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values

Notes

•	The arguments should be numbers or arrays.

•	MIN does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	If all arguments in the list are non-numeric, MIN returns #INVALID DATA!.

Example

MIN(1,2,3,4,5,6) = 1

MIN(3,-4,2.999,{5,4.32}) = -4

MIN(SUM(1,-1,-3,-4),5,1,-1,2,-6) = -7

 Related Topics


MODE

Calculates the value of the most frequently repeated data points in the data range.

Syntax

MODE(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	MODE returns the #N/A error value if the list does not contain duplicated data points.

•	MODE does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, zero values are included.

Example

MODE(3,9,7.6,4.5,7.6,3, 3) = 3

MODE(3,3,4,4) = 3 (because if there is more than one mode, MODE returns only one of them)

MODE(1,2,3,4,5,6) = #N/A

 Related Topics


NEGBINOMDIST

Calculates the negative binomial distribution. The returned value specifies the probability that a set number of failures will occur before a set number of successes.

Syntax

NEGBINOMDIST(failures,successes,prob)

Arguments	Definitions

failures	a non-negative integer which specifies the number of failures on each trial

successes	a non-negative integer which specifies the threshold number of successes on each trial

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability of success on each trial

Notes and Error Messages

•	NEGBINOMDIST returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- an argument is negative

- prob is less than 0 or greater than 1

•	NEGBINOMDIST truncates failures or successes to integers.

•	If any argument is non-numeric the #INVALID DATA! error is returned.

Example

NEGBINOMDIST(1,5,0.9) = 0.2952

 Related Topics


NORMDIST

Calculates the normal distribution for the specified mean and standard deviation.

Syntax

NORMDIST(x,mean,st_dev,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number to be measured for its distribution

mean	a real number which specifies the mean value of the random variable

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation of the random variable

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE); specifies the form of the function

Notes and Error Messages

•	NORMDIST returns the #NUMBER! error if st_dev [image] 0).

•	NORMDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	If mean = 0 and st_dev = 1, the standard normal distribution is returned.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, NORMDIST returns the probability of the normal distribution; if TRUE, it returns the cumulative normal distribution function.

•	The formula of the normal distribution function is:

where [image] is the mean value and [image] is the standard deviation of the random variable.

Example

NORMDIST(12,11,1.75,TRUE) = 0.7161

NORMDIST(12,11,1.75,FALSE) = 0.1936

 Related Topics


NORMINV

Calculates the inverse of the normal distribution. If p=NORMDIST(x,m,s,TRUE), then NORMINV(p,m,s)=x.

Syntax

NORMINV(prob,mean,st_dev)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a positive real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability to be used with the standard normal distribution

mean	a real number which specifies the mean value of the random variable

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation of the random variable

Notes and Error Messages

•	NORMINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- prob is negative or greater than 1

- st_dev is equal to or less than 0

- NORMINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

NORMINV(0.7161454169,11,1.75) = 12

 Related Topics


NORMSDIST

Calculates the standard cumulative normal distribution. The distribution is the special case of the normal distribution, which has a mean value equal to zero and a standard deviation equal to one.

Syntax

NORMSDIST(z)

Argument	Definition

z	a real number which specifies the value at which the standard distribution is to be evaluated

Notes and Error Messages

•	NORMSDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if the argument is non-numeric.

•	The formula is:

Example

NORMSDIST(2.34553) = 0.9905

 Related Topics


NORMSINV

Calculates the inverse of the standard cumulative normal distribution. This distribution has a mean value equal to 0 and standard deviation equal to one.

Syntax

NORMSINV(prob)

Argument	Definition

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability to be used with the standard normal distribution

Error Message

•	NORMSINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if prob is negative or greater than 1.

Example

NORMSINV(0.9905) = 2.3454

 Related Topics


PEARSON

Calculates the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient, r, reflecting the extent of a linear relationship between two data sets. The returning value is in the range from -1.0 to 1.0 inclusive.

Syntax

PEARSON(array1,array2)

Arguments	Definitions

array1	the dependent array or a data range of values

array2	the independent array or range of regression variables

Notes and Error Messages

•	PEARSON returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	PEARSON does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	PEARSON returns the #div/0! error if either array1 or array2 has a variance of zero.

•	The formula for the r value of the regression is:

Example

PEARSON({2,4,5,2,1,2},{4,2,6,3,7,1}) = -0.0191

 Related Topics


PERCENTILE

Calculates the k-th percentile of the values contained in a data range. It can be used to establish the threshold of acceptance (e.g., to examine all scores above the 70th percentile).

Syntax

PERCENTILE(array,k)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers

k	a real number from 0 to 1 inclusive

Notes and Error Messages

•	PERCENTILE returns the #NAME error value if:

- k is < 0 or if k is > 1

- array is empty

•	If k is not a multiple of 1/(n-1), the function interpolates to determine the value at the k-th percentile.

•	PERCENTILE returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

A 10-cell range (R11C3 to R20C3) containing the values 1 to 10, returns the following PERCENTILE result:

PERCENTILE(R11C3:R20C3,0.5) = 5.5

 Related Topics


PERCENTRANK

Calculates the percentage rank of a value contained in a data range compared with the other values.

Syntax

PERCENTRANK(array,x,s)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers

x	the number of an element in array whose percentage rank you want to establish

s	an integer value which specifies the number of significant digits for the percentage value returned; if omitted, 3 digits are returned (i.e., 0.xxx%)

Notes and Error Messages

•	PERCENTRANK returns a decimal representation of the percentage rank; therefore, to find the percentage multiply the result by 100.

•	PERCENTRANK returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- array is empty

- s is less than 1

- PERCENTRANK returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

- PERCENTRANK returns the #N/A error if x is greater than every element in the array or less than every  -- --element in the array.

Examples

If the cell range (R11C3 to R20C3) contains the values 1 to 10 (therefore, R16C3 contains the value 6):

PERCENTRANK(R11C3:R20C3,R16C3,3) = 0.555 , which multiplied by 100 = 55.5%

 Related Topics


PERMUT

Calculates how many permutations may result from a defined number of given objects. A permutation is any set or subset of objects or events where the internal order of objects is significant. It can be used to calculate the possible permutations of a lottery.

Syntax

PERMUT(number_objects,number_chosen)

Arguments	Definitions

number_objects	a non-negative integer which specifies the number of objects

number_chosen	a non-negative integer which specifies the number of objects in each permutation

Notes and Error Messages

•	PERMUT returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- an argument is negative

- number_chosen is greater than number_objects

- If any argument is non-numeric the #INVALID DATA! error is returned.

•	The number of permutations is determined by the following formula:

Example

PERMUT(15,4) = 32760

 Related Topics


POISSON

Calculates the Poisson distribution. The Poisson distribution can be obtained from the binomial distribution when the number of trials is very large and the probability of success is small, provided that their product is constant.

Syntax

POISSON(x,mean,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a positive real number which specifies the value at which the distribution must be evaluated

mean	a positive real number which specifies the mean value of the random variable

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE) which specifies the form of the function

Notes and Error Messages

•	POISSON returns the #NUMBER! error if x<=0.

•	POISSON returns the #NUMBER! error if mean<=0.

•	POISSON returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x or mean is non-numeric.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, POISSON returns the value of the Poisson distribution; if TRUE, it returns the cumulative Poisson distribution function.

•	The formula of the Poisson distribution is:

•	The formula of the cumulative Poisson distribution is:

Examples

Suppose that 500 students were enrolled in a faculty. Find the probability that September 1 is the birthday of k students simultaneously. Where k can be 0,1,2,...

Let R1C1 equal 500/365, then

POISSON(0,R1C1,FALSE) = 0.2541

POISSON(1,R1C1,FALSE) = 0.3481

POISSON(2,R1C1,FALSE) = 0.2385

 Related Topics


PROB

Calculates the probability that the values in xrange belong to the interval bounded by limit1 and limit2.

Syntax

PROB(xrange,probrange,limit1,limit2)

Arguments	Definitions

xrange	the array for which you wish to associate probabilities

probrange	the probabilities to be used with values in the xrange

limit1	a real number which specifies the lower limit of the interval

limit2	a real number which specifies the upper limit of the interval

Notes and Error Messages

•	PROB returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of data points.

•	PROB returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- any value in probrange is [image] 0 or if any value in probrange is > 1

- the sum of the values in probrange are not equal to 1

 -PROB returns the probability of being equal to limit1, if limit2 is omitted.

Examples

PROB({20.33,25.87,26,23.57},{0.6,0.1,0.16,0.14},23,34) = 0.4

PROB({20.33,25.87,26,23.57},{0.6,0.1,0.16,0.14},12,19) = 0

 Related Topics


QUARTILE

Calculates the quartile of a data set. This function is often used to divide populations into groups.

Syntax

QUARTILE(array,q)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers

q	an integer number from 0 to 4 which specifies which value is to be returned

Notes and Error Messages

•	If q = 0, the function returns the minimum value in the array.
If q = 1, the function returns the first quartile of the array (25%).
If q = 2, the function returns the median value in the array (50%).
If q = 3, the function returns the third quartile of the array (75%).
If q = 4, the function returns the maximum value in the array.

•	QUARTILE returns the #NUMBER! error if:

- q is not 0,1,2,3, or 4

- array is empty

•	QUARTILE returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument contains non-numeric values.

Examples

QUARTILE({2,3,5,2.1,-3.4},1) = 2

QUARTILE({2,3,5,2.1,-3.4},2) = 2.1

 Related Topics


RANK

Calculates the rank of a number in an array of values. Numbers are ranked by sorted order. By default, the sorted order is descending.

Syntax

RANK(num,ref,ord)

Arguments	Definitions

num	a real number whose rank you want to determine

ref	an array or range of reference of real numbers

ord	a number specifying how to rank num; if ord is 0 or omitted, the list is sorted as if ref were in descending order; if ord is any number other than zero, list is sorted as if ref were in ascending order

Notes and Error Messages

•	RANK does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	If ord is omitted or equals zero, RANK returns the rank of the num as if the ref is sorted by descending order; otherwise RANK returns the rank of the num as if the ref is sorted by ascending order.

•	Rank gives duplicated numbers the same rank; however, duplicated numbers affect the ranks of subsequent numbers. For example, if the number 5 appears twice and is ranked number 2, the number 6 would be ranked 4 (no number would have a rank of 3).

Examples

RANK(2,{3,5,6,1,2},1) = 2

RANK(2,{3,5,6,1,2}) = 4


RSQ

Calculates the square of the Pearson product-moment correlation coefficient, r, based on two known arrays of data. The interpretation of the r-squared value reflects the proportion of the variance in array_y to the variance in array_x. The Pearson product-moment correlation coefficient is also known as the Sample Correlation Coefficient.

Syntax

RSQ(array_y,array_x)

Arguments	Definitions

array_y	the dependent array or data range of values

array_x	the independent array or range of regression variables

Notes and Error Messages

•	RSQ returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of data points.

•	RSQ does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	RSQ returns the #NUMBER error if either array_x or array_y has a variance of zero.

•	The formula for the r value of the regression is:

Example

RSQ({2,4,5,2,1,2},{4,2,6,3,7,1}) = 0.0004

 Related Topics


SKEW

Calculates the skewness of a distribution. The concept of skewness specifies the degree of a distribution around its mean. Skewness can be positive, negative, or zero. If the function returns a positive value, it means that a distribution has an asymmetric tail extended toward positive values; if the function returns a negative value, a distribution has an asymmetric tail extended toward negative values. A distribution has symmetric tails if the function returns zero.

Syntax

SKEW(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values (limited to 30 arguments)

Notes and Error Messages

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	SKEW returns the #DIV/0! error value if there are fewer than three data points, or sample standard deviation is zero.

•	SKEW does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The formula for skewness is:

where [image] is the mean value of the data contained in the list and [image] is the standard deviation.

Example

SKEW({4,-3.22, 2},-12.345) = -1.09826

 Related Topics


SLOPE

Calculates the slope of the linear regression. Calculations are based on the dependent and independent arrays of data points.

Syntax

SLOPE(array_y,array_x)

Arguments	Definitions

array_y	the dependent array or data range of values

array_x	the independent array or range of regression variables

Notes and Error Messages

•	SLOPE returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of data points.

•	SLOPE does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The formula of the linear regression slope is:

where

•	The y intercept of the linear regression has the following equation:

Example

Evaluate the slope of the linear regression for the following data:

x:	51, 32, 80, 73, 64, 45, 83, 44, 93, 28, 35, 40, 29, 53, 58, 65

Y:	52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

SLOPE(R1C2:R16C2,R1C1:R16C1) = 1.92395. If A1:A16 contains independent variables, B1:B16 contains dependent variables.

 Related Topics


SMALL

Calculates the specified smallest value in a data range.

Syntax

SMALL(array,k)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers for which you want to determine the specified smallest value

k	a positive integer less than the number of values in array; the position (from the smallest) in the array or data range to return

Notes and Error Messages

•	SMALL returns the #NAME! error value if:

- array is empty or k is greater than the number of values in array

- k is less than or equal to 0

- If k = 1, the function returns the smallest value in array.

•	If k = the total number of values in array, SMALL returns the largest value in array.

Example

SMALL({1,3,4,2,5,6},2) = 2

Let R1C1:R16C1 contain the following data:

52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

SMALL(R1C1:R16C1, 2) = 9.19

 Related Topics


STANDARDIZE

Calculates standardized value of the variable x from a distribution characterized by the mean value (mean) and standard deviation (st_dev).

Syntax

STANDARDIZE(x, mean, st_dev)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number that you want to normalize

mean	a real number which specifies the arithmetic mean value of the distribution

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation of the distribution

Notes and Error Messages

•	STANDARDIZE returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	STANDARDIZE returns the #NUMBER! error if st_dev is negative or zero.

•	The formula of standardization is:

where [image] is the mean value of the distribution and [image] is the standard deviation.

Example

STANDARDIZE(24,20,1.75) = 2.28571

 Related Topics


STD

Calculates the estimate of standard deviation based on a sample. The standard deviation is a measure of data dispersion from the mean.

Syntax

STD(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values (must be a sample of the entire population)

Notes

•	STD does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	STD is calculated using the non-biased or n-1 method.

•	The formula of the estimate of standard deviation is:

Example

Let R1C1:R16C1 contain the following sample data:

52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

STD(R1C1:R16C1) = 39.34216

 Related Topics


STDP

Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. The standard deviation is a measure of data dispersion from the mean.

Syntax

STDP(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas, or an array of values (must be the entire population)

Notes

•	STDP does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	STDP is calculated using the biased or n method.

•	The formula of the standard deviation is:

Example

Let R1C1:R16C1 contain the following data:

52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

STDP(R1C1:R16C1) = 38.09288

 Related Topics


STEYX

Calculates the standard error of the forecast y-value for the x-values of a regression. The standard error is a measure of the quality of approximation x by y.

Syntax

STEYX(array_y,array_x)

Arguments	Definitions

array_y	the dependent array or a data range of values

array_x	the independent array or range of regression variables

Notes and Error Messages

•	STEYX returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	STEYX does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The formula of the standard error of the linear regression is:

Example

x:	51, 32, 80, 73, 64, 45, 83, 44, 93, 28, 35, 40, 29, 53, 58, 65

y:	52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

STEYX(R1C2:R16C2, R1C1:R16C1) = 5.3502, if R1C1:R16C1 contains independent variables, R1C2:R16C2 contains dependent variables

 Related Topics


TDIST

Calculates the student's T-distribution with df (degrees of freedom). The T-distribution is widely used in hypothesis testing of small sample data sets.

Syntax

TDIST(x, df, tails)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number specifying the numeric value at which to evaluate the distribution

df	a positive integer number which specifies the degrees of freedom of the distribution

tails	an integer which specifies the number of distribution tails to be returned; 1= one-tailed, 2 = two-tailed

Notes and Error Messages

•	TDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	TDIST returns the #NUMBER! error if:

- df < 1

- tails is not 1 or 2

- df and tails are truncated to integers.

•	The formula of the student's T-distribution density function is:

where G(z) is the gamma function, k is the degrees of freedom of the distribution.

Example

TDIST(1.4, 34, 1) = 0.08529

 Related Topics


TINV

Calculates the inverse of the student's T-distribution with df (degrees of freedom).

Syntax

TINV(prob,df)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability to be used with the student's T-distribution

df	a positive integer which specifies the degrees of freedom of the distribution

Notes and Error Messages

•	TINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	TINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if prob is negative or greater than 1.

•	TINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if df < 1.

•	If df is not an integer it is truncated.

Examples

TINV(0.054587,60) = 1.96048

TINV(0.100032988,3) = 2.353

 Related Topics


TRIMMEAN

Calculates the mean of a range within a data set. This function can be used to exclude extraneous data from your analysis since it will exclude a percentage of data from the top and bottom tails of the data set when calculating the mean.

Syntax

TRIMMEAN(array,percent)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers

percent	a real number from 0 to 1, exclusive, which specifies the fractional number of values to be excluded from the calculation

Notes and Error Messages

•	TRIMMEAN does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	TRIMMEAN returns the #NUMBER! error if percent is negative or if percent is greater than 1.

Examples

If the range R11C3 to R20C3 contains the values 1 to 10,

TRIMMEAN(c11:c20,0.33) = 5.5

TRIMMEAN({2,3,5,2.1,-3.4},0.25) = 1.74

 Related Topics


TTEST

Calculates the probability associated with a student's T-test. The TTEST determines the homogeneity or similarity of two normal samples.

Syntax

TTEST(array1, array2, tails, type)

Arguments	Definitions

array1	an array or range reference of real numbers

array2	an array or range reference of real numbers

tails	an integer which specifies the number of distribution tails to be returned; 1= one-tailed, 2 = two-tailed

type	an integer (either 1, 2, or 3) which specifies the type of test to perform (see notes in Help)

Notes and Error Messages

•	If type equals 1, the function performs the paired test.
If type equals 2, the function performs the homoscedastic test (two-sample equal variance).
If type equals 3, the function performs the heteroscedastic test (two-sample unequal variance).

•	TTEST returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of data points and type =1.

•	If any of the arguments are non-numeric, TTEST returns the #INVALID DATA! error.

•	TTEST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if tails is not 1 or 2.

•	TTEST returns the # INVALID DATA! error if type is not 1, 2, or 3.

•	The function does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The tails and type arguments are truncated to integers.

Examples

TTEST({2,3,4,5},{4.5,6.7,7.8901,10},2,2) = 0.0287

TTEST({5,6,7,4,6,7,7,8,6,5},{8,6,7,7,9,8,7,5,7,9},2,1) = 0.1039

 Related Topics


VAR

Estimates variance based on a sample of the population.

Syntax

VAR(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values (must be a sample of the entire population)

Notes

•	VAR does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The formula of an estimate for the variance of the numbers is:

Example

VAR(12,14,14.74,11.24,10.5,16.8,10.8) = 5.5890

 Related Topics


VARP

Calculates variance based on the entire population.

Syntax

VARP(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values (must be a sample of the entire population)

Notes

•	VARP does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The formula of the variance of a population is:

Example

VARP(12,14,14.74,11.24,10.5,16.8,10.8) = 4.7906

 Related Topics


WEIBULL

Calculates the Weibull distribution. The Weibull distribution is used to estimate the probable life of electronic equipment and approximate different non-symmetrical distributions in mathematical statistics.

Syntax

WEIBULL(x,alpha,beta,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number which specifies the value at which the distribution has to be evaluated

alpha	a real number which specifies the parameter of the distribution

beta	a real number which specifies the parameter of the distribution

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE) which specifies the form of the WEIBULL function

Notes and Error Messages

•	WEIBULL returns the #NUMBER! error if:

- x is negative

- alpha [image] 0

- beta [image] 0

•	WEIBULL returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x, alpha, or beta is non-numeric.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, WEIBULL returns the value of the distribution density function; if TRUE, WEIBULL returns the cumulative distribution function.

•	The formula of the cumulative distribution function is:

•	The formula of the distribution density function is:

Examples

WEIBULL(75,43,81,FALSE) = 0.0202

WEIBULL(75,43,81,TRUE) = 0.0359

 Related Topics


ZTEST

Calculates the two-tailed probability of a z-test. The z-test calculates the two-tailed probability for the standard normal distribution and a standard score for x relative to the data set.

Syntax

ZTEST(array,x,sigma)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers against which to test x

x	a real number which specifies the value to be tested

sigma	the known population standard deviation; if omitted, the sample standard deviation is used

Notes and Error Messages

•	ZTEST returns the #N/A error if array contains no data.

•	ZTEST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x is non-numeric.

•	The formula of the z-test is:

where [image] is the mean value of the distribution, [image] is the standard deviation and n is the number of values in the array.

Examples

ZTEST({80,76,70,60,90,87,67,89,77,76,56,60,95,66,57},75) = 0.6498

ZTEST({1,2,3,4,5,6},3) = 0.2563

 Related Topics


Text Functions
Text Function

Function	Description

CHAR()	Returns the character specified by a user specified code number from 1 to 255


CONCATENATE

Concatenates the two arguments.

Syntax

CONCATENATE(text, text)

Argument	Definition

text	any text string

Examples

CONCATENATE(my, car) =mycar

CONCATENATE(FRONT, back) =FRONTback

 Related Topics


CHAR

Returns the ANSI character referenced by an input value from 32 to 255.

Syntax

CHAR(exp)

Argument	Definition

exp	any integer number from 32 to 255 inclusive

Examples

CHAR(68) = D

CHAR(82) = R

CHAR(65) = A

CHAR(87) = W

 Related Topics


A sizes

Accelerator keys

Active window

Agate lines

Agates

AI

Anchor

ANSI

Artistic Text

Ascender

Ascending (Sort order)

ASCII

Aspect ratio

Autowrap

AVI

B size

Backup

Base Page frames

Baseline grid

Baseline

Bezier curve

Bezier drawing mode

Bezier tool

Binding Margin

Bit depth

Bitmap texture

Bitmap

Black point

Bleed

BMP

Body Text

Bold

Break

Brighten

Brightness and Contrast filter

Brightness

Bullet

Calibration bar

Calibration

Calligraphic

Callout

Cap height

Caption

Caption frames

Carding

CDR

CD-ROM

Cell

Center of rotation

CGM

Channel

Chapter

Character Code

Character set

Check box

Chromaticity

Cicero

CIE (Commission internationale de l'eclairage)

Click

Client application

Clipart

Clipboard

Clip

Clipping path

Closed Path

CMY

CMYK

CMYK255

CMX

Color depth

Color Manager

Color Palette

Color proof

Color Separation

Color, RGB

Colorimetric

Column Balance

Column Guides

Command button

Command

Composite

Concentric

Conditional document

Conical fill

Constrain

Continuous tone

Contrast

Control point

Corel Barista

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Corel Presentation Exchange Data (CMX)

Counters

CPT

Crop marks

Crop

Crosshairs

Cross-reference

Cursor

Curve object

Cusp Node

Cusp

Database

Default printer

Default settings

Densitometer scale

Descender

Descending (Sort order)

Deselect

Destination file

Device driver

Dialog box

DIC

Didot

Direction keys

Directory

Disable

Discretionary hyphen

Dithered color

Dither

DLL (Dynamically Linked Library)

Document window

Document Type Definition (DTD)

Dot gain

Double-click

Downloadable fonts

DPI

Drag

Drawn frames

Drive

Drop cap

DTD

Duotone

Dupont palette

DXF

Ellipse

Em dash

Em space

Embedded object

Em

Emulsion

En dash

En space

Enable

End node

Endnote

En

EPS

Extension

Feathering

FH3

Fields

Figure Space

File previewer

Fill

Fill tool

Film

Filter

Flyout

FOCOLTONE

Folder

Font

Footer

Footnote

Footnote frames

Force justification

Force Line Breaks

Formula

Fountain fill

Four-color process

Frame Anchor

Frame

Frame Freehand drawing mode

Freehand tool

Full-color pattern

Functions

Gamut Mapping

Gamut

GDF

GEM

Generated Tag

GIF

Gradient

Graphic object

Gray component replacement (GCR)

Grayscale

Grayscale image

Greeking

Grid

Group

Guidelines

Gutter

Halftone screen

Halftone

Handles

Hanging Indent

Header

Header and footer frames

Hierarchy

Highlighting box

Hints

HLS

Home node

Hotkeys

Hotspot

Hourglass cursor

HPGL

HSB

HTML tag

HTML

Hue

Hyperlink

Icon

Image

Image header

Imagesetter

Image map

Indent

Insertion point

Intensity

Internet

Interruptible display

Jaggies

Java

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

Justify

Kerning

Knockout

LAB

Landscape

Layout

Leaders

Leading

Letter spacing

Library

Limitcheck error

Line art

Line style

Linear fill

Linked object

Lino

List box

Loose Lines

LPI

Luminosity

Markup codes

Marquee select

Marquee

Master page

Maximize

Mechanical

Menu Bar

Menu

Minimize

Moire pattern

Monochrome

Monospacing

Multimedia

Multiple select

Negative

Newspaper-style columns

Nib

Nodes

Non-breaking hyphen

Non-breaking space

Object Linking and Embedding

Object

OLE

Open Prepress Interface (OPI)

Orphan

Outdent

Outline

Out-of-gamut color

Overprint

Override

Page border

Paint program

Palette

PANTONE® HEXACHROME (TM) palette

PANTONE Process colors palette

Paragraph

Pasteboard

Paste

PAT

Path name

Path

PCT

PCX

Photo CD

Photographic

Photoshop PSD

Pica

PIC

PICT

Picture

PIF

Pixel

PLT

Point size

Point

Polygon

Portable document

Portrait

Positive

PostScript textures

PostScript

Primary mouse button

Printable page

Process color

Proof

Property Bar

Property

Publication

Pure color

Radial fill

Radio button

Recipe

Records

Rectangle

Registration color model

Registration mark

Repeating frame

Resample

Resident fonts

Resolution

RGB

Root

Rotate

Ruler crosshairs

Rulers

Runaround

Sans Serif

Saturation

Scale

Scanner

Scitext

Screen angles

Screen frequency

script

Scroll

Secondary mouse button

Segment

Select

Sentence element

Serif

Server application

Server

Service bureau

SGML

Shortcut keys

Skew

Smooth node

Smooth

Snap

Source file

Spot color

Spreads

Square fill

Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML)

Start node

Status Bar

Stretch

Stylesheet

Subpaths

Subscript

Superscript

Symmetrical node

Symmetrical

Tab

Tag

Template

Text Link

Texture fill

TGA

Thin Space

Thumbnail link

Thumbnail

TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

Tile

Tiling

Tints

Title Bar

Toggle

Toolbar (Standard Toolbar)

Toolbox

TOYO Palette

Tracking

Transfer time lag

Trap

True color

TrueType fonts

TRUMATCH

Two-color pattern

Type style

Typeface

Typeset

Undercolor removal (UCR)

Uniform color

Uniform Resource Locator

Variable

Vector graphics

Vertical Justification

Web browser

Web document

Weight

White point

White Space

Widow

WIN.INI

Window

WMF

World Wide Web

WPG

WYSIWYG (What-you-see-is-what-you-get)

X-height

YIQ

Zoom


A sizes

Paper sizes measured in metric units. You can choose from A2 to A6 sizes using the Format, Master Page Properties command.


Accelerator keys, definition
Accelerator keys

Also known as speed keys, hotkeys, and shortcut keys, accelerator keys execute menu commands when pressed in combination. Some users prefer to use speed keys rather than reach away from the keyboard for the mouse and click two or more menu items or a tool button


Active window, definition
Active window

The window that you are working in. The next action you perform applies to the active window.


Agates, definition
Agates

A type size about 5.25 inches in height. See also Agate lines


Agate lines, definition

A unit of measure used in classified advertising one column wide and 1/4 inch deep. See also Agates


AI, definition
AI

The filename extension for Adobe Illustrator files [image] a vector-graphic file format which Corel VENTURA can import.


Anchor, definition
Anchor

A code inserted in text linking a frame to a particular location on the page.


ANSI, definition
ANSI

The American National Standards Institute character set. It consists of 256 characters; the first 128 are the same as the ASCII character set.


Artistic Text, definition
Artistic Text

Use Artistic Text [image] when you want to apply special effects such as shaping text to a path. You can add Artistic Text objects containing up to 32,000 characters.


Ascender, definition
Ascender

In lowercase letters, the part of the letter that extends above the main body, x-height.


Ascending (Sort order), definition
Ascending (Sort order)

A sort order determines the order in which items in a list are displayed. An ascending sort order displays items in order from least to greatest. For example, ascending alphabetical order would be a, b, c, g, l, x, z; ascending numeric order would be 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21.


ASCII, , definition
ASCII

The American Standard Code for Information Interchange character set, which consists of the characters available on a standard 128 character keyboard, including non-printable control codes such as carriage returns and page breaks.


Aspect ratio, definition
Aspect ratio

The ratio of the width to the height of an image (x:y). For example, the aspect ratio of an image 640 x 480 pixels is 4:3. You can change an object's aspect ratio by stretching it in one direction.


Autowrap, definition
Autowrap

A feature in VENTURA that draws a path around the perimeter of an imported picture allowing text to flow around the shape of the picture.

You can use the Node Edit tool [image] to modify the shape of the frame and thus the flow of text around the picture.


AVI, definition
AVI

The filename extension (which stands for Audio Video Interleave) for a video for Windows file.


B size, definition
B size

Paper size measured in metric units. You can choose the B4 or B5 size using the Format, Master Page Properties command.


Backup, definition
Backup

VENTURA creates a backup (duplicate) of an open document at regular intervals, and whenever you use the Save or Save As commands to save it, or, in the case of multi-user publications, when you check in the entire publication.


Corel Barista, definition
Corel Barista

Technology supplied with Corel VENTURA that employs the power of Java to produce Web documents that look virtually identical to the VENTURA document.

See also Java and World Wide Web.


Baseline, definition
Baseline

The imaginary line along which characters in a line of type align.


Baseline grid, definition
Baseline grid

An invisible grid you can use to align frames. The baseline grid, which descends from the top of the base page frame, does not change to reflect new tags, attributes or spacing [image] it is always based on the inter-line spacing of the Body Text paragraph tag.

Use the baseline grid when you want to:

•	ensure that frames in adjacent columns line up exactly.

•	force the top of one frame to align with the bottom of the frame above.

•	use frames to force a line (or lines) of text in a column to move down by exactly one or more lines.

Note: If you change the font size of the Body Text tag with the Auto-Adjust spacing option turned on in the Tag Properties, or Paragraph Properties dialog box (Spacing tab), inter-line spacing changes. When you next select a frame, it will jump to align to the new grid.


Bezier curve, definition
Bezier curve

A path defined by the position of four control points (at the ends of the tangents of the vertices). The length and angle of the tangents describe the deviation from linear that a path follows between vertices.


Bezier drawing mode

One of two ways you can draw lines and curves using the Graphics tools. Bezier mode is a connect-the-dots drawing method. The other mode, Freehand, involves dragging the mouse pointer as you would a pencil on paper. A flyout, revealed when you hold the mouse button down on the Graphic tool, lets you switch between the two modes.


Binding Margin, definition
Binding Margin

The additional space added to the inside edge of pages to allow for drilling or punching before binding. Use different margins for left and right pages to create binding margins.


Bit depth

The number of bits used to define the shade or color of each pixel in an image. A 1-bit image is black and white. An 8-bit grayscale image provides 256 shades of gray. An 8-bit color image provides 256 colors. A 24-bit image provides over 16 million colors: 8 bits are used for red, 8 for blue, and 8 for green. This gives you 256 levels for each of the color channels.


Bitmap, definition
Bitmap

An image composed of a series of pixels or dots. Scanners and paint programs, such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT, generate this type of image. By contrast, CorelDRAW creates images using vector objects [image] shapes stored internally as mathematical equations.


Bitmap texture, definition
Bitmap texture

Variable fills that look like clouds, water, gravel, minerals, and dozens of other natural and man-made substances. Bitmap textures display on your screen and print to any printer.


Black point, definition
Black point

A color printing term specifying the blackness level relative to a 4-color and a 3-color black. A 4-color black is produced by printing 100% cyan, 100% magenta, 100% yellow, and 100% black. A 3-color black is produced by using full amounts of the CMY inks only, and is therefore not as dark.


Bleed, definition
Bleed

Part of a printed page that extends beyond the edge of the paper.


BMP, definition
BMP

The filename extension for Windows bitmap files.


Body Text, definition
Body Text

The text of the main part of your document. Body Text is also the name of the default tag in a Corel VENTURA stylesheet. All text in a Corel VENTURA document is automatically formatted with this Body Text tag unless you assign other tags to specific paragraphs using the Paragraph tool.


Bold, definition
Bold

A darker, heavier version of normal type often used for headlines and text emphasis.


Break, definition
Break

The interruption in the flow of text from one paragraph to the next. Normally each paragraph continues directly below the previous paragraph or, if no more room is left on the current column or page, it continues at the top of the next column or page. By changing the break settings, you can control where a paragraph begins [image] for example, at the top of a column, at the top of the next left or right page, or at same vertical position as the previous paragraph.


Brighten, definition
Brighten

Brighten increases the level of white or light in colors. The effect lightens the image or area.


Brightness, definition
Brightness

In the HSB color model, the component that determines the amount of black in a color. See also Hue and Saturation.


Brightness and Contrast filter, definition
Brightness and Contrast filter

Use the Brightness and Contrast filter to lighten or darken a bitmap image (brightness), or alter the distinction between light and dark areas (contrast). Intensity affects the brighter areas of a picture by making them brighter or darker.


Bullet, definition
Bullet

A dot or other symbol used to differentiate items in a list or for adding emphasis. You can add bullets to paragraphs using the Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command in the Format menu.


CD-ROM, definition
CD-ROM

Compact Disk Read Only Memory. Means of data storage using optical storage technology. A single CD-ROM disk can hold more than 650 megabytes of information, or half a billion characters of text. Unlike floppy disks, most CD-ROM disks can be read from but not written to.


Calibration, definition
Calibration

Adjusting a monitor, printer, or scanner to display, print, and capture colors more accurately.


Calibration bar, definition
Calibration bar

Strips of color printed with an illustration. Used as a reference for calibrating a monitor so that it displays colors as they appear in the printed output.


Calligraphic, definition
Calligraphic

An effect created with the Outline tool in which graphic objects are given an outline that varies in thickness. Gives curved objects a hand-drawn appearance.


Callout, definition
Callout

An object created with the Callout tool in the Graphics tool flyout, which enables you to point to and label items such as illustrations.


Cap height, definition
Cap height

The distance from the baseline to the top of an uppercase character.


Caption, definition
Caption

A frame added using the Format, Frame command to describe or label the contents of another frame.


Carding, definition
Carding

Spacing added in multiples of a particular tag's inter-line spacing setting or a custom amount you specify. Used to vertically align adjacent columns along their baselines. See also Vertical Justification.


CDR, definition
CDR

The filename extension for the CorelDRAW, vector-based file format.


Cell, definition
Cell

The basic unit of a table in which data is stored. The intersection of a row and a column forms one cell in a table.


Center of rotation, definition
Center of rotation

The round marker that appears in the middle of a selected frame or graphic object. It is the axis around which the frame or graphic rotates.


CGM, definition
CGM

The filename extension for Computer Graphics Metafile, a vector graphic file format.


Channel, definition
Channel

A channel is similar to a plate used in the printing process. Each channel is a color. For example, if you have an RGB image, the channels are red, green, and blue. When all the channels combine, they mix to create the entire range of colors in the image.


Character code, definition
Character code

The number corresponding to a character in a character set, such as the ASCII or ANSI character sets.


Character set, definition
Character set

The letters, punctuation marks, and special characters in a font. Foreign language accents and mathematical symbols are examples of special characters.


Check box, definition
Check box

A square box in a dialog box used to enable and disable options. An option is enabled when an X or a check mark appears in the check box, and is disabled when the check box is empty.


Chromaticity, definition
Chromaticity

Chromaticity defines hue and saturation or chroma levels for your monitor.


Cicero, definition
Cicero

A unit of measure equivalent to 12 didots. Five point six, three (5.63) ciceros equals one inch.


CIE (Commission internationale de l'eclairage), definition
CIE (Commission internationale de l'eclairage)

A color space chart widely used to describe the range of color seen by the human eye.


Chapter, definition
Chapter

A subsection within a document. Each Corel VENTURA document consists of at least one chapter. Use the Navigator (available in the Tools menu) to add, remove and rearrange chapters.


Click, definition
Click

To press quickly and release the left mouse button.


Client Application, definition
Client Application

The application receiving data from another through a Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) or Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) link.


Clipart, definition
Clipart

Images that can be brought into Corel applications and edited or used as is. Corel offers a large selection of clipart in many formats. You can purchase additional images, including some in bitmap format, from commercial suppliers.


Clip, definition
Clip

In Corel VENTURA, clip means to mask out portions of a graphic by applying a path to it. The path acts as a window through which the remainder of the graphic shows. Text on the same page as the graphic flows around the path.


clipping path, definition
Clipping path

A shape drawn or placed over a picture that acts as a window through which only parts of the picture inside the shape show. You can create clipping paths in VENTURA (see Autowrap) and import pictures that contain them.


Clipboard, definition
Clipboard

A temporary storage area used to hold cut or copied information. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into other programs that support the type of information that has been cut or copied. Information remains on the Clipboard until another cut or copy command is executed.


Closed path, definition
Closed path

A continuous line that is joined at a point (or node) to form an object that can be colored, filled, outlined or patterned.


CMY, definition
CMY

A color model made up of cyan, magenta, and yellow. Use this color model if the drawing or image will be produced on a CMY device, such as a 3-ink printer. C, M, and Y values range between 0 and 255. This color model is available only through the Color Roll-Up.


CMYK, definition
CMYK

The subtractive color model used in printing. Colors are created by assembling different densities of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black pigments on a surface.


Color depth, definition
Color depth

See bit depth.


Color Manager, definition
Color Manager

A tool that learns about your monitor, scanner, and printers to create a System Color Profile. This profile helps Corel applications capture, display, and print color more accurately across different devices.


Color palette, definition
Color Palette

The strip of colors in the Standard toolbar from which you can choose outline and fill colors for selected items.


Color proof, definition
Color proof

Sometimes called a pre-press proof, this preliminary step in the color-printing process shows how an image will look when it's printed. Proofing provides an opportunity to make corrections and adjustments before final printing.


Color separation, definition
Color separation

The process of separating the colors in an image into the primary printing colors cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.


Color, RGB, definition
Color, RGB

The additive color model that is used in your computer monitor. Colors are created by adding varying degrees of red, green, and blue light. For information on the varying degrees, see bit depth.


Colorimetric, definition
Colorimetric

The colorimetric chroma mapping necessary for the reproduction of spot colors. Corel applications remap colors outside of the printer's gamut to the edge of the gamut, preserving colors inside the gamut to ensure more accurate spot-color reproduction.

If you are printing an document that is mostly vector drawings, or Corel PHOTO-PAINT graphics and text, choose a colorimetric System Color Profile.

See also Photographic and Gamut Mapping.


Column Balance, definition
Column Balance

A feature that adjusts the amount of text in columns so that they line up evenly along the bottom.


Column Guides, definition
Column Guides

Non-printing lines that show the areas on the base page into which you can type text. Use the Tools, Options command to show or hide the column guides.


Command, definition
Command

A word or phrase in a menu that initiates an action.


Command button, definition
Command button

A button in a dialog box used to carry out an action such as resetting values or displaying another dialog box.


Composite, definition
Composite

Also called a "comprehensive" or "comp," this is a preliminary version of a design that combines all image, line art, and text elements. Color composites are often printed on color PostScript printers before they are color separated for four-color process printing.


Concentric, definition
Concentric

Having the same center.


Conditional document, definition
Conditional document

Conditional documents contain text, frames or pictures which may be included or excluded depending on the parameters (conditions) set by the user. For example, a multilingual publication would include the same pictures and style settings throughout, but the text would vary depending on the language chosen.


Conical fill, definition
Conical fill

A type of fountain fill in which the color changes in conical shapes from the start color to the end color in clockwise and counterclockwise directions.


Constrain, definition
Constrain

To restrict object movement to a particular angle. Holding down the CTRL key while transforming (e.g, rotating) or creating an object is the primary method for controlling constraint.


Continuous tone, definition
Continuous tone

An image represented by graduated tones from black to white as in a photograph.


Contrast, definition
Contrast

The visual difference between the dark and light tones of an image.


Control point, definition
Control point

Points extending from nodes along curves objects that are being edited with the Shape tool. Control points determine the angle at which the curve passes through the node.


Corel PHOTO-PAINT, definition
Corel PHOTO-PAINT

A program for retouching scanned photographs as well as for editing bitmapped images. Corel PHOTO-PAINT combines impressive painting tools with powerful masking and object handling, allowing you to produce innovative, one-of-a-kind images for your VENTURA documents.


Corel Presentation Exchange Data (CMX), definition
Corel Presentation Exchange Data (CMX)

A filter which enables VENTURA to import CorelDRAW and CorelCHART files directly. Files saved in CorelDRAW and CorelCHART with Corel Presentation Exchange Data can be previewed and printed in full quality from Corel MultiMedia Manager. If the file does not contain the Presentation Exchange Data, the MultiMedia Manager must be able to access the CorelDRAW or CorelCHART program files to display the file.


Counters, definition
Counters

Codes inserted in the document for numbering pages, chapters and captions.


CPT, definition
CPT

The filename extension for bitmap files created by Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Corel VENTURA can import files in this format, including those containing color and grayscale information.


Crop, definition
Crop

To reduce the visible area of a picture, usually to eliminate unwanted portions. The portions not displayed in the document are still stored in the original picture file.


Crop marks, definition
Crop marks

Alignment marks at the corners of a printed page. Used as aids for trimming the paper to the proper size. Crop marks are turned on in the Print Options dialog box and appear only when the page size in Corel VENTURA is smaller than the paper size of the printer.


Cross hairs, definition
Crosshairs

The pair of intersecting lines that can be dragged from the spot where the rulers meet to form the cross hair cursor.


Cross-reference, definition
Cross-reference

A pointer (usually a page number) that directs the reader to another part of a document.


Cursor, definition
Cursor

Also called the mouse pointer. It indicates the object, command, tool, or other screen item you want to select. The shape of the cursor changes depending on the tool or command you have selected.


Curve object, definition
Curve object

An object with nodes and control points that you manipulate to change the object's shape. Curve objects are drawn with the Freehand and Bezier tools. You can also convert frames and objects drawn with the other Graphics tool (except callouts) into curve objects using the Edit, Convert To Curves command.


Cusp, definition
Cusp

A Bezier node that allows you to edit the line segments on either side of the node independently. Use a cusp when you want to add a sharp bend to a curve.


Cusp node, definition
Cusp node

A Bezier node that allows you to edit the line segments on either side of the node independently. Use a cusp node when you want to add a sharp bend to a curve.


Database, definition
Database

A tool for storing and organizing information.


Default printer, definition
Default printer

The device that Corel applications automatically use to print a drawing when you choose the Print command from the File menu.


Default settings, definition
Default settings

Preset options built into a program.


Densitometer scale, definition
Densitometer scale

Scales that are printed on each page of a color-separated image for the purposes of gauging the accuracy, quality, and consistency of the output. You can print these scales by choosing an option in the Print Options dialog box.


Descender, definition
Descender

In lowercase letters, the part of the letter that extends below the main body, or x-height, as shown in the bitmap at right.


Descending (Sort order), definition
Descending (Sort order)

A sort order determines the order in which items in a list are displayed. A descending sort order displays items in order from greatest to least. For example, descending alphabetical order would be z, x, l, g, c, b, a; descending numeric order would be 21, 13, 8, 5, 3, 2, 1.


Deselect, definition
Deselect

To indicate, by clicking on white space or selecting another object, that you do not want the next command or action to apply to the selected object.


Destination file, definition
Destination file

The file into which an embedded or linked object is being inserted. See also Embedded object and Linked object.


Device driver, definition
Device driver

A program through which a computer and devices such as a mouse or printer communicate. A mouse driver, for example, displays a pointer on the screen and translates clicks into actions.


Dialog box, definition
Dialog box

A window displayed when additional information is needed to perform an action.


DIC, definition
DIC

Offers colors that are available through the DIC Color Guide, DIC Color Guide Part II, and DIC Traditional Colors of Japan. Colors in these palettes are created by mixing DIC brand inks. Reproduction through Corel applications is achieved through the CMYK color space. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu. Swatches are identified by palette and color ID code:

•	DIC id# for DIC Color Guide

•	DIC Part II id# for DIC Color Guide Part II

•	DIC Traditional id# for DIC Traditional Colors of Japan


Didot, definition
Didot

A unit of measure equivalent to 1.07 times a U.S. point. Sixty seven thousand, five hundred sixty seven

 (67,567) didots equal one inch.


Direction keys, definition
Direction keys

Direction keys are the arrow keys (­, ¯, ¬, ®) and the HOME, END, PgUp, and PgDn keys on the numeric keypad.

The arrow keys move selected objects in small steps (called nudging). They also move the insertion point when you enter or edit text on-screen or in a dialog box.

The HOME and END keys select the start and end nodes on a curve object when the Shape tool is selected. They also move the insertion point in a block of text to the beginning or end of a line.


Directory, definition
Directory

A directory is part of a structure that organizes files on a disk like drawers in a filing cabinet. Directories have names and can be divided into subdirectories. For example, you could store all your logo designs in a directory called LOGOS. In Windows 95, directories are called folders.


Disable, definition
Disable

An option is disabled when there is no check mark beside it.


Discretionary hyphen, definition
Discretionary hyphen

A manually inserted hyphen. Ordinarily, when hyphenation is turned on, Corel VENTURA hyphenates your text automatically.

Unlike hyphens inserted with the dash key, discretionary hyphens print only in words appearing at the end of a line. Where a discretionary hyphen and automatic hyphen occur in the same word, VENTURA uses either one.

When you have automatic hyphenation turned on but want only discretionary hyphens to appear in words containing both types of hyphens, enable Only use Discretionary Hyphens in the Format, Chapter Properties dialog box (Typography page). Then, using the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command, set the hyphenation dictionary to Discretionary Hyphens Only (Hyphens page) for each paragraph or tag that you want to use discretionary hyphens only.

To suppress hyphenation for a specific word, insert a discretionary hyphen before the first letter.

Note: When automatic hyphenation is turned off for the selected paragraph or tag, discretionary hyphenation is also disabled.


Dither, definition
Dither

The process of approximating pixel colors when reducing the color depth of an image. Dithering can improve transitions between colors when reducing a 24-bit image to 8-bit format.


Dithered color, definition
Dithered color

Color simulated by putting dots of another color very close together. Windows uses dithering to display colors that the graphics adapter is unable to display. See also Pure color.


DLL (Dynamically Linked Library), definition
DLL (Dynamically Linked Library)

A set of routines that can be included in the script file at run-time.


Dot gain, definition
Dot gain

The enlargement of the dots that make up an image, causing colors to print darker than intended. Corel PHOTO-PAINT's Color Manager automatically compensates for dot gain.


Double-click, definition
Double-click

To press and release the left mouse button twice in quick succession.


Downloadable fonts, definition
Downloadable fonts

Fonts stored on disk which, unlike printer-resident fonts, must be transmitted to a printer before you can print your document. If you have purchased downloadable PostScript fonts, you can use them instead of Corel's TrueType fonts by selecting an option in the Print Options dialog box.


DPI, definition
DPI

A measure of a printer's resolution in dots per inch. Typical desktop laser printers print at 300 dpi, while imagesetters are capable of printing at resolutions of 1270 or 2540 dpi. The more dots per inch, the smoother and cleaner the output is.


Drag, definition
Drag

To move the mouse while holding down the left mouse button. Releasing the button completes the action.


Document window, definition
Document window

The window in which a document displays.


Drop cap, definition
Drop cap

A drop cap is the first letter of a paragraph, enlarged and often set in a different font than the rest of the paragraph. Corel VENTURA automatically drops the letter down into the paragraph, but you can shift it up to create a raised cap.

Examples


Drive, definition
Drive

A device in a computer that spins disks used to store information. Personal computers normally have a fixed-disk drive labeled C, and one or two floppy-disk drives labeled A and/or B.


Document Type Definition

A file containing information about an SGML document, including the names of elements (e.g., title page, table of contents, chapters, titles, paragraphs, pictures etc.) that can be used in the document and the order in which the elements can occur.

See also SGML.


Duotone, definition
Duotone

A duotone is a grayscale image that has been converted into a two-color image. Using two colors of ink, instead of four, significantly reduces the costs of printing while still providing a wide range of colors to choose from. The duotone feature is ideal for adding an accent color to a photograph or for extending the tonal ranges of inks.


Dupont palette, definition
Dupont palette

Offers colors that are available through the DuPont® Spectramaster solid color library. This library was developed to provide a paint color selection and matching tool for industrial coatings and colorants. Colors are based on L*a*b* and are converted to RGB for display and CMYK for printing. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


DXF, definition
DXF

A public export text file format used by Autodesk and other CAD vendors. Corel VENTURA can import files in this format.


Ellipse, definition
Ellipse

An oval or a circle.


em, definition
Em

A unit of measure used in typesetting that is the width of an uppercase M in the point size of the current font.


em dash, definition
Em dash

An em dash is the width of an uppercase M in the point size of the current font. It is used to separate parenthetical statements from the surrounding text.


em space, definition
Em space

An em space is the width of an uppercase M in the point size of the current font.


embedded object, definition
Embedded object

Information from a file created in one application that's been inserted, into a file in another application through OLE. For example, you can embed a graphic created in a Corel application into a VENTURA document. You can edit the embedded information from within the application into which it is embedded.


emulsion, definition
Emulsion

The light-sensitive coating material on a piece of film.


en, definition
En

A unit of measure used in typesetting that is half the width of an em.


en dash, definition
En dash

An en dash is half the width of an em dash. It is used between numbers (e.g., Figure 3-15) or in place of a hyphen in a compound adjective in which one element consists of two words or a hyphenated word.


en space, definition
En space

An en space is half the width of an em space.


Enable, definition
Enable

An option is enabled when there is a check mark beside it.


End node, definition
End node

The small square at the end of an open path that appears when you select the path with the Shape tool. The end node is smaller than the start node.


EPS, definition
EPS

The filename extension for Encapsulated PostScript files. Corel VENTURA can import EPS files. It is also possible to save individual pages in this format and then import the page as a graphic.


Extension, definition
Extension

The characters following the period in a filename that identify the type of information in the file. The .PCX extension, for example, indicates that the file contains a bitmap.


Feathering, definition
Feathering

A feature that adds the exact amount of space needed between paragraphs and frames to align the last element with the bottom of the page. See also Vertical Justification.


Figure Space, definition
Figure Space

A figure space equals the width of a number in the current point size. Since all numbers in a given point size have the same width [image] even in a proportionally spaced font [image] you can use figure spaces between numbers in tables to keep tabular information aligned properly.


FH3, definition
FH3

A vector based file format. The extension for files saved in the Aldus Freehand 3 file format.


File previewer, definition
File previewer

In the Import Picture dialog box, a small bitmap representation that lets you see what the selected file contains before you import it.


Fill, definition
Fill

The color (or colors) inside an object. You can change the fill of an object at any time or remove its fill. The two types of fill are solid (a single color) and gradient (a blend of two colors).

No Fill	Solid Fill


Film, definition
Film

Photo-sensitive sheets onto which images are transferred either as positives or negatives. These sheets are then used to create printing plates. An option in the Print Options dialog box lets you create film negatives for printing on an imagesetter.


Filter, definition
Filter

A program that translates one file format to another, or that processes the information in a file to produce a special effect, such as embossing.


Flyout, definition
Flyout

A menu command or tool that has two or more additional tool or menu commands. It appears when you click and hold the mouse button down on it.


FOCOLTONE, definition
FOCOLTONE

A color system that provides a range of spot colors built with the process colors, cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK). The FOCOLTONE colors are organized so that you can choose FOCOLTONE colors with at least 10% of one process color in common with another FOCOLTONE color. This minimizes the need for trap, and makes it an ideal Color Palette to use for color separating.


Folder, definition
Folder

Folders are used to store and organize your documents, programs, and other files. For example, you could create a folder called LOGOS for storing logo designs. In previous versions of Windows, folders were called directories.


Font, definition
Font

A set of characters in a given typeface and point size (see below). For example, 10 point Times Roman. Most fonts are available in families that include different weights or styles such as bold and italic.

10 pts 18 pts 36 pts


Footer, definition
Footer

Text that appears in the bottom margin of every page in the document. Footers in VENTURA are set up on the Master Page.


Footnote and endnotes, definition
Footnotes and endnotes

Explanatory text that is referenced to a location on the page by a number or symbol. Footnotes appear on the same page as the reference. Endnotes appear at the end of the chapter.


Force justification, definition
Force justification

Stretches the last line of a paragraph to the right margin.


Force line breaks, definition
Force line breaks

A line break you "force" in a paragraph by pressing SHIFT + ENTER. Unlike hard returns (entered by pressing Enter) which create the end of a paragraph, force line breaks cause a line break but do not start a new paragraph.

No spacing is added between lines separated by a force line break. Where effects such as bullets apply to the first line of a paragraph, the next bullet does not appear until you enter a regular hard return.


Formula, definition
Formula

An arithmetic operation or mathematical expression.


Fountain fill, definition
Fountain fill

A fill that fades gradually from one color to another. Also called a gradient or graduated fill. Corel applications let you create linear, radial, conical, and square fountains using the Fountain Fill icon in the Fill tool menu.


Four-color process, definition
Four-color process

The four-color printing process, or process color, reproduces all color artwork with just four colors: cyan, magenta, yellow and black, often referred to as CMYK.


Frame, definition
Frame

A box used to hold text or a pictures. Use the Frame tool to draw frames and then modify their attributes using the Format, Frame command.

Each page is also a frame (see Base Page frame). Unlike frames that you create using the Frame tool, additional pages page frames are created automatically to accommodate text.


Frame Anchor, definition
Frame Anchor

A code inserted in text linking a frame to a particular location on the page.


Freehand drawing mode, definition
Freehand drawing mode

One of two ways you can draw lines and curves using the Graphic tools. In Freehand mode, you draw by dragging the mouse pointer like a pencil on paper. The other mode, Bezier, is a connect-the-dots method of drawing. You can switch between modes by using the flyout that is revealed when you hold the mouse button down on the Graphics tool.


Full-color pattern, definition
Full-color pattern

Fill composed of repeating vector images. Corel supplies a collection of vector patterns to which you can add your own.


Functions, definition
Functions

Ready-made formulas that can be inserted in table cells to perform calculations such as summing a column of numbers.


Gamut, definition
Gamut

A gamut is the range of colors that a device can reproduce. Printers and output devices have limited gamuts.


Gamut mapping, definition
Gamut mapping

Gamut Mapping is the reassigning of colors outside of the range of colors a device is capable of reproducing. The range of colors you can specify from a palette or capture with a scanner can be larger than a printer can reproduce. Corel VENTURA uses two kinds of gamut mapping: Colorimetric for spot colors and vector-based art and Photographic for bitmap art.

See also Gamut.


GDF, definition
GDF

The filename extension for vector graphics files used by IBM mainframe computers. Corel applications import these graphics as .PIF files. PIF files can be translated to .GDF format by the mainframe computer.


GEM (Graphics Environment Manager), definition
GEM (Graphics Environment Manager)

A filename extension for files created by programs such as GEM Artline. Corel VENTURA can import pictures in this format.


generated tag, definition
Generated Tag

A tag created automatically for text that Corel VENTURA generates (e.g., headers, footers, table of contents and index text). All generated tag names begin with the characters Z_ (Z + underscore)


GIF, definition
GIF

The filename extension for files in a bitmap format commonly used to store digitized  color photographs. Corel applications can import files in this format.

GIF files are the most commonly used graphics format on the Internet, and are known for their fast access time.


Gradient, definition
Gradient

An effect created by blending one color into another through a series of intermediate steps. Also called a fountain.


Graphic object, definition
Graphic object

Any object created with Corel VENTURA's drawing tools.


Gray Component Replacement (GCR), definition
Gray Component Replacement (GCR)

A technique in which equal amounts of cyan, magenta, and yellow are removed and replaced with black ink. This technique produces better color saturation and contrast, and saves ink costs. The Color Manager controls GCR according to the output device. See also, Undercolor removal.


Grayscale image, definition
Grayscale image

An image, typically created by a scanner, in which continuous tones are represented as uniform shades of gray. Corel applications can import and display images with up to 256 levels of gray.

Grayscale values can also be thought of in terms of the other color models. In RGB, a grayscale value corresponds to equal amounts of all RGB colors. In CMYK, a grayscale value corresponds to zero C, M, and Y values with a positive K value. In HSB, a grayscale value corresponds to zero H and S values with a positive B value.


Greeking, definition
Greeking

To represent text using dummy type that has no meaning, or a series of gray bars. Greeking increases screen drawing speed when text is too small to be legible. Greeking does not affect print quality.


Grid, definition
Grid

A series of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical lines used to align objects. The spacing is specified through the Grid/Guidelines Setup command in the Tools menu. You can also display the grid using this command and have objects snap to the grid by turning on Snap to Grid in the View menu.


Group, definition
Group

A set of collected objects. Grouping enables a set of simple objects to behave as one.


Guidelines, definition
Guidelines

Non-printing lines used to align objects. Guidelines can be placed anywhere in the document window by dragging them from the rulers or using the Grid/Guidelines Setup command in the Tools menu. By turning on Snap To Guidelines in the View menu, you can force objects to snap to a guideline when drawn or moved near it.


Gutter, definition
Gutter

The space between columns. The term is sometimes used for the space on the inside of two facing pages in a bound document (also called binding margin).


halftone, definition
Halftone

The process of reproducing a continuous tone image, such as a black-and-white photograph, using dots of various sizes. On laser printers that cannot print different sizes of dots, the halftone is produced by printing different numbers of dots in a given area.


Halftone screen, definition
Halftone screen

In photography, a sheet of glass or film with a grid pattern of lines used to convert a continuous tone image into dots of various sizes. In Corel VENTURA, halftone screens are specified for Spot Colors by choosing PostScript from the Outline Color, Uniform Fill or Fountain Fill dialog boxes. Process color screens are set in the Print Separations dialog box under Custom Halftone.


Handles, definition
Handles

Small squares that appear on the corners and sides of an object's highlighting box when the object is selected. Use the square handles to resize and transform an object. Click on a selected object and the handles change to arrows which then permit you to rotate and skew the object.


Hanging Indent, definition
Hanging Indent

A format applied to text in which the first line of a paragraph begins farther left than subsequent lines.


Header, definition
Header

Text that appears in the top margin of every page in the document. Headers in VENTURA are set up on the Master Page.


Hierarchy, definition
Hierarchy

The tree structure in the Hierarchy window that shows the logical relationships of linked and grouped objects and allows you to change their relationships.


Highlighting box, definition
Highlighting box

The gray rectangle, with eight handles, that encloses a selected frame or graphic object. When you move or otherwise transform a frame or graphic, a dotted rectangle representing the highlighting box appears instead of the object frame or graphic.


Hints, definition
Hints

Information included with fonts to improve their appearance when printed at small point sizes. Hints are included with the TrueType and Adobe Type 1 fonts supplied with Corel applications.


Home node, definition
Home node

The first node in a path. It is the square at the end of an open path that appears when you select the path with the Shape tool. The home node is larger than the end node.


Shortcut keys, definition
Shortcut keys

Also known as speedkeys and hotkeys, shortcut keys are keys pressed in combination to execute menu commands. You can customize the default shortcut key combinations using the Tools, Customize command.


Hotspot, definition
Hotspot

A hotspot is a graphic or string of text that is highlighted and links you to another piece of information.


Hourglass cursor, definition
Hourglass cursor

The mouse pointer changes to an hourglass during an operation such as printing. No other actions can be performed until the pointer reappears, either by the completion of the action, such as printing, or by returning the cursor to the open dialog box.


HPGL, definition
HPGL

The initial letters in Hewlett Packard Graphics Language [image] a file format created by programs such as AutoCAD for printing drawings on plotters.


HSB, definition
HSB

Hue, Saturation, and Brightness are the components in the HSB color model. Hue determines color, saturation determines color depth, and brightness determines the percentage of white used to make the color lighter or darker. This model is the closest approximation to how we perceive color.


HTML, definition
HTML

The Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) is a Document Type Definition based on the Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML.) HTML is used to convey the structure of a Web page through the use of a set of tags you can insert into the document.


HTML tag, definition
HTML tag

An HTML tag is a phrase contained by angle brackets [< >] that is used to indicate structure in a document. The majority of HTML tags require a start tag and an end tag; the end tag is denoted by a forward-slash(/) before the tag name.

Example

<HTML><TITLE>This is my title.</TITLE>

<BODY>This is the body of my HTML document</BODY>

</HTML>


Hue, definition
Hue

In the HSB color model, hue is the main attribute in a color that distinguishes it from other colors. Blue, green, and red, for example, are all hues. See also Saturation and Brightness.


Hyperlink, definition
Hyperlink

A hyperlink is a reference in a Web document to another Web document's Uniform Resource Locator (URL). You can jump to the referenced Web file by clicking on a hotspot.

A Web document is characterized by the availability of hyperlinks: highlighted text or graphics that, when clicked, load a new document into the Web browser.

The World-Wide Web system relies on hypertext as its means of interacting with users. Hypertext is similar to regular text - it can be stored, read, searched, or edited - with one important exception: hypertext contains a connection (link) which is a reference to the URL of the new document.

A hyperlink can also refer to another location within the same document. This provides an easier means of navigating through a large document.


Image header, definition
Image header

An image header is a low resolution bitmap representation of the image, automatically created to represent an imported or embedded picture file.


Icon, definition
Icon

A pictorial representation of a tool, object, file, or other program item. An item is selected by clicking once, or sometimes double-clicking, on its icon.


Image, definition
Image

A picture that is composed of individual dots created with a "paint" program or with a scanner.

See also Line Art


Image setter, definition
Imagesetter

A generic term for printers capable of printing text and graphics (line art and photographs) at resolutions of 1200 dpi or more on film or photographic paper.


Indent, definition
Indent

The blank space between the margins and the text. Normally, only the first line in a paragraph is indented, but you can indent any number of lines.


Insertion point, definition
Insertion point

A vertical bar that indicates where text will be inserted when you type. The insertion point appears when move the mouse pointer over text and in dialog boxes that require you to type information.


Intensity, definition
Intensity

Intensity increases the brightness of the lighter pixels and decreases the darker mid-tones and dark pixels. The result is that the image looks brighter without being washed out.


Internet, definition
Internet

The Internet can be generally described as a world-wide collection of networks set up to facilitate the exchange of information, using agreed conventions for language and markup (HTML), picture format (GIF and JPEG), and file transfer (FTP, or file transfer protocol). You can use the Internet to exchange e-mail, or transfer information using FTP , or, if you have a browser, you can explore the World Wide Web.


Interruptible display, definition
Interruptible display

A feature in Corel VENTURA that stops the screen during a redraw whenever the mouse button or a key is pressed. If you are working on a page with illustrations, interruptible display can save time by allowing you to select tools and commands without waiting for the screen to redraw completely. You can turn Interruptible Display on and off through the Options command in the Tools menu.


Italic, definition
Italic

Type where characters are slanted to the right. Typically used for emphasis or for distinguishing titles of books.


Jaggies, definition
Jaggies

A stair-step effect that often occurs when a bitmap image is enlarged. Jaggies can be reduced with anti-aliasing.


Java, definition
Java

Java is a programming language that allows you to create self-contained "applets" (mini-applications), which can be executed on any Java-enabled browser. Java was designed for creating Internet-based applications, and the applet is downloaded to the local machine and recompiled there, prior to being executed. For this reason, Java applets are extremely useful for conveying time-sensitive, changeable, Web-based information.


JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group), definition
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

An international standard for image compression that offers compression with almost no losses at ratios up to 20 to 1.


Justification, definition
Justification

A text alignment which lines text evenly along both the left and right margins.


Kerning, definition
Kerning

Reduces the spacing between two consecutive characters. With certain letter pairs, such as AV, moving the letters closer together improves their appearance when printed. Corel VENTURA provides both automatic and manual kerning.


Knockout, definition
Knockout

When printing a color document, a knockout occurs when the background color is not printed and the text or object over the background is printed in place of the background color. The opposite of knockout is overprint.


LAB, definition
LAB

The color model developed by Commission internationale de l'eclairage (CIE) based on three parameters: lightness (L*), and two chromaticity ranges: a* (green to red) and b* (blue to yellow). The square, two-dimensional visual selector defines the a* and b* coordinates from -60 to 60; the vertical visual selector defines the L* value from 0 to 100. This model is device-independent, and encompasses the color gamuts of both the CMYK and the RGB color models.


Landscape, definition
Landscape

A page oriented so that it prints from left to right across its longest dimension.


Layout, definition
Layout

The arrangement of text, pictures, and other elements on the pages of a document.


Leaders, definition
Leaders

Characters placed in the blank space between items in a list. For example, the periods in the following example:

Item 1 . . . . . . Item 2 . . . . Item 3


Leading, definition
Leading

The distance between the baselines of type. In Corel VENTURA, leading is adjusted using the Inter-Line spacing setting which is found in the Tag Properties and Paragraph Properties dialog box. Pronounced "ledding."


Letter spacing, definition
Letter spacing

Adjusts the horizontal spacing between characters in an entire word, line, or text block. A negative value decreases spacing, while a positive value increases it.


Library, definition
Library

Files created by Corel VENTURA that display as small windows in the Corel VENTURA document window. You can store any of the data or formatting in your publication in a library [image] text, pictures, tags, master pages, stylesheets, graphic or OLE objects, frames, tables, and even the content of an entire chapter [image] for easy access.


Limitcheck error, definition
Limitcheck error

A PostScript printing error that occurs when a drawing contains too many line segments or too large a bitmap for the printer to reproduce. Corel applications provides a Flatness control in the Print Options dialog box that helps to overcome this problem.


Line art, definition
Line art

A picture that is produced on a computer and stored as mathematically defined objects. In traditional typesetting, line art refers to illustrations containing only black or white, with no shades of gray.


Line Break, definition
Line Break

When text reaches the right margin Corel VENTURA "breaks" the line and continues the text on the next line. To enter a manual line break, place the insertion point where you want the line to end and then press SHIFT + ENTER.


Line Length, definition
Line Length

The length of a line of type. Usually expressed in picas and points.


Line style, definition
Line style

Solid, dashed, dotted, or dashed-and-dotted line types selected from the Outline Pen dialog box.


Linear fill, definition
Linear fill

A fountain fill that creates a gradual transition from one color to another in a straight line.


Linked object, definition
Linked object

In Object Linking and Embedding (OLE), information from a source file has been inserted into a file (the destination file), and maintains a link to the source file. Changes made to the information in the source file are automatically made to the information in the destination files.


Lino, definition
Lino

Short for Linotronic, a line of PostScript image setters used for high-resolution printing. Over the years, the term has come to mean any type of image setter used by service bureaus.


List box, definition
List box

List boxes appear in dialog boxes and display a choice of options. If the list cannot accommodate all available options, scroll bars are provided.


LPI, definition
LPI

Lines per inch. The screen frequency used for photos and tints is described in lpi.


Loose lines, definition
Loose lines

A line of justified text in which word spacing exceeds the limits set by the Maximum Word spacing setting in the Tag Properties and Paragraph Properties dialog (Typography tab). Loose lines occur when a line contains too many long words. You can tighten the spacing by inserting a discretionary hyphen in one or more words in the line.


Luminosity, definition
Luminosity

A value corresponding to the brightness of a color.


Markup codes, definition
Markup codes

Formatting information and codes for items such as for index entries and footnotes which appear in text files exported from Corel VENTURA.


Master page, definition
Master page

A Master Page is used to store settings such as page size, orientation, headers and footers, and margins for a page or group of pages. Settings such as fills, repeating frames, and ruling lines may also be applied to a master page. Master page settings may be overridden in Page Layout view but the overrides will only apply to that page. A document can have one or more master pages.


Marquee, definition
Marquee

When you drag diagonally to select a set of elements or region of an image, the rectangle created between the start point (mouse down) and the end point (mouse up) is called a marquee.


Marquee select, definition
Marquee select

A method of selecting multiple objects with the Pick tool, or multiple nodes with the Shape tool, by dragging a dotted rectangle around them.


Maximize, definition
Maximize

To enlarge an application window to full-screen size.


Mechanical, definition
Mechanical

A finished "camera-ready" layout.


Menu, definition
Menu

A list of commands that appears when you choose a name in the Menu Bar. The Menu Bar appears below the Title Bar which is at the top of the window.


Menu bar , definition
Menu Bar

The bar near the top of the window that contains the names of the program menus.


Minimize, definition
Minimize

To reduce an application window to an icon in the docking bar.


Moire pattern, definition
Moire pattern

Undesirable patterns in an image printed from color separations with incorrect halftone screen.


Monochrome, definition
Monochrome

An image containing a single color, usually black.


Monospace, definition
Monospace

Type that has an equal amount of horizontal space allotted for each character, regardless of its width (an i is given as much space as a w). Typewriters use monospaced type. Laser printers and typesetters adjust the space proportionally to the character width (an i is given less space than a w), resulting in a more readable appearance.

See also Proportional Spacing


Multimedia, definition
Multimedia

A mix of different media such as text, graphics, sound and video in a single published work such as a presentation or on-line (i.e., electronic) document.


Multiple select, definition
Multiple select

A method of selecting multiple frames or graphic objects with the [image] tool or multiple nodes with the [image] tool by holding down SHIFT and clicking on the items.


Negative, definition
Negative

An image in which the values in the original are reversed so that black areas appear white, white appears black, and colors are represented by their complements. Corel VENTURA can print color separations as negatives if Film Negative is selected in the Print Options dialog box.


Newspaper-style columns, definition
Newspaper-style columns

Columns in which text-wrap causes text to flow downward from paragraph to paragraph in the first left-hand column. The text flow continues at the top of the next column to the right and repeats with subsequent text.


Nib, definition
Nib

The shape of the brush that creates line styles. Different nibs create different line styles and sizes.


Nodes, definition
Nodes

The points that appear along drawn frames and graphic objects selected with the [image] tool. Dragging the points changes the shape of the frame or graphic object.


Non-breaking hyphen, definition
Non-breaking hyphen

A special hyphen called a discretionary hyphen placed at the beginning of a hyphenated word or number to prevent the it being divided at the hyphen during text wrap.


Non-breaking space, definition
Non-breaking space

A special space used to keep words from being separated at the end of a line.


Object, definition
Object

The collective term for frames and graphics created using the Frame and Graphics tools in Corel VENTURA.


Object Linking and Embedding (OLE), definition
Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

A method of bringing data from one Windows application into another. Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is a standard method intended to facilitate sharing of formatted, freely editable information between different Windows programs. For example, if you want to display a picture from Corel Photo-Paint in Corel VENTURA, with OLE you can share and update the information easily.


Open Prepress Interface (OPI), definition
Open Prepress Interface (OPI)

A method for placing high resolution bitmaps on the printed page, while using low resolution replicas for placement. Here's how it works: Your service bureau professionally scans your images on a high-end scanner. They keep the high-resolution version of the scans and give you low-resolution equivalents. You import the low resolution images into your documents, using them "for position only" (FPO). Working with FPO images keeps your document size smaller and speeds up screen redrawing time. When you send your artwork back to the service bureau for final imaging to film, your high resolution files are automatically substituted.

When you import a picture file into VENTURA, you can enable the Link to high resolution file for output using OPI option.


Orphan, definition
Orphan

The first line of a paragraph appearing by itself at the bottom of a column or page. To prevent orphans, choose a minimum setting of two in the Chapter Properties dialog box (Typography page).

See also Widow.


Outdent, definition
Outdent

A typographical effect where text is placed to the left of the paragraph margin. The first line of a paragraph or a specified number of lines can be outdented.


Outline, definition
Outline

A graphic object's outline defines the appearance of the object's edges. The outline can be different colors and thickness. You can also change the line style (e.g., make it dashed), and add arrowheads to the ends of lines and curves.


Out-of-gamut color, definition
Out-of-gamut color

A color that is available in the color space of the source device (for example, your monitor) but is not available in the color space of the destination device (for example, your printer).


Overprint, definition
Overprint

Printing over an area that has already been printed. Overprinting is used to create traps in color-separated work. You can also use it to overprint selected spot colors for certain visual effects. See also Trap.


Override, definition
Override

Formatting which overrides the formatting specified in the selected paragraph's tag or the selected page's master page. Such formatting affects only the selected item rather than all items formatted with that tag.


Page border, definition
Page border

In the document window, the rectangle with the drop shadow that represents the printable area. It is also called the Printable Page.


Paint program, definition
Paint program

A generic term referring to computer illustration programs which store graphics as bitmaps. Corel PHOTO-PAINT and Windows Paintbrush are examples of paint programs. Programs such as CorelDRAW, which store images as a series of lines and curves, are called draw programs.


Palette, definition
Palette

A collection of colors usually displayed along the bottom of a Corel application screen or in the Standard toolbar, Uniform Color dialog box and Outline Color dialog box.


PANTONE Process colors palette, definition
PANTONE Process colors palette

Colors that are available through the PANTONE® Process Color system, which is based on the CMYK color model. The first 2,000 colors are two-color combinations; the remainder are three- and four-color combinations. Colors are based on CMYK, and therefore do not add additional color separation plates. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


Paragraph, definition
Paragraph

A character, line, or block of text ended by pressing the Enter key. Any time you press the Enter key while typing or editing text, you create a new paragraph.


Paste, definition
Paste

To place something from the Windows Clipboard into the active area.


Pasteboard, definition
Pasteboard

The area around the base page which acts as a worktable on which you can set your document. You can place elements such as frames containing imported graphics on the Pasteboard and move them onto the base page when you need them.


PAT, definition
PAT

The filename extension for files containing Full-Color patterns used to fill frames and graphic objects.


Path, definition
Path

The line or series of lines that make up a curve object. See also Curve object.


Path name, definition
Path name

Directions to a folder or file on your system.


PCT, definition
PCT

The filename extension for vector graphics files used by Macintosh computers.


PCX, definition
PCX

The filename extension for bitmap files created by paint programs such as PC Paintbrush.


Photo CD, definition
Photo CD

A process developed by the Eastman Kodak company that converts 35mm film negatives or slides into digital format and stores them on a compact disc (CD).


Photographic, definition
Photographic

The mapping necessary for the reproduction of photographs. Corel PHOTO-PAINT uses a photographic color mapping to compress colors into your printer's gamut of colors. This technique preserves the tonal characteristics and relationships of colors in the photographs you are trying to print. This way, photographs reproduce with enhanced contrast and color variation. See also Colorimetric and Gamut Mapping.


Photoshop PSD, definition
Photoshop PSD

A raster (bitmapped) file format. An image file format, created by Adobe Photoshop, used frequently by DOS/Windows applications.


PIC, definition
PIC

The filename extension used by two different vector graphic file formats. One format is created by Lotus 123. The other format is used by slide-making equipment such as Slidemaker.


Pica, definition
Pica

A unit of measurement used primarily in typesetting. One pica equals approximately 1/6 of an inch (exactly 12 points).


PICT, definition
PICT

An image file format used frequently on the Macintosh. May use up to four channels: red, green, blue, and Alpha.


Picture, definition
Picture

In VENTURA any illustration placed in a frame. A picture can be either an bitmap image or a vector graphic (i.e., line art).


PIF, definition
PIF

The filename extension for vector graphics files. PIF is an intermediate format which IBM mainframe computers translate to GDF format for use in mainframe applications.


Pixel, definition
Pixel

Short for picture element. Pixels are dots on a computer or television screen that combine to form an image. Computer images are created as an array of such dots, each having a specific color. See also resolution and bit depth.


PLT, definition
PLT

The filename extension for vector graphics files conforming to the HPGL format. These are primarily files created by programs such as AutoCAD for printing drawings on plotters.


Point, definition
Point

A unit of measure used primarily in typesetting for designating type sizes. There are approximately 72 points(pts) to an inch and exactly 12 points to a pica.

10 pts  18 pts  36 pts


Point size, definition
Point size

Typographic unit of measurement equal to 1/72 inch.

10 pts  18 pts  36 pts


Polygon, definition
Polygon

A polygon is a shape with three or more sides. Polygons can be simple (e.g., a pentagon) or star-shaped.


Portable document, definition
Portable document

An electronic document complete with text, graphics, and photos that can be read by anyone—regardless of the type of computer, application software, operating system or fonts they use. Corel VENTURA provides built-in support for the three leading Portable Document technologies, namely Adobe Acrobat, and Novell Envoy.


Portrait, definition
Portrait

A page oriented so that it prints from left to right across its shortest dimension.


Positive, definition
Positive

An image in which dark, light, and color values are the same as the original. See also Negative.


PostScript, definition
PostScript

A page-description language or protocol by which programs describe text and graphics output they want for a printer.


PostScript textures, definition, definition
PostScript textures

Variable pattern fills that require the use of a PostScript printer to print. Textures are selected through the PS icon in the Fill tool flyout.


Primary mouse button, definition
Primary mouse button

Normally the left mouse button. If, however, you've swapped mouse buttons, the right mouse button becomes the primary button.


Printable page, definition
Printable page

The area of the physical page that your printer can use to print objects. This area depends on the paper size and type of printer, and is approximated by the dotted borders in the Print Preview box of the Print Options dialog box.


Process color, definition
Process color

The primary colors used in four-color process printing. They are cyan, magenta, yellow and black. See also Four-color process.


Proof, definition
Proof

To print a trial version of a graphic to see how it will look when output in its final form. Laser printers are commonly used to proof monochrome artwork while color artwork is often proofed on thermal color printers. High-quality proofing systems such as Chromalin (Du Pont) or Matchprint (3M) can be used to proof color separations.


Property, definition
Property

A characteristic of an object that you can change. For example, an object's color is a property.


Property bar, definition
Property Bar

Displays the properties for the selected paragraph, frame or other item. Properties for paragraphs include, typeface, type size, type style and spacing. Frame properties include size, position and angle.

For tips on using the Property Bar, click [image].


Proportional Spacing, definition
Proportional Spacing

Type that has the space given to individual letters allotted proportionally to the character width (an i is given less space than a w), resulting in less space between characters and a more readable appearance.

See also Monospacing.


Publication, definition
Publication

The name Corel VENTURA gives its documents.


Pure color, definition
Pure color

Any color that individual pixels on a computer screen can assume. On a monochrome screen, there are only two pure colors, black and white. Color screens typically display 16 or 256 pure colors. Newer video cards will display 32 or 64 thousand colors, and 24-bit cards display 16.7 million colors.

See also Dithered color.


Radial fill, definition
Radial fill

A fountain fill that creates a gradual transition from one color to another in concentric circles.


Radio button, definition
Radio button

A round or diamond-shaped button in a dialog box that turns an option on or off. When two or more options are available, only one can be selected. They are also called option buttons.


Recipe, definition
Recipe

A Corel Database Publisher file that contains a user-defined list of instructions that specify how the data in a database is published.


Rectangle, definition
Rectangle

A shape with four straight sides and four right angles. A rectangle can be square.


Registration mark, definition
Registration mark

Crosshairs or other marks on paper or film used for aligning color separations. Corel VENTURA automatically adds registration marks when printing color separations to a PostScript printer. Registration marks can be printed on non-PostScript printers.


Repeating Frame, definition
Repeating Frame

A frame which, with its contents, background, and ruling lines, is duplicated on every page. You create a repeating frame by placing it on the document's Master Page.


Resample, definition
Resample

Changing the size and resolution of a bitmap image either while importing it or afterwards using the Bitmap, Resample command in the Format menu.


Resident fonts, definition
Resident fonts

Typefaces permanently stored in the printer's memory. PostScript printer's typically have 35 resident typefaces such as Times and Helvetica. You can print using these typefaces rather than Corel application fonts by selecting an option in the Print Options dialog box. See also Downloadable fonts.


Resolution, definition
Resolution

In printing, a term referring to the number of dots per inch (dpi) the printer is capable of printing. Typical laser printers have resolutions of 300 dpi, while image setters have resolutions of approximately 1200 or 2400 dpi. The more dots per inch, the smoother the output and the greater the number of grayscales the device can describe.


RGB, definition
RGB

The initial letters in red, green and blue, the component colors in one of three color models Corel applications provides for creating process colors.


Root, definition
Root

The root describes the highest level of the hierarchy, the universe. When you are Jumped Into a group, the group box is the highest level of the hierarchy, and, therefore, the local root.


Rotate, definition
Rotate

To turn an object around its center axis using menu commands, or by dragging a corner handle that is revealed when you click twice on the outline of an object or mask.


Ruler crosshairs, definition
Ruler crosshairs

The pair of intersecting lines which can be dragged from the spot where the rulers meet. Used to check the alignment of objects and to reset the 0,0 points on the rulers.


Rulers, definition
Rulers

Measuring tools displayed on the left side and along the top of the document window. You can set the rulers unit of measure using the Grid and Ruler Setup dialog box or the Page Setup dialog box.

To move the rulers, hold down SHIFT, click on the ruler and drag. To show or hide the rulers, choose Rulers from the View menu.


Runaround, definition
Runaround

Text on a page that flows around a frame added using the Frame tool.


Sans Serif, definition
Sans Serif

A font or typeface such as Helvetica that lacks serifs which are the short strokes at the ends of individual letters. Times Roman is an example of a serif typeface.


Saturation, definition
Saturation

Saturation is the purity of a color. The HSB color model uses Saturation as a component that determines the purity or intensity of a color. The more colors used to mix a color, the duller the color looks. See also Hue and Brightness.


Scale, definition
Scale

Changing the size of an object, or group of objects, while maintaining the original aspect ratio.


Scanner, definition
Scanner

A device that converts images on a page or transparency into digital form. Corel applications can import scanned images (also called bitmaps) in PCX or TIF format.


Scitex, definition
Scitex

A file format that saves drawings in a 32-bit color format which can be processed or modified for output by high-end film houses and film recorders. SCITEX is ideal for color-separated images as it is a native, 32-bit CMYK.


Screen angles, definition
Screen angles

When printing color separations, the angles at which each of the four process colors are printed to avoid undesirable moiré patterns. These angles can be specified in Corel VENTURA. See also Halftone screen.


Screen frequency, definition
Screen frequency

Screen frequency is measured in lines per inch (lpi). Screen frequency affects images such as photographs and tints of color. A laser printer might produce an acceptable screen at 60 lpi. A high-resolution image setter may be capable of producing a 150-line screen. See also Halftone screen.


Script, definition
Script

A series of commands that can be executed by running the script. Scripts can be edited in the SCRIPT editor.


Scroll, definition
Scroll

To shift the view in the document window to see portions of a document outside the current viewing area. Scroll bars along the edges of the document window enable you to shift the view horizontally and vertically.


Secondary mouse button, definition
Secondary mouse button

Normally the right mouse button. If, however, you've swapped mouse buttons, the left mouse button becomes the secondary button.


Segment, definition
Segment

The portion of a path that lies between two nodes.


Select, definition
Select

To choose an item so that you can apply a command to it or work on it in some way. Corel VENTURA's auto-sensing feature detects the type of item you are pointing to with the mouse and switches to the tool required to select the item [image] for example, the Pick tool when pointing to a frame.


Sentence element, definition
Sentence element

A word or punctuation that the Proof Reader treats as a unit.


Serif, definition
Serif

The short strokes at the ends of individual letters in some typefaces such as Times Roman. Sans serif typefaces, such as Helvetica, lack these strokes.


Server, definition
Server

A computer that shares its resources, such as printers and files, with other computers on the network.


Server application, definition
Server application

The application sending data to another through Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) or Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) link.


Service bureau, definition
Service bureau

A commercial business that prints customer-provided documents or artwork, usually on high-resolution PostScript devices.


Skew, definition
Skew

To slant a frame or graphic object by dragging a side handle revealed when you click twice on the item.


Smooth, definition
Smooth

A type of node through which curves pass smoothly rather than at sharp angles. Node types are selected from the Node Edit toolbar displayed when you double-click on a node or segment with the Shape tool.


Smooth node, definition
Smooth node

A smooth node is a Bezier node that constrains the angle between the two control points to 180 degrees, but allows you to vary the length of the control points independently. Use when you want a smooth transition between line segments.


Snap, definition
Snap

To force a frame or graphic object being drawn or moved to align with the nearest grid line or guideline. Use the Snap command in the View menu to turn Snap on and off.


Source file, definition
Source file

The file that contains information being embedded or linked. See also Embedded object and Linked object.


Spot color, definition
Spot color

In offset printing, solid colors commonly specified using the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM®. Spot color is used whenever exact colors are required.


Spreads, definition
Spreads

A type of trap created by extending the foreground object into the background object. Corel VENTURA provides an Overprint feature that allows you to create spreads, as well as an Autotrapping feature that creates them automatically.


Square fill, definition
Square fill

A fountain fill that creates a gradual transition from one color to another in concentric squares.


Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), definition
Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML)

A markup language used to define document structure. Document elements such as headings, subheadings, and body text are defined by different tags. SGML is an international standard, and SGML documents are application and platform independent. HTML, a subset of SGML, is used to define documents for the World Wide Web.


Start node, definition
Start node

The small square at the beginning of an open path that is revealed when you select the path with the Shape tool. The start node is larger than the end node.


Status bar, definition
Status Bar

An area at the bottom of most Corel application screens that shows information about the currently selected item and the action in progress.


Stretch, definition
Stretch

To resize an object horizontally and/or vertically by dragging a handle on an object's highlighting box


Stylesheet, definition
Stylesheet

A collection of tags that controls the formatting of text and frames. Each publication contains one stylesheet.


Subpaths, definition
Subpaths

Individual paths created by breaking a curve object at a node using the Node Edit toolbar. See also Paths.


Subscript, definition
Subscript

Characters smaller than, and positioned below the baseline of other characters in a word or line of text..


Superscript, definition
Superscript

Characters smaller than and positioned above the x-height of other characters in a word or text string.


Symmetrical, definition
Symmetrical

A symmetrical node is a Bezier node that constrains the angle between the two control points to 180 degrees. It keeps both control points at equal lengths. Use this node when you want the same curvature on both sides of the node.

See also node.


Symmetrical node, definition
Symmetrical node

A symmetrical node is a Bezier node that constrains the angle between the two control points to 180 degrees. It keeps both control points at equal lengths. Use this node when you want the same curvature on both sides of the node.

See also node.


Tab, definition
Tab

A set amount of space that is inserted in the current line when you press your keyboard's Tab key. The spot where the insertion point stops is called a tab stop.


paragraph tag definition, definition
Tag

A collection of formatting attributes applied to paragraphs, selected characters, frames and table borders. Formatting items with tags ensures that they all have the same appearance. Whenever you change the formatting in a tag, you change the appearance of all items that use that tag.

You can override the tag formatting in a selected paragraph by using the Format, Paragraph Overrides command.


Template, definition
Template

An existing document stripped of some or all of its text and picture files. What remains is a shell made up of empty chapters, the stylesheet(s) plus any drawn frames and graphic objects contained in the document.


Text link, definition
Text link

A text link is a phrase which is a hotspot. By clicking on the phrase, you can jump to the information referenced by the link.


Texture fill, definition
Texture fill

A type of fill with parameters that you can alter to create virtually unlimited variations. Corel applications have two kinds of texture fills: bitmap and PostScript. Bitmap textures contain color and display on your screen. They print to any printer. PostScript textures have no color and don't display on screen. You need a PostScript printer to print them.


TGA, definition
TGA

The filename extension for files in Targa format which is a bitmap format commonly used to store digitized color photographs. Corel applications import files in this format.


Thin Space, definition
Thin Space

A thin space is the width of a period.


Thumbnail, definition
Thumbnail

A thumbnail displays a miniature version of an image or defined area.


Thumbnail link, definition
Thumbnail link

A thumbnail link is a miniature representation of a graphic, which is displayed as a hotspot. By clicking on the thumbnail, you can jump to the full-sized graphic referenced by the link.


TIFF (Tagged Image File Format), definition
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

The filename extension for Tagged Image File Format which is a bitmap graphic format that Corel applications can import. You can import color and grayscale TIF files.


Tile, definition
Tile

To use multiple pages to print a document that is larger than the printer's paper size. You can print documents in tiles by choosing Tile in the Print Options dialog box.


Tiling, definition
Tiling

The technique of repeating a small image across a larger surface to cover it.


Tints, definition
Tints

Lighter shades of a spot color created by adjusting the %Tint value in the Outline Color or Uniform Fill dialog boxes.


Title bar, definition
Title Bar

The bar along the top of a Windows application that contains the name of the application and the Maximize and Minimize and Close buttons.


Toggle, definition
Toggle

Alternately turning enabling and disabling a program function. For example, Snap commands in the View menu toggle between being enabled and disabled.


Toolbar, definition
Toolbar

A toolbar places controls on your screen that allow you to easily access features of the program. The Standard Toolbar contains buttons used to perform tasks from printing and saving documents, to cutting, copying and pasting. You can display other toolbars by using the Toolbar command in the View menu.


Toolbox, definition
Toolbox

The collection of icons on the left side of the screen used to perform different tasks, from selecting and transforming objects, to choosing outline and fill attributes.


TOYO palette, definition
TOYO palette

Colors that are available through the TOYO 88 Color Finder system. The range of colors offered here includes those created using TOYO process inks and those that are reproduced using TOYO standard inks. These colors are defined using the L*a*b* color space and are converted to RGB for display and CMYK for printing. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


Tracking, definition
Tracking

The adjustment of space between selected characters and words. Tracking is used to expand or contract text to fit within a given space.


Transfer time lag, definition
Transfer time lag

The period of time between the initiation of data transmission and the data's arrival at the receiving station.


Trap, definition
Trap

The process of adding a slight overlap between adjacent areas of color to avoid gaps caused by registration errors.


True color, definition
True color

Some video cards are capable of displaying true, or 24-bit color. True color cards display 16.7 million colors as pure colors. On a monochrome screen, there are only two pure colors, black and white. Color screens typically display 8, 16, or 256 pure colors. See also Dithered color and Pure color.


TrueType fonts, definition
TrueType fonts

Fonts that print as vectors or bitmaps depending on the capabilities of your printer. TrueType fonts print as they appear on screen and can be resized to any height.


TRUMATCH, definition
TRUMATCH

A color-matching system for specifying process colors. The TRUMATCH® color system is based on the CMYK color model and, therefore, colors do not add additional color separation plates. Colors are organized by hue (red to violet), saturation (deep to pastel), and brightness (adding or removing black). Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


Two-color pattern, definition
Two-color pattern

Fill composed of repeating bitmap images. Corel applications supply a collection of bitmap patterns to which you can add your own custom patterns.


Type style, definition
Type style

Variations within a typeface. Some common styles include roman (regular or normal), bold, italic, and bold italic.


Typeface, definition
Typeface

A set of characters of a single design such as Avant Garde, Garamond, or Bookman. Typeface is also referred to as font. Most typefaces are available in different variations or styles. Some common styles include Roman (regular or normal), bold, italic, and bold italic.


Typeset, definition
Typeset

A document that has been produced on a professional typesetting machine. Corel VENTURA allows your computer and laser printer to produce near-typeset-quality documents.


Undercolor removal (UCR), definition
Undercolor removal (UCR)

In color printing, a technique for reducing the amount of cyan, magenta, and yellow ink in shadows and neutral areas of an image, and replacing them with an appropriate amount of black. This reduces the total area of ink coverage or TAC. TAC is defined by the sum of dot percentages of all four inks (CMYK) contributing to a printed color.

Another technique called Gray Component Replacement (GCR), also substitutes amounts of CMY ink with black, but over a greater color range.


Uniform color, definition
Uniform color

A solid color, black, white, or shade of gray used to outline or fill objects. You can select uniform colors from the Outline Color and Uniform Fill dialog boxes.


Uniform Resource Locator (URL), definition
Uniform Resource Locator (URL)

The address identifying the name and location of a file, document, database or other information source on the Internet.


Variable, definition
Variable

A placeholder for text that changes according to the variable's current definition. Insert variables for information that is likely to change during preparation of the document [image] such as dates, document version numbers and names of customers and products.


Vector graphics, definition
Vector graphics

Graphics created in programs such as CorelDRAW where shapes are represented as a series of Bezier curves. Vector graphics are also referred to as object-based graphics or line art. This contrasts with bitmap graphics which are created pixel by pixel in paint programs and by scanners.


Vertical Justification, definition
Vertical Justification

The process that forces text to reach the exact bottom of each column or page by adding vertical space between paragraphs and lines of text plus above and below frames and tables.


Web browser, definition
Web browser

A browser is a computer program used to view a Web document. A browser allows you to see web files and accesses (or loads) additional files as you request them, by using their URL addresses.


Web document, definition
Web document

A Web document is an ASCII text file with Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags. One or more related Web documents can comprise a Web Publication.


Weight, definition
Weight

The relative thickness of the strokes of a character in a typeface. For example, a pale typeface has a light weight and a bold typeface has a heavy weight. In addition, some typeface designs use heavy left-leaning strokes, and light right-leaning strokes to add readability or creativity to the designs.


Widow, definition
Widow

The last line of a paragraph printed by itself at the top of a column or page. To prevent widows, choose a minimum setting of two in the Chapter Properties dialog box (Typography page).

See also Orphan.


White point, definition
White point

Defines the color temperature of your monitor in creating white.


White Space, definition
White Space

Areas of a page that contain no text or graphics. Used to aid in design clarity and text readability.


WIN.INI, definition
WIN.INI

A file containing Windows settings and preferences for screen color, mouse double-click speed, fonts, printers, etc. You can change the WIN.INI settings by editing this file with the Windows Notepad or other ASCII text editor.


Window, definition
Window

A rectangular area on the screen in which applications are displayed. Every application window has a Title Bar and Menu Bar along the top and one or two scroll bars along the sides or bottom.


WMF, definition
WMF

The filename extension for Windows Metafile.


World Wide Web (WWW), definition
World Wide Web (WWW)

The World Wide Web is essentially the graphical component of the Internet. Text and images are displayed at websites using (HTML ), (GIF  and JPEG ), formats. Web documents can be created in VENTURA and other applications, and viewed using a browser.


WPG, definition
WPG

The filename extension for Corel WordPerfect 5.0 and 5.1 graphics files.


WYSIWYG (What-you-see-is-what-you-get), definition
WYSIWYG (What-you-see-is-what-you-get)

A term that describes a program's ability to provide an accurate on-screen representation of what an image or document will look like when printed.


X-height, definition
X-height

The part that makes up the main body of a lowercase letter.


YIQ, definition
YIQ

A color model used in television broadcast systems (North American video standard - NTSC). Colors are split into a luminance value (Y) and two chromaticity values (I and Q). On a color monitor, all three components are visible; on a monochrome monitor, only the Y component is visible. The square, two-dimensional visual selector defines the I and Q values, and the vertical visual selector defines the Y value. All values are scaled from 0 to 255. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the Y component of the splitting process produces a grayscale image, which is often superior to results obtained with a grayscale conversion, using the Convert To command from the Image menu.


Zoom, definition
Zoom

To expand or reduce the image of a document on the screen. Zooming does not change the actual size of the text or graphics.


glos_HTML
HTML

The Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) is a Document Type Definition based on the Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML.) HTML is used to convey the structure of a Web page through the use of a set of tags you can insert into the document.


glos_conversion
conversion

Conversion is the process of translating a VENTURA publication, with its coding and structural information, into another type of publication, such as HTML or Java, complete with the appropriate markup tags.

You can convert a VENTURA publication by accessing the Publish As item, in the File menu.


glos__Automatic_HTML_Styling
Automatic HTML Styling

Automatic HTML Styling offers you one-step HTML conversion. By using the Publish as HTML command in the File menu, and clicking the Publish button, you can convert the current VENTURA publication into a complete HTML publication.


glos_Custom_HTML_Styling
Custom HTML Styling

Custom HTML Styling lets you control the HTML conversion process, including:

·	manual mapping of VENTURA style tags to HTML tags;

·	customization of HTML graphics publishing

·	use of tables of contents, indexes and cross-references

·	standardization of HTML conversion

You can access the Custom HTML Styling capabilities of VENTURA by using the Publish as HTML command in the File menu, and then disabling the Automatic HTML Styling checkbox. The HTML Setup Palette will appear, and provides you with buttons linking you to customization dialog boxes.


glos__Web_Document
Web Document

A Web document is an ASCII text file with Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags.


glos_Uniform_Resource_Locator_(URL)
Uniform Resource Locator

A Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the unique address of a web document which indicates the Internet server on which it is stored, as well as its directory and filename.


glos_GIF
GIF

The GIF file format is used to display graphics, and is the most commonly used graphics format on the Internet. GIF graphics files are known for their fast access time.


glos_JPG
JPG

JPG is the Joint Photographic Experts Group file format, used to display graphics. JPG is known for its relatively small file size.


Image map

A picture that contains links to different locations within the same picture. For example, clicking the right side of the picture could link via a URL to one place while clicking on the left, to another. You cannot create image maps in VENTURA by inserting URLs in frames containing pictures. Instead, edit the HTML document VENTURA produces in a Web editor such as Netscape Navigator Gold (TM).


PANTONE Spot colors palette(definition)
 PANTONE® Spot colors palette

A palette that uses colors available through the PANTONE®  Spot Colors. Since spot colors correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based, each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate.


PANTONE hexachrome palette(definition)
PANTONE® HEXACHROME (TM) palette

Colors that are available through the PANTONE® Hexachrome system, which is based on the CMYK color model but adds two additional inks for a total of six inks and a broader range of colors.


CMYK255 (definition)
 CMYK255

A subtractive color model created by assembling different densities of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black pigments on a surface. C, M, Y, and K values range from 0 to 255.


HLS (definition)
 HLS

Hue, lightness, and saturation are the components of the HLS color model, a variation on HSB and an alternative to RGB. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, etc.), lightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color), and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense). The circular visual selector defines the H value (0 to 360) and the S value (0 to 100); the vertical visual selector defines the L value (0 to 100).


Grayscale (definition)
 Grayscale

An 8-bit color mode that stores and displays images using 256 shades of gray from black to white. Each color is defined as a single value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white).

A grayscale value can also be thought of in terms of the other color models: in RGB, a grayscale value corresponds to equal amounts of all RGB colors; in CMYK, a grayscale value corresponds to zero C, M, and Y values with a positive K value; in HSB, a grayscale value corresponds to zero H and S values with a positive B value.


Registration color model

The Registration color model consists of a single color in the CMYKL color space, for which "C, M, Y, and K are at 100%. You can use this color on any object that you want to appear on all separation plates. It is ideal for company logos, job numbers, or any other identifying marks that you may need for the job. This color cannot be added to the custom pallette.


Real number

Real numbers include all numbers except complex numbers (e.g., 0, 5, -2, 4.75, pi, [image]). They include all whole numbers, numbers, and fractions.


Integer

Integers include all positive whole numbers, their negatives, and zero (e.g., -3, 0, 5).


Array

An array is an arrangement of numbers in rows and columns (a matrix). An array can be one-dimensional or multi-dimensional.

A one-dimensional array is expressed in table formulas as a list of numbers separated by commas and enclosed in brackets { } e.g., {1,3,6,8,9} or as a cell range e.g., R1C1:R8C1 which refers to values in the table. (Note: Financial functions require one-dimensional arrays).

A multi-dimensional array such as

is represented in the table by typing

{{2,3,6},{5,8,1},{4,9,7}}

Note

The array shown above can be entered into a formula:

•	 as a cell range R1C1:R3C3, or

•	 in the form {{2,3,6},{5,8,1},{4,9,7}}.


Whole number

Whole numbers include all positive integers and zero (e.g., 0, 1, 2, 3, 4).


Serial value

Dates which are normally displayed in the format month/day/year need to be converted in the table to serial values which are similar to Julian dates. Serial date values start at 1, which represents January 1, 1900, and end at 65 380 in the year 2099. Serial date values are always represented by the numbers to the left of the decimal point.

To convert a standard date to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("mm/dd/yy"); e.g., to convert 6/29/95 to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("6/29/95"), which will give the serial value 34879.

Serial time values begin at 00:00:00, or midnight, and are counted in seconds. They are always represented by the numbers to the right of the decimal point.

To convert a standard time to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("hh:mm:ss AM/PM"); e.g., to convert 5:15 PM to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("5:15:00 PM"), which will give the serial value 0.71875.

Therefore, the serial value for 6/29/95 at 5:15 PM is 34879.71875.


Serial date number

Dates which are normally displayed in the format month/day/year need to be converted in the table to serial values which are similar to Julian dates. Serial date values start at 1, which represents January 1, 1900, and end at 65 380 in the year 2099. Serial date values are always represented by the numbers to the left of the decimal point.

To convert a standard date to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("mm/dd/yy"); e.g., to convert 6/29/95 to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("6/29/95"), which will give the serial value 34879.

Serial time values begin at 00:00:00, or midnight, and are counted in seconds. They are always represented by the numbers to the right of the decimal point.

To convert a standard time to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("hh:mm:ss AM/PM"); e.g., to convert 5:15 PM to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("5:15:00 PM"), which will give the serial value 0.71875.

Therefore, the serial value for 6/29/95 at 5:15 PM is 34879.71875.


Serial date value

Dates which are normally displayed in the format month/day/year need to be converted in the table to serial values which are similar to Julian dates. Serial date values start at 1, which represents January 1, 1900, and end at 65 380 in the year 2099. Serial date values are always represented by the numbers to the left of the decimal point.

To convert a standard date to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("mm/dd/yy"); e.g., to convert 6/29/95 to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("6/29/95"), which will give the serial value 34879.

Serial time values begin at 00:00:00, or midnight, and are counted in seconds. They are always represented by the numbers to the right of the decimal point.

To convert a standard time to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("hh:mm:ss AM/PM"); e.g., to convert 5:15 PM to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("5:15:00 PM"), which will give the serial value 0.71875.

Therefore, the serial value for 6/29/95 at 5:15 PM is 34879.71875.


Basis

Basis	Day Count Basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360


Complex number

A complex number is any number of the form a+ib, where a and b are real numbers and i is an imaginary number.


Degrees of freedom

The number of free choices one can make in repeated random samples that constitute sampling distribution. If, for example, one is allowed to pick two numbers freely, there are two degrees of freedom. If, on the other hand, the two numbers must sum to 100 there is only one free choice or one degree of freedom. The degree of freedom is often one less than the number of variables.


Serial value

Dates which are normally displayed in the format month/day/year are converted by the table to serial values which are similar to Julian dates. Serial date values start at 1, which represents January 1, 1900, and end at 65 380 in the year 2099. Serial date values are always represented by the numbers to the left of the decimal point.

Serial time values begin at 00:00:00, or midnight, and are counted in seconds. They are always represented by the numbers to the right of the decimal point.


Base page frames

A base page frame is designed to contain the main text of documents so that the text flows continuously between pages. Text that you add to the base page frame flows automatically to the following pages. You specify the size and orientation of the base page frame and all pages based on the same master page using the Format, Master Page Properties command. Changes you make directly to the base page frame, such as fill colors, are considered overrides and do not affect the associated master page.


Drawn frames

A drawn frame is created with the Frame tool. Unlike the base page frame, drawn frames are also used for special text flows [image] jumping stories between pages, for example. There are a wide range of preset frame shapes you can draw on the page, all of which you can manipulate in the following ways:

Rotation

You can rotate drawn frames with, or independently of, their contents. By default, frames and their contents rotate together. You can change this setting using the Tools, Option command (General tab) so that when the frame rotates, its contents do not.

Text Flow

You can flow text inside and around drawn frames, or between linked frames. You can also flow text from right to left, or from the base page frame to a drawn frame and back. For example, you can link text frames so that text flows backward (e.g., from page 35 to page 25). To override the chapter defaults, apply widow and orphan settings to drawn frames.

In addition, text can flow around drawn frames in the following ways.

-	around

-	above and below

-	over (text flows over or under the frame, depending on its place in the stacking order)

-	down the left side

-	down the right side

-	down the left, then down the right side

•	Reshaping

If you want to reshape rectangular frames, click Edit, Convert To Curves and change the shape using the Node Edit tool.

Note

•	To edit text typed into a drawn frame, as opposed to imported, click to place the insertion point in the text and then switch to the Copy Editor.


Caption frames

Corel VENTURA creates a caption frame when you add a caption to a drawn frame. The caption is attached to the drawn frame and can be placed on any side of the drawn frame. You can add captions both above and below and to the left and right sides of frames at the same time.


Header and footer frames

Header and footer frames appear at the top or bottom of the page in both Master Page and Page Layout view and adjust automatically to contain text. They serve as important visual aids to readers looking for information. For example, in a magazine, headers and footers identify the current document, issue number, date, and page number. In a book, they usually display the chapter, section, or page number,

Headers and footer frames are held on master pages, which causes them to repeat on all pages based on that master, and ensures a consistent look for your document. You can also override headers and footers on selected pages by making changes in Page Layout view.

You can type or edit text directly in the header or footer areas, and make changes to the margins, spacing, and other formatting (e.g., fills, outlines, ruling lines).


Footnote frames

Corel VENTURA creates footnote frames to hold footnote text. They appear at the bottom of the page and, like header and footer frames, can be set to resize automatically to accommodate text.


Records (definition)
Records

A row of information in a database that contains related information about a specific entity. For example, in a database containing the names, addresses and telephone numbers of people in an organization, the data for each person would constitute a record.


Fields (definition)
Fields

A column of information in a database that contains information about a specific characteristic of an entity. For example, the names, addresses and telephone numbers in a database of people in your company would each constitute a field.


Fill tool - definition
Fill tool

Found on the Toolbox. Use to fill areas with a variety of fill types.


Fountain Fill icon

Selects fountain fill as the current fill type. If you wish to modify the fill, click Edit.


Freehand tool (definition)
Freehand tool

Lets you draw freehand lines and shapes using a click-and-drag style of drawing similar to the way you move a pencil on paper.


Bezier tool (definition)
Bezier tool

Lets you create curves using a connect-the-dots style of drawing where you specify the start and end points of the line or curve you want to draw. Corel VENTURA then connects these points.


Overview: Vconvert.txt
Vconvert.txt

VENTURA 7 includes a text file called vconvert.txt, which allows you to view the source code for the executable file vconvert.exe.


New features in Corel VENTURA 7

Corel VENTURA 7 offers everything you need in paper and electronic page layout and publishing. Click the [image] buttons below to find out about the new features that make your work easier and more fun to do.

The Corel VENTURA 7 workplace

Electronic publishing

Document structure

Document control and management

Text Editing and Proofreading

Typography

File Import/Export

Page layout

Pictures

Frames

Tables

Drawing and editing tools

Printing

Recordings, macros, and Corel SCRIPT

Database publishing

SGML authoring

Third-party development for Corel VENTURA


The Corel VENTURA 7 workplace (New features)
The Corel VENTURA 7 workplace

The new Corel VENTURA 7 workplace offers a wide array of enhancements to make your work more productive [image] from MDI, to intelligent toolbars and cursors, to libraries where you can keep any part of a publication for future use, to script (macro) editing.

Multiple Document Interface (MDI)

Now you can open as many publications as you need and drag and drop text, stylesheets, and master pages between them. Each document window can be split to show different parts of your document in different views, or at different zoom levels. By reducing the zoom level, you can view multiple pages and chapters at the same time, allowing you to select text, frames, and graphic objects across facing pages.

Modeless cursors and dialogs [image] Intelligent tool changing

Modeless cursor operation means that you can select frames and graphic objects, type text, and edit tables without manually switching tools. Corel VENTURA senses the different types of objects you are working on and only requires you to change tools when you need to draw objects, edit nodes, or anchor frames.

Many dialog boxes are also modeless, meaning that you can leave them open while working on your documents, or open more than one dialog box at once. You can move modeless dialog boxes away from the document window, and return to them as necessary without re-executing menu commands. To experiment with different settings, you can use the Apply button to apply changes to your document without closing the dialog box.

VENTURA Libraries

VENTURA Libraries can hold text, pictures, graphic objects, stylesheets, tags, frames, chapters, OLE objects, and more. Once you create a VENTURA Library by clicking File> Library >New, you can drag and drop items between the VENTURA Library window and your publications. VENTURA Libraries can be shared between workgroups, or kept private by individual users. You can store network or local copies of files in VENTURA Libraries, and then incorporate the same text or illustrations in multiple publications.

Multiple pages view

Corel VENTURA's Zoom dialog box is useful for viewing multiple pages at a time. In addition, you can drag and drop frames between zoomed pages and chapters, select text across zoomed pages, and group frames and illustrations across zoomed pages.

VENTURA Configuration Manager

The VENTURA Configuration Manager sets up your working environment to suit the types of projects you work on most. There are two preset environments: one for creating short, design-intensive documents and another for producing long, structured documents. Each environment arranges the screen to give you quick access to the tools you'll use most and preselects the appropriate formatting mode.

You can modify the preset environments by customizing the menus, toolbars and shortcut key assignments or create your own environments. Once you've selected an environment, you can switch to another by ending the current session and restarting the Configuration Manager.

Customizable interface

The Customize dialog box is where you can make Corel VENTURA your personal workbench. Here, you can create and edit menus and toolbars, or assign new shortcut keys.

Using the Options dialog box in the Tool menu, you can change the color of workplace elements such as the drawing grid, guidelines, and frame borders. You can also customize elements like text conversions on import, global units of measurement, object selection and snapping sensitivity, pasteboard size, file backups, and so on.

Property Bars

Corel VENTURA's Property Bar changes automatically to display the tools you'll need for the current editing job. For example, select the base page frame, and alignment and frame column tools appear. Select a drawn frame, and the Property Bar displays frame selection and editing tools. If you click inside the base page frame or a selected drawn frame, the Property Bar displays text editing tools, and so on.

Scripting language (macros)

Corel VENTURA 7 includes Corel SCRIPT which allows you to automate complex or repetitive tasks. Scripts are computer programs that execute a series of Corel VENTURA 7 actions with a single command (in some applications they are called macros). You create scripts by recording your actions and keystrokes, or by using the Corel SCRIPT Editor to write more complex scripts. You can even create your own dialog boxes using the Corel SCRIPT language.

Multi-level Undo/Redo

You can use the Undo command to reverse as many as 99 recent edits. Click the [image] button on the toolbar to restore your work to its previous state, or click the down arrow next to it to display the Undo list and choose from the list of recent actions held in memory. You can set the number of levels of Undo in the Options dialog box.

The Redo command stores a list of any of the previous commands you've reversed with the Undo command. Use Redo to reverse Undo as necessary.

Note: The higher the Undo setting, the more memory required to hold the actions for recall.

Enhanced rulers

Corel VENTURA 7 features new units of measurement [image] inches decimal on both rulers and agates on the horizontal ruler.

You can show or hide the rulers, set different units of measure for each, change the zero points with the mouse or in the Ruler Properties dialog box, or display the rulers in large or small sizes.

Corel VENTURA's rulers are also interactive [image] you can add or remove tabs from the horizontal ruler with the mouse, change indents and margins, click the tab button [image] to change between different tab types (i.e., left, center, right, decimal), and right-click to display context menus. The width of the tabs and margins area changes based on the size of the active frame.

You can have the ruler update for each object selected by using "Current Frame," or if you want the ruler to have the '0' on the left margin, use "Page."

Autosaves and Backups

Corel VENTURA 7 can create backup copies of your documents whenever you save them, and automatically save your publications at regular intervals while you work.

 Related Topics


Electronic publishing (New features)
Electronic publishing

With Corel VENTURA 7, you now have the ability to publish "paperless" documents using the following electronic publishing options:

HTML publishing

Corel VENTURA gives you the option of publishing to the World Wide Web with the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML).

You can take an existing Corel VENTURA publication and publish it to the Web, or you can create a publication specifically for electronic publishing. Either way, each Corel VENTURA style tag will be mapped to an HTML tag.

Corel VENTURA can automatically translate the publication into an HTML document; the structure of this document will mirror the original structure as closely as HTML will allow. Or, you can customize the translation by manually mapping the Corel VENTURA style tags to HTML tags.

When you choose to publish a document to HTML, you can set the layout of your document, including borders, tables of contents, indexes, etc., by altering the settings available through the Publish to HTML dialog box.

Publishing to Corel Barista

Corel's Barista translation engine provides another way of publishing to the World Wide Web: using "applets," mini-applications written in the Java Programming Language. In Corel VENTURA 7, applets are simply portable applications that support WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) format, multiple columns, and complex fills.

By referencing these applets in an HTML document, a dynamic application is embedded in your publication. When a user accesses your HTML document, an applet is downloaded to their system, compiled with relevant local information, and runs locally.

This means that the applet is up-to-date, customized to the current user, and runs without the delays inherent with running a remote application (because it is running on the local machine).

Corel VENTURA allows you to publish your Corel VENTURA 7 document as a Java applet that enables a WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) copy of your publication. Free of HTML restrictions, your Corel VENTURA publication can have columns, complex fills, and look exactly like the paper version.

Publishing portable electronic documents

You create a portable document file by printing your publication to a file instead of a printer, using a portable document driver such as Novell Envoy, Adobe Acrobat, or Adobe Distiller to support hypertext links. Once it's in a portable format, the publication can be read using a reader utility that can be distributed free to users. And the portable document can be read on any system, regardless of whether it has the application, fonts, and pictures used to create the original document.

Readers can't edit portable document files, but they can annotate some files as well using Quick notes, Bookmarks, and personal hypertext links. Tables of contents and indexes are typically displayed in windows that are separate from the main document. When a reader clicks a chapter name or topic, they are instantly transported to the appropriate place in the publication. Cross-references, too, become hypertext links that let users jump from place to place in the document.

 Related Topics


Document structure (New features)
Document structure

Corel VENTURA now uses a single file format, although you can still keep text and picture files external. A single file format offers the following benefits:

Speed

The document formats as you view it, as opposed to previous versions that formatted the entire text file before loading. Therefore, if you are only making changes to page 3, Corel VENTURA will not load the entire document into memory, only up to page 3. In addition, the new file format offers you both internal and external file types. As a default, the single-file format will load much faster and bitmaps will refresh quickly.

When you open a previous-version publication, Corel VENTURA prompts you to save it with a new file name.

When you open the Corel VENTURA 7 version of your document, you can see how quickly you can load the document, and the load time does not increase significantly with publication size.

Easier file exchange with other users

By choosing to embed all items, you will have only one file to give to other users. If you do reference external items, you can pass all Corel VENTURA items around. When you open the file, Corel VENTURA checks the current directory and the paths used by the publication to locate files. Consequently, you no longer need to use Fixchp or CVPFix to fix publications and chapters moved using DOS or Windows copying operations.

The VENTURA Library can be used to store copies of files, chapters and the stylesheet you want a publication to reference. This gives you the flexibility of using the same text or chapter in multiple publications.

Finding and Replacing and Spell Checking entire document

With Corel VENTURA's new file format, you can find and replace text and formatting in all chapters in a document, not just the chapter you are currently working on. The same applies to checking spelling and grammar.

Support for very large files

Storing all items in a single-file format is necessary when publishing to CD-ROM and other electronic formats.

You can set a target byte size and be notified when the picture is too large to be included internally. For example, if you are creating a short document, you may want to embed all the pictures so you can pass a single Corel VENTURA file around to others.

For longer documents and magazines that require extremely large TIFF files, you could opt to reference external files. To edit your pictures outside Corel VENTURA and to make updating easy the next time you open the publication, you can keep the picture external as well.

Corel VENTURA also offers support for Hyperlinks and Bookmarks, which you can use to navigate through your document.

Multi-user access

The single file format allows for greater control and security in a multi-user environment. This is especially important for workgroup publishing.

You have the option to select passwords and read-only access for individual users. This extends to stylesheets, chapters and libraries.

Publication management controls available in the VENTURA Navigator

The VENTURA Navigator has everything you need to manage a publication. You can navigate through all the chapters in any publication by selecting the Go To command from the context menu [image] Corel VENTURA keeps all items internal, so their location is known at all times.

You can also use the Navigator to insert index entries.

You can export text for editing

If you prefer to edit text in your favorite word processor, you can take Corel VENTURA text back to that environment using the File/Export command.

 Related Topics


Document control and management (New features)
Document control and management

Corel VENTURA 7 offers you a faster and easier way to manage your documents.

Conditional tags

Paragraph tags, frames, tables, and ruling lines now support conditions. With conditions you can produce different versions of a document from one Corel VENTURA publication. When you enable a condition, the element (a paragraph, table, frame, etc.) is only visible when you set the publication's properties to match. Conditions are useful for producing multilingual documents or documents which contain sensitive information which should only be viewed by certain readers.

The VENTURA Navigator

Corel VENTURA 7 provides you with a powerful new tool for keeping your publication in perspective. With the VENTURA Navigator, you can view your document in its entirety, including chapters, tables of contents, indexes, illustrations, etc. By selecting one of these items and clicking on your right mouse button, you can create, control, and edit components of your publication without getting lost in the detail.

Access rights

In corporate workgroups, publications are often created, edited, and shared over networks by two or more people. Without careful management of the original files, two people could end up working on separate copies of a document at once, resulting in loss of work.

Corel VENTURA 7 eliminates this problem by providing user access controls. When one person has the network document checked out or password protected, other users are denied editing rights to the document.

Version control

With Corel VENTURA's version control software [image] Corel VERSIONS [image] you can archive different versions of the same document by using the File, Version Control, Archive Current command. Should you alter a document, and then want to restore an earlier version, you can then use Corel VERSIONS to retrieve an archived version. Corel VERSIONS also has controls for compressing archived copies.

Text search and retrieval

QuickFinder, Corel VENTURA's text search and retrieval feature, looks for files or text in files quickly by creating an alphabetical listing of every word in the files or folders you specify. QuickFinder includes components you can use to save search parameters and schedule searches at specified times.

Summaries

Corel VENTURA provides publication summary information [image] such as, Title, Subject, Author, Manager, Company, and so on [image] when you right-click any publication file name (*.VP) in the Windows Explorer or File Manager.

 Related Topics


Text editing and proofreading (New features)
Text editing and proofreading

Editing and proofreading your publication has never been easier. Read on for more information about the range of features offered by Corel VENTURA 7.

Text selection across pages

Corel VENTURA 7's support for scrolling between pages and selecting text across page breaks in either Page Layout or Copy Editor view makes editing your documents easier. Selecting text for cut and paste operations or formatting purposes in either view is now possible.

Find and replace enhancements

You can now search for tabs, returns, and combinations of text and special items. You can also replace text, tags, and attributes of text. The Find/Replace dialog box is available through the Edit menu.

Corel VENTURA's new file structure enables Find and Replace throughout multi-chapter publications as required. Find and Replace searches for data through all chapters in the current publication.

Improved Copy Editor

New in Corel VENTURA 7, the Copy Editor allows you to print the current page or publication, edit text in captions, show dots for spaces, turn codes (such as symbol codes or cross-references) on or off or, change the color in which they display.

Spelling and grammar checking

As with Find and Replace, Corel VENTURA's new file structure enables spell-checking throughout your document. You can spell check selected text, the current file, chapter, or your entire publication.

The new International Proofreader provides grammar checking using fully customizable grammatical rules in a wide range of languages. You can also have multiple personal dictionaries and check the spelling of text in different languages at the same time.

 Related Topics


Typography (New features)
Typography

Corel VENTURA's typographic controls provide greater flexibility and control, making text formatting faster and easier.

Character tags

Character tags are another new feature of Corel VENTURA 7. You use them in the same way that you use paragraph tags, but they apply to selected text only. Character tags support many of the same features as paragraph tags, including font, color, language, conditions, and hyphenation. As in previous versions of Corel VENTURA, you can also apply formatting to text without using tags.

More tags per stylesheet

The 128-tag limit for stylesheets has been eliminated in Corel VENTURA 7. In fact, the number of tags you can create is limited only by memory.

Endnotes and footnote enhancements

Corel VENTURA supports both footnotes and, now for the first time, endnotes. From the Insert menu, click either Footnote or Endnote to make your choice. In the Chapter Properties dialog box, you can also choose from preset number styles or custom markers, open the Text Attributes dialog box and change the format of all footnote references, or convert footnotes to endnotes and vice versa.

Also new in version 7, you can have multiple paragraphs in each note if required.

New tracking and kerning controls

Tracking and kerning controls are much more extensive and flexible in Corel VENTURA 7. Pair Kerning and tracking defaults can be set and edited in the Tracking and Kerning dialog box. You can select which type of tracking applies for the current paragraph (ranging from Very Tight to Very Loose) from the Property Bar or the Defaults page of the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box (Format menu).

Improved hyphenation control

Hyphenation controls now include settings for minimum word size and the minimum number of letters before and after a hyphen. In addition, you can specify the number of successive hyphens in a word or use third-party hyphenators. For more information on third-party hyphenators, type Third Party Hyphenators for VENTURA in the Corel VENTURA online Help index.

Enhanced ruling lines

Settings for ruling lines now include drop shadows and controls to add the lines outside, inside or straddling the frame.

In the Ruling Lines dialog box, you can apply ruling line presets (e.g., bottom-left shadow, top-left and bottom-right, etc.), and customize and save your own presets.

Tabs

Corel VENTURA 7 supports up to 64 tabs per paragraph and also supports tabs in justified text.

Typographic quote conversion

With Corel VENTURA 7, you can select the style of typographic quotation marks substituted for straight quotes on import. You can choose the English, German, or French styles, or define your own custom substitutions. This feature is available from the Options dialog box. Automatic conversion of straight quotes during editing is controlled in the Type Assist dialog box (Tools menu).

Paragraph rotation

You can rotate paragraphs to any angle using the Paragraph Properties, Spacing dialog box, an improvement over the previous 90, 180, 270, or 360 degrees. Rotated paragraphs also can be edited while rotated more easily.

Word underline

In addition to the single and double underlining available previously, Corel VENTURA 7 features word underlining [image] choose this setting and all the words in the selected paragraph will be underlined.

Forced justification

This type of justification adds enough space between words in the last line of each paragraph to stretch between the line and between the margins.

Hanging punctuation

Hanging punctuation [image] punctuation which hangs over the edge of the paragraph margin [image] is often used in advertisements and may be desirable in business documents, too. In Corel VENTURA 7, you can apply this effect from the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box (Align tab).

Absolute "Y" Position

Absolute "Y" Position, used mainly for publishing from a database, ensures that your tag appears in the same vertical position every time it is used.

Breaks

You can now keep a paragraph together with the one preceding or following it, providing greater control over document layout.

Drop caps and bullets

New additions for drop caps and bullets include more presets [image] available from the Tag Properties and Paragraph Properties dialog box (Effects tab) [image] and multiple drop cap letters.

Among the newly developed presets, you can indent the first line only on bullets, use asterisk or check mark bullets, or create multiple-letter drop caps.

Font outlines and backgrounds

While previous versions supported color for fonts, Corel VENTURA 7 offers the ability to apply color backgrounds to text and to make the background stretch to cover the entire column as well. You can also apply color to your text using the Most Recently Used (MRU) Color Palette in the standard toolbar.

Portable fonts

You can use the new TrueDoc and PANOSE options to circulate your publications for viewing, editing, and printing, and know that formatting will be correct even if the recipients don't have the correct fonts. TrueDoc stores font information with your publication, and recreates fonts on the fly if they are not on a user's system. PANOSE font matching substitutes similar fonts if the original fonts are unavailable.

Text Before and Text After

This feature makes it easy to add information or special characters automatically before or after text formatted with specific paragraph or character tags. You can use this feature to create special notices or highlights for some text.

 Related Topics


File Import/Export (New features)
File Import/Export

Importing and exporting files is easy using the following new features in Corel VENTURA 7:

Importing

Corel VENTURA 7 offers an updated set of all import and export filters, as well as the array of completely new import filters listed below. You can open Microsoft, WordPerfect, Ami Professional, and Word Star files with much of the character formatting, alignment, and spacing intact.

Externally referenced files

Besides using the Import command to incorporate text and pictures into your Corel VENTURA documents, you can set options on import that create external references to large pictures. Using external references to large picture files helps to minimize the file size of your publications. Click Options on the Import dialog to view the following Import options.

•	Link To High Resolution File For Output Using OPI: Choose this option when importing TIFF, DCS, CPT, PP, CALS, or CT files if you want the pictures handled as Open Prepress Interface (OPI) images. When your service bureau receives your print file, the OPI server substitutes high-resolution images for low-resolution images.

Linking is a good choice when referencing shared picture files, or when you want to keep the file size smaller.

•	Embedded: When you embed a picture on import using this option, Corel VENTURA retrieves the picture file and displays the file whenever you open the document page on which it appears. You can resize the picture using Corel VENTURA's tools.

Embedding is a good choice when the imported information is static, or when you want to move the file around, because you won't have to include any external files in your copying operations.

Note:	Pictures imported as external references do not behave as OLE objects but can be edited by closing the publication containing them, opening the file in the original program, and making the changes there. The Format, Bitmap commands are not available for externally referenced pictures.

New text import filters

•	Corel WordPerfect (*.WP*)

•	Corel Quattro Pro (*.WQ, *.WB*)

•	Microsoft Word (*.DOC)

•	Ami Professional (*.SAM)

•	Legacy (*.LEG)

•	Word Star (*.WS*)

New picture import filters

•	CorelDRAW Compressed (*.CDX)

•	Corel CMX Compressed (*.CPX)

•	Corel Presentation Exchange 6.0 (*.CMX)

•	Corel PHOTO-PAINT (*.CPT)

•	Corel Metafile (*.CMF)

•	CorelMOVE (*.CMV, *.MLB)

•	Kodak Photo-CDs (*.PCD)

•	MET Metafile (*.WMF)

•	Enhanced Windows Metafile (*.EMF)

•	Desktop Color Separation (*.DCS)

•	Windows 3.x/NT Bitmaps, Cursors, and Icons (*.ICO, *.CUR, *.EXE)

•	OS/2 bitmaps (*.BMP)

•	Picture Publisher (*.PP4)

•	Adobe Photoshop (*.PSD)

•	MacPaint Bitmaps (*.MAC)

•	Wavelet Compressed Bitmaps (*.WVL)

•	CALS Compressed Bitmaps (*.CAL)

Exporting

Previous versions of Corel VENTURA supported exporting text with the Rename File command. This has been replaced with the more standard Export command on the File menu. Rather than supporting export to a wide range of specific word processor formats, you can export your text in ANSI, ASCII and ASCII 8-Bit, and Rich Text Format files. You can export text with or without Corel VENTURA codes by clicking Exporting Without Corel VENTURA Mark-up in the Export dialog box.

EPS files

To export other page elements besides text, you can export the contents of any page as a graphic to an Encapsulated PostScript (.EPS) file using the Save Page As EPS command. Saving a page as an EPS file ensures that your fonts and fills remain constant and is a useful technique when preparing files for a service bureau. See Related Topics for information about service bureaus.

You can also use the EPS file as a scaleable "screen shot" of your page, by exporting the page as an EPS file, and then importing it as an image. The EPS file is not editable, nor can text in the EPS file be edited.

EPS file formats may not import properly using the All Files (*.*) import option. To import them, choose the EPS placeable import filter.

Publishing to other formats

You can also convert your Corel VENTURA publications to portable formats such as HTML, Adobe Acrobat, Novell Envoy, and Corel Barista for electronic exchange. See Related Topics for more information about these types of special documents.

Note: Because each format handles information in a text or graphics file differently, it's not always possible to translate precisely the contents of one format to another. The amount of variation depends on the object and the format used to import or export it.

 Related Topics


Page layout (New features)
Page layout

New page layout features in Corel VENTURA 7 include master pages, preset frame shapes, and improved control over text flow, guidelines, object grouping, ruling lines, and headers and footers.

Master Pages

Just as tags contain the formatting for text, frames, and ruling lines in a publication, master pages contain the formatting for the pages in your documents. Use master pages to set up headers and footers, repeating frames, and page margins, sizes, and orientation. Corel VENTURA creates a single default master page for all new documents automatically. Any publication can have many master pages, and, for publications with facing pages, Corel VENTURA creates default facing left and right master pages. For publications created in previous versions, Corel VENTURA creates a new master page for every chapter and inserted page.

Header/footer enhancements

In Corel VENTURA 7, you can create headers and footers in either page layout or master page view. Click Page, Enable Header or Enable Footer to display headers and footers. When you click inside a header or footer frame, the Header/Footer toolbar appears. You can type or edit text directly in the header or footer areas, and make changes to the margins, spacing, and other formatting (e.g., fills, outlines, ruling lines) directly.

Changes you make in Page Layout view are treated as overrides to those created on the associated master page. Changes to headers and footers made in Master Page view are reflected on all other pages based on that master page.

When using the First, Current or Last Match feature to create a header or footer, VENTURA will expand the header/footer frame vertically to accommodate paragraphs containing page breaks. Because the frame didn't expand in previous versions, some text in the paragraph didn't show or print.

Enhanced text flow controls

You can flow text inside and around drawn frames or between linked frames. You can also flow text from right to left with drawn frames, or from the base page frame to a drawn frame and back. For example, you can link text frames so that text flows from a back page forward (e.g., from page 35 to page 25).

Corel VENTURA 7 also provides greater control over the number of columns text should span. In the past Corel VENTURA had column-wide and frame-wide spans. Now, you can set the exact number of columns a paragraph should span.

In addition, text can flow around drawn frames in the following ways:

•	above and below

•	across (text jumps across the frame from left to right)

•	down the left side

•	down the right side

•	down the left side, then the right side

•	none (text flows over or under the frame, depending on its place in the stacking order)

Support has also been improved for frame captions [image] you can now add captions both above and below and to the left and right sides of frames at the same time.

Grids and Guidelines

To assist you with the layout and design process, Corel VENTURA now provides optional non-printing grids and guidelines. Guidelines give you a reference for placing objects in your document, while a grid gives you the option of having all objects "snap to the grid," for automatic alignment.

You can Shift-Click on the ruler to drag guidelines directly onto the page. Setting up a grid, and adding precisely positioned guidelines can be done through the Grid/Guidelines Setup dialog box in the Page menu; you can also access this dialog box by double-clicking on the grid or a guideline. You can create different grid setups for different pages by selecting the base page frame and changing the grid properties. Moreover, you can set document-wide guidelines and grids using the master page.

You can set the color and frequency of these alignment aids, and store the settings in a master page. The color of both the Grids and Guidelines can be set in the Options dialog, which is available from the Tools menu.

With Corel VENTURA, you can snap to Guidelines and/or Columns and/or Interline. You can also snap to Grids only.

Object grouping

Corel VENTURA 7 gives you the option of grouping frames and graphic objects. By using the Group command (Edit menu), you can keep two or more selected items together. When you click any object in the group, all objects are selected and changes made will be consistent throughout the group. Use Alt+Click to select individual objects in groups for formatting without ungrouping them.

Vertical rules between columns

The maximum number of vertical rules [image] the lines between columns [image] has been increased to 8. Also, as with other Ruling Lines, you can now use the Outline Pen dialog box to change their color, width, line-ending shape, and calligraphy.

 Related Topics


Pictures (New features)
Pictures

Since pictures can have a significant impact on the overall effect of your publication, Corel VENTURA offers an array of new and powerful capabilities to make your illustrations picture perfect.

Resampling and cropping

Corel VENTURA gives you the option to resample a picture before or after importing it into your publication. With this new feature, you can change the size or resolution of an image prior to import.

Likewise, you can crop a picture to fit a given space or to remove unwanted portions either before or after importing it into your publication. Corel VENTURA will prompt you to specify the settings for the new picture size if you crop an image prior to import. To crop a picture in Corel VENTURA, simply press and hold the CTRL key and move the picture within its frame to the desired size.

OPI importing

Now that Corel offers Open Pre-Press Interface (OPI) support, you can have your images scanned on a high-end scanner by a service bureau and use the low resolution master in Corel VENTURA. When a service bureau scans an image, you are given a low resolution of the scan and it keeps the high resolution plates. Using the low resolution image while your publication is in the draft stage decreases the amount of time Corel VENTURA takes to draw the picture on your screen as well as reducing the size of the document. When you send your publication to the service bureau for final imaging to film, the high resolution plates are substituted at print time.

Direct import of PHOTO CD images

Corel VENTURA offers a selection of standard Photo CD image sizes [image] from wallet to poster size.

New bitmap conversion filters

Corel VENTURA offers dialogs similar to those available in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. By selecting a bitmap and then using the Bitmap menu command under Format, you can alter the brightness, resolution, orientation, and color format of your bitmap.

Rotate picture independently of frame

With this release, you can rotate both a frame and its contents, as well as rotate the contents independent of its frame. You can even rotate the contents of a base page frame when the base page frame is selected.

Size frame to picture

Simply right-click and choose Size Frame to Object to restore a picture to its actual size.

Editable vector graphics

Vector graphics, also referred to as object-based graphics or line art, represent shapes as a series of mathematically defined curves and line objects.

Corel VENTURA offers a new feature that enables you to add enhancements to a wide range of vector graphic formats, such as CDR, CMX, or WPG. By converting the vector image into shapes, you can edit each object individually; you can rotate, resize, or add fills and outlines to any one of the vector image objects.

 Related Topics


Frames (New features)
Frames

Frames are tools that you can use to hold text, pictures, tables, color, and texture fills, making it easy to place text and pictures anywhere on the page. Corel VENTURA offers six basic frame types:

•	Drawn frames: frames that you draw with the Frame tool.

•	Base page frames: frames that contain the main text of documents, so that the text flows continuously between pages.

•	Header frames: frames that appear at the top of the page and provide information about the publication. They are placed on the master page and adjust automatically to contain text.

•	Footer frames: frames that appear at the bottom of the page and provide information about the publication. They are placed on the master page and adjust automatically to contain text.

•	Caption frames: frames that are created to add text to a frame, or to identify its contents.

•	Footnote frames: frames that hold footnote text.

In this release, Corel VENTURA has added more powerful features to its frames to give you better page layout and design capabilities than ever before.

Corel VENTURA 7 has added the following new features to this powerful tool:

Preset frame shapes

Using Corel VENTURA's Frame tool flyout, you can choose from a variety of preset frame shapes, including the new star, bubble, left and right trapezoid, L90, and L270. You can even change the shape of an existing frame to a preset frame shape. This method is particularly useful when you want to breathe new life into an existing publication.

Rotation

You can rotate drawn frames with or independently of their contents. By default, frames and their contents rotate together. You can change this Option setting so that when the frame rotates, its contents do not. You can even rotate the contents of a base page frame (but not the base page itself) when the base page frame is selected.

Text flow

You can create a number of different effects simply by changing the way that text flows across the page. With Corel VENTURA, you can choose from a variety of different text flows, such as left to right, right to left, around frames, between frames, behind frames, and across frames. You can even flow text from back to front [image] for example, from page 4 to page 2.

Using another powerful new feature, you can create some spectacular effects by flowing text from one frame to the next. After you have imported text into a frame, a small arrow will appear at the bottom of the frame, indicating that the text continues (the arrow will appear only when the frame is selected). Once you click on the arrow to change it to a frame cursor, the next frame you draw will have the same frame properties (such as shape or imported pictures) as the first frame, and the text will continue automatically.

Reshape

You can also reshape drawn frames by converting them to curves and changing their shapes with the Node edit tool. Regardless of the frame you use, the Node edit tool enables you to alter its shape by moving the nodes [image] which are points along a path that defines the frame's shape [image] to a different position. Moreover, the Node edit tool allows you to do more than just reshape open and closed paths: you can also add, delete, join, split, auto-reduce, and convert nodes.

Selecting and grouping

You can group frames and graphic objects together so that when you select one object, all objects within that group are selected. This feature is helpful when you need to move or edit several objects at once [image] the commands you apply will affect all objects in the group. Use Alt+Click to select individual objects in groups for formatting without ungrouping them.

Moving and sizing

Corel VENTURA offers a number of features that can help you make your illustrations picture perfect. For example, the Nudge feature enables you to move an object one increment at a time by pressing the Arrow keys. Corel VENTURA also provides the option to change the nudge distance [image] the distance a selected object moves when you press one of the Arrow keys [image] both to an amount and a unit of measure that you specify.

The Frame/Graphic Alignment toolbar gives you the ability to align frames and graphic objects relative to each other or the page. With this powerful feature, you can select one or more objects and use the available options to align them as needed.

Improved anchoring

Compared to previous versions, this release of Corel VENTURA has doubled the number of frame anchor positioning options, alignment options, and baseline shift options. Moreover, you no longer have to associate the frame with the frame anchor when anchoring a frame [image] Corel VENTURA automatically does it for you.

More captions

Corel VENTURA has added two new positions to the caption frame: Above and Below, and Left and Right.

More flexible outside margin settings

This release of Corel VENTURA offers you the ability to specify individual settings for each outside margin in the Frame Properties dialog box. This way, you can set the left outside margin to 2.1, the right to 4.0, the top to 3.6, and the bottom to 1.1.

Enhanced rotation

Corel VENTURA now has the ability to rotate a frame independent of its contents, or rotate both the contents and the frame simultaneously. Moreover, you can change a frame's center of rotation so that it rotates around a point that you specify.

Skewing

With the new skewing feature, you can slant a frame to the left or right by dragging a double arrow to a new position.

Text and picture in single frame

Now that Corel VENTURA supports fills, text, pictures, and tables in the same frame, you can load a picture into the frame, import or type text, and add color, gradients and patterns.

Tip

•	Use Corel VENTURA's unique ability to convert any drawn graphic into a frame [image] without having to redraw it.

 Related Topics


Tables (New features)
Tables

Corel VENTURA's tables features make it easy to create new tables, and import and edit existing ones. In addition to context menus and fast, industry-standard keyboard shortcuts, the table editing features include the following:

•	import tables from the leading word processing, database, and spreadsheet packages

•	automatically create tables from databases and spreadsheets

•	place pictures in cells

•	type multiple paragraphs in cells

•	insert footnotes, cross-references, and index entries in cells

•	skew the left column and/or top row and skew the text in already skewed rows or columns

•	drag and drop data between cells or from tables in the document window, and drag and drop cells to create new rows, columns, or cells

•	sort data in columns. Corel VENTURA's Sorting feature rearranges the data in your table alphabetically, numerically, or by date. You can sort the data within a single column or sort the entire table on a row-by-row basis

•	use auto-fill to enter data automatically

•	perform math and other spreadsheet functions. By placing a formula in a cell, you can perform simple or complex calculations on the data within your table. For simple formulas, such as SUM or AVERAGE, you can type the parameters of the formula into an entry box using the Insert>Formula command. For complex formulas, however, use the Function wizard to guide you in choosing the elements (functions, numeric format, etc.) that comprise a formula.

•	select from a wide array of formatting operations, including changing cell margins and border styles, merging and splitting cells, skewing the top row, and shading, coloring, and adding preset fills to cells

 Related Topics


Tools (New features)
Drawing and editing tools

The arrival of Corel VENTURA 7 brings a whole new set of specialized drawing and editing tools. You can find these tools in Corel VENTURA's Toolbox. With this kind of capability, you can create and manipulate pictures and text to add your own artistic flair.

Marquee select tool

You can use the Marquee tool to select multiple frames and graphics simultaneously.

Enhanced Frame tool

With Corel VENTURA's frame tool, you can choose from a variety of preset frame shapes, including the new star, bubble, left and right trapezoid, L90, and L270.

Enhanced Drawing tools

The connect-the-dots style of the Bezier drawing tool is fantastic for creating a path for Artistic text or drawing lines and curves with precision. Use the Freehand tool to draw lines and curves as you would using a pencil and paper. With the Callout tool, you can add labels to your illustrations, complete with a callout line pointing to the picture it is referring to.

Node edit tool

The Node edit tool is used to change the shape of a frame, by changing the position and type of nodes. With a curved frame, the Node edit tool allows you to add a node, and then select and drag the new node to re-shape the frame. With a rectangular frame, the Node edit tool allows you to select a node and drag it, to create rounded corners. You can also use the Node edit tool to carve pie-shaped wedges out of an elliptical frame. By converting a frame to curves, you can use the Nodes to create any shape.

Frame anchor tool

With the new Frame anchor tool, you no longer have to associate the frame with the frame anchor as you did in previous versions. In addition, Corel VENTURA has doubled the number of frame anchor positioning options, alignment options, and baseline shift options for more flexibility.

Artistic text

Artistic text is another powerful new drawing feature that enables you to create text that behaves like a graphic object, but remains editable. You can create hundreds of different special effects using Artistic text [image] ways that are not possible with paragraph text: you can fit Artistic text to a curved path and wrap it around objects. Altering the characteristics of individual letters can be done by converting the Artistic text to curves, and using the Node edit tool to make the desired changes. For a 3D effect, create the text design in Corel DEPTH, and then import it into Corel VENTURA.

Note

•	Once you convert Artistic text to curves, it cannot be edited as text.

 Related Topics


Printing (New features)
Printing

Print styles

With Corel VENTURA 7's new print styles feature, you can save time and effort when preparing your publication for printing. Rather than reselecting the appropriate options every time you print your document, you can now store printing settings [image] such as proofing options, and layout settings [image] in a Corel VENTURA print style and save it under a name that you specify. At print time, simply apply the style. You can reuse that print style as often and with as many publications as you like. Corel VENTURA also offers the ability to edit existing print styles and create new styles from old ones.

For example, you can create two print styles: one that will print your documents in draft form (e.g., graphics turned off, no color, etc.), and another when you are ready to print the final version. This way, you can use the draft print style to conserve printing time while a document is under construction, and use the final print style when a document is complete.

Troubleshooting is an added benefit to using print styles: you can see the options you set rather than trying to retrace your steps when a print job fails. In a workgroup environment, this feature can provide consistent print jobs among co-workers.

Quick Print

Corel VENTURA has also added a new feature called Quick Print. Located in the File menu, this feature allows you to print your document quickly, bypassing the sophisticated printing features [image] such as separation, or trapping [image] which increase print time. When you're ready to proofread or check for line-endings in your document, Quick Print will print your document as it appears on the screen, complete with pictures.

High-fidelity color

With the new support for high-fidelity (HiFi) color printing, Corel VENTURA offers you a wider range of colors than ever before. HiFi color expands the range of color achievable with CMYK colorants using additional process inks. These extra colorants yield more vivid colors and enable you to print continuous tone images with greater depth. Corel VENTURA uses the PANTONE Hexachrome system (a six-color process system that employs CMYK) plus orange and green inks to define HiFi colors.

Whether you are creating a poster, a brochure, or an advertisement, Corel VENTURA's new HiFi color printing can make a world of difference.

 Related Topics


Database publishing (New features)
Database publishing

Corel VENTURA 7 also offers the latest in database publishing technology. When it comes to the complex job of transforming countless rows and columns of database information into an organized and visually appealing publication, Corel DataBase Publisher has the tools you need.

Corel DataBase Publisher still offers you all the previous capabilities that have made Corel VENTURA and Corel DataBase Publisher a incomparable database publishing team. Using Corel DataBase Publisher, you can still pre-tag your data with Corel VENTURA formatting attributes, create index and footnote references, as well as insert pictures into your publication.

This release also offers an exciting, new feature [image] you can now publish your data to the World Wide Web! This release of Corel DataBase Publisher supports the Common Gateway Interface (CGI), the Java Programming Language, and the latest releases of the following data sources:

•	Microsoft® Access®

•	Microsoft® Excel®

•	Microsoft® FoxPro®

•	Corel dBASE®

•	Lotus® 123®

•	Borland Paradox®

•	Oracle®

•	Microsoft® SQL server

•	any ODBC SQL compliant server

•	text files in fixed width or delimited format

We've even added a new user-interface, 32-bit processing, as well as the ability to batch process recipes and open multiple instances of Corel DataBase Publisher [image] all to help you work faster. And with the new Corel DataBase Publisher Wizard, publishing to Corel VENTURA is easier than ever.

Moreover, Corel DataBase Publisher still offers you its powerful record selection, sorting, and formatting features:

•	record selection criteria can be conditional, linked, exclusive, or inclusive

•	standard and user-defined sort criteria

•	user-definable dictionaries for data modification, custom sorting, capitalization, substitution, and conversion

•	versatile field position and layout controls for headings and subtotals, with counts, averages, and other summary functions available

Whether you want to publish your data to Corel VENTURA or the Web, you can use Corel DataBase Publisher to create just about anything, such as catalogs, up-to-the-minute mutual fund and stock reports, or home inventory lists for insurance purposes. Best of all, you don't have to have a degree in computer programming to use it. Fast, simple, and automated [image] Corel DataBase Publisher is the answer to all your database publishing needs.

 Related Topics


Recordings, macros, and Corel SCRIPT (New features)
Recordings, macros, and Corel SCRIPT

Corel VENTURA 7, like Corel PHOT0-PAINT 6 and other 32-bit Corel applications, includes Corel's macro language Corel SCRIPT. Corel SCRIPT can be used to automate repetitive and complex tasks, and to customize the way VENTURA works.

The terms "macro" and "script" are interchangeable [image] both describe a computer program recorded or written in the Corel SCRIPT programming language. Corel SCRIPT is a programming language designed for non-programmers.

Recordings

By using Corel VENTURA's command recording capabilities, you can store your actions in VENTURA in a special area of memory called the "recording." A recording can then be played back in Corel VENTURA as a single command. This feature is most useful when you're frequently repeating the same task such as opening the same dialog box and resetting it to the same values.

Scripts

Since recordings only exist until you end the current Corel VENTURA session or create another recording, you can save your recordings as scripts. Essentially, scripts are text-based files that list commands that instruct VENTURA to perform a specified task. If you use a script often enough, you may want to assign it to a keystroke, add it to your menus, or turn it into a button on the toolbar. If you find that you no longer require a script, you can discard it.

Corel SCRIPT Programming language

The commands listed in a script are part of the Corel SCRIPT Programming language. Two distinct sets of instructions make up the Corel SCRIPT programming language: Corel SCRIPT application commands and functions, and Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions.

Application commands instruct VENTURA to perform specified actions. For example, a command may instruct VENTURA to open or close a document. Functions ask questions about the status of Corel VENTURA or the opened documents. For example, a function may ask VENTURA about a document's page size.

Programming statements and functions are derived from traditional BASIC programming language dialects. If you're already familiar with a version of BASIC, you'll find the Corel SCRIPT programming language easy to read and understand. If you've never programmed using BASIC, you'll be happy to know that BASIC is one of the easiest languages to learn.

Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions send instructions or perform actions that aren't part of VENTURA. For example, Corel SCRIPT programming statements can be used to display a custom dialog box, include flow control statements and constructs such as loops.

Corel SCRIPT Editor

Since programming statements cannot be recorded in a VENTURA recording session, you must write them into a script. You can write these non-recordable commands by using the Corel SCRIPT Editor. The Corel SCRIPT Editor is similar to a standard text editor, but it features special tools to modify and debug scripts. You can also use it create and design custom dialog boxes to be used in your scripts.

Auto scripts

In addition to assigning scripts to the menu, a toolbar button, or shortcut keystrokes, you can trigger the script execution when certain events happen in a Corel VENTURA session. These scripts are called auto scripts. For example, you can initiate a script that runs the spell checker before a document can print.

Scripts and wizards included with VENTURA

Included with Corel VENTURA 7are sample scripts and wizards. Wizards automate complicated and time-consuming tasks by asking you questions from dialog boxes, and then using your answers to create, layout, and format a Corel VENTURA document automatically. Since wizards are created using the Corel SCRIPT programming language, think of them as sophisticated scripts. You can use these script and wizards as they are, or you can modify them to better suit your own needs, or use them as templates for writing your own scripts.

 Related Topics


Third-party development for VENTURA (New features)
Third-party development for VENTURA

Corel VENTURA 7 introduces the following features for third-party developers who wants to extend and customize VENTURA's rich feature set.

Corel SCRIPT Executables

Corel SCRIPT 7 introduces a new feature that compiles your scripts into executable program files. Compiling your scripts into executables not only speeds up their run-time, but allows you, the developer, to hide the programming code that has created the script.

Corel Add-ons

You can use the programming environment you are most familiar with such as Corel SCRIPT, Pascal, FORTRAN, C, or C++ to add your own compiled software modules to Corel VENTURA. These software modules are called Corel Add-ons and are essentially special Windows DLLs (Dynamic Linked Libraries) with a CAO extension that have access to the Corel VENTURA application programming interface (API). Included with Corel VENTURA is a sample CAO file and the files that were used to create it.

Corel Barista Software Developer's Kit (SDK)

Barista is technology that harnesses the power of Java to produce Web documents that look vertically identical to VENTURA documents. The Corel Barista SDK included with VENTURA allows you to build the same Java-based publishing capabilities into your own products. The SDK which comes with documentation in HTML format, is in the Barista folder on CD #2.

OLE Automation

OLE Automation is an integration standard that allows applications to expose their programmable objects, so that other applications can control them. Exposing an object means an application makes the scripting or macro commands that control it available to other programming applications. The exposed commands become an extension of the controlling programming language.

Corel VENTURA is an OLE Automation enabled application that can be controlled by other OLE Automation applications through its Corel SCRIPT application commands. For example, you can use Microsoft Visual Basic, Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications, and most versions of C++ to control VENTURA.

Hyphenation dictionaries for Corel

You can create custom hyphenation dictionaries to supplement those that are supplied with Corel VENTURA 7. For example, you may want to make hyphenation dictionaries for languages not supplied with Corel  VENTURA or specialized words sets such as medical hyphenation dictionaries. Corel VENTURA hyphenation dictionaries are Windows DLL files (with a VPH extension).

 Related Topics


SGML authoring (New features)
SGML authoring

Until recently, implementing SGML involved custom programming to develop document type definitions (DTDs) and formatting models. Powerful UNIX workstations were needed. And because content and formatting were separate, SGML authoring tools were typically not WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get), making widespread adoption of SGML difficult.

With Corel VENTURA, you can now import SGML documents. Also, Corel VENTURA now includes a Corel VENTURA Add-On (S2V7.CAO), Corel Visual DTD (a DTD builder), InContext (an SGML authoring tool), Corel VENTURA VLR Editor (a "layout designer"), and Corel WordPerfect with its SGML component.

The VENTURA Add-On (S2V7.CAO) provides the main interface for the SGML Import functionality of Corel VENTURA 7. It assists the user in creating named groupings of the files necessary to import SGML documents of different types. S2V7.CAO includes a wizard for SGML neophytes from which the DTD compiler and VLR Editor may be launched. The .LGC (compiled DTD), the template Corel VENTURA publication, and the .VLR file can be grouped together and given an appropriate "document type" name for later use.

With Corel Visual DTD, you can create your own DTDs, which are displayed in the form of tree structures. Once you've created your DTDs or adopted industry-standard DTDs, you can use them in either InContext or the SGML component of Corel WordPerfect to create, edit, and modify SGML documents. Before you import an SGML document into Corel VENTURA, you use the Corel VENTURA VLR Editor to match up the SGML tags with Corel VENTURA tags. Then you can import your SGML documents into Corel VENTURA and take advantage of its sophisticated layout capabilities to publish them.

Because Corel VENTURA has traditionally linked a document's structure and appearance, it can easily incorporate the power of an SGML document into its own WYSIWYG environment.

If you installed the SGML component, you can access S2V7.CAO from the Corel Add-ons dialog box by clicking Tools, Add-ons. To access the online Help for the SGML authoring tools, double-click S2V7 in the Corel Add-ons dialog box, select SGMLImport, and click Run. Online Help can then be accessed from the Help button in the Import SGML dialog box.

If you did not install the SGML component, you will not be able to access the SGML online Help. If you wish to install the SGML authoring tools, you can find the SGML components in the SGML folder on CD#1 of the Corel VENTURA 7 installation CDs.


Corel VENTURA 7


Corel VENTURA 7


Fills [image] You can apply uniform, gradient, bitmap, vector, and texture fills to table cells using the Fill tool. For uniform fills, you can also use the MRU palette at the top of your screen. All Color Palettes and color models can be used to create fill colors.


Auto-Fill command [image] VENTURA now auto-fills table cells with days, months, numbers, and series. Enter two or more items in two table cells (e.g., Monday, Tuesday), and then select a range of cells to fill (including the first two cells).


Formulas [image] COREL VENTURA 7 supports 200 spreadsheet functions that allow you to perform calculations within tables. Use the Function Wizard to add functions to selected cells, and when your values change, use the Recalculate button on the Table Property Bar to update your table. You can also import spreadsheets as VENTURA tables [image] any functions supported by VENTURA will remain intact.


Pictures [image] The Frame Anchor tool makes it easy for you to anchor pictures in table cells. Simply select the frame with the Frame Anchor tool, drag your cursor to a cell or paragraph, and click to insert the frame anchor.


Corel VENTURA 7


Rectangles [image] Select a rectangle with the Node Edit tool and drag one of the corner nodes along the rectangle's outline. As you drag, the corner nodes divides into two nodes with a round corner forming between them. The further you drag, the rounder the corners become.

If you prefer to make your rectangle an irregular shape, convert it to curves and use the Node Edit tool to shape it.


Bezier Curves [image] Corel VENTURA 7 lets you create smooth curves with precision. Using a connect-the-dots style of drawing, you specify the start and end points of the line or curve you want to draw. Corel VENTURA 7 then connects these points to create a Bezier Curve.


Ellipses [image] Select an ellipse with the Node Edit tool and drag the node at the top or bottom of the ellipse. As you drag, the node divides into two nodes with the arc or pie wedge forming in between. Keep your cursor outside the ellipse to create an arc, or inside the ellipse to create a pie wedge.


Types of nodes [image] Select a node on a frame or graphic object with the Node Edit tool and use the buttons on the Property Bar to change the node to a cusp or to make it smooth or symmetrical. You can also convert curve nodes to line nodes and break a closed path into an open path at the selected node.


Corel VENTURA 7


Grid [image] Grids make it easy to size and align objects and tool and can help you create a uniform layout. You can customize the grid frequency and display using the Grids & Guidelines dialog box. To save time, you can also make frames and graphic objects snap to the grid.


Guidelines [image] Non-printing guidelines are a great alignment tool and can help you create a uniform layout. Create your own guideline layout using the Grids & Guidelines dialog box or by holding down the SHIFT key and dragging guidelines from the ruler. To save time, you can also make frames and graphic objects snap to the guidelines.


Corel VENTURA 7


Drawing tools [image] VENTURA's built-in drawing tools let you create custom designs for your publications. You can use VENTURA's entire range of fills and outlines on any graphic object, and edit the objects' shapes with the Node Edit tool.


Polygon tool [image] The Polygon tool allows you to draw multi-sided objects such as triangles and pentagons. You can change the shape of polygons and other shapes using the Node Edit tool. To set the number of sides on the polygon, select the graphic and press ALT + ENTER to open the Object Properties dialog box.


Marquee tool [image] The Marquee tool makes it easy for you to select multiple objects and frames. Once the items are selected you can group, move, resize, rotate, skew, fill, and outline them.


Convert To Curves [image] To make your frame or graphic an irregular shape, use the Convert To Curves command on the Property Bar or on the Edit menu. Then, select the Node Edit tool and drag the nodes around the frame or graphic to change the shape.


Node Edit [image] Use the Node Edit tool to reshape objects and frames by moving, adding and deleting nodes. You can also use more advanced node editing commands such as Make Node Symmetrical, Make Node A Cusp, and Auto-Reduce Curve.


Corel VENTURA 7


Bleeds [image] Place items in the master page margins to create bleeds on every page, or to create bleeds on left or right pages only. Bleeds are a great way to create thumb tabs that extend beyond the edge of the page and display the chapter name or page number.


Headers and Footers [image] Headers and footers can now have multiple paragraphs and be tagged with any paragraph tag. You can place headers and footers on the master page and use the First, Last, or Current Match buttons on the Property Bar to create running headers that pick up text from selected paragraph tags.


Spreads [image] VENTURA now supports frames that spread across facing pages. Right-click a frame and choose Make Frame Spread from the menu to create watermarks and place pictures behind your text. Spreads on the Master Page repeat on all pages using that Master Page. Spreads in Page Layout view don't repeat on other pages.


Corel VENTURA 7


Duotones [image] VENTURA's expanded bitmap handling capabilities include the same duotone controls as Corel Photo-Paint. Simply select your embedded picture and convert it to grayscale, and then convert it to your choice of duotone, tritone, monotone, or quadtone.


Bitmap pattern fills [image] Use any picture file to create a 2-color or full-color pattern fills for artistic text, graphic objects, frames, and master pages.


Bitmap Cropping [image] Irregularly shaped frames are a great way to crop images and add visual interest to your layouts. You choose from a wide selection of frame shapes, or create your own by using the Node Edit tool to reshape a frame.


Corel VENTURA 7


Reshape frames [image] Create irregularly shaped frames by using the Convert To Curves command on the Edit menu and then dragging the frame's nodes with the Node Edit tool. You can also convert any graphic object to a frame by right-clicking on the object and choosing Convert To Frame from the menu.


Artistic text [image] With Artistic Text you can create graphical effects by using the Fill and Outline tools to color change the color and outline. As well, you can modify the letter shapes using the Node Edit toolbar.


Text flow [image] Use VENTURA’s new text flow options to flow text around frames. Select the frame and choose Right, Left, Straddle, Left Then Right, Flow Around Frame, or Above/Below from the Wrap Text list box on the Property Bar.


Fit text to path [image] The Artistic text tool lets you create text that you can shape or fit to a path. Select the Artistic text and the line or graphic object you want the text to follow, and click Format, Artistic Text, Fit Text To Path. Use the Node Edit tool to drag characters along the path, or the Artistic text tool to edit the text.


Corel VENTURA 7


Graphic Property Bar [image] When a VENTURA graphic object is selected , the Property Bar displays controls for position, size, alignment, order, fill and outline.


Units of Measure [image] You can set units of measure for individual Property Bars control by right-clicking any control and choosing Units. You can also specify the increment to use when you click the scroll buttons or when you insert your cursor in the control and press the arrow keys on your keyboard. Click Units on the Tools menu to set the increment (e.g., 1 point, or .10 inches).


Node Edit Property Bar [image] When a VENTURA graphic object or frame is selected with the Node Edit tool, the Property Bar displays controls for adding and deleting points, auto-reducing curves, and making nodes symmetrical, smooth, and into cusps.


Frame Property Bar [image] When a frame is selected, the Property Bar displays the name of the picture or text in the selected frame, as well as controls for tags, captions, text flow, and position.


Table Property Bar [image] When a table is selected, the Property Bar displays controls for grids, borders, skew angles and number of rows and columns.


Text Property Bar [image] When the text cursor is active, the Property Bar displays controls for tagging, editing tag properties, inserting special items, correcting spelling errors, inserting equations, and changing text properties (e.g., bold, italic).


Corel VENTURA 7


Rotate [image] Clicking a frame or graphic object twice makes rotation and skew handles appear around it. You can rotate the frame or graphic by dragging one of the corner handles, or skew the object by dragging one of the straight handles. Dragging the circle in the center of the object moves the center of rotation.


Nudge [image] Once you have selected an object, you can use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the object left, right, up or down. You can use the Nudge setting on the Selection page of the Options dialog box to specify the nudge distance.


Duplicate [image] The Duplicate command on the Edit menu makes an exact copy of the selected object. You can use the Duplicate Offset setting on the Selection page of the Options dialog box to specify the placement of duplicates.


Edit vector pictures [image] VENTURA now allows you to edit imported .CMX, .WMF and other vector formats within Ventura. Right-click the frame containing the vector graphic and choose Convert Picture To Shapes from the menu. You can reshape the objects using the Node Edit tool, use the Fill and Outline tools to change the objects' colors, or select the objects to move, resize, and rotate them.


Group and Skew [image] You can group any combination of graphic objects, Artistic text, and frames. Hold down the SHIFT key as you click to select multiple objects and then choose the Group command from the Edit menu. Clicking a group twice makes rotation and skew handles appear.


Corel VENTURA 7


Database Publisher [image] Corel Database Publisher allows you to create tables or tabular data from your spreadsheets. You can anchor graphics to records, pre-tag your spreadsheet data with VENTURA paragraph tags, and automatically publish multiple tables and sorted data to your VENTURA publications.


Multiple paragraphs [image] Corel VENTURA 7 now supports multiple paragraphs in table cells [image] press ENTER to create additional paragraphs. Paragraphs within the same cell can be formatted with different paragraph tags just like regular text.


Cell and Border Color [image] Corel VENTURA 7 allows you to change the cell and border color for selected cells or the entire table. You can also use a preset color and border style using the Auto Formats command on the Table menu.


Corel VENTURA 7


Backgrounds for paragraph tags [image] VENTURA now lets you create special effects for text using background fills. The same wide variety of fills available for frames and pages are available as fills for paragraphs – just click the Fill tool in the Tag Properties dialog box. This illustration shows a paragraph with a gradient fill that emulates a highlighter pen.


Kerning & Tracking [image] VENTURA now allows you to apply kerning and tracking to a font and use the same kerning and tracking settings for an entire publication. In addition, you can share those settings with other VENTURA publications. You can create kern pairs or adjust the tracking on normal, tight and loose settings of the selected font, and then print an example of your settings.


Bullets [image] Use colors and specialized symbol fonts to create distinctive bullet characters. The Effects page of the Tag Properties dialog box offers a selection of Quick Format bullet styles or allows you to create your own. Use bullets to create eye-catching lists and to visually differentiate important information.


Equations [image] Add equations to your publication by inserting your cursor and using the Equation command on the Insert menu. Frequently used equations can be stored in a file that you can share between publications or with other users.

Building equations is as easy as selecting templates and symbols and typing variables and numbers in the slots provided. Users of previous versions of VENTURA may be familiar with the EQN language which can be typed directly into the Insert Equation dialog box.


Drop Characters [image] VENTURA now supports multiple drop cap characters. Try a Quick Format drop cap style, or create your own custom drop cap. Drop caps can also have a different background fill from the rest of the paragraph for added impact.


Outlines and fills for paragraph tags [image] COREL VENTURA 7 now supports outlines and fills for paragraph tags. You can use the Pen dialog box to create dotted, dashed, or calligraphic lines, or the Fill dialog box to access the same fills available for frames and pages.


Corel VENTURA 7


Callout Tool [image] The drawing tools now include a Callout tool. The Callout tool creates a grouped frame and graphic line that you can edit with the Node Edit tool. You can add arrowheads, fills, or other effects to the callout, change the elbow position  of the line, or remove the line completely. After you create a callout you can type text in the frame and format it with character or paragraph tags or any other standard text control.


Frame Continuation [image] Each frame that you draw has a number and two Frame Continuation handles. The handles allow you to draw frames that match the shape and fill of the selected frame and continue text flow from one frame to another. The frame number at the top of the frame indicates the order of the text flow.

You can add frames at the end of a story, or insert frames in the middle of a story to change the layout. To draw a continuation frame, click the up or down Frame Continuation handle and draw a frame anywhere in your publication. The text automatically flows into the new frame. You can hide or display Frame Continuation handles using the Options dialog box.


Rotated Frames [image] COREL VENTURA 7 supports text in rotated frames, shaped frames, and graphics that have been converted to frames. You can convert frames to curves and edit their shapes with the Node Edit tool, or convert graphic objects into frames. If you create a frame that you'd like to use in other publications, store it in a VENTURA library.


Irregular Frames [image] You can create irregular frames using Corel VENTURA's Frame tool flyout which provides you with a variety of preset frame shapes, including the new star, bubble, left and right trapezoid frames. To create a custom frame, convert the frame to curves and use the Node Edit tool to reshape it.


Ruling Lines [image] You can create special containers for your text or pictures using ruling lines. VENTURA supports up to 3 ruling lines per side for frames and paragraphs, and each line can have its own color and line style. For special effects like dashed lines, click the Pen icon in the Ruling Lines dialog box.


CORELPRN.INI Settings

The following is a list of settings you can adjust in either the CORELPRN.INI file, the Print Options dialog box, or both.

Text Output Method

Bitmap Printing

Page Orientation Warning

Bitmap Font Limit

Bitmap Font Size Threshold

Maximum Points Per Curve

Download Type 1 Fonts

Convert True Type to Type 1

PSSpotFountainsAsProcess

Grayscale Driver Bitmap Output

PostScript 2 Stroke Adjust

Print Preview Drag Mode

Driver Banding

Unit

Composite Crop Marks

Conform To DSC

Overprint Black Threshold

Resolve DCS Links

Registration Mark Type

Bitmap Chunk Overlap Pixels

Spot Color Separations Warning

Preview Image Default

Printer Color Profile

BadPreview

ExtendPad

TextAsClip

Use Clipping for Fills


Text Output Method

CORELPRN.INI Name

AllTextAsGraphics

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
Text as Text When Possible	0
All Text as Graphics	1
Default

Text as Text When Possible

Description

Determines whether Artistic text is output as graphic objects when printing to Non Postscript printers. This option may be helpful when Artistic text objects print below instead of on top of vector or raster (i.e., bitmap) objects.


Bitmap Printing

CORELPRN.INI Name

DumpEntireBitmap

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
Output in 64K chunks	0
Output Entire Bitmap	1
Default

Output in 64K chunks

Description

Determines whether bitmaps are sent to non-Postscript printers all at once or in smaller blocks (below 64K). Usually, the driver tells the application which method it supports. If you find that bitmaps do not print as expected, try setting this switch back to its default setting, thus forcing bitmaps to output in a number of smaller blocks.


Page Orientation Warning

CORELPRN.INI Name

WarnBadOrientation

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
On	1
Off	0
Default

On

Description

Determines whether a warning message appears when the page orientation in VENTURA and the printer page orientation set in the printer driver do not match. When a mismatch is detected, VENTURA asks if you want to change the printer orientation to match the document's.


Bitmap Font Limit
Bitmap Font Limit (PS)

CORELPRN.INI Name

PSBitmapFontLimit

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
1-100	1-100
Default

8

Description

This setting applies to text printed on a PostScript printer. If the font used meets certain criteria, a bitmap version of the font is created in the printer's memory. Bitmap font descriptions are used because they look better at small point sizes and print faster than the normal font outline descriptions. Bitmap fonts created in this way consume a large amount of PostScript memory. As a result, you may need to limit the number of such fonts created to avoid a PostScript error when printing a document.

The following criteria must be met for a bitmap font to be created in printer memory.

·	The printed character size is no larger than 75 points. This corresponds to a point size of 18 at 300 dpi, 9 points at 600 dpi and so on.

·	The text is not scaled or skewed (applicable to Artistic text).

·	The text does not have an outline or a fill other than a uniform fill.

·	The text does not have any envelopes (non-linear transformations) applied to it (Not applicable to Corel VENTURA).

·	The document is not being printed using the Scale Option or Fit to Page option in the Print dialog box.


Bitmap Font Size Threshold

CORELPRN.INI Name

PSBitmapFontSizeThreshold

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
0-1000	0-1000
Default

75

Description

This setting applies to TrueType text being printed on a PostScript printer. The value set here determines if a raster (i.e., bitmap) font can be used. The value represents the bitmap height in pixels. The higher the value, the bigger the bitmaps. If a bitmap font cannot be created, the text will be sent as a Type 1 font.


Maximum Points Per Curve

CORELPRN.INI Name

PSComplexityThreshold

Settings

PostScript Preferences dialog box *	INI file
20-20000	20-20000
* Accessed from Print Options, Options dialog box.

Default

1500

Description

Sets the threshold at which Corel VENTURA decides a filled path is too complex for successful printing on a PostScript device. The value is a count of the number of segments in an individual path. If a path contains more segments than the limit set here, the program will break it up into sections without modifying its appearance.

Even shorter paths containing complex fills such as fountains and patterns can cause problems with a PostScript driver (typically indicated as a Limitcheck Error). If this occurs, enter a lower value such as 600.


Download Type 1 Fonts

CORELPRN.INI Name

PSDownloadType1Fonts

Settings

PostScript Preferences dialog *	INI file
Checked	1
Unchecked	0
* Accessed from Print Options, Options dialog box.

Default

Checked

Description

Controls whether Adobe Type 1 fonts (available through ATM software) are treated in the normal Windows manner when output to a PostScript printer. By default, the fonts are either downloaded with the print job or they have already been downloaded and the driver will treat them as resident. This work is done by the PostScript driver installed on your system. If you disable this option, VENTURA will output text set in Type 1 fonts as either curves or bitmaps, depending on the size, fill, transformations, etc. In most cases, it's best to leave this setting in its default state. Text output will be very fast and the quality will be high.


Convert True Type to Type 1

CORELPRN.INI Name

PSConvertTrueTypeToType1

Settings

PostScript Preferences dialog *	INI file
Checked	1
Unchecked	0
* Accessed from Print Options, Options dialog box.

Default

Checked

Description

Controls whether True Type fonts are converted to Adobe Type 1 format when printing to a PostScript driver. Converting to Type 1 yields high-quality letterforms that print very quickly. If you choose not to convert to Type 1, the text will be output as either curves or bitmaps, depending on the nature of the object.


PSSpotFountainsAsProcess

This setting is available in the CORELPRN.INI file only.

Settings

INI file

1 (Convert to CMYK)

0

Default

0 (Do not convert to CMYK)

Description

This setting applies to fountain fills that involve more than one spot color. In its default state, fountain fills containing more than one spot color output as individual spot color plates. Setting this value to 1 will automatically convert these types of fountain fills to CMYK process fountain fills which will be output as 4 plates.


Grayscale Driver Bitmap Output

CORELPRN.INI Name

PSColorBitmapsAsGrayscale

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
Send Color Bitmaps as Grayscale	1
Send Color Bitmaps as Color	0
Default

Send Color Bitmaps as Grayscale

Description

This setting applies when outputting color bitmaps on monochrome (black and white) PostScript devices. Normally, color bitmaps would be converted to grayscale in this situation to conserve disk space and virtual memory and to limit processing time. There may be cases, however, where you would like Corel VENTURA to output full-color information (even if the driver only supports monochrome printing). In this case, change the value to 0.


PostScript 2 Stroke Adjust

CORELPRN.INI Name

PS2StrokeAdjust

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
On (Adjust stoke)	1
Off	0
Default

On (Adjust stoke)

Description

This is a Level 2 PostScript feature than is enabled when Use Level 2 is checked in the PostScript Preferences dialog box. This feature causes lines and beziers to render faster on Level 2 PostScript devices. This can change how lines originally appeared. Disabling this feature still permits VENTURA to output in Level 2 PS but without the stroke adjustment.


Print Preview Drag Mode

CORELPRN.INI Name

FullImageDrag

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
Drag Full Image	1
Drag Marquee	0
Default

Drag Full Image

Description

This setting when disabled drags a marquee rectangle of the image around the print preview instead of the entire image. When the mouse is released the image redraws at the new location. This can save time on slower computers.


Driver Banding

CORELPRN.INI Name

DoBanding

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
Send Bands to Driver	1
Let Driver do Banding	0
Default

Let Driver do Banding

Description

Determines if output banding to non-PostScript devices is performed by the printer driver or by VENTURA.


Unit

This setting is available in the CORELPRN.INI file only.

CORELPRN.INI Name

Unit

Settings

INI file

1 (inches)

2 (millimeters)

Default

1 (inches)

Description

This setting is created by the print engine. Its purpose is to remember from session to session which units where used in the Print Options dialog box. The values for xx are the same as those stored in the VENTURA.INI file for any unit controls.


Composite Crop Marks

CORELPRN.INI Name

PSCompositeCMYKMarks

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
Output as Black	0
Output in Full CMYK	1
Default

Output as Black

Description

Indicates how the crop marks are output for composite printing. This is useful for Scitex Imaging systems that manually color separate composite images into CMYK process colors.


Conform To DSC

CORELPRN.INI Name

PSConformToDSC

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
On	1
Off	0
Default

0 (Off)

Description

When enabled this switch post processes PostScript PRN files to strictly conform to Adobe's DSC (Document Structuring Convention). This is useful for users who wish to use the output file in other PostScript parsing applications that require strict compliance to this specification.


Overprint Black Threshold

CORELPRN.INI Name

PSOverprintBlackLimit

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
0-100	0-100
Default

95

Description

This setting is for use with color separations and causes overprinting to be applied automatically to objects that are at least 95% black. Change the value to overprint objects having a different percentage of black.


Resolve DCS Links

CORELPRN.INI Name

PSResolveDCSLinks

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
Substitute Plates at Print Time	1
Leave DCS Links Unresolved	0
Default

Substitute Plates at Print Time

Description

Determines if DCS plate files are merged at print time. If not merged at print time then the link is still active and it would be the responsibility of the print server to merge in the linked files.


Registration Mark Type

CORELPRN.INI Name

PSRegistrationMarkType

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
Corel Logo Registration Mark	0
Standard Bullseye	1
Half Inverted Bullseye	2
Elongated Bullseye	3
Square and Circle	4
Default

Standard Bullseye

Description

Determines which style of registration marks are used when printing PostScript separations.


Bitmap Chunk Overlap Pixels

CORELPRN.INI Name

BitmapChunkOverlapPixels

Setttings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
0-48	0-48
Default

32

Description

Indicates the number of pixels that are overlapped when printing bitmaps in chunks. The purpose of this setting is to eliminate the grid pattern that results from printing to error diffusion printers with the Bitmap Printing setting set to Output in 64K chunks.


Spot Color Separations Warning

CORELPRN.INI Name

SpotSeparationsWarning

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
Don't Warn	0
Warn if any spot colors are used	1
Warn if more than 1 spot colors used	2
Warn if more than 2 spot colors used	3
Warn if more than 3 spot colors used	4
Default

Warn if more than 2 spot colors used

Description

Flashes a warning message that the file about to print contains one or more spot colors. This warning is only available when printing color separations to PostScript printers.


Preview Image Default

CORELPRN.INI Name

PreviewImage

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
On by default	1
Off by default	0
Default

Off by default

Description

Controls whether the Print Preview window displays an image of the page being printed. The preview image can also be enabled/disabled by right-clicking in the Print Preview window.


Printer Color Profile
Printer Color Profile <Name of profile>

CORELPRN.INI Name

UseColorProfile

Settings

PostScript Preferences dialog	INI file
Checked	1
Unchecked	0
Default

Checked

Description

Reflects the status of the printer color profile. When disabled any color correction that takes place will be done by the printer driver.


BadPreview

This setting is can be added to the CORELPRN.INI file if required and is not available from within Corel VENTURA. To add the setting, type its name followed by an equals sign then one of the values listed below.

CORELPRN.INI Name

BadPreview

Settings

INI file

1 (on)

0 (off)

Default

0 (Off)

Description

This setting may help users who cannot preview bitmaps in Print Preview with their current video card. This may or may not help depending on the video card.


ExtendPad

This setting is can be added to the CORELPRN.INI file if required and is not available from within Corel VENTURA. To add the setting, type its name followed by an equals sign then one of the values listed below.

CORELPRN.INI Name

ExtendPad

Settings

INI file	Default
See descrption	1 (0.1 inches)
Description

Adjusts the amount the printable area extends so that a document printed with the Fit To Page option enabled will not get cut off. This value is specified in increments of a 1000ths of an inch. A value of 2000 will add an additional inch to the non-printable margin reported by the printer driver on all sides.


TextAsClip

This setting is can be added to the CORELPRN.INI file if required and is not available from within Corel VENTURA. To add the setting, type its name followed by an equals sign then one of the values listed below.

CORELPRN.INI Name

TextAsClip

Settings

INI file

1 (on)

0 (off)

Default

1 (on)

Description

This setting may help users printing to non-PostScript printers who are having difficulty rendering complex fills (i.e., vector or texture fills) in Artistic text objects.


Use Clipping for Fills
Fill Clipping

This setting is available in the CORELAPP.INI file and from the Print Options dialog box in Corel VENTURA.

CORELAP.INI Name

UseClippingForFills

Settings

Print Options dialog box	INI file
Use device's clipping	7
Use software clipping	5
Description

Most device drivers support clipping. Corel assumes that the device is using its own clipping routine, but if this is not so, you may encounter slowdowns in print time. Enable Corel's clipping routine to speed up these operations.


Overview: Undo command (Edit menu)
Undo command (Edit menu)

Reverses the last text, tag, graphic object, or frame editing action you performed. Immediately after you undo an action, the Redo command becomes available, allowing you to restore what you reversed.

You can set the number of actions that can be undone, using the Tools, Options command (Selection tab).


Overview: Redo command (Edit menu)
Redo command (Edit menu)

Restores what the Undo command reversed.


Overview: Repeat command (Edit menu)
Repeat command (Edit menu)

Repeats your last command or action, if possible.


Overview: Cut command (Edit menu)
Cut command (Edit menu)

Removes the selected text, frame, or graphic object, and places it on the Clipboard.


Overview: Copy command (Edit menu)
Copy command (Edit menu)

Copies the selected text, frame or graphic object, and places it on the Clipboard.


Overview: Paste command (Edit menu)
Paste command (Edit menu)

Places the contents of the Clipboard on the current page. Text is pasted at the insertion point, replacing any currently selected text.


Overview: Paste Special command (Edit menu)
Paste Special command (Edit menu)

Pastes, embeds or links the contents of the Clipboard. Embedding an object allows you to edit it in the originating application, without leaving VENTURA. Linking updates the object whenever changes are made to it in the originating application.


Overview: Delete command (Edit menu)
Delete command (Edit menu)

Removes the selected text, frame, graphic object or table.


Overview: Duplicate command (Edit menu)
Duplicate command (Edit menu)

Duplicates the selected frame or graphic object. Use the Tools, Options command (Selection tab) to set the amount the duplicate is offset from the original.


Overview: Select All command
Select All command

Extends the current selection to all text in the current chapter, all frames and graphic objects on the current page, or all cells in the selected table.


Overview: Find & Replace command (Edit menu)
Find & Replace command (Edit menu)

Searches for, and optionally replaces, specified text, formatting or special items (index entries, cross-references, etc.) in the active document.


Overview: Edit Item command (Edit menu)
Edit Item command (Edit menu)

Edits items such as cross-reference and index markers inserted using the Insert Item command in the Insert menu. The command becomes available when you place the insertion point immediately before or after the item.


Overview: Order command (Edit menu)
Order command (Edit menu)

Places the selected frame or graphic object in front of, or in back of, other objects. The Reverse Order command becomes available when you select two or more frames or graphic objects.


Overview: Group command (Edit menu)
Group command (Edit menu)

Groups all selected frames of graphic objects together, so they can be selected and manipulated as single object.


Overview: Ungroup command (Edit menu)
Ungroup command (Edit menu)

Breaks up the selected group into its individual objects. If you have more than one sub-level of grouping, the Ungroup command breaks up one level of grouping at time.


Overview: Convert to Curves command (Edit menu)
Convert to Curves command (Edit menu)

Converts the selected frame or graphic object into series of curves and/or lines that you can edit with the Node Edit tool. Once an object is converted to curves, it is not possible to return it to its original object type, except with the Undo command in the Edit menu.


Overview: Manage Overrides (Edit menu)
Manage Overrides (Edit menu)

Removes formatting applied using the Format, Paragraph Overrides command or adds it to paragraph tag.


Overview: Links command (Edit menu)
Links command (Edit menu)

Lists linked objects in the active document and allows you to change, update and break the links as well as open the application used to create the object. This command is not available if the current document contains no links.


Overview: Object command (Edit menu)
Object command (Edit menu)

Displays commands for editing the selected embedded object or converting into another object type.


Overview: New command (File menu)
New command (File menu)

Creates new document based on the default stylesheet and master page, or built-in template.


Overview: Open command (File menu)
Open command (File menu)

Opens an existing document in new window. You can quickly open one of the last documents you worked on by clicking its name at the bottom of the File menu.


Overview: Close command (File menu)
Close command (File menu)

Closes the active document without exiting Corel VENTURA.


Overview: Library, New command (File menu)
Library, New command (File menu)

Creates new library. Libraries can contain items such as text, pictures, tags, and even entire chapters. You can move items from pages into an open library, from an open library onto pages, and between open libraries.


Overview: Library, Open command (File menu)
Library, Open command (File menu)

Opens an existing library. Libraries can contain items such as text, pictures, tags and even entire chapters. You can move items from pages into an open library, from an open library onto pages, and between open libraries.


Overview: Save command (File menu)
Save command (File menu)

Saves the active document with the name, and in the location specified, when the document was first saved. When you save document for the first time, the Save As dialog box appears, where you type name and choose location. If you want to rename or relocate document, use the Save As command or the Navigator in the Tools menu. By default, VENTURA makes backup copies of documents each time you save them, and autosaves at regular intervals while you're working on them. You can turn the backup and autosave features off using the Tools, Options command, although it is best to leave them on to save yourself from losing work.


Overview: Save As command (File menu)
Save As command (File menu)

Saves the active document with the name and the location you specify. By default, VENTURA makes backup copies of documents each time you save them, and autosaves at regular intervals while you're working on them. You can turn the backup and autosave features off using the Tools, Options command, although it is best to leave them on to save yourself from losing work.


Overview: Save Page as EPS (File menu)
Save Page as EPS (File menu)

Saves the current page as an Encapsulated PostScript picture, which you can then place in document using the File, Import Picture command.


Overview: Import Text command (File menu)
Import Text command (File menu)

Imports text in many word processor file formats and from programs that save text in industry-standard ASCII, ANSI and RTF (Rich Text Format) format.


Overview: Import Picture command (File menu)
Import Picture command (File menu)

Imports pictures [image] illustrations, photographs, charts, etc.created with paint, draw, charting and scanning programs.


Overview: Export command (File menu)
Export command (File menu)

Exports selected text files in industry-standard ASCII, ANSI and RTF formats. When you export text file, you have the option of retaining, or discarding, the formatting codes and other information VENTURA inserts in the text.


Overview: Version Control, Archive Current command (File menu)
Version Control, Archive Current command (File menu)

Saves copy of the active document in an archive. For more information, click [image].


Overview: Version Control, Retrieve Current (File menu)
Version Control, Retrieve Current (File menu)

Opens an archived version of the active document. You can retrieve any archived version of document, and you can compare them to see the changes that were made. For more information, click [image].


Overview: Version Control, Retrieve Publication (File menu)
Version Control, Retrieve Publication (File menu)

Opens previously saved version of document. You can retrieve any archived version of document, and you can compare them to see the changes that were made. For more information, click [image].


Overview: Acquire Image, Select Source command (File menu)
Acquire Image, Select Source command (File menu)

Selects TWAIN image input source such as Corel Image Source or HP's Deskscan II. The list of available sources depends on the scanner driver(s) installed on your system.


Overview: Acquire Image, Acquire command (File menu)
Acquire Image, Acquire command (File menu)

Accesses external devices and control input devices, such as scanners or video capture boards, without leaving VENTURA.


Overview: Acquire Image, Acquire From File command(File menu)
Acquire Image, Acquire From File command(File menu)

Opens scanned image from file so that you can apply color correction to it.


Overview: Publish As, HTML command (File menu)
Publish As, HTML command (File menu)

Allows you to publish your VENTURA document to HTML (HyperText Markup Language), suitable for the World Wide Web. You can have your document automatically converted, or you can customize the conversion as required.


Overview: Publish As, Adobe Acrobat or Envoy command (File menu)
Publish As, Adobe Acrobat or Envoy command (File menu)

Converts the active document into portable electronic document. VENTURA's built-in support for the two leading portable document technologies, Adobe Acrobat and Envoy, enables you to create an electronic document complete with text, graphics, and photos that anyone with the appropriate viewing software can read.


Overview: Publish As, Corel Barista command (File menu)
Publish As, Corel Barista command (File menu)

Saves the current document in format suitable for the World Wide Web. Use this command instead of the Publish As, HTML command when you want to preserve the look of the VENTURA document. For more information, click [image].


Overview: Print command (File menu)
Print command (File menu)

Displays printing options and prints all or parts of the active document.


Overview: Print Setup command (File menu)
Print Setup command (File menu)

Provides list of installed printers you can use to print and access to printing options for those printers.


Overview: Print Preview command (File menu)
Print Preview command (File menu)

Shows how the active document will look when you print it. Use the Print Preview toolbar and menu commands to set printing options before you print.


Overview: Quick Print command (File menu)
Quick Print command (File menu)

Reduces printing time by printing the document minus complex fills such as fountains and with image headers (bitmaps) instead of EPS pictures. If an EPS picture lacks header, gray rectangle prints instead of the picture. Use Quick Print to produce proof copy to check the layout of you document before printing the final version. When using Quick Print to print multiple pages, all pages print with the same orientation (portrait or landscape) as the current page or the first page in the range you specify. If the document contains mix of portrait and landscape pages, use the Print command to ensure that they print with correct orientation.


Overview: Send command (file menu)
Send command (file menu)

Attaches the document to an electronic mail message (email) or sends it to fax machine. You can also use this command to copy document to file folder. To email or copy the entire document all of its component files must be embedded rather than linked.


Overview: Exit command (File menu)
Exit command (File menu)

Closes Corel VENTURA.


Overview: Recent File command (File menu)
Recent File command (File menu)

Displays the filenames of the last four documents opened. To open document, display the File menu, then type the document's number, or click its name.


Overview: Paragraph Tag command (Format menu)
Paragraph Tag command (Format menu)

Changes the appearance of the selected paragraph and it's tag.


Overview: Text command (Format menu)
Text command (Format menu)

Changes the font properties of the selected text.


Overview: Character Tag command (Format menu)
Character Tag command (Format menu)

Changes the formatting properties defined in the selected Character tag. Also specifies the text VENTURA inserts before and/or after characters formatted with specific tag.


Overview: Chapter command (Format menu)
Chapter command (Format menu)

Sets up the page layout and the numbering of pages, footnotes/endnotes, paragraphs and other items in the current chapter. You can also use this command to control widow and orphan lines, and whether the chapter uses column balancing, pair kerning, vertical justification, and discretionary hyphens.


Overview: Frame command (Format menu)
Frame command (Format menu)

Changes the dimensions, position, margins, columns, angle, and the way in which text flows around the selected frame. You also use this command to add, remove and reposition captions; control orphan and widow lines; and set up vertical justification.

If the frame contains picture, you can resize and reposition the picture within the frame using this command.


Overview: Publication command (Format menu)
Publication command (Format menu)

Sets access rights for the current document and the conditional tags that allow you to create multiple versions of the document within the same file. You can also use this command to define the text VENTURA inserts when you use the Variable Text, and the Text Before and Text After features.


Overview: Tracking and Kerning command (Format menu)
Tracking and Kerning command (Format menu)

Adjusts the spacing of all letters (tracking) or selected letters pairs (kerning) for available fonts on your system. You can also use this command to import tracking information from other documents and import and export kerning pair sets.


Overview: Ruling Lines command (Format menu)
Ruling Lines command (Format menu)

Applies, creates and edits ruling line styles. Ruling lines are borders you can apply to paragraphs or rectangular frames.


Overview: Override Counter command (Format menu)
Override Counter command (Format menu)

Changes the starting number and format for the selected page or caption containing figure or table counter. Use this command when you want to override the numbering specified using the Format, Chapter command.


Overview: Table of Contents/Index command (Format menu)
Table of Contents/Index command (Format menu)

Creates table of contents and index for the current document.


Overview: Manage Tag List command (Format menu)
Manage Tag List command (Format menu)

Use this command to add, edit, rename, and delete tags in the active document and to merge tags from other documents which use different stylesheet. You can also use the command to assign shortcut key combinations to paragraph tags.


Overview: Paragraph Overrides (Format menu)
Paragraph Overrides (Format menu)

Formats the selected paragraph only, leaving the formatting defined in the paragraph's tag unchanged.


Overview: Object Conditions command (Format menu)
Object Conditions command (Format menu)

Marks the selected item as belonging to one or more versions of conditional document. You define the conditions and specify which version(s) to view or print using the Format, Publication command.


Overview: Multi-user, Set Multi-user command (Format menu)
Multi-user, Set Multi-user command (Format menu)

Switches the state of the active document between single-user and multiple-user. In single-user state, only you have access to the document. You can switch to single-user state only if you are the document's administrator and none of its chapters are checked out by any users, including yourself. In multiple-user state, anyone with the appropriate access rights can open the document for editing or viewing only.


Overview: Multi-user, Check In/Check Out command (Format menu)
Multi-user, Check In/Check Out command (Format menu)

Reserves the active publication so that only you can make changes to it. After checking out the publication, the name of the command changes to Check In. To save changes to the publication and allow other users to work on it, use the Check In command.


Overview: Multi-user, Uncheck Out command (Format menu)
Multi-user, Uncheck Out command (Format menu)

Cancels Check out operation, discarding all changes.


Overview: Multi-user, Access Rights (Format menu)
Multi-user, Access Rights (Format menu)

Defines read-write privileges for the current document making it easy for you to protect the document against unwanted changes. Giving someone write privileges means they can make changes to the document. Someone with read privileges can only view the document.


Overview: Multi-user, Check Out Status command (Format menu)
Multi-user, Check Out Status command (Format menu)

Shows whether the active document or any of its components (i.e., individual chapters and stylesheet) are checked out and by whom. This command becomes available when the Set-Multi-User command is enabled.


Overview: Bitmap, Brightness/Contrast command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Brightness/Contrast command (Format menu)

Adjusts the brightness, contrast and intensity of bitmap picture. The command is not available for black & white, 16-color or 256-color pictures. Use Corel PHOTO-PAINT to adjust these types of pictures.

Note: The command is not available for externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Bitmap, Deskew command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Deskew command (Format menu)

Adjusts skewed or imperfectly aligned bitmap picture, positioning it squarely on the screen. This command is especially useful when you are working with scanned pictures that, due to imperfect alignment on the scanning surface, appear misaligned.

Note: The command is not available for externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Bitmap, Flip Horizontally command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Flip Horizontally command (Format menu)

Flips the bitmap picture in the selected frame horizontally.

Note: The command is not available for externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Bitmap, Color Halftone command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Color Halftone command (Format menu)

Adjusts the pattern of dots the printer uses to reproduce grayscale picture.

Note: The command is not available for externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Bitmap, Resample command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Resample command (Format menu)

Changes the size and resolution of the bitmap picture in the selected frame.

Note: The command is not available for externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Bitmap, Convert, Black and White command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Convert, Black and White command (Format menu)

Converts the bitmap picture to black and white.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Bitmap, Convert, 16-colors command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Convert, 16-colors command (Format menu)

Converts the picture to 16-color (4-bit) picture. Choose 16-colors to create non-photographic images, when printing to low-end color printer, and/or to maximize your system's memory.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Bitmap, Convert, Grayscale command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Convert, Grayscale command (Format menu)

Converts the picture to range of 255 shades of gray, so that it resembles traditional black and white photograph. Choose Grayscale to create duotones and print to black and white laser printer.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Bitmap, Convert, Duotone command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Convert, Duotone command (Format menu)

Converts grayscale picture into monotone (one ink), duotone (two ink), tritone (three ink) and quadtone (four ink) picture. This type of conversion increases the picture depth in creating additional highlights, shadows, and mid-tones, producing rich, brilliant picture.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Bitmap, Convert, 256 colors command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Convert, 256 colors command (Format menu)

Converts the picture to 256-color picture. Choose 256 Colors to create non-photographic images, when printing to low-end color printer, and/or to maximize your system's memory.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Bitmap, Convert, RGB Color command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Convert, RGB Color command (Format menu)

Converts picture to 24-bit (RGB) color. The RGB color model uses percentages of three colors (red, green, and blue) to create colors. Each component has 100 levels of intensity ranging from black to the component's full intensity. RGB is the most commonly used color mode. Choose RGB Color to create high-quality photographic color pictures and when printing to an RGB or CMY printer.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Bitmap, Convert, CMYK Color command (Format menu)
Bitmap, Convert, CMYK Color command (Format menu)

Converts the picture to 32 bit (CMYK) color. The CMYK model consists of four colors, based on the colors of the inks that are used in four-color printing. Combining percentages of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, virtually any color you want can be reproduced. Choose CMYK Color to create professional-quality pictures, and when you are printing to prepress or CMYK printer.

Note: The command is not available for converting externally referenced pictures or pictures inserted as linked or embedded objects.


Overview: Update Auto Numbering command (Format menu)
Update Auto Numbering command (Format menu)

Updates the numbering of automatically numbered paragraphs. Use this command after adding, deleting or moving auto-numbered paragraphs.


Overview: Artistic Text, Edit command (Format menu)
Artistic Text, Edit command (Format menu)

Edits and formats text added using the [image] tool in the [image] tool flyout menu.


Overview: Artistic Text, Fit Text to Path command (Edit menu)
Artistic Text, Fit Text to Path command (Edit menu)

Wraps selected Artistic Text object to the shape of frame or graphic object. The text and the object become dynamically-linked group, enabling you to edit the text or change the shape of the object and automatically refit the text.

If you want to keep the path, but prevent it from printing, click the path while holding down the CTRL key, and remove the path's fill and outline. To delete the path, use the same technique to select it, then press DELETE.


Overview: Help Topics command (Help menu)
Help Topics command (Help menu)

Displays online Help for Corel VENTURA.


Overview: What's This? command (Help menu)
What's This? command (Help menu)

Click this command, then click on an available menu command or another item on the screen, to find out what it does.


Overview: Tutorial command (Help menu)
Tutorial command (Help menu)

Opens the Corel VENTURA online tutorial.


Overview: Technical Support command (Help menu)
Technical Support command (Help menu)

Provides details on product support for Corel applications.


Overview: About Corel VENTURA command (Help menu)
About Corel VENTURA command (Help menu)

Displays information about which version of Corel VENTURA you are running. You can also use this command to display information about your system, display, network, printer, Corel EXEs and DLLs, and system DLLs.


Overview: Symbol command (Insert menu)
Symbol command (Insert menu)

Insert symbols and special characters from fonts on your system.


Overview: Cross-Reference command (Insert menu)
Cross-Reference command (Insert menu)

Inserts cross-reference to an item in the document. To mark the location of the item, use the Insert > Marker command in the Insert menu.


Overview: Date and Time command (Insert menu)
Date and Time command (Insert menu)

Inserts the date and/or time at the insertion point.


Overview: Equation command (Insert menu)
Equation command (Insert menu)

Inserts an equation at the insertion point.


Overview: Footnote command (Insert menu)
Footnote command (Insert menu)

Inserts footnote reference at the insertion point. The reference appears provided the Footnotes command in the View menu is selected.


Overview: Endnote command (Insert menu)
Endnote command (Insert menu)

Inserts an endnote reference at the insertion point.


Overview: Index Entry command (Insert menu)
Index Entry command (Insert menu)

Inserts an index entry at the insertion point.


Overview: Marker command (Insert menu)
Marker command (Insert menu)

Inserts cross-reference marker at the insertion point. The marker marks the location that the cross-reference points to. To insert the cross-reference use the Insert > Cross-reference command in the Insert menu.


Overview: Variable command (Insert menu)
Variable command (Insert menu)

Inserts variable marker at the insertion point. Variables enable you to mark locations in the document that contain text that you know will change such as dates, document version numbers, and names of customers or products. Use the Format, Publication command to specify the text you want to insert at the Variable marker locations.


Overview: command (Insert menu)
URL command (Insert menu)

Inserts Uniform Resource Locator (URL) at the insertion point. The URL appears as hyperlink when the document is converted to HTML or Barista and viewed in browser.


Overview: CorelMEMO command (Insert menu)
CorelMEMO command (Insert menu)

Opens the CorelMEMO dialog box, which allows you to insert notes into Corel VENTURA documents, or into documents in other programs that support Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). Use CorelMEMO when you want to leave yourself reminder, note change in document, or add comment.


Overview: Object command (Insert menu)
Object command (Insert menu)

Links or embeds an object, such as picture or chart, in the current document.


Overview: Show This Header command (Page menu)
Show This Header command (Page menu)

Displays or hides the header on the current page only. Use the Page, Enable Header command to control the display of headers on all pages in the document that use the same master page.


Overview: Show This Footer command (Page menu)
Show This Footer command (Page menu)

Displays or hides the footer on the current page only. Use the Page, Enable Footer command to control the display of footers on all pages in the document that use the same master page.


Overview: Enable Header command (Page menu)
Enable Header command (Page menu)

Turns on headers for all pages that use same master page as the current page. If you want the same information to appear in the header on all pages, enter the information on the master page. Header information entered in Page Layout view, overrides the master page header.


Overview: Enable Footer command (Page menu)
Enable Footer command (Page menu)

Turns on footers for all pages that use same master page as the current page. If you want the same information to appear in the footer on all pages, enter the information on the master page. Footer information entered in Page Layout view, overrides the master page header.


Overview: Enable Footnotes command (Page menu)
Enable Footnotes command (Page menu)

Displays or hides footnotes in the active document as well as the reference markers in the text. When you hide footnotes, text reflows to fill the space they occupied.


Overview: Header/Footer Formats command (Page menu)
Header/Footer Formats command (Page menu)

Adds preset header or footer to the selected page replacing the one already there. If you want the header or footer to repeat on other pages in the document, apply the preset to the master page.


Overview: Master Page Properties command (Format menu)
Master Page Properties command (Format menu)

Sets up the master page which controls the page size and orientation of the document and the format of headers, footers and other elements.


Overview: Apply Master Page command (Format menu)
Apply Master Page command (Format menu)

Applies new master page to the currently displayed page.


Overview: Grid/Guidelines Setup command (Tools menu)
Grid/Guidelines Setup command (Tools menu)

Sets up the grid for the active document and adds, deletes and repositions guidelines on the selected page. To use the same guidelines throughout the document, place them on the master page.


Overview: Insert Pages command (Page menu)
Insert Pages command (Page menu)

Adds one or more pages to the current document.

Each inserted page can have its own frame formatting which does not affect the base page. (For more control over the frame formatting of an inserted page, apply different master page.

Text on the base page skips over pages inserted in the middle of sequence of base pages.

By default auto-numbering and number of footnotes start over on the inserted pages, rather than continuing from the previous pages.


Overview: Delete Pages command (Page menu)
Delete Pages command (Page menu)

Deletes pages inserted using the Delete Pages command in the Page menu. Named text and pictures on inserted pages remain in the Files list. Frames, graphic objects, and unnamed text are deleted with the page.


Overview: Create Table command (Table menu)
Create Table command (Table menu)

Inserts new blank table at the insertion point.


Overview: Format Table command (Table menu)
Format Table command (Table menu)

Changes the appearance of selected table.


Overview: Auto Formats command (Table menu)
Auto Formats command (Table menu)

Applies preset shading and borders to the selected table.


Overview: Sort command (Table menu)
Sort command (Table menu)

Sorts information in the selected row or column alphabetically, numerically, or by date.


Overview: Function command (Table menu)
Function command (Table menu)

Opens the Function Wizard so that you can insert built-in function into the current table cell.


Overview: Autofill command (Table menu)
AutoFill command (Table menu)

Automatically fills row or column with series of data by incrementing the value in the selected cell. You can use this command, for example, to automatically fill cells with the days of the week, or months of the year.

Note: If you want to fill cells with incremented dates (e.g., 01/3/96, 02/3/96, 03/3/96), use the Table, AutoFill, Series command.


Overview: Recalculate command (Table menu)
Recalculate command (Table menu)

Updates the value returned by the function in the selected cell.


Overview: Insert Row command (Table menu)
Insert Row command (Table menu)

Inserts rows above, or below, the cell that contains the insertion point.


Overview: Insert Column command (Table menu)
Insert Column command (Table menu)

Inserts columns to the left or to the right of the cell that contains the insertion point.


Overview: Select command (Table menu)
Select command (Table menu)

Selects the row, column, or table that contains the insertion point.


Overview: Delete command (Table menu)
Delete command (Table menu)

Deletes the row, column, or table that contains the insertion point.


Overview: Merge Cells command (Table menu)
Merge Cells command (Table menu)

Combines the selected cells into one cell. The contents of the upper-left cell in the selection remains in the resulting larger cell.


Overview: Split Cells command (Table menu)
Split Cells command (Table menu)

Divides cells combined using the Merge Cells command into individual cells.


Overview: Cell Borders command (Table menu)
Cell Borders command (Table menu)

Changes the borders of the selected cell(s). To change the borders for the entire table, use the Format Table command in the Table menu. Or, select the entire table and use the Property Bar.


Overview: Spelling command (Tools menu)
Spelling command (Tools menu)

Checks the spelling of all or part of the active document text and finds possible grammatical or stylistic errors.


Overview: Thesaurus command (Tools menu)
Thesaurus command (Tools menu)

Replaces word in the document with synonym (word with the same or similar meaning).


Overview: Type Assist command (Tools menu)
Type Assist command (Tools menu)

Corrects capitalization errors and replaces straight quotes with typographic (curly) quotes as you type. You can also use Type Assist to automatically correct words you frequently misspell or which you want replaced when you type an abbreviation of the word.


Overview: Navigator command (Tools menu)
Navigator command (Tools menu)

Displays window with list of chapters, style sheets, text files and other items in the active document. You use the Navigator to create, rename and delete chapters, style sheets and master pages. You can also use the Navigator to move through the document using the table of contents, index, or cross-references.


Overview: Publisher, New Recipe command(Tools menu)
Publisher, New Recipe command(Tools menu)

Launches Corel DataBase Publisher and starts new recipe.


Overview: DataBase Publisher, Edit Recipe command(Tools menu)
DataBase Publisher, Edit Recipe command(Tools menu)

Begins by prompting you to choose the recipe file to be edited. Once you choose recipe, Corel DataBase Publisher is launched and the selected recipe is loaded.


Overview: DataBase Publisher, Update Recipe(s) command (Tools menu)
DataBase Publisher, Update Recipe(s) command (Tools menu)

Begins by prompting you to choose the recipe to be updated. Corel DataBase Publisher will run the selected recipe and update the output file.


Overview: DataBase Publisher, New Recipe Wizard command (Tools menu)
DataBase Publisher, New Recipe Wizard command (Tools menu)

Launches Corel DataBase Publisher wizard.


Overview: Scripts, Start Recording command (Tools menu)
Scripts, Start Recording command (Tools menu)

Starts recording your VENTURA keystroke, mouse, toolbar, and menu actions. When you have finished performing the actions you want to record, click Stop Recording. You can then use the Playback Recording command to replay your actions. For recording tips, click [image].


Overview: Scripts, Stop Recording command (Tools menu)
Scripts, Stop Recording command (Tools menu)

Ends recording the actions you perform after clicking the Start Recording command. You can then use the Playback Recording command to replay your actions.


Overview: Scripts, Playback Recording command (Tools menu)
Scripts, Playback Recording command (Tools menu)

Plays the actions you recorded with the Start Recording and Stop Recording commands. If no actions have been recorded during the current VENTURA session, the command is unavailable.


Overview: Scripts, Save Recording command (Tools menu)
Scripts, Save Recording command (Tools menu)

Saves recording to disk as Corel SCRIPT script. Once you save recording as script, you can edit it with the Corel SCRIPT Editor. When your recorded actions are saved as script, they are translated into Corel SCRIPT application commands.


Overview: Scripts, Run / Manage Scripts command (Tools menu)
Scripts, Run / Manage Scripts command (Tools menu)

Opens the Scripts dialog box which executes previously saved scripts or executes selected script (from the Navigator). The Scripts dialog box also renames, deletes, imports, and exports previously saved scripts. Remember that you can also assign keystroke, add menu item, or add button to the toolbar to run script.


Overview: Scripts, Corel SCRIPT Editor command (Tools menu)
Scripts, Corel SCRIPT Editor command (Tools menu)

Opens the Corel SCRIPT Editor, which is tool that you use to create and edit Corel SCRIPT scripts (or saved recordings).


Overview: Ruler Setup command (Tools menu)
Ruler Setup command (Tools menu)

Customizes the rulers displayed in the active document window. Use this command to change the size of the rulers, the system of measurement they use, the location of the zero points and the default alignment for new tabs added using the tab bar on the horizontal ruler.


Overview: Units command (Tools menu)
Units command (Tools menu)

Resets the unit of measurement in all dialog boxes to the unit you specify.


Overview: Options command (Tools menu)
Options command (Tools menu)

Changes settings that control the appearance of the screen, whether VENTURA makes backup copies of your documents and other options.


Overview: Customize command (Tools menu)
Customize command (Tools menu)

Customizes toolbars, menu commands, and shortcut key assignments.


Overview: Color Manager, Color Wizard command (Tools menu)
Color Manager, Color Wizard command (Tools menu)

Guides you through the process of creating color profiles for your monitor, scanner and printer. The profiles help Corel VENTURA more accurately capture, display and print color.


Overview: Color Manager, Select Color Profile command (Tools menu)
Color Manager, Select Color Profile command (Tools menu)

Create system color profiles for your monitor, scanner and printer. The profiles help Corel VENTURA more accurately capture, display and print color.


Overview: Add-ons command (Tools menu)
Add-ons command (Tools menu)

Adds or removes Corel Add-on programs. An Add-on program is supplemental software that extends the capabilities of Corel VENTURA by adding custom commands and features. You can obtain Add-ons from independent software developers, or you can create your own. For more information, click [image].


Overview: Copy Editor command (View menu)
Copy Editor command (View menu)

Switches the active document to Copy Editor view, which speeds up text editing by displaying text without formatting, pictures, and frames.

To edit text file in the Copy Editor, do either of the following:

•	Switch to the Copy Editor and choose the file you want to edit from the Files list.

•	Select the frame containing the text you want to edit and switch to the Copy Editor.

Note: To edit text typed into drawn frame, as opposed to imported, click to place the insertion point in the text and then switch to the Copy Editor.


Overview: Page Layout command (View menu)
Page Layout command (View menu)

Switches the active document to Page Layout view which displays the document the way it looks when printed. This is the view you use to format your document and position items in frames. Although you can work with text in this view, editing and scrolling slows down especially when there are pictures on the page.


Overview: Master Page command (View menu)
Master Page command (View menu)

Switches the active document to Master Page view, allowing you to make changes to the master page.


Overview: Zoom command (View menu)
Zoom command (View menu)

Controls how large or small document appears on the screen. You can enlarge the display to make the document easier to read, or reduce the display to view an entire page or several pages at once.


Overview: Go to Page command (View menu)
Go to Page command (View menu)

Moves through the document by displaying the next, previous, first or last page, or by going to specific page. You can also jump to the page where text from particular file starts, and then jump to the other pages that contain text from that file. Use this feature to quickly locate text in documents, such as magazines in which text flows in frames on different pages.


Overview: Toolbars (View menu)
Toolbars (View menu)

Displays or hides toolbars, creates new toolbars, resets them to their original settings, adds or removes buttons and changes the button size.


Overview: Snap, Columns command (View menu)
Snap, Columns command (View menu)

Enables or disables Snap to Columns, which forces frames and graphic objects to align with the column guides. Column guides are non-printing lines that show the areas on the base page that you can type text into. You can display or hide the guides using the Tools, Options command or the Property Bar displayed when the base page frame is selected.


Overview: Snap, Inter-Line command (View menu)
Snap, Inter-Line command (View menu)

Enables or disables Snap to Inter-Line, which forces frames and graphic objects to align with grid that coincides with the inter-line spacing defined for Body text.


Overview: Snap, Grid (View menu)
Snap, Grid (View menu)

Enables or disables Snap to Grid which forces frames and graphic objects to align with the grid on the current page. Use the Grid/Guidelines Setup command in the Tools menu to specify the spacing of the grid lines and whether the grid displays.


Overview: Snap, Guidelines command (View menu)
Snap, Guidelines command (View menu)

Enables or disables Snap to Guidelines. Guidelines are non-printing lines that you can place anywhere in the document window either by dragging them from the rulers or by using the Grid/Guidelines Setup command in the Tools menu. With Snap to Guidelines on, frame or graphic object drawn or moved near guideline snaps to it.


Overview: Frame Borders command (View menu)
Frame Borders command (View menu)

Displays or hides the borders around frames. Since borders don't print, hiding them gives you better idea how pages will look when printed.


Overview: Hide All Pictures (View menu)
Hide All Pictures (View menu)

Displays or hides all imported pictures in the document. When you hide pictures, VENTURA displays an X inside the frames containing them, which makes the screen redraw more quickly.


Overview: Hide This Picture (View menu)
Hide This Picture (View menu)

Displays or hides the picture in the selected frame. When you hide picture, VENTURA displays an X inside its frame, which makes the screen redraw more quickly.


Overview: Rulers (View menu)
Rulers (View menu)

Displays or hides the rulers which you can use to set tabs, margins and columns.


Overview: Color Correction, None (View menu)
Color Correction, None (View menu)

Disables color correction. Choosing Fast or Accurate enables Color Correction, allowing you to see colors as they will appear when printed. For more information about Color Correction, click [image].


Overview: Color Correction, Fast (View menu)
Color Correction, Fast (View menu)

Adjusts the display of colors in the document to approximate colors in white-balanced photograph. For more information about Color Correction, click [image].


Overview: Color Correction, Accurate (View menu)
Color Correction, Accurate (View menu)

Adjusts the display of colors in the document to match, as closely as possible, the colors in white-balanced photograph. For more information about Color Correction, click [image].


Overview: Color Correction, Simulate Printer (View menu)
Color Correction, Simulate Printer (View menu)

Adjusts the display of colors in the document to match, as closely as possible, the colors in the printed output. For more information about Color Correction, click [image].


Overview: Color Correction, Gamut Alarm (View menu)
Color Correction, Gamut Alarm (View menu)

Shows colors in the document which cannot be reproduced by the selected printer. Such colors display as single solid color specified using the Options command in the Tools menu. For more information about the Gamut Alarm and Color Correction, click [image].


Overview: Color Correction, Apply to Text (View menu)
Color Correction, Apply to Text (View menu)

Controls whether color correction applies to all elements in the document or to text only. This command takes effect when you enable Color Correction by selecting Fast or Accurate from the Color Correction flyout. For more information about Color Correction, click [image].


Overview: Refresh Window (View menu)
Refresh Window (View menu)

Redraws the screen removing "dirt" left over from earlier manipulations. You can also use this command to allow the screen to finishing redrawing following display interrupt.

display interrupt stops the screen during redraw whenever the mouse button or key is pressed. If you are working on page with illustrations, interruptible refresh can save time by allowing you to select tools and commands without waiting for the screen to redraw completely. You can turn Interruptible Display on and off using the Tools, Options command.


Overview: New Window command (Window menu)
New Window command (Window menu)

Opens new document window with the same contents as the active window. If you change the contents of document in one window, all of the other windows that contain the same document reflect those changes.


Overview: Cascade command (Window menu)
Cascade command (Window menu)

Arranges document windows so that they overlap. Select the window you want to work in by clicking its Title Bar.


Overview: Tile Vertically command (Window menu)
Tile Vertically command (Window menu)

Arranges document windows side by side with no overlapping.


Overview: Tile Horizontally command (Window menu)
Tile Horizontally command (Window menu)

Arranges document windows top to bottom with no overlapping.


Overview: Arrange Icons command (Window menu)
Arrange Icons command (Window menu)

Arranges document windows that have been reduced to icons so that they line up along the bottom of the Corel VENTURA window.


Overview: Split command (Window menu)
Split command (Window menu)

Divides the active window into two panes. Each pane scrolls independently, allowing you to work on different parts of document at the same time or display different views of the same document.

To remove the split, double-click the bar dividing the window, or drag it to the bottom or top of the document window.


Overview: Close All command (Window menu)
Close All command (Window menu)

Closes all open documents at the same time prompting you to save those with any unsaved changes.


Overview: Navigator, Ventura Navigator 1, 2, 3... command (Window menu)
Navigator, Ventura Navigator 1, 2, 3... command (Window menu)

Switches to the corresponding Navigator and makes it active. Use the Tools, Navigator command to open Navigator.


Overview: Library, New Library command (Window menu)
Library, New Library command (Window menu)

Use this command to switch between Corel VENTURA library windows. To open Library, click File, Library.


Overview: Library, Open Library command (Window menu)
Library, Open Library command (Window menu)

Opens Corel VENTURA Library. library is storage area for items such as text, pictures, tags and tables. If you frequently use particular item, add it to the library to make it available for placement in any document.

You can have multiple libraries open at the same time and cut and copy items between them.


Overview: Library, Libraries command (Window menu)
Library, Libraries command (Window menu)

Switches to the corresponding Library and makes it active.


Overview: 1, 2, 3 . . . command (Window menu)
1, 2, 3 . . . command (Window menu)

Switches to the corresponding document and makes it active.


 Opens a flyout where you can choose from a variety of line styles. Press the ESC key to exit without making a selection.


 Previews your custom fountain fill. You can add, remove, or edit color markers by clicking in the marker bar just above the preview ribbon.


 Adjusts the midpoint of the color blend.


 Opens a flyout where you can choose from a variety of line -ending shapes. Press the ESC key to exit without making a selection.


Corel Add-ons how to


To install a Corel Add-on for VENTURA

1.	Click Tools, Add-ons.

2.	Click New.

3.	If the Corel Add-on is not in the default folder, chose the drive and folder where the Add-on is stored.

4.	Double-click the Corel Add-on that you want to install.

Tip

·	You can use wild cards (* and ?) to find the file you want to open. For example, typing adds*.cao in the File Name box and clicking OK lists all CAO files in the selected folder beginning with adds. Typing ad?.cao in the File Name box and clicking OK lists all CAO files in the selected folder that begin with ad and are followed by only one more character.

·	Click [image] for information about adding a description to a Corel Add-on function. This description is displayed in a Tooltip pop-up window when the mouse pointer remains over the function name in the Corel Add-ons dialog box. Click the + button beside the installed Add-on for a list of functions the Add-on supports.

The description is also displayed in the VENTURA Status Bar if the Add-on function is assigned to a toolbar button and the button's Tooltip pop-up window is displayed.

 Related Topics


To remove a Corel Add-on from VENTURA

1.	Click Tools, Add-ons.

2.	Select an installed Corel Add-on.

3.	Click Uninstall.

Note

·	Removing a Corel Add-on from VENTURA does not remove it from your system.

 Related Topics


To run a function in an installed Corel Add-on

1.	Click Tools, Add-ons.

2.	Select an installed Corel Add-on.

3.	To display the function names in a Corel Add-on, click the + button beside the installed Add-on.

4.	Click Run.

Tip

·	If you often execute the same Corel Add-on function, you can assign it to a toolbar button, a menu command, or a keystroke. Click the Related Topics button for more information. Some Corel Add-ons are automatically assigned when they are installed.

 Related Topics


To hide and display the function names in the Corel Add-ons dialog box

1.	Click Tools, Add-ons.

2.	Select an installed Corel Add-on.

3.	To display a Corel Add-ons function names, click the + button beside the installed Add-on.

To hide a Corel Add-ons function names, click the - button beside the installed Add-on.

 Related Topics


To assign a Corel Add-on to a shortcut key

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the Add-ons folder. This folder does not exist if there are not any Add-ons installed in VENTURA.

4.	Click the Add-on that you want to assign. Add-ons are listed in the following format:

(Add-on Name)Function Name

5.	Click the Press New Shortcut Key box.

6.	Press the keyboard combination that you want to assign to the command. To make a correction, press the BACKSPACE key.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL+ALT+1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1,2,3, and 4 keys in succession.

Note

·	To have accelerator conflicts resolved automatically, enable Go To Conflict On Assign.

 Related Topics


To assign a Corel Add-on to a menu

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the Add-ons folder. This folder does not exist if there are not any Add-ons installed in VENTURA.

4.	Click the Add-on you want to assign. Add-ons are listed in the following format:

(Add-on Name)Function Name

5.	In the Menu box, click the menu or sub-menu where you want to add the command.

6.	Click Add.

Tip

·	Use the Separator button to add organizational lines to your menus.

 Related Topics


To assign a Corel Add-on to a VENTURA toolbar button

1.	Activate the toolbar that you want to edit.

2.	Click Tools, Customize.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the Add-ons folder. This folder does not exist if there are not any Add-ons installed in VENTURA.

4.	Click the Add-on that you want to assign. Add-ons are listed in the following format:

(Add-on Name)Function Name

5.	Drag the appropriate command button to the toolbar. Right-click to cancel the movement.

 Related Topics


To assign a description to an installed Corel Add-on function

A description for a Corel Add-on function is displayed in a Tooltip pop-up window when the mouse pointer remains over the function name in the Corel Add-ons dialog box. Click the + button beside the installed Add-on for a list of functions the Add-on supports.

The description is also displayed in the VENTURA Status Bar if the Add-on function is assigned to a toolbar button and the button's Tooltip pop-up window is displayed.

To assign a description:

1.	Open the VENTURA.INI file for editing. This file is found in the C:\Corel\VENTURA folder in a typical installation.

2. Find the section detailing the installed Corel Add-on where the function resides. This section is displayed in the following manner:

[CAO_AddOnName]

Function1=FunctionName

Function2=FunctionName

...

where AddOnName indicates the name of the installed Corel Add-on and FunctionName indicates the name(s) of the functions within the Add-on.

3.	Insert a pound symbol and the description beside the function name. For example:

[CAO_AddOnName]

Function1=FunctionName#Description for the first function

Function2=FunctionName#Description for the second function

...

4.	Save the VENTURA.INI file and restart VENTURA for the descriptions to take effect.

 Related Topics


Vertical Justification

You can use Corel VENTURA's Vertical Justification (VJ) controls to align text baselines automatically across columns and at the bottom of each page.

VJ works by adding space before and after frames, tables, paragraphs, and, if desired, between each line of text.

When turned on, vertical justification uses either of two methods to add spacing between paragraphs [image] Feathering or Carding.

Carding

Carding adds space in increments equal to the inter-line spacing of the Body Text paragraph tag (or other tag or amount specified using the Format, Chapter command) to align baselines across columns and facing pages. To use VJ, set the controls as follows:

•	in the Format Chapter Properties Typography dialog box, set VJ to Carding

•	in the Chapter Properties Typography dialog box, set First Baseline to Inter-Line

•	in the Format Frame Properties Typography dialog box, set VJ to carding

Maximum settings on the Typography tab in the Chapter, Tag, Paragraph, and Frame Properties dialog boxes and the Position tab in the Table Properties Position dialog box limit the amount of space Corel VENTURA can add (using either Feathering or Carding) before, between, or after inter-lines of paragraphs, and above and below frames and tables.

Using Carding, Corel VENTURA adds spacing during VJ in multiples of the inter-line spacing of the Body Text paragraph tag. For example, if VJ is set to a maximum of 10 points and the Body Text inter-line setting is 12 points, Corel VENTURA adds no space to these elements during the process of vertical justification.

Feathering

Feathering adds whatever space is needed to align text baselines across columns and at the bottoms of pages.

Using Feathering, Corel VENTURA adds spacing during VJ in any amount up to the maximum setting indicated on the Typography tab in the Chapter, Tag, Paragraph, Frame Properties dialog boxes and the Position tab in the Table Properties dialog box. For example, if VJ is set to a maximum of 10 and the Body Text inter-line setting is 12, Corel VENTURA can add any amount of space up from 0 to 10 points during the process of vertical justification.

Space added around frames

Corel VENTURA has four settings which control whether Vertical justification is used and how space is added above and below frames.

•	Default and Off

Choose default if you want Corel VENTURA to add space based on the Around Frame Spacing settings in the Chapter Typography dialog box. The Off setting turns vertical justification off for the frame; no space is added during VJ.

•	Moveable and Fixed

Choose Moveable to allow Corel VENTURA to move frames as it vertically justifies pages, and choose Fixed if you want the frames to stay where they are. To override this setting for individual frames, use the Format, Frame Typography command.

Click Related Topics for more information about how Corel VENTURA adds space during vertical justification.

 Related Topics


How Corel VENTURA adds space during vertical justification

Spacing is added during vertical justification in the following order:

1.	Between frames and the surrounding text, until the maximum amount allowed for each frame is added.

2.	If additional space is needed, it is added between paragraphs or tables and paragraphs until the maximum amount allowed for each paragraph or table is added.

3.	Finally, if more space is still needed, it is added between lines of text until the maximum amount allowed for each paragraph is added.

Vertical justification is appropriate for most documents where text flows from page to page. For forms, advertisements etc., vertical justification is unnecessary.

Tip

•	If you want body text baselines to align across columns and facing pages, make sure that the inter-line spacing settings for all paragraphs is based on multiples of the Body Text paragraph tag's inter-line spacing (leading) setting. For example, if the inter-line spacing of the Body Text tag is 12 points, set the inter-line spacing of your headings to multiples of that (e.g., 24 points).

 Related Topics


Tracking and Kerning

Kerning is the process of customizing the spacing of specific letter pairs, while tracking is the process of uniformly adding to or reducing the horizontal spacing of any selected text. Certain letter pairs should be placed more closely together to eliminate extra white space that sometimes appears between them, even in proportionally spaced fonts. For instance, the letter pair "AV" sometimes requires kerning at large font sizes to improve readability.

Tracking is often used to expand or condense text to fit a given space. It's also used to "tighten" paragraphs to eliminate lines with just a couple of words.

With Corel VENTURA, you can edit tracking and kerning in your document as indicated below:

•	Set Pair Kerning using the Format, Chapter Typography command if you want all of the text in the chapter kerned automatically.

•	Turn on Automatic Kerning for the paragraph you are working on using the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command (Typography tab). If you use the Paragraph Overrides command, VENTURA kerns all letter pairs in paragraphs with the same tag automatically, but other paragraphs are not affected.

•	Manually kern selected text using shortcut keys to increase or decrease spacing. This method overrides automatic kerning.

•	Use the Format, Edit Kerning and Tracking command to change default kerning values and the preset tracking values. You can add new or remove existing kern pairs from a font or change the defaults for the five built-in tracking settings (Loose, Very Loose, Normal, Tight, and Very Tight).

Note

•	Kerning and tracking information is stored with the document and does not change the original font on your system. To use the same kerning and tracking in another document, import the information using the Tracking & Kerning command in the Format menu.

 Related Topics


Column Balancing

In most cases, the Column Balance option distributes lines of text evenly at the top and bottom margins of multi-column layouts by making sure that each column has the same number of lines. Inter-line and inter-paragraph spacing are not adjusted.

Column balance is also affected by the Widow and Orphan controls, Frame-Wide Text, Keep With Next Paragraph, and Line Space Above. How these options affect column balance are described below.

Widows and Orphans [image] Format, Chapter and Frame Typography commands

The Widow and Orphan settings can make columns uneven when they force text to the next column or page.

Keep With Next Paragraph [image] Format, Paragraph Breaks command

The Keep With Next setting can make columns uneven when it forces lines or paragraphs to the next column or page.

Above line spacing [image] Format, Paragraph Spacing command

The Above line spacing setting adds space above the current paragraph. If you also turn on either Add Space At Column Top, or Add Space Only At Column Top, the space is added between the top margin and the text.

Frame wide text

This option allows you to have the paragraph span all columns in a multi-column layout. If you use this option, you should also enable Column Balance for the frame, otherwise text may not flow properly between columns. See To allow paragraphs to span columns.

Note

•	If a two-column page contains an odd number of lines, one column will be a line shorter than the other. Vertical Justification can resolve this problem.

 Related Topics


Lining up text baselines

You can ensure that baselines line up across columns and pages by setting inter-line spacing as a factor or multiple of the inter-line spacing of the body (i.e., main ) text. For example, if the Body Text inter-line spacing is 12 points, the inter-line settings for other paragraph tags should be 6, 12, 24, 36 points and so on.

To align text baselines, the vertical justification controls in the following locations must be set to Carding:

•	Chapter Typography (Format menu)

•	Frame Typography (Format menu)

Tip

•	For headlines, reduced inter-line spacing ties the lines together, making them more readable.

 Related Topics


How VENTURA calculates total space between paragraphs

Space between paragraphs is controlled by the Above, Below, and Inter-Paragraph Spacing settings on the Spacing tab in the Tag Properties and Paragraph Properties dialog box (Format menu). The First Baseline setting in the Chapter Typography and Frame Typography dialog boxes (Format menu) determines the formula Corel VENTURA uses to calculate space between paragraphs.

The First Baseline settings [image] Cap-Height or Inter-Line [image] determine where the first line of text begins on a page or in a frame in Corel VENTURA.

Inter-Line

The Inter-Line setting moves text down from the top margin by an amount equal to the Body Text inter-line spacing and uses the following algorithm to calculate spacing between paragraphs:

•	the Space Below value of the first paragraph, or the Space Above value for the second paragraph, whichever is greater,

plus

•	the inter-paragraph spacing if it is the same value for both the first and second paragraphs,

plus

•	the inter-line spacing of the second paragraph.

Cap-Height

The Cap-Height setting aligns uppercase letters with the top margin and sets up the following formula to calculate spacing between paragraphs:

1.	When the type size is the same for the first and second paragraphs on the page, the space between paragraphs equals:

•	Either the Space Below value of the first paragraph, or the Space Above value for the second paragraph, whichever is greater,

plus

•	the inter-paragraph spacing, if it is the same value for both paragraphs,

plus

•	the inter-line spacing of the first paragraph.

2.	When the type size is larger in the first paragraph, then the space between paragraphs equals:

•	Either the Space Below value for the first paragraph or the Space Above value for the second paragraph, whichever is greater,

plus

•	the Inter-Paragraph Spacing if it is the same value for both paragraphs,

plus

•	the Inter-Line spacing of the first paragraph plus the difference in type sizes between the first and second paragraphs.

3.	When the type size is larger in the second paragraph, then the space between paragraphs equals:

•	Either the Space Below value for the first paragraph, or the Space Above value for the second paragraph, whichever is greater,

plus

•	the inter-paragraph spacing, if it is the same value for both paragraphs,

plus

•	the Inter-Line spacing of the first paragraph minus the difference in type sizes between the first and second paragraphs.

Other paragraph formatting attributes, such as a ruling line below the first paragraph, or a ruling line above the second paragraph, affects the spacing between paragraphs. However, the overall space of these attributes is simply added to the paragraph space as calculated previously.

 Related Topics


Grids, guidelines, and other alignment aids

Grids, guidelines, and other alignment controls will help you to place text and objects on the page with precision. The more precisely you can control objects in your page layout, the easier your job will be.

If you create a multi-column layout for a newsletter, for example, page design standards would dictate that pictures align with the columns and lines of text align across columns. Corel VENTURA grids make setting up this kind of alignment easier. You can turn the display of the drawing grid and column guides on and off, set objects to snap to them, and change their spacing settings to suit your needs. The Nudge feature enables you to move a selected object by pressing the Arrow keys.

The following alignment aids are available in Corel VENTURA:

•	The Baseline Grid [image] an invisible grid based on the inter-line spacing of the paragraph tag you specify. You can set up the baseline grid to align text baselines across columns and pages, and set frames to snap to the baseline grid, which is measured from the top margin of the page.

You can also use Corel VENTURA's Vertical Justification feature to align text baselines across columns and facing pages automatically. Click Related Topics for more information.

•	The Drawing Grid [image] a network of lines set up along horizontal and vertical axes on the page. You can customize the frequency of the lines, location of the origin (x/y point), and how the grid is displayed using the Page, Grid/Guidelines Setup command. You can also create different grid setups for different pages by selecting the base page frame and changing the grid properties.

•	Guidelines [image] Non-printing vertical and horizontal lines that you can drag from the ruler onto the page to line up elements. You can drag as many guidelines onto the page as you need or use them on the master page to make them available to each page. You can place guidelines with numeric precision and lock them in place if required using Page, Grid/Guidelines Setup command.

•	Column Guides [image] used in newspaper and other multi-column page layouts; they show the areas on the base page where you can type text.

•	Frame/Graphic Alignment toolbar [image] used to align frames and graphic objects relative to each other or the page. You can select one or more objects and choose from the available options.

•	Rulers [image] measurement and alignment aids normally displayed along the top and left sides of the document window. You can change the units of measure (inches, picas, etc.) to suit your needs. To change the location of the Ruler Zero Point, drag the crosshairs from the top-left corner of any document window. You can also set tabs, indents and margins from the rulers, and pull the rulers onto the page to check measurement and alignment.

Snapping

The ability to snap to grids adds both control and speed to the layout process. Instead of needing to drag objects to an exact location, you can drag them near the grid or guideline and the object snaps, or jumps, to the closest grid line or guideline.

If you prefer, you can leave snapping turned off, and drag frames into their final positions manually. Regular text wraps at column guides and you can turn on column snap to make your frames snap into place next to them. Artistic Text behaves like any graphic object and can snap to grids and guidelines, but not column guides.

 Related Topics


Setting up the grid


To show or hide the grid

1.	Click Page, Grid/Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Grid tab.

3.	Click Show Grid.

Tip

•	You can also show or hide the grid by selecting the base page frame and clicking [image] in the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


To set the color of the grid

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the View tab.

3.	Click the Grid color button.

4.	Click a color.

Tip

•	To choose from a larger selection of colors, or to use a custom color, click Others to open the Color dialog box.

 Related Topics


To set the unit of measurement for the grid

1.	Click Page, Grid/Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Grid tab.

3.	Click the right mouse button in the Horizontal or Vertical box.

4.	Click Units.

5.	Click the unit of measurement you want to use.

6.	Repeat steps 3 to 5 for the other box.

 Related Topics


To set the grid spacing and origin

1.	Click outside the border of the page on which you want to set up the grid.

To use the same grid settings on all pages, click View, Master Page.

2.	Click Page, Grid/Guidelines Setup.

3.	Click the Grid tab.

4.	Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes to set the spacing between grid lines.

5.	Type values in the X and Y boxes to set the grid origin [image] that is, the location where you want the zero points on the rulers to be.

Tip

•	You can also set the grid origin by dragging crosshairs from the lower right corner of the box where the rulers meet.

Note

•	The number of grid lines that display depends on the magnification factor. If you space the grid lines closer together [image] for example, 0.1 inches apart [image] you won't see grid lines every tenth of an inch unless you zoom in on the page.

 Related Topics


To enable or disable snap to grid

1.	Click View, Snap.

2.	Click Grid.

Notes

•	You cannot have the Snap to Grid, Guidelines, Column Guides or Inter-line options enabled at the same time.

•	Guidelines snap to the grid when the Snap To Grid option is enabled.

Tip

•	You can also enable and disable the Snap to Grid option by selecting the base page frame and clicking [image] in the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Setting up guidelines


To show or hide guidelines

1.	Click Page, Grid/Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Guidelines tab.

3.	Click Show Guidelines.

Tip

•	You can also show or hide guidelines by selecting the base page frame and clicking [image] in the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


To add guidelines

1.	Display the page on which you want to add the guidelines.

To use the same set of guidelines on every page, place them on the master page.

2.	Click Page, Grid/Guidelines Setup.

3.	Click the Guidelines tab.

4.	In the Vertical or Horizontal box, type a position relative to the zero points on the rulers.

5.	Click Add.

Tips

•	You can also add guidelines by holding down the SHIFT key and dragging from the rulers.

•	To change the unit of measurement, right-click in the Vertical or Horizontal box. Then, click Unit and choose the unit you want to use.

•	You can also display the Grid/Guidelines dialog box by double-clicking a guideline.

 Related Topics


To move a guideline

1.	Display the page containing the guidelines you want to move.

If the guidelines are on the Master Page, click View, Master Page. Otherwise, the changes you make to the guidelines will apply to the current page only.

2.	Click Page, Grid/Guidelines Setup.

3.	Click the Guidelines tab.

4.	Choose the guideline that you want to move from the list of guidelines. The guidelines are listed by location.

5.	Specify the location you want relative to the 0 point on the ruler.

6.	Click Move.

Tips

•	You can also move a guideline by dragging it.

•	You can also display the Grid/Guidelines dialog box by double-clicking a guideline.

 Related Topics


To remove a guideline

1.	Display the page containing the guideline you want to remove.

If the guidelines are on the Master Page, click View, Master Page. Otherwise, the changes you make to the guidelines will apply to the current page only.

2.	Click Page, Grid/Guidelines Setup.

3.	Click the Guidelines tab.

4.	Click the guideline that you want to remove from the list of guidelines. The guidelines are listed by location.

5.	Click Delete.

Tip

•	You can also remove a guideline by dragging it off the page.

•	You can also display the Grid/Guidelines dialog box by double-clicking a guideline.

 Related Topics


To enable or disable the Snap to Guidelines option

1.	Click View, Snap.

2.	Click Guidelines.

Tip

•	You can also enable and disable the Snap to Guidelines option by selecting the base page frame and clicking [image] in the Property Bar.

Notes

•	You can't have the Snap to Guidelines and the Snap to Grid options enabled at the same time.

•	Guidelines snap to the grid when Snap To Grid is enabled.

 Related Topics


Setting up rulers


To show or hide the rulers

•	Click View, Rulers.

Tip

•	You can also show or hide the rulers by selecting the base page frame and clicking [image] in the Property Bar.

•	You can maximize the space available for your document by using the Auto Hide feature which displays the rulers only when you point to the top or left side of the document window. To enable the feature, right-click either ruler, then click Auto Hide.

 Related Topics


To set the size of the rulers

1.	Click Tools, Ruler Setup.

2.	Click a Ruler Size radio button.

Tip

•	You can also display the Properties for Rulers dialog box by right-clicking the rulers.

 Related Topics


To set the default tab alignment for tabs added using the ruler

1.	Click Tools, Ruler Setup.

2.	Choose a style from the Tab Style list box.

Tip

•	You can also set the default tab alignment by clicking the Tab button located where the rulers meet.

 Related Topics


To set the position of the zero points on the rulers

1.	Click Tools, Ruler Setup.

2.	Type coordinates in the boxes under Ruler Origin.

3.	Click an option under Ruler Zero Point to specify whether you want the zero points to coincide with the page or the selected frame.

Tip

•	You can also set the zero points by dragging crosshairs from the lower right corner of the box where the rulers meet. This applies only when the zero points are set to coincide with the page, not the current frame.

•	To move the crosshairs without having them snap to the tick marks on the rulers, hold down the SHIFT key as you drag.

 Related Topics


To set the unit of measurement for the rulers

1.	Click Tools, Ruler Setup.

2.	Click the unit of measurement you want the Vertical and Horizontal rulers to use.

Tip

•	You can also set the unit of measurement by right-clicking on the rulers.

 Related Topics


To move the rulers onto the document window

1.	Point to the lower right corner of the button where the rulers intersect.

The pointer will change to a crosshair.

2.	Hold down the SHIFT key and drag the rulers to the desired location.

Tip

•	To return the rulers to the edges of the window, double-click the lower-right corner of the intersection button. Thereafter, double-clicking on the lower-right corner moves the rulers to their previous position.

•	To move the rulers without having them snap to the ruler tick marks, hold down the SHIFT key as you drag.

 Related Topics


To drag the ruler crosshairs onto the document window

1.	Point to the lower-right corner of the box where the rulers meet.

The pointer changes to a set of crosshairs.

2.	Click and drag onto the document window.

 Note

•	The zero points on the rulers are reset to the spot where you release the mouse button.

•	To move the crosshairs without having them snap to the tick marks on the rulers, hold down the SHIFT key as you drag.

 Related Topics


To set vertical and horizontal alignment for paragraphs

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Choose the alignment options you want from the Text Alignment lists.

For more information about the options, click Related Topics and choose "Paragraph alignment options."

Tip

•	You can also adjust a paragraph's alignment using the Property Bar or by clicking Quick Format on the Align tab in the Paragraph Properties dialog box and choosing a preset format.

 Related Topics


Paragraph alignment options

The following tables described the options available in VENTURA for aligning paragraphs.

Horizontal alignment options

Choose...	To...

Left	align the paragraph at the left margin or the left indent

Right	align the paragraph at the right margin or the right indent.

Center	center the paragraph between the left and right margins or indents.

Justified	aligns the paragraph with the both the left and right margins or indents

Forced justified	justify the last line in a paragraph contains only a few characters. You may want to force justify a heading to make it stretch across the column or page.

Decimal	aligns the paragraph on a particular character. Use decimal alignment to align a column of numbers along the decimal point.

Vertical alignment options

Choose...	To...

Top	align the first line of the paragraph with the top margin

Middle	center the paragraph between the top and bottom margins

Bottom	align the last paragraph at with the bottom margin

Absolute	to start the paragraph a specific distance from the top margin. The paragraph will always start at the position, which may result in the preceding paragraphs overlapping this one.

Note

•	Enabling the Hanging Punctuation option sets characters specified using the Format, Chapter command (General tab) outside the margins. Hanging punctuation eliminates the visual misalignment that occurs when punctuation falls at the beginning or end of lines. For more information, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To set punctuation outside the margins
To position punctuation outside the margins

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Enable the Hanging Punctuation checkbox.

Whenever lines in the paragraph start or end with certain characters, VENTURA will set the characters in the margin. This keeps punctuation from interrupting the visual alignment of text along the margins. Use the Format, Chapter command (General tab) to specify which characters you want to hang in the margins.

For more information about Hanging Punctuation, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To create bar code objects

1.	Click Insert, Object.

2.	Click Corel BARCODE Object from the Object Type list.

The Bar Code Wizard appears to guide you through the following steps to create a bar code:

3.	Choose one of the industry-standard bar coding formats and click Next.

4.	Enter the number you want to give your bar code and click Next.

5.	Choose one of the following:

By Font Name: Enables you to choose a font for your bar code.

By Bar Code Attributes: Enables you to set readability and bar width reduction options.

6.	Click Next to move to the next step.

7.	Choose the font and point size as required and click Next.

8.	Preview your bar code and make changes, if required.

Notes

·	You can click Back at any time to make changes to a previous step.

·	Bar codes generated by the Bar Code Wizard are OLE objects and as such cannot be rotated in Corel VENTURA. To rotate a bar code, you must enter the bar code digits as regular text and then format the digits using a bar code font [image] for example, PostNet or Upc. You then rotate the bar code as you would a regular paragraph. VENTURA supplies several bar codes fonts in Adobe Type 1 and True Type formats. The Bar Code Wizard installs only one of the available bar code fonts. If you require others, you can install them by running the Bar Code Wizard.

 Related Topics


To edit bar codes

1.	Select a bar code object you want to open.

2.	Click Edit, CorelBarCode Object.

3.	Click Edit from the flyout.

The Bar Code Wizard opens with the 11-digit number in the window.

Tip

·	You can also double-click any bar code object with the mouse button to open the Bar Code Wizard to edit the currently selected bar code.

 Related Topics


To create a new document
Creating a new document

When you create a new document you can begin from scratch with a single blank chapter or you can use another document as a model. The model can be a copy of the document or a template, which contains only the chapters, text files and pictures files you want to use in the new document. In either case, the model document is not affected by changes you make to the new document.

What do you want to do?

Create a new, blank document

Open a copy of an existing document

Create a document using a template

 Related Topics


To create a new, blank document

•	Click the [image] button on the toolbar.

 Related Topics


To open a copy of an existing document

1.	Click File, New.

2.	Click a tab, then click the name of the document you want to base the new document on.

VENTURA opens a copy of the selected document. Any changes you make to the copy do not affect the original document.

 Related Topics


To open a document

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	In the Files of Type list box, choose Publication File (*.vp).

3.	In the Look in box, click the drive where the document is stored.

4.	Double-click the folder where the document is stored.

5.	Double-click the document.

 Note

•	You can use the File, Open command to open documents created in several popular word processors including Microsoft Word 6 and Corel WordPerfect 6.0. Using the Open command preserves the styles used to format the text in these document. Importing, on the other hand, retains none of the styles.

 Related Topics


To open a document created in VENTURA 3.x, 4.x., or 5.x

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	In the Files of Type list box, choose 3.x, 4.x 5.x Publications (*.PUB) to open the entire document or 3.x, 4.x, 5.x Chapter (*.chp) to open a specific chapter.

3.	In the Look in box, click the drive where the document is stored.

4.	Double-click the folder where the document is stored.

5.	Double-click the document or chapter.

When you open a document that uses more than one stylesheet, a dialog box appears so that you can specify how you want the tags merged into a single stylesheet. Click Related Topics for more information about using the Wizard.

 Tip

•	If you have many pre-version 7 documents, consider using the VCONVERT script to convert them to version 7 format. For more information about scripts and how to run them, click Related and choose "Scripts and wizards included with VENTURA."

Note

•	If the document uses more than one layout style (book, booklet, card etc.), VENTURA takes the layout of the first chapter and applies it to the others.

•	If the document contains text or picture files that have the same name, but are located in different folders, VENTURA will add an underscore and a number to the _

•	If the document contains text or pictures files with the same name, VENTURA will add an underscore and a number to the filename, producing names such as logo_1.eps, logo_2.eps etc.

 Related Topics


To close a document

•	Click File, Close.

 Note

•	If you have not saved your document, VENTURA will prompt you to save it before closing.

 Related Topics


To exit Corel VENTURA

•	Click File, Exit.

 Note

•	If you have not saved your document(s), VENTURA will prompt you to save before exiting.

 Related Topics


To save a document

1.	Click File, Save.

2.	In the Save in box, click the drive where you want to store the document.

3.	Double-click the folder where you want to store the document.

4.	Type a filename in the File name box.

 Related Topics


To save a copy of a document under a new name

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	In the Save in box, click the drive where you want to store the document.

3.	Double-click the folder where you want to store the document.

4.	Type a filename in the File name box.

 Related Topics


To print a document

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click an option under Print Range to specify the portion of the document that you want to print. If you click Pages, you must also enter the page numbers or page ranges you want.

3.	Click OK.

 Tip

To print a proof copy of your document without EPS pictures and complex fills, which slow down printing, use the Quick Print command on the File menu. For more information, click Related Topic.

 Note

•	In Copy Editor view, the document prints exactly as it appears on screen. If you don't want tag names and markup codes to print, hide them using the Tools, Option command.

 Related Topics


Printing proof copies of your document

Use the Quick Print on the File menu to produce a proof copy to check the layout of you document before printing the final version. Quick Print reduces printing time by printing the document minus complex fills such as fountains and with image headers instead of EPS pictures. If an EPS picture lacks a header, a gray rectangle prints instead of the picture.

When using Quick Print to print multiple pages, all pages print with the same orientation (portrait or landscape) as the current page or the first page in the range you specify. If the document contains a mix of portrait and landscape pages, use the Print command to ensure that they print with correct orientation.

 Note

•	The Selection and Collate options in the Print dialog box are unavailable when using the Quick Print feature.

 Related Topics


To undo the last action you performed

•	Click Edit, Undo.

 Related Topics


To redo your last undo
To restore the last action you reversed

•	Click Edit, Redo.

 Related Topics


To change the units of measure in a dialog box
To change the units of measurement in a dialog box

1.	Right-click the number box with the unit of measurement you want to change.

2.	Choose Units.

3.	Click the unit you want to use.

 Note

•	Changing the unit of measure for the upper-left number box in a group changes the unit for the entire group.

 Tip

•	You can change the units for all dialog boxes at the same time using the Units command in the Tools menu.


Sending documents in electronic mail

You can send a VENTURA document as an attachment to an electronic mail message. To mail a document you need Microsoft Exchange or other Windows 95 compatible mail system.

To access the mail system from VENTURA, assign the Send command to a menu or a toolbar button using the Customize command in the Tools menu. (See Related Topics for more information.). Then, click the command or button. Next, enter the information your mail system requires, then send the message.

 Note

•	To email or copy the entire document all of it's component files must be embedded rather than linked.

 Related Topics


Tips on using the Property Bar

The Property Bar is an alternative to using dialog boxes to change the formatting of text, frames, tables and other objects. When using the Property Bar, keep the following points in mind:

•	Press ENTER after typing a value in a box to register the change.

•	If you need to type values in two or more boxes, type the first value, press Tab to advance to the next box, then type the second value. Continue in this fashion refraining from press ENTER until you've typed the last value.

•	If you use a keyboard shortcut or the Tab key to select a list box as opposed to clicking it with the mouse, you must press ENTER after selecting an item from the list.

•	To switch the Property Bar used to format paragraphs from tag mode to override mode, click the [image] button or right-click a paragraph and choose Override mode.

•	To change the formatting of whole paragraphs with the Property Bar, use the [image] tool to select the paragraph or click the paragraph while holding down the ALT key. If the Property Bar is in override mode, the keyboard selection technique changes to ALT + CTRL.


To launch applications from the Corel Application Launcher

1.	Click the Corel Application Launcher toolbar button [image].

2.	Click the application you want to run.

Note

•	If the Corel Application Launcher is not available on a toolbar in the Corel SCRIPT Editor or another Corel application (which supports this feature), click Tools, Customize, Toolbars tab to add the Launcher to the Toolbar.

 Related Topics


Moving through a document


To move to a specific page

1.	Click View, Go To.

2.	Enter the page number.

3.	From the Page Mode list, choose which page numbers to use to locate a page.

Page Number numbers coincide with the physical location of the page within the document and appear first in the page number area of the Status Bar.

Page Counter numbers differ from physical page numbers when numbering is restarted at some point in the document [image] for example, at the beginning of each chapter. Page counter numbers appear in parentheses in the Status Bar.

4.	Click a Relative to option.

5.	Click Go To.

Note

•	You can also open the Go To dialog by double-clicking the Page number indicator in the Status Bar.

Tip

•	You can also move through a document using the Navigator. (See Related Topics.)

 Related Topics


To move to a specific chapter

1.	Click View, Go To.

2.	Click Chapter.

3.	Select the chapter you want to go to from the list box.

4.	Click Go To.

Tip

•	You can also move through a document using the Navigator. For more information about using the Navigator, click Related Topics.

•	You can use the Tools, Customize command to add buttons for moving back and forth between chapters. The buttons in question are in the Navigation folder in the Customize dialog box. For more information, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To move to a page containing text from a selected file

1.	Click View, Go To Page.

2.	Select Ventura page numbers from the list box.

3.	Click File.

4.	Choose a file from the file list box.

5.	Enter a page number.

6.	Click Go To.

Tip

•	You can also move through a document using the Navigator. For more information about using the Navigator, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To move to a specific text file in the Copy Editor

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Click the down arrow [image] on the text file list box.

3.	Select the file that you want to view.

Tip

•	You can also move through a document using the Navigator. For more information about using the Navigator, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Using the Navigator


To open the Navigator

•	Click Tools, Navigator.

 Related Topics


To move to a chapter using the Navigator

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Select Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Double-click the publication containing the chapter to expand the structure.

4.	Select the chapter you want to move to.

5.	Right-click on the chapter, then select Go To.

 Related Topics


To open a document from the Navigator

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Place the cursor on the background of the navigator.

3.	Right-click, choose Open Publication.

4.	Browse to find the document.

5.	Select the document.

6.	Click Open.

 Related Topics


To move to another location using the Index

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Index from the list box.

3.	Select an Index entry.

4.	Right-click on the entry, then select Go To.

 Related Topics


To move to another location using the Table of Contents

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Table of Contents from the list box.

3.	Select a Contents item.

4.	Right-click on the item, choose Go To.

 Related Topics


To move to another location using cross-references

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Cross-References from the list box.

3.	Select a cross-reference.

4.	Right-click on the cross-reference, then select Go To.

 Related Topics


To move to a specific text file in the Navigator

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Index from the list box.

3.	Select an Index entry.

4.	Right-click on the item, then select Go To.

 Related Topics


Creating color and managing palettes

Corel VENTURA offers a variety of color dialog boxes you can use to do the following:

·	apply color for solid fills to frames and graphic objects

·	change the fill type from linear, radial, conical, or square, with controls for changing the angle

·	apply preset effects like paint, paper, and other special textures and patterns

·	apply color outlines to frames and drawing objects

·	choose colors from color models, color matching palettes, and custom palettes

·	mix custom colors using the mixing areas

·	create custom palettes

Color dialog boxes appear under a variety of names (including Uniform Fill, Fountain Fill, Fill Color, Outline Color, Paint Color, Paper Color, and Outline Color) from the Fill and Outline tools in the Toolbox and the Most Recently Used Color (MRU) Palette on the toolbar at the top of your screen.

 Related Topics


Color dialog boxes

You can use the Color dialog boxes to create or apply colors for solid fills, outlines, and paint, paper, and other preset effects to frames and graphic objects. You can create custom colors in  the mixing areas and save them in custom palettes that you organize into libraries.

Color dialog boxes appear under a variety of names (including Uniform Fill, Fountain Fill, Fill Color, and Outline Color) from the Fill and Outline tools in the Toolbox and the Most Recently Used Color (MRU) Palette on the toolbar at the top of your screen.

Features of the dialog box

Use the left side of the dialog box to choose from color models, color matching palettes, and mixers. You can choose colors from the models and palettes and blend them in the mixers. The Color Options menu provides commands for creating new colors and adding them to the custom palette.

You can use the right side of the dialog box to develop the custom palette. The Palette Options menu provides options for starting new palettes, deleting colors from the current palette, and saving and loading the palettes you develop. Within the custom palette area, you can reorganize and rename the color swatches.

The upper-right portion of the dialog box includes the Reference and New Color swatches. The Reference Color swatch shows either the color of the selected object or the last color used as the reference. The New Color swatch shows the color you are editing in the dialog box. You can use these swatches to fine tune the edited color by comparing the difference between the two colors; the color component fields provide values based on the color model chosen. When the new color is not in the printer's color space, a third swatch appears to show the closest printable color based on the color mapping technique defined in the Color Manager.

Notes on using color

You can choose color from models, palettes, and mixing areas to create custom palettes. And you can use the Color dialog boxes to apply color to frames or graphic objects, without adding it to the palette.

The way you use color depends on the content of the document or illustration. For more information on Color Palettes and models, see Using color models to choose color and Using palettes to choose color.

 Related Topics


Using color models to choose color

Guidelines for using color models

While there are no constraints on your choice of color from any color space, you should try to use color discriminately.

Documents are best developed in RGB, CMY, HSB, HLS, L*a*b*, or YIQ since these color spaces produce the truest representation on screen. Your choice of model is probably determined by personal preference (for example, it may be more intuitive for you to work in HSB than in RGB). You can use colors from the CMYK color space, but you must be certain of how the color will look in the context of the document once it is printed.

In a properly calibrated system, you can use color correction under the View menu to simulate on screen how the printed document or illustration will look. Device calibration and system profiling are set up through the Color Manager.

In Corel VENTURA, you can choose colors from the following color spaces:

·	CMYK

·	CMYK 255

·	CMY

·	RGB

·	HSB

·	HLS

·	L*a*b*

·	YIQ

·	Grayscale

·	Registration

 Related Topics


Using palettes to choose color

Palettes offer a range of pre-defined colors that you can use either on the document or illustration, or mix with colors from color models and other palettes to create new colors. The palettes available in color dialog boxes are the color matching palettes and custom palettes.

Color matching palettes

Color matching palettes offer reference colors that correspond to the following established color matching systems:

·	DIC Color Guides

·	DuPont Spectramaster Solid Color Library

·	FOCOLTONE Color System

·	PANTONE Spot Color

·	PANTONE Process Color

·	PANTONE Hexachrome

·	TOYO INK COLOR FINDER system

·	TRUMATCH 4-Color Swatching System

FOCOLTONE, PANTONE, and TRUMATCH are commonly used in commercial printing; DuPont is used for industrial coatings and colorants. DIC and TOYO are popular color matching systems used in Japan, based on specialty inks from the manufacturer. Typically, if you use the palette that corresponds to the color matching system used for a particular project, you can be reasonably sure that the printed color will match the color of the swatch. It's a good idea to renew your swatch books regularly, since faded swatches lead to poor color choices. Renewing your swatches ensures that the color you choose on screen is the color you chose from the swatch book.

There is also a Uniform Colors palette, which includes 255 pre-defined RGB colors. You can use it to quickly choose from a range of colors in the RGB color space.

Custom palettes

Custom palettes are user defined. You create colors based on the color models or the color matching palettes, and then add them to the custom palette. You can create and maintain as many custom palettes as you like, saving each under a different file name.

When palettes are available

All palettes, except for the image palette, are available in the Color dialog boxes.

Documents are best designed using the uniform palette and image palette, and any custom palettes that incorporate color from the RGB, CMY, HSB, HLS, L*a*b*, or YIQ color models. These colors produce the truest representation on screen. For the custom palettes, your choice of model is probably determined by personal preference. For example, it may be more intuitive for you to work in hue, saturation, and brightness (HSB) than in RGB. You can use color from the CMYK color space and from the other color matching palettes, but you must be certain of how the color will look in the printed document.

 Related Topics


Custom palettes

The custom palette area in Color dialog boxes is reserved for the palettes that you create. VENTURA comes with one pre-defined custom palette based on the RGB color space, which you can edit or copy.

You can start new palettes, save the current palette, and open saved palettes. You can also delete and move files among folders using the Windows Explorer or File Manager. Any number of files can be organized into a library. For example, you can develop a series of custom palettes by color model and color matching palettes to derive subsets of specific color spaces.

You can modify the palette adding and deleting colors, name and rename colors, and moving color swatches around the palette. For the change to be permanent, you must save the palette (the palette is also automatically saved when you close Corel VENTURA.)

Colors can be added to a custom palette from any source [image] the document or illustration, a color model, a color matching palette, the color blend, and the mixing area. A custom palette can incorporate colors from all of these sources while retaining the color values associated with each color. When colors are taken from the color matching palettes, the color names are carried over.

Constraints on color and the custom palettes

You can use the Color dialog boxes to choose color from any model and any color-matching palette. While there are few constraints on your choice and use of color from any color space, you should strive to use color discriminately.

For more information, read the overviews under Using color models to choose color and Using palettes to choose color.

 Related Topics


Using mixers to create custom colors

There are two mixers you can use to create custom colors: the Color Blend and the Mixing Area.

Color Blend

You can use the Color Blend to create a 4-way blend of color, with gradations created across a two-dimensional square grid. Grid sizes range from 3x3 to 12x12 in single-unit increments. To create a more subtle gradation of color, you increase the grid size; decrease the grid size for more marked gradation.

You can use Color Blend on colors from anywhere within Corel VENTURA [image] from the document or illustration, the Mixing Area, a color model, a color matching palette, and any of the custom palettes that you develop. To do this, pick up the color and click the arrow next to the color button in each corner. In the Color dialog box, you can drag and drop the color directly from the custom palette.

Mixing area

The Mixing Area resembles an artist's palette on which you apply and mix colors using the Brush tool. While the Color Blend is limited to four colors, you can use an unlimited number of colors in the Mixing Area. You can match the background color to the document or illustration to see how a color will look before applying it. There is also a blend setting you can use to control how much color you apply to the mixing area to achieve subtle variations in color.

You can save a mixing area to a bitmap file. By doing this, you create a variety of mixing areas based on color models or on the needs of specific projects, and organize them into a library. Also, you can load any bitmap into the mixing area. This way, you can choose colors from bitmapped photographs and drawings.

 Related Topics


High-fidelity color

High-fidelity (HiFi) color uses additional process inks to expand the range of color achievable with CMYK colorants. The extra colorants also yield more vivid colors giving continuous tone images greater depth and detail. HiFi color can enhance any color-critical application: product packaging, posters, brochures, advertising and even fine art.

Corel VENTURA uses the PANTONE® Hexachrome Color System to define HiFi colors, a six-color process system that employs CMY, plus black, orange and green inks. Using the Kodak Color Management System (CMS), Corel VENTURA can separate high-fidelity colors defined using the PANTONE® Hexachrome Color System. The Kodak CMS also permits conversion from all commonly used color spaces [image] RGB, CMY, HSB, HLS, etc.allowing you to use illustrations from a variety of sources.

HiFi printing often uses frequency modulated (FM) or stochastic screening. Although different than the screening techniques used in conventional 4-color process printing, HiFi screening doesn't require special PostScript drivers.

If you intend to use HiFi colors, consult your service bureau or commercial printer, since special equipment is required to produce them.

 Related Topics


The Registration color model consists of a single color in the CMYK color space, for which C, M, Y, and K are at 100%. You can use this color on any object that you want to appear on all separation plates. It is ideal for company logos, job numbers, or any other identifying marks that you may need for the job. This color cannot be added to the custom palette.


To pick a color from a color model

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar). The flyout you use depends on whether you are filling or outlining the selected object.

2.	Click the Color Model radio button.

3.	Click the Model box to display a list of models.

4.	Click a color model from the list to display the visual selectors for that model.

5.	Drag the markers in the visual selectors to edit the color.

Tips

·	You can also define a color by typing values in the color component fields.

·	The color that you choose is shown in the New Color swatch. In addition to adding this color to the custom palette, you can use it directly in both the mixing area and on the drawing or image.

Notes

·	The Registration Color model is a fixed single color; all objects with this color are reproduced on all color separation plates including spot color plates.

 Related Topics


To pick a color from a color matching palette

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar). The flyout you use depends on whether you are filling or outlining the selected object.

2.	Click the Palettes radio button.

3.	Choose a palette from the Type box.

4.	Click the scroll bar to locate the color you want.

5.	Click the color to display it in the New Color swatch.

Tip

·	For PANTONE Spot Colors, you can specify a tint percentage to control color saturation (0 for low saturation to 100 for high). This enables you to print a one- or two-color job that looks like it has more color.

 Related Topics


To show palette colors by name or swatch

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar). The flyout you use depends on whether you are filling or outlining the selected object.

2.	Click the Palettes radio button.

3.	Click the Color Options button.

4.	Enable or disable Show Color Names.

Note

·	This procedure assumes that you have a palette open for color selection. To open a palette, see To pick a color from a color matching palette.

 Related Topics


To search for palette colors by name

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar). The flyout you use depends on whether you are filling or outlining the selected object.

2.	Click the Palettes radio button.

3.	Choose a palette from the Type box.

4.	Click in the Search box.

5.	Type a color name.

Tips

·	When you use a partial name in the search field, the first color with a match is shown. As you type additional characters, the search is refined. You can use a partial name to move to an area of a palette.

·	Color names consist of two parts: the palette name, and the color name or code. You can reduce typing by using only the color name or code.

·	You can search by color name when either the color names or color swatches are displayed.

 Related Topics


Mixing your own colors

To create custom colors you can use the Color Blend or the Mixing Area. The Color Blend lets you create a 4-way blend of color. The Mixing Area resembles an artist's palette on which you apply and mix any number of colors, including those in an imported bitmap image, using a brush tool.

What do you want to do?

Mix color in the color blend

Mix color in the mixing area

Learn more about mixing colors


To mix color in the color blend

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar). The flyout you use depends on whether you are filling or outlining the selected object.

2.	Click the Mixers radio button.

3.	Click the Mode box.

4.	Click Color Blend.

5.	Click a color button in one of the corners.

6.	Click a color on the palette that pops up.

7.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each color button.

8.	Enable Auto-Blend.

9.	Click the grid to choose a color.

Tips

·	Use the color blend to create the intermediary colors between highlight and shadow.

·	To use colors directly from the custom palette on the right half of the dialog box, drag and drop the color from the palette to the color button.

·	To apply the New Color to a color button, click the adjacent arrow key. This lets you pick up a color from anywhere in the dialog box and use it in the color blend.

·	Use the custom palette to collect the colors that you want to use in the color blend. You can save colors from the color models or the color matching palettes to the custom palette, and then use those colors in the color blend. Also, you can open different custom palettes while the color blend is available.

·	To change the size of the color blend grid or the color blend, click the Color Options button.

You can use a larger grid to obtain a more refined blending of color, where changes in the values of each color dimension decrease as you move between adjacent grid squares.

When you choose a different color mode, the colors in all color buttons are mapped to corresponding colors in the color model that you choose. The new colors are automatically blended if AutoBlend is enabled.

 Related Topics


To mix color in the mixing area

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar). The flyout you use depends on whether you are filling or outlining the selected object.

2.	Pick up a color from any of the color models, the color matching palettes, the color blend, the custom palette, or the mixing area.

3.	Click the Mixers radio button.

4.	Click the Mode box.

5.	Click Mixing Area.

6.	Click the Paint Brush.

7.	Type a percentage value in the Blend number box.

8.	Click the mixing area to apply the color.

Tips

·	When you pick up a color from any of the controls, it is placed in the New Color swatch and is available for the mixing area.

·	Use the custom palette to collect from the color models or the color matching palettes; you then use those colors in the color blend. Also, you can open different custom palettes while the color blend is open.

·	You can use the Blend value to increase (high value) or decrease (low value) the subtlety of blending. This feature gives you greater control over the mixing process. Use a high value when you want to gradually build up color to the desired saturation. Use a low value when you want to lay down a saturated base.

·	To change the color model or the brush size or type, click Color Options.

 Related Topics


To pick up color from the mixing area

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar). The flyout you use depends on whether you are filling or outlining the selected object.

2.	Click the Mixers radio button.

3.	Click the Mode box.

4.	Click Mixing Area.

5.	Click the Eye Dropper.

6.	Click the mixing area to pick up the mixed color.

Note

·	The color you pick up is put in the New Color swatch.

·	To clear the mixing area, click Color Options and choose Clear Bitmap.

 Related Topics


To save the mixing area

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar). The flyout you use depends on whether you are filling or outlining the selected object.

3.	Click the Mixers radio button.

4.	Click the Mode box.

5.	Click Mixing Area.

6.	Click the Color Options button.

7.	Click Save Bitmap.

8.	Type a filename into the File name field.

9.	Press the ENTER key.

Tips

·	To save to an existing file, double-click the filename in the list and then click YES on the confirm pop-up. The confirm pop-up ensures that you do not unintentionally overwrite the existing file.

·	By using the Save Bitmap and Load Bitmap menu options, you can create mixing areas for specific applications or projects, and save them to a library of mixing areas that you use in the Color dialog box.

 Related Topics


To load the mixing area with a bitmap

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar). The flyout you use depends on whether you are filling or outlining the selected object.

2.	Click the Color Options button.

3.	Click Load Bitmap.

4.	Locate the file in the list.

5.	Double-click the filename in the list.

Tips

·	If the bitmap file is not listed in the default directory, you can move to different directories using the Windows File Manager dialog box. You can also type a filename and path in the File Name field.

·	By using the Save Bitmap and Load Bitmap menu options, you can create mixing areas for specific applications or projects, and save them to a library of mixing areas that you use in the Color dialog box.

·	To clear the mixing area, click Color Options and choose Clear Bitmap.

Note

·	The Load Bitmap action is not confirmed. If you have not saved the current mixing area, you will lose any changes you made when the new mixing area loads.

 Related Topics


To pick color from the custom palette
To pick a color from the custom palette

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar). The flyout you use depends on whether you are filling or outlining the selected object.

2.	Click the scroll bar to display different areas of the custom palette.

3.	Click the color you want to pick up.

Note

·	The color is put in the New Color swatch.

 Related Topics


To add color to the custom palette

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar).

2.	Pick up a color from any of the color models, the color matching palettes, the color blend, or the mixing area.

3.	Click the Name field.

4.	Type a name for the color.

5.	Click the Color Options button.

6.	Click Add Color to Palette.

7.	Click OK to keep the color arrangement and close the dialog box.

Tips

·	You can continue to work in the dialog box. However, if you click Cancel to close the dialog box, you lose your color additions unless you save the palette first.

·	You do not have to name a color to add it to the custom palette. You can always rename the color later.

Notes

·	The color you add must have a unique name. The custom palette cannot have two colors with the same name, even if they have identical values.

·	When you add a color from one of the color matching palettes, the color name is also used in the custom palette.

·	To cancel changes, click Cancel. All changes made to the custom palette since the last save are discarded.

 Related Topics


To convert a PANTONE Spot Color to a process color

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar).

2.	Click the Palettes radio button.

3.	Choose PANTONE Spot Colors from the Type box.

4.	Click the color that you want to convert from the palette.

5.	Click the Color Models radio button.

6.	Click a CMYK color model.

7.	Type a name for the color in the Name box.

8.	Click Color Options, Add Color to Palette.

9.	Click OK to keep the color arrangement and close the dialog box.

Tips

·	You may want to convert a spot color to a process color as a way of reducing the cost of color separations for low-cost publications in which the color characteristics of the spot color do not need to be maintained.

·	This procedure permanently alters the colors used in the image. To convert spot colors only at print time, use the controls in the Print dialog box.

Notes

·	This procedure adds the spot color to the custom palette as a CMYK process color.

·	When you open the CMYK color model, the color in the New Color swatch is translated to the closest color in the CMYK color space.

·	To cancel changes, click Cancel. All changes made to the custom palette since the last save are discarded.

·	To add a PANTONE Spot Color to the custom palette, see To add color to the custom palette and To pick a color from a color matching palette.

 Related Topics


To rename a color in a custom palette

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar).

2.	Click the color in the custom palette.

3.	Type a name for the color in the Name box.

4.	Click Palette Options.

5.	Click Rename Color.

6.	Click OK to keep the color arrangement and close the dialog box.

Note

·	To cancel changes, click Cancel. All changes made to the custom palette since the last save are discarded.

 Related Topics


To delete a color from the custom palette

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar).

2.	Click a color in the custom palette.

3.	Click the Palette Options button.

4.	Click Delete Color.

5.	Click YES to delete the color; click NO to cancel the delete action.

6.	Click OK to keep the new color arrangement and close the dialog box.

Note

·	To cancel changes, click Cancel. All changes made to the custom palette since the last save are discarded.

 Related Topics


To rearrange color on the custom palette

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar).

2.	Click a color in the custom palette.

3.	Drag and drop it to a new location on the palette.

4.	Repeat these steps until you are satisfied with the palette arrangement.

5.	Click OK to keep the new color arrangement and close the dialog box.

Notes

·	To cancel changes, click Cancel. All changes made to the custom palette since the last save are discarded.

·	If you move the cursor above or below the palette, the color swatches automatically scroll up or down.

 Related Topics


To save a custom palette

1.	Click the Palette Options button.

2.	Click Save.

Note

·	The custom palette is saved to the original file, overwriting the old palette information.

 Related Topics


To save a custom palette to another file

1.	Click the Palette Options button.

2.	Click Save As.

3.	Type a filename for the palette.

4.	Press the ENTER key.

Tips

·	You can use descriptive names when naming your custom palettes. Files names can be more than eight characters long, and file extensions are added automatically.

·	If you are saving to an existing file, double-click the filename in the list and then click YES on the confirm pop-up. The pop-up ensures that you do not unintentionally overwrite a custom palette file.

·	By using the New Palette, Open Palette, Save Palette, and Save As menu options, you can create custom palettes for specific applications or projects, and then save them to create a library. The dialog boxes for these menu options let you open, create, and delete.

 Related Topics


To open a custom palette

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar).

2.	Save the current custom palette, if you want to keep it.

3.	Click the Palette Options button.

4.	Click Open Palette.

5.	Choose a palette.

6.	Press the ENTER key.

Tips

·	You can also type a filename in the File Name box and press the ENTER key.

·	By using the New Palette, Open Palette, and Save/Save As Palette menu options, you can create custom palettes for specific applications or projects, and save them in a library arrangement.

Note

·	The Open Palette action is not confirmed. If you have not saved the custom palette that is in use, you will lose it when the new custom palette loads.

 Related Topics


To start a new custom palette

1.	Click the [image] button in the [image] or [image] tool flyout (or toolbar).

2.	Click the Palette Options button.

3.	Click New Palette.

4.	Type a filename for the new palette.

5.	Press the ENTER key.

Tip

·	You can use descriptive names when naming your custom palettes. Files names can be more than eight characters long, and file extensions are added automatically.

Note

·	If you have not saved the custom palette that is in use, a pop-up displays so that you can confirm the new palette action. Click YES to continue if you have already saved the current palette, or if you want to discard it. Click NO to cancel the new palette action so that you can save the current palette using the Palette Options, New Palette menu option.

 Related Topics


To update the Reference Color with the New Color

·	Click the Update Reference Color button.

 Related Topics


To update the New Color with the Printable Color

·	Click the Update New Color button.

 Related Topics


To swap the Reference and New Colors

·	Click Color Options, Swap Color.

 Related Topics


To edit a color in the custom palette

1.	Click the color you want to edit in the palette on the right side of the Color dialog box.

2.	In the color component fields, type a number within the color model's range of values.

3.	Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each component.

Tip

·	Using the color component fields is one way to edit the selected color. You can also use the visual selectors on the right side of the dialog box. This method of editing is best suited to colors from the color matching palettes. The color component fields let you make slight adjustments as a way of fine tuning the selected color.

 Related Topics


Publishing conditional documents

You can associate chapters, paragraph tags frames, and tables with conditions and then turn the conditions on or off to display or hide items in your document. When you set your Corel VENTURA publication's properties to include conditionally tagged elements, they display and print. If you turn off a condition, elements tagged with that condition are hidden. The following are some of the types of documents where using conditional tags can be helpful:

•	Multilingual publications: For a document containing text translated into two or more languages, you can set conditions on frames, paragraphs and other items so that only one language displays for each print run.

•	Manuals about related product lines: These would be used for related products, such as similar models of cars. You would code text, pictures, or sections specific to one model to print for that model's manual only. Information identical to all models would have no conditions and would appear in all versions of the document.

•	Documents published both on paper and online: When publishing the same document both in electronic and paper formats, the pictures you use in each format may be different. You can use multi-resolution bitmaps or hyper-graphics in your online document, and set separate conditions for the pictures in your paper document. Likewise, you could apply conditional text or paragraph tags to remove details for either the online or paper version as required.

 Note

•	You cannot apply a condition to any of VENTURA's automatically generated tags.

 Related Topics


Publishing conditional documents


Creating a conditional document
Creating conditional documents

Conditional documents contain items (chapters, paragraphs, frames and tables) which can be hidden or shown depending on the conditions assigned to them. The conditions identify which items belong to a particular version of the document. In a multilingual document, for example you would define a condition for each language and then mark the items belonging to each language with it's corresponding condition. To display or print a particular version [image] for example, the English version of the multilingual document [image] you simply turn its condition on and turn the others off.

What do you want to do?

Define a set of conditions

Display or hide conditional items

Make a chapter conditional

Make a paragraph conditional

Make a frame conditional

Make a table conditional

 Related Topics


To define a set of conditions

1.	Click Format, Publication, and choose the Set Conditions tab.

2.	Enter a name for the condition you want to add to the document, then click the Add button.

Note: The names you type must not contain spaces.

3.	Enable or disable the On check box to show or hide elements assigned that condition.

4.	Repeat the above steps for each condition you want to define.

 Related Topics


To display or hide conditional items

1.	Click Format, Publication, and choose the Set Conditions tab.

2.	Enable or disable the On check box to show or hide elements assigned that condition.

Note

•	Unconditional items [image] that is, items which do not have a condition assigned to them [image] always display and print.

 Related Topics


To make a chapter conditional

1.	Click Tools, Navigator

2.	Right-click the chapter you want to make conditional, then choose Properties.

3.	Click the Conditions button.

4.	Click the condition associated with the version of the conditional document you want to assign the chapter to.

5.	Click Add.

6.	Use the And, Or and Not buttons to include or exclude the chapter from other versions of the conditional document.

 Explain?

Note

•	Unconditional chapters [image] that is, chapters which do not have a condition assigned to them [image] always display and print.

 Related Topics


To make a paragraph tag conditional

1.	Switch to Tag mode.

 How?

2.	Right-click the paragraph formatted with the tag you want to make conditional.

3.	Choose Object Conditions.

4.	Click the condition associated with the version of the conditional document you want to assign the tag to.

5.	Click Add.

6.	Use the And, Or and Not buttons to include or exclude text formatted with the tag from other versions of the conditional document.

 Explain?

 Notes

•	You cannot apply a condition to any of VENTURA's automatically generated tags.

•	Paragraphs formatted with unconditional tags [image] that is, tags which do not have a condition assigned to them [image] always display and print.

•	If you want a frame anchored to a paragraph shown or hidden along with the paragraph, assign the same condition to both.

 Related Topics


To make a frame conditional

1.	Right-click the border of the frame.

2.	Choose Object Conditions.

3.	Click the condition associated with the version of the conditional document you want to assign the frame to.

4.	Click Add.

5.	Use the And, Or and Not buttons to include or exclude the frame from other versions of the conditional document.

 Explain?

Note

•	Unconditional frames [image] that is, frames which do not have a condition assigned to them [image] always display and print.

•	If you want a frame anchored to a paragraph shown or hidden along with the paragraph, assign the same condition to both.

 Related Topics


To make a table conditional

1.	Right-click in the table and choose Select, Table.

2.	Right-click the selected table and choose Object Conditions.

3.	Click the condition associated with the version of the conditional document you want to assign the table to.

4.	Click Add.

5.	Use the And, Or and Not buttons to include or exclude the table from other versions of the conditional document.

 Explain?

Note

•	Unconditional tables [image] that is, frames which do not have a condition assigned to them [image] always display and print.

 Related Topics


And, Or and Not operators

The And, Or and Not operators allow you to generate documents with various combinations of conditional items. For example, suppose you were producing a document in three languages: English, Spanish, and German. The following table shows how you can use the operators to control which version of the document a particular item appears in:

Examples

Use this operator...	To...

AND; e.g., English + Spanish	display/print the item when English and Spanish are both enabled

Or; e.g., English | Spanish	display/print the item when English and/orSpanish are enabled

Not, e.g., English + Spanish ! German	display/print the item when English and Spanish  are enabled, but not when German is enabled


Customizing keyboard assignments

Key combinations assigned to specific commands (e.g., Ctrl + P for Print) are called shortcut keys. Shortcut keys can be quicker to use than the mouse for frequently repeated commands.

You can use the default shortcut key assignments, or assign new combinations to any command from the Keyboard page in the Customize dialog box, which is available from the Tools menu. You can also create several sets of shortcut keys for different types of operations, saving and loading the different sets as they are needed.

If you prefer to use shortcut key assignments from earlier versions of Corel VENTURA, Corel WordPerfect 6.1, Microsoft Word 7, Ami Pro, PageMaker 6, and others, you can load them by clicking Load on the Keyboard page in the Customize dialog box.

The default shortcut key file, available in the Customize dialog box, is CVPDEF.ACL. If you need to revert to the defaults at any time, click Tools, Customize, Keyboard, Reset All.

Note

·	Some key assignments are reserved by Windows and cannot be reassigned.

Tip

·	Other members of your workgroup can customize their environment to match yours by copying the *.CFG files in your Corel VENTURA folder to theirs.

 Related Topics


Customizing menus

Your Corel VENTURA menus are completely customizable from the Menu page in the Customize dialog box, which is available from the Tools menu. You can add commands to existing menus, or add new menus to the Menu Bar. You can also change the order of the menus and their commands if you need to make any commands more accessible. A service bureau, for example, might want to keep all color-related dialog boxes or printing and font dialogs on dedicated menus. Or, if you frequently need to insert cross-references, you can add an icon for the command to a toolbar or change its menu location.

Note

·	When you customize your menus and commands, keep in mind that Help topics referring to those menus and commands do not change.

Tip

·	Other members of your workgroup can customize their environment to match yours by copying the *.CFG files in your Corel VENTURA folder to theirs. You can also use the Configuration Manager to set up your working environment to suit the types of projects you work on most. For more information, see Using VENTURA Configuration Manager.

 Related Topics


Customizing toolbars

Corel VENTURA's Property Bar changes to display the tools you'll need for the current editing job, customizing automatically, as required. Select the base page frame and tools for hiding and showing screen elements such as the rulers display plus tools for enabling and disabling the various snap features. Select a drawn frame and the Property Bar displays frame editing tools. If you click inside the base page frame or a selected drawn frame, the Property Bar displays text editing tools, and so on.

The wide selection of preset toolbars you can display include frame/graphic alignment, header/footer, node edit, recording and scripts, the spell checker, table functions, and text toolbars. To display any preset toolbar, right-click an existing toolbar and choose from the resulting lists. If you want to customize any toolbar, you can add or remove commands, or use the mouse to dock, undock, resize, and move toolbars around. You can hide, display, and reconfigure existing toolbars, or create entirely new ones.

If you need tools that aren't in the Property Bar or other preset toolbars, you can customize toolbars for the current document on the Toolbars page in the Customize dialog box (Tools menu). For example, if you're working on documents involving a lot of design work, such as advertisements, you can use customization to create a special floating or docked toolbar containing the buttons used to add fill and outline colors. Or, if you use the drawing tools constantly, you can create a toolbar with those tools visible at all times.

Note

·	When you customize your toolbars, keep in mind that the Help topics referring to those toolbars do not change.

Tip

·	Other members of your workgroup can customize their environment to match yours by copying the *.CFG files in your Corel VENTURA folder to theirs.

 Related Topics


Adding/removing individual components in VENTURA


To remove individual components of Corel VENTURA

1.	Close all open applications. (See Note if you want to remove Corel VERSIONS)

2.	Click the Start button, then point to Programs.

3.	Point to Corel VENTURA, then click Corel Uninstall.

4.	Follow the instructions on the screen.

 Notes

·	If Corel VENTURA doesn't appear on the Programs menu, click the Start button, then point to Find. Click Files or Folders. Use the Find dialog box to locate the program file.

·	To remove all Corel VERSIONS program files, you must disable it through the Windows Control panel before starting Corel Uninstall. For instructions, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To add individual components of Corel VENTURA

1.	Close all open applications.

2.	Insert the Corel VENTURA CD-ROM disk in your CD-ROM drive.

3.	Follow the instructions on the screen.

Note

·	If you originally installed Corel VENTURA from a network file server or a shared folder, run that copy of the Setup program.

·	For information on installing fonts, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Installing dictionaries and thesauruses


Installing dictionaries and thesauruses for other languages

VENTURA comes with thesauruses and dictionaries for hyphenating and checking the spelling of words in numerous languages. You can have VENTURA consult multiple dictionaries as it hyphenates and checks the spelling of your documents. If the dictionary or thesaurus you want to use is not installed, you can run the Setup program to install it, or copy the required files from the Corel VENTURA CD-ROM disk to your hard disk.

To install a dictionary or thesaurus for another language

·	Copy the files from the \PROGRAMS\DATA\ folder on the CD-ROM disk #1 to the COREL\PROGRAMS\DATA folder on your hard disk.

For a list of the dictionaries and their filenames, click Related Topics and choose " Languages supported by the International Proofreader."

Notes

·	If you want VENTURA to hyphenate and check spelling in a particular language, both the proofreader and hyphenator *.dat files for that language must be copied to COREL\PROGRAMS\DATA folder.

·	You can also create hyphenation dictionaries for other languages or for specialized terms. For more information, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Installing fonts

Corel VENTURA 6.0 comes with over 1000 TrueType, Type 1 and barcode fonts, as well as 10 Win95 fonts and over 50 symbol fonts. The "Typical" installation option in the Setup program installs twelve TrueType fonts, while the "Compact" option installs just two.

You can install additional TrueType fonts by running the Setup program and performing a Custom installation. To start the Setup program, simply insert the VENTURA CD-ROM Disk 1 into your CD-ROM drive.

Installing Type 1 fonts requires Adobe Type Manager (ATM). VENTURA comes with ATM 4.0 Lite, which you can install by running INSTALL.EXE from the ATM40 folder on CD-ROM Disk 1. If you encounter problems installing or using ATM 4.0 Lite, consult the Readme file supplied by Adobe.


To create an equation

1.	Position the insertion point where you want to place the equation.

2.	Click Insert, Insert Item, Equation.

3.	Locate the elements for your equation by clicking the buttons with the down arrows to see lists of symbols or templates.

4.	Add elements to your equation by clicking items from the lists. The symbols or templates you choose display in the equation window.

Tip

·	You can also insert templates and symbols using keys. Click Related Topics below for more information.

Notes

·	To choose a preset equation, e.g., E = mc2 , click Presets and choose an equation from the list.

·	To insert a normal space between words when typing text in an equation, press CTRL+SPACEBAR.

·	Equations do not appear in documents converted to HTML using the File, Publish As, HTML command.

 Related Topics


To edit an equation

1.	Position the insertion point immediately next to the equation.

2.	Click Edit, Special Item.

3.	Make the changes you want in the Insert Equation dialog box.

Note

·	Editing equations created in previous versions of VENTURA automatically converts them to version 7 format. Version 7 treats equations as inserted text, not as OLE objects as in version 5, or as imbedded codes as in versions 3.0 to 4.2. As a result, equations created prior to version 5 will no longer appear in text files exported from the program.

 Related Topics


To select elements in an equation

·	Use any of the following methods to select equation elements in the Insert Equation dialog box:

To select	Do this
Part of an equation	Click the starting point and drag over the equation, or hold down the SHIFT key and press the arrow keys.
An entire equation	Double-click anywhere outside the outermost slot.
A symbol within a template	Hold down the CTRL key then click the symbol.
 Related Topics


To delete elements in an equation

·	Use any of the following methods to delete elements from an equation in the Insert Equation dialog box:

To delete	Do this
The character or symbol next to the insertion point	Press  DELETE or BACKSPACE.
The contents of a slot	Select the contents of the slot then press DELETE. Note: Some slots can't be deleted without deleting the template that contains them.
A slot	If the slot is not empty, delete the contents of the slot, then delete the slot.
To delete a template	Select the template symbol and all its slots, then press DELETE.
To delete a selection	Press DELETE.
 Related Topics


To position the insertion point in an equation

·	Point and click.

Note

·	The size and shape of the insertion point tells you which slot it is in. The horizontal bar of the insertion point runs along the bottom edge of the slot. Its vertical bar runs from the top to the bottom of the slot.

Tip

·	You can also use the keyboard to move the insertion point through each slot in the equation. Click Related Topics for more information.

 Related Topics


Moving the insertion point in an equation using keys

Pressing	Moves the insertion point
TAB (or INSERT)	To the end of the current slot or to the next slot
SHIFT+TAB (or INSERT)	To the end of the previous slot
,	One character at a time or to the next slot
,	Up or down one line
HOME	To the beginning of the current slot
END	To the end of the current slot


Adjusting the position of an equation element

VENTURA follows established rules for typesetting equations and automatically adjusts spacing between elements as you create an equation. It is possible, however, to override the automatic spacing either by adding spacing symbols or by nudging. To change the spacing of all the equations you create, you can modify the default spacing settings.

What do you want to do?

Position equation elements by inserting spacing symbols

Position equation elements by nudging

Modify the default spacing settings for equation elements

 Related Topics


To position equation elements by inserting spacing symbols

1.	Position the insertion point where you want to adjust spaces.

2.	Click the Spaces/Ellipses palette (second column, top bottom) and select the amount of space you want, or press the following shortcut keys.

To insert	Press
Zero space	SHIFT+SPACEBAR
1-point space	CTRL+ALT+SPACEBAR
Thin space (one-sixth em)	CTRL+SPACEBAR
Thick space (one-third em)	CTRL+SHIFT+SPACEBAR
Em space (quad)	No shortcut key
Note

·	To adjust Equation Editor's overall formatting, rather than repositioning individual items, use the settings on the Spacing tab in the Insert Equation dialog box.

 Related Topics


To position equation elements by nudging

1.	Select the part of the equation that you want to reposition.

To select an embellishment or another item that's part of a template, hold down the CTRL key and click the item.

2.	Nudge the selected items using the arrow keys:

To Nudge	Press
To the left	CTRL +
Upwards	CTRL +
Downwards	CTRL +
To the right	CTRL +
The selected items are moved in small increments in the indicated direction. The size of the increment depends on the current display scale: at 100%, the increment is 1 pt; at 200%, it's 1/2 pt, and at 400%, it's 1/4 pt.

Note

·	To adjust Equation Editor's overall formatting, rather than repositioning individual items, use the settings on the Spacing tab in the Insert Equation dialog box.

 Related Topics


To modify the default spacing settings for equation elements

1.	Click the Spacing tab in the Insert Equation dialog box.

2.	From the list box on the right, click the dimension that you want to change.

The dimension is indicated by arrows in the picture on the left.

3.	Type a percentage or enter a discrete size by selecting a unit of measurement and typing a value.

Specifying a percentage ensures that the spacing remains proportional if you change type sizes.

Note

·	To restore the original spacing settings, click the Defaults button.

 Related Topics


Changing fonts, styles and typesizes

VENTURA automatically assigns different character formatting to the elements in an equation in keeping with standard typesetting conventions. You can override the automatic formatting either by selecting the element and applying the formatting directly, or by modifying the default formatting.

What do you want to do?

Change the character formatting for selected elements of an equation

Change the default character formatting for equations

 Related Topics


To change the character formatting for selected elements of an equation

1.	Select the element that you want to format.

2.	Choose Other from the Size list to change the typesize or Other from the style list to change the font or style.

3.	From the Explicit Font Properties dialog box, choose the size, font or style you want.

Notes

·	Choosing Normal from the Size list sets the typesize of the equation to the typesize of the paragraph into which it is inserted.

·	Choosing Standard from the Style list applies built-in styles that conform to mathematical typesetting conventions.

·	After inserting the equation, you can change its character attributes just as you would text.

 Related Topics


To change the default character formatting for equations

1	Click the Font tab in the Insert Equation dialog box.

2.	Under Size, type a percentage for each of the elements you want to change or enter a discrete size by selecting a unit of measurement and typing a value.

Specifying a percentage ensures that the size remains proportional if the typesize of the paragraph into which you inserted the equation changes.

3.	Under Font, choose the font and style you want for the Greek and symbol characters.

Notes

·	The font selected for Symbols must be the Symbol font or some other font that's very similar to it.

·	To restore the original character formatting, click the Defaults button.

 Related Topics


To change the color of an equation element

1.	Select the element that you want to format.

2.	Click the color button, then choose a color.

 Related Topics


To create a pre-version 7 style equation

1.	Position the insertion point where you want to place the equation.

2.	Click Insert, Insert Item, Equation.

3.	Click the EQN button.

4.	Type the equation in VENTURA's equation language format. (Click Related Topics for more information.)

5.	Click Apply to see how the equation will look in your document.

Note

·	Each time you click Apply, VENTURA adds the entire equation to the equation window, not just what you typed since the last time you clicked Apply. To avoid duplication when entering multiple equations, delete those you've already applied from the Ventura EQN Language dialog box before entering the others.

 Related Topics


To add equations to the list of presets

Corel VENTURA supplies a collection of common functions and equations built using the program's EQN language. You can add equations to this collection which is stored in the DEFAULT.EPF file located in your COREL\VENTURA folder. Or, you can create your own collections by saving the equations in an ASCII text file with an EPF extension.

The DEFAULT.EPF file contains instructions on how to add equations to an EPF file.

For more information about inserting equations from an EPF file into a document and about creating equations using the EQN language, click Related Topics.

Tip

·	You can copy existing EQN language equations from documents created in earlier versions of VENTURA into EPF file. Open the text file that contains the equation in a word processor, select the text comprising the equation, then paste it into the EPF file. Make sure to enclose the equation with the required codes as described in the DEFAULT.EPF file.

 Related Topics


Inserting equation symbols using keys

Use any of the keyboard sequences to insert equation symbols in the Insert Equation dialog box:

To insert	Press CTRL+K, then
	I
	A
	D
	SHIFT+<
	SHIFT+>
	T
	E
	SHIFT+E
	C
	SHIFT+C


Inserting equation templates using keys

Use any of the keyboard sequences to insert equation templates in the Insert Equation dialog box:

To insert	Press
	CTRL+(   or CTRL+)
	CTRL+[   or CTRL+]
	CTRL+SHIFT+{   or CTRL+SHIFT+}
	CTRL+F
	CTRL+/
	CTRL+H
	CTRL+L
	CTRL+J
	CTRL+R
	CTRL+I
	CTRL + T, then N
	CTRL + T, then S
	CTRL + T, then P
	CTRL + T, then M
	CTRL + T, then U


Inserting spaces in equations using keys

·	Use any of the keyboard sequences to insert spaces between equation elements in the Insert Equation dialog box:

To insert	Description	Press

Zero space	SHIFT+SPACEBAR

One point space	CTRL+ALT+SPACEBAR

Thin space	CTRL+SPACEBAR

Thick space	CTRL+SHIFT+SPACEBAR

You can always create larger spaces by using several smaller spaces in succession. A thick space is exactly twice as wide as a thin space, so you can produce a thick space by pressing CTRL+SPACEBAR twice.


Applying embellishments to equations using keys

Use the following keyboard sequences to apply embellishments to the character left of the insertion point in the Insert Equation dialog box.

To apply	Description	Press

Over-bar	CTRL+SHIFT+HYPHEN

Tilde	CTRL+SHIFT+~ (CTRL+SHIFT+" on some keyboards)

Arrow (vector)	CTRL+ALT+HYPHEN

Single prime	CTRL+ALT+'

Double prime	CTRL+SHIFT+" (CTRL+SHIFT+~ on some keyboards)

Single dot	CTRL+ALT+.


Building equations using VENTURA's EQN language

Using the EQN language to build equations is an alternative to using VENTURA's built-in Equation Editor. Although more complicated to use than the Equation Editor, the EQN language enables you to use a word processor to build equations that will print with typeset quality when imported into VENTURA. If you prefer using the EQN language, you can build equations with it from within the Equation Editor.

To learn more about the EQN language, click any of the following topics:

EQN language rules

Typing equations using the EQN language

EQN language commands

Special characters and words

Example equations


EQN language rules

Corel VENTURA's equation (EQN) language uses natural names and a simple syntax which lets you build equations in the same manner as if you were speaking them out loud. For instance, to create

you type:

cos ( theta sub 1 )+ sin ( theta sub 2 )

The equation language has very few formal rules. There are, however, four rules that you must follow:

Rule 1: Separate expressions with non-printing spaces

You must place a space before and after all commands and special words. The equation language comprises numerous commands and special words. For instance, the word omega gets translated to the Greek character  within an equation. As another example, the word matrix is used to automatically place the characters which follow into a matrix. If you don't place a space before and after a special word, the word will simply print as you typed it.

Rule 2: Enter commands in lower case.

Commands must always be entered into the equation edit screen in lower case letters. Commands entered with initial caps or in upper case will be displayed in Corel VENTURA just as they were entered in the word processor or the Equation Editor.

Rule 3: A command modifies the expression that follows it.

Commands modify the expression immediately following. The only exception are the diacritical mark commands, which modify the preceding expression (e.g., xyz bar produces [image]).

An expression is:

·	Any character

·	Any special word

·	Any group of characters not separated by a space

·	Anything placed inside braces { }.

Typical expressions are:

·	X+Y which produces X+Y

·	omega which produces

·	{x sup 2 + y sup 2}which produces

Note

·	The version 7 EQN language no longer requires the use of tildes (~) and carets (^) to insert printable spaces between equation elements. VENTURA will still recognize these characters in existing EQN equations and convert them to thick spaces (tilde) and thin spaces (carat).

 Related Topics


Typing equations using the EQN language

To know what to type when creating an equation, practice saying the equation out loud. For instance, to create:

you would say: "x superscript 2 over y superscript 2." The code that you type is virtually identical:

x sup 2 over y sup 2

Building large equations

Larger equations require braces. For instance,

requires braces around everything in the numerator and braces around everything in the denominator (with the exception of the sqrt command) in order for the over command to correctly place one expression over the other. The actual expression used to produce this equation is:

{a sub~+~b sub 1} over sqrt {c sub 1~+~d sub 1}

A good habit to get into is to always type both the opening and closing brace at the same time. Then move the insertion point between the two braces and begin typing. This way you don't forget to add the closing brace. Failure to have the same number of left and right braces prevents translation to Version 7 format.

Typing spaces

Note the ~ characters in the previous expression. They add extra space (one-third em) between equation elements for improved readability. The carat character (^) adds an extra one-sixth em.

 Related Topics


EQN Language commands

The following is a list of EQN language commands. For a list of commands available in previous versions of VENTURA that are no longer supported in the current version, click [image].

Above

Braces

ccol, lcol, rcol

cpile, lpile, rpile, pile

Fraction bar

from

int

inter

lcol (see ccol)

left

lpile (see cpile)

matrix

over

pile (see lpile)

prod

quoted text

rcol (see ccol)

right (see left)

rpile (see cpile)

sqrt

sub, sup

to (see from, int, and prod)

union


Unsupported EQN Language commands

The following EQN commands are no longer supported in version 7 and will be ignored in existing equations that use them.

·	back

·	down

·	fwd

·	up

·	lineup

·	mark

The Color and Font commands (bold, fat, font, italic, roman, size and symbol) although recognized in existing EQN language equations are no longer supported in new EQN language equations. You can still apply color and font changes to these equations using the Style and Color controls in the Insert Equation dialog box.

 Related Topics


above command

Places one expression directly over the other in a matrix or pile (a pile is like a matrix except that adjacent elements are not forced to align).


Braces command

Groups expressions  into a single expression. Braces should always be used in pairs. The one exception to this is when you use the brace with a left command. In this case you do not need a matching right brace. This lets you create expressions like:

left {pile {x above y above z}

which produces:


ccol, lcol, rcol commands

Used within a matrix to align the expression which follows [image] and every element in that expression [image] within the center, left, or right of a column. Example:

matrix { ccol { { x sub i + y sub i } above y sub i above z sub i } }

produces:

These three commands are always used within a matrix command. Outside a matrix command, use piles instead (see the above command). A matrix must have the same number of elements in each column.


cpile, lpile,rpile, pile commands

Piles are stacks of identical equations which should align above each other. The syntax and use are identical to ccol, lcol, and rcol except that no matrix command precedes the pile. The pile and cpile are the same. Example:

y = left { rpile {-1 above -2 above 0} lpile { {roman when x = 1} above {roman when x = 0} above {roman when x = 1} }

This produces:


Fraction bar command

When entering fractions in a word processor, the slash is generally used as the fraction bar producing a fraction that looks like 1/2. Typographically, though, this is an incorrect format for fractions. Corel VENTURA's EQN language provides a fraction bar command which places a true fraction bar between two expressions. It also superscripts the expression in front and moves it to the left. It subscripts the expression after the fraction bar and moves it to the right to produce a fraction that looks like ½. The slash key (/) is used to create the fraction bar, but in the equation window it is handled as a fraction bar and not as a slash.


from command

Takes the text which follows from and places it directly under the expression which precedes the from command. It is used primarily in conjunction with the sum, prod, and union commands, but also occasionally with the int command. Example:

sum from i=0 to inf

which produces

The command to is often used in conjunction with from and must follow the from command.

The from command can also be used in other interesting ways. Example:

lim from {x ->> inf}{x + 1} over x

produces


int command

Produces an integral sign ò. The limits for the integral are set using the sub and sup commands. These commands place the limits in the typical positions to the right of the integral near the top and bottom. If you want the limits placed directly underneath and above the integral, use to and from in place of sub and sup. Example:

0 = int sub {-1} sup {1}x sup 2dx

which creates


inter command

Produces an intersection symbol [image].


left command

The left command coupled with the right command lets you place large braces { }, brackets [ ], parentheses ( ), bars | | characters around the expression which follows. The enclosing marks automatically grow vertically to fit the expression. Example:

x = left ( a sup 2 over b sup 2 right )

produces

Normally you should have a right to match each left command. However, you can omit the right if you want unbalanced parenthesis.

The left command can be used with any character, although these other characters will not expand.


matrix command

Creates a matrix with even vertical spacing between rows, regardless of whether each element in the matrix has the same height. Corel VENTURA looks at the entire matrix before deciding on the proper spacing to use between rows. By contrast, the space between rows in each column in a pile varies depending on the height of each expression.

Each column within the matrix must have the same number of elements. The lcol, ccol, and rcol are used to align elements within each column of the matrix. Each column can be aligned left, center, or right. Example:

matrix {lcol { a sub 1 above a sub 2 }~lcol {b sub 1 above b sub 2 }}

produces:

Also see the lcol command.


over command

Centers the previous expression over the top of the following expression and places a horizontal bar between them. The previous expression is shifted up and the following expression down. The over command is used for fractions. Example:

a + b over c + d

produces


prod command

Creates a product symbol . This command is usually used with the from and to commands. Use the size command to make the product symbol bigger. Example:

prod from {i = 1} to inf 1 over x sub 1

produces

Also see the from command.


sqrt command

Creates a square root symbol, which automatically grows to fit the expression that follows. Example:

y = sqrt {x sup 2 over 2} + 1 }

produces


sub, sup commands

Subscripts the expression which follows. The sup command superscripts the expression which follows. The size and shift for superscripts and subscripts are defined on the Font tab in the Insert Equation dialog box (Insert, Insert Item command). Example:

a sub 1

which produces

You can subscript or superscript to multiple levels. Example:

a sub n sub 1

produces

You can combine multiple superscripts and subscripts. Example:

x sup y sub z

produces

Each successive superscript or subscript formats further to the right. The one exception to this rule is a sub i sup 2 which produces

The sup and sub commands are also used with the int command to place limits above and below the integral sign.


union command

The union command creates the union character [image].


Quoted text

You occasionally may want one of the special characters or words to appear exactly as you type it rather than being interpreted as a command. Also, you may want to use other characters in the character set. Any text placed between two inch " " marks will appear exactly as you type it.


Special characters and words

The following tables list special characters and words used to build equations using VENTURA's EQN language.

Special Characters

Character	Result	Character	Result

,...,	,...,	approx	»

...	...	cdot	.

!=	¹	ceiling	é

+-	±	del	¶

->	®	floor	ë

<-	¬	grad	Ñ

<<	<	inf	¥

<=	£	nothing

==	º	partial	¶

>=	³	prime	¢

>>	>	times	´

Space Characters

Character	Result	Character	Result

~	thick space	^	thin space

Greek Characters

Character Name	Character Name

DELTA	D	gamma	g

EPSILON	E	iota	i

GAMMA	G	kappa	k

LAMBDA	L	lambda	l

OMEGA	W	mu	m

PHI	F	nu	n

PI	P	omega	v

PSI	Y	omicron	o

SIGMA	S	phi	j

THETA	Q	pi	p

UPSILON	Y	psi	y

XI	X	rho	r

alpha	a	sigma	s

beta	b	tau	t

chi	c	theta	q

delta	d	upsilon	u

epsilon	e	xi	x

eta	g	zeta	z

Romanized Words

These are words which are translated into Roman (normal) type. All text in an equation is otherwise printed in italic type. Romanized words include math operators such as sin, cos and log.

Word Name	Word	WordName	Word

Im	lm	if	if

Re	Re	lim	lim

and	and	ln	ln

arc	arc	log	log

cos	cos	max	max

cosh	cosh	min	min

cot	cot	sin	sin

coth	coth	sinh	sinh

det	det	tan	tan

exp	exp	tanh	tanh

for	for

Diacritical marks

A diacritical mark is any character, symbol, or accent which is displayed above a letter or group of letters. To place a diacritical mark above a lower case letter, type the following commands in lower case (e.g., x hat to get [image]). To place the diacritical mark above an upper case letter, type the command with the first letter capitalized (e.g., X Hat to get [image]).

Command	Example	Result

bar	xyz bar

dot	xyz dot

dotdot	xyz dotdot

dyad	xyz dyad

hat	xyz hat

tilde	xyz tilde

under	xyz under

vec	xyz vec

Font commands

Font commands let you change the certain font attributes of any portion of an equation. These commands must be used because the standard Corel VENTURA font and tag controls cannot be placed inside an equation.

Command	Example	Result

fat (bold)	This~is~fat FAT~text	This is FAT text

italic	cos ( theta )~or~italic cos ( theta )	cos(q) or cos(q)

roman	This~is~roman ROMAN~text	This is ROMAN text

symbol	cos ( symbol f )~+~sin ( symbol g)	cos(q) or sin(g)

 Related Topics


Example equations

The following are examples of complex equations created using VENTURA's EQN language.

Command sequence:

grad sup 2 symbol f~=~1 over r^del over {del r}^ left ({r ^{del symbol f}over{del r}}right )~+~1 over{r sup 2}^{del sup 2 symbol f}over{del phi sup 2}~+~{del sup 2 symbol f}over{del z sup 2}

Resulting equation:

Command sequence:

bold{grad~times~roman A}~=~ left | {matrix{ccol{{{bold roman r}over{r sup 2^sin^theta}}above{del over{del r}}above{A sub r}}~~ccol{{{bold theta}over{r^sin^theta}}above{del over{del theta}}above{rA sub theta}}~~ccol{{{bold symbol f}over r}above{del over{del phi}}above{rA sub phi^sin^theta}}}} right |

Resulting equation:

Command sequence:

F(x)~=~1 over { sigma sqrt { 2 pi } }~int sub { - inf } sup {(x-u) / sigma } e sup {- u sup 2 / 2 }^sigma^du

Resulting equation:

Command sequence:

bold A~=~ left ( matrix { lcol { a sub 11 above a sub 21 above ~~cdot above a sub m1 }~lcol { a sub 12 above a sub 22 above ~~cdot above a sub m2 }~lcol { ... above ... above ... above ... }~lcol { a sub 1n above a sub 2n above ~~cdot above a sub mn } } right )

Resulting equation:

Command sequence:

int from R int^symbol f (x,y)^dx^dy~=~int sub a sup b^ left [ int sub g(x) sup h(x) {symbol f (x,^y)^dy} right ] ~dx

Resulting equation:

 Related Topics


Fills and outlines

Fills and outlines are used to add a finishing touch to your graphic objects and frames. Often bland or flat graphic objects can be dramatically improved by experimenting with different fill or outline patterns. With the exception of halftone screens, all of Corel VENTURA's fills print on both PostScript and non-PostScript printers.

To specify colors for fills and outlines, you can choose from a variety of color models and palettes. Color models included with Corel VENTURA are: CMYK, RGB, HSB, and YIQ. Color Palettes include PANTONE Process and Spot colors, FOCOLTONE colors, and TRUMATCH colors.

 Related Topics


Filling objects

A fill is a color or pattern used as a background for a frame or graphic. Fills are an effective method of highlighting frames containing text. You can use the fill to differentiate the frame's text from other text on the page, and visually link separate frames. If you leave a frame without a fill or remove the existing fill from a graphic or frame, they are transparent. You can choose from the following types of fills:

Uniform color fills

Uniform color fills are solid colors such as cyan, magenta, yellow and black.

Fountain fills

Fountain fills blend colors together to form linear, radial, conical, or square designs. When using fountain fills, you need to specify the starting and ending colors of the fill, as well as any intermediate colors, or rainbow effects. The intermediate colors between the beginning and ending of a fountain fill are called steps. The more steps, the smoother the blend.

Texture fills

A texture fill is a fractally-generated picture that you can use to give your object the appearance of natural materials. You can choose from a series of pre-generated textures, or randomly generated variations.

Pattern fills

Pattern fills are symmetrical, repeated patterns that can be used to fill a frame or page. The patterns are made up of tiles that are repeated across the page as tiles are placed on a kitchen floor. By adjusting the tile size, you can specify how often the pattern is repeated. You can choose from the two-color and full-color patterns Corel VENTURA provides, or create your own. Standard hatching patterns used in drafting, landscape design, and cartography are included, as well as patterns suitable for backgrounds, watermarks, and general use.

If you want a pattern that is not in the VENTURA Library, you can create your own with Corel PHOTO-PAINT (included with Corel VENTURA) or other paint programs. For more complex patterns, you can import any type of picture or graphic file that Corel VENTURA supports and use it to create a pattern.

 Related Topics


Outlining objects

Frames

Frames can be outlined by applying ruling lines to them. A ruling line is a vertical or horizontal line that you can place or around the frame or on selected sides only. They can actually consist of as many a three lines, each with its own characteristics [image] thickness, width, color, spacing and pattern. Together, these characteristics define a rule style.

Graphic Objects

Every object you create with the drawing tools has a set of outline attributes that you can manipulate in a variety of ways. You can think of each object as being drawn with a pen that changes size, shape, and color. You can use round or square nibs, slanted or symmetrical, thick or hairline-thin to draw dashed, dotted, solid, or calligraphic lines.

In addition to the shape and color of the nib, you can also change the ending shape of an outline. Lines, or objects with open paths, can have ends that are rounded, square, cropped, or tipped with arrowheads and other line-ending shapes. Objects with closed paths (squares, polygons, etc.) naturally have no end-points, but you can still choose from pointed, rounded, or truncated corners.

You can change the outline of an object using the Outline tool or the Outline Pen dialog box.

•	The Outline tool gives you quick access to the most commonly-used outline styles and buttons to access more detailed controls.

•	You can use the Outline Pen dialog box to change any aspect of your outline or line-ending shape.

If you just want to change the color of an outline, you can also use the on-screen palette.

 Related Topics


Removing fills


To make an object transparent

1.	Select the object with the fill you want to remove.

2.	Click the [image] tool.

3.	Click [image].

 Related Topics


Changing the default fill


To change the default fill for frames or graphic objects

1.	Click away from objects on the page to deselect them.

2.	Hold down the SHIFT key and click again on the area outside the page.

3.	Click the [image] tool.

4.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of fill you want for the default. Click [image] to give all frames or graphic objects a transparent fill.

A dialog box appears where you specify whether you want to define a default fill for frames or graphic objects.

5.	Select an object type.

6.	Set the appropriate fill attributes.

The set attributes are now applied to any new frame or graphic objects that you create. You can still change the fill of any individual object.

 Related Topics


Black, white or gray


To fill an object with black or white using the Fill tool
To fill an object with black, white or gray using the Fill tool

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click the [image] tool.

3.	Click the color you want from the bottom row. (Clicking X removes the fill, making the object transparent).

 Related Topics


Uniform Fill


To fill an object with a uniform color using the on-screen Color Palette

1.	If the palette is not displayed:

Click View, Toolbars and choose Standard from the list of toolbars.

2.	Select the object.

3.	Click a color on the onscreen color palette. If the color you wish to use is not displayed, click the arrow and choose one from the drop-down palette. To create a new color, click Others, and use the Uniform Fill dialog box to create one.

4.	Click the color you want with the left mouse button.

Tip

•	To choose from a larger selection of colors, or to create a custom color, click Others.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a uniform color using the Fill Color dialog box

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click [image] the button.

3.	Choose the color you want (see Related Topics for instructions).

 Related Topics


Fountain fill


To create a fountain fill

1.	Select the object that you want to fill.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] button.

3.	In the Type list, click the type of fountain that you want.

4.	Click the From color button and choose a color for the start of the fountain.

5.	Click the To color button and choose a color for the end of the fountain.

Tip

•	You can change the number of color steps in a fountain fill using the Steps option. Enable [image] and enter a new value. When the Steps option is locked, the fill will print using the number of steps specified in the Print Options dialog box and display using the number of steps specified in the Options dialog box (see Related Topics for instructions).

 Related Topics


To change the orientation of a fountain fill

1.	Select the object that you want to fill.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click [image] button.

3.	Adjust the Horizontal Offset setting until the center of the fill is where you want it. A value of -50% will place the center on the left edge of your object; a value of 50% will place it on the right edge.

4.	Adjust the Vertical Offset setting until the center of the fill is where you want it. A value of -50% will place the center on the bottom edge of your object; a value of 50% will place it on the top edge.

5.	Adjust the Angle setting until the fill is oriented the way you want it. Positive values rotate the fill counter-clockwise; negative values rotate it clockwise.

Tip

•	You can also change a fountain fill's orientation by dragging in the Preview box.

Notes

•	The Horizontal and Vertical Offset options are not available for linear fountain fills.

•	The Angle option is not available for radial fountain fills.

 Related Topics


To specify the number of steps used in a fountain fill

1.	Select the object that you want to fill.

2.	Click the Fill tool, then click the Fountain Fill icon.

3.	Enable the Graphics and/or Frames checkboxes as required and click OK.

4.	Depress the lock button beside the Steps box.

5.	Type in a value, or adjust the existing one using the scroll arrows.

 Related Topics


To create a fountain fill containing only two colors

1.	Select the object that you want to fill.

2.	Click the Fill tool, then click the Fountain Fill icon.

3.	Click Two Color in the Color Blend section of the dialog box.

4.	Click [image].

5.	Click the From color button and choose a color for the start of the fountain.

6.	Click the To color button and choose a color for the end of the fountain.

7.	Adjust the Mid-Point slider until the color proportions are correct.

Tip

•	You can increase the percentage of the start and end color by adjusting the Edge Pad value.

 Related Topics


To create a fountain fill containing multiple colors

1.	Select the object that you want to fill.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] button.

3.	Click Two Color in the Color Blend section of the dialog box.

4.	Click the From [image] and choose a color for the start of the fountain.

5.	Click the To color button and choose a color for the end of the fountain.

6.	Click [image] to determine the intermediate colors from a clockwise path around the color wheel.

or

Click [image] to determine the intermediate colors from a counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.

7.	Adjust the Mid-Point slider until the color proportions are correct.

Note

•	You can increase the percentage of start and end color by adjusting the Edge Pad value.

 Related Topics


To specify the intermediate colors of a fountain fill

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click [image] tool, then click the [image] button.

3.	Click Custom.

4.	Double-click in the preview ribbon to add a color marker.

You can move existing markers by dragging them along the preview ribbon, and delete them by double-clicking them.

5.	Click a color in the palette to assign it to the marker.

You can change the color of an existing marker by selecting it and then clicking a new color in the palette.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you achieve the desired effect.

 Related Topics


Two-Color, Full-color bitmap and Vector patterns


To fill an object with a two-color bitmap pattern

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] button.

3.	Click the preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want.

5.	Click the Back color button and choose a color for the background.

6.	Click the Front color button and choose a color for the foreground.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a full-color bitmap pattern

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] button.

3.	Click the preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a vector pattern

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] button.

3.	Click the preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want.

 Related Topics


To draw a two-color bitmap pattern fill

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] button.

3.	Click Create.

4.	Click the Bitmap Pattern size you want. The size you choose determines the pattern's resolution.

5.	Click the Pen Size you want. The size you choose determines how many squares in the drawing area are filled when you click with the mouse.

6.	Click with the left mouse button to fill squares in the drawing area.

Click with the right mouse button to erase squares in the drawing area.

Note

•	Once you have completed your pattern, you can change its colors and tile properties just as you would any other two-color bitmap pattern. The pattern you create is added to the end of the pattern list.

 Related Topics


To create pattern fills from imported images
To create a pattern fill from an imported image

1.	Select the object that you want to fill.

2.	Click the [image] tool.

3.	Click the pattern button ( [image], [image], or [image]) that corresponds to type of fill you want.

4.	Click Import.

5.	Choose the file to import.

Notes

•	When importing images to use as two-color bitmap patterns, choose images with only two colors for best results.

•	Imported patterns appear at the end of the pattern list.

 Related Topics


To set the size of pattern tiles

1.	Select the object that you want to change.

2.	Click the [image] tool.

3.	Click the pattern button ( [image], [image], or [image]) that corresponds to the object's fill type.

4.	Enable one of the Small (0.25x0.25 inches), Medium (0.50x0.50 inches) or Large (1.00x1.00 inches) options,

or

Click Tiling.

5.	Type a value in the Width box. The maximum tile width is 3 inches.

6.	Type a value in the Height box. The maximum tile height is 3 inches.

Note

•	To use a different unit of measurement, choose it from the Units list. The height and width values are automatically converted when you change units.

 Related Topics


To offset the first tile of a pattern fill

1.	Select the object that you want to change.

2.	Click the [image] tool.

3.	Click the pattern button ( [image], [image], or [image]) that corresponds to the object's fill type.

4.	Click Tiling.

5.	Type the amount of horizontal offset in the X box under First Tile Offset.

6.	Type the amount of vertical offset in the Y box under First Tile Offset.

 Related Topics


To offset rows or columns of pattern tiles

1.	Select the object that you want to change.

2.	Click the [image] tool.

3.	Click the pattern button ( [image], [image], or [image]) that corresponds to the object's fill type.

4.	Click Tiling.

5.	Click Row or Column.

6.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To delete a pattern

1.	In the pattern dialog box, click the Preview box.

2.	Click the pattern you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


Texture fills


To fill an object with a texture

1.	Select the object that you want to fill.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] button.

3.	In the Textures Library list box, click the library containing the texture you want.

4.	In the Textures List box, click the texture you want.

5.	Adjust the parameters to customize the texture as required. Click the Preview button to see the results of your modifications.

Tip

•	Click the Preview button to randomly change the unlocked parameters. You can unlock a parameter by enabling the [image] button next to it.

 Related Topics


To save a customized texture

1.	Make sure the texture you want to save is displayed in the Preview box.

2.	Click [image].

3.	Type a name in the Texture Name box. The name can be up to 32 characters long, including spaces. You can overwrite an existing texture with the one you are saving by typing its name.

4.	Click the library in which you want to save the texture.

or

Type the name of a new library in the Library Name box.

Note

•	You cannot save or overwrite textures in the Styles library. You can, however, modify a Styles texture and then save it in another library.


To delete a texture

1.	In the Textures Library list box, click the library containing the texture you want.

2.	In the Texture List box, click the texture that you want to delete.

3.	Click [image].

Note

•	You cannot save or overwrite textures in the Styles library. You can, however, modify a Styles texture and then save it in another library.

 Related Topics


PostScript texture fill


To fill an object with a PostScript texture

1.	Select the object that you want to fill.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] button

3.	Click the name of the texture you want.

4.	Adjust the parameters to customize the texture as required.

Tip

•	Enable the Preview Fill option to preview the texture with the current settings. Click Preview to refresh the image after changing the parameters.

 Related Topics


Changing width and color


To set outline width for frames and graphic objects using the Outline tool
To set outline width for frames and graphic objects

1.	Select the frame or graphic object you want to outline.

2.	Click the [image] tool.

3.	Click the line width you want.

For other ways to set the outline width, see Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To set outline width for frames and graphic objects using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select the frame or graphic object you want to outline.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] tool button.

3.	In the Width box, type the line width you want.

For other ways to set the outline width, see Related Topics.

Note

•	To use a different unit of measurement, choose it from the Units list. The width value is automatically converted when you change units.

 Related Topics


To set the outline width for frames and graphic objects using the Property Bar

1.	Select the frame or graphic object you want to outline.

2.	Click the line width you want from the Line Style list.

If the Property Bar is hidden, click Edit, Toolbars and select Property Bar.

For other ways to set the outline width, see Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To set outline color using the Outline Color dialog box
To set outline color

1.	Select the frame or graphic object you want to outline.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] button.

3.	Select the color you want (see Related Topics).

For other ways to set the outline color, see Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To set outline color using the Outline tool

1.	Select the frame or graphic object you want to outline.

2.	Click the [image] tool.

3.	Click a color (white, gray or black) from the top row of buttons.

For other ways to set the outline color, see Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To set outline color using the on-screen color palette
To set outline color using the Color Palette

1.	Select the frame or graphic object you want to outline.

2.	Click the [image] button next to the palette.

3.	Click the color you want with the right mouse button.

For other ways to set the outline color, see Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Changing corner, line cap, and line ending shape


To set an object's corner or line cap shape

1.	Select the graphic object.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] tool button.

3.	Click a corner style.

4.	Click Square Line Caps to cut the line off exactly at the end points.

Click Rounded Line Caps to round off the ends of the line.

Click Extended Square Line Caps to square off the line and extend it beyond the endpoints for a distance equal to half the line thickness.

 Related Topics


To apply arrowheads or other line ending shapes

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] tool button

3.	Click the left Arrowhead Selector, then click the shape you want for the start of the line.

4.	Click the right Arrowhead Selector, then click the shape you want for the end of the line.

Tip

•	You can also apply arrowheads or other line ending shapes using the Property Bar. If the Property Bar is hidden, click View, Toolbars and select Property Bar.

Notes

•	To swap arrowheads from one end of the line to another, click Options, Swap.

•	To remove an arrowhead, click Options, None.

 Related Topics


To edit an arrowhead or other line-ending shape

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] tool button.

3.	Under the arrowhead you want to edit, Click Options, Edit.

4.	Do any of the following:

To resize the arrowhead drag on the solid handles surrounding it.

To move the arrowhead relative to the endpoint of the line, drag the hollow nodes the arrowhead's outline.

To center the arrowhead relative to the endpoint of the line, click Center in X or Center in Y

To flip the arrowhead, click Reflect in X or Reflect in Y.

Tip

•	To get a closer view of the arrowhead, enable the 4X zoom option.

 Related Topics


Removing outlines


To remove a frame's or graphic object's outline

1.	Select the frame or graphic object with the outline you want to remove.

2.	Click the [image] tool.

3.	Click [image] tool.

Tip

•	You can also remove outlines using the Property Bar, which appears when you select the object. If the Property Bar is hidden, click View, Toolbars and select Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Changing Line Style


To create a dashed outline

1.	Select the frame or graphic object you want to outline.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] tool button.

3.	Click the Line Style Selector.

4.	Click the style you want.

Tips

•	To create a dotted line or a line with rounded line segments, select a style with short, widely spaced segments and click [image] radio button.

•	You can also apply a dashed outline using the Property Bar which appears when you select the graphic. If the Property Bar is hidden, click View, Toolbars and select Property Bar.

 Related Topics


To create a calligraphic outline

1.	Select the frame or graphic object with the outline you want to change.

2.	Click the [image] tool, then click the [image] tool button.

3.	Click one of the corner style radio buttons ( [image]). The first and third options make the nib square; the second makes it round.

4.	Type a value in the Stretch box.

Lowering the value makes a square nib rectangular and a round nib oval. A low value will create a more pronounced calligraphic effect.

5.	Type a value in the Angle box. The angle controls the orientation of the pen to the drawing surface.

Tip

•	You can adjust Stretch and Angle interactively by dragging in the Nib Shape box. Experiment to find the combination you want.

Note

•	To change line widths after creating the calligraphic outline, use the Width setting in the Outline Pen dialog box. Choosing a line width from the Outline menu will reset the Angle to zero degrees and Stretch to 100 percent, thus removing the calligraphic effect.

 Related Topics


Changing default outline


To set the default outline for graphic objects

1.	Click away from objects on the page to deselect them.

2.	Hold down the SHIFT key and click again on the area outside the page.

3.	Click the [image] tool.

4.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of outline you want for the default. Click [image] tool to give all new graphic objects a transparent outline.

A dialog box appears asking whether you want to change the default outline for graphics

5.	Click OK.

6.	If you're using the Outline Pen dialog box, set the appropriate attributes (see Related Topics).

The outline is now applied to any new non-text objects you create. You may of course change the outline of any individual object.

 Related Topics%!ALink(Outlining_Objects;default_proc;;;;,0,"Defaultoverview",)


Formatting modes

You can format text in VENTURA using one of two modes: Tag or Override. In Tag mode, the formatting affects not only the selected paragraph but all others formatted with the same tag as the selected paragraph. (Tag mode works the same as tagging in pre-version 5 VENTURA.) Override mode is similar to a word processor where formatting is applied locally to the selected paragraph(s) leaving the tag unchanged.

You use the Format, Paragraph Tag command to format tags and the Format, Paragraph Overrides command to format the selected paragraph only. The current working environment determines whether you can use the Property Bar to format tags, apply overrides only, or both. If you're using the Long/Structured documents environment, you can switch the Property Bar from one formatting mode to the other by right-clicking in a paragraph and choosing Override Mode from the pop-up menu. With the other environments, the Property Bar applies overrides only. For more information about working environments, click Related Topics and choose "Using the Corel VENTURA Configuration Manager."

Note

•	By modifying the VENTURA.INI file, you can switch the Property Bar from one formatting mode to the other, regardless which working environment you're in. For more information, see Enabling or disabling Implicit Override Mode.

 Related Topics


Enabling or disabling Implicit Override mode

When you work in Implicit Override mode, any change you make to a paragraph using the Text tool is an override and does not affect the paragraph tag. If you want to edit the paragraph tag while working in Implicit Override mode, use the Paragraph tool or the controls in the Paragraph Tag dialog (click Format, Paragraph) to make the changes, or select the paragraph by pressing ALT while clicking.

The working environment you select using the UI Configuration Manager determines whether you can use the Property Bar to format tags, apply overrides only, or both. By editing the VENTURA.INI file, you can switch the Property Bar from one formatting mode to the other at any time, regardless which environment you're in.

Exit VENTURA, then open the VENTURA.INI file (it's in the COREL\VENTURA folder) in a word processor or other text editor, such as Windows NotePad. Locate the line, "ImplicitOverrideMode" and change the value after it to "1". Save the file, then restart VENTURA. You can now toggle the Property Bar between Override and Tag modes whenever you want by right-clicking a paragraph and choosing Override Mode.

Each working environment also has an INI file with an ImplicitOverrideMode setting. You can change the setting in these files too and you may want to do that if you decide to create your own working environment. Note that when you change environments, the ImplicitOverrideMode setting for the environment you select overrides the ImplicitOverrideMode setting in the VENTURA.INI file.

You'll find the working environment INI files in subfolders contained in the COREL\VENTURA\UICONFIG folder.

Folder Name	Document type	ImplicitOverrideMode Default Setting

Average	Medium/Graphic	1

Override	Short/Layout-intensive	1

Tagging	Long/Structured	0

Userdef	User-defined	0

How the ImplicitOverrideMode setting affects text selection and formatting

The state of the ImplicitOverrideMode setting (whether it's set to 0 or 1) changes VENTURA's behavior insofar as formatting text using the Property Bar and the tab bar in the ruler is concerned.

ImplicitOverrideMode=0

Formatting Mode	Selection Technique	Extent of Formatting

Override	Insertion point in paragraph	word containing insertion point

ALT + click paragraph*	selected paragraph only

Tag	Insertion point in paragraph	tag

ALT + click paragraph*	tag

ImplicitOverrideMode=1

Property Bar Formatting Mode	Text Selection Technique	Extent of Formatting

Override	Insertion point in paragraph	word containing insertion point

ALT + click paragraph*	selected paragraph only

* ALT + click is equivalent to selecting a paragraph using the [image] tool.

 Related Topics


Manually inserted pages

The Insert Pages command in the Layout menu lets you insert blank pages anywhere in a document. You use the Insert Pages command to add pages to documents. such as newsletters and magazines, which often consist of several text files, each placed in a separate frame.

Any text file that you place directly in an inserted page, rather than in a frame placed on top of the inserted page, automatically inserts additional pages as needed, until all text is placed in the chapter. Text already on the page that precedes the inserted page flows around the inserted file. For example, if text in a particular file flows from pages one through eight, and a new page is inserted between pages six and seven, the text from that file will flow up to page six, skip page seven and continue on pages eight and nine. If you then place another text file on page seven (the blank page) that takes up five pages, the text in the first file will skip those five pages and finish on pages twelve and thirteen.

Corel VENTURA restarts numbering of auto-numbered paragraphs and footnotes on each inserted page. If you prefer, you can continue numbering from previous pages.

Note

•	The Delete Pages command works for Inserted Pages only. Because regular pages are created automatically by Corel VENTURA based on the amount of text in your document, they also must be removed by removing the text from the page.

 Related Topics


Document templates

A template is simply an existing document stripped of some or all of its text and picture files. What remains is a shell made up of empty chapters, the stylesheet(s) plus any drawn frames and graphic objects contained in the document.

Using templates saves time, especially when creating documents like newsletters and magazines which often use the same layout from one issue to the next. With these types of documents, text is usually placed in drawn frames, so that an article appearing on one page can continue in another frame on any other page. Rather than spend the time to place frames in the same location for each new issue, you can extract a template from an earlier issue that contains just the empty frames. For the next issue, all you need to do is open the template, import the appropriate text and graphics files, place them in the frames, save the document, and then print.

By default, all chapter and component files (text and pictures) in the document you're basing the template on will be included in the new document. If there are chapters or component files you don't want to reuse, you can exclude them from the new document.


Creating a new template

You can customize a template and save it in the Samples directory for use in other documents.

To create a template

1.	Click File, New.

2.	Customize the template as desired.

3.	Click File, Save.

4.	Click the arrow next to the Save In list box, and choose the Ventura\Samples directory in the location where you installed VENTURA.

5.	Type a file name for the template in the File Name box.

6.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


To create a document using a template

1.	From the File menu, choose New.

2.	Enable the Create Template button.

3.	Click a tab, then click the name of the document you want to use as a template.

4.	Click OK.

A dialog box appears with a list of the chapters in the selected document.

5.	Click the plus button (+) to display a list of text and picture files in the chapter.

6.	Click to clear the check boxes next to the files you want to exclude from the new document.

Note that when you exclude a chapter, all its files are automatically excluded too. You cannot include files in a chapter without also including the chapter.

7.	Choose OK.

VENTURA opens a new document containing the component files you specified.

 Related Topics


Formatting Text


To change the font, style and size of selected text

1.	Select the text you want to format.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Select the attributes you want.

The availability of styles (bold, italic, etc.) depends on the font.

Note

•	For more information on selecting text, click Related Topics, and choose Selecting Text.

 Related Topics


To change text to bold

1.	Select the text you want to format.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Choose Bold from the Style list.

The availability of styles (bold, italic, etc.) depends on the font.

 Related Topics


To change text to italic

1.	Select the text you want to format.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Choose italic from the Style list box

The availability of styles (bold, italic, etc.) depends on the font.

 Related Topics


To change the color of text

1.	Select the text you want to format.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Click Font color.

4.	Choose from the preset Color Palette or create your own by clicking Others.

Tip

•	You can also select text and then click [image] and pick a color.

 Related Topics


To underline text

1.	Select the text you want to format.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Click Underline.

Note

•	You can modify font and line formatting attributes. For more information, click Related Topics, and choose "To adjust underline thickness, superscript size, and other text attribute settings."

 Related Topics


To place a strikethrough line through text

1.	Select the text you want to format.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Click Strike-thru.

Note

•	You can modify font and line formatting attributes. For more information, click Related Topics, and choose "To adjust underline thickness, superscript size, and other text attribute settings."

 Related Topics


To place an overscore above text

1.	Select the text you want to format.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Click Overscore.

Note

•	You can modify font and line formatting attributes. For more information, click Related Topics, and choose "To adjust underline thickness, superscript size, and other text attribute settings."

 Related Topics


To adjust underline thickness, superscript size and other text attribute settings

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Defaults tab.

4.	Adjust the settings.

Note

•	With Auto-adjust to Font enabled, VENTURA automatically adjusts the line settings when the font size changes, or the font style changes from normal to bold, or vice versa.

 Related Topics


To make text small capital letters

1.	Select the text you want to format.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Click Small Caps.

Note

•	You can modify font and line formatting attributes. For more information, click Related Topics, and choose To adjust attribute settings.

 Related Topics


To raise or lower text from the baseline

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Adjust the Above and Below settings.

 Related Topics


To remove character formatting

1.	Select the text you want to format.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Choose Style, Normal.

Tip

•	You can also select text and then click [image].

 Related Topics


Font Color and Background Color


To change the font color of a paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Do either of the following:

•	To apply a uniform color, click the Font color button and choose the color you want. Click Others in the pop-up palette to select from a wider range of colors or to mix your own.

•	To apply a fountain, texture or pattern fill, click [image] and choose the fill you want.

Note

•	Applying fountain, texture or pattern fills to large quantities of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.

•	Enabling the Overprint option causes the paragraph to print over the background color. This option is relevant only when printing color separations and should be enabled for most work. For more information about overprinting click [image].

 Related Topics


To change the background of a paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Do either of the following:

•	To apply a uniform color, click the Background color button and choose the color you want. Click others to select from a wider range or colors or to mix your own.

•	To apply a fountain, texture or pattern fill, click [image] and choose the fill you want.

Note

•	Applying fountain, texture or pattern fills to large quantities of text slows down printing and screen redrawing.

•	Enabling the Overprint option causes the background to print over objects beneath it. This option is relevant only when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting click [image].

 Related Topics


To print white text on a black background

1.	Select the paragraph you want to print white.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Font color button and choose white.

4.	Click Format, Ruling Lines, then click the Advanced tab.

5.	Enable the first check box in the # column.

6.	Click the color bar in the first row and choose a color for the background.

7.	Click the Size box in the first row and enter a value that is larger than the paragraph's point size. For example, enter 36 if the point size is 24.

8.	Enable the last check box in the # column.

9.	Click the last box in the Space column and enter a negative value equal to the distance required to move the background over the text.

This value is calculated by adding the paragraph's point size to the value you specified in step 7, then dividing the sum by -2. For example, if you want to place 24 point text within a background 36 points high, enter -30.

10.	Type a name in the Preset box to save the settings as a style.

Tip

•	You can also use the Background color setting in the Paragraph Properties dialog box to print white text on a black (or any other color) background. Click Related Topics for more information.

 Related Topics


Tracking and Kerning


Adjusting spacing between characters and words

There are a number of ways to adjust the spacing between characters. You can use kerning to change the way character pairs are spaced or tracking to change the way words and characters are spaced. You can also adjust the spacing between words on a page with Justified text and other alignment settings.

What do you want to do?

Adjust the space between selected pairs of characters (kerning)

Adjust character and word spacing in a paragraph (tracking)

Adjust the spacing for a selected range of text (tracking)

Adjust the amount of spacing between words and letters in justified text


To adjust spacing between selected pairs of characters (kerning)

1.	Select the range of text you want to adjust.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Adjust the kerning setting.

Tip

•	You can also kern selected letter pairs on-screen: while holding down the CTRL key, press [ to increase or ] to decrease the spacing.

•	If you want the same kerning applied to each occurrence of the selected letter pair, consider adjusting the kerning values for the font. For more information, click Related Topics and choose "To adjust kerning values."

 Related Topics


To adjust character and word spacing in a paragraph (tracking)

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Defaults tab and choose a preset tracking value from the Type box. Or, choose Custom and type a value in the Custom box.

Tip

•	You can also choose a tracking preset from the Property Bar.

Note

•	You can also adjust the spacing for selected text. Click Related topics for more information.

•	You can also adjust the preset tracking settings, using the Format, Tracking & Kerning command. For more information, click Related Topics and choose "To adjust tracking settings."

 Related Topics


To adjust the spacing in a selected range of text (tracking)

1.	Select the range of text you want to adjust.

2.	While holding down the CTRL key, press [ to increase or ] to decrease the tracking manually.

Tip

•	You can also adjust the tracking and kerning for a paragraph. Click Related Topics and choose "To adjust character and word spacing in a paragraph."

Note

•	You cannot manually track paragraphs selected using the ALT + click selection method or the [image] tool.

 Related Topics


To set kerning and tracking in a tag

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Do any of the following:

•	To have Corel VENTURA kern text in all paragraphs with the selected tag, click the Typography tab and enable Automatic Kerning.

•	To adjust character tracking, click the Defaults tab and select a preset tracking setting from the Type list under Character Tracking. Or, select Custom and enter the amount of tracking you want. Type a minus sign to tighten tracking if needed.

Note

•	Kerning takes affect when you enable Pair Kerning in the current chapter using the Format, Chapter command (Typography tab). Once enabled in the chapter, you can enable or disable it for individual paragraphs using the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command and for individual frames using the Format, Frame command.

 Related Topics


To adjust kerning values

1.	Click Format, Tracking & Kerning.

2.	Choose the Edit Kerning tab.

3.	Select the font and style you want to kern and adjust the values.

Note

•	The adjustments you make apply to the fonts in the current document only. To apply the kerning settings to another document, use the Import/Export command. For more information, see Related Topics.

•	Kerning takes affect when you enable Pair Kerning in the current chapter using the Format, Chapter command (Typography tab). Once enabled in the chapter, you can enable or disable it for individual paragraphs using the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command and for individual frames using the Format, Frame command.

•	If you have Type 1, TrueType or printer fonts with the same name on your system, the font list in the Edit Kern/Tracking dialog box will show the Type 1 font, but not the others. To edit the TrueType font, remove the Type 1 font from your system using Adobe Type Manager, which is included with VENTURA. Similarly, to edit the printer font, remove the other two. (Use the Windows Control Panel to remove TrueType fonts).

 Related Topics


To adjust tracking settings

1.	Click Format, Tracking & Kerning.

2.	Choose the Tracking tab.

3.	Select the font and style you want to track and adjust the values.

Note

•	The adjustments you make apply to the fonts in the current document only. To apply tracking settings to another document, use the Import/Export dialog. For more information, see Related Topics.

•	If you have Type 1, TrueType or printer fonts with the same name on your system, the font list in the Edit Kern/Tracking dialog box will show the Type 1 font, but not the others. To edit the TrueType font, remove the Type 1 font from your system using Adobe Type Manager, which is included with VENTURA. Similarly, to edit the printer font, remove the other two. (Use the Windows Control Panel to remove TrueType fonts).


To turn automatic kerning on and off for the entire chapter

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and then click the Typography tab.

2.	Enable Pair Kerning.

Note

•	Manual kerning takes affect regardless of whether Pair Kerning is enabled or disabled.

 Related Topics


To add a kern pair

1.	Click, Format, Tracking and Kerning.

2.	Click the Edit Kerning tab.

3.	Select the font and style you want to add a kern pair to.

4.	Enter two characters in the Kern Pair box.

5.	Adjust the Value setting.

6.	Click Add.

Note

•	You can also adjust the Value setting by dragging the slider bar.

•	Kerning takes affect when you enable Pair Kerning in the current chapter using the Format, Chapter command (Typography tab). Once enabled in the chapter, you can enable or disable it for individual paragraphs using the Format, Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command and for individual frames using the Format, Frame command.

•	If you have Type 1, TrueType or printer fonts with the same name on your system, the font list in the Edit Kern/Tracking dialog box will show the Type 1 font, but not the others. To edit the TrueType font, remove the Type 1 font from your system using Adobe Type Manager, which is included with VENTURA. Similarly, to edit the printer font, remove the other two. (Use the Windows Control Panel to remove TrueType fonts).

 Related Topics


To delete a kern pair

1.	Click, Format, Tracking and Kerning.

2.	Click the Edit Kerning tab.

3.	Select the font and style you want to delete the kern pair from.

4.	Choose a pair from the Kerning Values list.

5.	Click Delete.

Note

•	If you have Type 1, TrueType or printer fonts with the same name on your system, the font list in the Edit Kern/Tracking dialog box will show the Type 1 font, but not the others. To edit the TrueType font, remove the Type 1 font from your system using Adobe Type Manager, which is included with VENTURA. Similarly, to edit the printer font, remove the other two. (Use the Windows Control Panel to remove TrueType fonts).

 Related Topics


To print examples of kerning and tracking
To generate examples of kerning and tracking

1.	Click, Format, Tracking and Kerning.

2.	Click Generate Example.

3.	Choose the fonts and point sizes you want to generate examples for.

VENTURA will create a new document containing sample text tracked and kerned using the values you specified. To view the document, select it from the list at the bottom of the Window menu.

 Related Topics


Importing and exporting kerning and tracking settings

You can adjust kerning and tracking settings for the active document without affecting your fonts. This means that your setting adjustments apply only to the active document. Importing and exporting kerning and tracking settings allows you to copy these values from one document to another. You can also save kern pairs as ASCII text, which allows you to edit them in a word processor or other text editor. You can add the edited values back to a file using the Import command.

What do you want to do?

Import kerning settings from another document

Export kerning settings to another document

Export kerning settings as ASCII text

Import tracking settings from another document


To save a kern pair set as ASCII text

1.	Click, Format, Tracking and Kerning.

2.	Click the Edit Kerning tab.

3.	Select the font and style with the kern pairs you want to save.

4.	Click Import/Export.

5.	Click Export Kern Pair Sets.

6.	Enter a file name.

7.	Click Save.

You can then edit the kerning values in a word processor or other text editor. To use the edited values in any document, import the file using the Import command in the Import/Export Kerning dialog box.

 Related Topics


To load a kern pair set saved to an text file
To load a kern pair set saved to a text file

1.	Click, Format, Tracking and Kerning.

2.	Click the Edit Kerning tab.

3.	Click Import/Export.

4.	Click Load Kern Pair Sets.

5.	Type the name of the file containing the kerning pairs or browse to find the file.

6.	Click Open.

Note

•	VENTURA does not import CorelKERN (or LetrTuc) kerning pair text files.

 Related Topics


To import kerning values from another document

1.	Click, Format, Tracking and Kerning.

2.	Click the Edit Kerning tab.

3.	Click Import/Export.

4.	Click Import Kerning from Publication.

5.	Type the name of the document containing the kerning pairs or browse to find the document.

6.	Click Open.

 Related Topics


To import tracking values from another document

1.	Click, Format, Tracking and Kerning.

2.	Click the Tracking tab.

3.	Click Import/Export.

4.	Click Import Tracking from Publication.

5.	Type the name of the document containing the tracking values or browse to find the document.

6.	Click Open.

 Related Topics


Indents and Alignment


To indent the first line of a paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Adjust the Line Indents settings.

Tip

•	You can also indent paragraphs by selecting a preset displayed by clicking Quick Format on the Align tab. Or, you can use the horizontal ruler. The left-margin boundary marker on the ruler is divided has two halves [image] top and bottom. Dragging the top half indents the first line; dragging the bottom half indents the entire paragraph.

 Related Topics


To indent a paragraph from the margins

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Adjust the Paragraph Indents settings.

Tip

•	You can also indent paragraphs using the horizontal ruler. The left-margin boundary marker on the ruler is divided has two halves [image] top and bottom. Dragging the top half indents the first line; dragging the bottom half indents the entire paragraph.

 Related Topics


To create a hanging indent or an outdent

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Set the number of lines you want to indent.

5.	Enter a negative value in the amount box.

Tip

•	You can also create hanging indents or outdents by selecting a preset displayed by clicking Quick Format on the Align tab. Or, you can use the horizontal ruler. The left-margin boundary marker on the ruler is divided has two halves [image] top and bottom. Dragging the top half indents the first line; dragging the bottom half indents the entire paragraph.

Note

•	Hanging indents, paragraphs whose first line extends past the left side of the rest of the paragraph, are frequently used for numbered steps, such as these procedures. Outdents can have one or more lines extend past the left side of the rest of the paragraph.

 Related Topics


Tab Stops


To set tabs stops

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	Do any of the following:

•	To change the position of an existing tab stop, click the Position box, then type a position.

•	To add a new tab stop, click the Add Tab button, then enter a position.

•	To add evenly spaced tab stops, enter the amount of space you want between them in the Tabs Every box, then click the Add Tab button.

5.	Specify whether you want to fill the space between tab stops with leader characters.

 How?

Tip

•	You can also add or adjust tab stops using the ruler. For more information, Click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To delete a tab stop

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	In the Position column, click the tab stop you want to delete.

5.	Click the Delete button.

Tip

•	You can also adjust tab stops using the ruler. For more information, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To move a tab stop

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	In the Position column, click the tab stop you want to move.

5.	Enter a new location.

Tip

•	You can also drag the tab stop marker [image] to its new location.

 Related Topics


To change the spacing between default tab stops

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	Enter the amount of space you want between the tab stops in the Add Tabs Every box.

Tip

•	You can also add or adjust tab stops using the ruler. For more information, Click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To set tab stops with leader characters

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	In the Leader column, select the leader character you want each tab stop to use from the list of presets. Or, type a custom character (see Tip).

5.	In the Spacing column, type the amount of space you want between the leader characters.

Tip

•	You can also add or adjust tab stops using the ruler. For more information, click Related Topics.

•	To fill the space between the end of the paragraph and the right margin with leader characters, select a character and set the spacing using the controls under Trailing Leader.

•	To create a solid line, type _ as the leader character and set spacing to zero.

•	To use a leader character that is not available on the keyboard, hold down the ALT key and its ANSI number using the numeric keypad. To determine a character's ANSI number, select it in the Symbol dialog box (click Insert, Insert Item, Symbol) and look for the number at the top of the dialog box.

 Related Topics


To change the decimal alignment character

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Type the character you want text preceded by a decimal aligned tab stop to aligned on.

Note

•	To use a character not available on the keyboard, enter its ANSI code in the ANSI box. For a list of ANSI character codes, click [image].

 Related Topics


To set tab stops using the ruler

1.	Make sure the rulers are displayed. (Click View, Rulers, to display rulers).

2.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

3.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

4.	Do any of the following:

•	To add a new tab stop, click the [image] button and choose an alignment. Then, click the white bar in the horizontal ruler at the location you want the new tab stop.

•	To move a tab stop, drag the tab marker in the horizontal ruler to the left or right.

•	To delete a tab stop, drag the marker off the ruler.

•	To change the alignment of an existing tab stop, right-click the marker, then choose an alignment.

Tip

•	To move tab stops without having them snap to the tick marks on the rulers, hold down the SHIFT key as you drag.

 Related Topics


Spacing and Rotation


To change the spacing above or below paragraphs

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Adjust the Above and Below settings.

Note

•	The above and below spacing options set the space above the first line and below the last line in a paragraph. These settings can be fixed or variable depending on the option you select from the Auto-adjust list. With variable spacing, VENTURA automatically adjusts the spacing between paragraphs if you change font sizes. For more information about Auto-adjust, click [image] at the top of the Paragraph Properties dialog box, then click the Auto-adjust list box.

•	Above and below space settings always add space between paragraphs; inter-paragraph settings only apply to paragraphs with the same tag.

•	You can specify space above and below paragraph as well as between paragraphs. If you specify both, VENTURA uses the larger of the two to determine the space between successive paragraphs. The settings are not cumulative.

 Related Topics


To change inter-paragraph spacing

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Adjust the Inter-paragraph spacing settings.

Note

•	Above and below space settings always add space between paragraphs; inter-paragraph settings only apply to paragraphs with the same tag.

•	You can specify space above and below paragraph as well as between paragraphs. If you specify both, VENTURA uses the larger of the two to determine the space between successive paragraphs. The settings are not cumulative.

 Related Topics


To change spacing between lines

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Adjust the Inter-Line spacing settings.

Tips

•	Use the Auto-adjust setting to specify if and how you want inter-line spacing adjusted when the font size of the paragraph changes.

•	Enable the Grow inter-line spacing to fit check box when you want to accommodate mixed font sizes in a line, or in-line pictures.

 Related Topics


To specify whether space is added above a paragraph when it appears at the top of a page or column

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Enable the Add above space at column check box if you want space added; disable it if you don't.

If you don't want the Above space amount added between this paragraph and the next one, enable the Add space above only at column top check box.

 Related Topics


To rotate a paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Select an angle from the Angle list box.

5.	Enter the maximum amount of space you want the rotated text to occupy in the Maximum Height box.

 Related Topics


To adjust the amount of spacing between words and letters in justified text

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	Adjust the settings in the Normal Word Spacing boxes.

5.	Enter values in the Minimum and Maximum Word spacing boxes.

Tip

•	To reduce large gaps between words in a justified paragraph, turn Automatic Letter Spacing on and adjust the settings as required.

•	When setting justified text, you may want to enable the loose lines indicator. That way, if a line exceeds the maximum spacing you have set, the line will be flagged as loose. To enable the loose lines indicator, click Tools, Options, and choose the View tab. Enable the Loose Lines checkbox. You also have the option of choosing the color in which the loose lines will be indicated.

 Related Topics


To adjust the amount of spacing add to a paragraph during vertical justification

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	Adjust the Vertical Justification settings.

Note

•	See Related Topics for the overview on Vertical Justification.

 Related Topics


To always start paragraphs at the same vertical position

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	From the Vertical list under Text Alignment, choose Absolute.

5.	Type a position relative to the top of the frame.

Note

•	Once you have set the vertical alignment to Absolute, text added to the paragraph above does not push the current paragraph down; instead, the text from the two paragraphs overlaps.

 Related Topics


To allow paragraphs to span columns

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	Enable the Frame-wide text check box.

5.	Do either of the following:

•	To allow the paragraph to span all columns, enable the Frame-wide check box.

•	To allow the paragraph to span a certain number of columns, disable the Frame-wide check box, then enter the number of columns to span in the Columns box.

 Related Topics


Breaks


Using breaks to control where a paragraph begins

A break determines where a paragraph starts. After a break, the next paragraph can begin on a new line, at the top of a new column, at the top of a new page or frame, or at the top of the next right or left page.

Breaks can be applied to a tag or as an override to a selected paragraph. You can, for example, create a tag with a page break before it, so that it will always appear at the top of a new page.

Certain break settings are used to create layout effects, such as run-in headings, lead-in paragraphs, or side-by-side paragraphs. Other settings can be used to keep paragraphs together.

What do you want to do?

Place paragraphs side by side

Start a paragraph on the same line as the last line of the previous paragraph (create a lead-in paragraph or run-in heading)

Keep lines of a paragraph together

Keep paragraphs together

Place a specific paragraph at the top of a page or column

Allow or prevent breaks in a paragraph

Insert a soft return


To insert a soft return

1.	Insert the cursor at the point in the text where you want a soft return.

2.	Press SHIFT + ENTER.

 Related Topics


To place paragraphs side by side

1.	Select the first paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Choose the Alignment tab and enter a value in the In From Right box to indent the paragraph from the right margin, then click Apply.

Select the second paragraph and enter a value in the In From Left box to move the paragraph a sufficient distance from the first paragraph, then click Apply.

4.	Click the Breaks tab, then select the first paragraph.

5.	Set Line Break to Before and the other break settings to None.

6.	Select the second paragraph.

7.	Set all the break settings to None.

Tip

•	You can also place paragraphs side by side by using the [image] button. Select the paragraphs while holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, release the keys, then click the button. If this button doesn't appear on your toolbars, use the Tools, Customize command to add it (click Related Topics for instructions). The button is located in the Format category in the Customize dialog box.

 Related Topics


To start a paragraph on the same line as the last line of the previous paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph you want to start where the previous paragraph ends.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Enable Add Width of Preceding Line.

5.	Enter a value in the Amount box under Indent to add space between the end of the first paragraph and the beginning of the second.

6.	Click the Breaks tab and set Line Break to After and the other break settings to None. Click Apply.

7.	Select the preceding paragraph.

8.	Set Line Break to Before and the other break settings to None.

9.	Click Apply.

Note

•	This procedure is a useful technique when you want to apply the formatting from two tags to what looks like one paragraph, for example, in a lead-in or run-in paragraph.

 Related Topics


To keep lines of a paragraph together on a page or in a column

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	Disable the Allow breaks within paragraph check box.

 Related Topics


To keep paragraphs together on a page or in a column

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

5.	Enable the Keep with previous or Keep with next check box.

Note

•	The Keep With Next/Previous Paragraph settings are designed to prevent page and columns breaks from separating a heading from the paragraph that follows it. When used for this purpose, apply the setting to the heading, not the following paragraph. Otherwise, VENTURA may not be able to place the paragraph correctly, especially if it is the body (i.e., main) text of the document.

 Related Topics


To place a specific paragraph at the top of a page or column

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	Choose Before from the Page Break or Column list.

Note

•	Choosing After from the Page Break list would cause the next paragraph to appear at the top of the page or column.

 Related Topics


To allow or prevent breaks within a paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	Enable or disable the Allow breaks within paragraph check box.

 Related Topics


Drop Caps and Bullets


To create large initial, or dropped, letters
To create large initial, or dropped letters

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Choose the font properties and attributes you want.

5.	Enable the Drop Cap Character check box.

6.	Specify the number of characters you want formatted as Drop Caps.

7.	To change the number of lines you want the character to drop, select Custom Spacing and enter a value in the Lines box. Entering a value of 1 will create a raised cap.

8.	To shift the drop cap up or down, enter the amount in the Shift Up box. A negative value will shift the drop cap down.

 Related Topics


To remove large initial, or dropped, letters

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Disable the Drop Cap Character check box.

 Related Topics


To modify a drop cap

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Enable the Drop Cap Character check box.

5.	Adjust the settings.

 Related Topics


To add bullets to a paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Enable the Bullet Character check box.

5.	Choose your font properties.

6.	Select any attributes you want for the bullet.

7.	Choose a character from the list box or enter its ANSI number.

8.	Adjust the Indent setting under Bullet Settings to set the space between the bullet and the text following it.

9.	To shift the bullet up or down enter the amount in the Shift Up box. A negative value will shift the bullet down.

 Related Topics


To remove bullets from a paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Disable the Bullet Character check box.

 Related Topics


To modify a bullet character

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Enable the Bullet Character check box.

5.	Adjust the settings.

 Related Topics


Hyphenation


To turn automatic hyphenation on and off in a paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Hyphens tab.

4.	Enable or disable the Automatic Hyphenation check box.

 Related Topics


To turn automatic hyphenation on and off in a character tag

1.	Click Format, Manage Tag List.

2.	Click the Character tab.

3.	Click Edit Tag.

4.	Click the Hyphens tab.

5.	Enable or disable the Automatic Hyphenation check box.

Note

•	Automatic hyphenation takes place only when it's enabled in the paragraph containing the text formatted with the selected character tag.


To specify the language dictionary used to hyphenate a paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Hyphens tab.

4.	Enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box.

5.	Choose the language from the Dictionary list box.

Note

•	VENTURA comes with dictionaries in several languages including Spanish, French, German and Italian. If the dictionary you need is not listed, copy the necessary files from the Corel VENTURA CD-ROM disk to your hard drive. For more information about the dictionaries and how to install them, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To control where VENTURA inserts hyphens

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Hyphens tab.

4.	Enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box.

5	In the Hyphenation Zones boxes, specify the minimum length of words you want to hyphenate and the minimum number of characters that can appear before and after a hyphen.

6.	Enable or disable the check boxes under Allow hyphens depending on whether you want to allow hyphens in words at the end of a column, page, or paragraph, or in capitalized words.

7.	In the Number of Successive hyphens box, enter the number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated. Or, enable the Unlimited check box to allow hyphens in any number of consecutive lines.

Note

•	The Hyphenation Zone settings do not apply to words containing discretionary hyphens.

 Related Topics


To view hyphenation points in a selected word

Click in the word you want to view hyphenation points in, then press CTRL + ALT + H.

Note

•	The hyphenation settings specified for the paragraph in which the selected word appears determines if, and where, hyphens appear. So, if hyphenation is turned off in the paragraph, the selected word will display without hyphens.

 Related Topics


Formatting Characters


To format text with character tags

1.	Select the text you want to format.

2.	Choose a tag from the list box in the Property Bar.

Note

•	When you apply two character tags to the same piece of text, both tags are applied, although you can only see the effects of one. If you switch to Copy Editor view, you will see the code side by side.

 Related Topics


To override character tag formatting

1.	Select the text you want to format.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Choose the formatting options you want.

 Related Topics


To remove character tag overrides

1.	Select the text for which you want to remove overrides.

2.	Choose None from the Character Tags list in the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


To search for and replace character tags

1.	Click Edit, Find and Replace.

2.	Click the Tags tab.

3.	Enable the Character button.

4.	Choose a tag from the Find list box.

5.	Choose a tag from the Replace List box.

6.	Click Find Next to search for text with the specified tag.

7.	Click Replace to change the first occurrence of text with the specified tag or Replace All to replace all occurrences.

 Related Topics


Formatting Paragraphs


To format paragraphs with paragraph tags

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click a tag from the list box in the Property Bar.

Tip

•	You can assign frequently used tags to keyboard shortcuts (see Related Topics).

•	VENTURA also provides a window for applying tags. To use the window you must add a command to a menu using the Tools, Customize command. The command name is Tag Window and it's located in the Tools folder. For more information, click Related Topics and choose "To add a command to a menu."

 Related Topics


To remove paragraph tag overrides

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Edit, Manage Overrides.

3.	Click Remove Overrides from, and choose a tag from the list.

4.	Select which Overrides you want to remove.

Tip

•	You can also remove overrides by re-applying the paragraph tag.

 Related Topics


To copy formatting overrides to a paragraph tag

1.	Select the paragraph with the overrides you want to copy.

 How?

The name of the paragraph's tag appears with a [image] symbol next to it in the Tags list.

2.	Click Edit, Manage Overrides.

3.	Click Transfer Overrides to, and choose a tag from the list.

4.	Select which Overrides you want to copy.

Note

•	You can also copy overrides to a new tag: select the paragraph, then click Format, Manage Tag List, and choose the Paragraph tab; click Add Tag, enter a tag name, then choose Selected Paragraph in the Copy Attributes From list.

 Related Topics


To specify a tag for the following paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	Choose a tag from the Next tag list.

When you press ENTER to start a new paragraph, VENTURA will format it with the tag you specify.

 Related Topics


To search for and replace paragraph tags

1.	Click Edit, Find and Replace.

2.	Click the Tags tab.

3.	Enable the Paragraph button.

4.	Choose a tag from the Find list box.

5.	Choose a tag from the Replace List box.

6.	Click Find Next to search for text with the specified tag.

7.	Click Replace to change the first occurrence of text with the specified tag or Replace All to replace all occurrences.

 Related Topics


Selecting paragraphs to apply formatting

VENTURA provides several ways to select paragraphs so that you can change their formatting.

To select...	Do this...

a single paragraph	click the paragraph using the [image] tool (see Note), or

click the paragraph using the [image] tool

multiple paragraphs	ALT + CTRL + click the paragraphs using the [image] tool, or

CTRL + click the paragraphs using the [image] tool.

Note

•	Formatting you apply using the Property Bar when it's in Override mode applies to the word containing the insertion point, not the entire paragraph. To apply overrides to the entire paragraph using the Property Bar, click the paragraph while holding down the ALT key or use the [image] tool.

 Related Topics


To switch the text formatting Property Bar between Tag mode and Override mode

•	Right-click in text, then click Override Mode.

Note

•	The current working environment determines whether you can use the Property Bar to format tags, apply overrides only, or both. For more information about working environments, click Related Topics and choose "Using the Corel VENTURA Configuration Manager."

•	You can disable Override mode for the active document via the Format, Publication command.

•	Formatting you apply using the Property Bar when it's in Override mode applies to the word containing the insertion point, not the entire paragraph. To apply overrides to the entire paragraph using the Property Bar, click the paragraph while holding down the ALT key or use the [image] tool.

 Related Topics


Frames

Frames are a page layout and design tool that you can use as containers to hold text, pictures, tables, and fills. They make it easy for you to place text anywhere on the page, rather than just in a continuous text flow. Frames allow you to continue stories from page to page or create special effects with pictures and text.

VENTURA offers a wide selection of frame anchor settings and typography controls for widows and orphans, text positioning and flow, vertical justification and conditions. Using frames can save a great deal of time and effort when designing your page layout because they allow you to rearrange your page with ease. For global page layout requirements, you can put frames on the master pages so that they appear throughout your document.

Click the [image] buttons below for more information about Corel VENTURA's five frame types:

Base page frames

Drawn frames

Caption frames

Header and footer frames

Footnote frames

 Related Topics


Adding and Editing Frames


To add a frame

1.	Click the Frame tool.

2.	Click where you want the frame.

3.	Drag diagonally to make the frame the size and shape you want.

Tip

•	You can resize the frame by clicking the frame handles and adjusting them.

•	You can convert a graphic object drawn in VENTURA to a frame. For more information, click Related Topics.

Note

•	It is possible to create a frame that is larger than the base page. If you choose to do so, ensure that your frame handles are on the inside of the frame.

•	VENTURA automatically names the frames you draw, "Frame 1," "Frame 2," etc. The name appears under Frame Anchor in the Frame Properties dialog box (Format menu). You use this name (or another name you type in the Name box) when you want to create a link to the frame in Corel Database Publisher. For more information, consult the Corel Database Publisher Help.

 Related Topics


To convert a graphic object to a frame

1.	Select the graphic object.

2.	Right-click on the object, choose Convert To Frame.

Note

•	You cannot convert Artistic text and callouts to frames.

•	VENTURA closes open paths you convert to frames by adding a line between the start and endpoints of the path.

•	If you want to convert a vector picture into graphic objects and then convert those objects into frames, use the Outline tool to remove the outlines around the graphic objects before converting them to frames. Otherwise, the frames created from the objects could take a long time to generate, especially if the picture is complicated. (Click Related Topics for information on converting pictures into graphic objects)

 Related Topics


Selecting frames and graphic objects

You must select a frame or graphic object before you can make changes to it. You know when a frame or graphic object is selected because it is enclosed by a bounding box. Corel VENTURA automatically detects different types of frames and objects; the cursor will change to a pointer as it moves over the frame border. You can adjust the sensitivity of the frame detection by clicking Tools, Options, and adjusting the Frame Selection settings on the Selection tab.

To select a frame or graphic objects

•	Click the border of the frame or graphic object.

To select multiple frames and/or graphic objects

•	Press the SHIFT key while clicking the border or each frame or graphic object.

To marquee select a frame or graphic object

1.	Click the [image] tool.

2.	Click and drag around the frames and/or graphic objects you wish to select.

 Note

•	If you marquee select an object, ensure that your selection includes the object's entire bounding box.

To deselect a frame or graphic object in a collection of selected frames or graphic objects

•	Press the SHIFT key, then click on the border of the frame and/or graphic object you want to deselect.

To deselect a frame or graphic object in a collection of grouped frames or objects

•	Press the ALT key while clicking the border of the frame or graphic object you wish to deselect.

To select all frames and graphic objects on the current page

1.	Right-click on the border of one of the frames or graphic objects.

2.	Choose Select All.

To cycle through frames and graphic objects on the current page

1.	Select any frame or graphic object on the page.

2.	Press the TAB key repeatedly, stopping when you've selected the object you want. Press SHIFT + TAB to cycle in the other direction.

 Related Topics


Cutting, copying, and pasting frames

To cut, copy, or paste a frame

1.	Click the border of the frame.

2.	Click Edit, Copy, or Edit, Cut.

3.	Click Edit, Paste.

To copy frames between documents

1.	Copy the frame.

3.	Click File, Open.

4.	Choose the publication into which you want to paste the frame.

5.	Go to the page where you want to paste the frame.

6.	Click Edit, Paste.

To paste frames in multi-page view

1.	Select the frame.

2.	Click Edit, Copy, or Edit, Cut to place the frame on the Clipboard.

3.	Press F3 to switch to multi-page view.

4.	Click the page on which you'd like to paste the frame.

5.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To spread drawn frames across facing pages

1.	Use the Zoom tool to display facing pages.

 How?

2.	Right-click the frame you want to spread.

3.	Click Make Spread.

4.	Stretch the frame across the page boundary by dragging the frame by one of its selection handles.

Tip

•	To apply the same spread on facing pages throughout the chapter or document, create the spread on the master page.

Note

•	You cannot spread frames across chapter boundaries.

•	As with any object on the pasteboard, the area of the spread that extends into the pasteboard does not print. If you want the spread to bleed off the printed page, print the document on paper larger than the page size specified in VENTURA.

•	You cannot edit nodes on the right side of frames spread across pages.

•	You cannot move or resize a spread frame with the mouse except in Facing Pages view. Use the Property Bar or Format, Frame command if you want to move or resize the frame in another view.

•	You cannot drag a frame spread across facing pages into a library; use the Edit, Copy and Paste commands instead.

 Related Topics


Working with files in frames


To place a file in a frame

1.	Select the frame you want to put the file in.

2.	Click Tools, Navigator.

3.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

4.	Drag the text or picture file over the select frame and release the mouse button.

If the file you want doesn't appear in the Navigator, use the Import, Text or Import, Picture command in the File menu to load into the document. Click Related Topics for instructions

Tip

•	You can also select the files for placement from the Files List in the Property Bar.

Note

•	If the frame already contains a file, the new one replaces the existing one if it's the same type (i.e., two text files or two picture files). If the file types are different, the new file is added to the existing file allowing you to superimpose text on a picture.

 Related Topics


To remove a file from a frame

1.	Right-click the border of the frame.

2.	Choose Remove from Frame.

3.	Choose the command that corresponds to the type of file in the frame.

4.	Delete the drawn frame (optional).

Note

•	The file remains in the Files list even after it has been removed from the frame. To remove the file from the publication, use the Navigator. Click Related Topics for instructions.

 Related Topics


Working with text in frames


To direct text flow around and behind frames

1.	Click the border of the frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	Click General.

4.	Choose an option from the Flow list box.

Note

•	The vertical order of drawn frames affects the flow of text around them. For more information, click Related Topics and choose " Layering order for drawn frames and graphic objects."

 Related Topics


To specify the direction of text flow in frames

1.	Select the frame containing the text file.

2.	Click Format, Frame, General.

3.	Click a picture to apply a preset flow option or click the Advanced button and select an option from the list under Flow & Rotation.

Note

•	The default option is Highest. In the case of irregularly-shaped frames, you may wish to choose Highest Right or Highest Left. These options determine the point from which text begins flowing.

 Related Topics


To direct text flow from one frame to another

1.	Click the border of the first frame.

2.	Click the down arrow in the lower right-hand corner of the frame.

The arrow appears when the Frame Continuation option in the Options, View dialog box (opened from the Tools menu) is enabled.

3.	Drag to create a new frame.

Note

•	To direct flow between existing frames, repeat steps 1-2 for as many frames as required.

 Related Topics


To add space around a frame

There are two ways to increase the amount of space between a picture and the surrounding text. You can:

•	Increase the margins around the frame using the Outside Margins settings on Margins tab of the Frame Settings dialog box (Format menu).

•	Add inside margins to the frame to move the contents away from the edge. You can do this by dragging the margin boundaries on the rulers or by using the Outside Margins settings on Margins tab of the Frame Settings dialog box (Format menu).

•	Make the picture smaller inside the frame by using the Dimensions settings on Picture tab of the Frame Settings dialog box (Format menu).

 Related Topics


To edit the shape of a text wrap around a picture

1.	Click the [image] tool.

2.	Click the text wrap path.

3.	Reshape the path by dragging it's segments, nodes or control points. For more information, click Related Topics and choose "Shaping curve objects."

4.	Press Enter to update the picture.

 Related Topics


Moving and sizing frames


Resizing frames

Corel VENTURA gives you several ways to resize frames. You can resize a frame to precise measurements, or move it by eye, using the mouse. Or, if you have a picture in a frame, you can resize the frame to its contents. You can also lock a frame so that it cannot be moved or resized.

What do you want to do?

Set the frame's size and position

Resize a frame with the mouse

Resize a frame to precise measurements

Fit a frame to its contents

Lock or unlock the frame's size and position

 Related Topics


To set a frame's size and position

1.	Click the border of the frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame, General.

3.	Set the Width and Height.

4.	 Set the Horizontal and Vertical Frame Origin.

Note

•	The Origin sets the position of the  upper-left corner of the frame, relative to the upper-left corner of the page.

•	You can also set a frame's size and position using the Property Bar. Select the frame, choose options in the Property Bar, and click Apply.

 Related Topics


To resize a frame with the mouse

1.	Click the border of the frame.

2.	Move the cursor over one of the frame handles.

3.	Click and drag the handle to resize the frame.

 Related Topics


To resize a frame to precise measurements

1.	Click the border of the frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame, General.

3.	Enter the dimensions in the Width and Height boxes.

 Related Topics


To fit a frame to its contents

1.	Right-click the border of the frame.

2.	Click Size Frame to Object.

 Related Topics


Moving frames

Corel VENTURA provides several ways of moving frames. You can move a frame in precise increments, or move it by eye, using the mouse. You can also lock a frame so that it cannot be moved or resized.

What do you want to do?

Move a frame

Move a frame to a specific location

Move a frame in set increments.

Rotate a frame

Rotate a frame's contents

Rotate a frame with the mouse

 	Lock or unlock the frame's size and position

 Related Topics


To move a frame

1.	Click the border of the frame.

2.	Click and drag the selected frame to the desired location on the page.

 Related Topics


To move a frame to a specific location

1.	Click the border of the frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame, General.

3.	Set the Horizontal and Vertical Frame Origin.

Note

•	The Origin sets the position of the  upper-left corner of the frame, relative to the upper-left corner of the page.

•	You can also move a frame using the origin settings in the Property Bar. For More information, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To rotate frames

1.	Click the border of the frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame, and choose the General tab.

3.	In the Rotation box, enter a value from 0° to 360°.

Tip

•	You can also rotate a frame by double-click its border and dragging the rotation handles at the corners of the frame. Dragging the point in the center of the frame allows you to change their axis of rotation. If you subsequently rotate the frame back to 0 degrees, the center of rotation will return to the middle of the frame.

•	If you subsequently rotate the frame back to 0 degrees, the center of rotation will return to the middle of the frame.

Note

•	You can also rotate a frame's contents independently of the frame. Follow steps one and two, above, then enter a value in the Rotate Contents By box. Although you can rotate text on the base page frame using this setting, it's primarily intended for rotating pictures in this type of frame. If you need to rotate text, place the text in a drawn frame.

•	You cannot rotate OLE objects; however,  you may rotate the frame containing them.

 Related Topics


To rotate a frame using the mouse

1.	Double-click the frame's border. The handles on the object's bounding box change to two-way arrows.

2.	Drag one of the corner arrows in a circular motion.

Tip

•	Hold down the CTRL key while dragging to constrain the rotation to 15-degree increments. Release the mouse button before releasing the CTRL key to maintain the angle. You can change the angle of constraint by using the Tools, Options command (Selection tab).

•	You can change your axis of rotation by dragging the point in the center of the frame. If you subsequently rotate the frame back to 0 degrees using the Format, Frame command, the center of rotation will return to the middle of the frame.

Note

•	You can also rotate a frame's contents independently of the frame. See Related Topics for details.

 Related Topics


To lock or unlock a frame's size and position

1.	Click the border of the frame you want to lock or unlock.

2.	Click Format, Frame, then click the General tab.

3.	Enable or disable the Lock Frame option.

 Related Topics


To move a frame in set increments
To move a frame or graphic object in set increments

1.	Click the border of the frame or graphic object.

2.	Press an up, down, left, or right arrow key to move the frame up, down, left, or right.

Note

•	Holding down an arrow key moves the frame or graphic object in continuous steps.

•	The default amount is 0.10 inches. You can change the setting, however [image] click Tools, Options, Selection, and adjust the Nudge setting.

 Related Topics


To move a frame using the Property Bar

1.	Click the border of the frame.

2.	Type a value in the x-origin box [image], then press Enter.

3.	Type a value in the y-origin box [image], then press Enter.

Note

•	The x-origin and y-origin determine the location of the upper left corner of the frame.

 Related Topics


To skew (slant) a drawn frame or graphic object
To skew a drawn frame or graphic object

Skewing allows you to slant a drawn frame or graphic object from left to right, or top to bottom. The content of the frame or graphic object does not skew.

1.	Select the frame or graphic object you want to skew.

2.	Click the frame or graphic object's border twice (a little slower than a double-click).

The nodes on the frame or object's bounding box turn into double-headed arrows.

3.	Click and drag the arrows to skew the object or frame as desired.

Tip

•	Press the CTRL key while dragging to skew in 15 degree increments. You can change this angle by adjusting the Constrain Angle setting in the Options, Selection dialog box (Tools menu).

 Note

•	Skewing is not recommended for frames with captions.


Scaling a drawn frame or graphic object

Scaling allows you to change the size of a drawn frame or graphic frame vertically, horizontally, or both.

To scale a drawn frame or graphic object

1.	Select the frame or graphic object you want to skew.

2.	Click the frame or graphic object's border.

3.	Click and drag any of the nodes on the frame or object's bounding box.

 Tip

•	To scale the object or frame from the center, press SHIFT while clicking and dragging.


Frame captions


To attach a caption to the selected frame

1.	Click the border of the frame you want to add a caption to.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	In the Caption list box under Caption Position, choose the location where the caption will appear.

5.	Type text in the caption frame.

Tip

•	You can insert a counter in the caption, which will automatically number the frames. For instructions, click Related Topics and choose "To number drawn frames."

Note

•	When you move an existing caption to a different position [image] for example, from the left side of the frame to the right side [image] the text in the caption is lost. To retain the text, copy it to the clipboard before moving the caption, then paste the text into the repositioned caption.

 Related Topics


To remove a caption

1.	Click the border of the frame where you wish to remove the caption.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	In the Caption position list box, choose None.

 Related Topics


To number drawn frames

You can number pictures and tables in drawn frames by attaching a caption to the frame and then inserting a counter in the caption. When you add, move or delete the frames, VENTURA updates the numbering automatically.

1.	Select the drawn frame you want to number.

2.	Add a caption to the frame.

 How?

3.	Click in the caption frame.

4.	Click [image] in the Property Bar to insert the current chapter and/or [image] to insert the current page.

To separate the chapter and page numbers,  type a comma, dash or other character.

 Related Topics


Anchoring frames


To anchor a frame

1.	Click the border of the frame.

2.	Click the Frame Anchor tool [image].

3.	Click in the text where you want to anchor the frame.

Note

•	The frame will be anchored in line with the text. To change the frame's position, click Format, Frame, and choose the General tab (click Advanced if the Advanced settings are not visible). You can then set the Frame Anchor Position and Alignment.

•	VENTURA automatically repositions the frame when its anchor moves. However, for frames anchored outside columns or the base page margins, you may need to use the Refresh Window command in the View menu to redraw the frame.

 Related Topics


To edit a frame anchor

1.	Click the border of the anchored frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame, General.

Click Advanced if the Advanced settings are not visible.

3.	Adjust the Position and Alignment settings.

 Related Topics


To delete a frame anchor

1.	Click the border of the anchored frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame, General.

Click Advanced if the Advanced settings are not visible.

3.	Disable the Frame Anchor box.

 Related Topics


Working with frame tags


To apply a frame tag

1.	Select a frame.

2.	Click a tag from the Tags list in the Property Bar.

Click Related Topics for more information about tags.

 Related Topics


To untag a frame

1.	Select a frame.

2.	Choose <No Tag> from the tags list in the Property Bar.

Click Related Topics for more information about tags.

 Related Topics


Frame typography


To use the same typography settings as the chapter

1.	Click the border of the frame you want to change.

2.	Click Format, Frame and then click the Typography tab.

3.	Choose Default for all the setting options.

 Related Topics


To change the typographic attributes of a frame

1.	Click the border of the frame you want to change.

2.	Click Format, Frame and then click the Typography tab.

3.	Specify the settings you want.

These settings override the ones specified for the chapter using the Format, Chapter command.

 Related Topics


Why can't I move or resize a drawn frame?

You cannot move or resize drawn frames that are locked; nor can you move or resize a drawn frame spread across facing pages, unless you do so in Facing Pages view or use the Property Bar or Format, Frame command. You cannot move an anchored frame without removing the anchor, although you can resize it while it's still anchored.

Display facing pages in a double-side document

Lock or unlock a frame's size and position

Delete a frame anchor


Arranging and aligning objects


Aligning frames and graphic objects

Corel VENTURA gives you several ways to align frames and graphic objects with precision. You can force them to align with the column guides , the baseline grid, the grid or guidelines or you can use the Frame/Graphic Alignment toolbar.

What do you want to do?

Align to the edge a column

Align to the baseline of text

Align to the grid

Align to a guideline

Align frames and graphic objects using the Alignment toolbar


To group frames or graphic objects

1.	Hold down the SHIFT key and select the frames or graphic objects that you want to group.

2.	Click Edit, Group.

 Related Topics


To ungroup frames or graphic objects

1.	Click any object in the group.

2.	Click Edit, Ungroup.

Note

•	If you have grouped two or more groups, click Edit, Ungroup to ungroup one level at time.

 Related Topics


To move a frame or graphic in front of or behind another

1.	Select the drawn frame or graphic object you want to move.

2.	Click Edit, Order and choose a command to move the frame or graphic to the desired location.

Note

•	The vertical order of drawn frames affects the flow of text around them. For more information, click Related Topics and choose " Layering order for drawn frames and graphic objects."

 Related Topics


Layering order for drawn frames and graphic objects

When you draw objects [image] either frames or graphics [image] VENTURA places the object you drew last on top of all other objects on the page. The vertical order, or "layering" order, is most evident on pages with overlapping objects that contain text or have contrasting fills or outlines.

The Order commands in the Edit menu enable you to change the layering order on any given page. For example, if you select the bottom object on a page and choose the Order, To Front command, VENTURA places the object on top of all other objects on the page. The topmost object becomes the second object, the second becomes the third, and so on. The Forward One and Back One commands let you place objects precisely where you want them in the layering order. For example, if you have ten overlapping objects, you can use the Back One command to place the top object behind the third object.

Grouping objects puts them in the same position in the layering order. If you select more than one object and choose any of the Order commands (except the Reverse Order command), the objects move together and keep the same order relative to one another.

 Note

•	The layering order of drawn frames affects the flow of text around them. For example, if you put text in a frame, then draw another frame with frame wrap turned on, the text in the bottom frame will wrap around the top frame. However, if you move the frame containing the text on top, the text no longer wraps around the frame.

•	Objects on master pages always occupy the lowest position in the layering order [image] even if they were added after objects on regular pages.


To align frames and graphics using the Alignment toolbar
To align frames and graphic objects using the Alignment toolbar

1.	Hold down SHIFT and select the frames or graphics you want to align.

2.	Click View, Toolbars.

3.	Enable the Frame/Graphic Alignment check box, then click OK.

4.	Choose the alignment options you want from the toolbar.

 Tips

•	You can also use the Frame/Graphic Alignment toolbar to align single frames or graphics to the center of the page or to the nearest grid line.

•	For Help on using the toolbar, click [image] at the top of VENTURA window, then click a toolbar button.

 Related Topics


To align a frame or graphic object to the edge of a column

1.	Click View, Snap.

2.	Click Columns.

3.	Drag the frame against the edge of the column.

 Related Topics


To align frames or graphic objects to the baseline of text

1.	Click View, Snap.

2.	Click Inter-Line.

3.	Drag the frame up or down until in snaps to the baseline.

 Notes

•	The baseline grid coincides with the inter-line spacing defined for the Body Text tag or the tag defined in the Chapter Properties dialog box (Format menu).

•	When a frame is snapped to interline, the outside margins are not included, so the text will only line up if the outside margins are multiples of 14 pt (the default is 8 pt).

 Related Topics


To align a frame or graphic object to the grid

1.	Click View, Snap.

2.	Click Grid.

3.	Drag the frame or graphic to force it to the nearest grid line. (See Related Topics for instructions changing the spacing of the grid lines.)

 Related Topics


To align a frame or graphic object to a guideline

1.	Add a guideline to the page. (See Related Topics for instructions.)

2.	Click View, Snap.

3.	Click Guidelines.

4.	Drag the frame or graphic object against the guideline.

 Related Topics


Working with illustrations

In Corel VENTURA, the term "illustrations" refers to both pictures and graphic objects. Pictures are drawings, bitmaps, photographs, and other images imported from other programs. Graphic objects are shapes drawn with Corel VENTURA's drawing tools.

Pictures can be imported into the base page frame or into a drawn frame. If no frame is selected when you import the picture, Corel VENTURA creates a frame automatically. You can also draw or select an existing frame, and select the picture's filename from the File List to place it in the frame.

You can add as many drawn frames as you need, position and resize them as required, and include both text and pictures in frames at the same time. You can also add captions to drawn frames and anchor them to text in the base page frame, so that they move with the text as text flows during editing. In addition, you can resize pictures by dragging frame handles or you can use the Frame Properties dialog box. You can also crop frames or make them repeat on other pages by placing them on master pages.

 Related Topics


Manipulating imported pictures

For your pictures to add the most impact to your document, it is important to show them off to their best advantage. For example, a picture with a lot of small detail will look more impressive if cropped or sized to show a small section of the picture in larger scale.

Sizing pictures

The size of a picture in your document (as opposed to its actual size when created) is determined by the size and settings of the Corel VENTURA frame that contains it. Corel VENTURA automatically maintains a picture's original aspect ratio, which is the ratio of the picture's width to its height. If you make the frame larger or smaller, the picture grows or shrinks by the same amount. To resize a picture within its frame or to alter its aspect ratio, you can override the sizing defaults, and specify precise dimensions for the picture which won't change when you resize the frame.

Cropping pictures

In traditional graphic design, cropping refers to trimming a picture (usually a photograph) either to make it fit a given space or to remove unwanted portions. To crop a picture in Corel VENTURA, you can size it within a frame, and then move it around until only the portion of the picture you want remains.

With Corel VENTURA, you can crop a picture during or after you import it. Cropping during importing is better as it reduces the file size. Only bitmapped files that you embed in the document can be cropped during import; referenced files must be cropped outside of Corel VENTURA. You can simulate cropping by moving the image with its frame.

Clipping paths and masks

With some graphic file formats, you can add a clipping path or mask to an image. With these options you can mark unwanted parts of a bitmap, so that only the portion of the bitmap enclosed within the path is visible. Corel VENTURA supports this feature and uses the clipping path or mask to automatically crop the image. You can use Corel PHOTO-PAINT (included with Corel VENTURA) to create images with masks, and then import the image into a Corel VENTURA document. Other formats that support clipping paths and masks are .TIFF (version 6.0 only) and .EPS. With files in .EPS format, you can use these features to create irregular shapes when the bitmap is cropped.

 Related Topics


Importing pictures for use as patterns

When importing images for use as patterns, bear in mind that the amount of editing you can do once the image is in Corel VENTURA is limited. For best results, edit the image prior to importing it. The following list highlights some important restrictions.

•	Images imported for use as patterns are transformed into the two colors you specify. If the image contains more than two colors, Corel VENTURA tries to select the most appropriate shade. You should check the image after importing to ensure you get the results you expect.

•	You can assign foreground and background colors to an image, but you cannot edit its shape.

•	Any white space around the image is considered part of the pattern, and affects how large the pattern will appear when it is tiled.

•	Two-color patterns that do not exceed 256 by 256 pixels are imported at the same resolution at which they were created. Those exceeding the limit will be reduced to 256 by 256.

•	To edit a pattern with Corel VENTURA's pattern editor, you will have to reduce the pattern's resolution to 64 by 64 pixels before importing it. The quality of the pattern may suffer when reduced to this lower resolution.

 Related Topics


Picture file formats

There are two file formats used for all picture and graphic files: bitmap and vector. It is important to understand the differences between the two formats, as well as the advantages and limitations of each type.

Bitmap

Bitmap images are typically created in paint programs or by scanners, and are most commonly used to display photographic images. Bitmaps are formed by a grid of small dots called pixels; each pixel is a single color. The arrangement of the pixels creates both the shape and the color of the picture. The number of pixels used in an image determines its resolution. Resolution is expressed in dots per inch (dpi), which measures the exact number of pixels found in one inch, so the higher a bitmap's dpi, the higher its resolution. Images with a high resolution appear sharp and crisp, while those with a lower resolution can be jagged and indistinct.

Once a bitmap is created, the number of pixels it contains is fixed. For this reason, the quality of a bitmap image degrades when it's resized, since the same number of pixels are either stretched over a larger area, or condensed into a smaller one. This is referred to as 'resolution dependency.' It also means that bitmaps can't take advantage of higher resolution printers. A bitmap created at 300 dpi will look the same whether it's printed on a 1200-dpi imagesetter or a 300-dpi desktop printer.

In addition to the number of pixels in a bitmap, the color depth of each pixel can also affect image quality. Color depth is determined by the number of bits per pixel. A black and white image will have only one bit per pixel since it only needs to represent the presence or absence of black. A color image can use from 8 to 32 bits to represent color. If 8 bits are used, the pixel can represent one of 256 colors. If 24 bits are used, the pixel can be one of 16,777,216 colors.

An image's color depth is set when the image is created and cannot be increased. Decreasing a bitmap's color depth (through resampling) shrinks its file size, which is important when distributing electronic documents. You can experiment with different color depths to arrive at the best compromise between color quality and file size.

A special type of bitmap used for black and white pictures is a grayscale image. A grayscale image is often made up of 256 shades of gray using 8 bits for each pixel. By using several bits for each pixel, many more shades of gray are possible than in a 1-bit black and white image.

Vector

Unlike bitmaps, a vector picture represents shapes as a series of mathematically defined curves and line objects. Vector pictures are also called object-based graphics, or line art. They are typically created in drawing programs such as CorelDRAW, and can also be created using Corel VENTURA's drawing tools.

When you import a vector picture into Corel VENTURA, each curve is drawn in turn until the whole graphic is recreated. Very complex images can be created by placing many different vector objects together to form a picture. Programs like CorelDRAW offer tools for creating complex images which can be imported into your Corel VENTURA documents.

Since vector images are stored mathematically, they can be reproduced at any resolution. Regardless of how much you resize a vector picture, it retains its crisp, smooth lines, and it always prints at the maximum resolution of the output device. Vector file formats such as .CDR, .AI, .EPS, .CGM, and .WMF. can all be imported into Corel VENTURA.

Tip

•	If you want to edit a vector picture after it's loaded into Corel VENTURA, right-click it, then choose Convert Picture to Shape. This process breaks the image up into individual objects that can be modified using VENTURA's Outline, Fill and Node Edit tools. Before editing the objects, you must ungroup them using the Ungroup command in the Edit menu.

 Related Topics


Wrapping text around irregular pictures

Corel VENTURA offers two ways of controlling how text flows around the pictures in your documents:

•	Right-click on the picture frame, and choose Auto Wrap to reshape the frame to conform to the contours of the picture.

•	Reshape the frame containing the picture manually using the Node Edit tool.

Notes

•	To make text flow around a drawn frame, the frame containing the text must be below the other frame in the stacking order. Since the base page frame is always at the bottom of the stack, text in it will always flow around a free frame unless the Flow Text Around Frame option is turned off for that frame. If you have overlapping drawn frames and you want text in one of them to flow around a picture in one of the others, the frame containing the picture must be first in the stacking order. To move a frame to the top of the stack, use the Edit, Order command.

•	You cannot apply an autowrap to a tagged frame.

•	When wrapping text around pictures in Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file format the text wrap is performed on the image header. Therefore, there may be discrepancies between screen representations and printed output.

 Related Topics


Recommended settings for halftone screening

Set the Dot Shape option to Default for most work. This option uses the screen type stored in your printer and is optimized for your hardware. The screen angle is normally 45 degrees. Set the Lines Per Inch setting to 60 for laser printers, 90 for 1,200 dot per inch (dpi) typesetters, and 150 for 2,540 dpi typesetters. These settings will work for most situations. However, you may be able to dramatically reduce the size of grayscale images, and also obtain better results if you understand the halftone process which is described in Understanding the Halftoning process (click Related Topics).

 Related Topics


Understanding the halftoning process

The Halftone Screen setting is but one control in the process which starts with scanning a photograph into the computer, and ends with the printing of that photograph from Corel VENTURA.

A number of parameters in this process interact to produce various levels of image quality. What follows is a definition of each parameter along with recommended ranges. Use these formulas and ranges to decide the trade-off that is best for your particular situation.

•	Printer resolution: The number of dots that the printer can place within a square inch of paper or film. Laser printers usually print at 240, 300, 400, or 600 dots per inch (dpi). Most print at 300 dpi.

•	Gray levels: Each dot which a printer or typesetting machine puts on paper or film is black, not a shade of gray. Therefore, gray must be approximated by a group of dots. For instance, you can print a small square which is five dots wide and five dots high. If you print all the dots in this little square, then the square looks totally black. If you print every other dot, then the square looks 50% gray. If you print only every fifth dot, then the square looks 20% gray. Thus, this little square in essence becomes a gray dot which can have 5 x 5 = 25 shades of gray. However, instead of being able to print 300 dpi, you can only print 60 gray dpi.

•	Screen frequency: The screen frequency refers to how many gray dots you place on the page per square inch. The screen is set in lines per inch.

•	Screen type and angle: The screen produces a regular pattern through the image. To make this pattern less noticeable, the screen is normally rotated at an angle with respect to the image. Also, to create special effects, you can use screens made up of patterns other than circular dots.

•	Scanner controls: If you use a scanner to create an image, you can usually vary the number of gray levels stored with each image, as well as the resolution. Scanners which recognize and store gray information usually let you vary the number of gray levels stored with every dot in a picture. The more gray levels per dot, the bigger the resulting file. Typical values are 16 levels (4 bits per dot), 64 levels (6 bits per dot), and 256 levels (8 bits per dot). Most scanners for desktop publishing can create images at 300 dpi, but let you scan at lower resolutions to create smaller files.

 Related Topics


Halftoning guidelines

You can trade resolution for levels of gray. Therefore, before you scan an image, you should decide on the number of gray levels and the screen frequency you want. The relationship between these two is:

If you want to print 25 levels of gray on a 300 dot-per-inch (dpi) printer, you should select a screen frequency of 60 lines per inch.

Typical screen frequencies and gray levels are as follows:

•	Screen frequency: Newspaper picture quality is created with screen frequencies of 65 to 75 lines per inch. Magazine picture quality is created with screen frequencies of 120 to 150 lines per inch (60, 75, 120, 133, and 150 are typical values).

•	Gray levels: The eye cannot discern 256 different gray levels. Therefore, storing more than 256 levels of gray is a waste of disk space. At the other end of the spectrum, 32 gray levels is coarse, but adequate for many uses.

You can significantly decrease the size of scanned image files without degrading image quality by limiting scanner resolution to roughly the screen frequency, and by limiting the number of gray levels stored to just slightly more than the screen frequency and printer resolution allow. Restating the formula given earlier:

For instance, if you intend to print with a 60 line-per-inch screen to a 300 dpi printer, you should scan the image at only 20 per cent more than 60 dpi, which is roughly 75 dpi. Also, you should scan for just a little more than 25 levels of gray, which translates to 32 or 64 gray levels on most scanners. You will need to experiment with your particular setup to find values that produce satisfactory results with the smallest possible numbers.

The scanner resolution you use also depends on the enlargement done in Corel VENTURA. The general formula is:

Scanner Resolution is approximately 1.414 x Screen Frequency x Magnification.

Thus, if you plan to double the size of the image using the Format, Bitmap, Resample command, and you have set the screen frequency to 60 lines per inch, you should scan the image at 1.414 x 60 x 2 which is approximately 150 dpi. The factor of 1.414 is based on experience. You should experiment to see what works for you.

If you want to create special effects, you can try changing the Halftone Screen Angle and Halftone Screen Type options.

 Related Topics


Manipulating graphic objects created with the drawing tools
Manipulating graphics created with the drawing tools

Once you've drawn some graphics, there are several commands and techniques you can use to arrange them.

Group/Ungroup

The Group command in the Edit menu is useful when you want to repeatedly move or edit several objects at the same time. When objects are grouped, any commands or actions affect all objects in the group, and they remain grouped until you ungroup them. For example, if you want to move all the objects in a group around a page several times, when they are grouped, you can do it without having to reselect each object in the group after each move.

And with Corel VENTURA, you can select and edit a single item in a group without breaking up the group by clicking while holding down the ALT key.

Alignment

The Frame/Graphic Alignment toolbar is used to align objects of different sizes more accurately than you can by eye. You can use the Align toolbar to achieve symmetry in your graphics and frames. Accurate alignment will give your designs a more professional look. Use the Toolbars command in the View menu to show or hide the toolbar.

Order

You can use the Order command in the Edit menu to arrange overlapping graphics. When graphics are placed on top of one another, the last graphic drawn (or pasted) is always placed on top. You can use the To Back, To Front, Forward One, and Back One commands to change the order of objects quickly and easily.

Cutting, copying, pasting and deleting objects

You can move or copy any object you've drawn by using the Cut, Copy and Paste commands in the Edit menu. When you cut or copy an object, Corel VENTURA places it on the Clipboard. From there you can paste the object elsewhere in the same document or into a different one. The object remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy another object, or end the current Windows session.

 Related Topics


Working with stock images

The CD-ROM disks containing your Corel VENTURA software also include thousands of vector pictures, photos, clipart images, and symbols you can use to add color to your documents. The location of the images is identified in the Corel Libraries Catalog.

 Related Topics


Acquiring images with a scanner

If you have a scanner, you can scan images directly into your documents by using TWAIN software supplied with Corel VENTURA. Accessed using the Acquire Image command in the File menu, TWAIN works by setting up a connection between your scanner and your program. You can use the TWAIN dialog box to set up all the necessary scanning parameters controlling your scanner's features.

Using TWAIN's Prescan feature, you can preview images before scanning them. You can then enhance the quality of the image by adjusting such scanning parameters as color depth and resolution. You can also use the Preview feature to edit the image before you import it into your program. Corel VENTURA provides a wizard to walk you through the process of scanning images.

 Related Topics


Adding pictures


Importing pictures

In VENTURA, you can import pictures saved in a variety of file formats, including Windows bitmap (*.bmp), and Corel PHOTO-PAINT (*.cpt). Normally, you place an imported picture into a frame that you've selected or drawn. If you prefer to import the picture without adding it to a frame, you can place the picture's name on the Files list of the Inspector, where you can access it later. You can also specify whether you want the picture available for placement in all chapters in the document or selected chapters only.

Other ways of importing include dragging and dropping pictures from other applications and using the Corel MultiMedia Manager to preview pictures prior to importing them into your document.

What do you want to do?

Import a picture into a frame

Import a picture using MultiMedia Manager

Import a picture by dragging and dropping

Import a picture to the Files list

Import a picture into multiple chapters


To import a picture into a frame

1.	Select a frame.

2.	Click File, Import Picture.

3.	Choose the format of the file from the Files of type box.

4.	Choose a drive from the Look in box and double-click the folder where the picture is stored.

5.	Double-click the filename.

The picture is placed in the selected frame. If you haven't selected a frame, VENTURA loads the file into the publication. You can then apply it to frames from the file list for the currently open chapter in the Navigator, as well as in the File list box on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


To import a picture to the Files list

1.	Click File, Import Picture.

2.	Choose the file format from the Files of type box.

3.	Choose a drive from the Look in box and double-click the folder where the picture is stored.

4.	Click the filename.

5.	Click Options.

6.	Enable the Add to file list check box.

This option adds the picture filename to the Files list rather than loading the picture into a selected frame. To return to the default, disable the check box.

7.	Click Import.

Note

•	Files placed on a master page do not appear in the Files List.

 Related Topics


To import text or picture files into multiple chapters
To import a text or picture file into multiple chapters

1.	Make sure the base page is not selected (SHIFT + click the page to deselect it) and that no chapters are selected in the Navigator.

2.	Click Import, Text or Import, Picture.

3.	Choose the format of the file(s) from the Files of type box.

4.	Choose a drive from the Look in box and double-click the folder where the file is stored.

5.	Click the file(s) you want to import.

6.	Click Import.

7.	Select the chapters you want to import the files into.

8.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To import a picture using MultiMedia manager

1.	Click ( [image]) and choose Corel MultiMedia Manager.

2.	Open the album or sub-album containing the picture you want to import.

3.	Locate the picture by scrolling through the thumbnails (small representations of the pictures) on the right viewing area of the Album window.

4.	Click and drag the picture onto the page.

VENTURA automatically creates a frame around the picture.

Note

•	Pictures imported in this way become OLE (object linking and embedding) objects.

 Related Topics


To import a picture by dragging and dropping

1.	In a second application, display the picture you want to import.

2.	Make both VENTURA and the other application visible on your display monitor by sizing their windows.

3.	Click and drag the picture onto the VENTURA page.

A frame is automatically placed around the picture.

Notes

•	You can also import files from Windows Explorer or My Computer by clicking the picture's name in the File window and dragging it into VENTURA.

•	Pictures imported in this way become OLE (object linking and embedding) objects.

 Related Topics


To import a Photo CD picture

1.	Click File, Import Picture.

2.	From the Files of type box, click Kodak Photo-CD Image (PCD).

3.	Choose a drive from the Look in box and double-click the folder where the picture is stored.

4.	Double-click the filename.

5.	On the Image tab of the Photo CD Image dialog box, choose a picture size by clicking an option in the Size box.

6.	Choose a color mode for the picture by clicking an option in the Colors box.

Tip

•	To adjust the color in the image before opening, display the Enhancement tab and choose either the Gamut CD color correction button or Kodak Color Correction button (See Related Topics).

 Related Topics


Creating watermarks

You can have text, imported pictures, graphic objects or borders appear on every page of a document as a watermark. You create watermarks in Master Pages view so that they automatically appear on every page formatted with that master page.

1.	Click View, Master Page.

2.	Do either of the following:

•	To have text flow over the watermark click the base page frame.

•	To have text flow around the watermark, draw a frame on the base page.

3.	Place the text, picture or graphic object you want to use as a watermark in the selected frame.

Note

•	If you want to have both a fill and a watermark on the page, apply the fill to a drawn frame on the master page. Then, use the Edit, Order commands to move the frame containing the watermark on top of the filled frame.

•	You can remove watermarks placed in drawn frames on selected pages by deleting the frame in Page Layout view. If you decide later you want it back, re-apply the master page using the Page, Apply Master Page command.


To place an imported picture or graphic object in front of or behind text

1.	Select the frame containing the picture or graphic.

2.	Click Edit, Order.

3.	Click To Back to move the frame behind the text, or To Front to move it on top of the text.

 Note

•	You cannot place a drawn frame between text and a fill applied to the base page frame. If you want to keep the fill, remove it from the base page and re-apply it to a drawn frame placed on top of the base page. Then, use the Edit, Order, To Back command to position the frame behind the frame containing the picture or graphic. Follow the same procedure for fills on master pages.


To apply Gamut CD color correction to a picture

1.	Open the Photo CD picture.

2.	When the Photo CD Image dialog box displays, click the Enhancement tab and click the Gamut CD button.

3.	Click a preview button at the right side of the dialog box. Best Preview displays an accurate color preview, but requires more processing time. Fast Preview displays a quick preview of the image.

4.	Click the Set active area button and marquee select the area on the preview image that you want to color correct.

5.	If there are neutral colors (black, white, and gray) in your picture, click the Set neutral colors button.

6.	Enable the Adjust white in image check box. Determine how pure the whitest white is in your picture by moving the cursor over the lightest areas to see how close the R, G, B values (to the right of the preview) come to 255 (pure white). Type the highest value in the Absolute white box.

7.	Enable the Adjust black in image check box. Determine how black the purest black is in your picture by moving the cursor over the darkest areas to see how close the R, G, B values come to 0 (pure black). Type the lowest value in the Absolute white box.

8.	Click neutral colors on the preview image that span as much of the lightness range as possible. The color casts will be removed from the image.

9.	Click Preview to evaluate your settings.

Tips

•	Disable the Adjust white in image option or Adjust black in image option if your image does not contain these elements. Otherwise, the resulting image may either be too dark or too light.

•	To darken an image containing no black, enable Adjust black in image and type a value greater than 0 in the box. Likewise, to lighten an image containing no white, enable Adjust white in image and type a value less than 255 in the box.

Notes

•	Gamut CD uses gamut mapping to enhance the color fidelity and tonal ranges of the CD image. Gamut mapping ensures that colors in a computer image are reproducible by a printer.

•	If the Suppress filter dialog option is enabled in the Import Picture dialog box, the Photo CD Image dialog box will not open. The image opens using the previous settings.

 Related Topics


To apply Kodak color correction to a picture

1.	Open the Photo CD picture.

2.	When the Photo CD Image dialog box displays, click the Enhancement tab and click the Kodak Color Correction button.

3.	Adjust the tint by typing values in the Red, Green, and Blue boxes.

4.	Adjust the brightness level (to brighten or darken) by typing a value in the Brightness box.

5.	Adjust the degree of saturation (to alter the distinction between light and dark) by typing a value in the Saturation box.

6.	In the Color Metric box, adjust the contrast by choosing a positive value to increase the contrast or a negative value to lessen the contrast.

7.	Enable Show Colors Out of Screen Gamut and click Preview. If the color adjustments have been too extreme, out-of-gamut colors (those that are not printable) will be rendered as pure red or pure blue.

Tip

•	Click Preview at any time to see the results of the settings on the image.

Notes

•	The Scene Balance Adjustment is made by the photofinisher at the time the original image is scanned and placed on the Photo CD disk.  Enable the Remove scene balance adjustment to discard the settings.

•	If the Suppress filter dialog option is enabled in the Import Picture dialog box, the Photo CD Image dialog box will not open. The image opens using the previous settings.

 Related Topics


To capture a screen image using Corel CAPTURE

1.	Click ( [image]) and choose Corel CAPTURE.

2.	Choose preferences from the six tab pages in the Corel CAPTURE dialog box.

To capture a flyout or menu list, enter a delay period on the Activation page.

3.	Click Capture.

4.	Return to VENTURA and display what you wish to capture, e.g., a menu list.

5.	Press the hot key.

The captured image is placed on the clipboard or sent to a location you've specified in the Corel CAPTURE dialog box.

 Related Topics


To save a page as an EPS picture

1.	Display the page you want to save as a picture.

2.	Click File, Save Page as EPS.

3.	Choose a drive from the Look in box and double-click the folder where you want to save the picture.

4.	Type a name for the file in the File name box.

5.	Click Save.

6.	In the Save Page As EPS dialog box, choose the options you want.

Note

•	The resulting file can be imported into a document as a picture using the Import Picture command (File menu). Choose Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) from the List files of type box. The PostScript picture is represented in the frame by a large X that is the same size as the actual picture.

•	To import the picture into CorelDRAW 6, use the PostScript Interpreted (PS) filter not the Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) filter.

 Related Topics


To reduce the resolution of a picture prior to importing

1.	Click File, Import Picture.

2.	In the list box beside the Options button, click Resample.

3.	In the Files of type box, choose the format of the file you want to import.

4.	In the Look in box, click the drive where the picture is stored.

5.	Double-click the folder where the picture is stored.

6.	Double-click the filename.

7.	In the Resample Image dialog box, type values in the Horizontal and Vertical resolution boxes.

Tips

•	Check the New Image Size value at the bottom of the dialog box to see how the changes have affected the file size.

•	You can change an image's resolution after it has been imported in the Resample dialog box which can be accessed by clicking Format, Bitmap, Resample.

 Related Topics


To reduce the size of the picture prior to importing

1.	Click File, Import Picture.

2.	In the list box beside the Options button, click Resample.

3.	In the Files of type box, choose the format of the file that you want to import.

4.	In the Look in box, click the drive where the picture is stored.

5.	Double-click the folder where the picture is stored.

6.	Double-click the filename.

7.	In the Resample Image dialog box, type values in the Width and Height boxes.

Tips

•	Disable the Maintain Aspect check box if you don't require the picture to be reduced proportionately.

•	You can change an image's size after it has been imported in the Resample dialog box which can be accessed by clicking Format, Bitmap, Resample.

 Related Topics


To crop a picture prior to importing

1.	Click File, Import Picture.

2.	In the list box beside the Options button, click Crop.

3.	In the Files of type box, choose the format of the file that you want to import.

4.	In the Look in box, click the drive where the picture is stored.

5.	Double-click the folder where the picture is stored.

6.	Double-click the filename to open the Crop Image dialog box.

7.	In the Preview window, click and drag the nodes on the bounding box to isolate the area you want imported.

Tips

•	To specify the exact dimensions to crop, type values in the Top, Left, Width, and Height boxes.

•	Click Select All to return the bounding box to its original size.

•	You can crop a picture after it has been imported by increasing its size (relative to the frame) on the Picture page of the Frame dialog box.

 Related Topics


Manipulating pictures (sizing, cropping, panning)


Resizing pictures

There are two ways of adjusting the size of a picture in VENTURA. You can size a picture by making its frame larger or smaller, or you can size a picture independently of its frame by specifying exact dimensions for the picture in the Frame or Resample dialog box.

What do you want to do?

Resize a picture by making its frame larger or smaller

Resize a picture independently of its frame

Resize a picture by resampling


To resize a picture by making its frame larger or smaller

•	Select the picture and drag any of its handles.

Tip

•	Hold down CTRL and drag the handles to resize the frame from the center.

 Related Topics


To resize a picture independently of its frame

1.	Select the frame that contains the picture you want to resize.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	On the Picture tab, disable the Fit in Frame check box.

4.	Type a new value in the Width box.

VENTURA adjusts the height value proportionately to the width, preventing the picture from becoming distorted.

Notes

•	To adjust both the width and height (which may distort the picture), disable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box and type values in the appropriate boxes.

•	Bitmaps may develop jagged edges if resized larger than their original size. You can prevent this by resizing the picture in the Resample dialog box (Format, Bitmap, Resample).

 Related Topics


Resizing a picture using the Frame dialog box

The Frame dialog box (Picture tab) provides a number of controls for sizing pictures. The following chart lists the controls and their effect on a picture's size.

If you...	Picture size...
Enable both Fit in Frame and Maintain Aspect Ratio	changes with the frame's size, while the picture's aspect ratio stays the same.
Enable Fit in Frame but Disable Maintain Aspect Ratio	changes with the frame's size, even if this distorts the image
Disable Fit in Frame, but Enable Maintain Aspect Ratio	is determined by the width you specify. You need not specify the height; VENTURA automatically adjusts it to maintain the picture's original aspect ratio.
Disable both Fit in Frame and Maintain Aspect Ratio	is determined by the width and height you specify.
 Related Topics


To resize a picture by resampling

1.	Click, Format, Bitmap, Resample.

2.	Choose a unit of measurement from the Units box.

3.	Type new values in the Width and Height boxes.

4.	Click Apply.

Note

•	You cannot resample externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also " Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

•	Enable the Maintain Aspect check box to resize the picture proportionately. When you specify either a width or height value, VENTURA increases the second value by a proportionate amount.

 Related Topics


To resize the frame to fit the original dimensions of the picture

•	Right-click the frame containing the click, then choose Size Frame to Object.

 Related Topics


To change the resolution of a picture

1.	Click Format, Bitmap, Resample.

2.	Type new values in the Horizontal and Vertical Resolution boxes.

Choose a resolution that is compatible with the resolution of the output device(s) on which you plan to display or print your picture. If you plan to print, set the resolution to the maximum dpi output value of your printer; otherwise, you may not be able to print all of what you see on screen.

Note

•	You cannot resample externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also " Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

•	Higher resolution pictures require large amounts of disk space.

 Related Topics


To crop a picture

1.	Select the frame that contains the picture you want to crop.

2.	Click Format, Frame

3.	On the Picture tab, disable the Fit in Frame check box.

4.	Type a value in the Width box that will make the picture larger than its frame.

With the Maintain Aspect Ration option enabled, VENTURA adjusts the height automatically to maintain the picture's original proportions.

Note

•	You can also crop a picture prior to its being imported by choosing the Crop option in the Import Picture dialog box and selecting an area of the picture to import.

 Related Topics


To move a picture inside its frame using the mouse

1.	Select the frame that contains the picture you want to move.

2.	Press the CTRL key, then click inside the frame.

3.	Release the CTRL key, then drag until the portion of the picture you want to show remains.

Note

•	For other ways of moving a picture, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To move a picture inside its frame by a precise amount

1.	Select the frame that contains the picture you want to move.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	On the Picture tab, type values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes to shift the picture inside its frame.

A positive value moves it up; a negative value moves it down.

 Related Topics


To rotate a picture inside of its frame

1.	Select the frame that contains the picture you want to rotate.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	On the General tab, type a number from 0-360 in the Rotate Contents By box.

A positive value rotates the picture clockwise; a negative value rotates the picture counterclockwise.

Note

•	You cannot rotate externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also " Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures"

 Related Topics


To straighten a picture

1.	Select the frame that contains the picture you want to adjust.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Deskew.

Note

•	You cannot straighten externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also " Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures"

•	An imperfectly positioned picture can result from a scanning operation where the picture was not placed squarely on the scanning surface.

 Related Topics


To flip a picture horizontally

1.	Select the frame that contains the picture you want to flip.

2.	Click, Format, Bitmap, Flip Horizontally.

Tip

•	You cannot flip externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also, "Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

•	To flip vertically, rotate by 180 degrees using the Property bar.

 Related Topics


To add space between a picture and its frame

1.	Select the frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame and display the Margins tab.

3.	In the Inside Margins boxes, add the required amount of space between the picture and the sides of the frame. Since this reduces the size of the picture, you may need to increase the size of the frame to compensate.

Tip

•	You can also select the frame and, if the rulers are displayed, use the mouse to set the inside margins interactively.

 Related Topics


Controlling the display of pictures


To stop a picture from redrawing

1.	Make sure the Interruptible Display option is enabled on the View page of the Options dialog box accessible from the Tools menu.

2.	Press any key on the keyboard to stop a picture from redrawing.

 Related Topics


To hide all the pictures in a document

•	Click View, Hide All Pictures.

A large X displays in each frame.

Notes

•	Hiding pictures speeds up the redrawing of the screen, making it faster to edit and format text.

•	For other ways of hiding pictures, e.g., hiding a selected picture, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To hide a selected picture

1.	Select the frame containing the picture you want to hide.

2.	Click View, Hide This Picture.

A large X displays in the frame.

 Related Topics


To apply color correction to pictures

1.	Choose a system profile that corresponds to the equipment you are working with (see Related Topics).

2.	Click View, Color Correction.

3.	Enable one of the following:

Fast - quickly calculates and displays approximate colors

Accurate - takes longer to calculate, resulting in more accurate color correction

4.	Click View, Color Correction, Simulate Printer.

Notes

•	Color Correction changes the colors on your screen to approximate the colors your printer would output. It does not influence the way the colors print.

•	To disable color correction for your document, click View, Color Correction and enable None.

 Related Topics


To identify colors that cannot be reproduced by your printer

1.	Click View, Color Correction.

2.	Enable Fast or Accurate.

3.	Click View, Color Correction, Simulate Printer.

4.	Click View, Color Correction, Gamut Alarm.

Note

•	Colors that cannot be reproduced by the printer appear as a single solid color. You can choose the solid color on the Page tab of the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Using image conversion and enhancement features


To adjust brightness, contrast, and intensity

1.	Select the frame that contains the picture you want to adjust.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Brightness\Contrast.

3.	Move the sliders to adjust the amount of brightness, contrast, and intensity in the picture.

Adjust brightness to lighten or darken the tones in the picture, contrast to change the distinction between light and dark areas, and intensity to adjust the level of light.

Notes

•	You cannot adjust the brightness, contrast, or intensity of externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also, "Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

•	You cannot adjust the brightness, contrast, or intensity of black & white, 16-color or 256-color pictures in VENTURA. Use Corel PHOTO-PAINT to adjust these types of pictures.

•	Contrast should be increased about one tenth the amount you increase brightness.

•	Slightly increasing the amount of brightness and contrast in almost any picture will give dull, flat colors more clarity.

•	If you are not satisfied with the results, click Edit, Undo.

 Related Topics


To apply a halftone effect to a color picture

1.	Select the frame that contains the picture you want to change.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Color Halftone.

3.	Adjust the Max radius slider to set the maximum radius of the halftone dots.

4.	Adjust the Channel Angle sliders to set the angle of each of the color screens. The angle of the screen determines how much the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.

Note

•	You cannot apply a halftone effect to externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also, "Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

•	Color halftoning converts the colors in a picture into a series of dots. Light shades are represented by sparsely spaced dots, while dark shades are represented by densely spaced dots.

 Related Topics


Converting bitmaps into other color formats

VENTURA allows you to change the color format of the pictures in your document. Conversion is only available for images saved in bitmap formats such as Windows bitmap (*.bmp), and Corel PHOTO-PAINT (*.cpt).

What do you want to do?

Convert a picture into a duotone

Convert a picture to black and white

Convert a picture to 16 colors

Convert a picture to grayscale

Convert a picture to 256 colors

Convert a picture to an RGB color format

Convert a picture to a CMYK color format


To convert a picture into a duotone
To convert a picture into a duotone, tritone or quadtone

1.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert To, Dutone.

2.	In the Type list box, click Duotone, Tritone or Quadtone.

3.	To choose different ink colors than those displayed, double-click a color's icon and choose a different color from the dialog box.

4.	Repeat step 3 to choose additional colors if desired.

5.	Click the Inks tab and adjust the curve for each ink (See Related Topics). By moving the curve, you can adjust how much color is applied to the highlights, mid-tones, and shadows in the picture.

6.	To specify how the overprint colors display on screen, click the Over Prints tab, click Edit and adjust the settings. (See Related Topics)

7.	Enable the Preview check box to see what the image will look like.

Note

•	To convert an image to a duotone, tritone or quadtone, it must first be in grayscale format.

•	You cannot convert externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also, "Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

•	VENTURA uses the same screen angles and frequencies for each spot color in the duotone, tritone or quadtone picture. If you're printing color separations, consult your service bureau for appropriate angles and frequencies. Otherwise, the picture may not print the way you want.

•	An image header prints in place of the duotone, tritone or quadone picture when you print composites.

•	You cannot preview the individual spot color plates in the Print Preview window for color separated duotone, tritone or quadtone pictures.

•	Spot colors in duotones, tritones and quadtones cannot be converted to CMYK colors.

 Related Topics


To adjust the duotone curve of an ink

1.	In the Inks tab of the Duotone dialog box, click a color box.

A null curve (straight line) displays on the ink grid, indicating that the grayscale value of each pixel in the image is directly proportional to the percentage of the selected ink. For instance, a grayscale pixel with a color value of 25 will be printed with 25% of the ink color.

2.	To adjust the percentage of color in the highlights and shadows, click and drag the nodes at either end of the line.

Dragging the bottom node upwards increases the amount of color in the highlights, whereas dragging the top node downwards decreases the amount of color in the shadows.

3.	To adjust the percentage of color at any point along the curve, click on the line to create a node and drag the node to adjust the curve.

The x axis of the grid moves from highlights to shadows. The y axis moves from low to high density of color.

Tips

•	To save the curve settings, click Save and choose a location and filename for the saved settings.

•	To reset the curve to the default settings, click Null Curve.

Note

•	The list box at the right of the dialog box displays the positions of the various nodes along the curve and the amount of color density at those points. To change any of those settings, double-click a number, type in a different one, and press ENTER. The curve automatically changes to reflect the new settings.

 Related Topics


To specify how overprint colors will display on screen

1.	On the Over Prints tab of the Duotone dialog box, click Edit to open the Select Color dialog box.

2.	Click a color swatch. The color you've selected displays on the parts of the image where the two inks overlap.

Note

•	The changes made to the overprint colors only affect how the image displays on screen, but does not reflect the printed output.

 Related Topics


To convert a picture to black and white

1.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert To, Black & White (1-bit).

2.	Choose a conversion method.

•	Line Art - produces a high contrast black and white image. Type a value in the Threshold box. Colors below that value turn to black; colors above that level turn to white.

•	Ordered - performs the conversion to black and white faster, but with less accurate results since the pixel values are approximated using fixed dot patterns. Ordered conversion improves the appearance of pictures by using pixel depths that are greater than that of the display device.

•	Error Diffusion - produces the best results since the color approximations are spread over several pixels, but takes the longest to perform. Like Ordered conversion, Error Diffusion improves the appearance of pictures by using pixel depths that are greater than that of the display device.

•	Halftone - produces an image with continuous tones, similar to a photograph, for printing to a black and white laser printer. Select the screen type, lines per inch, and angle for the halftone from the Options section of the dialog box.

Note

•	You cannot convert externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also, "Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

 Related Topics


To convert a picture to 16 colors

•	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert To, 16-colors (4-bit).

Tip

•	Use the 16-color format to create non-photographic pictures when printing to a low-end color printer, or to maximize your system's memory.

Note

•	You cannot convert externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also, " Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

 Related Topics


To convert a picture to grayscale

•	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert To, Grayscale.

Tip

•	Grayscale images can be converted into duotone, tritone, or quadtone images.

Note

•	You cannot convert externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also, "Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

 Related Topics


To convert a picture to 256 colors

1.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert To, 256 Colors (8-bit).

2.	Click a palette type in the Palette Type section of the dialog box.

•	Uniform - provides a color palette with equal quantities of red, green, and blue.

•	Adaptive - provides a color palette containing the first 256 colors found in the image.

•	Optimized - provides a color palette containing the most frequently used colors from the image.

•	Custom - opens the Color Table dialog box where you can choose the colors you wish the color palette to contain.

Note

•	If your display device is not set up to display 256 colors, click a dithering option in the Dither type section. Dithering expands the range of colors that can be displayed.

•	You cannot convert externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also, " Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

 Related Topics


To convert a picture to an RGB color format

•	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert To, RGB Color (24-bit).

Tip

•	Use the RGB color format to create high-quality photographic color images and when printing to an RGB or CMY printer.

Note

•	You cannot convert externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also, "Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

 Related Topics


To convert a picture to a CMYK color format

•	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert To, CMYK Color (32-bit).

Tip

•	Use the CMYK color format to create professional-quality images and when printing to a prepress or CMYK printer.

Note

•	You cannot convert externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also, "Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

 Related Topics


Converting pictures in vector format into editable objects

You can convert vector pictures into graphic objects and then edit them by resizing, filling, outlining and even reshaping them using the Node Edit tool. After converting the picture, use the Edit, Ungroup command to separate it into individual objects.

1.	Right click the picture.

2.	Choose Convert Picture to Shapes.

Note

•	You cannot convert externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For information, click Related Topics and choose " To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file." See also, "Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures."

•	If you want to turn the objects that make up the converted picture into frames, use the Outline tool to remove the objects' outlines before converting them to frames. Otherwise, the frames created from the objects could take a long time to generate, especially if the picture is complicated.

 Related Topics


Manipulating vector, OLE and externally-referenced pictures
Manipulating vector, OLE and externally referenced pictures

Do you need to rotate or autowrap a picture inserted into a document as an OLE object? How about converting the picture to a duotone or adjusting it's brightness or contrast?

Manipulating pictures in these and other ways is possible only with bitmaps incorporated into a document. However, with VENTURA's HTML publishing capabilities, you can quickly convert unincorporated bitmaps, screen captures, and pictures in vector format into bitmaps that you can incorporate into your document. Simply click File, Publish As, HTML, then click Publish. A bitmap version of all pictures in the document will be created in the same folder as the document. You can then import the bitmaps into the document as replacements for the originals or as additional pictures.

Note

•	VENTURA saves pictures in HTML documents in JPEG format, but you have the option of saving them in GIF format. GIF pictures generally display faster than JPEG pictures, whereas JPEG will compress the picture to a smaller file size.

•	You can also incorporate externally referenced bitmaps by right-clicking in the Navigator and choosing Embed File. This option is not available for bitmaps inserted as OLE objects.


Drawing graphic objects


Overview: Drawing graphic objects
Drawing graphic objects

Corel VENTURA includes all the tools you need to create your own graphic objects. These tools are found in the Toolbox and include the Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon, Star, Freehand, Callout, Artistic text, and Bezier tools. If you want to edit any of these shapes, you can use the Convert To Curves command and edit them with the Node Edit tool.

The drawing tools

The drawing tools are used to create paths. A path is the basic component from which graphic objects are constructed. It can be open (a line) or closed (a circle, square, polygon, star, or irregular shape). To edit the shape of the paths, you use the Node Edit tool.

The Ellipse, Rectangle, Polygon, and Star tools are used to create objects of their respective shapes. With the Freehand tool you can draw straight lines and curves as though you are using a pencil on paper. Use the Bezier tool to draw in a connect-the-dots style, and for more precise drawing of curves and straight lines. The more complex Artistic text and Callout tools are described in detail below.

The Artistic text tool

Use the Artistic text tool to create text that behaves like a graphic object, but remains editable. You can manipulate Artistic text in ways that are not possible with regular text, such as fitting text to a curved path. Fitting text to a path is a great way to create eye-catching designs for mastheads, brochures, and logos.

If you want to edit the shape of individual letters, you can convert Artistic text to curves, and then use the Node Edit tool to make the changes. However, once you convert Artistic text to curves, it can no longer be edited as text. For 3D text effects, try using Corel DEPTH to create the design, and then import it into Corel VENTURA as an Windows Metafile (WMF) file.

You can use the Node Edit tool to adjust the spacing and positioning of Artistic Text letters and still edit them as text.

The Callout tool

Once you have added an illustration to your document, you can add labels to it using the Callout tool. A callout line points to the illustration at one end, and has a text box attached to the other end. The text box holds any amount of text, so that you can type either brief captions or long descriptions. You can use callouts to identify different parts of an illustration, or to highlight one specific area.

The Node Edit tool

Nodes are the points along a path that define its shape. With the Node Edit tool you can reshape open and closed paths, as well as add, delete, join, split, auto-reduce, and convert nodes. You can also use the tool to round the corners of a rectangle, or turn a polygon into a star. Once you've mastered the basics, the Node Edit tool can be used for more complex tasks such as creating custom text wraps, editing Artistic text and clipart, and creating irregular shapes not available through the drawing tools.


To select a drawing tool

1.	Click the [image] in the Toolbox. The Graphic tool flyout menu appears.

2.	Click the tool you want to draw with.

 Related Topics


To draw a rectangle or square

1.	From the [image] flyout or Toolbox, click the [image] tool.

2.	Position the mouse pointer where you want to start drawing.

3.	Drag diagonally. Press CTRL while dragging to constrain the shape to a square.

 Tips

•	Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the rectangle from the from the center.

•	Press CTRL and SHIFT while dragging to draw the square from the center.

 Related Topics


To draw an ellipse or circle

1.	From the [image] flyout or Toolbox, click the [image] tool.

2.	Position the mouse pointer where you want to start drawing.

3.	Drag diagonally. Press CTRL while dragging to constrain the shape to a circle.

 Tip

•	Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the ellipse from the center.

•	Press CTRL and SHIFT while dragging to draw the circle from the center.

 Related Topics


To draw a polygon

1.	From the [image] flyout or Toolbox, click the [image] tool.

2.	Position the mouse pointer where you want to start drawing.

3.	Drag diagonally.

 Tip

•	Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the polygon from the center.

 Related Topics


To draw a triangle

1.	Draw a rectangle (See Related Topics).

2.	Click, Edit Convert to Curves.

3.	Double-click a node at any corner of the rectangle.

4.	Click the [image] in the Toolbox.

5.	Click the - button in the Node Edit toolbar.

 Related Topics


To draw a star

1.	From the [image] flyout or Toolbox, click the [image] tool.

2.	Position the mouse pointer where you want to start drawing.

3.	Drag diagonally.

 Tip

•	Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the star from the center.

•	You can use the [image] to change the shape of the star.

 Related Topics


Drawing lines

Corel VENTURA offers a couple of ways of drawing lines and line segments. The Bezier tool allows you to draw using a connect-the-dots style. The Freehand tool works more like a conventional drawing tool.

To draw lines using the Freehand tool

1.	Click the Freehand tool.

2.	Click and drag to draw.

To draw curves, click and drag while drawing. To draw straight lines, click, move the mouse to where you want the line to end, and click again.

To draw lines using the Bezier tool

1.	Click the Bezier tool.

2.	Click and drag to draw.

To draw straight lines, click where you want the line to begin, move the cursor to where you want the line to end and click again. To draw curves, click where you want the curve to begin, move to where you want the line to end, and click and drag until the curve is right.

 Related Topics


To draw a callout

1.	From the [image] flyout or Toolbox, click the [image] tool.

2.	Position the mouse pointer where you want to start drawing.

3.	Drag diagonally.

4.	Release the mouse button at the spot where you want to place the callout text.

5.	Double-click inside the callout box and type the text.

 Tip

•	Press CTRL to constrain the angle of the callout line vertically.

•	If you want a straight callout line, select the line with the [image] tool, then drag the middle node so that it's inline with those on either end of the line. Or, delete the node by selecting it then clicking the [image] button on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	You can format the callout text as you would any text in VENTURA and change the attributes (thickness, color, style and arrowhead) of the callout line using the Outline tool.

 Related Topics


Sizing, moving, and grouping graphics


To resize a graphic object

1.	Select the graphic object (or objects) you want to resize.

2.	Point to one of the graphic's sizing handles. When the mouse pointer changes to a two-headed arrow, drag the handle until the graphic is the size you want.

Tip

•	You can also resize a graphic object by specifying measurements in the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


To move a graphic object

1.	Select the graphic object (or object) you want to move.

2.	If the graphic has a fill, position the mouse pointer over it and drag; otherwise drag the graphic's border or the border of its bounding box.

Tip

•	You can also move a graphic object by specifying coordinates in the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


To repeat objects on every page
To repeat graphic objects on other pages

1.	Click View, Master Page.

2.	Draw the object or cut and paste it from a document page.

Tip

•	If you don't want a repeating graphic object to appear on a particular page, go to that page and delete the graphic. If you decide later you want it back, re-apply the master page using the Page, Apply Master Page command.

 Related Topics


To move an object in front of or in back of other objects
To move a graphic object or frame in front of or in back of other objects

1.	Select the graphic object or frame and click the right mouse button.

If the graphic or frame is completely obscured by another, hold down the ALT key and click the object on top of the one you want to select. Keep clicking until the graphic or frame's selection handles appear. You may need to move the mouse since the pointer must be over some part of the graphic or frame in order to select it.

2.	Choose To Front, To Back, Forward One, or Back One depending on where you want the graphic or frame placed.

 Related Topics


To group a graphic object and a frame
To group a graphic object with other graphics or a frame

1.	Hold down SHIFT and select the graphic and/or the frame.

2.	Click Edit, Group.

 Related Topics


To duplicate graphic objects or frames

1.	Select the graphic object or frame you want to duplicate.

2.	Click Edit, Duplicate.

Note

•	You can set the amount VENTURA offsets the duplicate from the original using the Tools, Options command (Selection tab).

 Related Topics


To rotate graphic objects

1.	Click the object's border to select it.

2.	Click the border again to reveal the rotating and skewing handles.

3.	Drag the corner handles clockwise or counterclockwise.

Tip

•	Hold down the CTRL key while dragging to constrain the rotation to 15-degree increments. Release the mouse button before releasing the CTRL key to maintain the angle. You can change the angle of constraint by using the Tools, Options command (Selection tab).

•	You can change your axis of rotation by dragging the point in the center of the object.

 Related Topics


Shaping graphics


To shape rectangles and ellipses

You can use the [image] to round the corners of a rectangle drawn with the Graphics or Frame tools or to convert an ellipse into an arc or pie wedge.

To make more profound changes to the shape to these object, convert them to curves using the Edit, Convert to Curves command.

What do you want to do?

Round the corners of a rectangle or square

Convert an ellipse or circle into an arc or pie wedge


To round the corners of a rectangle or square

1.	Select the rectangle or square with the [image].

2.	Drag one of the corner nodes along the outline of the rectangle or square.

As you drag, the four corner nodes each divide into two nodes with a round corner forming in between. As you continue to drag, the corners become increasingly round.

 Related Topics


To convert an ellipse or circle into an arc or pie wedge

1.	Select the ellipse or circle with the [image].

2.	Drag the node at the top or bottom of the ellipse or circle around the outside to create an arc, or around the inside to create a pie wedge.

As you drag, the node divides into two nodes with the arc or pie wedge forming in between.

3.	Continue dragging until the arc or pie wedge is the shape and size you want.

Note

•	Holding down the CTRL key as you drag the arc or pie wedge constrains the movement to 15-degree increments.

 Related Topics


Selecting nodes and segments


Selecting parts of a curve object

To change the shape of a curve object you must first select it with the [image]. Using the same tool, you can then select the part of the curve (node or segment) you want to edit.

What do you want to do?

Select a single node or segment

Select multiple nodes

Deselect one or more nodes


To select a single node or segment on a curve object

•	Click the node or segment with the [image].

Tip

•	Press HOME to select the first node and END to select the end node.

Notes

•	Selected nodes becomes highlighted in one of two ways: hollow if the associated segment is a line; solid if it's a curve.

•	If the node is on a curve, control points extending from the selected node and those on either side of it appear.

•	Once you select a node or segment, you can change its characteristics by applying commands from the Node Edit toolbar. You can also move a selected node and its associated control points.

 Related Topics


To select multiple nodes

•	Hold down SHIFT and click the nodes you want to select.

Tip

•	You can also drag a marquee box around the nodes to select them.

•	To select all nodes on an object, press SHIFT+CTRL and click a node.

 Related Topics


To deselect one or more nodes

•	Hold down SHIFT and click the nodes you want to deselect.

Notes

•	You can also hold down SHIFT and drag a marquee box around the nodes you want to deselect. This method also selects any nodes inside the marquee box that are not selected.

•	To deselect all of the nodes, click any white space away from the outline of the curve.

 Related Topics


Shaping curve objects


Shaping curve objects

Curve objects created with the Graphic tools are constructed from basic elements called paths. Think of a path as the skeleton that gives an object its underlying shape. A path can be open like a line, or closed like a circle. It can be made up a single segment or many that are joined together.

Using the [image] you can change the characteristics of the path and the points (called nodes) along it, and thereby alter the shape of the object. You can also shape the path by manipulating the control points that extend from each node.

You can also change the shape of rectangles, ellipses, frames or Artistic text, but you must convert them to curves first.

What do you want to do?

Convert a graphic object or frame to a curve object

Shape a curve object by moving its segments

Shape a curve object by moving its nodes

Shape a curve object by moving its control points


To convert a graphic object or frame to a curve object

1.	Select the graphic object.

2.	Click Edit, Convert To Curves.

Note

•	The graphic looks the same, but it is now a curve that you can reshape by manipulating its nodes and control points with the Node Edit tool.

 Related Topics


To change the shape of a curve by moving its segments

1.	Select the curve with the [image].

2.	Click and drag the segment.

Note

•	You cannot move line segments in this fashion.

 Related Topics


To shape a curve object by moving its nodes

1.	Select the curve with the [image].

2.	Click and drag a node.

To move several nodes at once, click on each of them while holding down SHIFT key, then drag one of the nodes.

Note

•	As you drag, the segments on either side of the node move. If the node is on a curved segment, the control points also move so that the angles at which the curve enters and leaves the node remain unchanged.

 Related Topics


To shape a curve object by moving its control points

1.	Select the curve with the [image].

2.	Click the node you want to manipulate.

3.	Drag the control points.

Tip

•	Pressing CTRL while dragging forces the node or control point to move horizontally or vertically from its starting point.

Notes

•	Control points only extend from the selected node and those on either side of it if the node is on a curved segment.

•	The control points move differently depending on whether the node they are associated with is smooth, cusped or symmetrical. This, in turn, affects the shape of the curve.

 Related Topics


Adding and deleting nodes


Adding and deleting nodes on a curve object (overview)
Adding and deleting nodes on a curve object

You can add more nodes to a curve object if you can't achieve the shape you want with the existing ones. Having too many nodes can also make it more difficult to get the results you want. In this case, you can delete the extraneous nodes. For information on determining whether you need to add or delete nodes, click Related Topics.

What do you want to do?

Add a single node to a curve object

Add several nodes at once to a curve object

Delete a node or segment from a curve object

Delete extraneous nodes automatically

 Related Topics


To add a single node to a curve object

1.	Select the curve with the [image].

2.	Click the spot along the curve where you want the node added.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit toolbar.

4.	Click the [image] button.

Notes

•	If you clicked a node, the new node appears midway along the adjacent segment.

•	Adding more nodes to a curve is useful when you are shaping a curve object, especially if the existing segments, nodes and control points are not giving you the results you want.

 Related Topics


To add several nodes at once to a curve object

1.	Select the curve with the [image].

2.	Select the nodes between which you want further nodes added.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit toolbar.

4.	Click the [image] button.

 Related Topics


To delete a node or segment from a curve object

1.	Select the curve with the [image].

2.	Click the node you want to delete.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit toolbar.

4.	Click the [image] button.

Tips

•	Deleting closely bunched nodes and segments helps to simplify complex curve objects. You can also delete them to smooth unwanted bumps along a curve.

•	You can delete several nodes at once by selecting multiple nodes.

Note

•	Pressing the Delete key after selecting a node, deletes the entire object.

 Related Topics


To delete extraneous nodes automatically

1.	Select the curve with the [image].

2.	Select all the nodes in the portion of the object that you want to simplify.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit toolbar.

4.	Click the [image] button.

Note

•	The Auto-reduce setting on the Node Edit tools property sheet controls the extent to which the curve's shape changes when nodes are removed.

•	Pressing the Delete key after selecting a node, deletes the entire object.

 Related Topics


Determining whether you need to add or delete nodes

A curve requires more nodes if you cannot shape it the way you want by moving the existing nodes. You need to delete nodes to remove unwanted dips or bumps associated with them.

There are three rules of thumb for determining whether you need to add or delete nodes on a curve.

For curves moving in one direction, you need a node every 120 degrees.
For curves changing direction smoothly, you need a node for at least every two points at which the curve changes direction.
For curves changing direction at a cusp (pointed corner) you need a node at every cusp.
 Related Topics


To split a curve object

1.	Select the curve with the [image].

2.	Click the spot where you want to break the path.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit toolbar.

4.	Click the [image] button.

Note

•	When you break a path, any subpaths and nodes that are created remain a part of the original curved object.

•	Two superimposed nodes appear at each break.

•	To break the path at several nodes at once, select all of the nodes.

 Related Topics


To join two nodes to close a path

1.	Select the curve with the [image].

2.	Select the nodes you want to join.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit toolbar.

4.	Click the [image] button.

Note

•	You cannot join nodes of two separate objects. You must first combine the objects with the Combine command in the Arrange menu.

•	If you join nodes that are not in the same place, the new node is placed in the middle.

 Related Topics


To change a curve to a line or vice versa

1.	Select the curve with the [image].

2.	Click the segment you want to change.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit toolbar.

4.	Click the [image] button or the [image] button.

Note

•	If you chose To Line, the curve segment redraws as a straight line.

•	If you chose To Curve, the line segment appears unchanged. However, if you select a node at either end of the segment, control points appear, indicating that it is now a curve.

•	You can also change a segment to a curve or line by selecting a node on the end of the segment.

•	To change several segments at once, select them or their associated nodes.

 Related Topics


To make a node smooth, cusped or symmetrical

1.	Select the curve with the [image].

2.	Click the node you want to change.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit toolbar.

4.	Click [image], [image], or [image].

Note

Unless the curve passed through the node on a fairly sharp angle, changing the node's type will not noticeably affect its shape. It will, however, affect the way in which you can reshape the curve by adjusting the node's control points.

Tip

•	You can change several nodes at once, select them by dragging a marquee box around them or by holding down SHIFT and clicking them.

 Related Topics


Importing and exporting

Corel VENTURA includes a wide variety of file format filters that you can use to exchange pictures and text with other programs.

Importing

The Import Text command gives you access to text files created in word-processing programs, text editors, and spreadsheets. A single document can contain any number of text files from any of the supported formats.

The Import Picture command gives you access to pictures created in illustration programs, to clipart, and scanned images.

Files incorporated internally in Corel VENTURA can be edited directly. You can edit text and resize pictures using the mouse or the Corel VENTURA Property Bar.

Externally referenced files

Besides using the Import command to incorporate text and pictures into your Corel VENTURA documents, you can set options on import that create external references to large pictures. Using external references to large picture files helps to minimize the file size of your publications. Click Options on the Import dialog box to view the following Import options.

•	Link To High Resolution File For Output Using OPI: Choose this option when importing TIFF, CDS, CPT, PP, CALS, or CT files if you want the pictures handled as Open Prepress Interface (OPI) images. When your service bureau receives your print file, the OPI server substitutes high-resolution images for low-resolution images.

Linking is a good choice when referencing shared picture files, or when you want to keep the file size smaller.

•	Embedded: When you embed a picture on import using this option, Corel VENTURA retrieves the picture file and displays the file whenever you open the document page on which it appears. To conserve disk space, VENTURA compresses embedded pictures by approximately 50 percent.

Embedding is a good choice when the imported information is static, or when you want to move the file around, because you don't have to include any external files in your copying operations.

Note: Pictures imported as external references do not behave as OLE objects but can be edited by closing the publication containing them, opening the file in the original program, and making the changes there. The Format, Bitmap commands are not available for externally referenced pictures.

Exporting

Corel VENTURA can export the text in your publication as ANSI, ASCII, and Rich Text Format (RTF) files. These formats can then be imported into word processing and other programs. If you want to export the text without the Corel VENTURA codes, click Exporting Without Corel VENTURA Mark-up.

EPS files

To export other page elements besides text, you can export the contents of any page as a graphic to an Encapsulated PostScript (.EPS) file using the Save Page As EPS command. Saving a page as an EPS file ensures that your fonts and fills remain constant and is a useful technique when preparing files for a service bureau. See Related Topics below for information about Service Bureaus.

You can also use the EPS file as a scaleable "screen shot" of your page, by exporting the page as an EPS file, and then importing it as an image. The EPS file is not editable, nor can text in the EPS file be edited.

EPS file formats may not import properly using the All Files (*.*) import option. To import them, choose the EPS placeable import filter.

Publishing to other formats

You can also convert your Corel VENTURA publications to portable formats such as HTML, Adobe Acrobat, Novell Envoy, and Corel Barista for electronic exchange. See Related Topics below for more information about these kinds of special documents.

Note: Because each format handles information in a text or graphics file differently, it's not always possible to translate precisely the contents of one format to another. The amount of variation depends on the object and the format used to import or export it.

 Related Topics


Object linking and embedding

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is a standard method intended to facilitate sharing of formatted, freely editable information among Windows programs. For example, OLE lets you display a presentation from Corel Presentations in Corel VENTURA, and update the information easily.

OLE displays a picture of the shared information, called an object. To edit the object, double-click it, the program used to create the object, the server application, opens from within your file. You can then edit the data using the server program, update it, and see your changes in the original program, called the client. Corel VENTURA is an OLE client program and accepts information from all OLE server programs.

There are two types of OLE objects [image] linked objects and embedded objects.

OLE Linking

An OLE linked object is connected to the original file in the server program. You can make changes to the original file and make changes in the client program when you choose. You can specify when updates occur, or update the information automatically whenever the server file changes. OLE creates a pointer to, but does not actually store the linked file in your Corel VENTURA publication. You can create OLE linked objects using the Copy and Paste commands, the Paste Special command, and drag and drop. See your OLE server program's documentation for details.

OLE linking is a good choice when dealing with shared files, or with files that are updated regularly. Linking is also useful if you want to keep your Corel VENTURA file smaller, because the linked information is stored in a separate file in the server program.

If you link a file you must ensure that the linked file is available to the client file; otherwise the link displays but cannot be edited. For example, if you send a file to another computer, you must include all the linked files. If you want to edit the linked file, you must also ensure that the program in which the linked file was created is available.

OLE Embedding

You can use OLE embedding to include information, such as pictures or spreadsheets, created in other programs in your publication. Embedded objects place a full-sized copy of the original file as an OLE object in the file you're working on. The connection is with the server program, not the original file. The original file does not update when you edit the embedded object, nor does the embedded object change if the original file is changed.

Embedding is a good choice for static information or for information you prefer to edit within Corel VENTURA. Embedded objects are more portable than linked objects. If you are moving files between systems, the only requirement is that the new system have both the server and client programs.

Since embedded files become a part of your Corel VENTURA document, they increase the size of the document. Also, only Windows programs that support object embedding can supply embedded information.

You can embed files with the Insert Object command, the Paste Special command, or by using drag and drop. See your OLE server program's documentation for details.

 Related Topics


In-place editing

In-place editing is an OLE feature that opens a special editing session in Corel VENTURA of the program in which the OLE object was created. When you double-click a linked object, it launches the source program in a separate window without leaving Corel VENTURA. For example, to edit an embedded Corel PHOTO-PAINT image, PHOTO-PAINT's menu structure and tools temporarily replace the Corel VENTURA interface. When you make your changes and update them from the File menu, your Corel VENTURA publication reflects the changes you have made.

As long as the source file supports in-place editing, it works in any Corel program for Windows 95 or Windows NT.

Note

•	Where In-place editing is not supported, double-clicking the OLE object in the client program opens the server program. You can then make changes there and choose Update to cause your changes to appear in the client program.

 Related Topics


Using the Clipboard

The Clipboard is a temporary storage area used to transfer text, graphics, and other information between Windows programs. In Corel VENTURA, the Clipboard is a convenient way to move objects from one document to another.

You transfer information to and from the Clipboard using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands in the Edit menu.

The information you place on the Clipboard remains there until you exit Windows or replace it with other information.

Information placed on the Clipboard by other programs can be linked or embedded into your Corel VENTURA file. To embed information, use the Paste command; to link information using the Clipboard, use Paste Special.

 Note

•	Since they are unique to Corel VENTURA, you cannot paste frames into other programs.

 Related Topics


Limitations of exchanging information with other programs

OLE objects inserted with the Paste Special or Insert Object commands can be scaled, moved, and have other basic transformations applied to them.

•	OLE objects can be copied. Copies of linked objects are linked to the same file as the original object.

•	OLE objects cannot be rotated within the frame, but you can rotate frame that contains them

•	OLE objects cannot be moved from Corel VENTURA 5 files to Corel VENTURA 7 files using the Clipboard. To incorporate an OLE object from a Corel VENTURA 5 file, open the publication in Corel VENTURA 7 and save it in a new file.

•	Irregular text wrap does not work with OLE objects because the content is dynamic and could change at any time.

•	Bitmap inserted as OLE objects cannot be manipulated using the Format, Bitmap commands.

If you need to wrap text around OLE pictures or manipulate them with the Format Bitmap commands, click Related Topics and choose "Manipulating vector, OLE and externally referenced pictures."

 Related Topics


Drag and drop

You can use drag and drop to select and drag information from one application and drop it into another. When used from an OLE server to an OLE client application, drag and drop can be used to create embedded objects. If the program you are dragging from is not a server, drag and drop acts like the Cut and Paste commands, moving the selected data from place to place.

 Related Topics


Text file formats


General notes on importing text (reference)
General notes on importing text

Text files that you import into Corel VENTURA become a permanent part of the publication and do not remain linked to their source documents unless you enable the Export on Save command (see Renaming text files). Enable the Export on Save check box if you want to export the file each time you close the publication and import it each time you open the publication. This means that any changes you make to the file in a word processor will appear the next time you open it in VENTURA. VENTURA includes a script (called IMPORTEX.CSC) that prompts the user for a file to import, imports the file and sets file properties to export on save.

If you want to maintain the link between text and its source document, you can also use the Cut and Paste Special method to import your text. Select and cut the text from the source document and choose the Paste Special command in Corel VENTURA to include the information in the publication. The Paste Link option within the Paste Special dialog box allows you to include a picture of the text in your publication that is updated each time changes are made to the source document.

 Note

•	If you don't know the format of the file you are importing, select All Files from the Files of Type list in the Import Text dialog box. If VENTURA recognizes the file format, it will import the file using the correct filter.

•	When you are using importex.scs, select the WordPerfect filter for all versions of WordPerfect.

Unsupported features

Generally, the text files that you import will look the same in Corel VENTURA as they did in their source application. However, there will be some formatting attributes and page layout features which are not supported such as the following:

•	Hidden text

•	Headers and footers

•	Justification

•	Embedded pictures

•	Columns (see Columns below)

•	Macros

•	Style sheets

•	OLE objects

Page size and margins

When importing text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is fit to the current Corel VENTURA page size. This may affect the placement of text.

Multi-column layouts

Multi-column documents come into VENTURA with columns intact provided they are in one of the following file formats and are opened using the Open command.

•	Corel WordPerfect 6.0

•	Rich Text Format

•	MS Word for Windows 6.0

•	Ami Professional 2.0, 3.0

•	WordStar

In documents in which the number of columns varies,  the column layout for the first page is used throughout.

Password-protected text files

Password-protected text files cannot be imported into Corel VENTURA. To import a text file that is password-protected, you must open it in the word processor in which it originated, save it under a different name as a non-password-protected file, and then import the new file.

Preserving the original fonts in text files

When text is imported into Corel VENTURA, it displays in the default font for the program. If you want to preserve the fonts used in the original document, use the Open command in VENTURA's File menu and choose a word processing file format.

Text enclosed in < > brackets

Text appearing between < > brackets is interpreted as a markup code. To use the < > characters without having them interpreted as a markup code, type two brackets in a row. For instance, to produce:

<text in brackets>

type:

<<text in brackets>>

Double hyphens and quotation marks

Unless you specify otherwise, VENTURA converts two consecutive hyphens into em dashes and inch marks into typographical quotation marks. Use the Tools, Options command to disable the conversion or to specify the type of quotation marks [image] for example, German or French style [image] you want VENTURA to use.

Double spaces

Double spaces in imported text files are converted to a single space followed by a non-breaking space. This prevents line breaks from occurring between spaces, which would disrupt the alignment of left-aligned text.

Sentence-ending puncutation such as periods and colon are traditionally followed by a single space in typeset documents. Therefore, you should use the UnSpace.csc script to eliminate double spaces after importing the text file. For instructions on using scripts, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Text file formats (reference)
Text file formats

Click the button next to each topic for technical information about Corel VENTURA's import file formats.

All Files

Ami Professional 1.1, 1.2, 2.0, 3.0 (SAM)

ANSI text (TXT)

ASCII text (TXT)

ASCII text (8-bit) (TXT)

Corel WordPerfect 4.2 (WP4)

Corel WordPerfect 5.0 (WP5)

Corel WordPerfect 5.1/5.2 (WP5)

Corel WordPerfect 6.0, 7.0 (WP6, WP7)

Corel WordPerfect 6.0, 7.0 (WP6, WP7)

Corel WordPerfect 1.0 for Macintosh (WPM)

Corel WordPerfect 2.x for Macintosh (WPM)

Corel WordPerfect 3.0 for Macintosh (WPM)

PageMaker 6.0 (PM6)

Legacy 1.0, 2.0 (LEG)

Microsoft Rich Text Format (RTF)

Microsoft Word 3x, 4x, 5.0, 5.5 (DOC)

Microsoft Word for Macintosh 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 (DOC)

Microsoft Word for Windows 1.x , 2x, 6.0 (DOC)

FrameMaker 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 (MIF)

VENTURA Generated (GEN)

WordStar 3.3, 3.31, 3.45, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0 (WSD)

WordStar 2000 for Windows (WSD)

WordStar for Windows 2.0 (WSD)

Xywrite III, IV (WSD)

Xywrite III Plus (WSD)

Xywrite for Windows 4.0 (WSD)

 Related Topics


ASCII Text file format (reference)
ASCII Text (TXT)

ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Exchange) supports only the characters available on a standard computer keyboard. Text files created in Corel VENTURA are by default saved in ASCII format until you specify another format in the Export dialog box. This file format corresponds to the 7-bit text import file format found in previous versions of Corel VENTURA.

Saving text in ASCII format-

To import text using this format, the file must be saved in the ASCII file format. When saving in ASCII format, certain attributes such as bold, italics, and underlining are not supported. Tabs and indents are removed.

Corel VENTURA Character Limits

Corel VENTURA has a character limit of 64,000 characters per paragraph. When the 64,000 character limit is reached, a new paragraph is created for the remaining text.

 Related Topics


ASCII 8-bit Text file format (reference)
ASCII 8-bit text (TXT)

An 8-bit text file format which was developed to import non-English characters. The ASCII standard uses 7 bits for data and one for parity, which allows for 128 characters. It uses the parity bit as data, which enables the Corel VENTURA character set to be represented in a pseudo-ASCII format. Corel VENTURA also uses the full ANSI text character set.

Unsupported features

•	ASCII characters below character 32

•	Paragraphs will merge into one another unless they are separated by two carriage returns. Note that some ASCII files, especially those transferred from mainframe computers, may only have a single carriage return between paragraphs.

 Related Topics


ANSI text file format (reference)
ANSI text (TXT)

A text file format developed by the American National Standards Institute. At 256 characters, the ANSI character set offers twice as many characters as ASCII text, including the paragraph symbol.

To insert ANSI characters into your text, hold down ALT and type the relevant code.

 Related Topics


Ami Professional file format (reference)
Ami Professional (SAM)

The text file format for Ami Professional 1.1, 1.2, 2.0, 3.0 files.

Page Size

When importing text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is fit to the current Corel VENTURA page size. This may affect the placement of text.

Text formatting

VENTURA automatically converts standard Ami Professional text attributes into Corel VENTURA text attributes, (e.g., bold, italic, superscript, subscript). All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be entered into Ami Professional using the < > commands outlined in Corel VENTURA text attribute codes.

Opening Ami Professional 1.1, 1.2, 2.0 and 3.0 files

You can open Ami Professional files (version 1.1, 1.2, 2.0 and 3.0) in Corel VENTURA using the Open command. Opening files instead of importing them ensures that the majority of the formatting in the original document is preserved. Click [image] for more information.

Ami Pro protected text files

Corel VENTURA cannot import Ami Professional protected text files. Save the file as an unprotected file before importing it into Corel VENTURA.

 Related Topics


PageMaker file format (reference);PM6 file format (reference);
PageMaker 6.0 (PM6)

The text file format for text files from PageMaker 6.0 documents.

VENTURA retains styles in the PageMaker file and automatically converts standard PageMaker text attributes into Corel VENTURA text attributes, (e.g., bold, italic, superscript, subscript).


Legacy file format (reference)
Legacy (LEG)

The text file format created by WordStar for Legacy 1.0 and 2.0 files.

 Related Topics


Microsoft Rich Text Format file format (reference)
Microsoft Rich Text Format (RTF)

A text file format developed by Microsoft Corporation. It is used mainly to exchange formatted text data among platforms and word processing applications.

Unsupported features

•	Compression

•	Table of Contents and Indexing Data

•	All pictures

•	OLE objects

•	Multiple columns

Page Size

When importing text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is fit to the current VENTURA page size. This may affect the placement of text.

Opening Microsoft Rich Text Format files

You can open Rich Text Format files in Corel VENTURA using the Open command. Opening files instead of importing them ensures that the majority of the formatting in the original document is preserved. Click [image] for more information

 Related Topics


Microsoft Word file format (reference)
Microsoft Word (DOC)

The text file format for the following versions of Microsoft Word:

•	Microsoft Word 3x, 4.x, 5.0, 5.5, 6.0

•	Microsoft Word for Windows 1.x, 2.x and 6.0

Text formatting

Corel VENTURA automatically converts standard Word text attributes to VENTURA text attributes. All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be entered into Microsoft Word using the < > commands outlined in Corel VENTURA text attribute codes. Microsoft Word for Windows style sheets are not supported by Corel VENTURA.

Pictures

Corel VENTURA imports Word for Windows text files containing pictures (graphics). However, the graphics will not be imported into Corel VENTURA, and all graphics codes will be stripped from the text file when the file is saved by Corel VENTURA.

Opening Microsoft Word for Windows 6.0 files

You can open Microsoft Word for Windows 6.0 files (only) in Corel VENTURA using the Open command. Opening files instead of importing them ensures that the majority of the formatting in the original document is preserved. Click [image] for more information

 Related Topics


Opening files in Corel VENTURA (reference)
Opening files in Corel VENTURA

Files saved in certain file formats can be opened in Corel VENTURA as if they were publications. The advantages of opening a file is that the majority of the formatting attributes in the original document [image] such as bolding, bullets, and underlining [image] are preserved. You can open a text file in VENTURA by clicking File, Open and choosing one of the file formats listed below.

File formats that can be opened

•	Ami Professional 1.1, 1.2, 2.0 and 3.0 (SAM)

•	Corel WordPerfect 6.0 and 7.0 (WP6, WP7)

•	Rich Text Format (RTF)

•	Microsoft Word for Windows 6.0 and 7.0 (DOC)

•	WordStar (WSD)

Unsupported features

•	embedded pictures

•	hidden text

•	interline spacing

•	kerning

•	macros

•	multiple page layouts (the first one in the document is used throughout)

•	OLE objects


Microsoft Word for Macintosh file format (reference)
Microsoft Word for Macintosh (DOC)

The text file format for Microsoft Word for Macintosh 3.0, 4.0, and 5.0 files.

Text formatting

Corel VENTURA automatically converts standard Word text attributes into Corel VENTURA text attributes. All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be entered into Microsoft Word using the < > commands outlined in Corel VENTURA text attribute codes.

Pictures

Corel VENTURA imports Word for Macintosh text files containing pictures (graphics). However, the graphics will not be imported into Corel VENTURA, and all graphics codes will be stripped from the text file when the file is saved by Corel VENTURA.

 Related Topics


Corel WordPerfect file format (reference)
Corel WordPerfect (WP*, WPM)

The text file format for Corel WordPerfect for DOS 4.2, 5.0, 5.1, 5.1+, 6.0, and 6.1 files, Corel WordPerfect for Windows 5.1, 5.2, 5.2+, 6.0, 6.1, and 7.0 files and Corel WordPerfect for Macintosh 1.0, 2.x, 3.0, 3.1 and 3.5 files.

Unsupported features

•	Text in WordPerfect's table of contents and index functions

•	WordPerfect style sheets and Windows version 4.x files

•	Equations and formulas created in WordPerfect's equation language are converted to regular text by VENTURA.

•	Graphic features like HLine and VLine

Opening Corel WordPerfect 6.0 files

You can open WordPerfect for Windows 6.0 files in Corel VENTURA using the Open command. Opening files instead of importing them ensures that the majority of the formatting in the original document is preserved. Click [image] for more information

Page size

When importing text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is fit to the current Corel VENTURA page size. This may affect the placement of text.

Text formatting

Corel VENTURA automatically converts standard WordPerfect text attributes to Corel VENTURA text attributes. All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be entered into WordPerfect using the < > commands outlined in Corel VENTURA text attribute codes.

Password protected files

Password protected WordPerfect files cannot be imported into Corel VENTURA. In order to import a WordPerfect file that is password protected, you must first open the text file in WordPerfect, save the text file under a different name as a non-password protected file, and then import the new file.

 Related Topics


WordStar file format (reference)
WordStar (WSD)

The text file format for the following versions of WordStar:

•	WordStar 3.3, 3.31, 3.45, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 and 7.0

•	WordStar for Windows 2.0

•	WordStar 2000

Text formatting

Corel VENTURA automatically converts standard WordStar attributes to Corel VENTURA text attributes. Corel VENTURA also reads all WordStar dot commands as text, so you should eliminate these codes from the text file before loading the file into Corel VENTURA.

All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be entered into WordStar using the < > commands outlined in Corel VENTURA text attribute codes.

Foreign characters entered in WordStar 3.4 which are not available in both the Corel VENTURA and the IBM character sets do not display or print.

WordStar tabs

When you press TAB, WordStar does not always place a tab character into the text, but instead inserts multiple spaces. Corel VENTURA requires the actual tab character in order to correctly format tabular information. If you use WordStar 3.0, turn the Vari-Tab feature within WordStar Off. When using WordStar 4.0 or 5.X, use the non-document mode and type Ctrl + PI for a tab character. The tab character will not display on the screen, but will be inserted in the text and recognized by Corel VENTURA as a tab.

Opening WordStar files

You can open WordStar files in Corel VENTURA using the Open command. Opening files instead of importing them ensures that the majority of the formatting in the original document is preserved. Click [image] for more information

 Related Topics


Xywrite file format (reference)
Xywrite (XY)

The text file format for the following versions of Xywrite:

•	Xywrite III and IV

•	Xywrite III Plus

•	Xywrite for Windows 4.0

Text Formatting

Corel VENTURA automatically converts standard Xywrite text attributes into Corel VENTURA text attributes. All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be entered into Xywrite using the < > commands outlined in Corel VENTURA text attribute codes.

 Related Topics


FrameMaker file format (reference)
FrameMaker 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 (MIF)

The text file format for text files from FrameMaker 3.0, 4.0 and 5.0 documents. The MIF format is a text only file format meaning none of the formatting applied to the text in FrameMaker is retained when the file is imported into VENTURA.


VENTURA Generated file format (reference)
VENTURA Generated (GEN)

The text file format for Corel VENTURA generated files such as tables of contents and indexes.

 Related Topics


Exporting text to different file formats (reference)
Exporting text to different file formats

Using the Export command in the File menu, you can save text in four formats. When you select a frame or page containing text and choose Export from the File menu, the Export dialog box opens. Use this dialog box to choose one of the following export file formats:

•	ANSI Text (TXT)

•	ASCII Text (TXT)

•	ASCII 8-bit Text (TXT)

•	Rich Text Format (RTF)

 Notes

•	VENTURA includes a script (XONSAVE.CSC) that displays a list of all the files in the current publication, prompts the user to select those files they wish to set to Export on Save, makes the changes, and saves the file.

•	When a text file is exported in the RTF file format, certain formatting attributes, such as bolding and underlining, are saved with the file.

•	Unsupported items include embedded graphics and OLE objects.

•	To export text without VENTURA markup codes [image] such as margin, footnotes, and formatting codes [image] enable the Exporting without Ventura Markup check box.

•	When you open the exported file in a text editor, you'll see the code @Z_STYLE70 =  at the beginning of the file. The code serves no purpose except to identify that the file was exported from version 7 of VENTURA.

 Related Topics


Picture file formats


General notes on importing pictures (reference)
General notes on importing pictures

In Corel VENTURA, you can import pictures saved in a variety of file formats, including Windows bitmap (*.bmp), and Corel PHOTO-PAINT (*.cpt). Normally, you place an imported picture into a frame that you've selected or drawn. If you prefer to import the picture without adding it to a frame, you can place the picture's name on the Files list of the Property Bar, where you can access it later. Other ways of importing include dragging and dropping pictures from other applications and using a VENTURA library or MultiMedia Manager to preview pictures prior to importing them into your document.

Editing bitmaps in Corel VENTURA

Bitmaps are images made up of rectangular dots called pixels. They are created in imaging programs such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT, or when a paper document is scanned.

Once imported into Corel VENTURA, you can edit bitmaps using the commands in the Bitmap submenu which is accessed from the Format menu. There are commands for changing a bitmap's color format, adjusting the brightness and contrast, creating a duotone, and flipping the bitmap horizontally.

Editing vector graphics in Corel VENTURA

Vector graphics are created in programs such as CorelDRAW where shapes are represented as a series of Bezier curves. Vector graphics are also referred to as object-based graphics or line art.

To edit a vector graphic in Corel VENTURA, right-click the graphic, and choose Convert Picture to Shapes from the menu. Once converted, you can change the size, color, and orientation of the individual objects within the graphic or use the Node Edit tool to change their shape. You can only edit graphics that are embedded in the file, not linked.

 Related Topics


Picture file formats (reference)
Picture file formats

Click the button next to each topic for technical information about Corel VENTURA's import file formats.

All Files

Adobe Illustrator (AI, EPS)

Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

AutoCAD (DXF)

CALS Compressed Bitmap (CAL)

Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)

CorelCHART (CCH)

CorelDRAW Compressed (CDX)

CorelDRAW (CDR, PAT)

CorelMOVE (CMV, MLB)

CorelTRACE (AI, EPS)

Corel CMX Compressed (CPX)

Corel Metafile (CMF)

Corel PHOTO-PAINT Image (CPT)

Corel Presentation Exchange, (CMX)

Corel WordPerfect Graphic (WPG)

CompuServe Bitmap (GIF)

Desktop Color Separation (DCS)

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

Enhanced Windows Metafile (EMF)

GEM Files (GEM)

GEM Paint File (IMG)

HPGL Plotter File (PLT)

IBM PIF (PF)

JPEG Bitmaps (JPG)

Kodak Photo CD Image (PCD)

Lotus Pic (PIC)

Macintosh PICT (PCT)

MACPaint Bitmap (MAC)

MET Metafile (MET)

Micrografx 2.x, 3.x (DRW)

OS/2 Bitmap (BMP)

PaintBrush (PCX)

Picture Publisher 4.0 (PP4)

PostScript Interpreted (PS)

Scitex CT (SCT)

Targa Bitmaps (TGA)

TIFF Bitmaps (TIF)

Wavelet Compressed Bitmap (WVL)

Windows Bitmaps (BMP)

Windows Metafile (WMF)

Windows 3x/NT Icon Resource (ICO)

Windows 3x/NT Cursor Resource (CUR)

Windows 3x/NT Bitmap Resource (EXE)

 Related Topics


CorelCHART file format (reference)
CorelCHART (CCH)

A file format for importing CorelCHART files. Ensure that Corel Presentation Data has been saved with the file or you will not be able to import it into Corel VENTURA.

 Related Topics


CorelDRAW Compressed file format (reference)
CorelDRAW Compressed (CDX)

A file format which uses an internal proprietary algorithm to reduce file size.

 Related Topics


CorelMOVE file format (reference)
CorelMOVE (CMV, MLB)

An animation file format for importing CorelMOVE files. A CorelMOVE file contains a number of different frames that make up the animation file. After choosing the CorelMOVE file format, Corel VENTURA will prompt you to choose one of the frames to import.

 Related Topics


Corel CMX Compressed file format (reference)
Corel CMX Compressed (CPX)

A Corel metafile format which utilizes an internal proprietary compression algorithm to reduce file size. Metafiles are a type of vector file format that are used to facilitate the exchange of information among applications.

 Related Topics


Corel Metafile file format (reference)
Corel Metafile (CMF)

A metafile format which utilizes an internal proprietary compression algorithm to reduce file size Metafiles are a type of vector file format that are used to facilitate the exchange of information among applications.

You can import Corel Metafiles into CorelDRAW for editing.

 Related Topics


Desktop Color Separation file format (reference)
Desktop Color Separation (DCS)

A file format developed by Quark that is an extension of the standard EPS format (See Encapsulated PostScript). Generally, the DCS format consists of four files containing color information, and a master file which references the CMYK color schemes. DCS files imported from Corel PHOTO-PAINT 6.0, however, can be saved in a single file.

 Related Topics


Enhanced Windows Metafile file format (reference)
Enhanced Windows Metafile (EMF)

A metafile format for importing graphics from Windows programs. Corel VENTURA substitutes fonts missing from a EMF file to similar fonts available on your system.

 Related Topics


Kodak Photo CD Image file format (reference)
Kodak Photo CD Image (PCD)

A file format for importing Kodak Photo CD images. Kodak Photo CD images are derived from 35mm film negatives or slides which have been converted to digital format and stored on a compact disc (CD). When you import PCD files, a dialog box appears prompting you to choose the desired file resolution, color format, and color correction method.

Note

•	Photo CD images may be subject to copyright. Corel VENTURA will not display a warning about this.

 Related Topics


MET Metafile file format (reference)
MET Metafile (MET)

A file format for importing graphics created in IBM's Presentation Manager for OS/2. Used as a method for interchanging data between applications under OS/2.

 Related Topics


PostScript Interpreted file format (reference)
PostScript Interpreted (PS)

A vector file format developed by Adobe Systems that is supported by PC, Macintosh, UNIX platforms, and all graphics applications. The PS format is often used as a page description language and is very common in the professional printing industry. PostScript information that is printed to a file can also be imported into Corel VENTURA.

General notes and limitations

•	Text point size and font information are only maintained when imported if the font was imbedded in the file when it was created.

•	Files that are too large may not import into Corel VENTURA due to memory limitations. This problem can be caused by complex gradient fills that increase the number of objects in the graphic.

•	EPS file formats (EPS placeable, PostScript Interpreted) cannot be imported properly using the All Files file format. To import PostScript Interpreted files successfully choose the PostScript Interpreted import file format.

 Related Topics


Windows 3x/NT Icon Resource file format (reference)
Windows 3x/NT Icon Resource (ICO)

A resource file format used to create icons for Windows 3.1, Windows NT and Windows 95 interfaces. Supports 1-bit and 4-bit color. Corel applications can only import these formats

 Related Topics


Windows 3x/NT Cursor Resource file format (reference)
Windows 3x/NT Cursor Resource (CUR)

A resource file format used to create cursors for Windows 3.1, Windows NT, and Windows 95 interfaces. This  file format supports 1-bit and 4-bit color.

 Related Topics


Windows 3x/NT Bitmap Resource file format (reference)
Windows 3x/NT Bitmap Resource (EXE)

Resource file formats used to create bitmaps (e.g., dialog boxes) for Windows 3.1, Windows NT, and Windows 95 interfaces. This file format supports 1-bit and 4-bit color. Corel applications can only import these formats.

 Related Topics


All Files file format (reference)
All Files

Corel VENTURA analyzes the file you are importing and assigns the appropriate file format. If Corel VENTURA is unable to determine the format, import the file by choosing the appropriate file format from the List Files of Type box.


Corel Presentation Exchange file format (reference)
Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX)

A file format for importing Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) files. The CMX file format was originally developed to save pictures from Corel applications with the data necessary to open and edit them in non-Corel applications.

Another way of facilitating the exchange of information between Corel and non-Corel applications is to save the exchange information with the picture by enabling the Corel Presentation Data check box in the Save dialog box. This method saves additional information with the file that will make it easier to edit the picture in the chosen application and also enables the printing and preview of CDR files from Multimedia Manager. If the file does not contain the Presentation Exchange Data, Multimedia Manager must start the originating application (CorelDRAW or Corel PHOTO-PAINT) to display the file.

 Related Topics


CorelDRAW file format (reference)
CorelDRAW (CDR)

A vector file format for importing CorelDRAW 3, 4, 5 and 6 graphics. The CDR file must be saved in CorelDRAW with the Corel Presentation Exchange Data option enabled for direct import into Corel VENTURA. VENTURA can import CorelDRAW files without Presentation Exchange Data, but only if CorelDRAW is installed on your computer system. CMX does not maintain OLE links and object links (e.g., links between blend objects in CorelDRAW).

 Related Topics


Windows Metafile file format (reference)
Windows Metafile (WMF)

A file format for importing graphics created in programs such as CorelDRAW, Lotus Freelance, and Corel XARA. Corel VENTURA substitutes fonts missing from a WMF file to similar fonts available on your system.

 Related Topics


Bitmap files (reference)
Bitmaps

Corel VENTURA supports a variety of bitmap file formats, including the following:

Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

A file format for importing Adobe PhotoShop files. PSD files support monochrome, grayscale, and color up to 32-bit CMYK. Duotone PSD images are converted into grayscale when loaded into Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Maximum image size is 30,000 pixels by 30,000 pixels. This file format supports RLE compression and is widely used in the commercial art sector.

CALS Compressed Bitmap (CAL)

A file format for importing CALS (Computer Aided Acquisition and Logistics Support) files. CAL files are a monochrome (1-bit) format with unlimited image size. This format supports CCITT Group 4 compression and is used in most U.S. government document-handling applications. It is also used as a data exchange format for technical graphics, Computer Aided Design and Computer Aided Manufacturing, and image processing applications.

CompuServe Bitmap (GIF)

A file format for importing GIF files conforming to the 87A and 89A specifications. Preview of interlaced GIF images is not supported.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT Image (CPT)

See TIFF Bitmaps.

JPEG Bitmaps (JPG)

A file format developed by the Joint Photographers Experts Group (JPEG), allowing the transfer of files between a wide variety of platforms, using superior compression techniques.

MACPaint Bitmap (MAC)

A file format for importing MACPaint files. MAC files are in a monochrome (1-bit) format that uses either RLE compression or no compression.

This bitmap file format was developed by Apple Computer Inc. and is supported by Macintosh platforms. It supports monochrome artwork (only) with a maximum image size of 576 pixels by 720 pixels. The MAC file format is used mainly by Macintosh graphics applications to store black and white graphics and clipart.

OS/2 Bitmap (BMP)

A file format for importing color, grayscale, or black and white images that conforms to the OS/2 BMP specification. The OS/2 format was developed by Microsoft Corporation and IBM and is supported by Intel machines running OS/2, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT. It is also supported by numerous applications including non-OS/2 and non-PC applications. It supports 1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit, and 24-bit color with a maximum image size of 64,000 pixels by 64,000 pixels. OS/2 uses RLE compression.

PaintBrush (PCX)

A file format for importing PCX files conforming to the following specifications: 2.5, 2.8, and 3.0. PCX files can contain 1, 2 or 4 color planes. Files containing 3 color planes cannot be imported. A PCX  saved once in Windows PaintBrush does not contain a palette (definition of colors for the picture). When this picture is loaded into Corel VENTURA, Corel VENTURA will, to the best of its ability, generate a palette for the picture. The colors produced in this palette may not be the same as those produced in Windows PaintBrush. If the picture is saved a second time in Windows PaintBrush before being loaded into Corel VENTURA, the palette will be saved with the picture and Corel VENTURA will not be required to generate the palette.

Picture Publisher 4.0 (PP4)

A file format developed by MicroGrafx for importing monochrome, color, and grayscale images. The PP4 format supports LZW compression and the following color formats: 1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit, 24-bit, and 32-bit color. There is no maximum image size.

Scitex CT Bitmap (SCT)

A file format for importing 32-bit color and grayscale SCITEX images. SCITEX bitmaps are created from high-end scanners which can be processed or modified for output by film recorders or high-end page layout programs. SCITEX is ideal for color-separated images as it is a native 32-bit CMYK format.

Targa Bitmaps (TGA)

A file format for importing 16-bit and 24-bit Targa files.  It also imports the following variations:

•	uncompressed color-mapped images

•	uncompressed RGB images

•	RLE-compressed color-mapped images

•	RLE-compressed RGB images (types 1, 2, 9 and 10 as defined by AT&T Electronic Photography and Imaging Center)

TIFF Bitmaps (TIF)

A file format for importing black and white, color, and grayscale TIFF files conforming to the 5.0 and 6.0 specification. Corel VENTURA does not support TIFF 6.0 extensions such as YCbCr. However, CMYK TIFFs are read by the Four Color TIFF import file format. Also, Corel VENTURA will read the stand-alone version of the JPEG extension.

TIFF supports the following variations:

•	TIFF files compressed using the CCITT, Packbits 32773 or LZW compression algorithms. You may notice additional loading time.

•	TIFF 6.0 using JPEG compression

•	TIFF 6.0 files with CMYK data

•	Corel PHOTO-PAINT CPT files which are an RGB TIFF 6.0 format. Corel VENTURA does not support the objects within CPT files.

Wavelet Compressed Bitmap (WVL)

A file format that supports 24-bit color (16.7 million colors) and Wavelet compression. This format is used to store bitmap information at high compression levels.

Windows Bitmaps (BMP)

A file format for importing color, grayscale, and black and white bitmap images conforming to the Windows BMP specification. This format supports 1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit, and 32-bit color. Corel VENTURA also imports RLE's (compressed bitmaps).

 Related Topics


CorelTRACE file format (reference)
CorelTRACE (AI, EPS)

A file format for importing CorelTRACE vector graphics. CorelTRACE is a program that converts bitmap images into a vector file format.

 Related Topics


Adobe Illustrator file format (reference)
Adobe Illustrator (AI, EPS)

A vector file format created by Adobe Illustrator for Windows or Macintosh. Corel VENTURA provides full support for all Adobe Illustrator formats up to and including 3.0, Illustrator 88, and 1.1.

Unsupported features

•	Some Postscript file formats may not import properly using the All Files (*.*) import option. To import them, choose the AI or EPS import file format.

•	Corel VENTURA cannot create color separations for bitmaps included in EPS files. To separate the bitmap, import it in a bitmap format separate from the EPS portion of the picture.

 Related Topics


GEM file format (reference)
GEM File (GEM)

A vector file format supported by programs such as GEM Draw and GEM Artline.

Object Interior Fills

Objects in GEM that have a solid or percentage fill of a particular color will also have a corresponding fill in Corel VENTURA. However, custom fills (i.e., grids, hatches, ball bearings, etc.) used in the GEM programs are not supported. Objects containing such fills will have a tinted color fill in Corel VENTURA that corresponds to the color of the pattern fill of the original GEM object.

Line End Styles

For files created in GEM Artline and GEM Draw, no end caps or corners will import into Corel VENTURA.

Symbols

The symbols available in GEM Artline are created as text objects. They are imported as curves into Corel VENTURA.

Text in GEM Files

•	If a typeface from an imported file is not available on your system, Corel VENTURA will substitute a similar font.

•	Text in the imported file may not align exactly as in the original file. This is due to the differences in font sizes, and inter-character and inter-word spacing between the two programs.

•	Underlined text from the GEM format is not supported.

 Related Topics


GEM Paint file format (reference)
GEM Paint file (IMG)

A bitmap file format developed by Digital Research for importing GEM files. It is used mainly on the Atari ST platform, but is also frequently found in the PC desktop publishing environment. The GEM file format supports RLE compression and has a maximum picture size of 64,000 pixels by 64, 000 pixels.

In previous versions of Corel VENTURA (versions 1 through 4), the IMG format was used to import pictures. IMG files were normally smaller and therefore displayed more quickly on screen.

 Related Topics


Computer Graphics Metafile file format (reference)
Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)

A vector file format for importing graphics from programs such as Lotus Freelance, and Arts & Letters. It also gives you access to graphics produced on mini and mainframe computers, as well as clipart from vendors such as MGI and New Vision.

Unsupported features

•	bitmaps that are part of the file

•	only accepts markers supported by the CGM standard. Private-use markers are ignored.

•	Corel VENTURA substitutes the fonts in the original document with similar fonts using the PANOSE Font Matching system.

 Related Topics


Macintosh PICT file format (reference)
Macintosh PICT (PCT)

A file format for importing graphics created in Macintosh programs such as MacDraw. Corel VENTURA can import vector and bitmap images contained in these files.

General notes and limitations

•	While not always obvious, PICT fills are often bitmap patterns. Corel VENTURA will try to maintain these fills as bitmap patterns.

•	Pattern outlines are converted to a solid color.

•	Arrowheads and dashed lines are not supported from MacDraw II.

Text

•	If a typeface from an imported file is not available on your system, Corel VENTURA will substitute a similar font.

•	Unsupported Macintosh fonts come into Corel VENTURA as the default font.

•	Text alignment may not be the same as in the original file. This is due to the differences in font size, and inter-character and inter-word spacing between the two formats.

•	The following PICT text styles are supported: Bold, Italic, Outline, Shadow, and any combination of these. Underlined text is not supported.

 Related Topics


AutoCAD file format (reference)
AutoCAD (DXF)

A vector file format for importing graphics created in AutoCAD.

Preparing the file in AutoCAD

To create a DXF file in AutoCAD, use the DXFOUT utility. Whenever possible, use polylines rather than regular lines to reduce the file's complexity.

General notes

•	Dashed lines in the DXF file will be given a similar dashed line pattern in Corel VENTURA.

•	If you have a problem with the scattering of "dimension entities" in your imported file, go back to your original drawing in AutoCAD and explode the dimension entity before creating the DXF file.

•	The line width of a polyline is imported as the minimum line width which that polyline had in AutoCAD. The maximum line width is 4 inches. Variable line width information is not retained when the file is imported.

•	Solid and trace entities are filled, provided the view is not 3-D (i.e., they are filled on x-y axis view only).

•	A point is imported as an ellipse of minimum size. An extruded point is imported as a line segment with two nodes. PDMODE is not considered.

•	Files exported as Entities only may not import into Corel VENTURA correctly due to lack of header information.

•	Arc angles are rounded to the closest tenth of a percent. Angles smaller than a tenth of a degree are rounded up. Text objects that are smaller or larger than Corel VENTURA limits are ignored.

Unsupported features

•	DXF v11 and v12 are not fully supported.

•	Shape entities

•	Polylines including variable-width polylines, elevation (group 38), mesh M and N vertex counts (groups 71 and 72), smooth surface M and N densities (groups 73 and 74) and smooth surface type (group 75)

•	Special 3-D shapes such as cones and spheres

•	3-D extrusion of circles, arcs, and text

•	3-D extrusion of polylines with width and/or dashed patterns

•	Invisible lines in 3-D face entities

•	Automatic wireframes

•	Hidden lines removal

•	Extrusion direction assumed to be parallel to the z-axis

•	Binary DXF format

•	Paper Space Entities within a Model Space

•	AutoCAD layers cannot be mapped to VENTURA layers.

Text limitations

•	Various justifications on text entries may not be preserved. Normal text placement (no justification) works best.

•	Corel VENTURA has limits on values for text point size and skew. If the AutoCAD text object exceeds these limits, the object is brought within these limits when it is imported.

•	If a font specified in the DXF file is not installed on your system, the PANOSE Font Matching utility will substitute a similar font. You can customize the font substitution so that fonts of your choice are used to replace the missing fonts.

•	Control characters are ignored.

•	Overscore and underscore indicators are ignored.

•	If a character is referred to by number, the number must be three digits. i.e. character 65 is %%065.

•	%%010 is considered to be a carriage return and line feed.

•	Any non-standard characters become a "?" in Corel VENTURA, including the degrees symbol, the +/- tolerance symbol, and the circle dimensioning symbol.

 Related Topics


HPGL Plotter file format (reference)
HPGL Plotter File (PLT)

A file format created in programs such as AutoCAD for printing drawings on plotters. Corel VENTURA can interpret a SUBSET of the HPGL and HPGL/2 command set. A stepping factor of 1016 plotter units = 1 inch will be used.

Colors in HPGL Files

The HPGL format does not contain color information. Instead, the various objects in an HPGL file have certain pen numbers associated with them. When imported into Corel VENTURA, each pen number is assigned a specific color. You can specify the color assigned to a particular pen and thus match the original colors of the graphic by editing the pens in the original application before importing the picture into Corel VENTURA.

Fills

Only certain types of objects in the HPGL file will be filled in Corel VENTURA.

Line Types

Corel VENTURA supports numerous HPGL dotted, dashed and solid line types. The pattern number of a certain line in an HPGL file will be translated to a VENTURA line type pattern, as shown in the following table:

HPGL line:	VENTURA line type:

#0	Solid

#1	Dotted

#2	Small dash

#3	Large dash

#4,5	Dot-dash

#6	Double dot-dash

#7 and over	As per # 2

Text in HPGL files

•	Text exported as text rather than graphic objects displays as pictures in the default font defined by the PANOSE Font Matching system as set in PANOSE Font Matching Preferences, available from the Preferences, Text dialog box (Tools menu).

•	Imported text has no outline color, only a fill color. The fill color is based on its associated pen number in the original HPGL file.

 Related Topics


IBM PIF file format (reference)
IBM PIF (PF)

A vector file format for importing graphics created on IBM mainframes.

Unsupported features

•	Set Background Mix or Set Foreground Mix orders are not processed. Instead, Corel VENTURA overlays objects in the order in which they are read. Each will have its own defined color where there is no overlap.

•	Call Segment orders will not be processed.

•	Set Character Set orders will not be processed.

•	Set Paper Color

•	Set Pattern Symbol

PIF Line Types

•	"1", "3", "4" and "6" become a "three-unit dash followed by a five-unit space" type of line in VENTURA.

•	"2" and "5" become a "one-unit dash followed by a five-unit space" type of line.

Note: The translation of line types is not dependent on the contents of CORELDRW.DOT. These conversions are actually a non-alterable part of the PIF import file format.

Text in PIF Files

Text in PIF files is imported and assigned Corel VENTURA's default font.

 Related Topics


Lotus Pic file format (reference)
Lotus Pic (PIC)

A file format for importing graphs created in Lotus 1-2-3. The colors contained in a PIC file are translated to a standard set of eight colors. Text is assigned Corel VENTURA's default font.

 Related Topics


Encapsulated PostScript file format (reference)
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

A file format that facilitates the exchange of information across platforms.

An EPS file is a series of codes and information that describe how a picture will be printed. Image headers, which can be appended to EPS files, allow you preview the picture when it is imported. If there is no image header, an X displays on-screen listing the filename and originating application name.

EPS files are parsed for DSC color comments to determine which Spot and Process colors are used within them. This is necessary to properly separate them to PostScript output devices.

General notes and limitations

•	EPS files can not be edited in Corel VENTURA. They must be edited in their originating applications.

•	Some EPS files from outside sources may reference spot or user-defined colors that are not directly supported by Corel VENTURA. Abbreviated PANTONE color names (e.g., PANTONE Wm Red) can result in an unknown PANTONE color appearing in the Separations tab of the Print Options dialog box. This color will not separate properly and will yield an empty separation. You should either deselect the unknown color in the list before outputting separations, or save the EPS file again using only colors recognized by the Corel applications. Using PANTONE Spot colors in your EPS files will ensure that the colors will separate as anticipated.

•	Spot colors in EPS files won't separate properly if converted to CYMK via the Print Options dialog box.

•	EPS file formats may not import properly using the All Files (*.*) file format. To import them, choose the EPS import file format.

•	Corel VENTURA can not create color separations for the bitmaps contained in EPS files. To separate the bitmap, import it in a bitmap format separate from the EPS portion of the picture.

•	Clipping paths in imported EPS files do not display in VENTURA. As a result, the image header in the file (if it has one) obscures the surrounding text on screen. The text does, however, print correctly. To see the clipping path on screen, re-import the file using he PostScript Interpreted filter.

 Related Topics


Micrographx file format (reference)
Micrografx 2.x, 3.x (DRW)

A file format for importing graphic files created in Micrografx Draw 2.x or 3.x.

Unsupported features

•	Clip regions

•	Most raster operations

Fountain Fills

Gradient (or fountain fills) created in Micrografx .DRW files are broken down into several polygons.

 Related Topics


Corel WordPerfect Graphic file format (reference)
Corel WordPerfect Graphic (WPG)

A file format for importing graphics created in Corel WordPerfect applications.

Unsupported features

•	WPG version 2 is not fully supported

•	Graphics Text Type 2.

•	Page background fills

 Related Topics


Spreadsheet and Database files


General notes on importing spreadsheet and database files (reference)
General notes on importing spreadsheet and database files

Spreadsheet files

Data from both DOS-based and Windows-based spreadsheet applications can be imported into Corel VENTURA. The procedures used for importing the spreadsheet data into Corel VENTURA is dependent on whether the spreadsheet application is DOS-based or Windows-based, and how the data is exported from the spreadsheet application. You can export the data as a space or comma delimited ASCII file and import it into Corel VENTURA as a table using the PRN file type.

Formulas in the file will be preserved when the file is imported into VENTURA, but not text attributes, e.g., font size, underlining, italics.

Database files

Most database applications allow you to export selected database information to an ASCII file using commands such as REPORT and LABEL. To import database information into Corel VENTURA, the files generated by the database application must be either comma delimited (a comma and two spaces are placed after the information from each field) or double space delimited (two spaces are entered after the information from each field) files. Refer to the documentation for your specific database application for information on generating a delimited ACSII file from the database application.

ASCII files generated by database applications can be imported into Corel VENTURA using the PRN to Table import option.

Corel DataBase Publisher files

Unlike most other files, Database Publisher files cannot be directly imported into Corel VENTURA using the Import Text command. You can, however, incorporate database files into existing publications using one of the following methods:

•	Publish the database to Corel VENTURA. This involves opening DataBase Publisher, choosing Corel VENTURA as the publishing method, selecting a publication, using the tags found in the Tags list to pre-format the data (optional), and then processing the database. Corel VENTURA is automatically launched and the database is displayed within the chosen publication.

•	Create a new recipe from within Corel VENTURA. Choosing the New Recipe command in the Tools, Database Publisher menu launches the DataBase Publisher program where you can select which file to add to the current publication. If you select a frame prior to choosing the New Recipe command, the data will flow into the frame; otherwise, the file is added to the File list.

 Related Topics


Windows spreadsheet applications (reference)
Windows spreadsheet applications

Data from Windows-based spreadsheet applications can be imported into Corel VENTURA in two ways. The first method is to print the data to a file and then load the file into Corel VENTURA as a table. The second method is to import the data as tabbed text via the Windows clipboard.

Print data to a file

Most Windows-based spreadsheet applications have the ability to print the spreadsheet data to a file that can be loaded into Corel VENTURA as a table using the PRN file type in the Import dialog box. Refer to the documentation accompanying the spreadsheet application for the procedures required for printing the spreadsheet data to a file.

For those Windows-based spreadsheet applications that do not have the capability to print to a file as a function of the application, the data can be printed to a file using the Generic/Text Only Windows printer driver. This driver is installed in Windows using the Printer option in the Windows control panel. Refer to the Windows documentation for information on installing this driver and configuring it to output to a file.

By installing this driver and setting it to output to a file, the spreadsheet can be output through this driver to a file that can then be loaded into Corel VENTURA as a table. However, the spreadsheet must output this data to the printer driver with either two spaces (space delimited), or a comma and two spaces (comma delimited) between each cell. This can generally be done by adding two spaces after the data in each cell. or by adjusting the column width so that two spaces will follow the data in each cell when the spreadsheet is printed to a file.

Import via Windows clipboard

The Windows clipboard can be used to import data from Windows-based spreadsheet applications into Corel VENTURA as tabbed text. To import the data:

1.	Open the spreadsheet application and load the desired spreadsheet.

2.	Highlight the cells containing the data you want to import into Corel VENTURA.

3.	Select the Copy option from the spreadsheet application's menu.

4.	If not already running, start Corel VENTURA.

5.	Load the chapter in which you want the data imported.

6.	Place the text cursor in text at the location you want the spreadsheet data to be imported.

7.	Select Paste from the Edit menu.

The spreadsheet data is pasted into the chapter as a table.

 Related Topics


DOS spreadsheet applications (reference)
DOS spreadsheet applications

Data from DOS-based spreadsheets can be saved as ASCII files using the spreadsheet's print-to-file option (/PF in Lotus 1-2-3.) In Lotus, the file name chosen automatically has the extension PRN added. Most spreadsheets, including Lotus 1-2-3, place spaces, not tabs, between each column and cannot be configured to automatically insert tab characters between columns. Therefore, when using proportionally spaced fonts on Corel VENTURA, the columns will not align, unless you manually place tabs between each column.

When loading a text file generated by a spreadsheet application, first set the tab stops for Body Text to the desired positions. Then, use the Import command in the File menu to load the spreadsheet print file as a PRN or WordStar file. (Because each row is separated by a single carriage return, and because Corel VENTURA ignores single carriage returns in ASCII text, loading as an ASCII file would cause each line to run directly into the next line. In WordStar files, Corel VENTURA treats single carriage returns as paragraph breaks.) Finally, use Override mode to delete all spaces and then insert tabs between each column in each row.

A simpler solution which doesn't require inserting tabs is to simply change the imported spreadsheet text to Courier or some other font which is not proportionally spaced. This can be done by creating a new tag, changing its font to Courier, and then tagging the spreadsheet paragraph(s) with this new tag. Make sure to set the Normal Word Spacing option in the Typography dialog box (Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command, Format menu) to 1.0 in order to get the columns to align perfectly.

 Related Topics


Spreadsheet file formats (reference)
Spreadsheet file formats

Click the button next to each topic for technical information about Corel VENTURA's spreadsheet file formats.

Corel Quattro Pro (WQ, WB)

Lotus/Excel Print Table (PRN)

Lotus 123 (WK)

Microsoft Excel 1.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 (XLS)

 Related Topics


Microsoft Excel file format (reference)
Microsoft Excel 1.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 (XLS)

A file format for importing spreadsheets created in Excel for Windows 3.0 or 4.0. The cell widths in Excel create a ruler line in the target file with the tab stops matching the cell widths.

Formulas in the file will be preserved when the file is imported into VENTURA, but not text attributes, e.g., font size, underlining, italics.

 Related Topics


Lotus 1-2-3 file format (reference)
Lotus 1-2-3 (WK)

A file format for importing spreadsheets created in Lotus 1-2-3 1A or 2.0 directly into a Corel VENTURA frame.

Formulas in the file will be preserved when the file is imported into VENTURA, but not text attributes, e.g., font size, underlining, italics.

Notes

•	It is important to specify the currency setting with the Options / Spreadsheet Currencies command in Lotus 1-2-3 before converting spreadsheets containing international currency symbols and conventions.

•	The cell widths in Lotus 1-2-3 create a ruler line in the target file with the tab stops matching the cell widths.

 Related Topics


Lotus/Excel Print Table file format (reference)
Lotus/Excel Print Table (PRN)

Data from DOS- and Windows-based spreadsheet applications can be imported into Corel VENTURA. Most Windows-based spreadsheet applications can print spreadsheet data to a file that can be loaded into Corel VENTURA as a table using the PRN to Table format option in the Import Text dialog box. Refer to the documentation accompanying the spreadsheet application for the procedures required for printing the spreadsheet data to a file.

For those Windows-based spreadsheet applications that can't print to a file, the data can be printed to a file using the Generic/Text Only Windows printer driver. This driver is installed in Windows using the Printer option in the Windows control panel. (Refer to the Windows documentation for information on installing this driver and configuring it to output to a file.)

If you install the Generic/Text Only Windows driver, the spreadsheet can be output through it to a file which you can load into Corel VENTURA as a table. However, the spreadsheet must output this data to the printer driver with either two spaces (space-delimited), or a comma and two spaces (comma-delimited) between each cell. Generally, you can do this by adding two spaces after the data in each cell, or by adjusting the column width so that two spaces will follow the data in each cell when the spreadsheet is printed to a file.

 Related Topics


Corel Quattro Pro file format (reference)
Corel Quattro Pro (WQ, WB)

A file format for importing spreadsheets created in Corel Quattro Pro.

Formulas in the file will be preserved when the file is imported into VENTURA, but not text attributes, e.g., font size, underlining, italics etc.

 Related Topics


Not in Rev A

Tagwrite [image] Style Match RTF (RTF)

A text file format for importing various word processing files (e.g., Corel WordPerfect 6, SGML, etc.). Tagwrite retains the majority of the formatting attributes — including font, color spacing and justification — from the original file by converting the native formatting codes into the equivalent Corel VENTURA codes.

When you select Tagwrite as an import file format in the Import Text dialog box, a second dialog box opens with two lists of tags: one which identifies all the tags in the original document, and the other which identifies all the tags in the current style sheet. By mapping the tag names from the original file to corresponding tag names in the current style sheet, you preserve the tag structure of the original document.

TagWrite uses a predefined template and style sheet to convert documents to a VENTURA tagged format. A TagWrite template defines a set of rules for finding and replacing imbedded text codes while converting text. TagWrite templates can be created and modified using the template editor included with Corel VENTURA.

If you are using the TagWrite [image] SGML/Custom Template file format, a list of available TagWrite conversion file formats will appear. Use this option to choose the custom templates you've created using the TagWrite Template Editor. When you use an SGML file format, TagWrite creates a new chapter in the current publication, and flows the imported document into it. Tag mapping is not required when you use an SGML file format.

Detailed instructions on using TagWrite and its Template Editor are provided in PDF format on the CD-ROM. You can view these documents online, or print a copy of them using Adobe Acrobat Reader (also included on the CD-ROM).

 Related Topics


Embedding


To embed a new object in your document starting from Corel VENTURA

1.	Click Insert, Object.

2.	Choose New.

3.	Select the object type you wish to embed.

The list includes items from applications on your system that support Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). You need to install applications using their setup programs if you want them to appear on the list.

4.	Click OK to open the source application.

5.	Create the information or picture you want to embed in your Corel VENTURA file.

6.	Once the information is created, click on the VENTURA page to return to your document.

In applications in which you are not using in-place editing, choose Update, Exit, or Exit and Return from the source application's File menu.

In some applications, a dialog box appears prompting you to update. Choose Yes or OK.

7.	The embedded object appears in the upper left corner of your document. Select the object and move it to any position.

Note

•	You can edit an embedded object by double-clicking the object in Corel VENTURA. This will launch the server application and allow you to edit the information. When you exit and return to Corel VENTURA, the changes will be reflected in your document.

•	Object linking is another way of including objects and files from other applications. Linking, allows you to share the same information with other files.

•	You can insert an embedded object either by opening the source file from Corel VENTURA, or by pasting the object from the server applications.

 Related Topics


To embed an object in your document starting from the source application

1.	Open the source application.

2.	Choose the object or information you wish to embed.

3.	Copy the information to the clipboard.

4.	Open Corel VENTURA.

5.	Click Edit, Paste, or Edit, Paste Special.

Note

•	You can edit an embedded object by double-clicking the object in Corel VENTURA.

•	Object linking is another way of including objects and files from other applications. Linking allows you to share the same information with other files.

•	You can insert an embedded object either by opening the source file from Corel VENTURA, or by pasting the object from the server applications.

 Related Topics


To embed an existing file in your document

1.	Click Insert, Object.

2.	Click Create from File.

3.	Type the name, including the path and extension, of the file you want to embed. If you don't know the name of the file or its location, click the Browse button to display the Browse dialog box.

 Related Topics


To edit an embedded object

1.	Select the embedded object, then Click Edit.

The object type is added to the Edit Menu. For example, if you select a bitmap image, your Edit menu choice will be Bitmap Image Object.

Select that option, then choose Edit.

2.	Make the changes you want.

3.	Click on the VENTURA page outside the embedded object.

Note

•	You can also open the source application by double-clicking on the embedded object.

 Related Topics


Linking


To link a file from Corel VENTURA

1.	Click Insert, Object.

2.	Click Create from File.

3.	Enable Link.

4.	Type the name, including the path and extension, of the file you want to link. If you don't know the name of the file, or its location, click the Browse button to display the Browse dialog box.

Note

•	Save the source file before starting this procedure.

•	The linked object appears in the upper left corner of your document. You may now move or resize the object.

•	Any changes you make to the information in the source file are incorporated in your document through this link.

•	Any changes you make to the information in your document are incorporated in the source file through this link.

 Related Topics


To link an object from the source application

1.	Start the application used to create the information you want to add to your Corel VENTURA file.

2.	Open the file with the object you want to add to your Corel VENTURA file.

3.	Copy the object.

4.	Open Corel VENTURA and click Edit, Paste Special.

5.	Click Paste Link.

6.	From the Data Type box, select the type of information you want to add to your Corel VENTURA file.

Note

•	Corel VENTURA positions the linked object in the upper left corner of your page. Select the object and move it to any position.

•	Any changes you make to the information in the source file are incorporated in your document through this link.

•	Any changes you make to the information in your document are incorporated in the source file through this link.

•	You can insert a linked object by opening the source file from Corel VENTURA, using the Insert, Object command.

 Related Topics


To specify automatic or manual link updating

1.	Select the linked information in the destination file you want to update.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Choose Manual or Automatic.

 Related Topics


To manually update a link

1.	Click Edit, Links.

2.	Select any links in the Links box you want updated.

You can select all the links.

3.	Click Update Now.

Note

•	Corel VENTURA incorporates any changes made in the source file after the last update in the destination file for each selected link.

 Related Topics


To edit a linked object

1.	Select the linked object you want to edit in the destination file.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click Open Source.

4.	Make the changes in the source file.

5.	Click File, Save.

6.	If you want, you can close the file and exit the source application.

Note

•	If you make the changes in the destination file, Corel VENTURA will ignore them when it updates the link, if manual update is selected.

•	You can also double-click a linked object to jump to the source file.

•	If you don't need further updates from the source file, you can break the link. Breaking the link changes the object to a picture; it cannot be edited again.

 Related Topics


To change a link

1.	Select the linked information in your Corel VENTURA file.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click Change Source.

4.	Type a new name for the source file in the Source box.

 Related Topics


To break a link

1.	Select the linked information.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click Break Link.

 Related Topics


Clipboard


To place a copy of an object on the Clipboard

1.	Select the object you want to copy.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	Open the Corel VENTURA file or other application where you want the object copied.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

Note

•	You cannot paste VENTURA frames and their contents into other applications, including Ventura graphics. However, you can copy selected frame text to other applications.

 Related Topics


To cut an object from a document and place it on the Clipboard

1.	Select the object you want to cut.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

3.	Open the Corel VENTURA file or other application where you want the object placed.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

Note

•	You cannot paste VENTURA frames and their contents into other applications, including Ventura graphics. However, you can copy selected frame text to other applications.

 Related Topics


To display the contents of the Clipboard

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows 95 desktop.

2.	Click Programs, Accessories, Clipbook Viewer.

Note

•	If the Clipbook Viewer is not available, you will have to install it using the standard Windows procedure.

•	You can close the Clipboard by pressing ALT + F4.

 Related Topics


The Link option in the Import dialog box creates a link to an external file. This link is of a type specific to VENTURA's file structure and is not the same as the Object Linking and Embedding (OLE).


The Embed option in the Import dialog box allows you to incorporate the file in your VENTURA document. This type of embedding is specific to VENTURA's file structure and is not the same as Object Linking and Embedding (OLE).


Overview: Auto-numbering
Auto-numbering

Corel VENTURA provides auto-numbering for creating and editing numbered lists and automatic section numbering using the Format, Chapter Auto-numbering command. Set up the numbering format once and the program updates auto-numbered paragraphs for you when you move them or add new ones. Military and legal documents in particular favor numbering sections and subsections, even paragraphs, with alpha-numeric identifiers. With Corel VENTURA you can display or suppress the number from the preceding level.

You can also use Corel VENTURA's auto-numbering feature to add text, symbols, or numbers as automatic Prefixes to headings or other tagged text. If you have a heading or paragraph that repeats the same word or symbol throughout a manuscript, add it as auto-numbering so that it's included every time. For example, if you want to add a whole series of tips to your document with a different word or bullet applied to each one, add them to tags as Prefixes. Whenever you apply those tags, the prefix text appears with them. You could also use auto-numbering to set up tags for a Q&A format magazine interview.

Restarting auto-numbering within a chapter

If you want to create two or more lists of automatically numbered paragraphs within the same chapter, you will need to insert a break tag, which tells VENTURA to reset the automatic counter and begin counting at the next paragraph that you defined as a level 1 in the Auto-numbering dialog box. You may want to use your list header as the break tag. You will also need to disable the Preceding box for the tag following your list header. For example, you could create "Numbered List" and "List Heading" tags, set Autonumbering on, and set it up this way : Level 1: List Heading, numbering style None. Level 2: Numbered List, numbering style 1,2,3, suppress preceding levels, no prefix, suffix period.

 Tip

•	If you want to add more text to paragraphs automatically, try using Text Before and After.


Setting up auto-numbering

You can set auto-numbering in individual chapters, or have continuous auto-numbering across chapters. Corel VENTURA won't auto-number paragraphs in unnamed text files [image] that is, text typed directly into a drawn frame. To name the file, right-click its frame, choose Rename file, then type a new name. When you choose Update Auto-Numbering from the Format menu, the paragraph numbers will appear.

To use a preset auto-numbering style

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and select the Auto-numbering tab.

2.	Enable the Auto-numbering checkbox.

3.	Click Quick Format.

4.	Click a formatting type to select it.

To use a custom auto-numbering style

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and select the Auto-numbering tab.

2.	Enable the Auto-numbering checkbox.

3.	Specify the number of levels in the Number of levels text box.

4.	Do the following:

•	enable the Include option to include the number (or letter) of the previous level (optional)

•	enter any text in the Prefix or Suffix boxes (optional) (this is where you would specify a parenthesis or period for your number.

•	choose a Number style

•	choose a Paragraph Tag to determine which paragraphs get numbered

•	choose a Start Number option for each level (optional — default is 1)

 Notes

•	To change the information for a level, click it; either an edit box or a button appears. Type the information in the edit box or click the button to display a list of options then click the one you want.

•	You can insert typographical spaces (em, thin, figure etc.) in a prefix or suffix by typing markup codes in the Prefix or Suffix box. For a list of the codes, click [image].

To set continuous auto-numbering across chapters

1.	Go to the chapter that you want to use as your starting point for the numbering.

2.	Click Format, Chapter, and select the Auto-numbering tab.

3.	Enable the Auto-numbering checkbox.

4.	Specify the number of levels in the Number of levels text box.

5.	Do the following:

•	enable the Include option to include the number (or letter) of the previous level (optional)

•	enter any text in the Prefix or Suffix boxes (optional) (this is where you would specify a parenthesis or period for your number.

•	choose a Number style

•	choose a Paragraph Tag to determine which paragraphs get numbered

•	choose a Start Number option for each level (optional)

6.	Enable the Across Chapters check box.

In each subsequent chapter that you want to have the auto-numbering continue, enable the Across Chapters check box on the auto-numbering tab of the Chapter Properties dialog box.

 Notes

•	Should you want to stop auto-numbering at any point in a multi-chapter pub, you may simply turn it off by deselecting the auto-numbering check box in the Chapter Properties dlg of the chapter in question.

•	You can also skip chapters and pick up the autonumbering where you left off at a later chapter by, for instance, setting your autonumbering options across chapters, as in steps 1-3 above and selecting the "autonumbering" and "across chapters" check boxes in chapters 1 and 2, deselecting the autonumbering check box in chapter 3, and reselecting it with "across chapters" in chapter 4.

 Related Topics


Updating auto-numbering

To update auto-numbering

•	Click Format, Update Auto-numbering.

 Related Topics


Tables of contents, indexes, and other lists

Corel VENTURA generates tables of contents using the paragraph tags you designate, while indexes are generated from index codes you insert in the text. A file containing the extracted text in table of contents or index format is generated and placed in the files list in the Property Bar. Corel VENTURA then compiles these lists in the background continuously by scanning through your document and extracting the specified information while you continue working.

The VENTURA Navigator window displays tables of contents and indices in a tree structure like those used in the Windows Explorer and File Manager. You can use the Navigator to display your changes and move around your document. For example, when you right-click a heading in the Table of Contents view you can click Go To to jump to the page where the heading appears.

Tables of contents

Corel VENTURA generates a table of contents (TOC) by searching your document for paragraphs (usually the headings) formatted with the tags you specify. It then copies the text from the paragraphs to a new text file. To generate a list of tables or figures, you specify the tags used to format the caption label (that is, an auto-numbered title like "Figure 1-1") and any text typed directly into the caption frame. In fact, since there's no restriction on the tags that can be specified, you can compile a list of any paragraphs in your document. You might take advantage of this, for example, to create a glossary of terms.

After the TOC or list file has been created, you then load the file into a new or existing chapter and format it like any other text file.

Indexes

Setting up your index involves adding markup codes to terms on the pages you want listed. You can also choose to have Corel VENTURA insert letter headings into the index for each letter of the alphabet, create up to 14 index levels, change the delimiters, or automatically add prefixes (See, See Also, or the text of your choice) to entries.

As with tables of contents, once you've set up your index, Corel VENTURA generates it in a file and places it in the files list inside your publication. When the index generation process is complete, you can see the levels of your index in the Navigator's Index view, or use the Go To command on its pop-up menus to move to the pages where your index entries appear. Whenever necessary, you can then make changes in your document and Corel VENTURA updates your index automatically.

Other lists

You can generate other lists, such as tables of figures or lists of charts, in Corel VENTURA in the same way you generate tables of contents. Just base the setup for your table in the Table of Contents dialog box on tags applied to the figures or charts only.

Tip

•	You can set up and generate multiple tables of contents, indexes, and other lists for individual Corel VENTURA publications if you want to identify different information for different audiences.

 Related Topics


Overview: Cross-references
Cross-references

Cross-references are useful to readers navigating their way through long documents. In online documents, such as Novell Envoy or Adobe Acrobat, cross-references double as hypertext jumps. They identify the information, and, when double-clicked with the mouse, take you to that location.

Types of cross-reference

Type of reference	Description

Page number	Inserts the page number where the corresponding marker is found.

Chapter number	Inserts the chapter number where the corresponding marker is found.

Figure and table numbers	Inserts the figure or table number that appears in the caption of a frame with the name matching the specified marker.

Section number	Inserts the generated autonumber that has been applied to the paragraph where the marker is found. You generate the section numbers by using autonumbering.

Caption text	Inserts the first paragraph of the caption text from the frame that has a name corresponding to the specified marker.

 Note on page and chapter numbering

•	Page and chapter number cross-references can be placed on the base page or in a frame (but not in Master Page frame).

Unresolved cross-references and markers

An unresolved cross-reference appears with a red "X" in the Navigator (when you have chosen Cross-Reference from the Navigator's list box). Unresolved markers appear as a pencil with no paper in the Navigator. Unresolved cross-references and markers occur when a cross-reference is created without a corresponding marker or a marker is created without a corresponding cross-reference.


Variables

Variables allow you to mark locations in the document that contain text which you know will change such as dates, document version numbers, and names of customers or products. When you update the document, Corel VENTURA inserts the current definition for the variable at all marker locations.

A contract, for example, can be set up with variables at each location where a person's name should appear. The name itself is entered only once in the Variable Definitions dialog box. Then, when you update the document, Corel inserts the name wherever the variable marker appears. To insert a different name, you simply change the variable definition and update the document.

While this type of substitution can be done using the Find and Replace command, you often don't want to replace every occurrence of a particular item. And whereas the Find and Replace command can only replace one item at a time, you can replace any number of variables in a single step.

 Related Topics


Automatic text insertion

Corel VENTURA offers the following methods of automatic text insertion:

Text Before and After: inserts text automatically when you apply a specific paragraph or character tag to text. For example, if you want a block of text, such as copyright information, to always appear before and/or after specific paragraphs or words you could store that block of text as a Text Before or Text After entry. Then, whenever you format text with the specified tag, VENTURA automatically inserts the stored text.

Text Before and After entries are set up in the Publication Properties dialog box (Format menu). Once you've defined the entries, you assign them to paragraph or character tags using the Format, Manage Tag List command.

Type Assist: corrects misspelled words and capitalization errors automatically while you type. For example, you can replace "teh" with "the" and "RObert" with "Robert." You can also use Type Assist to automatically insert frequently used words and phrases. For instance, you can store the phrase "as soon as possible" under the name "asap." Then, whenever you type asap followed by a space, Corel VENTURA replaces it with "as soon as possible." You can even store characters which don't appear on your keyboard such as ® and ©. Type Assist can also automatically convert straight quotes to typesetters' or "curly" quotation marks, capitalize the days of the week, or the first word of a sentence.

Auto-Numbering: provides auto-numbering for creating and editing numbered lists. Using auto-numbering, you only have to set up the list format once [image] Corel VENTURA then updates the paragraph numbers for you when you move them or add new ones.

 Related Topics


Footnotes and endnotes

Footnotes and endnotes are references you place in the text of books and reports to identify information quoted directly or mentioned in the text. Footnotes and endnotes are indicated by a number or symbol, usually formatted as superscript text. Footnotes and endnotes also can be used to add information that is secondary importance to the argument of the current paragraph.

VENTURA places the footnote text in a frame on the same pages as the reference marker. Like header and footer frames, footnote frames automatically adjust to accommodate text. Endnotes on the other hand, are stored in a file which you must place in a frame (or an inserted page) at the end of the document.

In VENTURA, you can have footnotes across the page bottom or in columns reflecting multi-column document layouts. VENTURA also supports multiple paragraphs in footnotes and imports footnote coding in files from many word processing programs. You can also have both footnotes and endnotes in the same document if required, or convert endnotes to footnotes and vice versa.

Click Format, Chapter to choose from the wide range of footnote or endnote setup options (e.g., Number Style, Start Number, Separator Line) for your documents.

 Related Topics


Page, chapter, table and figure numbering

For any number of documents, from letters to books, you'll want an easy way of defining page numbering, hiding numbers on certain pages, and then forgetting about the process, letting your computer take care of the rest.

In Corel VENTURA, aside from automatically numbering chapters and pages, you can set different number styles, insert number codes anywhere on the page, and auto-number illustrations, lists, and tables.

Counters

Number codes for chapters, pages, figures, and tables in Corel VENTURA are called counters. Counters update automatically based on the current position of the counter in the document. For example if a chapter counter code is placed on a page in the second chapter of a document, the counter displays the number 2. If the chapter is moved to another place in the document, the chapter number counter updates accordingly.

You set up the starting number and style for Chapter, Initial page, Initial figure, and Initial table counters in the Chapter Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Table of Contents Setup Information

Column	Function

Level	Shows the hierarchy of levels in the table of contents or list. The value in the No. of Levels box sets the number of levels.

Paragraph Tag	Determines the content of the table of contents or list. In a table of contents, the paragraph tags would be those used to format headings.

Prefix/Suffix	Allows you to insert text or a tab before and after each entry as follows:

<Prefix> (Entry) [C#/P#] <Suffix>.

You can also type paragraph tag names to place two consecutive paragraphs on the same line in the table of contents. For example, to place these paragraphs:

Course 101

How to succeed in business

on the same line like this

Course 101 - How to succeed in business

enter the tag assigned to "How to succeed in business" in the Paragraph Tag column. Then, in the prefix column on the same level, type the name of the tag assigned to "Course 101" as follows:

[*tag name]

To include a dash (or any other character), type it after the closing bracket.

To change the information for a level, click it; either an edit box or a button appears. Type the information in the edit box or click the button to display a list of options then click the option you want.


Segregated indexes

VENTURA allows you to assign index entries to categories and then generate an index that lists entries for one or more of these categories. For example, a cook book, might have an index that lists references to appetizers, main courses, deserts and so on. First you mark the entries assigning them to the categories you specify.

When you generate the index, VENTURA finds the entries, organizes them by category, and creates an index that lists the entries for the categories you specify.


Headers and footers


Overview: Headers and footers
Headers and footers (page 1 of 2)

A header or footer is text placed at the top or bottom of each page in a document. A header prints in the top margin; a footer prints in the bottom margin.

With two-sided documents, you can specify different headers and footers for the left and right page. Thus, pages 1, 3, 5, and 7 can have a different set of headers and footers than pages 2, 4, 6, and 8.

You create headers and footers by typing in the top or bottom margins in Master Page view and using the Header/Footer toolbar. If you need to override headers and footers on selected pages, make the changes in Page Layout view.

Corel VENTURA does most if not all of the work involved in setting up the header and footer for you. It will even add embellishments such as ruling lines and the date and time if that's what you want. And if necessary, you can modify the content of the headers and footers with the Header/Footer toolbar. The formatting of the headers and footers is defined in tags named Z_HEADER and Z_FOOTER. VENTURA creates these tags automatically and you can modify them to change the formatting of the header or footer. As with any other tag, you can override the formatting in the header and footer tags. You can also turn the header and footer off so that they don't appear on selected pages.

Corel VENTURA places headers and footers in frames sized to fit within the top and bottom margins. If the header or footer is too large to fit in the margins, Corel VENTURA expands them as needed to accommodate the header or footer.

Initially, the left and right margin settings for the header and footer frames are the same as those specified for the base page frame. But if you change the margin settings for the base page frame, the new settings won't be reflected in the header or footer frames. Select the header or footer frame and use the Frame command in the Format menu to make the corresponding adjustments to their left and right margins.

 Click here to see the next page.


Headers and footers (page 2 of 2)

Running headers and footers

You can also create running headers or running footers which consist of information that automatically changes depending on the contents of the page. Books and manuals often use running headers and footers to show the name of the current section on each page.

You can use the Corel VENTURA Header/Footer toolbar to create running headers and footers. The text in running headers and footers updates automatically, based on the paragraph tags they refer to.

First Match and Last Match

When you insert First Match [image] and Last Match [image] paragraph tags in headers or footers, Corel VENTURA updates the text displayed to reflect the headings in those paragraph tags in your document.

 First Match Example

 Last Match Example

Current Match: Running headers

The Current Match option [image] provides more control than the First and Last Match options over the information placed in headers or footers. With Current Match you can create "running" headers and footers, which indicate clearly to readers that a topic is continued from a section started on an earlier page. If the first paragraph on a page uses the tag specified in the Primary Tag list box, that paragraph's text is printed as part of the header or footer. Otherwise the text of the last occurrence of the tag you specify as the Secondary tag is printed as part of the header or footer.

 Example

 Note

•	When using the First, Last and Current Match feature, make sure to enable the Size Frame to Fit Text option in the Frame Properties dialog box (Format menu) for the header and footer frames. Otherwise, the header or footer frame may not be large enough to accommodate the paragraphs referenced by the matching feature.


Formatting headers and footers

When you set up your headers and footers, you can use one of the many preset styles that comes with VENTURA, or you can create your own formatting style using the controls on the Property Bar, or in the Paragraph Properties dialog box (click Format, Paragraph).

To use a preset header format

1.	Click the base page frame.

2.	Click Page, Enable Header.

3.	Click Page, Header/Footer Formats.

4.	Click a formatting style to select it.

To use a preset footer format

1.	Click the base page frame.

2.	Click Page, Enable

3.	Click Page, Header/Footer Formats.

4.	Click the Footers tab.

5.	Click a formatting style to select it.

To use a custom header or footer format

1.	Click View, Master Page.

2.	Click the header or footer.

3.	Apply the formatting you want using the controls on the Property Bar or the Format, Paragraph Tag dialog box (click Format, Paragraph).

To override the formatting of a specific header or footer

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the header or footer.

3.	Apply the formatting you wish using the controls on the Property Bar, or in the Paragraph Overrides dialog box.

 Tip

•	You can also change the formatting of selected text in the header of footer. Drag to highlight the text, then apply the formatting using the Property Bar or the Format, Text command.

To adjust the space above or below the header or footer

1.	Select the header of footer frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	Click the Margins tab, then click Advanced.

3.	Do any of the following:

•	To change the space between the header or footer and the body of the document, adjust the Top or Bottom Outside Margins settings.

•	To change the space between the header or footer and edge of the page, adjust the Top or Bottom Inside Margin settings

 Tip

•	Make the adjustments to the master page if you want them to apply to all pages that use that master page.

 Related Topics


Displaying or hiding headers and footers

To display or hide the header or footer on the current page

•	Click Page, Show This Header or Page, Show This Footer.

 Related Topics


Using running headers or footers

Running headers and footers are used to indicate to the reader that text is part of a topic or section started on an earlier page. The Current Match option [image] provides more control than the First and Last Match options over the information placed in headers or footers. With Current Match you can create "running" headers and footers, which indicate clearly to readers that a topic is continued from a section started on an earlier page. If the first paragraph on a page uses the tag specified in the Primary Tag list box, that paragraph's text is printed as part of the header or footer. Otherwise the text of the last occurrence of the tag you specify as the Secondary tag is printed as part of the header or footer.

To create running headers or footers

1.	Click View, Master Page.

2.	Click the Master Page base frame.

3.	Click Page, Enable Header, or Enable Footer.

4.	Click within the header or footer frame.

5.	Click one of the following buttons in the Header/Footer Property Bar:

 Put text in the first paragraph on a given page, which is formatted with a particular tag in the header or footer.

 First Match Example

 Puts text in the last paragraph on a given page which is formatted with a particular tag in the header or footer.

 Last Match Example

 Identical to First and Last Match except that text only appears in the header or footer when it is the first paragraph on the page.

 Current Match Example

6.	Choose the paragraph tag assigned to text you want to appear in the header or footer.

 Note

•	When using the First, Last and Current Match feature, make sure to enable the Size Frame to Fit Text option in the Frame Properties dialog box (Format menu) for the header and footer frames. Otherwise, the header or footer frame may not be large enough to accommodate the paragraphs referenced by the matching feature.

 Related Topics


Creating headers or footers

To create headers or footers on the master page

1.	Click View, Master Page.

2.	Click the left or right Master Page base frame to create headers or footers for left or right pages in a double-sided.

See the note below for information on creating headers and footers for single-side documents.

3 	Click Page, Enable Header or Page, Enable Footer.

4.	Enter the text you want to appear in the header or footer.

To insert	Do this

Text	Type the text in the frame that surrounds the header or footer area. You can type two lines, each with three items: one left-aligned, one centered, and one right-aligned. Press Tab after typing an entry to move to the next. Press Enter to begin the second line.

Page numbers	Click

Chapter numbers	Click

The current date and time	Click

The current time	Click

 Tip

•	Click Copy or Mirror to place the corresponding header or footer on the facing page. VENTURA copies but does not mirror text attributes that you apply to one of the three tab-separated items in the header or footer and extend to one or both of the other items.

•	Use the [image], [image], and [image] buttons to creating running headers and footers. Click Related Topics for more information.

 Note

•	In a single-sided document, you can create different headers and footer for the document using multiple master pages. For more information, click Related Topics.

•	You can have different headers and footers within the same document or chapter by overriding those on the master page or by creating them on a page by page basis in Page Layout view. See Related Topics for instructions.

 Related Topics


Inserting items in headers or footers

You can insert the date and time, as well as page or chapter numbers in your headers and footers.

To insert a chapter and page numbers in a header or footer

1.	Click View, Master Page.

2.	Click the Master Page base frame.

3.	Click in the header or footer.

4.	Click [image] to insert page numbers and/or [image] to insert chapter numbers.

To insert the date and time in a header or footer

1.	Click View, Master Page.

2.	Click the Master Page base frame.

3.	Click in the header or footer.

4.	Click [image] to insert the current time or [image] to insert the date and/or time which VENTURA can update automatically.

 Note

•	You can position position header items using the options in the Tag Properties dialog box (click Format, Paragraph Tag).

 Related Topics


Table of Contents


To create a table of contents

1.	Click Format, Table of Contents/Index.

2.	Click the Table of Contents tab.

3.	Enter the title you want to appear at the beginning of the table of contents.

Click [image] to add the title or [image] to remove it.

4.	Enter the number of levels in the # of Levels box.

5.	Choose the paragraph tag assigned to the paragraph you want as the first level entry in the list.

6.	Click in the Suffix box, then click the Insert button.

7.	Specify whether you want to show page, chapter, or section number, either alone or in combinations [image] for example, the chapter number followed by page number.

You can type a dash or some other character to serve as a separator between the number codes.

If you want to align the page, chapter or section numbers with the right margin, click the Insert button and choose Tab Character to insert a tab before the number codes in the Suffix box

8.	Enter any additional text you want to appear in the table of contents in the Prefix or Suffix boxes.

9.	For each level, repeat steps 5 and 6.

10.	In the Chapter box, choose the chapter you want to add the text file containing the table of contents to.

After creating the table of contents, you can move the file to another chapter using the Navigator.

11.	In the File box, type a name for text file containing the table of contents. By default, VENTURA uses the title you typed as the filename.

12.	Click Update Now to generate the table of contents.

Tips

•	To change the information for a level, click it; either an edit box or a button appears. Type the information in the edit box or click the button to display a list of options then click the one you want.

•	To change the formatting of content in the Prefix, Suffix, Text or Preset Numbering boxes, drag to select the content, then Click Attributes. The formatting you apply overrides the formatting in the tag that VENTURA automatically applies to the table of content entries.

Note

•	Once the Table of Contents file is created, you can load it into your document from the list of files in the toolbar. Or, you can drag and drop it into a frame from the Publication Manager view in the Navigator.

•	If you decide to change the title of the table of contents after specifying the setup information, do it using the Navigator rather than the Table of Contents/Index dialog box. Otherwise, you'll need to re-enter the setup information.

•	If you change the location of the table of contents file by selecting a different chapter in the Table of Contents/Index Properties dialog box, the original file remains in the document, but will no longer update. If you don't want to keep the original table of contents, delete it using the Navigator.

•	You can insert typographical spaces (em, thin, figure etc.) in a prefix or suffix by typing markup codes in the Prefix or Suffix box. For a list of the codes, click [image].

 Related Topics


To update the table of contents or index

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Table of Contents or Index from the list.

3.	Right-click the table of contents or index you want to update.

4.	Click Update.

Tip

•	You can also update an index by selecting the index file in the Navigator and clicking the Update button. To update all index files at the same time, select the document, then click Update. Alternatively, you can use the Format, Table of Contents/Index command.

•	To update all table of contents and indexes in a document at the same time, right-click the document in the Navigator. Then enable the check boxes next to the items you want to update.

 Related Topics


Index


To create an index

1.	Click Format, Table of Contents/Index.

2.	Click the Index tab.

3.	Enter the title you want to appear at the beginning of the Index.

Click the plus button [image] to add the title or the minus button [image] to remove it.

4.	Click the box under Number Format and select a numbering scheme. Add any additional text after the number in the Prefix and Suffix boxes.

5.	Choose the delimiters (spaces, tabs or punctuation) you want to use to separate the main entry text from the page numbers, and the page numbers from one another.

6.	In the Retrieve Entries box, specify which index categories you want to appear in the index.

Index categories are assigned when you insert the entries. For more information, click Related Topics and select Segregated indexes.

7.	In the Chapter box, choose the chapter you want to add the text file containing the index to.

After creating the index, you can move the file to another chapter using the Navigator.

8.	In the File box, type a name for text file containing the index. By default, VENTURA uses the title you typed as the filename.

9.	Click Update to generate the index.

Notes

•	You can change the text for See and See also references.

•	You can also add an index from the Navigator. Click Tools, Navigator, and choose Index. Right-click on the publication name, and choose Add Index. This opens the Index properties dialog, which allows you to add or edit an Index.

•	To show page ranges (e.g., 23-27), use the numbering buttons to insert two [P#] codes. Be sure to type a dash between the codes. The range of pages setting requires the entry appearing on each page in the range.

•	Once the Index file is created, you can load it into your document from the list of files in the toolbar. Or, you can drag and drop the file into a frame from the Publication Manager view in the Navigator.

•	If you change the location of the index file by selecting a different chapter in the Table of Contents/Index Properties dialog box, the original file remains in the document, but will not longer update. If you don't want to keep the original index, delete it using the Navigator.

 Related Topics


To insert an index entry
Inserting an index entry

You can insert index entries using the Navigator or the Insert, Index Entry command.

What do you want to do?

Insert an index entry using the Navigator

Insert and index entry using the Insert, Index Entry command

 Related Topics


To insert an index entry using the Navigator

1.	Click Tools, Navigator and choose Index from the list.

2.	Select the word that you want to make an index entry or click to the left of it.

Avoid placing entries within words or selecting words containing commas, semicolons or brackets [ ].

3.	Click the index file you want to add the entry to.

If no index file exists, right-click No indices, then click New Index.

4.	Do either of the following:

•	Click the Add button to add the word exactly as it appears in the document.

•	Right-click the index file, then choose Add to display a dialog box where you enter the text you want to use for the index entry.

Notes

•	The Index entry will be added below the item you highlight in the Index list. The default is the Index itself, but you can add an item below an index entry as a sub entry.

•	When you create an index entry, VENTURA places a code, which is visible in Copy Editor view, in the text near the word. If you delete the word to which the original entry referred, the code will remain.

•	Index entries are case-sensitive producing a separate entry for each variation. For example, indexing "house," "House" and HOUSE" produces three entries.

•	Use the sort key to list the entry under a letter different from the one under which it would normally appear. For more information, click Related Topics.

•	The See and See Also options allow you to reference other entries in the index. For example, the index entry "Africa" could refer to "continents" and appear as "See Also, continents." Click Related Topics for instructions on creating index cross-references.

•	The Category option lets you assign index entries to groups and then generate an index that lists only the entries in a particular group. For more information, click Related Topics and select Segregated indexes.

•	When you want an index entry to indicate a range of pages instead of a single page, you must insert the entry on each page in the range.

 Related Topics


To insert and index entry using the Insert, Index Entry command

1.	Select the word that you want to make an index entry or click to the left of it.

Avoid placing entries within words or selecting words containing commas, semicolons or brackets [ ].

2.	Click Insert, Index Entry.

3.	From the Type list, choose Index Entry or See, or See Also to cross-reference another entry in the index. (Click Related Topics for specific instructions on creating inserting index cross-references).

4.	Specify the level you want the entry to appear on . For example, to create a subentry, enter 2.

5.	Enter the text you want to use for the index entry.

Notes

•	When you create an index entry, VENTURA places a code, which is visible in Copy Editor view, in the text near the word. If you delete the word to which the original entry referred, the code will remain.

•	Use the sort key to list the entry under a letter different from the one under which it would normally appear. For more information, click Related Topics.

•	Index entries are case-sensitive producing a separate entry for each variation. For example, indexing "house," "House" and HOUSE" produces three entries.

•	The Category option lets you assign index entries to groups and then generate an index that lists only the entries in a particular group. For more information, click Related Topics and select Segregated indexes.

•	When you want an index entry to indicate a range of pages instead of a single page, you must insert the entry on each page in the range.

 Related Topics


To create an index cross-reference

1.	Click to place the insertion point on the page.

2.	Click, Insert, Index Entry.

3.	In the Index Entry box, type the word under which you want the cross-reference entry to appear.

For example, to create a cross-reference under the main entry "auto-numbering" that refers to "section numbering," type "auto-numbering" in the #1 Index Entry box.

4.	From the Type box, choose See or See Also.

5.	Enter 2 in the Level box.

6.	In the #2 Index Entry box, type the entry you want to refer the reader to.

 Note

•	You can use words other than "see" or "see also" by editing the Reference Prefixes in the Table of Contents/Index Properties dialog box (Format menu).

•	To create a main level cross-reference entry you must type the prefix (See or See Also) and the cross-reference in the Index Entry box. For example, to create the entry "bugs, see insects" type "bugs, see insects."

•	To create an index cross-reference using the Navigator, click to place the insertion point on the page. Then, right-click the entry in the Navigator under which you want the cross-reference to appear. Click Add from the pop-up menu. From the Type list, click See or See Also, then type the cross-reference in the empty Index Entry box.

 Related Topics


To edit an index entry

1.	Place the insertion point in front of the index entry.

A degree symbol () marks the location of the entry in Page Layout view. In Copy Editor view, the characters <$! Precede the entry.

2.	Click Edit, Edit Item.

3.	Make the changes you want.

Tip

•	You can quickly locate an entry by right-clicking it in the Navigator's Index view and choosing Go To.

Notes

•	VENTURA updates the index in the background to reflect the changes you made. To see the changes immediately, right-click an entry in the Navigator's Index view and choose Update.

•	When you create an index entry, VENTURA places a code, which is visible in Copy Editor view, in the text near the word. If you delete the word to which the original entry referred, the code will remain.

 Related Topics


To delete index entries

1.	Place the insertion point in front of the index entry.

A degree symbol () marks the location of the entry in Page Layout view. In Copy Editor view, the characters <$! Precede the entry.

2.	Press DELETE.

Note

•	The degree symbol also marks the location of other items (e.g., cross-references), so check the Status Bar to make sure you are deleting an index entry and not another type of item.

•	In Copy Editor view, an index entry appears surrounded by the codes <$! and >.

•	VENTURA updates the index in the background to reflect the changes you made. To see the changes immediately, right-click an entry in the Navigator's Index view and choose Update.

•	If you delete the word to which the original entry referred, the code will remain.

 Related Topics


Changing the order of entries in the index

Sort keys allow you to change the usual order for certain entries such as those beginning with numbers so that they appear in a logical place in the index. For example, select "N" to have 1984 appear under "N" in the index rather, than under the exclamation mark heading under which non-alphabetic entries are usually listed.

You can also use sort keys to ignore articles of speech (e.g., a, an, the) when they appear at the beginning of an entry. For instance, if the main entry is "The Maltese Falcon," and you want to alphabetize it under Maltese rather than "The," enter Maltese Falcon as the sort key for the main entry. Sort keys work with cross-reference entries too.

1.	For an existing entry, place the insertion point in front of the index entry, then click, Edit Item.

A degree symbol () marks the location of the entry in Page Layout view. In Copy Editor view, the characters <$! Precede the entry.

3.	Choose the letter under which you want the entry to appear.

Note

•	You cannot use the same Sort Key for different index entries. For example, an N can't be used as the sort key for the entries 1980, 1986, and 1992. To have these entries appear under N (for nineteen), enter N as the sort key for one of the entries, NN for another, and NNN for remaining entry.

 Related Topics


List of Figures or Tables


To create a list of figures or tables

To create a list of figures or tables, follow the steps for creating a table of contents (see Related Topics). The tags you specify are those used to format the caption label and any text you typed directly into the caption frame. These tags, which VENTURA generates, are as follows:

Tag	Applied to

Z_LABEL_FIG	Caption labels for figures

Z_LABEL_TBL	Caption labels for tables

Z_CAPTION	Text typed directly into the caption frame

 Related Topics


To update a list of figures or tables

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Table of Contents or Index from the list.

3.	Right-click the document containing the list of figures or tables you want to update.

4.	Click Update Publication.

5.	Enable the Table of Contents check box and those next to other items you want to update.

Tip

•	You can also update the list of figures or tables in the active document using the Format, Table of Contents/Index command.

 Related Topics


Cross-References


Inserting cross-references

Before you can insert a cross-reference, you must first insert a marker at the location of the item you wish to cross-reference.

To insert a marker for cross-referencing

1.	Place the cursor at the location of the item you wish to cross-reference.

2.	Click Insert, Marker.

3.	Type a marker name or choose one from the list box.

To insert a cross-reference

1.	Place the cursor at the point you wish to insert the cross-reference.

2.	Click Insert, Cross-reference.

3.	Choose a cross-reference type from the Reference Type list box.

4.	Choose the marker name from the Refer To list box.

5.	Enable any formatting options you wish.

To cross-reference caption text

1.	Draw a frame with a caption.

2.	Set the Caption Position and the Frame Name using the Frame Properties dialog box (click Format, Frame, General). The frame name is essentially a marker that you use in cross-referencing.

3.	Type text in the caption frame. VENTURA 7 will automatically generate a tag called Z_CAPTION and assign it to this text.

4.	Place the cursor where you want the cross-reference.

5.	Click Insert, Cross-Reference.

6.	Choose Caption Text from the Reference Type list box.

7.	Choose the Frame Name you assigned the caption in the Refer To list box.

To cross-reference a figure or table in a frame

1.	Select the frame you want to mark.

2.	Click Format, Frame, and click the General tab. Set the caption position.

3.	Type a name in the Frame Name box. The frame name is essentially a marker that you use in cross-referencing.

4.	Place the cursor where you want the cross-reference.

5.	Click Insert, Cross-Reference.

6.	Choose Figure Number or Table Number from the Reference Type list box.

7.	Choose the frame name you assigned in the Refer To list box.

To cross-reference section numbers

1.	Tag the heading of each section with the same paragraph tag.

2.	Set up auto-numbering on the Auto-Numbering tab of the Chapter Properties dialog box (click Format, Chapter, Auto-Numbering).

3.	On the first auto-numbering level, select the paragraph tag name that you applied to the heading of each section.

4.	Set the numbering style and start number, and click OK.

5.	Insert a marker in the text using the procedure "To insert a marker for cross-referencing", above.

6.	Place the cursor in the text where you want the cross-reference.

7.	Click Insert, Cross-Reference.

8.	Choose Section Number in the Reference Type list box.

9.	Choose the marker you placed in the text of the section from the Refer To list box.

 Notes

•	Section number cross-referencing works in conjunction with auto-numbering.

•	For page, chapter, or section numbers, you may want to cross-reference the same marker in different locations. To do this, enable the Reference All Occurrences checkbox in the Insert Cross-Reference dialog box and choose an option from the Delimiter list box.

•	You can set the initial page, chapter, figure, or table number using the Counters tab of the Chapter Properties dialog box (click Format, Chapter, Counters).

 Related Topics


To locate a cross-reference or marker

1.	Click Tools, Navigator, and choose Cross-References from the list.

2.	Click on the Cross-Reference you wish to locate.

3.	Right-click, choose Go To.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Find & Replace command to search for a specific cross-reference marker. Click Edit. Find & Replace, then click Items, Cross-Reference, and enter the Marker Name.

 Related Topics


To move or copy a cross-reference or marker

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Select the cross-reference or marker.

The characters <$R precede the cross-reference; <$M precedes the marker.

3.	Click Edit, Cut or Edit, Copy.

4.	Click where you want the cross-reference or marker to go, and then click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To delete a cross-reference marker or a cross-reference

A cross-reference is unresolved if it appears with a red "X" in the Navigator (when you have chosen Cross-Reference from the list box).

To move to an unresolved cross-reference

1.	In the Navigator, click the downa arrow and choose Cross-Reference from the list box.

2.	Right-click the unresolved cross-reference and choose Go To.

3.	Press DELETE.

 Related Topics


To change the source for a cross-reference

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Click immediately in front of the cross-reference or marker.

The characters <$R precede the cross-reference; <$M precedes the marker.

3.	Click Edit, Edit Item.

4.	Pick a marker from the list or enter a new marker name.

Add the new marker if necessary.

 Related Topics


Variables


To insert a marker for variable text

1.	Click where you want the variable to appear.

2.	Click Insert, Insert Item, Variable.

3.	Type a name for the variable in the Name box or select it from the Name list.

 Related Topics


To define text to be inserted at variable marker locations

1.	Click Format, Publication, and click the Variable Definition tab.

2.	Enter a name in the Variable marker box or select one from the list.

You can click Add or Rename after entering a new variable.

3.	Enter text in the Substitutions box.

 Related Topics


To edit a variable definition

1.	Click Format, Publication, and click the Variable Definition tab.

2.	Choose the variable you want to edit from the Variable Marker list.

3.	Do one or both of the following:

·	edit the marker name and then click the Rename button.

·	edit the text in the Substitutions box.

4.	Click OK.

Note

•	VENTURA does not update the names of previously inserted markers that refer to the renamed variable. You must rename them individually using the Edit, Edit Item or the Edit, Find & Replace command.

 Related Topics


To rename or delete individual markers

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Click immediately in front of the variable marker.

The characters <$V precede the variable marker.

3.	Click Edit, Edit Special Item.

4.	Pick a marker from the list or enter a new marker name.

5.	Click OK.

Note

•	VENTURA does not update the names of previously inserted markers that refer to the renamed variable. You must rename them individually using the Edit, Edit Item or the Edit, Find & Replace command.

•	To delete a marker, click immediately in front of the variable marker, then click Edit, Cut.

 Related Topics


To rename or delete all occurrences of a variable marker

1.	Click Format, Publication, and click the Variable Definition tab.

2.	Choose the variable you want to edit from the Variable Marker list.

3.	Do either of the following:

•	Edit the marker name and then click the Rename button.

•	Click DELETE.

4.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


Footnotes and Endnotes


To insert a footnote or endnote
To insert a footnote

1.	Click where you want the footnote reference to appear.

2.	Click Insert, Insert Item.

3.	Choose Footnote.

4.	Type the footnote text in the frame at the bottom of the page.

Note

•	When you insert a footnote. the default formatting (based on the Body Text tag) is applied. For information on formatting notes, click Related topics.

•	You cannot insert footnote references into footnote or endnote text.

 Related Topics


To insert an endnote

1.	Click where you want the footnote reference to appear.

2.	Click Insert, Insert Item.

3.	Choose Endnote.

4.	Place the Endnote file in a drawn frame or an inserted page at the end of the document..

 How?

5.	Type the endnote text.

Note

•	The formatting VENTURA applies to the endnote is based on the Body Text tag) is applied. For information on formatting notes, click Related topics.

•	You cannot insert footnote or endnote references into footnote or endnote text.

 Related Topics


To place an endnote file in a document

1.	Draw a frame to hold the endnote file or place it on a page added to the document using the Page, Insert Pages command.

2.	With the frame or page selected, choose Endnotes from the Files list in the toolbar.

Tip

•	You can also drag the Endnote file from the Navigator into a drawn frame or a manually inserted page.

 Related Topics


To show/hide footnotes and endnotes
To show or hide footnotes

•	Click Page, Enable Footnotes.

To show footnotes, select the base page frame, then click Page, Enable Footnotes.

 Related Topics


Formatting footnotes and endnotes

You can customize footnotes and endnotes in a number of ways. You can format the reference markers, change the footnote separators, or even create a custom numbering scheme. You have the choice of numbering footnotes for the whole chapter, or restarting the numbering for each page. Note text can be edited like any other kind of text.

What do you want to do?

Format footnote or endnote text

Format the reference markers

Change the footnote separators

Adjust the space between the footnote text and the main text

Create a custom numbering scheme

Flow notes in columns

 Related Topics


To format footnote or endnote text

1.	Click in the footnote text.

2.	Apply formatting as you would to any other text.

Note

•	A footnote or endnote’s initial formatting is taken from the Body Text tag. Footnotes do have their own tags, which are hidden by default. To view footnote tags, click Tools, Options, and enable the Generated Tags check box. You may format these tags like any other, or apply other tags to the notes.

 Related Topics


To format footnote or endnote reference markers

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and click the Footnotes or Endnotes tab.

2.	Select a Number style, or enter a custom mark.

3.	Select a Format for the reference number in the footnote text.

Note

•	Click the Attributes button to edit the attributes (including font, style, shift up).

 Related Topics


To adjust the space between the footnote text and the main text

1.	Click the footnotes frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame, and choose the Margins tab.

3.	Adjust the outside margins.

Note

•	You can also adjust the space between footnote text and main text using a separator. Click Format, Chapter, and click the Footnotes or Endnotes tab. Enable the Footnote Separator option, then adjust the space above setting.

•	You can also adjust the maximum height of the footnote frame. Click Format, Chapter, Footnotes, and enable the Maximum Height Option, then adjust the setting.

 Related Topics


To restart note numbering within a document

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and click the Footnotes tab.

2.	Choose an option from the Restart Footnote on list.

 Related Topics


To change or remove the note separator

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and click the Footnotes tab.

2.	Enable the Add Separator Line checkbox.

3.	Adjust the settings.

 Related Topics


To flow notes in columns

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and click the Footnotes tab.

2.	Enable the Flow footnotes in columns checkbox.

 Related Topics


To move or copy a footnote or endnote reference

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Select the footnote reference code [image].

3.	Click Edit, Cut, or Edit, Copy.

4.	Click where you want the footnote reference to go, and then click Edit, Paste.

Note

•	You cannot paste foonote or endnote references into footnote or endnote text.

 Related Topics


To edit footnote or endnote text

1.	Click in the text of the footnote.

2.	Edit the footnote text as you would any other text.

 Related Topics


To delete a footnote or endnote

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Select the footnote reference code, [image].

3.	Click Edit, Cut, or Delete.

 Related Topics


To create a custom numbering scheme

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and click the Footnotes or Endnotes tab.

2.	Type or select the footnote you want to define in the Footnote # box.

3.	Type the characters you want that footnote to use in the Reference box.

 Related Topics


To convert footnotes to endnotes (or vice versa)

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and click the Footnotes or Endnotes tab.

2.	Click Convert.

3.	Choose a conversion option.

Note

•	When you convert footnotes to endnotes, VENTURA places the notes in a file called "Endnotes." You must then place the file in a frame (or an inserted page) at the end of the document. For more information, click the How To button.


Text Before/Text After


To define Text Before/Text After entries

1.	Click Format, Publication, and choose the Text Before/After tab.

2.	Enter a name for the text string you want to insert before or after a tag.

3.	Enter a text string in the Defined Text box.

4.	Click Add.

Notes

•	Text before or after strings are assigned to specific tags using the Format, Paragraph Tag, Character Tag or Paragraph Overrides commands. (Click Related Topics for instructions.)

•	To change a definition, choose a name from the list, and edit the text string.

•	To rename a definition, choose a name from the list, and click Rename.

•	To delete a definition, choose a name from the list, and click Delete.

 Related Topics


To assign Text Before/Text After entries to tags

1.	Click Format, Manage Tag list.

2.	Click the Paragraph or Character tab depending on which type of tag you want to assign the entry to.

3.	Select the tag you want to assign the entry to.

4.	Click Edit.

5.	Click the Font tab.

6.	From the Text Before/After lists, click the entry that identifies the text you want VENTURA to insert. (Click Related Topics for instructions on defining entries.)

Whenever you apply the selected tag to text, VENTURA will automatically insert the text associated with Text Before or Text entry.

 Related Topics


Sort keys (Index)

Sort keys allow you to change the usual order for certain entries such as those beginning with numbers so that they appear in a logical place in the index. For example, select "N" to have 1984 appear under "N" in the index rather than the exclamation mark heading under which non-alphabetic entries are usually listed.

You can also use sort keys to ignore articles of speech (e.g., a, an, the) when they appear at the beginning of an entry. For instance, if the main entry is "The Maltese Falcon," and you want to alphabetize it under Maltese rather than "The," enter Maltese Falcon as the sort key for the main entry. Sort keys work with cross-reference entries too.


Corel VENTURA places the footnote text in a frame on the same page as the reference marker.


Endnotes are placed at the end of the document.


subentry

An index entry that falls under a more general heading. For example, the index entry "dogs" could have the subentries "beagles" and "poodles."


Choosing Layout Options


To specify page size and orientation

1.	Click Page, Master Page Properties.

2.	Choose a page size from the list box.

To set your own page size, choose Custom and enter the dimensions.

3.	Choose Portrait or Landscape.

Tip

•	To change the orientation of selected pages, apply a different master page.

 Related Topics


To specify a layout style

1.	Click Format, Publication, then click the General tab.

2.	Choose a layout style from the Layout list.

The Book or Full Page style print one page or your document per sheet of paper. The booklet or a card layout styles print either two pages or four pages per sheet.


To start a document on a left, right or either page

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and choose the General tab.

2.	Click Single or Double.

3.	Choose a side from the Start On list.

Left/Either Page and Right/Either Page applies to double-sided documents. Use these options to start the chapter on a right or left page if it's the first chapter in the document. If the chapter appears later in the document, it will begin on either side depending on where the previous chapter ended.

Tip

•	You can set up both right and left Master Pages for your double-sided documents.

•	You can have VENTURA insert a blank page between chapters that end on the same side (left or right) as the next chapter. Inserting blank pages ensures that chapters begin on the correct side when printing on both sides of the paper. For more information, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Inserting blank pages between chapters

Multi-chapter documents printed one both sides of the paper need blank pages at the end of chapters that end on the same side (left or right) as the next chapter. Although you can manually insert the pages, it's better to let VENTURA do it. That way, you'll never need to remember to add (or remove) blank pages whenever the page count in the document changes.

1.	Open the document you want VENTURA to insert blank pages into.

2.	Click Format, Publication.

3.	From the Blank Pages box, click Always Insert or Always Ask if you want VENTURA to ask you at print time whether you want to insert the blank pages.

Note

•	Don't let VENTURA insert blank pages if you're having a service bureau image a document you've printed to a disk. Each blank page requires a sheet of film that you'll be charged for. If blank pages are needed, the printer will insert them after the film has been imaged.

•	VENTURA never inserts blank pages in the documents published to an electronic format (HTML, Adobe Acrobat, Envoy, or Corel Barista).


Setting Margins


To set margins

1.	Select the frame you want to set margins for.

2.	Click Format, Frame, and choose the Margins tab.

3.	Adjust the settings as required.

Tip

•	To adjust margins for the entire document, click View, Master Page, and follow the above steps for each master page.

•	To copy or mirror the margin, column and other frame properties to the facing master page, right-click the master page's base frame and choose the appropriate command.

•	To adjust margins with the rulers, select the frame, then drag the margin boundary markers to a new position. The marker snaps to the tick markers on the ruler unless you hold down the CTRL key as you drag.

Note

•	If the left and right master page have the same margins and columns, changing them on one page using the rulers also changes them on the other page. However, if the margins or columns differ, changes you make to one page do not apply to the other.

 Related Topics


To add vertical rules to a page or frame

1.	Select the page or drawn frame you want to add vertical rules to.

2.	Click Format, Frame, and choose the Margins tab, then click Advanced.

3.	Set the number of vertical rules (up to eight).

4.	Adjust the settings for line Position, Rule width, and Color.

Tip

•	If you want each page in the document to have the same rules, place them on the master page.

•	To copy or mirror the margin, column and other frame properties to the facing master page, right-click the master page's base frame and choose the appropriate command.

•	You can also modify the line by the clicking the [image] button and modifying the settings.

 Related Topics


To add columns

1.	Select the frame you want to set columns for.

2.	Click Format, Frame, and choose the Columns tab, then click Advanced.

3.	Set the number of columns.

4.	Click a column setting under Width.

5.	Adjust the width.

6.	Repeat for other columns.

Tip

•	To set columns of equal width, click Equal Width.

•	To set columns for the entire document, click View, Master Page, and follow the above steps for each master page.

•	To copy or mirror the margin, column and other frame properties to the facing master page, right-click the master page's base frame and choose the appropriate command.

•	To adjust columns on-screen, either drag the column guides (base page only) or select the frame, then and drag the column width markers to a new position.

Note

•	If the left and right master page have the same margins and columns, changing them on one page using the rulers also changes them on the other page. However, if the margins or columns differ, changes you make them one page do not apply to the other.

 Related Topics


To adjust the space between columns

1.	Select the frame with the columns you want to adjust.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	Click the Columns tab, then click Advanced.

4.	Click a gutter setting.

5.	Enter the width, then press ENTER.

6.	Repeat for other columns.

Tip

•	To adjust columns for the entire document, click View, Master Page, and follow the above steps for each master page.

•	To copy or mirror the margin, column and other frame properties to the facing master page, right-click the master page's base frame and choose the appropriate command.

•	To adjust columns with the rulers, select the frame, then drag the gutter width markers to a new position.

Note

•	Gutter settings specified for the base page frame using the Format, Frame command become the default settings for drawn frames you subsequently add to the page. The settings do not apply to the drawn frame if specified using the rulers.

•	If the left and right master page have the same margins and columns, changing them on one page using the rulers also changes them on the other page. However, if the margins or columns differ, changes you make them one page do not apply to the other.

 Related Topics


To place vertical lines between columns

1.	Select the frame that contains the columns.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	Click the Columns tab, then click Advanced.

4.	Click a line style button [image].

5.	Enter the settings for color, width, and style, then click OK.

6.	Repeat for other columns.

Tips

•	To apply a particular setting to all lines, right-click the column heading and choose Apply All.

•	You can also adjust settings for color and thickness by double-clicking the individual item setting in the column settings .

•	To add inter-column rulers to the entire document, click View, Master Page, and follow the above steps for each master page.

•	To copy or mirror the margin, column and other frame properties to the facing master page, right-click the master page's base frame and choose the appropriate command.

 Related Topics


To flow text from right to left or left to right

1.	Select the frame that contains text that you want to flow.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	Click the Columns tab, then click Advanced.

4.	Choose an option from the Flow in columns list box.

 Related Topics


To distribute text evenly between columns

1.	Select the frame that contains text that you want to distribute evenly.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	Click the Columns tab, then click Advanced.

4.	Choose On from the Column Balance list box.

Note

•	There are both chapter and paragraph settings for text flow. To apply even text flow across a chapter, click Format, Chapter, and click the typography tab. Then, enable the Column balance option.

 Related Topics


To make text reach the bottom of columns

1.	Select the frame that contains text that you want to reach the bottom of columns.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	Adjust the settings in the Vertical Justification box.

Note

•	For information on how Vertical Justification works, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Setting Typography options


To allow pair kerning

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and choose the Typography tab.

2.	Enable the Pair Kerning check box.

Tip

•	The setting you specify applies to the entire chapter, unless overridden for a selected frame using the Format, Frame, Typography command.

 Related Topics


To control widows and orphans

1.	Click Format, Chapter.

2.	Click the Typography tab.

3.	Specify the Widow and Orphan settings.

Tip

•	The setting you specify applies to the entire chapter, unless overridden for a selected frame using the Format, Frame, Typography command.

 Related Topics


To control the placement of the first line of text

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and choose the Typography tab.

2.	Choose a First Baseline option.

The First Baseline options determine the location of the first line of text on a frame or page: Cap Height aligns the first line of text flush with the top of the frame. Interline moves the first line down by an amount equal to its interline spacing.

Note

•	The setting you specify applies to the entire chapter, unless overridden for a selected frame using the Format, Frame, Typography command. The chapter-wide setting does not apply to master page frames. To use the same setting as the chapter, select the frame in Master Page view, then select whatever setting the chapter is using. The default for chapters is Inter-Line and for master pages, Cap-Height.

 Related Topics


To use discretionary hyphens only

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and choose the Typography tab.

2.	Enable the Discretionary Hyphens check box.

 Related Topics


Setting the style and Numbering of Counters


To set the style and numbering of chapters, pages, and other counters

1.	Click Format, Chapter, and choose the Counters tab.

2.	Choose a Counter Style and Start Number.

3.	Enable the Continue option to continue the numbering scheme from the previous chapter.

Note

•	Setting zero as the start number is valid for numeric numbering styles only.

 Related Topics


To override counters

1.	Click Format, Override Counter.

2.	Adjust the settings for number style and start number.

 Related Topics


Working with Master Pages


To apply a master page

1.	Click Page, Apply Master Page.

2.	Select a master page from the Apply Master Page list box.

3.	Select the page (s) which you want to apply the Master Page to.

Notes

•	If the master page you want is stored in a Library, you can drag it from the Library and drop it onto the page. For instructions, click Related Topics and choose "To use library items in a document."

 Related Topics


To view master pages

•	Click View, Master Pages.

 Related Topics


 To edit a master page

1.	Open the document containing the master page you want to edit.

2.	Click View, Master Page.

3.	Click Tools, Navigator, then choose Master Pages from the list at the top of the Navigator.

4.	Right-click the master page you want to edit, then choose Go To.

5.	Make the changes.

Tip

•	You can also select the master page you want to edit by displaying a page formatted with it, then clicking View, Master Page.

 Related Topics


To create a new master page

1.	Click Tools, Navigator, and choose Master Pages.

2.	Right-click on the document you wish to add a page to, then choose New Master Page

3.	Right-click the new master page to set properties such as orientation and page size.

Tip

•	You can edit the Master page by clicking View, Master Page.

 Related Topics


To rename a master page

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Master Pages from the list box.

3.	Click the publication that contains the master page that you want to rename.

4.	Right-click the master page, choose Rename.

5.	Type the new name, then press Enter.

 Related Topics


To save a master page in the Library

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Master Pages from the list box.

3.	Click File, Library, and choose New or Open.

4.	Drag the Master Page from the Navigator to the Library window.

 Related Topics


To copy a master page from another document

1.	Open the document that contains the master page you wish to copy.

2.	Click Tools, Navigator.

3.	Choose Master Pages from the list box.

4.	Right-click on the master page that you want to copy, and choose Copy.

5.	Right-click on the document you want to add the page to, and choose Paste.

Tip

•	You can also drag the master page and drop it on the book icon next to the document you want to copy it to.

 Related Topics


To delete a master page

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Master Pages from the list box.

3.	Right-click the master page that you wish to delete.

4.	Choose Delete.

5.	Choose the master page that will reformat your document.

6.	Click OK.

Note

•	Once you have opened the Delete Master Page dialog, you can choose to delete any of the master pages in your document.

 Related Topics


To override master page settings on a page

1.	Select the page frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame.

3.	Adjust the settings.

Tip

•	To apply the same overrides to several pages, it may be better to create a new master page with those settings.

•	To restore the master page settings, re-apply the master page using the Page, Apply Master Page command or drag and drop it from the Navigator.

 Related Topics


To apply the same columns and margins to facing master pages

1.	Click View, Master Page.

2.	Select the base frame of the one of the master pages.

3.	Set the margins and columns the way you want using the Format, Frame command.

4.	Right click the master page and choose either Copy or Mirror Properties to Facing Page.

Choosing Mirror Properties to Facing page reflects the margins so that the right margin for the right page becomes the left margin for the left page and vice versa.

Note

•	The Copy and Mirror Properties to Facing Page commands apply not only the column and margins settings to the facing master page, but the other frame properties specified in the Frame Properties dialog box (Format menu).

•	If the left and right master page have the same margins and columns, changing them on one page using the rulers also changes them on the other page. However, if the margins or columns differ, changes you make them one page do not apply to the other.


Repeating frames


To create a frame that repeats on other pages

1.	Click View, Master Page.

2.	Draw or paste a frame on the right or left master page.

Note

•	You can override (i.e., change the content of) text added to master page by switching to Page Layout view, then clicking the border of the frame containing the text.

•	Header and footer frames on master pages push aside text in frames placed on top of the header or footer. Changing the order of the frames has no effect. However, the text remains visible if you place the frame over the header or footer in Page Layout view.

•	Keep repeating frame completely within the margins of the base page; otherwise you won't have room to add text and other items to the base page in Page Layout view.

 Related Topics


To remove a repeating frame from a page

1.	In Page Layout view, select the frame you want to remove.

2.	Click Delete.

Note

•	This removes the repeating frame from the current page. It will still appear on other pages. If you decide later you want it back, re-apply the master page using the Page, Apply Master Page command.

 Related Topics


To remove a repeating frame from a document

1.	Click View, Master Page.

2.	Select the frame.

3.	Click Delete.

Note

•	To remove the repeating frame from a single page, see the Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Adding and deleting pages


To delete manually inserted pages

1.	Click Page, Delete Pages.

2.	Set the initial page.

3.	Set a page range if required.

4.	Indicate which chapter the pages are found in.

 Related Topics


To manually insert pages

1.	Click Page, Insert Pages.

2.	Set the number of pages.

3.	Choose Before or After, and a page number.

Note

•	You can also choose which master page the inserted pages will be based upon, and which chapter the pages will be added to.

 Related Topics


VENTURA libraries

Corel VENTURA Libraries are files (*.VLB) created by Corel VENTURA that display as small windows in the Corel VENTURA document window. You can store any of the data or formatting in your publication in a library [image] text, pictures, tags, master pages, stylesheets, graphic or OLE objects, frames, tables, and even the content of an entire chapter [image] for easy access.

There are a number of ways to add items to a library: you can drag and drop them directly from a page, the Navigator or from another library. You can also paste them from the Clipboard. You can even drag and drop text and picture files from your desktop, or from a file management window such as Windows Explorer. Whenever you need something from a library, just drag it out onto the document window.

When you add stylesheets or text or picture files stored in a  Library to a document you can maintain a link to the item. By linking the item, any changes you make to it will be reflected in every document with links to that item. For example, suppose you opened a Library and made changes to a stylesheet, which was linked to other documents. Because the stylesheet in the other documents is a linked copy of the first, the changes made to the first stylesheet are automatically updated in the others.

Libraries can be shared between workgroups or kept private by individual users. When sharing libraries, you can set up access rights to control which team members can make changes to the libraries. (For more information, click Related Topics below.)

You can store network or local copies of files in the VENTURA Library, and then incorporate the same text or graphics in multiple publications. Default libraries are available from the File menu, and you can create as many new, empty library windows as necessary.

Linked images and libraries

If your publication contains an image that is linked from a library (as opposed to embedded in the publication), and then you move the library, you will have to relink the picture.

 Related Topics


Creating and opening Libraries


To create a Library

1.	Click File, Library.

2.	Choose New.

3.	Enter a filename for your library.

4.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


To open a Library

1.	Click File, Library.

2.	Choose Open.

3.	Select a library.

Notes

·	Use the browse control to find a library file (the extension is .vlb) in another directory.

·	If a library has been designated as multi-user, only those persons granted access by the library's administrator will be able to open and edit the file. If you have been given rights to the library, you may be asked to enter a password (usually your system password) before the library will open.

 Related Topics


Adding and applying items to/in a library


Adding an item to a Library

There are a number of ways to add items to a library. You can simply drag an item from your desktop, or from a file management window such as the Windows Explorer. You can also add items to the library using the Clipboard. In addition, you can add items which are already in your VENTURA document to a library by using the Navigator.

The type of item you're adding to the Library determines which method you use.

To add	Do this

text or picture file	drag from the Navigator, Windows Explorer, a VENTURA document (picture file only), or another application

chapter	drag from the Navigator

master page	drag from the Navigator

stylesheet	drag from the Navigator

tags	drag from the Tag Window or copy and paste from Manage Tag list dialog box

table	drag from a VENTURA document or use the Clipboard

selected text	drag from a VENTURA document or use the Clipboard

 Related Topics


To add text or picture files to a Library
To add a text or picture file to a Library

1.	Click File, Library and choose Open to open an existing Library, or New to create a new one.

2.	Open the document containing the text or picture file you want to add to the Library.

3.	Click Tools, Navigator and choose Publication Manager from the list box.

4.	Double-click the document, then the chapter containing the text or picture file you want to add to the Library.

5.	Drag the file from the Navigator to the library.

Tips

·	You can also drag text or pictures from the Windows Desktop or Explorer, or from another application. Text and pictures dragged from other applications are added to the Library as OLE objects.

·	Pictures and text files in drawn frames can also be dragged into a Library from a page in a VENTURA document.

·	Dragging a picture or text in a drawn frame from a VENTURA document places a copy of it in the Library. To remove the picture or text from the document and place it in the Library, hold down the SHIFT key while dragging.

Note

·	You cannot drag frames spread across facing pages into a library; use the Edit, Copy and Paste commands instead.

 Related Topics


To add a master page to a Library

1.	Click File, Library and choose Open to open an existing library, or New to create a new one.

2.	Open the document containing the master page you want to add to the Library.

3.	Click Tools, Navigator and choose Master Pages from the list box.

4.	Drag the master page from the Navigator to the library.

If the master pages are not displayed, double-click the document in the Navigator.

 Related Topics


To add a stylesheet to a Library

1.	Click File, Library and choose Open to open an existing library, or New to create a new one.

2.	Open the document containing the stylesheet you want to add to the Library.

3.	Click Tools, Navigator and choose Publication Manager from the list box.

4.	Double-click the document containing the stylesheet you want to add to the Library.

5.	Drag the stylesheet from the Navigator to the library.

 Related Topics


To add a tag to a Library

1.	Click File, Library and choose Open to open an existing library, or New to create a new one.

2.	Open a document that contains the tags you want to add to the Library.

3.	Click Format, Manage Tag List.

4.	Click the tab that corresponds to the type of tag you want to add to the Library.

5.	Click the tag you want to add to the Library.

To select multiple tags, click them while holding down the SHIFT key.

6.	Right-click one of the selected tags and choose Copy.

7.	Right-click the Library background and choose Paste.

Tip

·	You can also use the Clipboard to add paragraph tags to a Library: Using the [image] tool, select paragraphs formatted with the tags. Click Edit, Copy, then right-click the Library background and choose Paste.

·	You can also drag tags from the Tags Window into a Library. To use the Tags Window, you need to add it to a menu or toolbar using the Tools, Customize command. For instructions, click Related Topics. The Tags Window is located in the Tools folder in the Customize dialog box.

 Related Topics


To add a table to a Library

1.	Click File, Library and choose Open to open an existing library, or New to create a new one.

2.	Select the entire table or a portion of it.

 How?

3.	Drag the selection to the Library.

Tip

·	Dragging the selection places a copy of it in the Library. To remove the selection from the document and place it in the Library, hold down the SHIFT key while dragging.

 Related Topics


To add selected text to a Library

1.	Click File, Library and choose Open to open an existing library, or New to create a new one.

2.	Select the text you want to add to the Library.

3.	Drag the selection to the Library.

Tips

·	You can also drag text from an open application and place it in the Library as a OLE object.

·	Dragging the selection from a VENTURA document places a copy of it in the Library. To remove the selection from the document and place it in the Library, hold down the SHIFT key while dragging.

 Related Topics


To add a chapter to a Library

1.	Click File, Library and choose Open to open an existing library or New to create a new one.

2.	Open the document containing the chapter you to add to the Library.

3.	Click Tools, Navigator and choose Publication Manager from the list box.

4.	Double-click the document containing chapter you to add to the Library.

5.	Drag the chapter from the Navigator to the library.

 Related Topics


Using library items in a document
To use library items in a document

1.	Open the library.

 How?

2.	Select an item and drag it to the desired location.

To link to a stylesheet or text file in the library, press CTRL + SHIFT while dragging (see Note).

To add a	drag to

master page	the page you want to format or a document in Master Pages view in the Navigator

stylesheet	any page in the active document or a document in the Navigator

tags	a page in the active document (The tag is added to the tag list in the Property Bar)

chapter	a document in the Navigator (see Note)

text or picture file	a page in the active document or a chapter in the Navigator (see Note)

selected text	the page containing the insertion point

table	the page containing the insertion point

OLE object	a page in the active document

Note

·	By linking an item [image] for example, a stylesheet [image] any changes you make to it will be reflected in every document with links to that item. For information on updating linked items in a library, click Related Topics. If others have access to the library, only the first person to open a document with links to an item in the that library can make changes to the item. To better control access to shared libraries use VENTURA's multi-user acess features (see Related Topics).

·	You can link stylesheets and text files to the document from which they were added to the library by dragging them back to the document while holding down the CTRL and SHIFT keys.

·	A text file added to the library from the Navigator or Windows Explorer and dragged onto a page is placed in the base page frame or the selected drawn frame.

·	Externally-referenced files in a chapter that's stored in a library become embedded when you add the chapter to another document. If you want the files to remain external, add the chapter, then remove and re-import the files.

 Related Topics


To update a stylesheet or text file linked to a library

1.	Save the document containing the linked library item you changed.

2.	Open the document you want to update with the changed item.

3.	Open the Navigator (click Tools, Navigator), and choose Publication Manager from the list box.

4.	Right-click the item (stylesheet or text file) you want to update.

5.	Choose Update.

Note

·	When you save a document that uses a stylesheet linked to a library, VENTURA automatically updates the library with changes you made to the stylesheet.

 Related Topics


Embedding files linked to a library

Embedding files (stylesheets or text) linked to a Library, breaks the link between the Library and the document containing the file. After you break the link, changes made to the files in the Library, no longer appear in the document.

1.	Right-click the linked file in the Navigator.

2.	Choose Embed File to embed a text file, or Embed stylesheet to embed a stylesheet.

Note

·	To reconnect the link, you must press CTRL+ SHIFT while dragging the file from the Library into the document.

 Related Topics


Managing libraries


To view the properties of a library item

1.	Select the item.

2.	Right-click, choose Properties.

 Related Topics


To rename items in the Library

1.	Right-click the item you want to rename and choose Properties.

2.	Type a new name in the Name box.

 Related Topics


To remove an item from a library

1.	Select the item.

2.	Right-click, choose Cut.

 Related Topics


To move items from one library to another

1.	Click File, Library.

2.	Select two or more libraries.

3.	Click Open.

4.	Drag the item from the first library to the second.

 Related Topics


To sort items in a library by name, type, date or size

1.	Right-click the library background.

2.	Click Sort.

3.	Choose how you want objects sorted.


To control what types of items display in a library
To control which types of items display in a library

1.	Right-click the library background.

2.	Click Filter.

3.	Enable the check boxes next to the items you want to show in the library and disable those you want to hide.


To change the view in a library

1.	Right-click the library background.

2.	Click View.

3.	Choose an icon size and specify whether you want to display names next to them.

Tip

·	You can change the names assigned to items in a library by right-clicking an item and choosing Properties.


Controlling access to a library


Controlling access to a library

Protect a library from unwanted changes using VENTURA's multi-user access features. The first step is to designate a library as multi-user which automatically restricts access to the file. Then, you choose which individuals will have rights to open and edit the document. Passwords can also be assigned which the users must enter before the library will open in Corel VENTURA.

Once the library is set to multi-user, then users (with the proper rights) can open, edit, and update the library using the check in, check out, and uncheckout commands.

What do you want to do?

Limit library access to specified users

Take away library access rights from a user

Assign or change a user password

Check out and edit a multi-user library

Check in and update a multi-user library

Undo changes made to a library since it was checked out (uncheckout)

 Related Topics


To limit library access to specified users

1.	Right-click inside the library window.

2.	Choose Access Rights from the menu.

3.	When the Access Rights dialog box opens, enable the Multi-user access check box.

4.	Select the users to whom you will grant access to the library. Click Add User, and type a representative name (usually the system name) and password (optional) in the entry boxes. Repeat for additional users.

5.	Enable the Library check box next to each user's name. This will allow them to check the library out, make changes to its contents (add or edit items), and check the library back in. If you don't enable this check box for a user, they will only be able to view the library, but not change it in any way.

Notes

·	The first person to enable the Set Multi-user command is designated the library's administrator. As the administrator, you can give access rights to other users, assign document passwords, and enable and disable the Multi-user command. To give a user administrator rights, enable the Admin check box next to their name.

·	See Related Topics for other procedures on multi-user libraries such as checking in and out library files and changing user passwords.

 Related Topics


To check out and edit a multi-user library

1.	Right-click inside the library window.

2.	Choose Check Out from the menu.

You can now add items to and remove them from the library

Notes

·	If you are unable to check out the library, you may not have been granted access. Ask the library's administrator to change your access rights.

·	Make sure the library has been designated as multi-user or the Check out command will not appear in the right-mouse menu.

·	You can drag items from a library onto a document regardless whether the library is checked in or out.

 Related Topics


To check in and update a multi-user library

1.	Right-click inside the library window.

2.	Choose Check In from the menu.

Any changes made to the library are saved and the library is checked in.

Note

·	When you check in a multi-user library, it becomes read-only which means that you can view the library's contents and drag items from it, but not make any changes.

 Related Topics


To undo changes made to a library since it was checked out

1.	Right-click inside the library window.

2.	Choose Uncheck Out from the menu.

The library is checked back in without any changes being saved. You will still see the changes on screen unless you close the library and reopen it.

Tip

·	Another way of undoing changes is to close the library without checking everything back in. When the warning message appears telling you that the library is still checked out, click No.

 Related Topics


To take away library access rights from a user

1.	Right-click inside the library window.

2.	Choose Access Rights from the menu.

3.	In the Access Rights dialog box, select the user's name you wish to remove from the list.

4.	Click Delete User.

The user no longer has rights to open or modify the library.

Note

·	Only the library's administrator can give or take away rights to a library.

 Related Topics


To assign or change a user password
To assign or change a library password

1.	Right-click inside the library window.

2.	Choose Access Rights from the menu.

3.	Select the person's name and click Change Password.

4.	Type the password both in the New password and Confirm new password boxes.

Notes

·	VENTURA prompts the user to enter the password each time the library is opened. If the password is not provided or entered incorrectly, the library will not display.

·	Anyone with access rights to the library can change their own password.

 Related Topics


Master Pages

Master pages are a component of Corel VENTURA's stylesheets. Just as tags contain the formatting for text and frames, master pages contain the formatting for the pages in your documents. Use master pages to set up headers and footers, repeating frames, page margins, sizes, and orientation. VENTURA creates a single default master page for all new documents automatically. Any document can have many master pages. For documents created in previous versions, VENTURA creates a new master page for every chapter and inserted page.

When you apply formatting to a master page, the formatting is applied to all regular pages based on that master. Formatting that you can apply to master pages include page size and orientation, margins and columns, grid settings and guidelines, headers and footers, page numbering, repeating frames, and fill.

You can apply a new master page to any regular document page in any of the following ways:

·	click Format, Apply Master Page

·	drag its icon over a regular page icon in the Navigator

·	drag a master page from a VENTURA Library into the document window or Navigator to apply it to the current page

For situations where you may want to change only one page element (e.g., a guideline, margin, or header/footer setting), you can override the master page settings, or create a new master page for that instance only.

You can also copy the master pages you want to reuse in future documents to a VENTURA Library, a window where you can store formatting or objects, including entire chapters. Just drag Library objects into the document window whenever you need to reuse them.

Note

·	Although you can import and type text into frames placed on master pages the files don't appear in the Navigator or the Files List.

·	You cannot export frame text on master pages, unless you override the master page by switching to Page Layout view and modifying the frame [image] for example, by resizing it.

 Related Topics


CD-ROM publishing

The large size of some documents typically makes CD-ROM the preferred publishing format. For example, if you want to create a CD title and have CD-ROM-writing equipment, you can use the Corel CD Creator software included with Corel VENTURA to write your documents to disk.

Examples of multimedia publications now available on CD-ROM are books, from the classics to children's storybooks, and database collections containing dictionaries or movie listings, all available on CD-ROM. With VENTURA, it's easy to add multimedia to your documents, since it supports clickable frames (hypertext graphics), AVI (video), and sound files.

 Related Topics


Setting options: View


To enable or disable the preview in the Font lists

1.	Right-click the Font list in the Property Bar or in any dialog box containing a Font list.

2.	Choose Show Font Preview.

 Note

·	Enabling or disabling the font preview in one location [image] for example, the Property Bar [image] enables or disables it in all other locations.


To change the color of guidelines, frame borders, the grid and other screen elements
To change the color of guidelines, frame borders, the grid, and other screen elements

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the View tab.

3.	In the View Colors box, click the color button next to the screen element whose color you want to change.

4.	Click a color

5.	Click OK.

Note

·	To see loose lines (if there are any) you must enable the Loose Lines option under Default View Settings.


To set the threshold for greeking text

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the View tab.

3.	Enter a size in the Greek Text Below box. Any text below that size will be greeked.

4.	Click OK.

Note

·	Greeked text displays as horizontal bands on screen, but prints normally.


To change the dithering scheme used to display colors

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the View tab.

3.	Under View Colors, click the dithering scheme you want to use.

4.	Click OK.

Note

·	The 256 Color Dithering option is only available if your graphics card supports it. Enable this option to optimize the appearance of color pictures on screen. If you are more concerned with how quickly pictures display than you are with their appearance, use the Windows Dither option instead.


To show or hide column guides, generated tags and other items

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the View tab.

3.	Under Default View Settings, enable the check boxes next to the items you want to show, and disable those next to the items you want to hide.

4.	Click OK.

 Tip

·	You can also use the [image] button on the toolbar to hide column guides and other non-printing items such as column guides and frame borders. To redisplay them, however, you must use the View, Frame Borders command, the ¶ button, and the Tools, Options command.


To show or hide frame borders

·	Click View, Frame Borders

 Tip

·	You can also use the [image] button on the toolbar to hide frame borders and non-printing items such as column guides and guidelines. To redisplay them, however, you must use the View, Frame Borders command.


Setting Options: General


To convert straight quotes to typographical quotes when importing text

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable Convert "" & - on Load.

4.	Select one of the preset quote types (curly, German-style or French-style), or enable Custom and type the characters you want to use as quotes in the Text boxes.

5.	Click OK.

Note

·	Enabling Convert "" & - on Load also converts double hyphens in the imported text file to em dashes.

·	Conversion also takes place when opening documents created in previous versions of VENTURA, but not when opening version 7 documents.

Tip

·	Use Type Assist, available in the Tools menu, to convert straight quotes to other types of quotes when you type.


To convert double hyphens to em dashes when importing text

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable Convert "" & - on Load.

4.	Click OK.

Note

·	Enabling Convert "" & - on Load also converts straight quotes (i.e., inch marks) to curly quotes or other types of quotes you specify.

Tip

·	Use Type Assist, available in the Tools menu, to convert double hyphens to em dashes when you type.


To enable or disable tag overriding for the active document

1.	Click Format, Publication.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click Disable Overrides.

Note

·	VENTURA automatically disables overriding when you choose Short/Layout-intensive publications as your working environment. You can't enable overriding in this environment using the Disable Overrides check box. For more information about working environments, click Related Topics.

·	With tag overrides disabled, you cannot switch between Override and Tag mode.

 Related Topics


To substitute other fonts for missing fonts (PANOSE Font Matching)
To substitute other fonts for missing fonts in version 5.0 documents (PANOSE Font Matching)

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab, then clicking the PANOSE Font Matching button.

3.	Enable the Allow Font Matching check box.

4.	Set the other options as required.

Whenever you open a version 5.0 document that uses fonts not installed on your system, a dialog box will appear allowing you to choose the fonts you want to use in place of the missing ones.

Note

·	Once a font substitution is made you must make it permanent by modifying tags so that they use a font installed on your system instead of the substituted font. Thereafter, you can use TrueDoc to address problems created by missing fonts. For more information about TrueDoc, click Related Topics.

·	Missing fonts appear in the Font list with a [image] next to its name followed by the name of the substituted font in brackets. To clear the Font list of missing fonts, make the substitution permanent as described above. Next, choose Publication from the Format menu, then click the Update Fonts button. Assuming you save the document, the next time you open it, you'll no longer see the missing fonts in the Font list.

·	PANOSE Font Matching does not distinguish between Adobe Type 1 and TrueType fonts. If a document uses one type of font (e.g., Type 1) and you don't have that type installed on your system, PANOSE Font Matching will automatically substitute the other type's equivalent font. No notification that the substitution took place is provided. Automatic substitution without notification also takes place for missing fonts in Artistic text and text in imported CDR and CMX files.

 Related Topics


To change the match on missing fonts in version 5.0 and 7 documents (PANOSE Font Matching)

1.	Open a version 5.0 or 7 document.

If the document contains a font that is not installed on your system, the PANOSE Font Matching Exceptions dialog box opens. (See note)

2.	Choose the Missing Font.

3.	Choose a new Substituted font from the list.

4.	Click OK.

5.	PANOSE Font Matching will ask you whether you want to save your changes to the Font Matches Exceptions file; choose the answer that best suits your needs.

Note

·	The PANOSE Font Matching dialog box displays provided you enable the Allow Font Matching option in the dialog box displayed by clicking Tools, Options, General then clicking the PANOSE Font Matching button.

 Related Topics


To build a list of missing font-match preferences (PANOSE Font Matching)

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click PANOSE Font Matching.

4.	Click Exceptions.

5.	Click Add.

6.	Enter the name of the missing font or the font you want to remap.

7.	From the Substituted font list, choose a replacement font.

Notes

·	You can also edit your list of missing font matches to modify or remove a font match preference by clicking Edit or Remove.

·	To accurately map fonts that are the same but spelled differently, edit the list of Alternate Spellings.

 Related Topics


To edit the list of font spellings (PANOSE Font Matching)

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click PANOSE Font Matching.

4.	Click Spellings.

5.	Click Add, Edit, or Remove.

 Related Topics


Setting options: Copy Editor


To set preferences for the Copy Editor

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Copy Editor tab.

3.	Specify the settings you want.

For Help on the settings, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the setting you want information about.

4.	Click OK.

Note

·	In Copy Editor view, the document prints exactly as it appears on screen. If you don't want tag names and markup codes to print, hide them using the Tools, Option command.


Setting options: Save


To make backup copies of documents when you save

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Save tab.

3.	Enable Make Backup on Save.

Note

·	See Related Topics for instructions on how to open a backup copy.

·	If your system software does not fully support the default long file naming convention, see Turning off long file names for Autosave and Backup files to use short file names instead.

 Related Topics


To save documents automatically as you work

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Save tab.

3.	Enable Auto Save Every check box.

4.	In the minutes box, type the interval at which you want VENTURA to save documents.

 Notes

·	The Auto Save option is not supported for multi-user publications.

·	Even with Auto Save enabled, you must still save the document when you finish working on it.

·	When you restart VENTURA after a power failure or some other problem that occurred before you saved your work, VENTURA asks if you would like to see all automatically saved documents so you can recover them.

·	If your system software does not fully support the default long file naming convention, see Turning off long file names for Autosave and Backup files to use short file names instead.

 Related Topics


To open a backup copy of a document

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	In the Look in box, click the drive where the original document is stored.

3.	Double-click the folder where the original document is stored.

4.	Double-click the document, whose name is preceded by "Backup of [name of publication]".

 Note

·	If you have disabled the default long file naming convention, your backup files will have the same name as the originals but with a $VP extension.

 Related Topics


Setting options: Selection


To change the nudge distance

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Type the distance you want in the Nudge boxes.

Note

·	The nudge distance represents the distance a selected object moves when you press one of the arrow keys.


To change the constrain angle

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Selection tab.

3.	In the Constrain angle number box, type the constrain angle you want.

4.	Click OK.

Note

·	The constrain angle represents the increment by which an object rotates or skews when you perform either action with the mouse while pressing the CTRL key.


To set the number actions that can be reversed using the Undo command
To set the number of actions that can be reversed using the Undo command

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Type a value from 1 to 99 in the Undo/Redo Levels box.

Notes

·	The actual number of actions you can undo/redo is equal to the Undo/Redo Level value multiplied by the number of open documents. Thus, if you set the value to 50 and have 5 documents open, you can undo/redo 250 actions.

·	The higher the Undo/Redo Levels setting, the greater the amount of memory VENTURA requires to operate.


To change the snapping sensitivity

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Selection tab.

3.	In the Frame & Graphic Snap boxes, specify the distance from a grid line or guideline a frame or graphic must be before it snaps to it.


To change the frame or graphic selection sensitivity;
To change the frame or graphic selection sensitivity

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Selection tab.

3.	In the Frame Selection boxes, specify the distance from the frame or graphic border the mouse pointer must be before the frame or graphic can be selected.


To specify whether objects snap to guidelines when nudged

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Selection tab.

3.	Enable or disable the Guideline Snap to Nudge option.


To change the offset for duplicated objects

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Selection tab.

3.	Enter the amount of offset in the Duplicate Offset boxes.

When you duplicate a drawn frame or graphic object using the Edit, Duplicate command, VENTURA will offset the duplicate by the amount you specify.


Setting options: Other


To change the gap between pages on screen

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Others tab.

3.	In the boxes under On-Screen Page gap, enter the amount of space you want between pages.

Note

·	The Page Gap settings also set the distance from the edge of pages and the document window.


To set the size of the pasteboard

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Others tab.

3.	In the boxes under Pasteboard/Page gap, enter values to set the size of the pasteboard.


To specify how much the units of measurement change

1.	Click Tools, Units.

2.	In the boxes under Increment Settings enter the amount that you want the unit value to increase or decrease when you click the scroll buttons on the Unit boxes.


Customizing keyboard


To assign an accelerator key to a command

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the command category folder containing the command you want to customize.

4.	Click the command.

5.	Click the Press new shortcut key box.

6.	Press the keyboard combination that you want to assign to the command. If you need to make a correction, press the Backspace key.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL+ALT+1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1,2,3, and 4 keys in succession.

Tip

·	To automatically resolve accelerator key conflicts, enable the Go to conflict on assign option.

Note

·	The following keys or key combinations are system keys and are not valid as part of any accelerator

F1

Alt + F6

Alt + TAB

Alt + ESCAPE

Ctrl + ESCAPE

Ctrl + / ('/' on the numeric keypad is valid)

 Related Topics


To remove an accelerator key from a command

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the command category folder containing the command you want to customize.

4.	Click the command.

5.	In the Current shortcut keys box, select the key combination you want to remove.

6.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


To restore all keyboard assignments to their original settings

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	Click Reset.

 Related Topics


To save a set of customized keyboard assignments

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	Click Save As.

4.	Choose the Accelerator File in which you want to save your assignments.

 Related Topics


To load a set of customized keyboard assignments

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	Click Load.

4.	Choose the Accelerator File you want to load.

 Related Topics


Customizing Menus


To change the order of menus and menu commands

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click the menu or menu command you want to move. Double-click to open a menu or submenu.

4.	Click Move Up or Move Down.

 Related Topics


To add a command to a menu

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the command category folder containing the command you want to add.

4.	Click the command.

5.	In the Menu box, click the menu or submenu to which you want to add the command.

6.	Click Add.

Tip

·	Use the Separator button to add organizational lines to your menus.

 Related Topics


To remove a menu or menu command

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click the menu or menu command you want to remove. Double-click to open a menu or submenu.

4.	Click Remove.

 Related Topics


To rename a menu

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click to select the menu or menu command you want to rename.

4.	Click the selection and type a new name.

Tip

·	You can also rename a menu or command by right-click it and choosing Rename from the popup menu.

 Related Topics


To change a menu command's accelerator key

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click the menu or menu command you want to rename. Double-click to open a menu or submenu.

4.	Click the command's name tag, and insert an ampersand (&) before the letter you want to use as an accelerator.

5.	Remove all unnecessary ampersands.

 Related Topics


To add a new menu

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	Click Add Menu.

4.	Type a name for the new menu.

Tip

·	You can add a submenu to an existing menu by first double-clicking the existing menu.

 Related Topics


To restore the original menu settings

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	Click Reset.

Note

·	You will lose all changes to the menu settings.

 Related Topics


Customizing Toolbars


To move a toolbar

·	Click the border of the toolbar and drag it to its new location.

Press ESC to cancel the movement.

Tip

·	Double-click a toolbar's title or border to dock and undock it.

 Related Topics


To resize a toolbar

1.	Move the cursor to the edge of a floating toolbar.

2.	Drag the edge until the toolbar is the correct size. Press ESC to cancel the movement.

 Related Topics


To display an existing toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the check box next to the toolbar that you want to activate.

 Related Topics


To create a custom toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click New.

3.	Type a name for the new toolbar.

4.	Use the Customize command to add commands buttons to the new toolbar (see Related Topics for instructions).

 Related Topics


To add a button to a toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click Customize.

3.	In the Commands box, click the command category folder containing the command you want to add.

4.	Drag the appropriate command button to the toolbar. Press ESC to cancel the movement.

Tips

·	Click a button to see its description.

·	You can also hold down the CTRL and ALT keys and drag a button to copy it to another toolbar without opening the dialog box.

·	To add space between two toolbar buttons, drag the right-most button slightly farther to the right.

·	You can display text on a button instead of a picture by right-clicking on the button and choosing Properties. You must have the Customize dialog box open to do this.

 Related Topics


To remove a button from a toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click Customize.

3.	Drag the button off the toolbar. Right-click to cancel the movement.

Tip

·	You can also hold down the ALT key and drag a button off a toolbar to delete it without opening the dialog box.

 Related Topics


To rename a toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the toolbar that you want to rename.

3.	Click the toolbar's name tag.

4.	Type the new name.

 Related Topics


To move a toolbar button

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click Customize.

3.	Drag the button to another toolbar, or to another spot on the same toolbar. Press ESC to cancel the movement.

Tips

·	To add space between two toolbar buttons, drag the right-most button slightly farther to the right.

·	Hold down the ALT key and drag a button to move it without opening the Customize dialog box.

·	To copy a button, hold down the ALT and CTRL keys.

 Related Topics


To delete a custom toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the custom toolbar that you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

Note

·	You cannot delete a built-in toolbar.

 Related Topics


To display text in a button instead of a picture
To display text in a button rather than an icon

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click Customize.

3.	Right-click the button, then click Properties.

4.	Click Show Text. If you like, you can change the default text that appears by typing in the Edit Button Text box.

 Related Topics


To restore the original configuration of a built-in toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the built-in toolbar that you want to reset.

3.	Click Reset.

 Related Topics


Customizing the Status Bar


To move the Status Bar to the top or bottom of the VENTURA window

1.	Right-click the Status Bar and choose Position.

2.	Click Top or Bottom.

Tip

·	You can also move the Status Bar by double-clicking it.

 Related Topics


To change what the Status Bar displays

1.	Right-click the Status Bar and choose Customize.

2.	From the Command Categories list, click Status Bar.

3.	Do one of the following:

·	To add a field of status information, drag the field from the Buttons area of the Customize dialog box over the Status Bar.

·	To remove a field of status information, drag it from the Status Bar onto the document window.

4.	Click OK.

Tips

·	You can place any toolbar button or control on the Status Bar.

·	To add space between two fields, drag the right-most field slightly farther to the right. You can also move the fields without opening the Customize dialog box by holding down the ALT key as you drag.

 Related Topics


To change the height of the Status Bar

1.	Right-click the Status Bar and choose Size.

2.	Click Single Height or Double Height.

Tip

·	You can also change the height of the Status Bar by dragging the top or bottom border.

 Related Topics


To reset the Status Bar to its original configuration

·	Right-click the Status Bar and choose Reset Items.

 Related Topics


Customizing Property Bars


To customize a Property Bar

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click the Toolbars tab.

3.	Click the Property Bar you want to change from the Property Bars list.

4.	Do any of the following:

·	To add a button, click the folder in the Command Categories box containing the command button that you want to add. Then, drag the command button to the Property Bar. Press ESC to cancel the movement.

·	To remove a button, hold down the ALT key and drag the control or button onto the document window.

·	To move a button or control to another spot on the Property Bar or another toolbar, hold down the CTRL key and drag to the desired location. Press ESC to cancel the movement.

Tips

·	To add space between two buttons or controls, drag the right-most button or control slightly farther to the right.

 Related Topics


To reset the Property bars to its original configuration
To reset the Property Bar to its original configuration

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click Property Bars.

3.	Click Reset.

4.	Click OK to confirm that you want to reset the Property Bar.

5.	Click OK to close the Toolbars dialog box.

 Related Topics


Configuration Manager


Using the Corel VENTURA Configuration Manager

The VENTURA Configuration Manager sets up your working environment to suit the types of projects you work on most. When you start VENTURA for the first time, the Configuration Manager appears with a choice of three preset environments: one for creating short, design-intensive documents, another for producing long, structured documents and a third for crafting documents that combine the characteristics of the other two. Each environment is optimized to give you quick access to the tools and the formatting mode you'll use most, as well as an appropriately-sized pasteboard.

You can modify the preset environments by customizing the menus, toolbars and shortcut key assignments or create your own environments. Once you've selected an environment, you can switch to another by ending the current session and restarting the Configuration Manager.

Regardless which environment you are running, you always have access to all the tools and features available in VENTURA, including the formatting modes.

What do you want to do

Customize the preset working environments

Create a new working environment

Switch between working environments


To customize the preset working environments

1.	Start the Configuration Manager, then select the environment you want to customize.

 How?

2.	Customize the menus, toolbars and keyboard shortcuts the way you want. (See Related Topics for instructions.)

3.	Exit then restart VENTURA to save the changes.

 Related Topics


To create a new working environment

1.	Start the Configuration Manager, then select User-defined.

 How?

2.	Customize the menus, toolbars and keyboard shortcuts the way you want. (See Related Topics for instructions.)

3.	Exit then restart VENTURA to save the changes.

Notes

·	To create additional environments, add a separate folder for each environment under the COREL\VENTURA\UICONFIG folder. Then, perform the above steps to set up each environment. The next time you run the Configuration Manager, you'll see the new environments listed with the others

·	For each new environment you create, you can include a picture and some descriptive text which will appear in the Configuration Manager. Use Corel PHOTO-PAINT or other bitmap editor to create the picture and save it under the name UIBMP.BMP in the corresponding folder under \UICONFIG. The size of the picture is limited to 130 x 120 pixels. To add some descriptive text, copy an existing Uispec.ini file from a folder under \UICONFIG to the folder containing the new environment you created. Open the file in a text editor such as Windows NotePad. After LongText=, type the text you appear when you select the environment. After ShortText=, type the text you want to appear in the list box in the Configuration Manager.

 Related Topics


To switch between working environments

1.	If VENTURA is open, click File, Exit to end the current session.

2.	Click the Start button, then point to Programs.

3.	Point to Corel VENTURA, then click Ventura Configuration Manager.

4.	Follow the instructions on the screen.

Notes

·	If Corel VENTURA doesn't appear on the Programs menu, click the Start button, then point to Find. Click Files Or Folders. Use the Find dialog box to locate the program file.

 Related Topics


To add or remove applications from the Corel Application Launcher

The Corel Application Launcher is a toolbar button [image] you can use to launch Corel applications, Corel SCRIPT Executables, and applications from other vendors. The list of applications on the Application Launcher is determined at the time of installation.

You can add or delete other applications by editing the CORELAPP.INI which is located in the \COREL\CONFIG folder. Use a text editor such as the Windows NotePad or the Corel SCRIPT Editor to open the file, then locate the [Applications] section.

To add an application, type its name as you want it to appear on the Application Launcher drop-down menu followed by an equals sign (=) and the path to the folder where the application is located and the application's executable file name. Using Corel PHOTO-PAINT as an example, the entry should look like this:

[Applications]
Corel PHOTO-PAINT = C:\COREL\PROGRAMS\CORELPNT.EXE

To remove an application from the Application Launcher, delete its entry in the [Applications] section.

Note

·	If the Corel Application Launcher is not available on a toolbar in the Corel SCRIPT Editor, click Tools, Customize, Toolbars tab to add the Application Launcher to the Toolbar.

 Related Topics


Creating backup copies of your files

Corel VENTURA can create and update a copy of your files each time you save them to disk. If a file becomes corrupted because of glitches in the system, you always have a saved version of the file on your system.

To create backup copies of your files

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Save tab.

3.	In the File Saves section, enable the Make Backup On Save check box.

 Note

·	Multi-user publications are only backed up when you check in the entire publication, or when you initially set it as a multi-user publication.

·	If your system software does not fully support the default long file naming convention, see Turning off long file names for Autosave and Backup files to use short file names instead.


Saving your images automatically

You can have Corel WEB.PhotoPaint perform a save or a checkpoint feature so that is performed automatically at regular intervals. Save stores the image file to disk and overwrites the previously saved version. Checkpoint temporarily saves the image at its current state, so that you can return to this image if you are not pleased with the changes you have applied to it since. Checkpoint does not overwrite the saved version of the image.

To save your images automatically

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Save tab.

3.	In the File Saves section, enable the Auto-Save Every check box.

4.	Type the time interval in the Minutes box.


Turning off long file names for Autosave and Backup files

If your system cannot deal properly with long file names, especially over a network, you should disable long file naming for Autosave and Backup files.

To turn off long file names

To turn off long file names, you will need to edit the ventura.ini file in your Ventura directory. Change the value of the OptionsSaveUseLFN entry in the [settings] section from 1 to 0.

When set to 0, backups will be given the same name as their originals, but with a $VP extension. Autosaves will also have unique short file names in the system temp directory.


Publishing portable electronic documents

Creating and using portable document files

You can create a portable document file (.PDF) by printing your publication to an Novell Envoy or Adobe Acrobat file instead of a printer. Once it's in a portable format, the publication can be read using a reader utility that can be distributed free to users. And the portable document can be read on any system, regardless of whether it has the application, fonts, and images used to create the original document.

Note: PDF files require further processing using Adobe Acrobat Exchange or Adobe Acrobat Distiller (not included with VENTURA), before the document can be viewed.

Readers can't edit portable document files, but they can annotate some files, and they can use hypertext links and search facilities that you've included in them. Tables of contents and indexes are typically displayed in windows that are separate from the main document. When a reader clicks a chapter name or topic, they are instantly transported to the appropriate place in the publication. Cross-references also become hypertext links that let users jump from place to place in the document.

Page-based vs. Window-based portable document files

Portable document files come in two forms [image] page-based and window-based. If your publication is to be distributed electronically, then printed, you will want to take a page-based approach. Users can still read the file on a computer screen, provided they are willing to scroll through it, but they can also print a document identical to the original, again without needing the application or any of the components used to create it, and without the line endings being altered.

If you intend your publication to be viewed on a computer screen rather than on the printed page, then a window-based portable document file is the way to go. Pages, called topics, are typically shorter in this format, allowing users to view them in their entirety on a single screen.

Corel VENTURA and portable document files

Whether you choose a page-based or windows-based approach for your portable document files, Corel VENTURA has the tool you need for the job.

You can create page-based portable document files using Novell's Envoy, which is included with VENTURA. If you're already an Adobe Acrobat user, VENTURA provides full support for this product as well.

 Related Topics


Publishing portable electronic documents


To publish a document to Envoy

1.	If the document contains a table of contents, index or cross-references, right-click it's name in the Navigator, then choose Update Publication.

Or, click the [image] button in the toolbar.

2.	Enable the "Will be published to Envoy or Acrobat?" check box.

3.	Click File, Publish as Envoy.

4.	Enter the filename, and browse to find the appropriate drive and directory.

VENTURA will create an Envoy document and start the Envoy viewer (if it's installed).

Note

•	Publishing a document that uses a layout style other than Full Page to Envoy produces poor results. The non-Full Page layouts also affect hyperlinks in the Envoy document, causing them to jump to the wrong destination. To change the layout style, use the Format, Publication command.

•	You can also create an Envoy document by clicking File, Print and choosing Envoy 7 Driver from the Name box. Use this method if you need to use the Print Options dialog box to resize the VENTURA document for more comfortable viewing on screen. To convert the table of contents, index and cross-references in the VENTURA document to Envoy hyperlinks, enable the Generate Hyperlinks option in the Print dialog box.

•	Hidden text in the VENTURA document appears as a Note icon in the Envoy document. Clicking the icon displays the hidden text. If you don't want the notes to appear in the Envoy document, delete the hidden text.

•	If the document you are publishing to Envoy contains embedded TrueDoc fonts, Envoy will substitute another font, if the original font is missing from your system. The font Envoy substitutes may be a poor match for the missing font.

 Related Topics


To publish a document to Adobe Acrobat

1.	If the document contains a table of contents, index or cross-references, right-click it's name in the Navigator, then choose Update Publication.

Or, click the [image] button in the toolbar.

2.	Enable the "Will be published to Envoy or Acrobat?" check box.

3.	Click File, Publish as Adobe Acrobat.

4.	Enter a filename, and browse to find the appropriate drive and directory.

VENTURA creates a PostScript file with a PRN extension that you can process into an Adobe Acrobat portable document using Acrobat Distiller (not included with VENTURA).

5.	Enable the Include Notes check box if the document contains hidden text which you want to appear in the Acrobat document.

Note

•	Creating files for processing into an Envoy document requires a PostScript printer driver. If the document you are converting contains color and you want the colors to appear in the Acrobat document, use a driver for a color printer such as the QMS Color Script or one of the Tektronix models. (Drivers for these printers come with Windows).

•	Publishing a document that uses a layout style other than Full Page to Abobe Acrobat produces poor results. The non-Full Page layouts also affect hyperlinks in the Acrobat document, causing them to jump to the wrong destination. To change the layout style, use the Format, Publication command.

•	You can also create an Adobe Acrobat document by using the File, Print command to print it to a PostScript disk file. Use this method if you need to use the Print Options dialog box to resize the VENTURA document for more comfortable viewing on screen. To convert the table of contents, index and cross-references in the VENTURA document to Acrobat hyperlinks, enable the Generate Hyperlinks option in the Print dialog box.

 Related Topics


Preparing a project for printing

Choose from any of the overview topics listed below to learn more about getting a project ready for printing.

What do you want to do?

Where to start

Output

Page layout and printing

Paper and printing

Printing text and pictures

Scanning

Printing bitmaps

Color printing

Color trapping

Ensuring predictable color when printing

PostScript

 Related Topics


Preparing documents for service bureaus

Choose from any of the overview topics listed below to learn more about getting a project ready for a service bureau.

What do you want to do?

Service bureaus and printing shops

Sending your print job to a service bureau

Ordering proofs

What happens at your service bureau

Sending your print job to a printing shop

What happens at your printing shop

Checklist for service bureaus and printing shops

 Related Topics


Where to start

Plan and prepare your work

Whether you are preparing an existing document for output, or creating a new one from scratch, there are questions to ask and considerations to bear in mind about the printing process at the outset.

Click Related Topics for an item-by-item discussion of these considerations and a handy checklist of factors to consider when talking to your service bureau and printing shop representatives.

When you need a service bureau

When you want a finished document with a higher quality and resolution than you can get with a desktop laser printer, you'll need to send your work to a commercial printer. If you want the best possible quality, the printer will need to create printing plates from film negatives of your documents. Depending on the type of printing you have ordered, there must be negatives containing the text and color separations of every page. While most commercial printers can produce everything they need right from a disk containing a Corel VENTURA publication, service bureaus specialize in producing these items, and you may find it faster and cheaper to have them do the work.

Service bureaus are also required if you are creating a document that will be produced by several different commercial printers. For example, if you've created an article that will run in four different magazines, each magazine may require separate artwork.

Corel VENTURA offers a wide variety of features you can use to take full advantage of the options offered by most service bureaus. For example, if you want a service bureau to create plates for color printing, Corel VENTURA can create an electronic file of the color separations. Or, you can use Corel VENTURA and Corel PHOTO-PAINT to crop and mask your pictures.

Corel VENTURA makes it easy and convenient for you to send your documents to a service bureau for production.

Work closely with your service providers

From the outset of your project, and throughout its development, consult with the service bureau and printing shop representatives who will be handling your print job. Their expertise is essential to the success of your project.

While some service bureaus offer specialized publishing services such as image scanning, file conversion, or page layout, most produce the items listed below:

•	film separations

•	transparencies

•	slides

•	color proofs

•	camera-ready art work and page layouts

Tip

•	By taking advantage of the full power of Corel VENTURA, along with other Corel products (such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT), and by carefully planning your documentation projects, you should be able to significantly reduce the cost of having a service bureau prepare your work.

 Related Topics


Finding the right service bureau

With the number of service bureaus operating in today's market, it's important to make sure you find the right one. Not all service bureaus have the same equipment or offer the same level of service. The following checklist should help you get the best results.

To get the best idea of the range of services offered, it's a good idea to visit several service bureaus and talk to the specialists there. Explain what you're doing, what software you are using (e.g., Corel VENTURA), and what results you expect. Ask to see some samples of their work, particularly any that are similar to your document. Also, pick up a form, usually called an output form, to complete ahead of time. This form describes the makeup of your document and will give you an indication of what each service bureau will require.

Since you will be working closely with the service bureau, you should be comfortable with their level of service and professionalism. You have the final say on whether their work meets your expectations, and you must feel confident that you can request changes and alterations.

Get referrals from your commercial printer

Your commercial printer may be able to refer you to a good service bureau. If you have a specific commercial printer you plan to use, you should find out if there are any service bureaus they recommend or prefer. Keep in mind that some commercial printers have working relationships with certain service bureaus, so always shop around to ensure you are getting the best price.

The price quoted by a service bureau often reflects the level and quality of service they provide. By getting a price quote from each service bureau, you should develop a feel for the businesses with the best balance between cost and quality.

Make sure the service bureau can perform the services you require. While this sounds obvious, it's easy to become confused by different terminology and jargon. If you don't understand exactly what's being offered, ask for a further explanation. Some service bureaus may use different terms to describe the same service.

You should also examine the service bureau's font library to make sure they can reproduce the fonts included in your document. If they don't have all the fonts, find out how they plan to handle any replacements.

Communication [image] the most important factor

The best way to find the right service bureau is through clear communication. Make sure the service bureau understands exactly what you require and that you understand what services are being offered. It's important to let the service bureau know the results you expect and require.

The service bureau will also need to know some very specific information about the makeup of your document. If you don't give them complete and correct information, you may run into problems later on. Fortunately, with Corel VENTURA, you can easily find all the information any service bureau will need to produce your work.

Most service bureaus will require you to complete an output form, listing all the information they need to produce your work. You should complete this form ahead of time and check it against your document before returning it. The following section explains the most important points the service bureau will need to know.

Tip

•	With Corel VENTURA, you can print a Job Information Sheet listing information such as page size and layout, fonts used, number of pages, etc. Since many of these items need to be entered on the output form, it's a good idea to print the information sheet ahead of time.


Output

What are the choices?

There are several different methods for producing your final work:

•	Print everything on a laser printer. Depending on the printer (high resolution, color) the final product can look quite good. However, this option is impractical for more than a few copies. If more copies are needed, some photocopiers are capable of quality output. This might be a good choice for an internal report or a small newsletter. This method is inappropriate if you require high-quality color output (e.g., color photographs or fine art), special paper stock (e.g., different sizes or glossy paper), or if you want "professional" output.

•	Create camera-ready art on a laser printer and send it directly to a printing shop. If you have a PostScript laser printer, and do not require complicated color work, you may be able to produce material that a printing shop can photograph, make printing plates from, and print. This method may be appropriate for a small newspaper. This method is inappropriate if you require high-quality color output (e.g., color photographs or fine art).

•	Send everything on disk to a service bureau. A service bureau will produce a high-resolution output on an imagesetter which is then used to produce printing plates. The only limits here are the service bureau's facilities and your budget.

When deciding which method to use, you will have to consider the desired quality of your output and the size of the job. Whatever you choose, make sure you use the appropriate settings (e.g., halftone screens, color separations).

Quality

What level of quality do you need? Would output from a desktop color printer be sufficient? Or do you need to go to press? Note that the higher the output device's resolution (dpi), the better the images and colors will be reproduced.

Job size

Job size should also be considered. How many pages and how many copies are involved? A large volume may dictate going to press.

 Related Topics


Page layout and printing

Size

What size will the final product be? Set up your document to those dimensions and work in "actual size" to avoid the problems inherent to resizing images (e.g., bitmap reproduction suffers when bitmaps are enlarged). If you wish to print the same material at different sizes, however, you may resize your image when you print.

Proper planning and layout of your work will also save on expensive film. Remember that you can define a custom page to accommodate your job if it will be of non-standard dimensions.

The paper size and the working page size will not necessarily be the same. For instance, you can fit two pages that are 8.5 by 11 inches on one 11 by 17-inch piece of paper.

Layout

Are you creating greeting cards, handbooks, a full-fledged book? There are ready-made layout styles available in the Print Options dialog box. Choose from Full Page, Book, Booklet, Tent-Card, Side-Fold Card, Top-Fold Card, and Tri-Fold Card or you can create your own custom styles.

If you choose a layout style before you open the Print Options dialog box (i.e., using Page Setup) the appropriate layout style is automatically selected in the Print Options dialog box. If you change the layout style (with the exception of Full Page) your work will not print correctly.

Orientation

What page orientation best accommodates your work? Portrait (vertical) or landscape (horizontal)? The orientation you choose when you print should match the orientation of the document.

Bleed

Must certain areas of your document extend to the edge of the final page? If so, you must allow for a "bleed," that is, ensure your document "overflows" the edge of your final page. To accomplish this you must print your work on paper that is larger than the paper size you ultimately want. This paper is then trimmed to the appropriate size. A bleed of .125 to .25 inches is usually sufficient. Any object extending beyond that needlessly uses up memory and may cause problems when you are printing more than one final page on a single sheet of paper.

Note

•	Don't use the feature that automatically inserts a blank page at the end of chapters that end on the same side (left or right) as the next chapter. Each blank page requires a sheet of film that you'll be charged for. If blank pages are needed, the printer will insert them after the film has been imaged. The Insert Blank Pages setting in the Publications Property dialog box (Format menu) controls whether VENTURA adds blank pages.


Paper and printing

Stock

Will you be using coated or uncoated paper? Matte or glossy coated? Newsprint? Textured paper? Recycled paper?

The paper stock you choose will significantly affect the quality of your final product. It will also determine your halftone screen settings and dictate the maximum amount of ink, or total area coverage (TAC), you can use to create your process colors.

Be sure to talk to your service bureau and printing shop reps.

Colored paper

Will you be using white or colored paper? The colors in your document will look different against a colored background. You must take this into consideration.


Printing text and pictures

Fonts

Make sure the typefaces and point sizes you choose are suitable for the paper stock you will be printing on. For example, delicate typefaces or small point sizes may not reproduce well on textured papers, or they may be difficult to read on colored or speckled paper.

Number of colors

Pay attention to the number of colors used, especially if you are importing clipart. Make sure you only use the colors you have chosen (i.e., process or spot).

Duotones, Tritones and Quadtones

Duotones, tritones and quadtones, are grayscale bitmaps that have been converted into 2, 3, or 4 spot color images. If you have any of these in your document and you're printing color separations, consult your service bureau for appropriate screen angles and frequencies for the spot colors. VENTURA uses the same angles and frequences for all the colors and as a result, the image may not print the way you want.

Fills

Use fills judiciously; avoid complex fills (fountain, texture, PostScript, etc.) on small objects that aren't big enough to warrant intricate details. If you are using a Level 1 PostScript device avoid complex fills with complex outlines in text objects. When you set the PostScript options you can enable tests that will warn you if there are any potential problems with your fills.

If you use fountain fills, be aware that too many steps may cause errors or slow down printing, and too few steps may cause banding (the appearance of strips across a fountain fill). You can optimize your fountain fills when you set the PostScript options.

Nodes

Keep the number of nodes per object to a minimum, especially when using a Level 1 PostScript device. When you set the PostScript options you can enable tests that will warn you if there are any potential problems with your objects.

Lean and clean

Keep file size manageable by deleting all unnecessary elements. Get rid of redundant objects hidden behind other objects, and any leftover objects outside the working page.


Scanning

If you have a scanner you can scan directly from Corel VENTURA, retouch your image in Corel PHOTO-PAINT if need be, and then bring it into Corel VENTURA or any other application.

Quality

The end result will depend as much on the quality of the scanner as on the quality of the image being scanned. Corel PHOTO-PAINT can be used to enhance the image, but it is always a good idea to start with a high-quality image (i.e., good contrast, etc.).

Dynamic range

If you are preparing a full-color job, note that drum scanners offer a wider dynamic range (that is, range of possible color values) than most flatbed scanners. On the other hand, the dynamic range of a flatbed scanner should be sufficient for most lower-budget jobs.

Size

Scan according to the size of the final output. A small scan will not maintain its integrity if enlarged too extensively. Conversely, a scan that is needlessly large will make for huge files and slow down processing.

Resolution

Scan at a resolution related to the final output. As a rule of thumb, the scanning resolution, measured in dots per inch (dpi), should be twice the resolution of the halftone screen used for output, measured in lines per inch (lpi). For example, if you will be printing with a 150 lpi screen, set the scanning resolution to 300 dpi. Scanning at a higher resolution may be required to pick up enough detail in a poor original or when you want to enlarge the original.

OPI

Corel now offers Open Prepress Interface (OPI) support. Here's how it works: Your service bureau professionally scans your images on a high-end scanner. They keep the high-resolution version of the scans and give you low-resolution equivalents. You import the low resolution images into your documents, using them "for position only." Working with low resolution images keeps your document size smaller and speeds up screen redrawing time. When you send your document back to the service bureau for final imaging to film, your high resolution files are automatically substituted.

Note

•	You must import low resolution images correctly or they will not be replaced at print time

•	You can only scale, crop, and rotate low resolution images. You can not use any other effects.

 Related Topics


Printing bitmaps

Size

The larger the bitmap, the more RAM it will use and the larger the file will be. Aim to keep your bitmaps small.

Resolution

Will your work of art be silk-screened onto a T-shirt? Or are you producing a coffee table art book? A high resolution would be wasted on the former, but is definitely called for in the case of the latter.

 Related Topics


Color printing

How many colors? Process color versus spot color

The number of colors you plan to use will be the main factor in deciding whether to use process colors or spot colors.

Process color

Does your project call for full color (e.g., does it contain scans of color photographs)? If so, you will need to use process colors, which simulate virtually any color using only the four ink colors [image] cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (known as CMYK).

Spot color

Does your project make use of only one, two or three colors (including black)? Then you'll want to use spot colors, such as those offered by PANTONE. Spot color uses a different ink for each color. If your budget is limited:

•	Obtain a two-color look by printing on colored stock and using only one spot color.

•	Use tints (percentages) of spot colors to create shadows or highlights, thus giving the impression of a broader color range.

Both

Your project can call for both spot and process colors. For example, a marketing brochure may require the use of a spot color for the corporate color and the use of process color to reproduce scans of photographs. Remember, though, that the greater the number of colors used, the more film, plates and ink will be required, which adds to the cost of the job.

A word about palettes

With Corel VENTURA, you can work on different elements of your document from different palettes and different color models. Ultimately however, all colors must be printed with process and spot color inks. Colors defined in the RGB or HSB models are translated automatically into CMYK (process) values. As for spot colors, Corel VENTURA allows you to convert them to CMYK at printing time if that's what you require.

 Related Topics


Color trapping

What is it for?

Trapping is necessary to compensate for poor color registration, which occurs when color separations are misaligned, leaving unsightly white slivers between adjoining colors. Your Corel VENTURA package includes auto-trapping features to help with this process and eliminate some of these problems.

How is it done?

Trapping is accomplished by intentionally overlapping colors. When printing there are three ways to create color trapping. You can

•	"overprint" individual objects in the application you are working in

•	use Auto-spreading (automatic color trapping) on the Separations page in the Print Options dialog box. Auto-spreading creates trap by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

•	use Advanced Settings on the Separations page in the Print Options dialog box

When is trapping needed?

Trapping is necessary if two colors touch.

When is trapping not needed?

You don't have to worry about trapping if

•	your service bureau creates color trapping by using a specialized trapping program

•	there are no adjoining or overlapping objects in your document

Tip

•	To avoid problems with trapping, use Corel VENTURA's overprinting features. For more information about overprinting, see Working with Illustrations in the Corel VENTURA Paper and Electronic Publishing Guide. You can discuss trapping and overprinting options with your service bureau to find out which methods they recommend.

 Related Topics


Ensuring predictable color when printing

Color management

Before you embark on any project where the finished product is to be a color print of some sort, it is essential that you ensure accurate and consistent color rendition from device to device. All components of your publishing system [image] scanner, monitor, and printer [image] must exchange color data in a manner that gives a predictable end result. This is accomplished by calibrating your various devices and establishing a System Profile. This is done from the Corel Color Manager, using the Corel Color Manager Wizard. You can run the Color Manager Wizard at any time or select a color profile from the Tools menu.

Color correction

For the colors on your screen to approximate as closely as possible the colors as they will appear in print, you must enable the Color Correction facilities. These options will call the chosen System Profile to ensure predictable color rendering.

 Related Topics


PostScript

What is it?

PostScript is a page description language used to send instructions to a PostScript printing device about how to print each page. All the objects in a print job (e.g., curves and fills) are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printer uses to produce your work.

PostScript is not the only method for sending a printer instructions, and some printers are not compatible with PostScript; however, there are several functions that are unavailable if you are not using the PostScript printer language. For example, without PostScript, you cannot adjust color separations and halftone screens.

There are two levels of PostScript available. PostScript level 2 is the most recent version of PostScript and it is more powerful than its predecessor, PostScript level 1.

Tip: When purchasing a printer or choosing a service bureau you should find out which type of PostScript you will be using. Where you have a choice, choose level 2.

Limitations of PostScript level 1

There are certain problems that may arise when you are using PostScript level 1 that have been largely eliminated in level 2.

•	To create curves, a PostScript device prints a series of short straight lines at varying angles. Each of these lines is a segment. Also, any straight line between two nodes is a segment. Level 1 devices can't print objects with more than 1,500 segments. This limits the allowable number of nodes in any object to approximately 500.

•	If you use a complex fill (e.g., a texture fill or a PostScript fill) in an object, the allowable number of nodes is reduced to approximately 300.

•	If you fill a text object with a texture fill then a level 1 PostScript may not be able to print it.

•	If you use a texture fill in an object with any subpaths (e.g., a donut made from a circle within a circle), a level 1 PostScript device will not be able to print it.

There are several ways around these limitations.

•	Wherever possible, break complex objects up into several less complex objects. This may not be possible if you are using complicated line attributes or complex fills.

•	Use the PostScript features designed to reduce complexity (click How To for a list of topics on how to use these features).

Note

•	If you are printing to a level 1 PostScript device, you should try to avoid including any of the problematic objects mentioned above in your design.


Service bureaus and printing shops

Who's who

If your job will be printed on a commercial press, you will most likely be dealing with a service bureau and a printing shop. These can be separate or affiliated businesses. Some larger establishments may offer both services under one roof.

The service bureau will take your file and image it onto film. The printing shop will take either film from a service bureau (or camera ready output that you've created yourself), make printing plates from it, and print your job.

Talk to them

Talk to your service providers about these issues discussed in these topics. They will point out special considerations to bear in mind given the nature of your job.

 Related Topics


Sending your print job to a service bureau

Proof your work in-house

Before sending the final files to your service bureau, verify all elements of your document on your in-house equipment. Keep in mind that desktop printers do not allow you to check halftone screens and trapping.

Prepare the soft copy

Your files can be sent by disk, modem, or removable hard disk cartridge. Check with your service bureau to find out what they are equipped to handle. Service bureaus will need either .PRN or .EPS files.

PRN and EPS files

Corel VENTURA allows you to exercise full control over prepress settings and save the document and color separation instructions in a .PRN file. This print file will be sent directly to an output device by your service bureau.

Some service bureaus may accept .EPS files. These Encapsulated PostScript files can be taken into other programs by the service bureau and handled from there.

Caution!  Be sure to review your document thoroughly before creating the PRN file and always provide a final printout of your work to the service bureau, even if it's only a black and white representation. The printout will help them identify and assess what they're working with. Your service bureau will not be able to verify or fix a .PRN file [image] any mistakes in your document will be apparent only on output, which could be costly.

Also, don't use the feature that automatically inserts a blank page at the end of chapters that end on the same side (left or right) as the next chapter. Each blank page requires a sheet of film that you'll be charged for. If blank pages are needed, the printer will insert them after the film has been imaged. The Insert Blank Pages setting in the Publications Property dialog box (Format menu) controls whether VENTURA adds blank pages.

Include print job information

If you are sending .PRN files, include all the prepress settings that you have specified. This can be done automatically from the Options page in the Print Options dialog box. If you have any doubts, check with your service bureau reps. They usually have an order form that you can use.

 Related Topics


Ordering proofs

Determine which type of proof you will use

Time, cost, and quality are all factors to consider when you are deciding on a proofing method. Discuss your project with your service bureau reps. They will help you choose the most appropriate proofing method.

There are three categories of color proofs to choose from: digital proofs, off-press proofs, and press proofs.

Digital proofs

This category includes proofs generated from laser, thermal wax, ink-jet, phase-change, and dye sublimation printers. Data is imaged directly from your file onto paper. This method is fast and economical, but it is not usually accepted by printing shops as being a good representation of what they are expected to match because the proof is not made from the film that will be used to make the printing plates.

Keep in mind:

•	Digital proofs cannot reproduce press conditions such as screen frequencies and angles, dot gain, etc.

•	Not all desktop printers are PostScript compatible.

•	Not all printers can reproduce spot colors.

•	Dye sublimation printers are especially well-suited to proofing scans of photographs.

Off-press proofs

These are made from the film separations that will ultimately be used to make the printing plates. This category includes blueprints, overlay proofs (e.g., Color Key) and laminate proofs (e.g., Cromalin, Matchprint, Agfaproof).

Note: Laminate proofs are more accurate and more expensive than overlay proofs. Blueprints are used to check 'fit' and to proof for imperfections such as broken letters.

Press proofs

Because press proofs are produced using the very plates, inks, and paper that will be used for the final print, they are the most accurate and also the most expensive. They are generally reserved for high-end projects.

Review and approve the proofs

When you receive the proofs, review them carefully. Adjustments or corrections may be in order. You may have to go through more than one proofing cycle. When you arrive at a satisfactory proof, sign it off.

Turn the approved proofs over to the printing shop

These will be considered "contract proofs," which means that this is the output the press operators will strive to match.

 Related Topics


What happens at your service bureau

Your .PRN files will go through a RIP

The service bureau will process each .PRN file through a Raster Image Processor (RIP) where your file's PostScript instructions will be rasterized.

Your rasterized files will go to an imagesetter

Your rasterized files will be sent to an imagesetter to produce the film separations which in turn will be developed in a film processor.

Film proofs can be generated

The service bureau will provide you with blueprints, overlay proofs, or laminate proofs made from your film, depending on your preference and budget. Cost varies: inquire! Depending on the complexity of your project, the level of quality you require, and the expertise of the service bureau staff, you may be able to sign off immediately on the first proofs or you may need to go through a few more iterations before approving final proofs.

 Related Topics


Sending your print job to a printing shop

Sending film to the printing shop

If you are using a service bureau, they will send the film to the printing shop or to you. Either way, make sure that the printing shop has proofs of the final product and instructions about the print job (e.g., number of copies, type and size of paper). You must also make sure that the service bureau provides your film in the form that the printing shop wants (i.e., positive or negative film, emulsion up or down, etc.)

Sending camera-ready art to the printing shop

If you are producing paper output for the printing shop to photograph, you must make sure that you send them output they can use. For example, if you make a mistake setting halftone screen frequencies, the printing shop may not be able to print any of your photographs. Talk to the printing shop before you send your output. When you send your camera-ready art, include instructions about the print job (e.g., number of copies, type and size of paper).

 Related Topics


What happens at your printing shop

Your film or camera-ready art will be used to make printing plates

The final, approved film separations or camera-ready art are made into printing plates. These are mounted on the press, and your printing job begins.

Your approved proofs will be used to regulate the press

The press operators set up and adjust the press so that the printed output matches as closely as possible your contract proofs.

You may be called upon for press proofing

Where color quality and accuracy is crucial (such as in reproducing works of fine art), you may be asked to be present at the printing shop when your job is run to approve any color adjustments that may need to be made.

 Related Topics


Checklist for service bureaus and printing shops
Checklist (service bureaus and printing shops)

 Related Topics


Specifying what to print


To print the current page, chapter, or publication

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	In the Print range box, specify what you would like printed.

3.	In the Number of Copies box, specify how many copies to print.

4.	To choose settings for your print job such as page positioning and layout, click Options and Preview and choose settings from the menus and three tabs of the Print Options dialog box. Or, if you've previously created a print style with the options you want for this job, select it from the Print Style list box (See Related Topics).

Tips

·	If you plan to print multiple copies, consider using the Collate option, which prints one full set of the selected pages before going back and printing the second full set.

·	If CorelMEMOs appear in your document and you want them printed on the pages in which they appear, enable the Print CorelMemos check box.

 Related Topics


To print a range of pages or chapters

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose Chapter or Pages as the Print Range

3.	Type the page or chapter numbers to print in the associated entry boxes

Place commas between individual references, or dashes to indicate a range to print. You can also use any combination of these styles, for instance, 3-5, 6, 8. A tilde (~) between page numbers prints every other page in the range.

4.	In the Number of copies box, specify how many copies to print.

5.	To choose settings for your print job such as page positioning and layout, click Options and Preview and choose settings from the three tabs of the Print Options dialog box. Or, if you've previously created a print style with the options you want for this job, select it from the Print Style list box (See Related Topics).

Tips

·	If you plan to print multiple copies, consider using the Collate option, which prints one full set of the selected pages before going back and printing the second full set and so on.

·	If CorelMemos appear in your document and you want them printed on the pages in which they appear, enable the Print CorelMemos check box.

 Related Topics


To print a job information sheet

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview

3.	In Print Preview, click Settings, Job Information Sheet.

4.	To customize the report, choose which categories of information are to be included.

5.	Specify whether the job information is to be saved to a file or printed or both.

The job information sheet is printed after the last document page has been outputted.

 Related Topics


Printing to a color press

1.	Prepare your project. Make sure you understand the importance of color management and color correction and consult your service bureau AT THE VERY BEGINNING of your project. They will provide you with invaluable information, that if not followed, may lead to costly errors or omissions.

2.	Set up the basics of the print job.

Enable Print to File.

Choose the imagesetter driver specified by your service bureau. Make sure the printer color profile that matches the above imagesetter is selected. If it isn't, go to Tools, Color Manager and select the appropriate profile.

Specify a print range.

3.	Set up the printable page.

Click Preview and Options

Adjust the size, position, and layout of your document, if required.

4.	Choose which reference marks to place on your document. (Settings menu, Marks and Prepress)

Set the printers' marks, e.g. crop marks, as specified by your service bureau.

5.	Set any advanced options you require (Options tab).

Adjust the number of fountain steps, set the screen frequency, or choose PostScript preferences.

6.	Set the color separation parameters (Separations tab) if applicable.

Enable Print Separations. Make sure the In Color option is NOT enabled.

Choose all the color separations and indicate whether you want empty plates printed.

Customize your halftone screen, in consultation with your service bureau, if required. Click [image] for more information

Choose the appropriate trapping strategy, in consultation with your service bureau, if required. Click [image] for more information.

7.	Click File, Print. At the prompt, enter a name and destination for your print file. Your document is saved in a file format (*.prn) that can be used by the service bureau to print your document.

 Related Topics


Setting up the print job


To select a printer

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose a printer from the Name list box. If the device driver you need is not listed, install it using the Print wizard (Control Panel, Printers  window).

Tips

•	If you're sending a file to a service bureau, choose the device driver that's specified by the service bureau.

•	To set printer properties such as paper size, source, and type, click the Properties button to the right of the list box and choose the settings you want. If you require additional information about the settings, consult the Windows documentation.

 Related Topics


To print a document to a file

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Enable Print to File.

If your file is to be used on Macintosh equipment, enable the For Mac check box.

3.	Click OK.

4.	When the Print to File dialog box opens, type a filename and choose a destination for the file. The appropriate extension (.PRN) is automatically appended to your filename.

Notes

•	The Print to File option saves a document with all its formatting codes in a special, PostScript format called the PRN file format. Saving a document in this format allows you to bring it to a service bureau for high resolution printing or to print the document to a remote printer that is not connected to your system.

•	If you are printing to file a large publication with multiple chapters, consider enabling the Print Chapters to separate files check box. Choosing this option is advisable because if there is a problem with one prn file, the rest of the files will be unaffected.

 Related Topics


To save print settings

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	When VENTURA displays the document in Print Preview mode, choose the settings you want from the menus or from the pages of the Print Options dialog box.

4.	Click File, Save Print Style As.

5.	In the Save Print Style dialog box, choose the groups of settings to include by enabling and disabling their related check boxes.

6.	Type a name for the style in the Save print style as box.

Tip

•	To apply this style to a print job later on, simply select the print style from the Print style box in the Print Preview or from the main Print dialog box.

 Related Topics


To print on both sides of the paper

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Duplex Setup Wizard.

3.	Follow the instructions on the screen.

Note

•	You can have VENTURA insert a blank page between chapters that end on the same side (left or right) as the next chapter. Inserting blank pages ensures that chapters begin on the correct side when printing on both sides of the paper. For more information, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Using a system profile to ensure that colors print as expected

When printing in color, it's important that you create a system profile that calibrates the various devices used in publishing your document (monitor, color printer, scanner). A profile ensures that the colors you see displayed on your monitor are the same as the colors you see on the printed document. System profiles are developed using the Color Wizard (Tools, Color Manager).

To use a system  profile when printing your document, click File, Print and enable the Printer Color Profile check box. Make sure that the profile listed beside the check box is the one you wish to use. Otherwise, select a different one in the Select Color Profile dialog box (Tools, Color Manager).

 Related Topics


Previewing and setting up your document


To preview your document

•	Click File, Print Preview.

VENTURA displays the document in Print Preview mode. Using the buttons on the toolbar and the commands in the menus, you can adjust the size and position your document and choose other settings prior to printing.

Tips

•	You can control whether you see the actual page or a gray box representing the size and position of the page. Right-click on the preview and either enable or disable the Preview Image item. If the image is complex or takes a long time to display, disable the option.

•	The View menu lists a number of options for controlling how your document displays in the preview. You can choose how detailed the quality of the image is (Fast or High Quality) and whether the document displays in color or grayscale.

•	To close Print preview, click File, Close Preview.

 Related Topics


Sizing your document

For certain print jobs, you may want your document to print larger or smaller than its actual size. In Print Preview, you can choose the size at which you want your document printed without altering the original. An 8 ½ x 11 advertisement, for instance, could be printed at 8 ½ x 14, 4 x 3, or any size you require. Use the sizing handles around the preview document to scale it to whatever dimensions you like, or specify exact dimensions for the document in the Print Options dialog box, Layout tab.

What do you want to do?

Size your document by a precise amount

Size your document by adjusting the preview image


To size your document by a precise amount

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	On the Layout tab, adjust the width of the document by typing a new value in the Width box. The height is automatically adjusted in proportion to the width to maintain the document's original proportions.

If you wish to adjust both the height and width of the document, disable the Maintain Aspect ratio check box and type values in both boxes.

Tips

•	To change the unit of measurement, choose a different unit from the list box to the right of the Top option.

•	Enable the Apply Settings to all pages check box to print all pages in the document with the position and size settings applied.

•	You can also scale the document to fit the printable page by enabling the Fit to Page check box.

 Related Topics


To size your document by adjusting the preview image

1.	Position the cursor over a sizing handle.

2.	When the cursor changes to a double-sided arrow, hold down CTRL and drag to size the document.

Note

•	If the sizing handles are not visible, click View, Show, and check that the Selection Handles option is enabled.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the position of your document

Print Preview displays a replica of the current page set against the paper on which it will be printed. If your document is smaller than the paper, you can move the page around so that it will print on a different section of the paper. You can either click and drag the document page in the preview or type exact coordinates in the Print Options dialog box, Layout tab.

What do you want to do?

Move your document by a precise amount

Move your document by clicking and dragging


To move your document by a precise amount

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Layout tab.

4.	Type a new value in the Top box (to move the document vertically on the page) and the Left box (to move the document horizontally on the page).

Notes

•	Enable the Apply Settings to all pages check box to print all pages in the document with the position and size settings applied.

•	You can also place your document in the center of the printable page by enabling the Center image check box.

 Related Topics


To move your document by clicking and dragging

1.	Hold down CTRL and position the cursor inside the preview document.

2.	Click and drag to reposition it on the page.

 Related Topics


Choosing a page layout

One of the first steps in creating a document is to choose a page layout from the Chapter Properties dialog box. To print that same document as a tent card or booklet, you would normally have to create additional documents from scratch. A time-saving alternative is to choose a preset layout from the Print Options dialog box.

Instead of printing a single page at a time, you can create custom layouts that print 2, 4, or as many pages per sheet as you like. You can take advantage of this feature to print miniature versions (called thumbnails) of your pages so that you can review the general layout of your document.

The Edit Layout style dialog box lets you choose which individual pages to place on the sheet, or use the Edit Positioning dialog box to print copies of the same page.

What do you want to do?

Choose a preset page layout

Create a layout that places several pages on a single sheet (printing thumbnails)

Create a layout that places copies of the same page on a single sheet


To choose a preset page layout

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Choose a layout style from the Layout Styles list box.

Tip

•	Use this feature to quickly print your document in a different layout style without altering your original document. For instance, a four page, 8 ½ x 11 inch document could be printed as a tent card or booklet.

 Related Topics


To create a layout that places several pages on a single sheet
To create a layout that places several pages on a single sheet (printing thumbnails)

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Edit button to the right of the Layout style box.

5.	Indicate how many pages you want across and down the page by typing values in the Across and Down boxes.

6.	Click on each square in the preview, and type the number of the page you want printed there.

7.	To add space between the pages, type values in the Horizontal and Vertical Gutter boxes.

Tip

•	You can also use one of the Thumbnail print styles supplied with VENTURA to print thumbnails. Click the File, Print, command, then choose 3x3 Thumbnails or 3x4 Thumbnails from the Print Style list.

Notes

•	You can change the unit of measurement in the Units number box on the right.

•	To save the settings you've chosen for future print jobs, click the plus sign and type a name for the settings in the provided box. When you want to use these settings again, just select the name from the Layout style list box.

 Related Topics


To create a layout that places copies of the same page on a single sheet

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Edit button to the right of the Positioning box.

5.	Indicate how many pages you want across the page by typing values in the Rows and Columns boxes.

6.	Enable the Clone Frame check box .

7.	To add space between the pages, type values in the Horizontal and Vertical Gutter boxes. You can change the unit of measurement in the Units number box on the right.

Tip

•	This would be an ideal method for creating pages of custom-designed business cards.

Notes

•	To scale the pages (as a single entity), type values in the Left and Right Margin boxes. You can also move the pages to a different position on the sheet by typing values in the Top and Bottom boxes.

•	To save the settings you've chosen for future print jobs, click the plus sign and type a name in the provided box. When you want to use these settings again, just select the name from the Positioning list box.

•	For other ways of creating layouts with multiple pages, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To position copied document pages on the printable page

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Layout tab.

4.	From the Layout style box, choose Manual.

5.	Enable Clone Frame and type the number of copies you want on the page.

6.	Hold down CTRL and click and drag the framed pages in the preview.

Note

•	The advantage of using this method is that each page is enclosed by a frame that can be sized and positioned on the page.

 Related Topics


To tile a large document on several pages

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Print tiled pages.

5.	Indicate by how much you want the tiles to overlap by typing a value in the Tile Overlap box. Overlapping causes information on the edges of one page to be copied to the next page.

Note

•	To see the page boundaries between the tiled pages, enable the Tiled Page Boundaries option in the View, Show menu.

 Related Topics


To choose options for printing proofs

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Options tab.

4.	To print colors in black or grayscale, click the appropriate button in the Proofing options section.

5.	Enable any of the other proofing options you require.

Tip

•	To view additional information on any of the proofing options, right-click on the option and choose What's This.

 Related Topics


To place prepress marks and information on your document pages

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Marks and Prepress.

3.	Select which marks and information to place on your printed document.

Tip

•	To view additional information on any of the options, right-click on the option and choose What's This.

 Related Topics


Creating color separations


To preview your color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

4.	Click View, Plate, and choose a color separation (e.g., cyan) from the list box.

Note

•	You can only preview color separations if you have enabled color separations in Print Options.

 Related Topics


To print color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview

3.	On the Separations tab of the Print Options dialog box, enable the Print Separations check box.

4.	Enable Print Separations.

5.	Select the colors to be printed by clicking to highlight the color names in the list box.

Notes

•	In certain instances, you may need to print separations in color. To do so, enable the In Color option.

•	Enabling Print Empty Plates forces the printer to produce a sheet of paper or film even when there is nothing on them (e.g., there may be only yellow and black on a page but the cyan and magenta plates will be printed anyway if you are using process color). Normally, you would leave this option disabled to avoid wasting costly film. However, there may be instances when you want to force plates that are blank to print anyway.

 Related Topics


To convert spot colors to process colors

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Separations tab.

4.	Enable Print Separations.

5.	Enable Convert Spot Colors to CMYK. This does not affect the document itself, only the way it is printed.

Note

•	Spot colors used in EPS pictures won't print if converted to CYMK.

 Related Topics


To customize a halftone screen

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Options dialog box, display the Separations tab.

4.	Enable Print Separations.

5.	Enable Use Advanced Settings.

6.	Click Advanced.

7.	Change any of the following settings:

screen technology

halftone type (e.g., Line or Diamond)

printer or imagesetter resolution

the screen frequency and angle of any or all of the color separations.

Notes

•	Setting the halftone screens correctly is critical. Screens that are improperly set can result in undesirable moiré patterns and poor color reproduction. Consult your service bureau before you change any of these settings. If you are uncertain, use the default settings.

•	You can now set the screen frequency, screen angle and overprint options for spot colors as well as process colors. For example, if you have a fountain fill made up of two spot colors, you can now set one to print at 45 degrees and the other at 90 degrees.

 Related Topics


Using trap to avoid misregistration problems

If your document contains graphics, pictures, or text that overlap or adjoin, you will need to add trap to avoid misregistration problems. Trap is the process of adding a slight overlap between adjacent areas of color to avoid gaps caused by registration errors. The Print Options dialog box offers several trapping features including automatic trapping, overprinting color separations, and overprinting black (ideal for documents containing mostly text). You can also overprint selected graphics, frames, or text.

What do you want to do?

Apply trap automatically

Trap by overprinting color separations

Trap by overprinting black

Overprint selected graphics or frames

Overprint selected text

 Related Topics


To overprint selected graphics or frames

1.	Select a graphic or frame.

2.	Right-click and enable Overprint Fill, Overprint Outline, or both.

Notes

•	Overprint Fill causes the top graphic or frame to print over any underlying graphics or frames. This option is best used when the top color is much darker than the underlying color, otherwise an undesirable third color might result (e.g., red over yellow would result in an orange object).

•	Overprint Outline causes the top graphic or frame's outline to print over any underlying graphic or frame. The most common and safest choice is to assign the color of the top graphic or frame's fill to the outline. When setting the outline thickness, bear in mind that the outline straddles the path that defines the graphic or frame's shape. Therefore, an outline of 0.30 points actually creates a trap of 0.15 points.

•	Using color trapping requires a solid understanding of the many variables involved in color printing. To ensure satisfactory results, it is important that you seek your service bureau's advice.

 Related Topics


To overprint selected text

1.	Select text in the document.

2.	Click Format, Text.

3.	Enable the Overprint check box. The selected text overprints the background color.

Note

Overprinting is only necessary if you plan to create color separations.

 Related Topics


To trap by overprinting color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Separations tab.

4.	Enable both the Print separations and Use advanced settings check boxes.

5.	Click Advanced.

6.	Click the color separation to overprint.

7.	Enable Overprint color.

8.	Indicate whether you want graphics, text, or both to overprint.

Note

•	Using color trapping effectively requires a solid understanding of the many variables involved in color printing. To ensure satisfactory results, it is important that you seek your service bureau's advice.

 Related Topics


To trap by overprinting black

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Separations tab.

4.	Enable Print separations.

5.	Enable Always overprint black.

Text or graphics consisting of at least 95% black will automatically overprint.

Notes

•	The Always overprint black option is useful in documents with a high text content, but should be used with caution for documents containing a large number of graphics and pictures.

•	Using color trapping requires a solid understanding of the many variables involved in color printing. To ensure satisfactory results, it is important that you seek your service bureau's advice.

•	If your service bureau recommends a black threshold value other than 95%, click the Options tab, choose Overprint Black Threshold from the Special Settings Option list, and change the setting as required.

 Related Topics


To apply trap automatically

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Separations tab.

4.	Enable both the Print separations and Auto-spreading check boxes.

5.	To control the amount of auto-spreading, type a maximum trap value. The amount of spread assigned depends on the maximum trap value and the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

6.	To specify the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied, type a Text above value. Applying auto-spreading to small text can make it illegible

Notes

•	Auto-Spreading creates color trapping by assigning an outline to the graphic, text, or picture that is the same color as its fill, and having it overprint underlying items. Color trapping is applied providing that three conditions are met: there is no outline, the fill is uniform, and no overprinting has already been applied.

•	Using color trapping requires a solid understanding of the many variables involved in color printing. To ensure satisfactory results, it is important that you seek your service bureau's advice.

 Related Topics


Working with bitmaps and halftone screens


To set the screen frequency (PostScript printers only)

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Options tab.

4.	Choose a screen frequency, expressed in lines per inch (lpi). Check with your service bureau for the optimum setting for your job.

Notes

•	When the screen frequency is set to Default, your document is printed using the default screen frequency of the output device.

•	If you are using the Advanced settings, found on the Separations page in the Print Options dialog box, set the screen frequencies for each color separation here. These settings override the settings on the Options page.

 Related Topics


To output color bitmaps in an RGB color format (PostScript printers only)

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Output Color Bitmaps in RGB.

Tip

•	PostScript output normally uses the CMYK color model. If outputting color bitmaps to an RGB or CMY device, enable the Output Color Bitmaps in RGB option. RGB devices will then receive ready-to-use RGB values (instead of CMYK). CMY devices will have an easier time translating RGB to CMY (3-color model to 3-color model) than CMYK to CMY (4-color model to 3-color model).

 Related Topics


To control bitmap conversion to grayscale (PostScript printers only)

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Grayscale Driver Bitmap Output.

5.	Choose Send Color Bitmaps As Grayscale or Send Color Bitmaps As Color.

Note

•	This setting applies when outputting color bitmaps on monochrome PostScript devices. Normally, color bitmaps are converted to grayscale to conserve disk space and to limit processing time. There may be cases, however, when you would like VENTURA to output full-color information.

 Related Topics


To maintain OPI links (PostScript printers only)

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Maintain OPI links.

Notes

•	To use OPI links, you must enable the "Link to high resolution file for output using OPI" option when importing your TIFF (or CT) files. These TIFF (or CT) images become known as OPI images. When your service bureau receives your print file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the low-resolution images. If there are no OPI images in your file, the Maintain OPI Links option will not be available at print time.

•	Maintain OPI links is enabled automatically if you import your bitmaps correctly.

•	To proof a file that contains OPI images on a device that doesn't have the high-resolution files (e.g., your desktop printer), disable the Maintain OPI Links option.

 Related Topics


Troubleshooting your print job


Resolving PostScript Level 1 printing problems

Sometimes printing problems occur when documents contain complex graphics or fills. You can troubleshoot some of these problems by adjusting the controls in the PostScript Preferences dialog box and the Special Settings box.

What kind of printing problem do you have?

Text not printing properly

Problems printing complex graphics

Problems printing non-uniform fills

Problems printing fountain fills


Text not printing properly

If your text comes out looking like blocks, or if your equations are not printing properly, you may have more than one font type of the same name (e.g., True Type Symbols and Type 1 Symbols) installed.

There are two things you can try to remedy this:

•	Disable the Convert True Type to Type 1 option before printing. This option is in the PostScript Preferences dialog box, which you can access by clicking the Options and Preview button in the Print dialog box, clicking the Options tab, and then clicking PostScript Preferences.

•	Delete one of the duplicated fonts.


To help complex graphics to print properly

The PostScript Preferences dialog box contains options that can be adjusted to aid in the printing of complex graphics. You can access this dialog box by choosing Print from the File menu, clicking the Options button from the toolbar and choosing the PostScript Preferences button.

Option	Description

Maximum points per curve	This value represents the threshold at which graphics are considered too complex to print. Curves with more points than the maximum are printed in smaller segments which facilitates printing. Lower the value if your complex graphics are not printing as expected.

Set Flatness to	Increasing the flatness causes complex curves to be printed as segmented lines which are easier for the printer to process.

Auto increase flatness	If a complex graphic will not print, the curves are automatically converted to segmented lines which are easier for the printer to process. Flatness is incremented by a factor of two starting with the value in the Set flatness to box. The graphic is skipped if the flatness exceeds the starting value by 10.

 Related Topics


To help non-uniform fills to print properly

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Fill Clipping.

5.	Choose Use Software Clipping For Fills. This option gives VENTURA control over how non-uniform fills such as fountain fills or bitmap texture fills are printed when they are non-rectangular. This may increase printing time, but will ensure that your fills print as expected.

 Related Topics


To help fountain fills to print properly

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable one or both of the following options:

Auto increase fountain steps to let VENTURA increase the number of steps that comprise a fountain fill to reduce banding. This may increase printing time, but it will ensure the best possible rendering of fountain fills.

Optimize fountain fills to decrease the number of steps that comprise a fountain fill if the graphic is unable to print.

 Related Topics


Resolving non-PostScript printing problems

Some printing problems are a result of by the way information is sent to the printer. The Special Settings box contains two options that help you to control how your print job is handled.

Option	Description

Bitmap Printing (Output In 64K Chunks)	Causes bitmaps to be sent to the printer in smaller blocks of information that are easier to process

Driver Banding (Send Bands to Driver)	Lets VENTURA split the print job into sections before sending it to the printer. Some printers can't hold a full page in memory; therefore they must print the page in multiple passes.

 Related Topics


To speed up printing for PostScript Level 2 devices

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable the Use PostScript Level 2 features check box.

These features speed up printing by standardizing the rendering of lines and bezier curves of the same thickness (stroke adjustment) and by compressing graphics.

Note

•	To turn off the stroke adjustment, choose the PostScript 2 Stroke Adjust option from the Option list box and select Off as the setting.

 Related Topics


To display warning messages when printing problems occur (PostScript devices only)

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Options tab.

3.	Click PostScript Preferences.

4.	From the Warnings section, enable one or both of these options:

Complex object warnings to display a warning message when certain graphics, such as those with an excess of 300 nodes, will not print as displayed.

Banded fountain fill warnings to display a warning message when graphics with linear fills will not print as displayed.

When a printing problem does occur, the  warning dialog box lists  ways of resolving the problem and allows you to cancel the print job, skip the graphic, or continue printing.

 Related Topics


Setting advanced options


To adjust the number of steps in fountain fills

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Options tab.

4.	In the Fountain steps box, specify the number of steps to be used when rendering fountain fills.

Notes

•	A low value (less than 20) will print the fountain fills faster but the transition between shades may be rather coarse, causing what is known as banding. A higher value (greater than 40)  will result in a smoother blend but longer printing times.

 Related Topics


To set a bleed limit

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Bleed Limit.

6.	Enter a bleed limit value.

This value represents the distance the document will be allowed to bleed beyond the crop marks (i.e. the edge of final paper size).

Note

•	This setting has no effect unless the working page size is smaller than the printable page and your document extends beyond the edge of the working page (see Page layout (and printing) in related topics).

•	Consult your service bureau or printing shop to determine the appropriate bleed limit for your job. Excessive bleeds waste film and may cause other problems.

 Related Topics


Optimizing the use of fonts when printing

The number of fonts used in documents and how your printer interprets fonts can significantly influence the speed and quality of your printed output. By downloading fonts when printing documents with a small number of fonts and limiting the number of bitmap fonts your printer creates, you can reduce your chances of printing problems. You can also control the point size below which text is rendered as bitmaps.

What do you want to do?

Download type 1 fonts to PostScript printers

Limit the number of bitmap fonts created

Set a bitmap font size threshold


To download type 1 fonts to PostScript printers

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable the Download Type 1 Fonts check box.

Notes

•	Downloading Type 1 fonts can result in faster printing when there are only a few fonts used in a document. Printing is faster because once the fonts are downloaded, they are referenced only when there is text that uses them. If you disable the Download option, fonts are output as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful if the file contains large numbers of fonts that would take an unacceptably long time to download.

•	By default Convert TrueType to Type 1 is also enabled. Only disable this option if your output device has difficulty interpreting the Type 1 fonts.

 Related Topics


To limit the number of bitmap fonts created

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview.

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Bitmap Font Limit.

5.	Type a number between 0 and 250.

Notes

•	If the font used meets certain criteria, a bitmap version of the font is created in the printer's memory. Bitmap character descriptions are used because they look better at small point sizes and they print faster than the normal character outline descriptions. The fonts created in this way consume a large amount of PostScript memory. As a result, you may need to limit the number of such fonts created to avoid a PostScript error when you are printing.

•	Click [image] to see a list of the criteria that must be met before a bitmap version of a font is created in printer memory.

 Related Topics


Criteria for creating a bitmap version of a font

•	The printed character size must be no larger than 75 pixels. This corresponds to a point size of 18 at 300 dpi, 9 points at 600 dpi, and so on.

•	The text must  not scaled or skewed.

•	The text does not have an outline or a fill other than a uniform fill.

•	The text does not have any envelopes (non-linear transformations) applied to it.

•	The drawing is not being printed using the Sizing options or Fit To Page option in the Print Options dialog box.


To set a bitmap font size threshold

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options and Preview

3.	In the Print Options dialog box, display the Options tab.

4.	From the Option box, choose Bitmap Font Size Threshold.

5.	Type a number in the Settings box. This value represents the bitmap height in pixels.

Note

•	This setting applies to TrueType text that is being printed on a PostScript printer. At a certain point size and below, text will be printed in a bitmap font to increase its legibility. You may wish to adjust or turn off this option depending on the requirements of your print job and the type of device you are printing on. If a bitmap cannot be created, the text will be sent to the printer as a Type 1 font.

 Related Topics


Using PaperDirect templates

VENTURA comes with a collection of PaperDirect templates for everything from greeting cards to business forms. These templates, which are on CD number 2, are designed for use with preprinted paper from PaperDirect, although you can use them with plain paper too.

When using the templates with PaperDirect paper, you should disable the PDirect1 condition. To do this, use the Format Publications command to clear the PDirect1 condition. Otherwise, the designs you see on the screen will overprint the designs on the PaperDirect paper, which is probably not what you want.

If you are using the templates with plain paper and want the designs to print, leave the PDirect1 condition enabled. However, any text or pictures you add to the templates should be put in frames placed on top of the template.

If you have any question about the PaperDirect templates, contact PaperDirect at 1-800-A-Papers.


Using the International Proofreader

The International Proofreader provided with your Corel program addresses complex writing errors and style issues.

The International Proofreader's three checking modes [image] Spelling, Quick Proofreading, and Full Proofreading [image] serve users with varying needs. For example, you might perform a quick check for spelling errors only, a check for spelling and mechanical errors, or a detailed check for style problems, depending on the context and time constraints of your project.

The International Proofreader works as uniformly as possible across all supported languages. It follows the conventions prescribed by accepted grammar and style manuals for each language, and it handles language variants appropriately.

Grammar and spelling correction is divided into three checking modes:

Spelling mode

Quick Proofreading mode

Full Proofreading mode

 Related Topics


Spelling mode overview

The International Proofreader's Spelling mode detects and corrects numerous types of spelling errors, including those related to language-specific items such as compound words in the Germanic languages. Spelling mode corrects errors involving the following categories of writing elements:

A/An use (English)

Capitalization

Spelling (abbreviation errors, apostrophe errors, cognitive misspellings, and typographic errors)

Clitics (Romance languages)

Compounding (English and the other Germanic languages)

Doubled words

Hyphenation (including soft-hyphen errors and hyphenation-dependent spelling errors)

 Related Topics


Quick Proofreading mode overview

Quick Proofreading mode provides all the functionality of Spelling mode, in addition to correcting errors involving: the spacing between words and sentences; uppercase/lowercase spellings depending on their function or context (German); and the following categories of writing elements:

Confused words

Double negatives

Format

Homonyms

Inappropriate prepositions

Misspelled expressions

Misspelled foreign expressions

Noun-phrase agreement (Romance languages)

Punctuation

Ungrammatical expressions

 Related Topics


Full Proofreading mode overview

Full Proofreading mode provides the functionality of Spelling mode and Quick Proofreading mode plus identification of many type of stylistically questionable expressions and assistance in eliminating them. The words and expressions flagged in Full Proofreading mode are not grammatically incorrect, but style and grammar guides suggest that they be avoided in most contexts or used only for intentional effect. The error messages displayed in Full Proofreading mode are designed to provide you with the stylistic guidelines you need to make a subjective decision about including or omitting such words and expressions. The flagged categories include the following:

Archaic expressions

Clichés

Contractions

Gender-specific expressions

Informal expressions

Jargon expressions

Overused phrases

Pretentious words

Redundant expressions

Sexist expressions

Stock phrases

Unnecessary prepositions

Vague quantifiers

Wordy expressions

 Related Topics


Rule Manager overview

As the International Proofreader processes text, it distinguishes between sentence text and non-sentence text and uses appropriate rules to check each type. With the Rule Manager, you can customize your proofreading environments by turning off rule types.

The Rule Manager gives you the ability to turn off rule types, and to use different combinations of rule types when writing for different readers. It keeps track of which rule types you have turned off, and whether you want them turned off for the current VENTURA session and/or for future sessions. If you turn off rule types for future sessions, the Rule Manager maintains a list of these in a user profile and reloads the profile when the next session starts. If you turn off a rule type for the current session only, the Rule Manager discards the information at the end of that session.

The Rule Manager displays a description of each Rule Type when highlighted in the Rule Manager dialog box or when an error is found during proofreading.

 Related Topics


A/An use
(Spelling mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies all errors using the words "a" and "an" as in the following example.

an European country	a European country

 Related Topics


Capitalization errors
(Spelling mode)

In addition to flagging all capitalization errors identified during a spelling check (including errors in proper nouns), the proofreader flags errors in the following categories:

Compass points

English	in the South of France	in the south of France

in the north	in the North

First word in a sentence

Because the International Proofreader processes text sentence by sentence, it recognizes the first word in each sentence and flags it if it is not capitalized.

Language-specific capitalization

English	Summer	summer

French	Mardi	mardi

Janvier	janvier

German	Montags	montags

Word groups

English	mount Everest	Mount Everest

New Year's day	New Year's Day

New York state	New York State

State of New York	state of New York

Portuguese	dia das mões 	Dia das mões

 Related Topics


Clitic errors
(Spelling mode)

Clitics are articles, pronouns, or prepositions that are attached to other words (called stems when clitics are attached) for grammatical reasons. The use of clitics in the Romance languages supported by the International Proofreader involves language-specific changes in spelling and accents.

In French, for example, certain grammatical constructions require that articles or pronouns called preclitics be attached to the beginnings of words in specific ways, while other constructions require that pronouns, or other forms called postclitics, be attached to the ends of words. The French words le 'the' and enfant 'child', for example, are combined in the cliticized form l'enfant 'the child', and donnez-le-moi 'give it to me' has two postclitics, -le 'it' and -moi 'me'. In Spanish, equivocarse 'to be mistaken' combines the verb equivocar 'to mistake' with the pronoun se 'oneself'. In Italian, ciascun'amica 'each (girl) friend' combines the adjective ciascuna 'each' with the noun amica '(girl) friend'.

Strict and complex rules govern the combination of stems and clitics in each Romance language. These rules take into consideration the part of speech of the clitic (article, pronoun, or preposition); its position (preceding or following the stem); the phonetic value (vowel or consonant) of the initial or final letter of the stem; and the gender, number, and grammatical role of the stem. Consequently, spelling verification for these languages requires special checking. The International Proofreader can do the following:

Verify correct clitics

All of the following are correct and are verified as such by the International Proofreader:

French	envoyez-les-lui [envoyez + les + lui]

l'ordinateur [le + ordinateur]

Italian	portarglielo [portare + glie + lo]

senz'alzarsi [senza + alzare + si]

Portuguese	aprendê-lo-ei [aprenderei + o]

Spanish	dámela [da + me + la]

Flag incorrect clitics

In these examples, the stem is correct, but the attached clitic is not. The International Proofreader detects these errors:

French	s'ordinateur (an error for l'ordinateur) is flagged as having an inappropriate preclitic

veut-t-il (an error for veut-il) is flagged as having an inappropriate postclitic

Flag and correct unmodified stems

In these examples, the stems should have been modified when the clitic was attached:

Italian	senz'alzaresi	senz'alzarsi

Portuguese	dás-lo 	dá-lo

Spanish	mostrémosselas 	mostrémoselas

aislémosnos 	aislémonos

Flag and correct apostrophe errors

In these examples, an apostrophe should have been inserted or omitted:

French	lenfant 	l'enfant

l'ettre  	lettre

Italian	lormai 	l'ormai

l'aureato  	laureato

Flag and correct accent errors

In these examples, an accent should have been inserted or omitted:

Portuguese	faz-lo  	fá-lo

Spanish	aíslemonos  	aislémonos

Flag and correct stems with clitics

These examples contain errors in the stems:

French	n'appèl 	n'appelle

appellez-vous 	appelez-vous

Italian	t'arabiare 	t'arrabbiare

Portuguese	escreber-nos 	escrever-nos

 Related Topics


Compounding errors (English and other Germanic languages--Spelling mode)
Compounding errors
(English and other Germanic languages [image] Spelling mode)

In English, the International Proofreader flags and corrects errors that occur when writers mistakenly hyphenate a word, as in the following example:

blue-prints	blueprints

In the other Germanic languages supported by the International Proofreader (Dutch and German), two or more words can be joined to form a single word, or compound. German Lebensfreude 'joy of living', for example, is a compound of Leben and Freude.

Some compounds are well established and commonly used; however, new compounds that follow language-specific rules are constantly formed. Spelling software for Germanic languages must account for this productive and rule-governed process. The International Proofreader lists the most frequently used compounds in its databases. Less frequently used compounds are verified by confirming that they consist of grammatically valid elements. This process enables the International Proofreader to verify most two-part compound words. Also, because the database stores many common two-part compound words as valid compound components, the International Proofreader can also verify many three-part compounds. The International Proofreader can do the following:

Verify newly formed compounds

Dutch	bondsbureau	financieringsondernemingen

German	Textverarbeitung	Computerrevolution

Verify compounds formed with acronyms

Dutch	KLM-piloten

German	ASCII-Format

Flag and correct misspellings of compounds

Dutch	bondsgenootscha 	bondgenootschap

German	Mietkasernen	Mietskasernen

 Related Topics


Doubled-word errors
(Spelling mode)

Dutch	flags doubled words other than dat dat, die die, je je, and other personal pronouns

English	flags doubled words other than that that and had had

French	flags doubled words other than vous vous, nous nous, and en en

German	flags doubled words other than der der, die die, das das, and sie sie

Italian	flags doubled words other than via via, passo passo, and sotto sotto

Portuguese	flags doubled words other than se se and agora agora

 Related Topics


Hyphenation errors
(Spelling mode)

The International Proofreader's hyphenation processing enables it to detect the following types of hyphenation errors:

Soft-hyphen errors

A soft hyphen is a hyphen that is not part of the spelling of a word, but is used only to divide the word onto two lines. (A hard hyphen, in contrast, is part of the word's spelling and is therefore always used.) The International Proofreader generates hyphenation points by using pattern-matching technology (rather than retrieving stored hyphenation points from a database) to ensure that soft hyphens divide words correctly into syllables, as in the following example:

EntryThe musician who played the last piano concerto is a child pro-
digy.

CompoundThe musician who played the last piano concerto is a child prod-
igy.

Hyphenation-dependent spelling errors (Germanic languages)

The use of a soft hyphen to divide a word onto two lines sometimes results in spelling changes in Dutch and German. For example, when a German compound formed by linking two or more words would contain the same consonant three times in succession, the third consonant is omitted if the letter immediately following it is a vowel and the compound appears on one line. However, when such a compound is divided by an end-of-line hyphen at the point where the compound words are joined, German spelling rules mandate a spelling change: the word is then spelled with all three consonants.

In addition, when words containing certain combinations of letters (such as ck in the German word backen) are divided by soft hyphens, their spelling may change (backen becomes bak-ken).

The International Proofreader detects and corrects errors in these two types of hyphenation-dependent spelling changes as shown below:

Language	Word	Incorrect spelling	Correct spelling

Dutch	speculatieïnstelling	speculatie-ïnstelling	speculatie-instelling

autootje	autoo-tje	auto-the

German	Schiffahrt	Schif-fahrt	Schiff-fahrt

Glocken	Gloc-ken	Glok-ken

 Related Topics


Spelling errors

The International Proofreader corrects the following types of spelling errors:

Abbreviation errors

English	O.C.R.	OCR

German	us.w.	usw.

Spanish	Sr	Sr.

Portuguese	Ltda	Ltda.

Apostrophe errors

English	wo'nt	won't

Cognitive misspellings

These occur when the writer does not know the standard spelling of a word. Cognitive misspellings may be phonetic, such as seekwell for sequel in English or étudiet for étudié in French, or they may be morphological (a wrong ending attached to a stem). The International Proofreader corrects language-specific, cognitive misspellings such as the following:

English	effishent	efficient

French	émisfere	hémisphère

achetrice	acheteuse

German 	Säson	Saison

Filosofie	Philosophie

Kinden	Kindern

Portuguese	cabeleirero	cabeleireiro

atráz	atrás

Spanish 	peremne	perenne

lagrimógeno	lacrimógeno

Open vs. closed spelling errors

Dutch	dank zij 	dankzij

English	anyone of 	any one of

French	avoir à faire à	avoir affaire à

German	ab zu sein	abzusein

abist	ab ist

Portuguese	rosa claro 	rosa-claro

alto relevo	alto-relevo

pré-concebido	preconcebido

Spanish	al pormenor 	al por menor

Typographic errors

These are the most common variety of spelling errors. In typed text, most misspellings result from errors such as transposing characters (hte instead of the), pressing the wrong key, inserting an unnecessary character, or omitting a character. The International Proofreader corrects typographic errors in all supported languages. It handles errors of transposition, substitution, insertion, and omission regardless of their position in a word. The International Proofreader's correction technology enables it to correct words that contain multiple errors and words that start with the wrong letter or letters. For example:

English	hsa 	has

unessecery 	unnecessary

dvantage 	advantage

French	prnd 	prend

kivre 	ivre

German	bneutzt 	benutzt

rurmstichig 	wurmstichig

geraschvlol 	geräuschvoll

Portuguese	mieo 	meio

caresentar 	acrescentar

Spanish	msi 	mis

ortogáfico 	ortográfico

auotmático 	automático

 Related Topics


Confused words
(Quick Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies confused words.

English	uninterested 	vs.	Disinterested

semimonthly	vs.	Bimonthly

Portuguese	compreensivo 	vs.	Compreensível

comprimento	vs.	Cumprimento

Spanish	apóstrofe 	vs.	Apóstrofo

bimensual	vs.	Bimestral

 Related Topics


Double negatives
(Quick Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies double-negatives.

English	can't help but	can't help

French	il n'y a pas personne 	il n'y a personne

Spanish	tampoco no 	tampoco

 Related Topics


Format errors
(Quick Proofreading mode)

The International Proofreader checks for consistent and correct use of formatting conventions in all supported languages. Its rules handle formatting for the following types of material:

Closings and salutations in letters

English	dear mr. Doe:	Dear Mr. Doe:

sincerely yours,	Sincerely yours,

Yours sincerely	Yours sincerely,

Portuguese	Estimada doutora	Estimada Doutora: or Estimada Doutora,

Spanish	estimada Sra. López:	Estimada Sra. López:

Atentamente	Atentamente,

Time and date notation

English (US)	May 10 1993	May 10, 1993

French	3 h. 15	3 h 15

Portuguese	4, Julho de 1776	4 de Julho de 1776 (European)
4 de julho de 1776 (Brazilian)

Spanish	10 de mayo 1993	10 de mayo de 1993

Cardinal and ordinal numbers

English	3nd in line	3rd in line

French	soixante-onze	soixante et onze

German	5,000,000.00	5 000 000,00

Portuguese	trezentos e trinta nove	trezentos e trinta e nove

Spanish	treintiuno	treinta y uno

Fractions

English	1 and ¼	1¼

French	3½ l de vin blanc	3,5 l de vin blanc

Portuguese	1e ¼	1¼

Spanish	3 y ½	3½

Currency notation

English	45,000 £	£ 45,000

German	DM 20.50	20,50 DM

Spanish	500ptas.	500 ptas.

Postal addresses

English	Portland, ME, 04321	Portland, ME 04321

French	23 avenue Louise 	23, avenue Louise

Portuguese	Rua Santa Helena 31	Rua Santa Helena, 31

Units of measure

English	34 °	34°

Portuguese	34 °	34°

Spanish	34°C	34 °C

 Related Topics


Homonyms
(Quick Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies homonym errors.

English	acclimation 	vs.	acclamation

assent	vs.	ascent

Portuguese	assento 	vs.	acento

Spanish	basto 	vs.	vasto

brasa	vs.	braza


Inappropriate prepositions
(Quick Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies inappropriate prepositions.

English	accompanied with	accompanied by

Portuguese	defronte a 	defronte de

Spanish	a vapor 	de vapor


Misspelled expressions
(Quick Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies misspelled expressions.

English	baited breath 	bated breath

slight of hand	sleight of hand

spinal chord	spinal cord

French	de plein-pied	de plain-pied

Portuguese	dar a luz a 	dar à luz

Spanish	a campo través 	a campo traviesa


Misspelled foreign expressions
(Quick Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies misspelled foreign expressions.

English	a dente 	al dente

en mass	en masse

Portuguese	sin qua non 	sine qua non

Spanish	curriculum vita 	curriculum vitae


Noun-phrase agreement errors (Romance languages (Quick Proofreading mode))
Noun-phrase agreement errors
(Romance languages: Quick Proofreading mode)

The International Proofreader flags errors of number and gender agreement between nouns, adjectives, and articles in the Romance languages:

French

Je déclare la séance ouvert.	Je déclare la séance ouverte.

Elle s'est toujours méfié de ces gens-là.	Elle s'est toujours méfiée de ces gens-là.

Italian

un grande casa	una grande casa

Portugese

as estradas sobre os quais	as estradas sobre as quais

Spanish

la agua	el agua

 Related Topics


Punctuation errors
(Quick Proofreading mode)

The correct placement of quotation marks and other punctuation varies from language to language. International Proofreader flags errors in the following uses of punctuation and explains the correct punctuation with examples and tutorials:

Paired punctuation (English)

May I borrow the "Wall Street Journal from you?	May I borrow the "Wall Street Journal" from you?

Ellipsis and suspended discourse

Portugese

E tudo muito belo e bem feito, mas….	E tudo muito belo e bem feito, mas…

Punctuation combinations

Ela repetiu: "Eu disse a ele: 'Você está com a rozão!"	Ela repetiu: "Eu disse a ele: 'Você está com a rozão!'"

Punctuation in combination with certain words

English	i.e.,	, i.e.,

German	daß	, daß

Spanish	etc.	, etc.

Punctuation in abbreviations

She completed her B.A. degree last year.	She completed her BA degree last year.

 Related Topics


Stock phrases (Quick Proofreading mode)
Stock phrases
(Full Proofreading mode)

These rules flag stock phrases that can often be deleted without changing the meaning, or emphasis, of a sentence. Unlike clichés, these expressions are not worn-out metaphors or conventional descriptive phrases. Instead, they are introductory or parenthetical expressions often used as "filler."

·	it goes without saying that

·	in fact

·	Use sparingly

·	Consider omitting or rephrase with

·	of course

 Related Topics


Ungrammatical expressions
(Quick Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies ungrammatical expressions.

English	anyways 	anyway

irregardless	regardless

Portuguese	abridas	abertas

Spanish	celebrísimo	celebérrimo

hubieron conciertos	hubo conciertos

 Related Topics


Archaic expressions
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies archaic expressions.

English	oftentimes	often

atop	on top of

 Related Topics


Clichés
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies clichés.

English	a far cry from	very different from

German	blutjung	sehr jung

Spanish	perder los estribos	enfadarse or encolerizarse

Portuguese	De cabo a rabo	Do princípio ao fim

 Related Topics


Contractions
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies contractions.

English	Everyone's happy.	Everyone is happy.

Portuguese	procê	para você

 Related Topics


Gender-specific expressions
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies gender-specific expressions.

English	manpower	personnel or work force or staff

   	anchorman or 	anchor or newscaster or

anchorwoman	commentator

 Related Topics


Informal expressions
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies informal expressions.

English	still and all	still

French	des fois	parfois or quelquefois

German	ein Haufen	viele

Spanish	un montón de	muchos, muchas

 Related Topics


Jargon expressions
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies jargon.

English	to eyeball	to look over

 Related Topics


Overused phrases
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies overused phrases.

English	bare essentials	essentials

Portuguese	apoio incondicional	apoio total

Spanish	altamente improbable	muy improbable

 Related Topics


Pretentious words
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies pretentious words.

English	author a report	write a report

 Related Topics


Redundant expressions
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies redundant expressions.

English	ask a question about	ask about

Portuguese	acabamento final	acabamento

Spanish	regalo gratis	regalo

 Related Topics


Sexist expressions
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies sexist expressions.

English	the little woman	spouse, or partner, or wife

 Related Topics


Unnecessary prepositions
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies unnecessary prepositions.

English	divide up	divide

Portuguese	comentar sobre	comentar

Spanish	opinar de que	opinar que

 Related Topics


Vague quantifiers
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies vague quantifiers.

English	a lot of	many

 Related Topics


Wordy expressions
(Full Proofreading mode)

During proofreading, the International Proofreader identifies wordy expressions.

English	a sufficient number	enough

French	arriver à une décision	décider

German	angeblich soll	angeblich or soll

Portuguese	fazer uma chamada pelo telefone	telefonar

Spanish	dar comienzo a	comenzar

 Related Topics


Formality levels

Documents and writing styles vary in degree of formality. Because informal documents may not require adherence to such stringent rules as formal documents, International Proofreader's Rule Manager allows you to choose from three levels of formality. You can set the formality level for the current session only or customize it, save it in a user profile, and load the user profile in future sessions.

 Related Topics


Languages supported by the International Proofreader

The International Proofreader, Hyphenator, and Thesaurus support the languages listed below. With the exception of Spanish and Portuguese, you can display error messages in the language of the current dictionary or U.S. English.

When you use multiple hyphenation dictionaries in your documents, VENTURA automatically proofreads each paragraph observing the rules and conventions prescribed for each language.

Languages supported	Database file names

Danish 	PDN2S152.DAT

Dutch 	PDU1M111.DAT

U.K. and U.S. English 	PEN3M111.DAT

Finnish 	PFN2S111.DAT

French 	PFR1M111.DAT

German 	PGR1M111.DAT

Italian 	PIT1M140.DAT

Norwegian 	PNO2S120.DAT

European and Brazilian Portuguese	PPO3M140.DAT

Spanish 	PSP3M150.DAT

Swedish 	PSW2S131.DAT

Hyphenator

Danish 	HDANIS10.DAT

Dutch 	HDUTCH11.DAT

English 	HENGLI16.DAT

Finnish 	HFINNI14.DAT

French 	HFRENC05.DAT

German 	HGERMA06.DAT

Italian	HITALI09.DAT

Norwegian	HNORWE13.DAT

European and Brazilian Portuguese	HPORTU12.DAT

Spanish	HSPANI08.DAT

Swedish	HSWEDI07.DAT

Thesaurus

Danish 	RDNTF300.DAT

Dutch 	RDUTF300.DAT

English U.K. 	REKTF400.DAT

English U.S. 	REUTF410.DAT

Finnish 	RFNTF400.DAT

French 	RFRTF300.DAT

German 	RGRTF400.DAT

Italian 	RITTF310.DAT

Norwegian 	RNOTF313.DAT

Brazilian Portuguese 	RPBTF331.DAT

Iberian Portuguese	RIBTF311.DAT

Spanish	RSPTF302.DAT

Swedish	RSWTF300.DAT

Note

·	Thesaurus support for Portuguese is available in Brazilian and Iberian Portuguese only.

 Related Topics


Personal dictionaries

To check the spelling in your document, the International Proofreader compares each word in the document with the words in the database, and returns an error message when a word is not found. If you want to save specialized terms that are not in the database, the International Proofreader provides the Personal dictionaries. When you select a personal dictionary either before, or during proofreading, the International Proofreader compares each word in your document with the words in that dictionary. If the word is found in the personal dictionary or the International Proofreader database, the International Proofreader accepts the word as correctly spelled.

You can specify whether a given personal dictionary should be opened for the current language only, or for all languages.

 Related Topics


Language and dialect options

The International Proofreader includes rules, error messages, and descriptions specific to each dialect of English: U.S. and U.K., and Portuguese (European and Brazilian).

 Related Topics


Spelling correction options

For each language that you initialize, you can specify whether you want the International Proofreader to retrieve and display all possible corrections for words not found in the spelling database. You can also specify whether you want the International Proofreader to compare each word in your document with the words in any initialized personal databases during proofreading. If the word is found in the personal database, the International Proofreader accepts the word as correctly spelled, unless the word has been assigned a negative flag.

 Related Topics


Error language

For all languages except Portuguese and Spanish, you can display error messages in either the current language or in U.S. English.

 Related Topics


Rule language

For all languages except Portuguese, and Spanish, you can display the descriptions of rule types in either the current language or in U.S. English.

 Related Topics


Maximum sentence elements

You can set the maximum number of sentence elements for each language that you initialize. Sentence elements are words, or punctuation, that the International Proofreader treats as units. The default setting for each language should be acceptable for most text; you should not change the default unless you need to reduce the memory overhead required by the buffer-processing function.

Language-Specific Options

You can choose options that customize the International Proofreader's processing to reflect your preferences for specific languages.

 Related Topics


Working with Chapters


To copy a chapter to another document

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Select the document to which you want to copy a chapter.

4.	Right-click, choose Copy.

Tip

•	You can also add a copy of a chapter to the same document. Using the right mouse button, drag the chapter on top of the document, then click Copy Here.

 Related Topics


To add a copy of chapter to the same document

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Select the chapter you want to duplicate.

4.	Using the right mouse button, drag the chapter on top of the document, then click Copy Here.

 Related Topics


To add a new blank chapter to your document

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Select the document to which you want to add a chapter.

4.	Right-click, choose New chapter.

 Related Topics


To add a chapter from another version 7 document

1.	Open the document containing the chapter you want to add (the source) and the document you want add it to (the destination).

2.	Click Tools, Navigator.

3.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

4.	Double-click the source and destination documents to display their contents.

5.	Drag the chapter from the source document and drop it over the destination document.

For information on changing the order of chapters, click Related Topics and choose "To move chapters."

Note

•	Externally-referenced files in a chapter become embedded when you add the chapter to another document. If, you want the files to remain external, add the chapter, then remove and re-import the files.

•	Paragraph tags in the source document that don't exist in the destination document, appear in the Tag list in the destination document, but assume the formatting defined in the Body Text tag. If you want to restore the tag's original formatting, add the tag to the destination document using the Format, Manage Tag List command. For instructions, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To add a chapter from a pre-version 7 document

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Select the document to which you want to add a chapter.

4.	Right-click, choose Add chapter.

5.	Select the chapter you want to add.

6.	Follow the instructions on the screen to merge the tags in the chapter you are adding with those in the active document.

 Related Topics


To remove chapters from a document

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Right-click the chapter you want to remove, then choose Delete.

Note

•	If the chapter you want to delete is the only one in the document, add a blank one first by right-clicking the document name and choosing New Chapter.

 Related Topics


To move a chapter

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Click the document containing the chapter.

3.	Drag the chapter to a new location.

To move the chapter to the end of the document, drag it over the last chapter while holding down the right mouse button. Release the mouse button, then choose Insert After.

Note

•	The order of chapters determines the order in which the chapters are numbered and the order in which information appears in the table of contents and index.

 Related Topics


To delete a chapter from a document

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the drop-down list.

3.	Right-click the document, choose Remove Chapter.

4.	Select a chapter from the list, then click Delete.

Note

•	You can delete the entire document, including chapters in use by other publications without affecting the other documents.

 Related Topics


Working with documents


To copy a document to another location

1.	In the Windows Explorer, right-click the name of the document you want to copy.

2.	Point to Copy With Links To, then click a destination for the document.

3.	If the destination is a folder, select the folder you want to copy the document to.

Note

•	The Copy With Links To command copies the entire document, including libraries and linked files (i.e., externally-referenced text and picture files) to the destination. If you're copying the document to another folder on your system and want to leave the linked files and libraries where they are, use the Copy command instead. If the original files can still be located by the document, that is the copy that will be used.

•	If VENTURA is exporting text files in the document, each time you save it the Copy With Links To command will copy the internal version of those files and the exported text file. The document will look for the external files in their origina location first, and if they still exist there the document wsil use that copy.

 Related Topics


To delete a document

1.	Close the document you want to delete.

2.	In the Windows Explorer, right-click the name of the document you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

Tip

•	You can also delete documents from the Open dialog box in VENTURA. Using the right mouse button, click on the document you want to delete, then click Delete.

Note

•	Deleting a document does not delete the linked files (i.e., externally-referenced text and picture files and OLE objects) in contains.

 Related Topics


Renaming files


To remove a file from a document

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the drop-down list.

3.	Double-click the chapter which contains the file to reveal all the filenames.

4.	Select a file from the list.

5.	Right-click, choose Delete.

Note

•	After removing files from a document, use the Save As command to save it. Unlike the Save command, Save As compacts the file so that it takes up as little disk space as possible. For more information, see Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To rename documents and chapters

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the drop-down list.

3.	Right-click the document or chapter which you want to rename.

4.	Choose Rename.

 Related Topics


Embedding linked files


To embed an externally-referenced (linked) text or picture file
To embed an externally-referenced (linked) picture file

1.	Open the document containing the file you want to embed.

2.	Open the Navigator (click Tools, Navigator), and choose Publication Manager from the list.

3.	Right-click the picture file you want to embed.

4.	Choose Embed File.

 Related Topics


To apply ruling lines to frames or paragraphs

1.	Click the border of the frame or within the paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Ruling Lines

3.	Do either of the following:

·	click a picture to apply a preset style

·	choose a style from the Presets list

Note

•	You can modify the attributes of the selected style using the controls on the Ruling Line or Advanced tabs. The changes you make can be saved to a new style by typing a name in the Presets box and clicking [image].

•	A ruling box placed around a multi-line paragraph is only as wide as the first line.

 Related Topics


To remove ruling lines from frames or paragraphs

1.	Click the border of the frame or within the paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Ruling Lines.

3.	Click None.

 Related Topics


To add a drop shadow to a frame or paragraph

1.	Click the border of the frame or within the paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Ruling Lines.

3.	Click Shadow.

Note

•	Drop Shadows are actually made up of two sets ruling lines; one for shadow and the other for a border. To modify Drop Shadow styles, click the Advanced tab and select the individual lines.

•	The box that makes up the drop shadow is only as wide as the first line of the paragraph.

 Related Topics


To modify a ruling line style

1.	Click the border of the frame or within the paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Ruling Lines.

3.	Select the style you want to modify from the Presets list.

4.	Adjust the settings.

Note

•	Although you can adjust the basic settings such as color and line width on the Ruling Line tab, the Advanced tab allows you greater control over your settings, including line width, spacing, and nib shape.

•	The pen settings [image] allow you to set attributes such as nib shape, corners, arrows, color, and line style (i.e. dotted or dashed).

•	The spacing settings allow you to move ruling lines inside or outside the frame or paragraph; negative spacing will move the ruling outside.

•	The Advanced tab allows you to create up to three lines per side.

 Related Topics


To create a ruling line style

1.	Click the border of a frame or within a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Ruling Lines

3.	Adjust the settings.

4.	Enter a name in the Presets box and click

Note

•	Once you have opened the dialog, you can modify or create any number of ruling line styles.

 Related Topics


To specify the position of a ruling line

1.	Click the border of the frame or within the paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Ruling Lines, and choose the Advanced tab.

3.	Adjust the Spacing settings.

 Note

•	If you need to remove space above a ruling line, you can enter a negative value in the number box on the bottom right. This makes the ruling line appear to be on top of the text or object to which it is assigned.

 Related Topics


To specify the ruling line color

1.	Click the border of the frame or within the paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Ruling Lines

3.	Choose a color.

 Related Topics


To specify the ruling line width

1.	Click the border of the frame or within the paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Ruling Lines.

3.	Drag the line width cursor.

Tip

•	To set the ruling line width to a precise measurement, click the Advanced tab and then adjust the Thickness setting.

 Related Topics


To create change bars from ruling lines

1.	Click in the paragraph you want to format

2.	Click Format, Ruling Lines.

3.	Choose a change bar style from the presets.

Note

•	A change bar is a vertical line that appears beside text to alert readers that the text has changed. If you are changing a lot of text, you can use a tag that has a change bar applied to it to indicate new text. Wherever you apply the tag, the change bar will appear. For instructions on creating a tag, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To select a source (scanning)

1.	In your graphics application, choose File, Acquire Image, Select Source.

2.	Choose your scanner model name from the list.

3.	Click Select.

 Related Topics


To preview an image (scanning)

1.	In your graphics application, choose File, Acquire Image, Acquire. The Corel TWAIN dialog box appears.

2.	Click Prescan.

 Related Topics


To rotate an image (scanning)

1.	Choose the Layout page.

2.	Click the Rotation option box.

3.	Use the scroll buttons to find the desired rotation angle.

4.	Click the selection to make it active.

 Related Topics


To adjust color depth (scanning)

1.	Choose the Layout page.

2.	Click the Depth option box.

3.	Use the scroll buttons to find the desired color depth.

4.	Click the selection to make it active.

 Related Topics


To adjust resolution (scanning)

1.	Choose the Layout page.

2.	Click the Resolution option box.

3.	Use the scroll buttons to find the desired resolution.

4.	Click the selection to make it active.

 Related Topics


To scan an image

1.	In your graphics application, choose File, Acquire Image, Acquire. The Corel TWAIN dialog box appears.

2.	Click Scan.

 Related Topics


To scan a selection

1.	In your graphics application, choose File, Acquire Image, Acquire. The Corel TWAIN dialog box appears.

2.	Click Prescan.

3.	In the preview window, drag the selection box around the area you want to scan.

4.	Click Scan. The selected area appears in your application.

Tip

·	To enter precise measurements for the selection box, type values into the Left, Top, Width, and Height boxes.

 Related Topics


To scan a group of images

1.	In your graphics application, choose File, Acquire Image, Acquire. The Corel TWAIN dialog box appears.

2.	Choose the Custom page.

3.	Enable either the Feeder or ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) option.

4.	Choose a page size.

5.	Click Scan.

 Related Topics


Recordings and scripts

The easiest way to automate a sequence of complex or repetitive actions in Corel VENTURA is to record them. Corel VENTURA keeps track of most of the actions, and stores them in a special area of memory called a "recording." This recording, can then be played back in Corel VENTURA as a single command. The recording exists until you end the current Corel VENTURA session or create another recording.

Consider using a recording when you need a quick way to replay a series of actions. Often you repeat actions, such as opening the same dialog box several times and resetting it to the same values. For example, if you have to make the same color formatting changes to all the graphics in a document, you may want to record the actions that go into changing one graphic, and then play back the actions on the other graphics in the document.

If you find you're frequently repeating the same tasks in every Corel VENTURA session, or you want to be able to use a recording in another Corel VENTURA session, save a recording as a script. When you save a recording as a script, your recorded actions are translated into script commands and stored in a text file. In the text file, each command is stored on a separate line. When the script is executed or run, each line instructs Corel VENTURA to perform a command [image] turning your sequence of recorded actions into a single mouse click.

A script will automate routine tasks you often perform. If you insert the same picture, a logo, for example, into many of your Corel VENTURA documents, and perform the same formatting commands on it, consider recording a script to automate the task. Almost any task that you repeat in Corel VENTURA can be turned into a script, saving you time and effort.

If you use a script often enough, you may want to assign it to a keystroke, add it to your menus, or turn it into a button on the toolbar. If you find that you no longer require a script, you can discard it.

Note

•	You can record almost any keystroke, mouse selection, and menu and toolbar command in VENTURA. For a list of commands and actions that you can't record, see Corel VENTURA recording limitations.

•	You can share scripts with other VENTURA users by copying script files to floppy disks, or to shared network directories. When you create a script, include comment lines at the beginning of the script with a description of the script and your name.

•	If you record a script, but want to make changes to it, you can edit the script.

•	Most large computer applications have a built-in programming language of some form, but some applications call their programs macros instead of scripts.

•	If you often use Corel VENTURA's recording and script features, display Corel VENTURA's Recording and Scripts toolbar.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open the Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Tips for recording VENTURA actions

Here are some handy tips to make recording actions easier:

•	The Status Bar, during a recording, displays REC and the recording icon ( [image]).

•	Use the shortest steps possible to perform your task. The longer a recording session lasts, the more errors can result.

•	You cannot record a script that pauses for user input. If you want the script to pause, edit it after recording it.

•	If you often use Corel VENTURA's recording and script features, display Corel VENTURA's Recording and Scripts toolbar.

•	The first command you record in a recording session should be a document saving command. This will include a .FileSave or .FileSaveAs command in the recording. By including a Save command, you can restore the original document if the recording playback or script execution does not provide the desired results.

•	An existing recording in your computer's Corel VENTURA memory is overwritten when you record another set of commands. To reuse your initial recording, save your recording as a script before you record other commands.

•	You cannot record running a script. If you run a script while recording is on, the script runs, but nothing is recorded.

•	Corel VENTURA records both the keyboard actions and mouse actions that you make. However, you must use the key strokes instead of the mouse to position the insertion point in a document and select items. Some mouse actions are recorded, but they may not give the desired results in other documents.

•	Some recordings depend on the position of the insertion point. Remember to position the insertion point in the correct location before playing back those recordings.

•	Recordings that switch from one document window to another might not behave correctly when you play them. If you must switch windows, use the commands on the Window menu, rather than the mouse, to switch windows.

•	If you did something you didn't want to record while recording, click Edit, Undo to reverse or undo the action. Then, continue recording the actions that you want.

•	Scripts that you record may not run properly in every situation. Some scripts depend on certain options or settings. When a script cannot play, a message may appear, indicating the reason and the line number(s) in the script you can check.

Note

•	You can record almost every keystroke, mouse selection, and menu and toolbar command in Corel VENTURA. For a list of commands and actions that you can't record, see Corel VENTURA recording limitations.

•	Most large computer applications have a built-in programming language of some form, but some applications call their programs macros instead of scripts.

•	If you record a script, but want to make changes to it, you can edit the script.

•	For most recordings and scripts to work, the ImplicitOverrideMode setting in the VENTURA.INI file in the Ventura folder should be set to 0.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open the Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA recording limitations

You can record almost every keystroke, mouse selection, and menu and toolbar command in Corel VENTURA except for the following:

•	VENTURA Library operations

•	Mouse selection of text or objects

•	Drag & drop operations

•	Node editing

•	Frame anchoring

File menu commands	Insert menu commands	Tools menu commands
Save Page As EPS	CorelMEMO	Spelling
Version Control	Object	Thesaurus
Acquire Image	Format menu commands	Type Assist
Publish as commands	Artistic text	DataBase Publisher
Print	Publication	Scripts
Print setup	Tracking & Kerning	Ruler setup
Quick print	Override counter	Units
Edit menu commands	Multi-user	Options
Edit item	Update Auto Numbering	Customize
Manage overrides	Page menu commands	Color manager
Object	Show Header	Options
Links	Show Footer
View menu commands	Enable Header
Zoom	Enable Footer
Toolbars	Enable Footnotes
Snap	Header/Footer formats
Frame borders
Hide pictures commands
Rulers
Color correction
Refresh window
Note

•	Many of the commands that cannot be recorded have corresponding scripting commands that can be written into scripts.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open the Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Using scripts in VENTURA

Scripts increase the power and flexibility of Corel VENTURA by combining many actions in a single command. A script is a text file that contains simple commands that instruct Corel VENTURA to perform specified tasks. The simplest way to create a script is to "record" the keystroke, mouse selection, and menu and toolbar command in Corel VENTURA.

Corel VENTURA only records the results of keystrokes and mouse selections, instead of recording the keystrokes themselves. For example, instead of recording each keystroke involved in changing the font of the selected text to Courier, Corel VENTURA simply records the command FormatSelected Text "Courier". These commands are called application commands.

The application commands listed in a script are easy to understand. Most Corel VENTURA application commands are derived from the Corel VENTURA user-interface. For example, if your recording includes opening a document and pasting the Clipboard contents, the resulting script would include the FileOpen and EditPaste commands. The FileOpen command comes from clicking File, Open to open a document, and the EditPaste command comes from clicking Edit, Paste, to paste. If you execute these two commands using the toolbar buttons or shortcut keys, the same script commands are still recorded. Customizing your menu structure doesn't affect Corel VENTURA script command names.

Scripts can do more than just execute recorded Corel VENTURA commands [image] scripts can extend Corel VENTURA functionality by prompting the user for input, displaying messages, controlling other Corel and Windows applications, and performing and repeating commands while specified conditions are met. You can build complete applications that people with limited Corel VENTURA experience can use. Scripts that perform these types of actions must be written since these actions are not recordable. These type of commands that cannot be recorded are called programming statements and functions. Together, the programming statements and functions, and the Corel VENTURA application commands, make up the Corel SCRIPT Programming Language.

Note

•	If you run a script frequently, you can assign the script to a keystroke, a menu, or a Toolbar button.

•	Most large computer applications have a built-in programming language of some form, but some applications call their programs macros instead of scripts.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


VENTURA script file types

Corel VENTURA can use two types of script files: Internal and External.

Internal

An internal script is embedded into a publication stylesheet, and can only be executed or edited if a document using the stylesheet has been opened. If you save a Corel VENTURA recording as a script, it is saved as an internal script by default.

External

External scripts are saved as a text file that can be found on your system as a separate file. External scripts normally use the extension .CSC.

Using internal and external scripts

An advantage of external scripts is that you can use them with any Corel VENTURA document, they are not limited to the document that they're embedded in, as with internal scripts. Another advantage to external scripts is that you can pass them to coworkers through a network, or on a diskette, without having to send an entire Corel VENTURA document.

Internal scripts also have some advantages. For example, if you move a document around on your hard drive or on a network, the script moves with it. If your script is only used with one document, you should save it in the document as an internal script.

Importing and exporting scripts

Corel VENTURA can create a copy of an external script that can be saved in a Corel VENTURA document as an internal script. Corel VENTURA can also export an internal script, so that an external script can be copied to your system, or to a diskette.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Using the Corel SCRIPT Editor

The Corel SCRIPT Editor, included with Corel VENTURA, is a tool you can use to modify your saved recordings, or scripts. For example, if you have a script that you want to make a change to, you can either re-record the script or edit the commands in the script. It's often easier just to modify a few commands, rather than re-record the entire script. As well as editing commands, you can use the Editor to add commands that can't be recorded, or to write scripts from scratch.

Since scripts are standard text files, they can be edited with any Windows text editor or word processor. However, the Corel SCRIPT Editor also includes features to test, debug, and run script files.

The Corel SCRIPT Editor also includes tools to quickly create and edit custom dialog boxes that let the user return input to a running script. See Using custom dialog boxes in scripts for more information.

Note

•	If you've used scripts and custom dialog boxes in other Corel applications such as DRAW 6, PHOTO-PAINT 6, FLOW 3, or CAD 1, you'll find the Corel SCRIPT Editor has incorporated all the features of the Corel SCRIPT Dialog Editor, making it even easier to include custom dialog boxes in your scripts. The Dialog Editor is no longer a separate application.

•	Unlike scripts or macros included with other applications, Corel SCRIPT scripts are text only; there is no compiled binary component in the scripts. Before a script is executed, it is compiled internally into a program file.

•	Script files are saved with the extension .CSC.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


About the Corel SCRIPT Programming Language

Any recording you save as a script contains Corel VENTURA commands. These commands are part of the Corel SCRIPT programming language. The Corel SCRIPT programming language consists of two distinct sets of instructions:

•	Corel SCRIPT application commands and functions

•	Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions

Computer programming experience isn't a prerequisite for using Corel SCRIPT to modify and write scripts. However, the more knowledge, experience, and desire you have to learn the mechanics of Corel VENTURA, the more you'll be able to take advantage of the power of Corel SCRIPT. The amount of information you'll need to know about scripting will depend on the complexity of your scripts.

The Corel SCRIPT online Help file contains information covering instructions for novice script writers to reference material for experienced script writers and programmers. The following information categories are available in this online Help file:

Corel SCRIPT Basics
This section provides an overview of what Corel SCRIPT is, and how you can use it. It also provides information regarding the syntax and documentation conventions used in Corel SCRIPT.

Corel SCRIPT Concepts
This section introduces Corel SCRIPT programming language concepts. You should view this section if you are new to script writing. If you're a script writer or a programmer, you may want to skip to the next section.

Corel SCRIPT application commands and functions
Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions
These two sections explain the syntax and purpose of all Corel SCRIPT application commands and programming statements.

Corel SCRIPT Editor
Explains the features of the Corel SCRIPT Editor and how it can be used to quickly create and edit your scripts. This section also explains about creating and editing custom dialog boxes.

Custom dialog boxes
This section explains how to use custom dialog boxes in your scripts.

How to
Provides procedural information for using the Corel SCRIPT Editor, and for creating and editing custom dialog boxes.

Advanced Corel SCRIPT features
Describes the advanced features available in Corel SCRIPT to develop and use DLLs and executables. This section is aimed at experienced Windows programmers and third-party developers.

Reference
Provides reference information, such as error codes, warning messages, a character map, and a glossary.

The amount of information you'll need to know about scripting will depend on the complexity of your scripts.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Corel SCRIPT application commands and functions

Application commands

Any script you create by saving a recording of your Corel VENTURA actions is made of Corel SCRIPT application commands.

Corel SCRIPT application commands instruct Corel VENTURA and other Corel applications to perform specified actions. For example, a command may tell Corel VENTURA to open or to close a document. The application commands are easy to understand since most are one-word equivalents of the corresponding Corel application user-interface. For example, the FileNew command creates a new document. Most Corel VENTURA scripting commands perform the same way as their corresponding menu commands.

You can learn more about individual application commands by referring to either the Corel SCRIPT online Help, or the actual command in the Corel application's online Help.

Although most Corel VENTURA application commands are one-word equivalents of their corresponding menu commands, you need more than the command itself to execute an action in Corel VENTURA. If a command needs more information than is provided by the command name alone, parameters are required. The command name represents the feature. Parameters represent aspects of the feature you can change, or selections you can make. For example, the FormatSelectedText command requires parameters that indicate font properties. The following command sets the font to "Times New Roman," and the point size to 8 for selected text.

.FormatSelectedText "Times New Roman " , 8

Parameters are separated by commas and the command name is preceded by a period in a script.

Application functions

Application functions are not recordable; they must be written into a script. Application functions ask questions about the status of Corel VENTURA, Corel application, selected item in Corel applications, or document properties. For example, a function may ask Corel VENTURA about a document's page size. Functions cannot be recorded.

Note

•	Each Corel application that supports scripts has a unique set of application commands and functions. However, some Corel applications use the same name for a command, or a function. For example, the FileNew command is available in Corel VENTURA and other applications.

•	The other set of instructions in the Corel SCRIPT programming language is programming statements and functions.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics

 Click the button for a listing of Corel VENTURA application commands and functions


Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions

Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions are a common set of instructions that can be used with any Corel application, including Corel VENTURA, that supports scripting. Programming statements and functions are derived from traditional BASIC programming language dialects. If you're already familiar with a version of BASIC, you'll find the Corel SCRIPT programming language easy to read and understand. If you've never programmed using BASIC, you'll be happy to know that BASIC is one of the easiest languages to read, to understand, and to learn.

Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions send instructions or perform actions that aren't part of Corel VENTURA or any other Corel application. For example, Corel SCRIPT programming statements can be used to display a custom dialog box, include flow control statements and constructs such as loops, create and manipulate variables, and retrieve information about your computer setup. On their own, Corel SCRIPT programming statements form a powerful programming language. A script containing only Corel SCRIPT programming statements can be executed, even if Corel VENTURA or another Corel application is not running.

In the Corel SCRIPT online Help, Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions appear in uppercase, for example, LEFT, IF, and MESSAGEBOX.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics

 Click the button for a listing of Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions


Using custom dialog boxes in scripts

You can use a custom dialog box to get user input returned to a running script. Dialog boxes are created using Corel SCRIPT programming statements which supports Windows options and controls such as push buttons, drop-down list boxes, option buttons, and progress indicators. The following custom dialog box shows some of the dialog box controls available in Corel SCRIPT.

You have two options for creating the Corel SCRIPT statements used to produce a dialog box. Your first option is to use the Corel SCRIPT Editor and type in the dialog definition statements. This can prove to be a time-consuming option, because each statement’s parameters are specific, and it is difficult to visualize the dialog based on coordinate positions.

Your second option is to use dialog windows in Corel SCRIPT Editor. In dialog windows, you draw what you want your dialog box to look like. The dialog box, and the dialog controls within it, are graphical representations of Corel SCRIPT statements. Working with the dialog boxes in the SCRIPT Editor is similar to using a drawing or a painting application. In dialog windows, dialog controls are graphic objects that can be inserted, moved, re-sized, and aligned in a dialog box. You can create or edit a dialog box in a few steps using the Corel SCRIPT Editor.

Note

•	If you've used scripts and custom dialog boxes in other Corel applications such as DRAW 6, PHOTO-PAINT 6, FLOW 3, or CAD 1, you'll find the Corel SCRIPT Editor has incorporated all of the features of the Corel SCRIPT Dialog Editor, making it even easier to include custom dialog boxes in your scripts. The Dialog Editor is no longer a separate application.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Scripts and wizards included with VENTURA

The following list contains brief descriptions of the sample scripts and wizards that are included with Corel VENTURA 7. Wizards automate complicated and time-consuming tasks by asking you questions from dialog boxes, and then using your answers to create, layout, and format a Corel VENTURA document automatically. Since wizards are created using the Corel SCRIPT programming language, think of them as sophisticated scripts.

You can use these script and wizards as they are, or you can modify them to better suit your own needs, or use them as templates for writing your own scripts.

Most of these scripts and wizards can be executed by clicking Tools, Scripts, Run Script in Corel VENTURA or by clicking Debug, Execute in the Corel SCRIPT Editor. The sample scripts are available in the x:\Corel\Ventura7\Ventura\Scripts folder where x indicates a drive letter.

Script/Wizard	Function

BusForms.csb	Wizard to create business forms, letterhead, bus cards, and so on. The script has been compiled as a Corel SCRIPT Binary file. Click [image] for more information about running this type of file.

CopyFit.csc	Fits text in a selected frame.

CustomKB.csc	Prints a list of keyboard accelerator keys.

DBPEdit.csc	Substitute items in DataBase Publisher recipe.

DBPub.csc	Executes multiple DBPublisher recipes.

DictEdit.csc	Edit users hyphenation and spell checking dictionaries.

EPSInfo.csc	Lists the colors and fonts used in an EPS file.

FileFind.csc	Identifies files in chapter that do not appear in frames (or base page).

FileList.csc	Lists all files in current publication, on a chapter by chapter basis.

Guidewiz.csc	Frame, grid, and guideline maker.

ImportEx.csc	Prompts the user for a file to import, Imports the file and sets file properties to export on save. Choose the WordPerfect filter to import all versions of WordPerfect.

LIBList.csc	Creates a list of all the items in a specified Ventura library.

MakeLIB.csc	Creates a new (or opens an existing) Ventura Library and fills it with the selected files from a specified directory.

PrintSch.csc	Pre-schedules printing of publications (for example, print publications during off-peak hours).

Scaler.csc	Resizes a group of objects while maintaining the aspect ratio of the original layout.

StyleInf.csc	Generates paragraph tag information in a Corel VENTURA, Corel Quattro Pro, Corel Script, Microsoft Excel, or text format.

TagFind.csc	Searches document for unused tags.

TagView.csc 	Creates samples of tags used in stylesheet.

UnSpace.csc	Replaces double spaces with single spaces.

VConvert.csc	Converts documents from previous versions of Ventura into Ventura 7 format. This script has been made into an executable, vconvert.exe, that you can add to the Start menu, so you can run it independently of VENTURA.

Note: VENTURA 7 includes a text file called vconvert.txt, which allows you to view the source code for the executable file vconvert.exe.

VPCal.csb	Creates a calendar for a specified month and year. The script has been compiled as a Corel SCRIPT Binary file. Click [image] for more information about running this type of file.

WordCnt.csc	Counts all the words in a publication or the number of occurrences of a specified word.

XOnSave.csc	displays list of all files in current publication; prompts user to select those files they wish to set to Export on Save. Performs changes and saves file.

 Notes

•	If you run a script frequently, you can assign the script to a keystroke, a menu, or a Toolbar button.

•	Wizards have the same extension as Corel SCRIPT scripts (.CSC).

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Measurement units in VENTURA recordings and scripts

Most recordable Corel VENTURA scripting commands that use measurement parameters use tenths of a micron as the base unit of measurement. For example, the first four parameters of the .FilePrintOptionsLayout command set unit measurements using tenths of a micron.

.FilePrintOptionsLayout .Left=long, .Top=long, .Width=long, .Height=long, ...

If you recorded setting the four parameters to 1.5, 2, 6, and 8 inches respectively, the following command would be recorded (an inch equals 254,000 microns):

.FilePrintOptionsLayout 381000, 508000, 1524000, 2032000

If you write a script that used this command, you could specify your measurement units in inches by multiplying each measurement parameter by 254,000:

.FilePrintOptionsLayout 1.5*254000, 2*254000, 6*254000, 8*254000

Alternatively, you could use the Corel SCRIPT LENGTHCONVERT function to create a variable equal to the number of tenths of a micron in an inch:

M_INCH = LENGTHCONVERT (1 , 7 , 1)

.FilePrintOptionsLayout 1.5*M_INCH, 2*M_INCH, 6*M_INCH, 8*M_INCH

The following table provides conversion from other measurements to tenths of a micron:

Unit of measurement	Number of tenths of a micron per unit

inch	254,000

centimeters	100,000

points	3,527.78

Ciceros	45,118.7

didots	3,759.2

picas	42,333.33

Note

•	You can use the Corel SCRIPT ANGLECONVERT function to convert angle measurements.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Coordinates in VENTURA recordings and scripts

Corel VENTURA scripting commands that specify graphic or frame locations on a page use coordinates as parameters. Coordinates use tenths of a micron as the base unit of measurement, and are expressed as being relative to the base page frame's top left corner:

Most VENTURA commands that use coordinates, such as DrawRectangle (draws a rectangle graphic), specify four coordinate parameters. For example:

.DrawRectangle .Left=long, .Top=long, .Width=long, .Height=long

•	The Left parameter specifies the distance from the left side of the rectangle to the left side of the base page frame, in tenths of micron. Negative values indicate the left side is to the left of the base page frame.

•	The Top parameter specifies the distance from the top of the rectangle to the top side of the base page frame, in tenths of micron. Negative values indicate the top side is above the top of the base page frame.

•	The Width parameter specifies the distance, in tenths of a micron, from the left side of the rectangle to the right side of the rectangle.

•	The Height parameter specifies the distance, in tenths of a micron, from the top of the rectangle to the bottom of the rectangle.

Note

•	For more information about using microns, see Measurement units in VENTURA recordings and scripts.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Line-by-line script examples

This topic shows three simple scripts that can be used with Corel VENTURA. The first script reverses the last two characters you typed. The second script inserts the date and a salutation which could be used at the beginning of a letter. The third script creates a VENTURA Library and copies all the paragraph tags from the active document into the new Library.

Click [image] for an explanation of what the corresponding script line does.

Script Example #1

REM Reversing the last two characters

WITHOBJECT "CorelVentura.Automation.7"

.TextCharLeft 1, TRUE

.EditCut

.TextCharLeft 1, FALSE

.EditPaste

.TextCharRight 1, FALSE

END WITHOBJECT

Script Example #2

REM Begins a letter

WITHOBJECT "CorelVentura.Automation.7"

.TypeText CHR(10)

.InsertDateTime "MMMM d, yyyy", 0, FALSE

.TypeText CHR(10)

.TypeText "To whom it may concern," + CHR(10)

END WITHOBJECT

Script Example #3

REM VENTURA Library with paragraph tags

WITHOBJECT "CorelVentura.Automation.7"

.FileLibraryNew "C:\Win95\Desktop\ParaTag.VLB"

NumberOfPTags = .ParaTagCount ()

FOR i = 1 TO NumberOfPTags

TagName$ = .ParaTagGetAt (i)

.ParaTagCopy TagName$

.FileLibraryPaste

NEXT i

END WITHOBJECT

Note

•	If you run a script frequently, you can assign the script to a keystroke, a menu, or a toolbar button.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Non-executing script statement that provides a comment about the script's function.


Identifies Corel VENTURA as the application which will receive script commands.


Closes the path by which scripting commands are sent to VENTURA.


Moves the insertion point one character to the left and selects the character.


Cuts the current selection (a single character) to the clipboard.


Moves the insertion point one character to the left.


Pastes the clipboard contents at the insertion point (previously cut character).


Moves the insertion point one character to the right.


Inserts a paragraph return (CHR(10)) in the text.


Inserts the date into the text with a specified format.


Inserts a salutation and a paragraph return in the text.


Creates a VENTURA Library named ParaTag.


Counts the number of paragraph tags in the active document and assigns this value to the numeric variable NumberOfPTags.


Repeats the instructions enclosed by the FOR and NEXT statements. The instructions are repeated by the number of paragraph tags in the active document.


Assigns the name of a paragraph tag to the TagName$ variable. The name that is assigned is based on the index value (i).


Copies the paragraph tag specified with TagName$ variable to the clipboard.


Pastes the clipboard contents (a paragraph tag) into the newly created VENTURA Library (ParaTag.VLB).


Auto Scripts

Corel VENTURA can automatically run a script when you call certain commands on the File menu. These auto scripts enhance the way the commands work. For example, you can create an auto script that counts the number of words in a document whenever the File, Close command is issued. Or, you can create an auto script that triggers the spell checker whenever the print command is issued.

The following list notes the Corel VENTURA file menu events, and the corresponding menu command, that can trigger a script's auto execution. The first column shows the name of the auto script that is executed:

Auto script name	Event (Menu Command)

OnStart	Starting Corel VENTURA

OnNew	Creating a new document (click File, New)

OnOpen	Opening a document (click File, Open)

OnClose	Closing a document (click File, Close)

OnPrint	Printing a document (click File, Print)

OnSave	Saving a document (click File, Save)

OnExit	Ending your Corel VENTURA session (click File, Exit)

For VENTURA to automatically run an auto script, the auto script's name must replicate one of the names listed in the above table. The auto script must also reside in a specific location. The following auto scripts must reside in the Ventura StartUp folder as external scripts. In a typical Corel VENTURA installation, the Ventura folder is found in C:\Corel\Ventura7\Ventura\StartUp:

OnStart, OnNew, OnExit

The following auto scripts must reside in a Corel VENTURA document as internal scripts:

OnOpen, OnClose, OnPrint, OnSave

Note

•	If the StartUp folder does not exist, you should create it.

•	Auto scripts replace the functionality of the original File menu command. For example, if you record or write a script for OnPrint, you must execute the .FilePrint command within your script if you want the command to print a document.

•	If you use a button or a keystroke instead of the menu command, an auto script will still execute.

•	By holding down SHIFT when you click a File menu command that has an auto script associated with it, you can override an auto script's execution. For more information about overriding auto scripts, see Setting VENTURA's start up options or the Corel VENTURA script command .ToolsAutoScript.

•	If you run a script frequently, you can assign the script to a keystroke, a menu, or a Toolbar button.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open the Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Setting VENTURA's start-up options

You can set Corel VENTURA's start-up options by using start up switches.

Startup options	Action executed
VENTURA.EXE	Starts Corel VENTURA.
VENTURA.EXE file	Starts Corel VENTURA and opens a previously saved document. file specifies the name (including extension) and path of the document to open.
VENTURA.EXE /p file	Prints a previously saved document at the default printer port. file specifies the name (including extension) and path of the document to open and print.
VENTURA.EXE /pt file port	Prints a previously saved document at a specified printer port. file specifies the name (including extension) and path of the document to open and print. port specifies the printer port. In cases where the printer name is of more than one word,  enclose it with quotation marks. For example, "ABC Printer Model".
VENTURA.EXE /os	Prevents the execution of the OnStart auto script. Click [image] for more information about auto scripts.
VENTURA.EXE /osscript	Prevents the execution of the OnStart auto script. The script parameter specifies the name and path of the script to execute instead of the OnStart auto script. Do not leave a space between the switch (/os) and the script name (script).
VENTURA.EXE /d	Prevents the execution of auto scripts during a VENTURA session. Click [image] for more information about auto scripts.
VENTURA.EXE /uusername	Specifies the user's name if different from the network login name. username specifies a network login id. Do not leave a space between the switch (/u) and the network login id (username).
VENTURA.EXE /uusername /s pass	Specifies a network login id (username) and password (pass) for documents that have access rights protection. This option is used in conjunction with another option which opens a VENTURA document. Do not leave a space between the switch (/u or /s) and the parameter which follows it.
VENTURA.EXE /n	Prevents the displaying of the VENTURA splash screen. This option cannot be used in conjunction with other options.
What do you want to do?

To start Corel VENTURA with start-up switches

To always start Corel VENTURA with the same start-up switches

 Related Topics


To start Corel VENTURA with start-up switches

1.	Click Start, Run.

2.	In the Open text box, type VENTURA.EXE, along with the appropriate switches. If using more than one startup option, add a space between options. For example, type VENTURA.EXE /n, to avoid opening documents when Corel VENTURA opens.

Note

•	If you have a Corel VENTURA shortcut icon on the desktop, right-click the icon, then choose Properties. Click Shortcut, then specify the start-up options on the Target command line.

•	When you use more than one start-up option, add a space between options.

 Related Topics


To always start Corel VENTURA with the same start-up switches

1.	Click Start, Settings, Taskbar.

2.	Click Start Menu Programs, Advanced.

3.	Click Programs, Corel 7 (or the folder where Corel VENTURA resides).

4.	Right-click Corel VENTURA 7, and click Properties. Click Shortcut, then specify the startup options on the Target command line.

Note

•	If you have a Corel VENTURA shortcut icon on the desktop, right-click the icon, then choose Properties. Click Shortcut, then specify the start-up options on the Target command line.

•	When you use more than one start-up option, add a space between options.

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA and OLE automation

OLE Automation for Corel VENTURA is a flexible and powerful feature you can use to build applications that use Corel VENTURA components.

OLE Automation is an integration standard that allows applications to expose their programmable objects, so that other applications can control them. Exposing an object means an application makes the script or macro commands that control it available to other programming applications. The exposed commands become an extension of the controlling programming language.

Any Corel application that supports Corel SCRIPT provides one programmable OLE automation object. The object is used by OLE automation controllers such as Corel SCRIPT, to send Corel SCRIPT commands to other Corel applications. For example, Corel VENTURA application commands are sent to VENTURA. You can also use OLE automation controllers such as Microsoft Visual Basic, Microsoft Excel Visual Basic, and C++ to send commands to Corel VENTURA, and to develop applications using VENTURA and other Corel application components.

OLE Automation can be used for long and complicated manual processes that transfer data between two or more applications. For example, you may have a manual process that puts data into a spreadsheet to be used to create a presentation graphic. The graphic is then used in a desktop publishing application such as Corel VENTURA. If you use OLE Automation, you may be able to create a program that automatically performs these steps for you. OLE Automation gives you almost total control over a variety of different applications, allowing you to build the applications you need through its seamless integration capabilities.

Since Corel applications provide one programmable object, their documents cannot be directly accessed as objects from a controller. The Visual Basic GetObject command, for example, cannot be used to access a Corel document. Additionally, Corel applications don't expose an object library or support properties and methods. The only way to access a Corel document through OLE Automation is by using Corel SCRIPT application commands.

The Corel SCRIPT online Help provides a reference of all available Corel VENTURA application commands and functions. The online Help provides overview information about programming with OLE automation. For more information about OLE automation, see the following reference sources:

•	Microsoft Visual Basic Programmer's Guide

•	Microsoft Excel Visual Basic User's Guide

•	Microsoft Windows Developer's Kit

•	Microsoft Office Developer's Kit

Note

•	The advanced Corel SCRIPT programming feature described above is intended for experienced Windows programmers, and not for beginner script writers.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Corel SCRIPT Executable

Since Corel SCRIPT scripts are based on text files, they have no compiled binary executable component. Before a script is executed, it is internally compiled into an executable program file, and is re-compiled each time the script is run. To save the compile time, the Corel SCRIPT Editor includes a feature that compiles your scripts into executable program files. Compiling your scripts into Executables not only speeds up their run-time, but allows you, the developer, to hide the programming code that has gone into the creating of a script. You can run executables without having Corel SCRIPT Editor or Corel VENTURA running.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Corel SCRIPT and dynamic-linked libraries

Corel SCRIPT can call functions and subroutines in Windows DLLs (dynamic-linked libraries) such as those supplied with Windows, other applications' DLLs, or any custom DLL files. To find out how to use procedures in a DLL, you need the DLL's specific technical reference material. For example, to use the Windows DLLs, you need the Windows Software Development Kit.

You can also use Corel SCRIPT's programming language and the Corel SCRIPT Editor to develop your own custom Windows DLLs for your functions and subroutines. You can access your custom DLLs from Corel SCRIPT or other popular programming environments such as Pascal, C, and C++.

Note

•	DLLs created with Corel SCRIPT contain only one exportable function. This function is always named RUN. The RUN function executes the script commands in the script that was used to create the DLL.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Corel Add-ons for VENTURA

Corel Add-ons (.CAO) for Corel VENTURA are programs that add custom features to Corel VENTURA. Third-party software developers are making Add-ons commercially available to meet the specialized needs of Corel VENTURA users and the desktop publishing community. Click the How To button for information about installing and using Corel Add-ons.

The following list contains brief descriptions of the Corel Add-ons for VENTURA that are included with Corel VENTURA 7. The Add-ons are available in the x:\Corel\Ventura7\Ventura\Addons folder (based on a typical Corel installation where x indicates the drive letter). Note: a Corel Add-on can contain and perform more than one function.

Add-ons Name	Function Name	Purpose
Ventura7	Index Concordance	Searches the document for a list of words, and inserts an index entry for each found occurrence of a listed word. Click [image] for more information.
	Text to table	Converts selected text to a table. Click [image] for more information.
	Table Presets	Inserts a table using preset weekly or monthly headings, or increment range values. Click [image] for more information.
S2V7	SGMLImport	Imports SGML documents into Corel VENTURA. Click [image] for more information.
How do I develop Corel Add-ons?

Develop Corel Add-ons using programming languages other than Corel SCRIPT.

Develop Corel Add-ons using the Corel SCRIPT programming language.

 Related Topics


To create index entries for a list of words

1.	If it does not already exist, create a text file that contains the list of words you want to create index entries for. You can use Corel VENTURA 7 (click File, Export), a Windows-based word processor such as Corel WordPerfect, or a Windows text editor such as Notepad to create the list of words. Click [image] for information about the word list format to use in the text file.

2.	Click Ventura7, Index Concordance.

If the Ventura7 menu doesn't appear on Corel VENTURA's main Menu Bar, you must install the VENTURA7 Corel Add-on. This Corel Add-on provides the word list indexing functionality to Corel VENTURA 7. The VENTURA7 Corel Add-on is located in the x:\Corel\Ventura7\Ventura\Addons folder (where x indicates the drive letter).

Click [image] for information about installing Corel Add-ons. Click [image] for other information about Corel Add-ons.

3.	Type the name and path of the text file containing the word list in the File Name box, or click Browse to search for the text file.

4.	Set any of the following options:

Enable the Update now check box to have the index reflect the changes made to the document.

Use the Title box to specify the index's title.

Use the Chapter box to specify which chapter you want the text file containing the index added to.

Use the File box to specifies the index text file's filename.

 Related Topics


Formatting rules for word list text files

Each entry must be on a separate line followed by a line return. For example:

cat

dog

horse

Specify index entries for segregate indexes by placing the segregated index name in parentheses preceding the index word. For example:

(Pets,0)cat

(Pets,0)dog

(Farm,0)horse

In the above example, the first two words are part of the Pets index and the last word is part of the Farm index. The number following the index name indicates the entry type: 0 for Index Entry, 1 for See, and 2 for See Also. If you want to use an entry type but don't want to use a segregated index, use the Default index. For example:

(Default,0)cat

(Default,2)dog

(Default,1)horse

Specify sort keys by placing the key letter in parentheses following the entry. For example:

1996(N)

2000(T)

4000(F)

Specify subentries by separating entries with semicolons. For example:

Level1;Level2;Level3

Note

•	The word list is case sensitive. For example, if the word list contains "cat," an index entry will not be placed in the document for any occurrence of "Cat" or "CAT."

•	See the Insert Index Entry dialog box for more information about index entries (click Insert, Index Entry).

 Related Topics


To convert text to a table

1.	Select the text to convert to a table. The text should include separator characters such as tabs, commas, or paragraph marks.

2.	Click Ventura7, Text to table.

If the Ventura7 menu doesn't appear on Corel VENTURA's main Menu Bar, you must install the VENTURA7 Corel Add-on. This Corel Add-on provides the text to table functionality to Corel VENTURA 7. The VENTURA7 Corel Add-on is located in the x:\Corel\Ventura7\Ventura\Addons folder (where x indicates the drive letter).

Click [image] for information about installing Corel Add-ons. Click [image] for other information about Corel Add-ons.

3.	Set the separate cell option you want.

 Related Topics


To insert a preset table

1.	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the table.

2.	Click Ventura7, Table Presets.

If the Ventura7 menu doesn't appear on Corel VENTURA's main Menu Bar, you must install the VENTURA7 Corel Add-on. This Corel Add-on provides the table presets functionality to Corel VENTURA 7. The VENTURA7 Corel Add-on is located in the x:\Corel\Ventura7\Ventura\Addons folder (where x indicates the drive letter).

Click [image] for information about installing Corel Add-ons. Click [image] for other information about Corel Add-ons.

3.	Select one of the following table types:

•	Weekdays inserts an eight-column table that contains the days of the week (Mon to Sun) in the first row. You must specify the number of rows for this option.

•	Months inserts a 13-column table that contains the months of a year (Jan to Dec) in the first row. You must specify the number of rows for this option.

•	Range inserts a table in which you specify the number of rows and columns, and the increment range values for each cell in the first column. The increment values are specified in the Start and Increment boxes. For example, setting Start to 5, and Increment to 3, creates a table in which the first column cells contain the values 5-7, 8-10, 11-13, and so on.

•	Others inserts a table in which you specify the number of rows and columns.

4.	Select any other options you want.

 Related Topics


Recording


To record Corel VENTURA commands

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Start Recording.

2.	Use VENTURA as you normally would to perform the task you want to record.

3.	To end the recording session, click Tools, Scripts, Stop Recording. The recording is stored in the VENTURA  memory. The recording ceases to exist when the active VENTURA session ends.

Note

•	See Tips for recording VENTURA actions and Corel VENTURA recording limitations for more information.

•	An existing recording in your computer's VENTURA memory is overwritten when you record another set of commands. Save your recording as a script before you record other commands if you want to reuse your initial recording.

•	If you want to be able to use the recording each time you run VENTURA, then you must save it as a Corel SCRIPT script.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


To play a recording

•	Click Tools, Scripts, Playback Recording.

Note

•	Recordings are played back in the active VENTURA document. Some recordings depend on the position of the insertion point. Remember to position the insertion point in the correct location before playing back those recordings.

•	Recordings exists in your computer's VENTURA memory.

•	See Tips for recording VENTURA actions and Corel VENTURA recording limitations for more information.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


To save a recording as an internal script

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Save Recording.

2.	Type a script filename in the Name text box.

Note

•	Recordings saved as internal Corel SCRIPT scripts are embedded in the active Corel VENTURA document. You can also save recordings as external script files.

•	You can enter a brief description of the script in the Description text box. The description is saved in the script's first line as a remark statement (REM). In addition, if a script with a description is assigned to a VENTURA toolbar, the description will appear in the Status Bar when you point to the toolbar button.

•	Saved recordings, in addition to recorded commands and a description, include other Corel SCRIPT syntax. The second line is a remark statement (REM) that notes the date the script was saved and other system information.

Recorded commands are enclosed by the WITHOBJECT and the END WITHOBJECT statements. These statements direct Corel SCRIPT to the application the recorded commands are executed with.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


To save a recording as an external script

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Save Recording.

2.	Click External.

3.	Type a script file name in the File Name text box.

Note

•	External Corel SCRIPT scripts are saved as text files with a CSC extension on your system. You can also save recordings as internal script files.

•	You can enter a brief description of the script in the Description text box. The description is saved in the script's first line as a remark statement (REM). Additionally, if a script with a description is assigned to a VENTURA toolbar, the description will appear in the Status Bar when you point to the toolbar button.

•	Saved recordings, in addition to recorded commands and a description, include other Corel SCRIPT syntax. The second line is a remark statement (REM) that notes the date the script was saved and some other system information.

Recorded commands are enclosed by the WITHOBJECT and the END WITHOBJECT statements. These statements direct Corel SCRIPT to execute the recorded commands with Corel VENTURA.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Scripts


To run a Corel SCRIPT script (or a saved recording)

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Run / Manage Script.

2.	Select a script from the Available Scripts list box.

The Available Scripts list box lists the internal scripts ( [image]) in the active VENTURA document, and the external scripts ( [image]) in the current script folder. You can change the current script folder by clicking the Browse button (...).

3.	Click Run.

Tip

•	You can also perform the procedure noted above with the VENTURA Navigator.

Note

•	You can also run external scripts by opening the Corel SCRIPT Editor. You can open the Editor from VENTURA by clicking Tools, Scripts, Corel SCRIPT Editor, or from the Windows desktop.

•	If you often run the same script, you can assign it to a shortcut key, a toolbar button, or a menu command.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


To edit an internal script in VENTURA

The VENTURA document that holds the internal script must be active before the following steps can be completed.

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Run / Manage Script.

2.	Select an internal script from the Available Scripts list box.

The Available Scripts list box lists the internal scripts ( [image]) in the active VENTURA document and the external scripts ( [image]) in the current script folder.

3.	Click Edit. From the Corel SCRIPT Editor, you can make changes to the script.

Tip

•	You can also perform the procedure noted above with the VENTURA Navigator.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


To edit an external script from VENTURA

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Run / Manage Script.

2.	Select an external script from the Available Scripts list box.

The Available Scripts list box lists the internal scripts ( [image]) in the active VENTURA document and the external scripts ( [image]) in the current script folder. If the script you want to edit doesn't appear in the list box, change the current script folder by clicking Browse. button (...).

3.	Click Edit. From the Corel SCRIPT Editor, you can make changes to the script.

Tip

•	You can also perform the procedure noted above with the VENTURA Navigator.

Note

•	You can also open external scripts by opening the Corel SCRIPT Editor from VENTURA by clicking Tools, Scripts, Corel SCRIPT Editor, or from the Windows desktop.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


To rename an internal script in VENTURA

The VENTURA document that holds the internal script must be active before the following steps can be completed.

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Run / Manage Script.

2.	Select an internal script from the Available Scripts list box.

The Available Scripts list box lists the internal scripts ( [image]) in the active VENTURA document and the external scripts ( [image]) in the current script folder.

3.	Click Rename.

4.	Type the new script name in the Available Scripts list box, and then press ENTER.

Tip

•	You can also perform the procedure noted above with the VENTURA Navigator.

Note

•	Internal script names follow the Windows file naming rules (maximum 255 characters, including spaces).

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


To delete an internal script in VENTURA

The VENTURA document that holds the internal script must be active before the following steps can be completed.

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Run / Manage Script.

2.	Select an internal script from the Available Scripts list box.

The Available Scripts list box lists the internal scripts ( [image]) in the active VENTURA document, and the external scripts ( [image]) in the current script folder.

3.	Click Delete.

Tip

•	You can also perform the procedure noted above with the VENTURA Navigator.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


To copy an external script to an internal VENTURA script

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Run / Manage Script.

2.	If the external script you want to copy is not in an active script folder, click Browse button (...) to change the folder.

3.	Click the script you want to copy in the Available Scripts list box.

4.	Click Import. The external script is copied to the active VENTURA document as an internal script.

Tip

•	You can also perform the procedure noted above with the VENTURA Navigator.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


To copy an internal VENTURA script to an external script

1. Activate the VENTURA document that contains the internal script that you want to copy.

2.	Click Tools, Scripts, Run / Manage Script.

3.	If the folder where you want copy the internal scripts to is not the active script folder, click Browse (...) to change the folder.

4.	Click the script you want to copy in the Available Scripts list box.

5.	Click Export. The internal script is copied as an external script on your system.

Tip

•	You can also perform the procedure noted above with the VENTURA Navigator.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


To start the Corel SCRIPT Editor from VENTURA

•	Click Tools, Scripts, Corel SCRIPT Editor.

Note

•	To edit an internal script, you must first open the Scripts dialog box (Click Tools, Scripts, Run / Manage Script).

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts, and also provides a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


To access Corel SCRIPT online help

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Customize


To assign a Corel SCRIPT script to a shortcut key

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the Ventura Scripts folder or the Document Scripts folder (if exists).

The Ventura Scripts folder contains all the scripts that reside in the C:\Corel\Ventura7\Ventura\Scripts folder on your system (with a typical installation). The Document Scripts folder contains the internal scripts that reside in the active document.

4.	Click the script you want to assign.

5.	Click the Press New Shortcut Key box.

6.	Press the keyboard combination you want to assign to the command. To make a correction, press the Backspace key.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL+ALT+1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1,2,3, and 4 keys in succession.

Note

•	To have accelerator conflicts resolved automatically, enable Go To Conflict On Assign.

•	If you assign an internal script to a shortcut key, the shortcut key will only execute the script when the document that contains the script is open and active.

 Related Topics


To assign a Corel SCRIPT script to a menu

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the Ventura Scripts folder or the Document Scripts folder (if exists).

The Ventura Scripts folder contains all the scripts that reside in the C:\Corel\Ventura7\Ventura\Scripts folder on your system (with a typical installation). The Document Scripts folder contains the internal scripts that reside in the active document.

4.	Click the script you want to assign.

5.	In the Menu box, click the menu or sub-menu where you want to add the command.

6.	Click Add.

Tip

•	Use the Separator button to add organizational lines to your menus.

•	If you assign an internal script to a menu, the menu command will only execute the script when the document that contains the script is open and active.

 Related Topics


To assign a Corel SCRIPT script to a toolbar button
To assign a Corel SCRIPT script to a VENTURA toolbar button

1.	Activate the toolbar you want to edit.

2.	Click Tools, Customize.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the Ventura Scripts folder or the Document Scripts folder (if exists).

The Ventura Scripts folder contains all the scripts that reside in the C:\Corel\Ventura7\Ventura\Scripts folder on your system (with a typical installation). The Document Scripts folder contains the internal scripts that reside in the active document.

4.	Click the script you want to assign.

5.	Drag the appropriate command button to the toolbar. Right-click to cancel the movement.

Tip

•	If a script's first line, second line, or both, are REM statements, they are displayed in the Description text box.

•	If you assign an internal script to a toolbar button, the button  will only execute the script when the document that contains the script is open and active.

 Related Topics


Stylesheets and tags

Stylesheets

Tags for paragraphs, characters, frames, as well as the master pages for each document are kept in an internal Corel VENTURA file called a stylesheet. Each document has one stylesheet. By applying a different stylesheet to your document, you can change the formatting completely. Or if you want to copy tags between documents, use the Format, Manage Tag List (Merge Tags) command. You can also share tags or stylesheets between documents by placing them in a VENTURA Library.

When you apply a new stylesheet to a document, if the new stylesheet uses the same tag names as your original, the formatting is replaced automatically.

Note: When you open a document from a previous version of Corel VENTURA with more than one stylesheet attached, a conversion wizard guides you through the steps required to merge the stylesheets.

Tags

Tags are collections of formatting attributes that you can apply instantly to paragraphs, characters, or drawn frames. For example, the Body Text paragraph tag in Corel VENTURA's default stylesheet includes information about justification, letter, word, line, and paragraph spacing, hyphenation, spelling language, and more. In text entry mode, the Property Bar displays a list of the paragraph tags in the current document.

Frame tags also "remember" the settings applied to those drawn frames. Once you've created a frame tag, if you want to reapply the same formatting to a new object, simply select the object and apply the tag.

Anytime you want to change the attributes of a tag, just change the formatting for one item that uses that tag. Corel VENTURA instantly applies your changes to all paragraphs with the same tag.

Although paragraph tags are used to give your documents a consistent look, Corel VENTURA lets you make adjustments to paragraphs without creating a separate tag. These are called "overrides." You can apply them using the Format, Paragraph Overrides command or the Property Bar when it's in Override mode. Overrides are not transferred when tags are copied to another stylesheet, but you can use them as the basis for tags as required.

 Related Topics


Managing tags

In Corel VENTURA, you have several ways to manage paragraph, frame, table border, and character tags [image] the Manage Tag List dialog box, the Navigator, or the VENTURA Library.

Manage Tag List dialog box

You can use the Format menu's Manage Tag List dialog box to add or edit tags in the current document. You can also copy tags from other stylesheets into the current document with the Merge Tags command. For paragraph tags, you can also use this dialog box to rename and delete tags using the right-mouse-button menu, assign shortcut keys and to drag and drop tags into the Library.

The VENTURA Navigator

The VENTURA Navigator can be used to copy all tags and the master pages in a stylesheet between open publications. You can also rename stylesheets or open the Manage Tag List dialog using the Navigator's context menus.

VENTURA Libraries

To copy a tag into a library, in the Manage Tag List dialog box, right-click the tag and click copy [image] you can then paste (or drag and drop) the tag into any open Library.

If you keep your stylesheet in a VENTURA Library, any changes you make to the stylesheet are reflected in every publication that uses it.

 Related Topics


Tags and overrides

Every paragraph [image] that is, any amount of text followed by a paragraph symbol (¶) [image] has a paragraph tag. When you need to modify the appearance of a paragraph, you can make the changes in the paragraph's tag or apply the changes as overrides. Overriding tags is useful when you need to make one-of-a-kind adjustments [image] for example, adding or moving tab stops [image] to a particular paragraph without affecting other paragraphs formatted with the same paragraph tag. If you're frequently making the same adjustments to paragraphs with a particular tag, then it's probably better to modify the tag settings accordingly, or create a new tag.

Overrides are especially useful for laying out shorter, more design-intensive documents, like magazine ads and brochures. With these types of documents, you're often faced with getting text to fit a given space. When reducing the amount of text isn't sufficient, the only remedy left is adjusting the formatting, perhaps by reducing the inter-line or inter-word spacing. That's where formatting overrides come in handy. Rather than creating a new tag with the necessary formatting adjustments, you can simply apply them as overrides to the text in question.

Longer, more structured documents, such as reports and manuals, often require the occasional override as well. The keyword here is occasional. Remember, tags are supposed to help you create consistent-looking documents faster and easier. Overusing overrides in long documents not only undermines these benefits but makes it harder for others to duplicate the formatting in your document. (For more information about the benefits of using tags, click Related Topics and choose "Why use tags.")

When you apply overrides, Corel VENTURA puts a symbol ( [image]) next to the paragraph's tag name. This tells you that the formatting specified in a tag has been modified in one or more paragraphs.

Like most other actions you perform in Corel VENTURA, you can undo overrides with the Undo command (Edit menu) immediately after applying the formatting, or at anytime thereafter by reapplying the paragraph's tag or by using the Manage Overrides command (Edit menu). The same command also lets you apply the overrides to the all paragraphs with the same tag. For more information, click Related Topics.

Color overrides

The Uniform Fill tool and the Fill tool palette (which lists the most recently used fill colors, and is available on the Standard toolbar) apply color overrides to text on a word by word basis, unless you apply them through the Paragraph Properties dialog box. Other fill tools, such as the Fountain Fill tool, apply color overrides on a paragraph by paragraph basis.

 Related Topics


Why use tags?

Although you can format text directly using the Paragraph Overrides command and the Property Bar, there are several advantages to storing the formatting in tags and applying the tags to text:

•	Formatting a document with tags saves time since each tag can apply many formatting attributes at the same time.

•	Tags ensure consistent formatting throughout the entire document.

•	Tags make incorporating design changes easy. When you modify a tag, all paragraphs with that tag are automatically reformatted throughout the entire document.

•	Since stylesheets can be shared among other Corel VENTURA users (by linking it to a library), it's easy to maintain uniform formatting throughout a multi-document project.


To rename stylesheets

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the drop-down list.

3.	Double-click the document which contains the stylesheet.

4.	Right-click the stylesheet, choose Rename.

 Related Topics


Managing tags and stylesheets


To create a new stylesheet

1.	Click File, New.

2.	Choose Default.vp, click OK.

3.	Make the required changes.

4.	Save the document.

 Related Topics


Assigning shortcut keys to paragraph tags

Instead of assigning shortcuts keys directly to paragraph tags, you assign them to "Common Tags," then map the Common Tags to the paragraph tags. This enables you to use the same set of shortcuts in other stylesheets even though names of the tags might be different in each stylesheet. For example, suppose in one stylesheet, the tag name for the level 1 heading is "Heading 1", while in another it's "Level 1 Head". To assign the same shortcut to both tags, you assign it to a Common Tag, then map that Common Tag to the Heading 1 and Level 1 Head tags.

What do you want to do?

Assign shortcut keys to Common Tags

Map Common Tag shortkey keys to paragraph tags


To assign shortcut keys to Common Tags

1.	Click, Tools, Customize.

2.	Click the Keyboard tab.

3.	From the Commands list, double-click the Common Tags folder.

4.	Click the Common Tag you want to assign a shortcut key to.

5.	Type the keyboard combination you want to assign to the selected tag.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL + ALT + 1,2,3,4 is created by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1, 2, 3, and 4 keys in succession.

6.	Click Assign, and repeat step 4 and 5 for the other tags.

After assigning the shortcuts keys to the Common Tags, use the Format, Manage Tag List command to map them to the paragraph tags in the active document. For more information, click Related Topics and choose "To map Common Tag shortkey keys to paragraph tags."

Notes

•	Click Reset all to clear the current assignments.

•	To remove the shortcut key assigned to tag, choose None from the Common Tags column.

•	You can also load shortcut keys from other documents. Click Load, and browse to find the correct .acl file.

•	The following keys or key combinations are system keys and are not valid as part of any accelerator

F1

Alt + F6

Alt + TAB

Alt + ESCAPE

Ctrl + ESCAPE

Ctrl + / ('/' on the numeric keypad is valid)

 Related Topics


To map Common Tag shortkey keys to paragraph tags

1.	Click, Format, Manage Tag List.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click Shortcut keys.

4.	Click in the Common Tags column and select a tag to map its shortcut key to the corresponding paragraph tag.

Tip

•	You can change the shortcut assigned to a Common Tag via the Customize button or the Tools, Customize command. For instructions, click Related Topics and choose "To assign shortcut keys to Common Tags."

•	To use the shortcut keys from another document, use the Tools, Customize command to load the Accelerator file containing the shortcut keys you want. For more information, click Related Topics and choose "To load a set of of customized keyboard assignments."

 Related Topics


To change stylesheets

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Select the document with the stylesheet you want to change.

4.	Right-click, choose Load Stylesheet.

5.	Browse to find the stylesheet.

6.	Select the stylesheet, click Open.

Note

•	If the stylesheet you want is stored in a Library, you can drag it from the Library and drop it onto any page in the document. For instructions, click Related Topics and choose " To use library items in a document."

 Related Topics


To rename a tag

1.	Click Format, Manage Tag List.

2.	Click the tab that corresponds to the type of tag you want to rename.

3.	Right-click the tag you wish to rename and choose Rename.

4.	Click Rename.

5.	Type the desired name in the New Name box.

Note

•	You cannot rename generated paragraph tags (tags with names starting with Z_), the Default frame tag, or the built-in character tags (Bold, Underline and Italic).

 Related Topics


To override formatting in a paragraph tag

You can apply formatting changes to a paragraph without affecting all the paragraphs with the same tag. These local changes are called overrides. Overrides are used when you want to change a paragraph without affecting the paragraph tag.

1.	Select the paragraph you want to format.

 How?

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Overrides.

3.	Choose the formatting you want.

Tip

•	You can also use the Property Bar to apply overrides. For more information, click Related Topics and choose "To switch the text formatting Property Bar between Tag mode and Override mode."

Note

•	If you want to copy the formatting changes to the selected paragraph tag, use the Manage Overrides dialog box.

•	You can prevent formatting in tags from being overridden by enabling the Disable Overrides option in the Publication Properties dialog box (Format menu).

 Related Topics


To edit a tag

1.	Click Format, Manage Tag List.

2.	Click the tab that corresponds to the type of tag you want to edit.

3.	Select a tag from the Tag list.

4.	Click Edit Tag.

5.	Select the new tag attributes.

 Note

•	If you want to change the attributes of a character tag, use the Character Tags dialog box (click Format, Character Tag). If you apply attributes to selected text, those attributes will be applied to that text but will not alter the character tag.

 Related Topics


To delete a tag

1.	Click Format, Manage Tag List.

2.	Click the tab that corresponds to the type of tag you want to delete.

3.	Right-click the tag you want to delete, then click Delete Tag(s).

4.	Select the tag you want to use to apply to items formatted with the deleted tag.

Tip

•	To delete multiple tags, click them while holding down the SHIFT key or the CTRL key.

 Related Topics


To create a new tag

1.	Click Format, Manage Tag List.

2.	Click the tab that corresponds to the type of tag you want to create.

3.	Click Add Tag.

4.	Enter a name for the new tag.

5.	From the Copy Attributes From box, select the tag that has some of the formatting you want in the new tag.

Note

•	You can categorize paragraph tags according to the type of paragraph (heading, list item, table text etc.) you will be applying them to. If you're using the Tags window, you can sort the tags by type. To use the Tags window, you must add it to a menu or toolbar using the Tools, Customize command.

 Related Topics


To add tags from another stylesheet

1.	Click Format, Manage Tag List.

2.	Click the tab that corresponds to the type of tag you want to add.

3.	Click Merge Tags.

4.	Select the document or chapter that contains the tag(s) you want to add.

5.	Select the tags you want to add.

6.	Click Merge.

Tip

•	You can also copy paragraph tags between open documents using the Copy and Paste commands in the Edit menu. Using the [image] tool, click the paragraph formatted with the tag you want to copy. Click Edit, Copy, select a paragraph in the other document, then click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To print tag definitions in a stylesheet

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Run/Manage Scripts.

2.	From the Available Scripts list, click STYLEINFO.

3.	Click Run.

4.	Follow the instructions on the screen.

 Related Topics


Organizing and sorting paragraph tags by type
Organizing and sort paragraph tags by type

You can categorize paragraph tags according to the type of paragraph (heading, list item, table text etc.) you will be applying them to. If you're using the Tags Window, you can sort the tags by type.

What do you want to do?

Categorize paragraph tags by type

Sort paragraph tags in the Tags Window by type

 Related Topics


To categorize tags by type
To categorize paragraph tags by type

1.	Click Format, Manage Tag List.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	From the Tag List, click tag you want to categorize.

4.	Click Edit Tag.

5.	Click the Breaks tab.

6.	From the Tag Type box, click the category you want to assign the selected tag to.

The paragraph tag will appear in the specified category when you sort the tags in the Tags Window. For more information, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To sort paragraph tags in the Tags window by type

1.	Open the Tags Window. (See Note below)

2.	Right-click anywhere in the Tags window.

3.	Point to Sort Tags and click a command to specify how you want to sort the tags.

Note

•	To open the Tags Window, you must first add it to a menu command or toolbar using the Tools, Customize command. For instructions, click Related Topics. The Tags Window is located in the Tools folder in the Customize dialog box.

 Related Topics


Adding and formatting tables

Corel VENTURA makes it easy to create new tables, and import and edit existing ones. You can:

·	import tables from the leading word processing, database, and spreadsheet packages

·	automatically create tables from databases and spreadsheets

·	place pictures in cells

·	type multiple paragraphs in cells

·	insert footnotes, cross-references, and index entries in cells

·	skew the left column and/or top row and skew the text in already-skewed rows or columns

·	drag and drop data between cells or from tables in the document window, and drag and drop rows or columns to rearrange the table

·	sort data in columns. Corel VENTURA's sorting feature rearranges the data in your table alphabetically, numerically, or by date. You can sort the data within a single column or sort the entire table on a row-by-row basis.

·	use Autofill to enter data automatically

·	do math and other spreadsheet functions. By placing a formula in a cell, you can perform simple or complex calculations on the data within your table. For simple formulas, such as SUM or AVERAGE, you can type the parameters of the formula into an entry box on Table Property Bar. For complex formulas, however, choose the Table, Function command and let the Function Wizard guide you in choosing the elements (e.g.,  functions, numeric format, etc.) of a formula.

·	choose from a wide array of formatting operations, including changing cell margins and border styles, merging and splitting cells, skewing the top row, and shading, coloring, and adding preset fills to cells

 Related Topics


Creating and filling a table


To create a table

1.	Position the insertion point where you want to place the table.

2.	Click Table, Create Table, then display the General tab.

3.	In the Rows and Columns boxes, specify the number of rows and columns for the table.

4.	Choose other table settings from the pages in the dialog box if desired.

Note

·	To create a table inside a frame, select the frame prior to choosing the Create Table command. The advantage of placing a table in a frame is that you can add a caption to the table for displaying the table name and number. VENTURA will increment the number automatically if you use a counter.

 Related Topics


To import a table

1.	Click File, Import Text.

2.	Choose the format of the file you are importing from the Files of type box.

For more information on the file formats available for importing tables, click [image].

3.	Choose a drive from the Look in box and double-click the folder where the file is stored.

4.	Double-click the filename.

Note

·	The Import Text dialog box contains options for controlling where the table is placed in the document. Enable Add to file list to append the filename to the File list without loading the table into a frame, or enable Insert at Cursor to place the table at the location in the document where the cursor is planted.

 Related Topics


Creating a table from information in a database

Using the DataBase Publisher commands in the Tools menu, you can import information from a database or spreadsheet file and convert it into a pre-formatted table at the same time. The information is accessed through Corel DataBase Publisher which enables you to gather information from a variety of data sources, including files created in programs such as Borland® dbase and Microsoft® Excel.

Whereas DataBase Publisher can only collect information from existing databases, Corel DATABASE EDITOR lets you create and edit them. After creating the database you can bring the data into VENTURA via DataBase Publisher.

What do you want to do?

Use Corel DataBase Publisher to create a table from information in a database

Create a database using Corel DATABASE EDITOR

 Related Topics


To use Corel DataBase Publisher to create a table from information in a database

1.	Click, Tools, DataBase Publisher, New Recipe Wizard.

2.	Click the Browse button to locate the database information you want to make into table.

3.	If you only want a portion of the database, specify the number of records you want to appear in the table.

To see the contents of the database, click Display. Click the Close All button to continue.

4.	Click Next.

5.	Select the field(s) you want to appear in the table.

6.	Select a table format.

7.	Click Next and complete the remaining steps.

Note

·	Corel DataBase Publisher is an optional component. If you selected the Typical setup option when you installed VENTURA, then you installed DataBase Publisher. If you would like to install DataBase Publisher run Setup again. For instructions, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To create or edit a database using Corel DATABASE EDITOR
To create a database using Corel DATABASE EDITOR

1.	Click the [image] button on the toolbar and choose Corel DATABASE EDITOR.

2.	Click File, New and type a name for the file.

3.	Specify the structure of the database and the information you want in it.

For information on how to do this, consult the Help for DATABASE EDITOR.

4.	Click Close.

5.	Use Corel DataBase Publisher to bring the database into VENTURA as a table.

 How?

Note

·	Corel DATABASE EDITOR is an optional component. If you choose not to install it when you installed VENTURA, run Setup again and select Custom, Tools & Utilities. For more information on installing components, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


File formats for importing tables

Tables are imported into Corel VENTURA as text files. You can import using any of the following file formats.

File Format	Version	Extension

Ami Professional	3.1	*.sam

Corel Quattro Pro	1 and 2	*.wb

Lotus 1-2-3	1, 3, and 4	*.wk

Microsoft Excel	1, 3, 4, and 5	*.xls

Microsoft Word	6 and 7	*.doc

Rich Text Format	N/A	*.rtf

Corel WordPerfect	6x	*.wpg

Notes

·	Only the first page in a spreadsheet is imported as a table.

·	Functions embedded within spreadsheets imported from Lotus 1-2-3, Excel, or Corel Quattro Pro will still work in Corel VENTURA.


To type text in cells

1.	Click in a table cell.

2.	Type the text.

As you type, Corel VENTURA wraps the text from one line to the next. The cell height increases to accommodate the amount of text you enter.

Tips

·	You can have multiple paragraphs within a single cell. Press ENTER to add additional paragraphs.

·	If you are unable to place the insertion point before text that is flush with the table boundary, decrease the Frame Selection value found in the Options dialog box (Selection tab). This will keep the insertion point from changing to the pointer.

 Related Topics


To edit the text in cells

To	Do this

Remove text from one or more cells	Position the cursor directly after the text you want to delete and press BACKSPACE.

Click and drag across one or more cells to highlight them and press DELETE.

Replace the text in a cell	Select the text you want to replace and type the replacement text.

Move or copy text from one cell to another	Select the text and click Edit, Cut or Copy. Position the cursor in the cell where you want the text placed, and click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To place a picture in a cell

1.	Select the frame you want placed in a cell.

2.	Click the Frame Anchor tool [image].

3.	Click in the cell to anchor the frame inside it.

Note

·	To change the frame's position, click Format, Frame, and choose the General tab (click Advanced if the Advanced settings are not visible). You can then set the Frame Anchor Position and Alignment.

·	If the cell in which you've placed the frame anchor contains text, choose the course you want the text to flow around the frame by opening the Frame Properties dialog box (Format menu) and choosing a Flow option such as Above/Below on the General tab.

 Related Topics


Modifying a table


To select cells and move between them

To	Do this

Select cells, rows, columns, or the entire table	Click in the first cell you want to select and drag across the table until the cells you want are highlighted

Click in a cell, click Table, Select, and choose an option

Select a range of cells	Select the first cell, hold down SHIFT, and click the last cell in the range

Move between cells	Click inside any of the cells

Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move from one cell to the next

 Related Topics


Adding and removing rows and columns

You can add or delete rows and columns in a table using the commands in the Table menu.

What do you want to do?

Add rows to a table

Add columns to a table

Delete rows or columns from a table


To add rows to a table

1.	Select a cell next to where you want to insert the rows.

2.	Click Table, Insert Row.

3.	Type the number of rows or columns in the Number box.

4.	Enable the Before or After button to specify where the new rows are to be inserted.

Note

·	Inserted rows have the same attributes (shading, spacing, ruling style) and paragraph tag as the row below them.

 Related Topics


To add columns to a table

1.	Select a cell next to where you want to insert the columns.

2.	Click Table, Insert Column.

3.	Type the number of columns in the Number box.

4.	Enable the Left or Right button to specify where the new columns are to be inserted.

Note

·	Inserted columns have the attributes specified in the Table Properties dialog box and the generated Table Text paragraph tag.

 Related Topics


To delete rows or columns from a table

1.	Select the rows or columns you want to delete.

2.	Click Table, Delete.

3.	Choose Row or Column from the menu.

 Related Topics


To delete a table

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Delete, Table.

Tip

·	You can also delete a table by selecting it and clicking Edit, Cut.

 Related Topics


Moving or copying in a table

Use the Cut and Copy commands in the Edit menu to reorganize the rows and columns in your table (by cutting and pasting them back in a different order), move the table to a different position on the page, or copy rows and columns from one table to paste them into another.

What do you want to do?

Move rows or columns

Copy and paste rows or columns

Move or copy and paste a table


To move rows or columns

1.	Select the rows or columns you want to move.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

The information is placed on the clipboard until you paste it back into your document.

3.	Position the cursor in the cell before which you want to place the row or column.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To move or copy and paste a table

1.	Select the table.

2.	Click Edit, Cut (to remove the table from the document) or Copy (to duplicate the table).

3.	Position the cursor in the document where you want the table placed.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

Tip

·	Another way of copying a table is to select it, click inside the table, and drag the insertion point to where you want the copy placed.

 Related Topics


To copy and paste rows or columns

1.	Select the row or column.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	Position the cursor in the cell before which you want to place the copied row or column.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To change the width of columns by dragging

1.	Move the pointer over the column boundary.

2.	Drag the boundary in either direction to adjust the column's width.

Notes

·	If you indented the table and it shifts to the left, it's because the table no longer fits between the indent and the right margin. To restore the table to its previous position, reduce the width of one or more of the columns.

·	For other ways of resizing columns, click Related Topics

 Related Topics


To change the width of columns using the Table Properties dialog box

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table, and display the General tab.

3.	In the Column box, specify the number of the column you want to adjust.

4.	Do one of the following:

·	To set a specific width for the column, choose the Fixed button and type a value in the associated box.

·	To specify how wide the column should be relative to the other proportionately spaced columns, choose the Proportional button and type a value in the associated box. For instance, if you want column 1 to be four times wider than the other columns, set the width to 4.

Notes

·	Proportionately spaced columns use the space that is left over after all the fixed-width columns have been set.

·	To change the unit of measurement for a dialog box setting, right-click inside the number box, click Units from the menu, and choose a unit.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the spacing and position of a table

In the Table Properties dialog box, you can adjust the spacing between a table and the rest of the document, change the spacing between rows and columns, indent a table from the margin, or choose one of three horizontal alignment options. If your table is within a column or page that is vertically justified, you can specify the maximum amount of space VENTURA places between it and the surrounding text.

What do you want to do?

Adjust the spacing above and below a table

Change the spacing between rows and columns in a table

Adjust the spacing above and below a table during vertical justification

Change the horizontal alignment of a table

Indent a table


To adjust the spacing above and below a table

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table, and display the Position tab.

3.	In the Above and Below boxes, specify the amount of space you want around the table.

Note

·	To change the unit of measurement for a dialog box setting, right-click inside the number box, click Units from the menu, and choose a unit.

 Related Topics


To change the spacing between rows and columns in a table

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table, and display the Position tab.

3.	In the Cell Spacing boxes, specify the amount of space you want between the rows and columns.

Note

·	To change the unit of measurement for a dialog box setting, right-click inside the number box, click Units from the menu, and choose a unit.

 Related Topics


To change the horizontal alignment of a table

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Format, Table, and display the Position tab.

3.	Enable the Custom Width check box.

4.	Choose a horizontal alignment option from the Alignment box.

Note

·	Make sure the total width of the table is less than the width of the frame or column in which it is placed. Otherwise, changing the table's horizontal alignment will have no effect.

 Related Topics


To adjust the spacing above and below a table during vertical justification

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table, and display the Position tab.

3.	In the At top and At bottom box, specify the amount of space VENTURA can add above and below the table as it vertically justifies a column or page.

Note

·	These settings apply only when Vertical Justification is enabled on the Typography page of the Chapter Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


To indent a table

1.	Click in the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table, and display the Position tab.

3.	Enable the Custom Width check box.

4.	In the Table Indent box, type the amount by which you want the table indented.

Notes

·	Make sure the total width of the table is less than the width of the frame or column in which it is placed. Otherwise, indenting the table will have no effect.

·	To change the unit of measurement for a dialog box setting, right-click inside the number box, click Units from the menu, and choose a unit.

 Related Topics


To insert text before or after a table

·	To insert text before a table, position the cursor in the upper left cell and press ENTER to add a paragraph above the table.

·	To insert text after a table, place the insertion point before the end of the file marker (the hollow square found below the table) and start typing.

 Related Topics


To keep a table together (on the same page or column)

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table.

3.	On the General tab, disable the Allow table to break across pages check box.


Formatting a table


To change the overall width of the table

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table.

3.	On the Position tab, enable the Custom Width check box.

4.	In the Custom Width box, specify how wide you want the table.

Note

·	To change the unit of measurement for a dialog box setting, right-click inside the number box, click Units from the menu, and choose a unit.

 Related Topics


To change the cell margins

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table, and display the Position tab.

3.	In the Inter-row box, specify the amount of horizontal space between the data in cells.

4.	In the Inter-column box, specify the amount of vertical space between the data in cells.

Note

·	To change the unit of measurement for a dialog box setting, right-click inside the number box, click Units from the menu, and choose a unit.

 Related Topics


To change the border style of selected cells

1.	Select one or more cells.

2.	Click Table, Cell Borders.

3.	Choose a border style from the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right list boxes.

Tips

·	Use the Property Inspector to change the border styles interactively. Scroll through the available styles in the Border tag list boxes and choose the ones you want.

 Related Topics


To change the border style of the entire table

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table, and display the General tab.

3.	Choose the style of border you want from the list boxes in the Table Grid section.

Tip

·	To choose a preset shading and border style for your table, click Table, Auto Formats.

 Related Topics


To merge cells

1.	Select the range of cells you want to merge.

2.	Click Table, Merge Cells.

Note

·	When cells are merged with text inside them, only the text from the upper-left cell is visible after the merge operation. The text from the remaining cells is hidden and will be lost when the document is closed.

 Related Topics


To split merged cells

1.	Select the merged cell.

2.	Click Table, Split Cells.

Note

·	When cells are merged, any text in the joined cell is placed in the upper left cell.

 Related Topics


To skew a table's top row

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table, and display the Skew tab. If the Quick Format buttons are displayed, click the Advanced button.

3.	In the Top-Row Skew Angle box, specify the number of degrees to slant the top row.

4.	In the Top-Row Height box, type a value indicating how high the row should be.

Note

·	To slant the text in each cell of the row, enable the check boxes next to the cell numbers in the Skew Text In Top Row box.

 Related Topics


To skew a table's left column

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table, and display the Skew tab. If the Quick Format buttons are displayed, click the Advanced button.

3.	In the Left-Column Skew Angle box, specify the number of degrees to slant the left column.

Tip

·	To slant the text in each cell of the column, enable the Skew text in column check box.

 Related Topics


To repeat a table header

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Format Table, and display the General tab.

3.	In the Header Row box, choose the number of rows you want repeated if the table flows to subsequent pages or columns.

 Related Topics


To shade or color table cells

1.	Select the cells you want to shade or color.

2.	Click the down arrow next to the Fill button on the standard toolbar to display the Color Palette.

3.	Click a color.

Tips

·	To select from a wider range of colors, click the Others button at the bottom of the palette to open the Fill Color dialog box.

·	To choose a preset shading and border style for your table, click Table, Auto Formats.

 Related Topics


Sorting and performing special tasks


Sorting data in a table

Use VENTURA's sorting feature to rearrange the data in your table alphabetically, numerically, or by date. You can sort the data within a single column or sort the entire table on a row-by-row basis.

What do you want to do?

Sort data in the entire table

Sort data in a single column


To sort data in the entire table

1.	Select at least two columns containing the data by which you want the table sorted.

2.	Click Table, Sort.

3.	In the Sort By section, select a column number. The data in this column will principally determine the sorting order of the rows.

4.	Select the type of data to sort, e.g., text.

5.	Click either Ascending or Descending to specify the order in which you want the data displayed.

6.	Choose the second column number, a data type, and an order button in the Then By section. If there are sorting conflicts when the first column is sorted, i.e., two identical values are found, VENTURA uses the second column values to resolve the conflicts.

Notes

·	Enable Case Sensitive if you want to sort a capitalized word before a lowercase word.

·	If you are sorting by date, make sure the dates in the cells are in the standard Windows 95 format.

 Related Topics


To sort data in a single column

1.	Select the column you want to sort.

2.	Click Table, Sort.

3.	In the Sort By section, select the column number and the type of data it contains, e.g., text.

4.	Click either Ascending or Descending to specify the order in which you want the data displayed.

5.	Enable the Sort Column Only check box.

Notes

·	Enable Case Sensitive if you want to sort a capitalized word before a lowercase word.

·	If you are sorting by date, make sure the dates in the cells are in a format that VENTURA recognizes. A list of standard date formats can be found in the Date and Time dialog box found in the Insert menu.

 Related Topics


Performing calculations in a table

By placing a formula in a cell, you can perform simple or complex calculations on the data within your table. For simple formulas, such as SUM or AVERAGE, you can type the parameters of the formula into an entry box. For complex formulas, however, use the Function wizard to guide you in choosing the elements (functions, numeric format, etc. ) that comprise a formula.

What do you want to do?

Insert a simple formula into a table cell

Insert a complex formula using the Function wizard

Sum the data in one or more cells


To insert a simple formula into a table cell

1.	Click in the cell where you want to place the formula.

2.	In the Formula box in the Property Bar, type an equals sign followed by the formula.

To calculate a range of cells, place the cell references in parentheses after the formula, for example: =SUM(R1C1:R4C1).

Notes

·	To reference a cell in VENTURA, type the row number followed by the column number, for example, R1C1. A comma is used between individual cell references and a colon is used between two references in a range.

·	To quickly sum a series of cells, click the Sum button on the Table Functions toolbar. You display the toolbar by enabling the Toolbar option in the Toolbars dialog box, found in the View menu.

·	You can place only one formula in each cell. VENTURA will ignore any additional formulas.

 Related Topics


To insert a complex formula using the Function wizard

1.	Click in the cell where you want to place the function.

2.	Click Table, Function.

3.	When the Function Wizard appears, follow the instructions provided.

 Related Topics


To sum the data in one or more cells

1.	Click in the cell where you want the resulting value to be placed.

2.	Click the Sum button on the Table Functions toolbar.

VENTURA sums all the values in the column above, or if there are no values above, it sums the values in all the cells to the left.

Note

·	If the toolbar is not visible, click View, Toolbars, then enable the Table Function option.

 Related Topics


To update the result of a formula

1.	Click in the cell that contains the formula.

2.	Click Table, Recalculate.

Tip

·	To recalculate a result more quickly, click the Recalculate button on the Table Functions toolbar. You display the toolbar by enabling the Toolbar option in the Toolbars dialog box, found in the View menu.

 Related Topics


To view and edit formulas

1.	Display the Table Functions toolbar by clicking View, Toolbars, and enabling the Table Functions check box.

2.	Click in the table cell containing the result of the formula.

The formula displays in the preview box of the toolbar.

3.	To edit the formula, click inside the preview box, make the changes you want, then press ENTER.

 Related Topics


To nest functions in the Function Wizard

1.	From the second screen of the Function Wizard, click [image].

To get to the second screen, click Next.

3.	From the Function Name list, click the function you want to add to your formula.

4.	Click Next.

5.	Type the required parameters for the initial function.

 Related Topics


Filling table cells with data automatically

Use the Autofill commands to quickly fill table cells with data. You can fill with exact copies of cell data, or increment the data (numbers, dates) as it is being placed in cells. For example, you might use the Autofill feature to list the months of the year across a row. You would type January and February in the first two cells, then tell VENTURA to increment the month by one for the rest of the row. Another feature of Autofill is its trend function. It analyzes the data you select and fills in the rest of the cells with values that follow a growth curve or line.

What do you want to do?

Copy data into cells automatically

Fill cells with incremented values

Fill cells with incremented dates

Fill cells with values that follow a trend


To copy data into cells automatically

1.	Select a single cell containing the data you want to copy and any empty cells into which you want the data placed.

2.	Click Table, Autofill, and choose a direction from the menu.

Note

·	If you select a series of cells for copying that contain days of the week (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday etc.), or months of the year (January, February, March, etc.), VENTURA will increment the values instead of copying them.

·	If you want to fill cells with incremented dates (e.g., 01/3/96, 02/3/96, 03/3/96), use the Table, AutoFill, Series command. For instructions, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To fill cells with incremented values

1.	Select the table cells containing the starting values for the series, and any empty cells into which you want the incremented values placed.

2.	Click Table, Autofill, Series.

3.	Do one of the following:

·	Click Growth to increment the data by multiplying a constant value. For example, a starting value of 1 and a step value of 2 would produce a growth series of 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16.

·	Click Linear to increment the data by adding a constant value. For example, a starting value of 1 and a step value of 2 would produce a linear series of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9.

4.	Click the Step button.

5.	Type the value by which you want the cells incremented.

 Related Topics


To fill cells with values that follow a trend

1.	Select at least two cells containing the starting values for the trend and any empty cells into which you want to continue the trend.

2.	Click Table, Autofill, Series.

3.	Do one of the following:

·	Click Growth to extend a simple growth trend (values that increase exponentially). For example, starting values of 1,  3 and 9 produce a growth trend of 1, 3, 9, 27 and 81.

·	Click Linear to extend a simple linear trend (values that increase by a set amount). For example, starting values of 1, 3 and 5 produce a linear trend of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9.

4.	Click the Trend button.

Note

·	The Growth and Linear trend options are for extending simple trends that, if charted, would produce a straight line or curve. If the starting values you choose do not fit the selected trend (e.g., the values form a more complex line or curve), VENTURA will change the starting values to fit as closely as possible to the selected trend.

 Related Topics


To fill cells with incremented dates

1.	Select the cell with the first date in the series and any empty cells into which you want to continue the series.

2.	Click Table, Autofill, Series.

3.	Click the Date button and choose which part of the date you would like incremented.

4.	Type the value by which you want the series updated.

Note

·	You must enter dates using the Windows language and date format as specified through the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel. Otherwise, VENTURA will not be able to complete the series as expected.

 Related Topics


Adding text

To produce a document in VENTURA, you usually begin by typing or importing the text. Originally, most desktop publishing programs were designed to work with text created in a separate, word-processing package. With most state-of-the-art programs like Corel VENTURA, you can still import external text files, or you can enter your text while you are simultaneously applying a layout. There are advantages to both approaches. If you are creating a book with sections written by several different writers, you may need to create different chapters to hold separate text files or create one chapter with multiple frames and/or inserted pages. If you are preparing the document by yourself, it may be more efficient to create the text and layout simultaneously in Corel VENTURA.

Importing text files from other applications

Desktop publishing programs like Corel VENTURA have special filters that allow you to import text files from most popular word-processing programs. And no matter what program you use, you can always create an ASCII (.TXT) file that can be imported into any DOS or Windows-based program (see your word processor's documentation for instructions about creating ASCII files). If you are working with text files, you can pre-tag them before you try to load them into Corel VENTURA by inserting tagging or other codes in the text using your word processor.

Documents produced with a word processor often include extra carriage returns, hidden codes, and other typographical elements which alter the look of your text file when it is imported. To save time, you can eliminate these extra spaces from your text files while importing them into Corel VENTURA. Click Related Topics below for more information.

Typing text in Corel VENTURA

Typing text in Corel VENTURA is no different than using a word processor, except that you have much more control over how your text is entered. To insert text quickly, use Copy Editor view since it doesn't show formatting but still lets you tag and apply attributes.

To type text, you must first activate text mode by clicking inside a frame. When the blinking insertion point "|" appears, you can begin typing. In a new document, Corel VENTURA always positions the insertion point at the beginning of the first line at the top of the current window. If you want to add text to another location on the page, you can click the Frame tool and draw a frame for the text. As you type, text automatically "wraps" at the right margin to the next line. Press ENTER only when you want to start a new paragraph.

Dragging text into your document

Rather than starting from scratch, you can also import text from other programs into Corel VENTURA by dragging and dropping blocks of text between documents. Text you drop into a Corel VENTURA frame then becomes part of your document. Holding down the CTRL key while dragging copies the text; dragging alone, moves it.

 Related Topics


Formatting text

Once you've imported or created a text file, you can start formatting it. If you are creating a text file, you can apply typesetting and typographic settings as your text is being entered. In Corel VENTURA, you can format text by applying character and paragraph tags. Characters tags format individual characters or words while paragraph tags apply formatting to entire paragraphs. If you need to alter the formatting of a paragraph without affecting other paragraphs formatted with the same tag, apply the formatting as an override. For more information about tags and overrides, click Related Topics below.

Each new paragraph is automatically assigned the same paragraph tag as the one before it unless you specify otherwise in the Defaults dialog box. When you reach the end of a base page, Corel VENTURA automatically adds another page and flows the text into it. You can also flow text between drawn frames.

Note

•	For more information about formatting text, refer to the chapters on Typesetting and Typography, Fonts, and Page Layout and Design in the Corel VENTURA Paper and Electronic Publishing Guide.

 Related Topics


Hyphenation

When Automatic Hyphenation is turned on, Corel VENTURA automatically breaks words at the end of lines to maintain more consistent spacing between words or to reduce the raggedness of text along the right margin. Placement of hyphens within words is determined by the current hyphenation dictionary. For words that do not appear in the dictionary, Corel VENTURA calculates hyphenation points. There's an exception dictionary (HYPHUSER.DIC, located in the \corel\ventura folder), which you can edit as a text file. You can use this dictionary to specify additional hyphenation points for some words and suppress hyphenation for words such as your company's name.

Editing HYPHUSER.DIC

You can use Notepad or WordPad to edit HYPHUSER.DIC. Add the words with the hyphens inserted, and then save the file back to disk as an ASCII text file. Ensure that you use only lower case letters, or the word won't be read by the hyphenation algorithm. Only the first seven characters (excluding hyphens) of each word is read by the hyphenation algorithm. If you want the algorithm to read more than seven characters, place an asterisk before the eighth character and each character thereafter. The asterisk forces the algorithm to read the next character. If you want to suppress hyphenation on a specific word, simply add it to HYPHUSER.DIC with no hyphens. See the table below for examples of entries:

Entry in HYPHUSER.DIC	Result

ventura	This word will never appear hyphenated.

eat-en	This word will hyphenate as necessary at the designated spot.

con-sid-e*r-*able	This word will appear hyphenated as necessary in any of the three designated spots. Note the asterisks that follow each character beyond the seventh character.

Turning hyphenation on and off

You can turn hyphenation on or off for individual paragraphs using the Format, Paragraph Overrides command. To set hyphenation for all paragraphs with the same tag, use the Format, Paragraph Tag command. For more information about this feature, type "hyphenation" in the Help Index.

Discretionary hyphens

Corel VENTURA gives you the option to override hyphenation points specified in its hyphenation dictionaries by entering "discretionary hyphens." Unlike the regular dash on the keyboard, discretionary hyphens "disappear" if the hyphenated word wraps to the interior of a line. You can insert these hyphens at your discretion to:

•	add hyphenation points anywhere within a word. Manually hyphenating words helps to tighten loose lines of justified text. You can manually hyphenate such words by inserting a discretionary hyphen (CTRL + SHIFT + H).

•	suppress hyphenation to prevent Corel VENTURA from breaking a word. If you enter a discretionary hyphen at the beginning of a compound word, such as Alsace-Lorraine, that word will not be broken, even at the normal hyphen.

For more information about hyphenation, click the How To button at the top right side of this window.

Adding words to hyphenation dictionaries

If you want to add extra hyphens within a word, or suppress hyphenation for certain words, you need to edit the hyphenation exception dictionary; an ASCII text file named HYPHUSER.DIC.

After you add new hyphenation points, you must reopen Corel VENTURA and your document to apply the new hyphenation. Your hyphenation exceptions will be applied as needed in all paragraphs with hyphenation turned on, regardless of which hyphenation dictionary is current.

Hyphenating previous versions of Corel VENTURA

Previous versions of Corel VENTURA (3.x - 4.x) did not store the hyphenation dictionary with the file. For chapters created using previous versions, use the Tools, Options, command (Save tab) to set Default Hyphenation for the language of the chapter.

For instance, if you would like previous-version chapters to open with a British English hyphenation, choose UK English under Default Hyphenation in the Options, Save dialog box.

 Related Topics


Proofing and polishing text

Corel VENTURA has a number of proofreading tools which automatically check your text for certain typographical errors, identify possible spelling and grammatical errors, replace text automatically, or look up synonyms.

Proofreading

The default checking mode used by Corel VENTURA's International Proofreader is automatic spell checking. You can also do the following:

•	check for grammatical errors with Quick or Full Proofreading

•	set the grammar checking to any of three different formality levels

•	check foreign languages automatically

•	teach the spell checker new words by adding them to your personal dictionary, and

•	use the Thesaurus to look up synonyms for the currently selected word

Corel VENTURA stores your spelling or grammar checking settings in the paragraph tag settings of the current stylesheet, so it's easy to control the way Corel VENTURA checks for errors.

Use full proofreading to have Corel VENTURA check for common grammatical errors and spelling in your text file. With full proofreading, Corel VENTURA checks spelling, spacing, use of symbols and any words in a foreign language.

And with Corel VENTURA, there is no need to separately proofread each language in your publication, nor is it necessary to change language dictionaries. Tagging your text with the appropriate language tag is all that Corel VENTURA needs to automatically proofread every language in your publication [image] all in one pass.

Note: To change the spelling and grammar checking settings, click Tools, Spelling, Options, Rule Manager.

Personal dictionaries

To speed up proofreading, you can teach the spell checker words that are not already in the standard look-up dictionary. When the spell checker identifies a correctly spelled word as a possible misspelling, you can add the word to a personal dictionary. Thereafter, Corel VENTURA ignores these words during spelling checks. A personal dictionary typically contains unusual words such as product names, names of people, or specialized terms.

You can create any number of personal dictionaries for use with different types of documents. Up to four personal dictionaries (in addition to the standard dictionary) can be used during a spelling check. The default personal dictionary is SPLDICT.PD.

If you have SPLDICT.PD. files from previous versions of VENTURA and want to use them in version 7, copy the files into the CUSTOM folder, then restart VENTURA.

Using Type Assist

With Type Assist, you can correct misspelled words and capitalization errors automatically. For example, you can create entries that cause Corel VENTURA to replace "teh" with "the" or choose a setting that will automatically correct two initial consecutive capitals (e.g., "RObert" would be replaced with "Robert"). You can also set Corel VENTURA to automatically capitalize the first letter of sentences, change straight quotes to "curly," typographic quotes, and capitalize the names of days.

You can also use Type Assist to automatically insert frequently used words and phrases. For instance, you can store the phrase "as soon as possible" under the name "asap." Then, whenever you type asap followed by a space, Corel VENTURA replaces it with "as soon as possible."

 Related Topics


PANOSE Font Matching

PANOSE Font Matching is a method of substituting fonts that appear in version 5.0 and 7 documents, but that are not installed on your system. When you open such a document for the first time in version 7, a dialog box appears allowing you to choose the fonts you want to use in place of the missing ones. This dialog box appears provided you enable the Allow Font Matching option in the dialog box displayed by clicking Tools, Options, General then clicking the PANOSE Font Matching button.

Manufacturers register their fonts with PANOSE and each font is assigned a unique identifying number based on its visual characteristics. When a substitute is required, PANOSE searches through the fonts stored on your system to find the best possible replacement. The success of this system relies on the number of possible replacement fonts you have on your system.

Missing fonts appear in the Font list with a [image] next to its name followed by the name of the substituted font in brackets.

Once a font substitution is made you must make it permanent by modifying tags that use the substituted font with another font installed on your system. Thereafter, you can use TrueDoc to address problems created by missing fonts. For more information about TrueDoc, click Related Topics.

Note

•	PANOSE Font Matching does not distinguish between Adobe Type 1 and TrueType fonts. If a document uses one type of font (e.g., Type 1) and you don't have that type installed on your system, PANOSE Font Matching will automatically substitute the other type's equivalent font. No notification that the substitution took place is provided.

•	PANOSE Font Matching will also automatically substitute missing font's in Artistic text and text in imported CDR and CMX files with no notification of substitution.

•	Matching fonts in VENTURA 4.2 documents that were created in the DOS/GEM version of VENTURA (version 3.x ) is often less than 100% accurate. The inaccuracies originate in the font identification tables introduced in version 4.2, the first Windows version of VENTURA. Because these tables could vary from system to system, some fonts did not match correctly when the 3.x document was opened in version 4.2.

 Related Topics


TrueDoc

TrueDoc is a technology developed by Bitstream. It solves the problems created by missing fonts when you distribute or print documents. TrueDoc records the shape of the characters in a document (regardless of the font format or complexity of the character shape), and compresses this data for playback when you view or print the document. Since TrueDoc records a 'picture' of each character, it does not matter whether the machine displaying or printing your document has the fonts you need.

Bitstream TrueDoc solves the problems associated with fonts in electronic documents, or in any situation where you need to transfer fonts from one computer or printer to another. TrueDoc gives you a way to deliver font fidelity while providing industry-leading font compression, imaging speed, and typographic quality.

How TrueDoc works for you

TrueDoc lets you view or print Corel VENTURA documents on any computer or printer [image] even if that computer or printer does not have the fonts that the author used in the original document. To add TrueDoc fonts to an active document, choose Publication from the Format menu and enable the Embed TrueDoc (TM) check box.

Use TrueDoc embedding to control the look and feel of your documents

Legitimate licensees of fonts or font software can create, print, copy, or distribute documents anywhere in the world. Bitstream's goal is to give electronic publishers control over the look and feel of the Corel VENTURA documents they distribute [image] the same control that print publishers have now.

At any time, you can edit documents that TrueDoc records, provided that you are a legitimate licensee of the fonts used in the documents. When you save a Corel VENTURA file, you indicate that you want to include TrueDoc embedding. TrueDoc then records all the character shapes in all the fonts you used in the document. If you or another user wants to edit that document, you have access to all the characters and symbols in those fonts.

Advantages of TrueDoc

TrueDoc provides one of the best solutions for creating truly portable documents. With TrueDoc's file compression features, you can easily create manageable document files that you and other users can download or view without tying up system resources. TrueDoc also provides true WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) capability, so that you can distribute electronic documents knowing that they will look the same to you and to your readers.

Printing documents containing embedded TrueDoc fonts

When you print documents to file, VENTURA always embeds the original Adobe Type 1 or TrueType fonts, even if the document was saved with the Embed TrueDoc option enabled. However, when sending the document (i.e., the *.vp file) to a service bureau or commercial printer, you should disable the Embed TrueDoc check box so that the document prints using the higher quality Type 1 or TrueType fonts.

Notes

•	TrueDoc will create fonts used by Artistic text and text in imported CDR and CMX files provided the document contains regular text set in those fonts. If necessary, add empty paragraphs, perhaps at the end of the document, and format them with the fonts used in by the Artistic text or imported files.

•	TrueDoc supports manual kerning but not kern pairs, which may change where lines of text using the TrueDoc fonts wrap.

•	TrueDoc fonts are unavailable for use by other applications. Keep this in mind, if you want to publish a VENTURA document you received from someone else to Envoy. If the document contains embedded TrueDoc fonts, Envoy will substitute another font, if the original font is missing from your system. The font Envoy substitutes may be a poor match for the missing font.

 Related Topics


Adding, exporting, and revising text


To type text

1.	Click on the page where you want to begin typing.

2.	Type the text.

Note

•	To edit text typed into a drawn frame in the Copy Editor, click to place the insertion point in the text and then switch to the Copy Editor.

 Related Topics


To start a new paragraph

1.	Position the insertion point at the end of a paragraph.

2.	Press ENTER.

 Related Topics


To start a new line within the same paragraph

1.	Position the insertion point at the end of a line.

2.	Press SHIFT + ENTER.

 Related Topics


To move the insertion point

•	Point and click where you want to place the insertion point.

 Related Topics


To change the case of characters

1.	Select the characters.

2.	Click the right mouse button and choose either Uppercase, Lowercase, or Capitalize from the menu.

Tip

•	Another way to change the case of characters is to use the Uppercase and Lowercase buttons on the Property bar.

 Related Topics


Inserting


Inserting symbols and special characters

You can insert symbols and typographical characters, such as em and en dashes, into your document in various ways. In the Symbol dialog box, you select the symbol or character from a window. A faster method, however, is to assign a shortcut key to a symbol and use the key combination to insert the symbol into the text. VENTURA also supports ANSI codes, enabling you to type the code and see the symbol displayed.

What do you want to do?

Insert symbols

Insert special characters

Insert symbols by typing ANSI codes

Assign shortcut keys to symbols and special characters


To insert symbols

1.	Position the insertion point in the text.

2.	Click Insert, Symbol.

3.	Display the Symbols tab.

4.	Choose a symbol font from the list box. To choose an unlisted font, type the font name in the box.

5.	Select a symbol in the display window and click Insert.

Note

•	To see an enlarged view of a symbol, click the symbol's cell.

 Related Topics


To insert special characters

1.	Position the insertion point in the text.

2.	Click Insert, Symbol.

3.	Display the Special Characters tab.

4.	Select a character in the display window and click Insert.

Tip

•	If you frequently use international characters, including accented characters, assign them to shortcut keys using the Shortcut Key button. If you prefer you can assign them to menus or toolbar buttons (as well as shortcut keys) using the Tools, Customize command. The characters are located in the Extended Characters folder in the Commands list of the Customize dialog box. For instructions on using the dialog box, click Related Topics.

Note

•	To see an enlarged view of a symbol, click the symbol's cell.

 Related Topics


To insert symbols by typing ANSI codes

1.	Position the insertion point where you  want the character to appear.

2.	While holding down ALT, type the ANSI number code for the character.

Tip

•	If you frequently use international characters, including accented characters, assign them to toolbar buttons or shortcut keys using the Tools, Customize command. The characters are located in the Extended Characters folder in the Commands list of the Customize dialog box. For instructions on using the dialog box, click Related Topics.

Note

•	To find the ANSI code for a character, open the Symbol dialog box, click on the character, and the code displays in the dialog box.

 Related Topics


To assign shortcut keys to symbols and special characters

1.	Click Insert, Symbol.

2.	Select the symbol or special character to which you want to assign a shortcut key.

3.	Click Shortcut Key.

4.	In the Press new shortcut key box, type the key combination.

 Related Topics


To override automatic hyphens with discretionary hyphens

1.	Click where you want the hyphen to be placed.

2.	Hold down CTRL + ALT + H.

The hyphen is neither displayed on the screen nor printed unless the word needs to be hyphenated.

Notes

•	Ensure that automatic hyphenation (Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box, Hyphens tab) is enabled for those paragraphs containing discretionary hyphens. To have VENTURA use the discretionary hyphens that you insert as opposed to automatically hyphenating, enable the Override dictionary hyphens check box in the Chapter, Typography Properties dialog box (Format menu). For each paragraph or tag that you want to use only discretionary hyphens, you must select Discretionary Hyphenation Only from the Dictionary list on the Hyphens tab in the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box (Format menu).

•	To suppress hyphenation for a word or numeric data, place a discretionary hyphen before the first character.

•	VENTURA has a hyphenation window for previewing the hyphenation points in a selected word. To access the hyphenation window, you must first use the Customize dialog box to add the Hyphen Viewing option to a menu, toolbar, or keyboard shortcut.

•	The Hyphenation Zone settings in the Tag Properties or Paragraph Properties dialog box (Hyphens tab) do not apply to words containing discretionary hyphens.

 Related Topics


To insert typographical spaces (thin, figure en or em)
To insert typographical spaces (thin, figure em or en)

1.	Position the insertion point between the two words you want to stay together.

2.	Do any of the following:

Press...	For...

CTRL + T 	thin space

CTRL + ALT + F	figure space

CTRL + SHIFT + M	em space

CTRL + SHIFT + N	en space

 Tip

•	You can also use the Insert, Symbol command to insert typographical spaces.

 Related Topics


To insert a non-breaking space
To insert a nonbreaking space

1.	Position the insertion point between the two words you want to stay together.

2.	Press CTRL + SPACEBAR.

Note

•	Inserting a non-breaking space between two words prevents them from being separated at the end of a line. If a space already exists between the two words, select the space then press CTRL+SPACEBAR.

 Related Topics


To insert a page break

1.	Position the insertion point where you want the page to break.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to format the paragraph's tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to format the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	Choose an option from the Page break list box.

 Related Topics


To insert the date and time

1.	Position the insertion point where you want the date and time to appear.

2.	Click Insert, Date and Time.

3.	Choose a format in the Format window or create a custom format by clicking Custom and typing a format in the Format String box.

Tips

•	To have the date and time updated in the text each time the screen refreshes, or when you open or print the document, enable the Update with Publication check box. If you enable this option, the date will not be editable in the document.

•	To insert a date and time in another language, choose a language from the Language box.

 Related Topics


To insert hidden text

1.	Add the Insert Hidden Text command to the Insert menu, Insert Item flyout (See Related Topics).

2.	Position the insertion point in the text.

3.	Click Insert, Insert Hidden Text.

4.	Click inside the window and type the text.

Note

•	Hidden text is only visible when in Copy Editor view.

 Related Topics


Importing and exporting


To remove extra returns from text files before importing

1.	Open the text file in a word processor.

2.	On the first line, type: @PARAFILTR ON =

3.	Save the text file.

4.	Import the file into Corel VENTURA.

Note

•	Because VENTURA treats each carriage return in a word processor file as a new paragraph and adds space above and below it, it's important to place the parafilter code in your file before importing. This will save you from having to remove unnecessary paragraph returns from your file later on.

 Related Topics


Importing text into documents

Normally, text is imported directly into a selected frame on the document page. You can also add the imported text file to the Files list (only), or place the text file into the document at the point at which the cursor is planted.

You can also specify whether you want the text file available for placement in all chapters in the document or selected chapters only.

What do you want to do?

Import text into a frame

Import text to the Files list

Import text into a file at the insertion point

Import a text file into multiple chapters


To import text into a frame

1.	Select a frame.

2.	Click File, Import Text.

3.	Choose the format of the file from the Files of type box.

If you don't know the file's format, select All Files. If VENTURA recognizes the file format, it will import the file using the correct filter.

4.	Choose a drive from the Look in box and double-click the folder where the file is stored.

5.	Double-click the filename.

Note

•	A down-pointing arrow at the bottom of the frame indicates that only a portion of the text file could be displayed. You can either increase the size of the frame, or click the arrow and draw a second frame in which to display the remainder of the file.

 Related Topics


To import text into a file at the insertion point

1.	Place the insertion point in the text where you want the second text file to start.

2.	Click File, Import Text.

3.	Choose the format of the file from the Files of type box.

4.	Choose a drive from the Look in box and double-click the folder where the file is stored.

5.	Click the filename.

6.	Ensure that the Insert At Cursor check box is enabled.

7.	Click Import to import the file into your document.

 Related Topics


To import text to the Files list

1.	Click File, Import Text.

2.	Choose the format of the file from the Files of type box.

3.	Choose a drive from the Look in box and double-click the folder where the file is stored.

4.	Click the filename.

5.	Enable the Add to file list check box.

6.	Click Import.

Note

•	Files placed on a master page do not appear in the Files List.

 Related Topics


To use a text file in multiple chapters

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Right-click on the text file that you want to use in another chapter.

4.	Choose copy from the menu that displays.

5.	Right-click on the chapter into which you  want to copy the text file.

6.	Choose paste to add the file to the chapter.

 Related Topics


To place a text file into a frame using the Files list

1.	Select a frame.

2.	Click a filename from the Files list.

Note

•	A down-pointing arrow at the bottom of the frame indicates that only a portion of the text file could be displayed. You can either increase the size of the frame, or click the arrow and draw a second frame in which to display the remainder of the file.

•	Files placed on a master page do not appear in the Files List.

 Related Topics


To tell if all the text in a file is displayed

VENTURA doesn't require that all text from a given file be placed in the chapter. This is a useful feature because newsletter layouts often require truncating the end of a story so that it fits into its allotted space. Even when you truncate a story in this way, VENTURA still saves all of the original text when you save the chapter. However, most of the time you will want to make sure that all the text from an article has actually been placed into the document and is therefore visible.

VENTURA uses a hollow square, called an end of file marker, to indicate that all text from a file is visible. To see the marker, you must have text symbols showing; click the ¶ button if the symbols are hidden. If the symbols are showing and you don't see the marker make the frame larger. Or, add a new frame and flow the remaining text into it.

Tip

•	You can use the Go To command on the View menu to locate the last page containing text from a particular file.

 Related Topics


Is text not displaying or appearing where you want?

If text isn't displaying or appearing where you want, check the following:

Is the file placed in a frame?

VENTURA allows you to keep text files in your document without having to actually use them. All files appear in the Files list in the toolbar, whether used or unused. Use the Go To command in the View menu to determine whether a particular file is placed in frame.

 How?

Are the margins too wide?

Text gets "pushed" out of frames if the inside margins are too wide. The outside margins do the same to text surrounding a frame. Use the Frame command in the Format menu to adjust margins.

 How?

Is the frame containing the text below other objects?

Other frames or graphic objects on the page could be covering the frame containing the text. To determine if that's the case, use the Tab key to cycle through the frames and graphics. If you locate the hidden frame, use the Edit, Order commands to move it to the top of the stack.

 How?

Are break settings moving text where you don't want it?

Breaks control where paragraphs start. For example, you can set breaks that will move text after a particular paragraph to the next left or right page. To change the break settings, use the Format, Paragraph Tag, or Paragraph Overrides command.

 How?

Have you stopped the screen from completing a redraw?

The Interruptible Display feature stops the screen during a redraw whenever the mouse button or a key is pressed. Anything on the page, including text, is temporarily hidden. To resume redrawing, press CTRL+W. You can turn the Interruptible Display feature on and off using the Tools, Option command.


To export a text file for use in other programs

1.	Select the frame or page with text to export.

2.	Click File, Export.

3.	Choose a format in which to save the file from the Save as type box.

4.	Choose a drive from the Look in box and double-click the folder where you wish to store the file.

5.	Type a filename.

6.	Click Save.

Notes

•	To export the file without the VENTURA codes (formatting, footnotes, header/footer), enable the Exporting without Ventura Markup check box.

•	Although you can edit an exported text file while the document in which it appears is still open in VENTURA, the changes you make will be lost when you save the VENTURA document.

•	You cannot export frame text on master pages, unless you override the master page by switching to Page Layout view and modifying the frame [image] for example, by resizing it.

•	You can also export a text file automatically each time you save the document. Right-click the frame containing the file, choose Rename File, then enable the Export on Save check box. Any changes you make to the file outside VENTURA will appear in the document the next time you open it. If more than one person is working on the document (i.e., the document has Set Multi-user in the Format menu enabled), then the person editing the text file outside VENTURA must check out the document. Otherwise, changes made to the file won't appear in the document when it is reopened.

 Related Topics


Selecting


Selecting text in documents

You can select text using the mouse, or by pressing combinations of keys (shortcuts) on your keyboard. The range of your selection can extend across several pages in a document.

What do you want to do?

Select text using the mouse

Select text using the keyboard

Select text across pages


To select text using the mouse

To select...	Do this...

a word	Double-click the word

a sentence	CTRL + click the sentence

a paragraph (see Note)	Triple-click the paragraph, or
ALT + click the paragraph

multiple consecutive paragraphs (see Note)	CTRL + ALT + click the paragraphs

from insertion point to another point 	SHIFT + click where you want to end the selection

any amount of text	Click and drag over the text you want to select

Tip

•	If text is very close to the edge of a frame and is proving difficult to select, decrease the Frame Selection value in the Options dialog box (Selection tab). This will keep the insertion point from changing to the pointer when it gets close to the frame boundary.

•	Selecting the [image] tool, then clicking the paragraph is equivalent to ALT + clicking.

Note

•	Using the [image] tool or ALT + click selection methods in combination with the CTRL key allows you to apply tags to multiple paragraphs. Using either selection method alone or with the CTRL keys also allows you to use the Property bar to apply formatting to the selected paragraphs.

 Related Topics


To select text using the keyboard

Do this...	To select...

SHIFT + left or right arrow	a character

SHIFT + CTRL + left or right arrow	from the insertion point to the start or end of a word

SHIFT + up or down arrow	from the insertion point up or down one line

SHIFT + HOME or END	from the insertion point to the start or end of a line

SHIFT + CTRL + up or down arrow	from the insertion point to the start or end of a paragraph

CTRL + SHIFT + HOME or END(Copy Editor only)	from in insertion point to the start or end of a text file

CTRL + A	all text in the selected frame

 Related Topics


To select text across pages

1.	Click View, Zoom.

2.	In the Horizontal Pages box, specify the number of pages you want displayed across the page. VENTURA automatically selects the appropriate magnification level in the Custom box.

3.	Position the insertion point at the beginning of the text you want to select.

4.	Drag the mouse across the pages until the text you want is highlighted.

 Related Topics


To cancel a selection

•	Click away from the selected text.

 Related Topics


Moving and copying


Moving and copying text

Corel VENTURA gives you various ways to move or copy text to different locations in your document. You can use the mouse to quickly drag the information from one place to the next, or use the clipboard to store the information until you are ready to paste it back into the document. Now that you can open more than one publication at a time, it's faster and easier to move and copy information between documents.

What do you want to do?

Move or copy text using the mouse

Move or copy text using the clipboard

Move or copy text between documents


To move or copy text using the mouse

1.	Select the text.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the selected text and drag the cursor to where you want to move the text.

•	Click the selected text, hold down CTRL, and drag the cursor to where you want the copied text placed.

 Related Topics


To move or copy text using the clipboard

1.	Select the text.

2.	Click Edit, Cut or Copy.

3.	To paste the text elsewhere in the document, position the insertion point where you want the text placed, and click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To move or copy text between documents

1.	Open both publications.

2.	Click Window, Tile Vertically or Tile Horizontally.

Tiling allows you to view both publications at once, making it easier to move and copy information between the documents.

3.	Select the text you want to move or copy.

4.	Click Edit, Cut or Copy.

5.	To paste the text into the other document, position the insertion point where you want the text placed, and click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To move or copy inserted items in Copy Editor view

1. Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Select the code for the inserted item.

3.	Click Edit, Cut or Copy.

4.	To paste the inserted item elsewhere in the document, position the insertion point where you want the item placed, and click Edit, Paste.

Notes

•	To see the codes for the inserted items, enable the Show Codes check box in the Options dialog box (Copy Editor tab).

•	To view text typed into a drawn frame, as opposed to imported, click to place the insertion point in the text and then switch to the Copy Editor.

•	For other ways of moving or copying inserted items, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Inserted items

Inserted items, such as index entries, cross-references, or footnotes, are placed into a document to mark a particular location in the text. In Page Layout view, you can locate an inserted item by looking for a degree symbol in the text. In Copy Editor view, you can look for the inserted item's code, e.g., <$IMain Entry>.


To move or copy inserted items in Page Layout view

1.	Click the ¶ button to show text symbols.

2.	Position the insertion point immediately before the degree symbol that marks the location of the inserted item. The Status Line displays the marker name.

3.	Click Edit, Cut or Copy.

4.	To paste the inserted item elsewhere in the document, position the insertion point where you want the item placed, and click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


Correcting,deleting and highlighting


To correct typing errors automatically

1.	Click Tools, Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Replace text while typing check box.

3.	In the Replace box, type the misspelled word, e.g., "teh."

4.	In the With box, type the correct spelling, e.g. "the."

5.	Click Add.

Tip

•	Use this feature to automatically replace abbreviations in your document with the spelled-out term. For example, you could replace AB with Aurora Borealis.

 Related Topics


To correct capitalization errors automatically

1.	Click Tools, Type Assist

2.	Enable the Correct two initial, consecutive capitals check box.

Notes

•	No change is made if the capitals are followed by a space or period, or the word contains other capital letters.

•	For other procedures on correcting capitalization, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To capitalize the first letter of sentences

1.	Click Tools, Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Capitalize first letter of sentences check box.

Note

•	A sentence end is defined by a period (.), an exclamation mark (), or a question mark (?). In Spanish, the marks ¿ and ¡ are also supported.

 Related Topics


To capitalize the names of days

1.	Click Tools, Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Capitalize names of days checkbox.

 Related Topics


To change straight quotes to typographic quotes as you type

1.	Click Tools, Type Assist.

2.	Enable Change straight quotes to typographic quotes check box.

Tip

•	You can also have VENTURA change straight quotes to typographic quotes when you import text files (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To use shortcuts to insert frequently typed text

1.	Click Tools, Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Replace text while typing check box.

3.	In the Replace box, type an abbreviation for the frequently typed text.

For example, type "conm" for your company name

4.	In the With box, type the text that will replace the abbreviation.

5.	Click Add.

Whenever you type the abbreviation followed by a space, VENTURA inserts the replacement text.

 Related Topics


To replace selected text

1.	Select the text you want to replace.

2.	Type the replacement text.

 Related Topics


To delete text

1.	Select the text.

2.	Click Edit, Delete.

Tip

•	You can also use the DELETE key on the keyboard.

 Related Topics


To edit text in the Copy Editor

Do either of the following:

•	Switch to the Copy Editor and choose the file you want to edit from the Files list.

•	Select the frame containing the text you want to edit and switch to the Copy Editor.

Note

•	To edit text typed into a drawn frame, as opposed to imported, click to place the insertion point in the text and then switch to the Copy Editor.


Finding and Replacing text and inserted items


To find text and formatting

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Type the word or phrase you want to search for in the Find box.

3.	Do any of the following

•	To search for specific text attributes that have been applied to the text, such as an underline, click Attributes and choose options from the dialog box.

•	To search for paragraph marks, forced line breaks and special characters, click Special and select one in the list.

•	To search for any text or character, click Special and select Any Text or Any Character. (See Notes below for more information.)

4.	Click Find Next to begin the search.

Tip

•	To specify the direction and scope of the search, click Options and choose the options you want.

 Notes

•	You can use the characters * or ? as wildcards by preceding them with a backslash. For example, if you wanted to use ? as a wildcard, you would type "/?" in the Find list box.

•	To search for the characters "<" or ">", type the character twice. For example, if you wanted to search for ">", you would type ">>" in the Find list box.

•	To search for index entries belonging to a particular category or on a specific level, type the following:

<$I[]>search for entries in the default category only

<$I[Category name]>search for entries in the category you specify

<$ILevelN>search for entries on the level you specify, where N is a number from 1 to 14 level1. To search for entries on multiple levels, type the levels separating them with a semicolon [image] for .example, <$ILevel1;Level2>.

•	<$I[Category name]LevelN>search for entries in the category and on the level you specify

 Related Topics


To replace text and formatting

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Type the word or phrase you want to search for in the Find box.

3.	Do any of the following

•	To search for specific text attributes that have been applied to the text, such as an underline, click Attributes and choose options from the dialog box.

•	To search for a special character, click Special and select one in the list.

•	To search for any text or character, click Special and select Any Text or Any Character. (See Notes below for more information.)

4.	Type the replacement text In the Replace box.

To delete the found text, leave the Replace box empty.

5.	Click Find Next to begin the search.

VENTURA searches through the document and highlights the first instance of the search word or phrase it finds.

6.	Click Replace or Replace All (if you want to replace every instance of the word or phrase in the document).

Tip

•	To specify the direction and scope of your search, click Options and choose the options you want.

Notes

•	The Any Character option in the Special list searches for any single character [image] for example, b?y finds "bay," "boy," and "buy." The Any Text option searches for any string of characters [image] for example, g*l finds "gal" and "ghoul."

•	To search for the * and ? characters, type \* or \?.

 Related Topics


To find inserted items such as index entries
To find inserted items

Inserted items can be anchored frames, markers, index entries, etc.

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Click Items.

3.	Choose the type of inserted item you wish to search for from the list box.

4.	Click Find Next.

Tip

•	To specify the direction and scope of your search, click Options and choose the options you want.

 Related Topics


Checking spelling and grammar


To check spelling in a document or selection

1.	Click Tools, Spelling.

2.	In the Select Range box, specify which part of the document you would like checked, e.g., the current chapter.

3.	Click Start Check. When the spell checker finds a spelling error or an unrecognized word, click one of the buttons in the dialog box or edit the text in the Sentence window and click Change.

For information on the options in the dialog box, click

4.	Click Next Sentence to continue the spell check.

Tips

•	By default, the Spell Checker refers to the Personal Dictionary USERPD during spelling checks. You can also have the Spell Checker refer to any personal dictionary you've created by clicking the Options button and enabling the dictionary's check box.

•	VENTURA has a Spell Checker toolbar that allows you to check and correct spelling interactively. Enable the Spell Checker option in the Toolbars dialog box (accessed from the View menu) to display the toolbar.

•	Use the Resume button to continue the spell check after you've made changes to the document.

 Related Topics


Options in the Spelling & Proofreading dialog box

When Corel VENTURA finds a word or phrase misspelled or grammatically incorrect, you can choose any of the following options:

•	Change - revises the word in the document to reflect the highlighted word in the Suggestions window

•	Change All - revises all instances of the word in the document with the highlighted word in the Suggestions window.

•	Ignore - leaves the spelling of the word unchanged.

•	Ignore All - disregards every instance of the word.

•	Add - includes the unrecognized word in the selected personal dictionary.


To add a word to a dictionary during a spelling check

1.	Click Tools, Spelling.

2.	When VENTURA highlights a word in the Sentence box that you want to add to a dictionary, click Add.

3.	Choose the dictionary you want to add the word to.

SPLDICT is the main dictionary. The USERPD dictionary is the default personal dictionary.

 Related Topics


To create a personal spelling dictionary

1.	Click Tools, Spelling.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click New and type a name for the dictionary in the Dictionary name box.

Note

•	After you create a personal dictionary, you can have the spell checker refer to it along with the standard dictionary during a spell check by enabling its check box.

 Related Topics


To edit a personal spelling dictionary

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Run/Manage Script.

2.	Choose the Edit personal dictionary option from the Available Scripts box.

3.	Click Run.

4.	Choose the dictionary you want to edit.

5.	Add or remove words from the dictionary.

Note

•	You can also edit a personal dictionary in a word processor by opening the personal dictionary file (with a .pd extension) located in the Custom sub-directory. Make sure that each entry in the file is on a separate line and that you press ENTER after the last entry.

 Related Topics


To consult a personal dictionary during a spell check

1.	Click Tools, Spelling.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable the check box next to the personal dictionary name.

The spell checker consults the standard dictionary and the personal dictionary you've selected before identifying a misspelled word.

 Related Topics


To create a user profile for grammar check settings

1.	Click Tools, Spelling.

2.	Click Options.

3.	On the Rule Manager tab, click New Profile.

4.	Type a name for the profile in the New User Profile dialog box.

Note

•	To save settings to a user profile, select the profile in the User Profile box and enable or disable options in the Rule Types window. The settings are automatically saved when you exit from the dialog box.

 Related Topics


To check the spelling of paragraphs written in another language

1.	Select the paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag to set the language for the tag or Format, Paragraph Overrides to set the language for the selected paragraph only.

3.	Click the Hyphens tab.

4.	In the Dictionary box, click the language in which the paragraph is written.

Note

•	Click Related Topics for a list of language dictionaries supplied with VENTURA and how to install them.

 Related Topics


To choose a language for spelling/grammar error descriptions

1.	Click Tools, Spelling.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Choose a language from the Error Language box.

Note

•	Error descriptions are displayed at the bottom of the Spelling & Proofreading dialog box whenever misspelled or grammatically-incorrect words are found during a spelling or grammar check.

•	To check the spelling of a multilingual document, you must select the language each paragraph is written in. For instructions, click Related Topics and choose "To check the spelling of paragraphs written in another language."

 Related Topics


To check grammar

1.	Click Tools, Spelling.

2.	Click Options.

3.	On the Rule Manager tab, choose either Quick Proofreading or Full Proofreading from the Check Mode list.

Quick Proofreading searches for spelling errors and common grammatical problems such as double-negatives, and punctuation errors. Full Proofreading, by contrast, searches for spelling errors, common grammatical problems, and stylistic errors, including the use of clichés and redundant expressions.

4.	If you chose Full Proofreading, specify the kinds of problems you want the grammar checker to identify by choosing an option from the Formality Level box. You can see which items the grammar checker will flag by looking for the checked items in the Rule Types list.

5.	Click Start Check. When the grammar checker finds an error, click one of the buttons.

For information on the options in the dialog box, click

6.	Click Next Sentence to continue the check.

Note

•	Use the Resume button to continue the grammar check after you've made changes to the document.

 Related Topics


Using the Thesaurus


To look up a word in the thesaurus

1.	Click the word you want to look up synonyms for.

2.	Click Tools, Thesaurus.

3.	Choose the synonym you  want to replace the selected word.

4.	Click Replace.

Tip

•	You can also use the Property Bar or the Spell Checker toolbar to look up words in the thesaurus. To display the toolbar, enable the Spell Checker option in the Toolbars dialog box (View, Toolbars).

Note

•	VENTURA comes with thesauruses for several languages, including French, German, Italian and Spanish. To look up words in another language, you must have the thesaurus for that language installed and you must mark the text with the language it's written in. To mark the text, follow the procedure for checking the spelling of paragraphs in other languages (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


Renaming text files

To rename text files using the Rename dialog box

1.	Right-click the frame that contains the text, and choose Rename File.

2.	Type a name for the text file in the New Name box.

 Notes

•	Enable the Export on Save check box if you want to export the text file each time you save the publication and import it each time you open the publication. This means that any changes you make to the text file in a word processor will appear the next time you open it in VENTURA.

•	The Export on Save function is not supported for multi-user publications. Files set to Export on Save will be embedded when a multi-user version of the publication is created using the Set Multi-User command (right-click on the publication in the Navigator).

To rename text files using the Navigator

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the drop-down list.

3.	Double-click the chapter which contains the file to reveal all the filenames.

4.	Select a file from the list.

5.	Right-click, choose Rename.

 Related Topics


Adding and Working with Artistic Text


To add Artistic text

1.	From the [image] flyout or Toolbox, click the [image] tool.

2.	Click where you want to place the text.

3.	In the dialog box that appears, type the text.

4.	Use the controls in the dialog box to format the text. (See Related Topics for instructions.)

Note

•	Once the text is on the page, you can use the Format, Artistic Text command to change the font, point size, spacing, alignment and other attributes. To change the color and outline use the Fill and Outline tools.

 Related Topics


To edit Artistic text

1.	Click the Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Artistic Text, Edit.

3.	Make the changes you want to the text.

 Related Topics


To format Artistic text

1.	Click the Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Artistic Text, Edit. The Edit Text dialog box appears.

3.	Do any of the following:

•	Use the buttons at the top of the dialog box to change the font, size and alignment or to add bullets.

•	Click the Character button to change spacing, format text as subscript, superscript or small caps or to apply underlines, overlines or strikeout lines.

Tips

•	To apply different formatting to specific characters, select them in the text editing box before applying the formatting.

•	To shift or rotate text, select the text in the text editing box. Next, click the Character button, then the Alignment tab. Enter values in the boxes at the bottom of the dialog box.

 Related Topics


To make Artistic text follow the outline of a graphic object or frame

1.	Select the graphic object or frame.

2.	Holding down the SHIFT key, select the Artistic text.

3.	Click Format, Artistic Text, Fit Text to Path.

 Note

•	If you use the Clipboard to cut/copy and paste Artistic Text that has been fit to a path, ensure that you place both the path and the text on the Clipboard, or the text will have no path to fit to in the new location. To select both the text and the path, press SHIFT while clicking them.

 Tips

•	To edit the text or change its formatting after it has been fitted to a path, use the Format, Artistic Text command.

•	You can reposition the text along the path using the Node Edit tool. See Related Topics for instructions.

 Related Topics


To move Artistic Text along a path

1.	Click the [image].

2.	Click the Artistic text you want to move.

Nodes appear next to each character.

3.	Hold the SHIFT key down and click the nodes next to the characters you want to move

4.	Drag in the desired direction.

Tip

•	To move text vertically, click Format, Artistic Text. Select the character(s) you want to shift, then click the Character button. Click the Alignment tab, then enter a value in the Vertical Shift box.

 Related Topics


To change the letter shapes of Artistic text

1.	Click the Artistic text.

2.	Click Edit, Convert to Curves.

3.	Click the [image].

4.	Drag the nodes along the edges of the letters to change the letter's shape.

Note

•	You can further modify the letter shapes using the Node Edit toolbar. (See Related Topics).

 Related Topics


Comparing versions

When you have to meet a deadline and you have more than one team member, Corel VERSIONS will be invaluable in preventing major disasters. As an example, let's say you have four different people working on a document file. As you are reviewing your team's weekly progress, you discover that there are four pages of text missing in the document and you are not sure how long it has gone undetected. Corel VERSIONS will not only help you find the last version that contained the missing text, but it will also tell you how the text disappeared in the first place. All you need to do is compare the different versions from the document file's history until you find the version containing the missing text. Corel VERSIONS will generate the actual text page for each version in a split-screen Compare document. The color coding feature will indicate how the text disappeared by identifying the differences between the two versions: red for deleted items, blue for added items, and green for changed items.

As you can see, problem solving has never been easier. Best of all, you don't have to be in Corel VENTURA to use Corel VERSIONS' amazing capabilities. No matter where you are in your system, you have the power of Corel VERSIONS at your fingertips.

With Corel VENTURA or as a stand-alone within the Windows Explorer, Corel VERSIONS is one piece of software you cannot do without. Once you have used it, you will discover that it is truly the most versatile, organized, and efficient method of version control available today.

Revision markup

Considering that any document must undergo many revisions before it is ready for publication, you can probably imagine the task at hand when you are in a workgroup environment. How do you keep track of all the deletions, insertions, and changes for every part of your document, not to mention who made them? Corel VENTURA is proud to introduce a new feature that will meet all your revision management needs: Revision markup.

Using the Revision markup feature is an effective way to keep track of changes made to your document. With this feature, you can use Corel VERSIONS to compare two different sets of reviewers' edits where the revisions or additions are visually indicated using change bars, different colors, or varying text styles. It even provides you with its own toolbar so that you can highlight, add comments, and make changes [image] all with a simple click on an icon. Before you save or print your document, you have the option to keep or remove all the revisions or only certain revisions. It's your choice.

If you are in a workgroup environment, imagine the time and effort this feature can save you when you have four co-workers reviewing your work. Instead of having to juggle four different sets of edits on paper, the Revision markup feature allows you to review your team members' ideas all at once with each set of edits having a different visual markup.

With Revision markup, you can change the markup to any color, background color, or text style you choose. You can specify how and where you want change bars to appear along with the edit markup. You can even select what color the highlighter tool uses. Since Corel VENTURA's goal is to provide you with everything you need to make your publication a success, you'll always have the power of customization within your reach.

 Related Topics


Controlling access to documents and libraries

The most important function in a workgroup environment is the ability to share your files with others. Without it, a team effort is nearly impossible. For your convenience, the Corel VENTURA Navigator gives you multi-user access as an option rather than as the default. You decide if, when, and to what extent you want to share your files, and with whom. You can exercise the same control over users' access to libraries via the VENTURA Library window.

Since multi-user access is often necessary, you will not always want the same access rights for each file or for each person on your team. As you begin to assign these rights, you will discover that the more levels of read and write access involved, the more complicated it becomes. This is where the Navigator can help you sort through the confusion. With a simple right-click, you have the power to decide who has exclusive read or write access to chapters or entire publications, and who will have the administrative capabilities. You can even create or change passwords for you and your documentation team for better security. When assignments change, the Add/Remove user option will keep your document management system up-to-date.

The best part about this new feature is the amazing amount of control that you have over accessibility to your documents and libraries in a workgroup environment. While it provides exclusive read-write access to files, it also allows others to get a read-only copy of a file. For example, if you want to make your publication available to your team for reference purposes but you do not want them to edit it, you can set up the access rights so that you are the sole author of that publication. This way, any member of your team can obtain a read-only copy of your publication but they will not be able to edit it.

Tip

•	In cases where you are the administrator, it is extremely important that you do not forget your password. Without it, if you have made yourself the sole author of a file, you will not be able to edit that file.

 Related Topics


Archiving files

No matter how many versions or types of files you need to archive, Corel VERSIONS gives you everything you need to manage documents in a workgroup environment. Moreover, Corel VERSIONS helps you to manage your files effectively by putting the power of customization in your hands. For example, you can tell Corel VERSIONS to archive up to 15 versions of a text file and only four of a graphics file. You can even annotate a few versions of a file for later reference and specify which versions you want to make permanent.

To make things less confusing, each archive file contains all of the versions for that file. Corel VERSIONS also makes it possible to archive more than one file at a time, even if each file is of a different type. Its global settings enable you to customize your version control so that all the archived files and document files are stored in one directory. Not only is a single location helpful for document security (if you want to make backups, you only need to copy one directory), but it also provides worry-free, multi-user access to the archiving and retrieving capabilities of Corel VERSIONS.

The Use Compression option compresses your files so that the archive file uses only the minimum amount of required space.

 Related Topics


Controlling access to documents


To limit access to a document

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Right-click the document and enable Set Multi-user.

4.	When prompted, save the file to the desired location.

Now, you are the only person with access rights to the document. Click Related Topics to see how to give access rights to other users.

Notes

•	The first person to enable the Set Multi-user command is designated the document's administrator. As the administrator, you can give access rights to other users, assign document passwords, and enable and disable the Multi-user command.

•	To access the Set Multi-user command using the menus, click Format, Multi-user.

 Related Topics


Assigning document access rights to other users

The Access Rights dialog box allows you to choose the users who will have rights to a given document. As the administrator, you must also decide the type of rights to give each user. For example, you may give one person rights to open and edit all the chapters, while limiting another to viewing a read-only copy of the document.

What do you want to do?

Give a user rights to open a read-only copy of a document

Give a user rights to open and edit a document


To give a user rights to open and edit a document

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Right-click the document and choose Access Rights from the menu.

4.	In the Access Rights dialog box, ensure that the Multi-user Access check box is enabled.

5.	Click Add User and type a representative name (usually the system name) and a password (usually the system password).

6.	Enable the components of the document you will allow them to check out and edit:

Publication gives a user privileges to the whole publication for stylesheet editing as well as chapter editing.

Chapter gives a user privileges only for editing chapters, disallowing publication-wide format, property, or stylesheet edits.

Admin gives a user privileges for modifying the access rights of other users.

7.	Enable the Admin check box if you want the user to have administrator rights (i.e., to assign users and passwords).

Note

•	To open the Access Rights dialog box using the menus, click Format, Multi-user, Access Rights.

 Related Topics


To give a user rights to open a read-only copy of a document

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Right-click the document and choose Access Rights from the menu.

4.	In the Access Rights dialog box, enable Multi-user access.

5.	Click Add User and type a representative name (usually the system name) and a password (usually the system password).

Notes

•	Once a document has been designated as multi-user, only those listed in the Access Rights dialog box can open and view the document.

•	To open the Access Rights dialog box using the menus, click Format, Multi-user, Access Rights.

 Related Topics


To take away document access rights from a user

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Right-click the document and choose Access Rights from the menu.

4.	Disable the check boxes beside the user's name that correspond to the rights you wish to take away. To allow a user read-only access, disable all of the check boxes. To prevent a user from even viewing the publication, select the user, and click Delete User. See To give a user rights to open and edit a document for more information.

 Notes

•	A user's access rights can only be modified when he or she has no part of the publication checked out.

•	Only an administrator can give or take away rights to a document.

•	To open the Access Rights dialog box using the menus, click Format, Multi-user, Access Rights.

 Related Topics


To assign or change a document password

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Right-click the document and choose Access Rights from the menu.

4.	Select the person's name and click Change Password.

5.	Type the password both in the New password and Confirm new password boxes.

Notes

•	VENTURA prompts the user to enter the password each time the document is opened. If the password is not provided or entered incorrectly, the document will not display.

•	Only an administrator can assign or change a user's password.

•	To open the Access Rights dialog box using the menus, click Format, Multi-user, Access Rights.

 Related Topics


To open a read-only copy of a multi-user document

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	From the Look in box, choose the drive and directory where the document is located.

3.	Select the document name and click Open.

4.	If prompted, type the password (usually your system password).

A read-only copy of the document opens in Corel VENTURA. If you wish to make changes to the document, e.g., add text or graphics, you must first check out the component you wish to work on. See Related Topics for more information.

Notes

•	Because a document is read-only in Corel VENTURA, does not mean that it is considered read-only by your operating system. Documents can still be overwritten during regular operations.

•	If you are unable to open the document, you may not have been granted read-only access. Ask the document administrator to give you access rights to the document.

 Related Topics


Checking out and editing components of a multi-user document

When working with multi-user documents, you first open the document, then check out the entire document or the component(s) of the document you plan to edit.

You can check out as many chapters as you like providing no one else already has them checked out and that the document's administrator has previously given you rights to them.

What do you want to do?

Check out a chapter to edit text and graphics within the chapter

Check out the whole publication to make stylesheet changes or to add, delete, or reorder chapters.


To check out a chapter to edit text and graphics

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Right-click the chapter you wish to edit and choose Check Out from the menu.

With the chapter checked out, you can edit text and change the attributes of selected text; draw and edit graphics; and create frames into which you can load pictures.

 Notes

•	When you are finished editing, remember to check in the file through the Navigator to ensure that your changes are saved in the publication.

•	If a graphic is shared between two or more chapters, the first person to check out a chapter containing the graphic will be able to edit it.

•	If you are unable to check out a chapter, you may not have been granted access to that component of the document. Ask the document's administrator to change your access rights to include chapters.

•	To make changes to a chapter that is linked to a library, you must also check out the library. For instructions, click Related Topics

 Related Topics


To check out a multi-user document

All chapters of a multi-user publication must be checked in before a user can check out the entire publication. To determine who has what checked out, right click the publication in the Navigator and select Checkout Status.

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Right-click the document you wish to edit and choose Check Out from the menu.

Provided no chapter is already checked out, all chapters and the stylesheet are checked out for editing.

 Notes

•	If you are unable to check out the document, check that no one else has any of the chapters checked out. If no chapters are checked out, you may not have been granted access. Ask the document's administrator to change your access rights.

•	To check out a document using the menus, click Format, Multi-user, Check Out.

•	If the document contains items (text files, chapters, stylesheets etc.) linked to a library, you must also check out the library to make changes to the items. For instructions, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To update a document using the Check In command
To update a multi-user document using the Check In command

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Right-click the chapter that is currently checked out.

4.	Choose Check In from the menu.

The changes are automatically saved and the chapter or publication becomes read-only. To make further changes, you must check out the file again.

Notes

•	If you close a document without checking everything back in, VENTURA displays the Check In dialog box. If you click OK, any components that have been checked out will be updated and checked back in.

•	The Check In command for the entire publication is also available in the Format, Multi-user flyout menu. To check in individual chapters, however, you must use the Navigator.

 Related Topics


To undo changes made to a document since it was checked out
To undo changes made to a multi-user document since it was checked out

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Select the chapter or document.

4.	Right-click and choose Uncheck Out from the menu.

The document or component is checked back in without any of your changes being saved. You will still see the changes on screen unless you select Yes at the "Do you want to revert to the saved version?" message, although your changes will still be discarded.

Tips

•	Another way of undoing changes is to close the document without checking everything back in. When the Check In dialog box displays, clear the check boxes for the document or the individual components you have checked out and click OK.

•	The Uncheckout command for the entire publicaiton is available in the Format, Multi-user flyout menu. To undo changes to individual chapters, however, you must use the Navigator.

 Related Topics


To view the checkout status of a document

1.	Click Tools, Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Right-click the document and choose Checkout Status.

Notes

•	The Check Out Status dialog box shows whether the active document or any of its components are checked out and by whom.

•	To open the Checkout Status dialog box using the menus, click Format, Multi-user, Checkout Status.

 Related Topics


Working with multiple windows

In Corel VENTURA, you can have multiple document windows open at once. This feature is useful if you want to copy information from one document to another, or compare text or other page elements in two or more documents.

You can also display a document in additional windows or split a window into panes. This enables you to scroll independently through one part of a document [image] the bottom, for example [image] while maintaining a fixed view of another area, such as the heading. Or, you can split the window to display Page Layout view on one side and Copy Editor view on the other; this way you can add text quickly to selected areas and still see your page layout.

You might also tile Split window views to scroll left and right through documents in landscape orientation, or use a zoomed-in view in one window and a full page view in another.

All windows display your updates as you work when viewing the same part of a document.

 Related Topics


Moving through a document

Corel VENTURA offers a variety of ways to move from place to place in your documents.

The Go To command

The Go To command, available from the View menu and by right-clicking file names in the VENTURA Navigator, takes you from place to place in the current chapter or a specific file. You can also use the VCR controls to move backward and forward a page at a time or to the end or beginning of the selected chapter or file.

The Navigator

The Navigator, available from the Tools menu, maintains live links between a document's content and its table of contents, index and cross-references. By right-clicking an item in any of these list [image] for example, an index entry [image] you can display the page on which that item is found. In the Navigator's Publication Manager view, you can move to specific chapters or to pages containing a particular text or picture file.

Scrolling

Whether you're zoomed in or out, scrolling is an important viewing feature to keep in mind. With the scroll bar you can move up or down by small amounts using the arrows, a page at a time using the page arrows or elevators, or from the top to the bottom or any distance in between using the thumb.

Shortcut keys

You can use the default shortcut key assignments or assign new combinations to any command from the Keyboard page in Customize dialog box, available from the Tools menu. You can also create several sets of shortcut keys for different types of operations, saving and loading the different sets as they are needed.

Note: Some key assignments are reserved by Windows and cannot be reassigned.

If you prefer to use shortcut key assignments from earlier versions of Corel VENTURA, Corel WordPerfect 6.1, Microsoft Word 7, Ami Pro, PageMaker 6, and others, you can load them by clicking Load from the Keyboard page in the Customize dialog box.

 Related Topics


Choosing document views

Corel VENTURA offers the following document viewing and editing choices:

Page Layout view

In Page Layout view, what you see is what you get (WYSIWYG) [image] your document pages display the way they'll print. All of the graphics and formatting are visible. This is the best view to use when formatting and laying out documents. Text editing in Page layout view is, however, slightly slower than it is in Copy Editor view.

Changes to page formatting applied in Page Layout view are treated as overrides to the associated master page.

Master Page view

Master Page view displays page layout formatting applied to master pages [image] things like page size and orientation, margins and columns, grid settings and guidelines, facing pages, headers and footers, page numbering, drawn frames, and color. Any formatting applied to master pages automatically applies to all regular pages based on that master page.

Copy Editor

You may prefer to use the Copy Editor to do your word processing if you find it distracting to see the frames, graphic objects, and page layout formatting visible in Page Layout view.

In the Copy Editor, you can still reassign tags, apply overrides, change fonts and sizes, choose other files or chapters in your publication and access a wide range of Corel VENTURA's other controls. To view the effects of your formatting changes, switch back to Page Layout view.

The Copy Editor also features a left-column display of the tags and overrides used for each paragraph, and fully customizable preference settings (see the Options dialog box).

Note

·	In Copy Editor view, the document prints exactly as it appears on screen. If you don't want tag names and markup codes to print, hide them using the Tools, Option command.

·	To edit text typed into a drawn frame, as opposed to imported, click to place the insertion point in the text and then switch to the Copy Editor.

 Related Topics


Displaying documents at different sizes

It's often useful to view a document in different ways on screen [image] when you want to review your page layout, you need to see the whole page, while for double-sided documents, you need to see both left and right pages. If you're entering text, or manipulating illustrations, you'll want to get right up close, and if you're doing work requiring minute detail, you might want to zoom in even further.

In Corel VENTURA, you can do all of these things using the zoom tools available from the Toolbox, toolbar, or View menu. If you need to work in facing pages view, you can click the Facing Pages icon on the toolbar. Click the icon once to switch to Facing Pages, click twice to revert to your previous Zoom level.

 Related Topics


To view a document without graphics and formatting
To view a document without pictures and formatting (Copy Editor view)

·	Click View, Copy Editor.

Note

·	In Copy Editor view, the document prints exactly as it appears on screen. If you don't want tag names and markup codes to print, hide them using the Tools, Option command.

·	To edit text typed into a drawn frame, as opposed to imported, click to place the insertion point in the text and then switch to the Copy Editor.

 Related Topics


To view a document as it will look when published
To view a document as it will look when published (Page Layout View)

·	Click View, Page Layout.

 Related Topics


To change to Copy Editor view

·	Click View, Copy Editor.

Note

·	In Copy Editor view, the document prints exactly as it appears on screen. If you don't want tag names and markup codes to print, hide them using the Tools, Option command.

 Related Topics


To change to Page Layout view

·	Click View, Page Layout.

 Related Topics


Viewing documents at different sizes

The Zoom tool and the Zoom command in the View menu let you display pages in your documents at different sizes for comfortable viewing.

What do you want to do?

Zoom in on a selected area

Zoom in on a selected item

Zoom in by a specific amount

Zoom out

Display pages at actual size

Display the entire page

Fit pages to the window size

You can also display multiple pages at once and view different parts of the same document by splitting the document window. For more information, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


To zoom in on a selected area

1.	Click the [image] button on the toolbar or in the [image] flyout.

2.	Drag across the page diagonally until the area you want to magnify is completely enclosed in the marquee.

3.	Release the mouse button.

 Related Topics


To zoom in on a selected item

1.	Select the item that you want to zoom in on.

To zoom in on specific characters or words, drag or click to highlight them.

2.	Click the [image] button on the toolbar or in the [image] flyout.

 Related Topics


To zoom in by a specific amount

1.	Click View, Zoom.

2.	Enter the magnification you want in the Zoom Value box.

3.	Click OK.

Tip

·	You can also type the amount of magnification you want in the Zoom box on the left side of the Status Bar.

 Related Topics


To zoom out

1.	Click the [image] button on the toolbar or in the [image] flyout.

2.	Click repeatedly to zoom out more.

Tip

·	Right-clicking after selecting the [image] tool, zooms out by a factor of two.

 Related Topics


To display pages at actual size

·	Click the [image] button on the toolbar or in the [image] flyout.

 Related Topics


To display the entire page

·	Click the [image] button on the toolbar or in the [image] flyout.

 Related Topics


To fit pages to the window size

·	Click the [image] or [image] button on the toolbar or in the [image] flyout.

 Related Topics


To display facing pages
To display facing pages in a double-side document

·	Click the [image] button on the toolbar or in the [image] flyout.

 Related Topics


To view multiple pages simultaneously

1.	Click View, Zoom.

2.	In the Horizontal Pages box, specify the number of pages you want to display across the width of the document window.

Tip

·	You can also use the [image] button on the Status Bar to change the number of pages displayed on screen. Click the button and  then drag to select the number of pages.

Note

·	The actual number of pages that display across the width of the document window depends on the resolution of your screen and the current magnification factor. The more you zoom out, the more pages display.

 Related Topics


To view different parts of the same document

1.	Click Window, Split.

2.	Drag the mouse pointer to where you want to split the document window then click.

You can now view and edit the document in each pane. Any changes you make to the document in one pane is reflected in the other.

Tip

·	To see more views of the same document, click Windows, New Windows. Then, split these two to get four views.

·	To remove the split, double-click the bar dividing the window, or drag it to the bottom or top of the document window.

 Related Topics


Publishing for the World Wide Web (HTML)

When you use Corel VENTURA's Publish to HTML feature to convert your VENTURA document to an HTML document, you can choose between a default and a custom conversion.

If you use VENTURA's default stylesheet, VENTURA automatically maps its own style tags to HTML tags, and your World Wide Web document looks as much like the page-based version as HTML allows. You can also choose to use the sample HTML VENTURA documents in your VENTURA directory instead.

If you use a custom conversion, VENTURA allows you to specify how its tags are converted to HTML tags. You can select each VENTURA tag in turn, and map it to an HTML tag. Any tags you don't convert in this manner are converted using the default mapping method.

When you convert a document to Web format, you can also decide how various components of the document are handled. A bitmap, for example, can appear at full size, as a thumbnail that can be viewed in more detail by clicking it, or a regular hyperlink.

For more information about publishing documents for the Web, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Publishing Java-powered documents for the World Wide Web

What is Java?

Java is a language created specifically for the World Wide Web by Sun Microsystems. VENTURA's Corel Barista technology employs the power of Java to produce documents for the Web that surpass the capabilities of HTML. Although the product of publishing a document to Barista is an HTML file, the person viewing the file in a Java-enabled browser sees a true WYSIWYG version of the original VENTURA document.

Corel Barista publishing options

When you select the Publish as Corel Barista command from the File menu, you can specify the name of your HTML document, which will be saved in the Barista folder. If you decide to save the new file to another location, you will need to copy the information in the Barista folder to the new location. When you want to make your Barista document available on a Web server, you must also copy the entire Barista folder to the Web server along with the document.

Other options available for publishing Barista documents include:

•	Single file vs multi-file format
You can publish your VENTURA document as a single file (single-file format), or to have a file for each page in the publication (multi-file format). Multi-file format is useful for large publications, such as encyclopedias; in this way, each page could be downloaded from the Web as needed, rather than incurring the time delay of downloading the entire publication. However, single-file format requires less hard disk space than multi-file format, which stores the page files in a folder referred to by the same name as the HTML file.

•	TrueDoc fonts
Including Truedoc fonts in the Barista document allows you to display the font used in your VENTURA document, rather than using just the five fonts Java supports. Each font used in your VENTURA document is saved as a Portable Font Rendering (.PFR) file. If the user already has the required font available, the local font files will be used. If not, the .PFR files will be down-loaded. If the .PFR files cannot be used, the Java fonts will be substituted for the required fonts.

Since you don't know what fonts people reading the Barista document have on their machines, it's a good idea to include the TrueDoc fonts. Without them, the Barista document may not be a very accurate representation of the original VENTURA document.

To use TrueDoc fonts with Barista, these environment variables must be set in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file:

SET CLASSPATH=<install folder>\truedoc;%CLASSPATH%
SET LD_LIBRARY_PATH=<install folder>\truedoc\bin;%LD_LIBRARY_PATH%
SET PATH=<install folder\truedoc\bin;%PATH%

After setting the variables, restart your machine to register the changes.

Note: If the TrueDoc folder does not exist, you'll need to run the Setup program to install Corel Barista; merely copying the folder from the CD is not sufficient. After starting Setup, choose the Custom installation option, then select Corel Barista under the SGML & Internet category.

•	Graphics
All pictures and graphic objects in the VENTURA document are converted to bitmaps in either GIF or JPEG format. GIF generally display faster than JPEG pictures, whereas JPEG will compress the graphic to a smaller size. Graphic objects created with the drawing tools are also converted to GIF or JPEG bitmaps.


Limitations of Corel Barista

The following is a list of VENTURA formatting or features that Corel Barista does not support:

•	The document contains rotated frames or text. You can still publish the document but frames and text will appear unrotated in the Barista document. Note that removing rotation may affect the layout of the document.

•	Certain characters, such as typographic quotes appear as black boxes

To ensure that characters appear correctly in the Barista document, use TrueDoc(TM) font embedding. (Click Format, Publication and enable Embed Fonts using TrueDoc).

•	Pictures clipped by irregularily shaped frames may not appear in the Barista document

To avoid this, restore the rectangular frame by right-clicking the frame and choosing Auto Wrap.

•	Content in frames spread across facing pages clipped

Since Barista can't display facing pages, it clips the spread with some of the content appearing on one page and the rest on the other.

•	Printer resident fonts not supported

Documents viewed on systems that don't have the printer resident fonts used in a Barista document display using a default Java font. Since the font Java subsitutes may adversely affect the appearance of document, you may want to change to TrueType fonts.

•	URLs in frames containing pictures are ignored


Publishing database files

While desktop publishing provides a way to transform unformatted text into a professional-looking document, database publishing is the answer to the equally complex task of publishing database information. Database publishing gives you the power to transform endless rows and columns of numbers and characters in a database into a well-organized, attractive document using text-handling and layout features. With VENTURA, you can also import database files directly into your publications as tables using Corel DataBase Publisher.

Database publishing offers many possibilities; for example you can create:

•	a community newsletter and automate its weekly production

•	a real estate catalog containing a picture of each property, a brief description, a picture of the real estate agent, and the company phone number

•	a mutual fund and stock report and keep it up-to-date

•	a car pool schedule listing the names, phone numbers, addresses, and license plate numbers of each participant

•	a mailing list detailing the names and addresses belonging to each postal district in your area

Whether you are in business, education, or you just want to publish something for your own personal use; if it involves a database, database publishing can help.

In Corel DataBase Publisher, all your formatting and layout instructions for creating the document are stored in a file called a recipe. Since you can use a recipe more than once, you can automate your most complex publishing tasks and keep your published data current without having to re-type the same instructions over and over again. You can even modify an old recipe for a new document. Whatever the case, your document will be easy to generate and always up-to-date.

 Related Topics


About the World Wide Web

The World Wide Web (WWW) is an application that connects structured documents on Internet servers around the world. By using a Web browser, you can access any of these documents as though it were located on your own machine (except for transfer time lags.) In addition, each document can reference other documents.

Imagine the ultimate publication:

•	The information could be read in whatever order the reader found most intuitive, with pictures, text, and intelligent searches available for clarity.

•	Definitions and further information would be available at the click of a button to those who require it, but would be hidden from those who don't.

•	Any system (DOS, Windows95, OS/2, Unix, Macintosh) could access the information without seeing a single "Invalid File Format" error.

•	Anyone in the world could receive it in seconds.

For more information, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Documents vs. Publications
Documents vs publications

Printed material is referred to as a 'publication' and a 'document' interchangeably. On the World Wide Web, though, the two words have different meanings. Information is bundled in small packages, each of which comprises a concept. Each of these bundles is a document. A collection of related documents is referred to as a publication. In traditional terminology, a publication might represent a book, and a 'document' could be considered a chapter in that book.

Each document in a publication is referred to by a unique address, called a Uniform Resource Locator (URL.) This address includes:

•	the protocol for transferring the document

•	the server on which it's located

•	the directory in which it's located

•	and the name of the file

The syntax is as follows:

http://www.myserver.com/mydirectory/myfile.html

On the other hand, a publication would generally include all the files in a certain directory, which would relate to and be inter-connected with each other.


A brief overview of HTML

The HyperText Markup Language (HTML) is a Document Type Definition (DTD) used to create a Web document. Based on the Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML) standard, HTML lets you structure a document without regard for the hardware displaying it. It contains generic codes that World Wide Web browsers interpret to display information (similar to the way PostScript is interpreted by PostScript printers).

HTML product (output) is used to display information, in pages, to users of the World Wide Web. HTML relies entirely on its tags for formatting instructions, and without these tags, an HTML document becomes one large paragraph.

HTML uses codes that are conceptually similar to Corel VENTURA's tags. For example, there are HTML tags for headings, body text, and indented paragraphs. Similar to Corel VENTURA, HTML allows text to be reformatted quickly by changing the definition of the tag. However, unlike Corel VENTURA, HTML has a standard set of tag names that everyone must use.

HTML tags let you:

•	hierarchically structure text and graphics content

•	preserve the structure of the content -- regardless of the size or type of the monitor, or the fonts available on the computer


Publishing to HTML
Using VENTURA to publish to the Web

There are many ways to publish a document to the Web, the primary two of which are:

•	using the HyperText Markup Language (HTML)

•	using Corel Barista to publish your document as a mini-application, written in the Java programming language.

VENTURA provides you with a way to convert your VENTURA document to either an HTML document, or an HTML document which uses Java.

HTML (HyperText Markup Language)

Corel VENTURA offers you the option of "one-click" HTML publishing, in which VENTURA does all the work for you. By using the Publish as HTML command in the File menu, you can instantly create a Web-ready publication. You just click the Publish button, and VENTURA will convert your publication into one or more HTML documents, ready to publish to the World Wide Web. The document layout will be as close an approximation to the original, as is available with HTML.

However, for those of you who want additional control and know a little about HTML, we also give you the ability to set up guidelines for the HTML conversion. From the novice to the expert we've tried to satisfy everyone's requirements with our HTML output tool.

You can

•	determine how pictures will be converted

•	create an on line table of contents, or convert the existing table of contents to HTML format

•	convert existing cross-references and index entries to hyperlinks

•	customize the conversion of VENTURA style tags to HTML structure tags

•	import a standard setup of your own invention, to maintain consistency in conversion.

Publishing pictures to HTML Corel VENTURA gives you the power to publish colorful, image-rich documents to the World Wide Web. By adding charts, photographs, and drawings to your Web document, you will get your message across clearly and with impact. When you publish your document to HTML, choose the Graphic button to set the image characteristics. Convert to either .GIF or .JPG file type, assign a border, and set alignment by selecting different options.

You can embed the graphic in your document, reference it with a hotspot, or use a thumbnail to link to the full-sized graphic. You can also exclude pictures from the Web version of a VENTURA document.

Converting tables of contents to HTML  A paper publication's table of contents is, in many respects, the front door to the document. In the same way, a Web document can have a table of contents, which is a collection of hotspots which link to the main areas of your document.

Converting indexes and cross references to HTML  When viewing a Web document, you can click on hotspots (specially highlighted items) to link to more information, either elsewhere in this document, or in another document on the World Wide Web. When you publish a document to the Web, indexes entries and cross-references are automatically converted to these hyperlinks.

Clicking an index entry sends you to the index reference. In a similar manner, clicking a cross-reference shows you a pop-up window with the cross-reference information.

Custom conversion with manual tag mapping  With Corel VENTURA, you can customize your document's conversion to HTML. By mapping each VENTURA style tag individually and overriding the formatting defaults, you can vary the appearance of your HTML publication dramatically. Any tags that aren't manually mapped will be mapped using the default setting.

Importing a standard conversion setup  To standardize your document conversion, you can import or copy the translation defaults of an existing VENTURA publication.

Corel Barista (Java)

VENTURA also provides Corel Barista, a conversion technology based on the Java programming language, for creating a portable, platform-independent application from a VENTURA document.


Overview: Design considerations for HTML pages
Design considerations for HTML pages

In creating a Web document, issues arise which are entirely different from those involved in creating a paper publication. You are creating a document that will be accessed by people using various types of computers and Web browsers, located around the world, whose only knowledge of you is this Web publication.

Also, keep in mind that HTML and the process of converting documents to HTML have limitations, which means your Web document probably won't look exactly like the VENTURA document it was created from. For example, certain formatting in VENTURA, such as columns, ruling lines and graphic objects created with the drawing tools, won't appear in the Web document. For more information about these limitations, click Related Topics.

Framed vs non-framed documents

Text placed in drawn frames as opposed to the base page frame, appears as a hyperlink in the HTML document. If you want the document to appear as a continuous stream of text, remove the text from their frames and place it on the base page.

Anchor frames to establish order of information

To ensure that information in drawn frames appear in the correct place in the HTML document, anchor the frames to text on the base page. Any unanchored frames will appear at the end of the HTML document, which is probably not what you want.

Identify your Web document

Include the document's URL in your document so that a person can print a copy of your document, read it, and have the URL handy for reference. You do this using the Options menu.

Include your email address

People reading your document on various browsers may discover incompatibilities or misbehaving links. Providing them with the Web document creator's e-mail address gives them a way to let you know about it.

Standardize document layout

By creating and maintaining a standard conversion setup, all your Web documents will have the same look and feel. This can be done easily by using the Import Setup option in the Publish as HTML dialog box.

Maintain browser compatibility

Web browsers vary enormously in their functionality and presentation. To present the best Web document to the largest audience, keep the following considerations in mind:

•	80 columns

Try to maintain an 80-column maximum width to your document. This is the usual minimum width.

•	Tags

The browsers currently available vary in their support for HTML tags. Although most support the official HTML 2.0 tag set (defined by the W3 Consortium), several browsers have added functionality by defining additional tags. Unless you are certain that your audience will be using a specific browser, consider using the HTML 2.0 standard in order to avoid presenting information in your Web page which isn't available to everyone.

Internal jumps vs. several small documents

Web documents can have local anchors: hotspots that link to other areas in the same document. This mechanism can be used to help a user navigate through a large online document. However, many readers feel that these internal links are cumbersome, and result in confusion about the layout of the document.

Therefore, you should limit an HTML document to information on one topic, not in excess of two screens in size. The easiest way to do this is to create a new frame for each major concept in your VENTURA document. When you publish the document to HTML, each frame will be translated into a separate HTML document.

Using pictures

Pictures add life to a Web page, but come with a lot of file overhead, because of their size.

VENTURA gives you three options when you include pictures in a Web publication:

•	Embedding the graphic in the Web page

This is the default mode; however it slightly increases the size of your HTML file, and as a result takes longer to download the graphic to a local machine.

•	Using a text link to reference the graphic

This is the fastest, most file-size efficient manner of including pictures in a document, because it offers the reader the option of viewing the object, without the overhead of automatically viewing the graphic. The hotspot uses the frame name as the identifying text.

•	Using a thumbnail link to reference the graphic

Thumbnail links can be considered the best of both worlds: the reader is offered a small representation of the graphic, and can click on the link to view the entire graphic.

Copying information vs. referencing information

In creating a Web document, you can either put all the relevant information in your own document, or, if some of the information has already been written and is available on the Web, you can create a link to it.

The World Wide Web is designed to avoid the need to copy information, through the use of references. However, if you are unsure whether the information will be stable (which is to say, continuously available at the same address for the foreseeable future), you may be better off to copy the information, provided your document is not already over-sized. Remember that copying another person's information could violate copyright laws.

Relative vs. absolute addressing

A Web publication consists of one or more documents, connected by URL references. These references specify the document's server name, folder, and filename (absolute addressing). This allows you to re-use the documents in different publications.

You can also use only the document's filename (relative addressing), if the document is in the same folder as the document referencing it.

While absolute addressing might appear to be more fool-proof than relative addressing, you must update all references with a new server and folder name whenever you move a file.

If you prefer portability, use the absolute address. On the other hand, if you want to ensure that your hyperlinks are relatively maintenance-free, use relative addressing.

Informative hyperlink text

With hotspot text, people have a tendency to use the phrase "Click HERE." While this seems like good direction, the hotspot text is used as a label for the referenced material in bookmark lists and other directories. So consider using more descriptive text, such as "View the SMITHSONIAN, or visit the LOUVRE."

The same advice applies to hyperlinks VENTURA generates automatically for linking to chapters and frames containing text or pictures. If you've named your chapters, "Chp1," "Chp2," and so on, that's how the chapter links will appear in the HTML document. If you don't name drawn frames, VENTURA will do it for you using the names "Frame 1," "Frame 2," etc. To rename chapters, use the Navigator. To rename drawn frames, use the Format, Frame command.

Keep it simple

You'll find that publishing to the Internet is a fast evolving and constantly changing medium. To try to solve this problem, we offer different versions of HTML output, giving you the control you need to keep pace on the information superhighway.

An important consideration for any HTML project is the appearance of the final output. With the DTP power of VENTURA, you can do almost anything to the design of your document. But, because HTML is somewhat limited in its design and layout abilities, you may find that a simple design and approach is better.


Limitations of HTML output from VENTURA

Although powerful enough to handle fairly sophisticated formatting, HTML supports only a fraction of the formatting capabilities offered by desktop publishing programs such as Corel VENTURA. This means that your Web document may not look exactly like the VENTURA document it was created from. For example, certain formatting in VENTURA, such as columns and tabs, won't appear in the Web document.

Keep these limitations, and the others listed below, in mind when designing Web pages in VENTURA. You should also be aware that HTML offers certain features which VENTURA does not support. A list of unsupported HTML features is also provided.

VENTURA formatting not supported by HTML

•	multiple column layout

•	booklet and tent card layouts

•	tabs and indents

•	vertical ruling lines

•	headers and footers

•	graphic objects created with the drawing tools

•	frame captions

•	type effects such as background color and drop caps

•	frame ruling lines

•	frame anchoring positions other than in-line

•	text and picture in same frame (text takes precedence with picture appearing as a tiled background)

•	equations

•	cross-references to figure numbers

HTML features not supported by VENTURA

•	Image maps

•	Animated GIFs. (treated as a GIF 87A file when imported into VENTURA)

•	Linking from graphic to text.

•	Embedded CGI scripts (can be called via URL text links)

HTML and master pages

The fill of the first master page item will be applied to the HTML output. Other objects on the master page will not appear in the HTML output.


Files created when you publish to HTML

VENTURA creates the following files when you convert a document to HTML format:

•	An HTM file for the publication

•	An HTM file for each chapter

•	An HTM file for each drawn frame

•	A GIF or JPG file for each picture (see Note)

•	An _lof file for the list of figures

•	An _loch file for the list of chapters

•	An _navigator file which combines the list of figures and chapters (Required when hyperlinks for chapters, figures and drawn frames displayed in main browser window as opposed to separate panes

•	AN LOG file containing information about the converted document such as the number of unanchored frames. This information is also available for viewing from the Publish As HTML dialog box.

Note

•	If the same picture is used multiple times in the same document, a separate file will be created for each instance.


Publishing to Java


To publish a document to Corel Barista

1.	Click File, Publish as Corel Barista.

2.	Enter the filename and location for the Barista document (see Note).

3.	Specify the publishing options you want. For more information, click Related Topics.

Note

•	It is recommended that you save your Barista document to the Barista folder, in order to ensure that all the necessary Java applets are available as needed, and the same classes are available to all applets. If you save the file in a location other than the Barista folder, you will need to copy the contents of the Barista folder to the same location, which contains the Java applets necessary to view your document.

 Related Topics


To load a Corel Barista document onto a Web server

1.	Copy the Barista folder (or the directory in which you saved your document) to the Server.

2.	Refer to your Web site administrator for information about opening your document.

Note

•	If you saved your document to a location other than the Barista folder, then make sure you move both your document (and any folder associated with a multi-file format), and the contents of the Barista folder, which are required to view your document. For more information, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Conversion basics


Publishing a document to HTML format

When you publish a VENTURA document to HTML, you can let VENTURA control the translation, or you can customize the translation as much or as little as you like.

In addition, you can copy the mapping information from another VENTURA document, which gives you the convenience of Automatic HTML Styling with the benefits of Custom HTML Styling. Provided that VENTURA paragraph tags have been used in the same manner in both documents, by using the same tag conversion setup as another document, you can ensure that the mapping will be identical. the HTML documents will have the same structure and layout.

Publishing to HTML and long file names

Spaces in long file names are converted to underscores in the links on HTML output from VENTURA. Publication, chapter, and graphic names containing spaces will also be renamed when published to HTML from VENTURA.

What do you want to do?

Automatically publish a document to HTML format

Customize the conversion of a document to HTML format

Import an HTML conversion setup

 Related Topics


To automatically publish a document to HTML format

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Ensure that the Auto HTML tags check box is enabled.

3.	(Optional) In the Publish as HTML dialog box, type a location and filename for the HTML document or click the Browse button to locate the folder you want to save the document in.

4.	Click Publish.

Note

•	The automatic conversion option produces an HTML document that resembles the VENTURA document as closely as possible. For example, titles will look the same as they did in the VENTURA document, as will text and pictures.

•	The same VENTURA document may look radically different, depending on the browser used to view it.

•	Whereas text in VENTURA can be set in any size up to 2000 points, HTML supports only seven different font sizes. The size at which text actually displays varies depending on the browser used to view the document. For example, the largest font size might be 36 points in one browser and 30 points in another. You can modify the way the automatic conversion option maps the font sizes in the VENTURA to the HTML font sizes via the Options button in the Publish as HTML dialog box.

 Related Topics


To customize the document of a document to HTML format
To customize the conversion of a document to HTML format

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Disable the Auto HTML tags check box to reveal the HTML Setup buttons.

3.	Click the button that corresponds to the item you want to customize.

4.	Adjust the settings as required.

For information about customizing the document conversion, click the Related Topics button.

 Related Topics


To import an HTML document setup

1.	Open the document that has the HTML conversion settings you want the active document to use.

2.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

3.	Disable the Auto HTML tags check box.

4.	Click Import Setup.

5.	From the Import from Ventura Publication list, select the VENTURA document with conversion settings you want to use.

6.	Specify which conversion settings you want to use.

 Related Topics


To map VENTURA style tags to HTML tags
To map VENTURA paragraph tags to HTML tags

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Disable the Auto HTML tags check box to reveal the HTML Setup buttons.

3.	Click Text.

4.	In the Ventura Tag Type list box, select the type of VENTURA tag (paragraph or character) you want to map.

5.	In the Tag Name list, select the tag you want to map.

6.	From the Main HTML tag list box, select the corresponding HTML tag.

By manually mapping VENTURA style tags to HTML tags, you can customize the structure of your HTML document. For example, you could publish a paper document with titles in a particular style (say, Heading1). VENTURA's Automatic HTML conversion would convert all Heading1 titles to the HTML tags which most closely resemble Heading1. But in your HTML document, you might opt to have all titles be hyperlinks to the appropriate area; by manually mapping the Heading1 style tag to the HTML hyperlink tag, you can accomplish this.

 Related Topics


Adding pictures to your HTML document


Including pictures in an HTML document

By default, VENTURA embeds pictures in your HTML document, converting them to JPEG format.

If you prefer, you can leave the pictures out.

You also have the option of linking to pictures using text or thumbnail links, rather than embedding them. If you have large pictures, linking to them reduces the time required to download the file. Readers can still view the pictures by clicking the text or thumbnail.

As well, you can specify whether picture files are converted to JPG or GIF format.

You can also specify the text you want to display in your HTML document in the event that a browser cannot display a particular graphic.

What do you want to do?

Display pictures at full size in the HTML document

Exclude pictures from your HTML document

Specify a format for pictures in an HTML document

Link to pictures using text

Link to pictures using thumbnails

 Related Topics


To display pictures at full size in the HTML document

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Click Setup to reveal the HTML Setup buttons.

3.	Click Graphics.

4.	Ensure the Publish Graphics check box is enabled.

5.	Select a format from the Convert Graphic To box. For more information, see Related Topics.

6.	From the Show as list, select Inline Image.

7.	Specify a border thickness and the amount of white space you want around the border.

Borders indicate that the graphic is a hyperlink. The border is optional since the mouse pointer changes shape when moved over a hyperlink. To omit the border enter zero in the Border Thickness box.

Tip

•	You can specify the text you want to appear in your HTML document in the event that a browser cannot display a particular graphic. Make sure Inline Image is selected in the Show As box. then type the text in the Alternate Text box.

 Related Topics


To exclude pictures from your HTML document

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Click Setup to reveal the HTML Setup buttons.

3.	Click Graphics.

4.	Disable the Publish Graphics check box.

 Related Topics


To specify a format for pictures in an HTML document

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Click Setup then Graphics.

3.	From the Convert Graphics To box, select JPEG or GIF.

GIF pictures generally display faster than JPEG pictures, whereas JPEG will compress the graphic to a smaller size.

 Related Topics


To link to a picture using thumbnails

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Click Setup then Graphics.

3.	From the Show As box, select Thumbnail link.

4.	Specify the size at which you want the thumbnail to display.

The graphic will appear in the HTML document as a thumbnail which the reader can click to display the graphic at full size.

 Related Topics


To link to pictures using text

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Click Setup then Graphics.

3.	From the Show As box, select Text link.

 Related Topics


Converting TOC, index and x-refs to hyperlinks


Converting a table of contents, index and cross-references to HTML hyperlinks

In printed documents, a table of contents, index and cross-references are indispensable tools for locating information. HTML documents take this one step further: you can provide reader's single-click access to this information by converting the table of contents, index and cross-references in to hyperlinks.

What do you want to do?

Convert a table of contents to HTML hyperlinks

Convert an index to HTML hyperlinks

Convert cross-references to HTML hyperlinks

 Related Topics


To convert a table of contents to HTML hyperlinks

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Disable the Auto HTML tags check box.

3.	Click Links.

4.	Click the Main TOC tab.

5.	Enable the Create from Pub TOC check box.

6.	From the Use Publication TOC list, select the table of contents you want to use.

7.	Specify whether you want the table of contents formatted as numbered or bulleted list.

8.	(Optional). Choose the color or picture you want use as the background for the table of contents.

Note

•	You can have the table of contents display on its own page or in a frame that's always visible beside the main text of the HTML document. Indicate your preference via the Options button in the Publish as HTML dialog box. If the Web browser does not support frames, the table of contents will display on a page with the rest of the document. The option to display the table of contents in a separate frame is not available when converting single pages or single chapters to HTML format.

 Related Topics


To convert an index to HTML hyperlinks

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Click Setup then Links.

3.	Select the Index/Cross-References tab.

4.	Enable the Convert Publication Index check box.

Each index entry in the HTML document will appear as a hyperlink, which the reader can click to jump to the location the entry points to.

Note

•	You can have the index display on its own page or in a frame that's always visible beside the main text of the HTML document. Indicate your preference via the Options button in the Publish as HTML dialog box. If the Web browser does not support frames, the index will display on a page with the rest of the document. The option to display indexes in separate frames is not available when converting single pages or single chapters to HTML format.

 Related Topics


To convert cross-references to hyperlinks

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Click Setup then Links.

3.	Select the Index/Cross-References tab.

4.	Enable the Convert Cross-references to Hyperlinks check box.

Each cross-reference in the HTML document will appear as a hyperlink, which the reader can click to go to the location the cross-references points to.

 Related Topics


To view a report on the HTML document

1.	Click File, Publish as HTML.

2.	Click Setup then Report.

The report tells you whether the VENTURA document contains any graphic objects or any empty or unanchored frames. To find out why the presence of this items is significant, click the Help button in The HTML Publishing Summary dialog box.

 Related Topics


Keyboard shortcuts

Shortcuts (also known as hotkeys or accelerator keys) are key combinations that let you quickly access commonly used dialog boxes and commands. They can also be used to speed up certain tasks such as selecting text and graphics, drawing frames, and inserting special characters.

You can customized many of the shortcuts using the Tools, Customize command. The following topics list the default shortcuts, but you can generate your own list of customized shortcuts by running the CUSTOMKB script. Click the Scripts, Run/Manage Scripts command in the Tools menu, then double-click CUSTOMKB.

Which shortcuts do you want to see?

VENTURA 7 shortcuts (alphabetical listing)

VENTURA 7 shortcuts (list by type)


Keyboard shortcuts

Shortcuts (also known as hotkeys or accelerator keys) are key combinations that let you quickly access commonly used dialog boxes and commands. They can also be used to speed up certain tasks such as selecting text and graphics, drawing frames, and inserting special characters.

You can customized many of the shortcuts using the Tools, Customize command. The following topics list the default shortcuts, but you can generate your own list of customized shortcuts by running the CUSTOMKB script. Click the Scripts, Run/Manage Scripts command in the Tools menu, then double-click CUSTOMKB.

Which shortcuts do you want to see?

VENTURA 7 shortcuts (alphabetical listing)

VENTURA 7 shortcuts (list by type)

Menu commands

Function keys

Selecting, deleting and moving in text

Text formatting

Selecting frames and graphics

Inserting symbols and special characters

Drawing graphics

Moving, sizing, and transforming frames and graphics

Node editing

Document navigation

Dialog box keys


VENTURA 7 shortcuts

Command/Function	Shortcut

Add a node to point on curve selected with [image] tool	=+ (plus key on numeric key pad)

Add node	ALT + SHIFT + A

Add paragraph tag	CTRL + SHIFT + B

Align center	CTRL + E

Align left	CTRL + L

Align right	CTRL + R

Bold	CTRL + B

Cancel	ESC

Close active document window	CTRL + F4

Constrain	CTRL key while drawing/sizing graphics or frames or moving nodes or control points constrains drawing/moving

Convert to Curves	CTRL + SHIFT + V

Copy	CTRL + C, CTRL + Ins

Copy Editor	ALT + F10

Copyright	ALT + CTRL + C

Cut	CTRL + X, SHIFT + Del

Decrease font size	CTRL + SHIFT + <

Decrease interline spacing	CTRL + SHIFT + {

Delete node	ALT + SHIFT + D

Delete one word to the left /right	CTRL + Backspace/Delete

Delete page	ALT + D

Delete selection	Delete

Delete the node selected with [image] tool	- (minus key on numeric key pad)

Delete the subpath selected with [image] tool	DEL

Discretionary hyphen	CTRL + SHIFT + H

Double closing quote	ALT+ SHIFT + "

Double opening quote	CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + "

Double underline	CTRL + SHIFT + D

Draw multiple frames or graphics	ALT + draw (unless using the Options setting)

Edit Artistic Text	CTRL + SHIFT + E

Edit Item	CTRL + D

Ellipsis	ALT + Period

Em dash	ALT + SHIFT + _

Em space	CTRL + SHIFT + M

En dash	ALT + -

En Space	CTRL + SHIFT + N

Exit	ALT + F4

Facing Pages view	F6

Figure space	ALT + CTRL + F

Fill Color	SHIFT + F3

Find & Replace	CTRL + F

Font List (activates to Font list in toolbar)	CTRL + SHIFT + F

Font Size (activates to Font Size list in toolbar)	CTRL + SHIFT + P

Fountain fill	ALT + F3

Frame properties	CTRL + F7 (or ALT + Enter when frame selected)

Go to beginning/end of chapter	ALT + Home/End

Go to beginning/end of document	CTRL + Home/End (moves to beginning/end of text file in Copy Editor)

Go to next/previous chapter	ALT + PgDn/PgUp

Go to next/previous one page (keeps insertion point in same relative location)	CTRL + PgUp/PgDn

Go to next/previous page/screen	PgUp/PgDn

Go to page	CTRL + G

Group	ALT + G

Help Screen/Menu Help(What’s This?)	SHIFT + F1

Help Topics	F1

Hyphenation for selected word dialog box	ALT + CTRL + H

  Import Picture	F8 Picture

Import Text	F9 Text

Increase font size	CTRL + SHIFT + >

Increase interline spacing	CTRL + SHIFT + }

Insert Hidden Text	ALT + SHIFT + H

Insert Page Break	CTRL + Enter

Italic	CTRL + I

Justified	CTRL + J

Kern Looser	CTRL + [

Kern Tighter	CTRL + ]

Line Break	SHIFT + Enter

Manage Overrides	CTRL + F10

Manage Tag List	SHIFT + F9

Master Page	ALT + F12

Move insertion point down/up one line	SHIFT + ¯/­ Arrow

Move insertion point left/right one word	CTRL + Left/Right Arrow

Move insertion point one character to the left/right	Left/Right Arrow

Move insertion point to the beginning or end of line of text	HOME/END

Move insertion point up/down one paragraph	CTRL + ­/¯ Arrow

New document	CTRL + N

Nonbreaking Space	CTRL + Spacebar

Normal	CTRL + M

Nudge node(s) selected with [image] tool down	¯ Arrow

Nudge node(s) selected with [image] tool left	¬ Arrow

Nudge node(s) selected with [image] tool right	® Arrow

Nudge node(s) selected with [image] tool up	­ Arrow

Object Properties	ALT + Enter

Open	CTRL + O

Open previous dialog box	F7

Options	CTRL + SHIFT + O

Order > Back one	CTRL + F12

Order > Forward one	CTRL + F11

Order > To Back	SHIFT + F12

Order > To Front	SHIFT + F11

Outline Pen or Ruling Lines dialog box	ALT + F5

Page Layout	ALT + F11

Paste	CTRL + V or SHIFT + Ins

Print	CTRL + P

Properties for selected item	ALT + Enter

Redo	CTRL + Y

Reformat window	CTRL + W

Registered	ALT + CTRL + R

Repeat	CTRL + ALT + Y

Right-mouse (display pop-up menu)	SHIFT + F10

Ruling Lines	SHIFT + F8

Save	CTRL + S

Select all	CTRL + A

Select all nodes on a path or subpath	SHIFT + CTRL with [image] tool selected

Select from insertion point to end of line	SHIFT + END

Select from insertion point to the left margin of line	SHIFT + Home

Select multiple nodes	SHIFT + click the nodes

Select next frame or object	Tab

Select non-contiguous paragraphs	ALT + CTRL + Click

Select one line up/down	SHIFT + ­/¯ arrow

Select one screen up/down	SHIFT + Page Up/Down (Copy Editor only)

Select previous frame or object	SHIFT + Tab

Select text end of file/chapter	CTRL + SHIFT + End

Select text to the beginning of file/chapter	CTRL + SHIFT + Home

Select the end node of a curve	END with [image] tool selected

Select the first subpath in the curve	HOME with [image] tool selected

Select the last subpath of the curve	CTRL + End with [image] tool selected

Select the start node of a curve	HOME with [image] tool selected

Select to beginning/end of paragraph	CTRL + SHIFT + ­/¯ arrow

Select to the beginning of a word	CTRL + SHIFT + ¬ arrow

Select to the end of a word (includes space after word)	CTRL + SHIFT + ® arrow

Select word	Double-click

Selected Text Properties	CTRL + SHIFT + S (or ALT + Enter when selected)

Shift current node selections backwards along the curve	SHIFT + TAB with [image] tool selected

Shift current node selections forward along the curve	TAB with [image] tool selected

Show Alignment toolbar	CTRL + ALT + A

Show/hide column guides	ALT + CTRL + G

Show/hide frame borders	CTRL + K

Show/hide tabs and returns	CTRL + H

Single closing quote	ALT + '

Single opening quote	 '

Snap to Grid	CTRL + Q

Spelling	CTRL + F8

Split window	ALT + CTRL + S

Subscript	CTRL + =

Superscript	CTRL + SHIFT + +

Switch to next document window	CTRL + F6

Switch to the previous document window	CTRL + SHIFT + F6

Table properties	CTRL + F9 (or ALT + Enter when selected)

Tag List	CTRL + SHIFT + T

Tag1	CTRL + 0

Tag2	CTRL + 1

Tag3	CTRL + 2

Tag4	CTRL + 3

Tag5	CTRL + 4

Tag6	CTRL + 5

Tag7	CTRL + 6

Tag8	CTRL + 7

Tag9	CTRL + 8

Tag10	CTRL + 9

Thin Space	CTRL + T

Toggle selection of the end node on/ off	SHIFT + END with [image] tool selected

Toggle selection of the first subpath on/off	SHIFT + CTRL and press HOME with [image] tool selected

Toggle selection of the last subpath on/off	SHIFT + CTRL and press END with [image] tool selected

Toggle selection of the start node on and off	SHIFT + HOME with [image] tool selected

Trademark	ALT + CTRL + T

Underline	CTRL + U

Undo	CTRL + Z

Ungroup	ALT + U

Update Auto Numbering	CTRL + F2

Uppercase	CTRL + SHIFT + U

What's This?	SHIFT + F1

Zoom dialog 	SHIFT + F2

Zoom In	F2

Zoom Out 	F3

Zoom to Actual Size	F4

Zoom to Page	F5

Zoom to Selected item	SHIFT + F6


Menu command shortcuts

File menu

Command	Press

New	CTRL + N

Open	CTRL + O

Save	CTRL + S

Import Text	F9

Import Picture	F8

Print	CTRL + P

Exit	ALT + F4

Edit menu

Command	Press

Undo	CTRL + Z

Redo	CTRL + Y

Repeat	CTRL + ALT + Y

Cut	SHIFT + DELETE

Copy	CTRL + C

Paste	CTRL + V

Delete	DELETE

Select All	CTRL + A

Find & Replace	CTRL + F

Edit Item	CRTL + O

Order (To Front)	SHIFT + F11

Order (To Back)	SHIFT + F12

Order (Forward One)	CTRL + F11

Order (Back One)	CTRL + F12

Group	ALT + G

Ungroup	ALT + U

Convert To Curves 	CTRL + SHIFT + V

Manage Overrides 	CTRL + F10

View menu

Command	Press

Copy Editor	ALT + F10

Page Layout	ALT + F11

Master Page	ALT + F12

Zoom	SHIFT + F2

Go To	CTRL + G

Snap (Grid)	CTRL + Q

Frame Borders	CTRL + K

Refresh Window	CTRL + W

Format menu

Command	Press

Text	CTRL + SHIFT + 5

Frame	CTRL + F7

Edit Artistic Text	CTRL + SHIFT + E

Ruling Lines	SHIFT + F8

Manage Tag List	SHIFT + F9

Update Auto Numbering	CTRL + F2

Page menu

Command	Press

Delete Pages	ALT + D

Table menu

Command	Press

Format Table	CTRL + F9

Tools menu

Command	Press

Spelling	CTRL + F8

Options	CTRL + SHIFT + O

Help menu

Command	Press

Help Topics	F1

What's This?	SHIFT + F1


Function key shortcuts

Function keys, on their own or in combination with other keys, are used to quickly access commonly used commands, options, and dialog boxes. You can change the command assignments of function keys in the Customize dialog box (Keyboard tab).

Press...	To...

F1	Get help on dialog box options

SHIFT + F1	Get help on Toolbox icons or buttons on the ribbon bar

F2	Zoom in

SHIFT + F2	Open the Zoom in dialog box

CTRL + F2	Update Auto Numbering

F3	Zoom out

CTRL + F3	Open the Outline Pen dialog box

SHIFT + F3	Open the Outline Color dialog box

ALT + F3	Open the Fountain Fill dialog box

F4	Zoom to Actual Size

ALT + F4	Close Corel VENTURA

CTRL + F4	Close the active document

F5	Zoom to Page

CTRL + F5	Open the Spelling & Proofreading dialog box

ALT + F5	Open Ruling Lines or Outline Pen dialog box

F6	Not used

CTRL + F6	Switch to next document window

CTRL + SHIFT +  F6	Switch to previous document window

SHIFT + F6	Zoom to Selected item

F7	Display most recently opened dialog box.

CTRL + F7	Open Frame properties

F8	Open the Import Picture dialog box

CTRL + F8	Open the Spelling & Proofreading dialog box

SHIFT + F8	Open Ruling Lines dialog box

F9	Open the Import Text dialog box

CTRL + F9	Open the Table Properties dialog box

SHIFT + F9	Open the Manage Tag List dialog box

F10	Toggle between the currently selected tool and the Pick tool

ALT + F10	Switch to Copy Editor view

CTRL + F10	Open Manage Overrides dialog box (paragraph with overrides must be selected)

SHIFT + F10	Open right-mouse button pop-up menu

F11	Not used

CTRL + F11	Move selected frame/graphic forward one

SHIFT + F11	Move selected frame/graphic in front of all others

F12	Not used

ALT + F12	Switch to Master Page view

CTRL + F12	Move selected frame/graphic back one

SHIFT + F12	Move selected frame/graphic in behind all others


Dialog box keys

Keys for moving between dialog box options

Press	To

TAB	Move to the next option

SHIFT + TAB	Move to the previous option

(­, ¯, ¬,or ®)	Move between options in a list box or group of options

ESC	Cancels and closes the dialog box

SPACEBAR	Enables or disables the active check box or chooses the active button

Letter keys	Move to the next option beginning with that letter in the active list box

ALT + underlined letter	Select option with that underlined letter

ENTER	Chooses the active button or option in a list box

F1	View Help about the option under the mouse pointer

Keys for moving between dialog box tabs

Press	To

CTRL + TAB	Select the next tab

SHIFT + TAB	Move through the options to select the Tab

¬, ®, HOME, END	Move between tabs when a tab is active

Keys for editing text in dialog boxes

Press	To

¬, ® 	Move the insertion point

SHIFT +  ¬, or ®	Select text

BACKSPACE or DELETE	Delete text


Keys for selecting, deleting and moving in text

Selecting text

Press...	To...

Click in a paragraph	To format the paragraph and it's tag or the paragraph only.

ALT + click in a paragraph	Select a single paragraph. Using the [image] tool is equivalent to pressing the ALT key.

CTRL + ALT click in a paragraph	Select multiple consecutive paragraphs

CTRL + click in a sentence	Select a sentence and the sentence-ending punctuation. Only one sentence is selected at a time; if you click a second sentence, the first one is deselected.

CTRL + click + drag	Select multiple sentences

SHIFT +  ® or ¬	Select or deselects a character at a time.

SHIFT  + ¯ arrow or ­ arrow	Selects from the insertion point down to the next or up to previous line

CTRL + SHIFT +  ® or ¬ arrow	Select or deselects a word at a time, beginning at the insertion point.

CTRL + SHIFT + ¯ arrow or ­ arrow	Select or deselect a sentence at a time.

Double-click any word	Select the entire word

CTRL + SHIFT + HOME or END	Select all text from the insertion point to the beginning or end of the text file

CTRL + A	Selects all text in the selected frame

CTRL + Backspace or Delele	Delete one word to the left or right

 Note

•	These selection techniques are used for tagging purposes and for applying formatting using the Property Bar. They cannot be used for cut and paste operations.

Copy Editor view only

CTRL + SHIFT + HOME	Select all text from the insertion point to the beginning of the current text file.

CTRL + SHIFT + END	Select all text from the insertion point to the end of the current text file.

Select an entire paragraph	Place the insertion point at the left margin of the paragraph and click three times

Moving in text

Press...	To move...

HOME / END	to the beginning/end of a line

CTRL +  ¯ or ­	to the beginning or next/previous paragraph

® or ¬	one character right or left

CTRL +  ® or ¬	one word right or left

CTRL + ­ or ¯	one sentence forward or back


Shortcuts for formatting text

Press	To change

CTRL + SHIFT + F	Font *

CTRL + SHIFT + P	Font Size *

CTRL + SHIFT + < or >	Decrease or increase font size

CTRL + M	Normal **

CTRL + B	Bold **

CTRL + I	Italic **

CTRL + U	Underline **

CTRL + SHIFT + D	Double underline

CTRL + L	Left Align

CTRL + E	Center Align

CTRL + R	Right Align

CTRL + J	Justified

CTRL + SHIFT + U	Uppercase

CTRL + 0 to CTRL + 9 to apply Common tags	Tag Selection *

CTRL + SHIFT + { or }	Decrease or increase interline spacing

CTRL + [ or ] 	Kern Looser or Tighter

* Activates list in toobar.

** Works as a toggle [image] click once to turn it on, click twice to turn it off.


Keys for drawing graphics

 Ellipse, [image] Rectangle, [image] Polygon, [image] Star

Hold down...	To...

CTRL while dragging	Constrain the shape to a circle or square or maintain proportions of polygon or star

SHIFT while dragging	Draw shape from the center

CTRL + SHIFT while dragging	Constrain shape and draw from the center out

 Freehand tool

Hold down	To

SHIFT while dragging backwards.	Erase parts of a curve

CTRL while drawing the line	Constrain a line to 15 degree increments

 Bezier tool

Hold down	To

CTRL while drawing the line	Constrain a line to 15 degree increments

 Callout tool

Hold down	To

CTRL while dragging	Constrain the angle of the callout line

Note

•	To keep the frame or graphics tool selected so that you can draw multiple objects hold down the ALT key as you drag.


Shortcuts for selecting frames and graphics

To...	Do this...

Select successively	TAB

Select in reverse order	SHIFT + TAB

Select multiple	SHIFT + click the graphics

Deselect from a group	SHIFT + click the graphic


Shortcuts for moving, sizing, and transforming frames and graphics

Do this	To

CTRL + drag a sizing handle	Constrain the sizing vertically or horizontally

CTRL + drag a sizing handle	Stretch or scale in 100% increments

SHIFT and drag a side sizing handle	Stretch in 100% increments in two directions

SHIFT and drag a corner sizing handle	Scale in 100% increments in four directions

CTRL + drag a rotation or skewing handle	Rotate and skew in increments

¬	Nudge left

®	Nudge right

­	Nudge up

¯	Nudge down


Node editing shortcuts

After a curve has been drawn, you can edit the nodes and subpaths using the [image] tool. Use any of the following shortcuts when editing curves.

Do this	To

SHIFT + CTRL + click a node	Select all nodes on a path or subpath

HOME	Select the start node of a curve

SHIFT + HOME	Toggle the selection of the start node on and off

END	Select the end node of a curve

SHIFT + END	Toggle the selection of the end node on and off

CTRL + HOME	Select the first subpath in the curve

SHIFT + CTRL and press HOME	Toggle the selection of the first subpath on and off

CTRL + END	Select the last subpath of the curve

SHIFT + CTRL and press END	Toggle the selection of the last subpath on and off

CTRL while moving the curve	Constrain the movement of a node or control point to multiples of 90 degrees

TAB	Shift current node selections forward along the curve

SHIFT + TAB	Shift current node selections backwards along the curve

¬	Nudge selected node(s) left

®	Nudge selected node(s) right

­	Nudge selected node(s) up

¯	Nudge selected node(s) down

Press ALT + SHIFT + A	Add node to selected point on curve

Press ALT + SHIFT + D	Delete node

Press Delete	Delete the selected subpath


Document navigation shortcuts

Press	To

CTRL + Home or End	Go to beginning or end of document

ALT + Home or End	Go to beginning or end of chapter

CTRL + Home or End	Go to first/last page

PgDn	Go to next page/screen

PgUp	Go to previous page/screen

CTRL + PgUp/PgDn	Go to next/previous page but keeps insertion point in same relative location

CTRL + G	Go to page

ALT + PgDn/PgUp	Go to next previous chapter


Shortcuts for inserting symbols and special characters

Below is a list of shortcuts for the most common symbols and special characters. You can change these shortcuts or assign new ones in the Customize dialog box (Keyboard tab) or in the Symbol dialog box which can be accessed in the Insert menu.

To insert...	Press...

Copyright mark 	CTRL + ALT + C

Discretionary hyphen	CTRL + SHIFT + H

Ellipsis	ALT + . (period)

Em dash	ALT + SHIFT + _

Em space	CTRL + SHIFT + M

En dash	ALT + -

En space	CTRL + SHIFT + N

Figure space	CTRL + ALT + F

Non-breaking space	CTRL + Spacebar

Quote (single opening)	'

Quote (single closing)	ALT + '

Quote (double opening)	CTRL + ALT+ SHIFT + "

Quote (double closing)	ALT + SHIFT + "

Registered trademark	CTRL + ALT + R

Thin space	CTRL + T

Trademark	CTRL + ALT + T


Corel VENTURA 7 specifications

File management specifications

Feature	Specification

Number of open documents	Limited by memory

Maximum file size	32 megabytes (MB)

Color Palette size	256 colors (24-bit)

Maximum characters per line	768

Maximum paragraph size	64K

Length of Recently Used File list (MRU)	4

Cache size	512K

Bitmap cache	default is 1 MB

Maximum number of user dictionaries	Unlimited with 4 active at any one time

Maximum custom dictionary size	366,590 bytes

Maximum number of sorting criteria	3

Maximum number of colors in graphics	256

Maximum length of table of contents or index entry	64K

Formatting specifications

Feature	Specification

Number of tabs set in a paragraph	64

Maximum number of table columns	255

Number of fonts	Limited only by Windows

Maximum font size	2000 points in 0.001 point increments

Maximum number of styles	Limited by available memory

Programming specifications

Feature	Specification

Maximum size of macro	Limited by available memory

Maximum length for a macro name	256 characters

Maximum length for a variable name	Limited by available memory

Maximum number of arguments that can be passed to a subroutine	Limited by available memory

Supports OLE version 2.0	yes


VENTURA Markup Codes
VENTURA Markup Codes: Overview
(Reference)

Corel VENTURA creates typeset documents which contain coding for margins, indents, hyphenation, page breaks, bullets, page numbering, headers and footers, footnotes, tab settings, picture anchoring, font information, table of contents, index entries, and section numbering into the text. After you import text from a word processor, VENTURA's formatting codes are added to the text file. If you want to export your text file back to the word processor, you can choose to leave the codes out. Without the codes any VENTURA formatting must be reapplied when you re-import the file.

In addition, much of the format information used by the word processor is ignored when the text is read into VENTURA. For instance, a center command in a word processor is used to center text across a page. However, in a typeset page, text can be centered not only across a page, but within a column, across two columns, or within a frame. Thus, the word processor's center command does not provide sufficient information to unambiguously define what VENTURA should do.

Since the format information from the original word processor is eliminated as soon as the chapter is saved, you must save the text file under a different name before loading it into Corel VENTURA if you want to retain the original word processor formatting.

However, text attribute information used by the author to convey meaning is used. All attributes assigned using Corel VENTURA's Text attributes (e.g., underline, boldface, font settings) can be transferred to and from any word processor or ASCII file.

Note To store typesetting information in a word processor format, much of the word processor's format information [image] other than text attributes [image] is replaced by VENTURA attribute codes when VENTURA saves the document.

What do you more information about?

Paragraph tags and character tags

Non-keyboard characters

Tabs

Corel VENTURA text attribute codes

Corel VENTURA text color codes

Other inserted items

 Related Topics


Paragraph tags and characters tags
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Corel VENTURA's paragraph tags can be inserted from within your word processor as follows (the @ must be the first character in the line at the beginning of a paragraph):

@TAGNAME ^ = ^

where TAGNAME is replaced by the name of the tag assigned to the paragraph. (The ^ symbol indicates that you should insert a space.) Thus, whether tagged originally by the author, or whether entered in the word processor or in VENTURA, these tags can be inserted into the text.

Character tags can be applied at any point in a text file by specifying <$[character_tag > before the text, where character_tag is the tag to be applied to that text. Following the affected text, use the <$]character_tag > to end the character tag.

 Related Topics


Non-keyboard characters
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Additional characters not found on the keyboard can be inserted into text by enclosing the ASCII decimal equivalent within angle brackets. (See Character Sets and ANSI codes for a list of codes). For instance, from a word processor, the following code would create a trademark symbol code ( [image]) in Corel VENTURA:

<191>

To use the < > characters without having them interpreted as part of a character attribute code, type two brackets in a row. For instance, to produce:

<text in brackets>

type:

<<text in brackets>>

If the word processor can create and edit foreign characters, Corel VENTURA will translate these without the need to use the < > codes.

 Related Topics


Tabs
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Any time you press the Tab key on the keyboard, you insert a tab character into the text. The word processor then moves the cursor to the next tab stop setting for that paragraph. If the tab settings in the Corel VENTURA stylesheet are at different locations from the tab stops in the word processor, this will lead to incorrectly formatted tables.

To avoid this problem, use tab settings in the word processor that are similar to the stylesheet to be used. Because word processor tab stops are set according to the number of characters which you want to skip, while VENTURA's tab stops are set according to distance from the left column edge, this may require a little experimentation. However, you can closely approximate the word processor's tab settings by setting the Tab Positions the Alignment dialog box (Paragraph Tag or Paragraph Overrides command, Format menu) to Left, and setting the distance (in inches) to a value given by the following formula:

(Tab Stop/Pitch) - (Left Margin/Pitch) = Distance

The tab stop and left margin options are measured in numbers of characters. Pitch is measured in characters per inch. Distance is measured in inches. For instance, if your word processor prints at 10 pitch (e.g., 10 characters per inch) and you have a tab stop set at 30 characters from edge of the page, and a left margin of 15 characters, the VENTURA tab stop should be set for  (30/10)-(15/10) = 1.50 inches.

Note

•	Make sure the word processor is configured to insert tabs. Certain word processors when configured incorrectly, add spaces rather than tabs.

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA text attribute codes
Corel VENTURA text attributes codes
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Corel VENTURA places codes in your text when it applies formatting (e.g., text, paragraphs, frames, tables) to your documents.

On import from supported word processors, VENTURA correctly translates, displays, and prints text attributes, such as boldface and underline. Similarly, any VENTURA codes added using Override mode can be retained if you export text files back to the word processor's native file format. The VENTURA codes generally can be entered by applying the associated formatting in VENTURA or manually in a word processor. To view the codes in VENTURA, open the Copy Editor.

The table below indicates the syntax used in the VENTURA codes. For instance, the beginning of medium italic text is set by inserting the following directly before the text to be italicized: <MI>

In general, attributes native to the word processor, such as boldface, when used alone, are translated back to the original attribute when a document is saved in VENTURA. When used in combination with other attributes, they are translated back to the original attribute using combinations of the following VENTURA codes.

Text Attributes	Codes*	In VENTURA

Small Caps	<SA>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Base Line Jump	<Jn> baseline jump	Right-mouse click with text selected

Enter a Shift Up value.

Begin/End (%0) Kerning	<%n>	N/A

Bold weight type	<B>	Ctrl+B

Changed Point Size 	<Pn> point size	Ctrl+Alt+U to increase

Ctrl+Alt+J to decrease

Double underline	<=>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Italics	<I>	Ctrl+I

Kerning/Tracking	<Kn> {text}<D>	Ctrl+Alt+I to increase

Ctrl+Alt+K to decrease

Line Break	<R>	Shift+Enter

Medium weight type	<M>	N/A

Lowercase	N/A	Right-mouse click with text selected

Overscore	<O>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Resume Normal	<D>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Typeface	<F" typeface name">	Ctrl+F

Underline	<U>	Ctrl+U

Word Underline	<L>	N/A

Uppercase	<A>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Strike-thru	<X>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Subscript	<V>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Superscript	<^>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Notes

•	For Color index codes, see Corel VENTURA Text Color codes.

•	All attributes are terminated at the end of a paragraph, even if the Resume Normal character code (<D>) is not encountered. Also, all previous attributes are terminated any time new attributes are set.

 Related Topics


Text Attribute Examples
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Attributes can be grouped together into sequences. For example, to set Bold, Italic, Blue text, the code is <BIC4>. Any new text attribute sequence encountered cancels all previous attributes.

Attributes native to the word processor and the codes described on the previous pages can be intermixed.

To create the following effect using WordStar:

airplane automobile

where the first word is boldfaced and underlined, and the second word is boldface only, would require the following within WordStar:

^U^Bairplane^U automobile^B

This same effect can be produced using the codes described on the previous pages as follows:

<BU>airplane <B>automobile<D>

The author can choose either to use the attribute set shown above, or continue to place attributes in the text using the word processor's own commands.


Corel VENTURA text color codes
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

When color is applied to text in Corel VENTURA, codes corresponding to the selected color model, palette and color are stored with the text file. The codes can also be inserted manually in the text file from within a word processor. Later, when the text file is imported, the color information is correctly translated, displayed and printed.

The codes for text color are as follows:

Color Model	Code

RGB	<C5,P,K,r,g,b>

C5=RGB identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

r=Red, g=green, b=blue

PANTONE	<C1,P,K,Id,Density>

C1=PANTONE identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

Id=Pantone Id

Density=Color Density

CMYK	<C2,P,K,c,m,y,k>

C2=CMYK identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

c=Cyan, m=Magenta, y=Yellow,k=Black

CMY	<C4,P,K,c,m,y>

C4=CMY identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

c=Cyan, m=Magenta, y=Yellow

CMYK255	<C3,P,K,c,m,y,k>

C3=CMYK255 identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

c=Cyan, m=Magenta, y=Yellow,k=Black

HSB	<C6,P,K,h,s,b>

C6=HSB identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

h=Hue; S=Saturation; b=Brightness

HLS	<C7,P,K,h,l,s>

C7=HLS identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

H=Hue, L=Lightness, S=Saturation

HSB	<C6P,K,h,s,b>

C6=HSB identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

h=Hue, s=Saturation, b=Brightness

BW	<C8,P,K,b>

C8=BW identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

b=1(B) or 0(W)

Grayscale	<C9,P,K,Gray>

C9=Grayscale identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

Gray=Gray Value

YIQ255	<C11,P,K,Cy,Ci,Cq>

C11=YIQ255 identifier

P=Palette Number

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

Cy=Luminance Component

Ci=I Chroma Component

Cq=Q Chroma Component

LAB	<C12,P,K,l,a,b>

C12=LAB identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

l=l Component

a=a Component

b=b Component

*Palette Number (P in the codes described above):

1= PAL_TRUMATCH

2= PAL_PANTONE_PROCESS

3= PAL_PANTONE_SPOT

4= PAL_IMAGE

5= PAL_USER

6= PAL_CUSTOMFIXED

7= PAL_RGBSTANDARD

8= PAL_FOCOLTONE

 Related Topics


Codes for tables, index entries and other items
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Click [image] for a description of codes for inserting VENTURA tables, equations, index entries and other items using a word processor and other supported programs.

Tables

Index entries

Cross-references

Footnotes and endnotes

Equations

Variables

Formulas

Frame anchors

Hidden text

Current page number or chapter number

Line Breaks

Date and time

Box characters

Discretionary hyphens

Typographical spaces

TrueType font weights

 Related Topics


Tables
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Tables begin with a @Z_TBL_BEG = statement and end with a @Z_TBL_END = statement. The information directly after the @Z_TBL_BEG = statement defines the structure of the table as described below. Each row in the table is entered in a separate paragraph. Each column in each row is separated by a comma followed by a space (type two commas followed by a space to make a comma followed by a space appear within a column). If no space follows the comma, (e.g., within a number) only one comma is needed.

What follows is the definition of each element within a table. These elements should appear in the order shown.

Command	Use

@Z_TBL_BEG 	Placed at the beginning of a table to specify how the table is defined and initialized.

@Z_TBL_COL_TAGS	Specifies the default parameter tag to use for text in a column.

@Z_TBL_ROW_BEG	Defines the beginning of a row in the table.

@Z_TBL_ROW_END	Defines the end of the most recently defined row in the table.

@Z_TBL_CELL_BEG	Defines the beginning of a cell in the most recently defined row.

@Z_TBL_CELL_END	Defines the end of the most recently defined cell.

@tag = <paragraph>	Defines a paragraph within a table cell.

@Z_TBL_END 	Indicates the end of the table.

The following parameters are used after the previous keywords.

Parameter	Use

VERSION()	(Compulsory for a VENTURA 7 table text file) Specifies that the table is a particular version of Ventura. If omitted, version 5 is assumed.

COLUMNS()	(Optional parameter) Defines the number of columns in the table. If omitted, one column is assumed.

DIMENSION()	(Optional parameter) Defines the dimensions used for the parameters which follow.
IN specifies inches;
PT specifies points;
CM specifies centimeters;
PI specifies picas.
TM specifies tenths of a micron

You can locally override the global setting by placing these parameters directly after the parameter.

COLWIDTHS()	(Optional parameter) Defines the width of each cell within the table. The prefix E specifies variable width.

HEADERS()	(Optional parameter) Defines the number of header rows for this table. Only the first header row can be skewed by specifying a TOPROWSKEW  angle.

TOPROWSKEW()	Specifies the skew angle, in degrees, for the first header row.

TOPROWSKEWTEXT()	Specifies whether to skew text with each cell in the skewed top row.

SKIPFIRSTCELLSKEW	(Optional parameter) Specifies that the first cell in the row not be skewed.

CLIPLASTCELLSKEW	(Optional parameter) Specifies that the last cell in the row be clip-formatted.

LEFTCOLSKEW()	(Optional parameter) Specifies the skew angle, in degrees, for the left row.

SKEWLEFTCOLTEXT	(Optional parameter) Specifies that the text in each cell of the skewed left column be skewed.

ROWHEIGHT	Defines the height of the top row skew.

ALIGN()	(Optional parameter) Specifies whether a fixed width table is left aligned (LT), right-aligned (RT), or center aligned(CT).

WIDTH()	(Optional parameter) Width of the table if Custom is specified.

INDENT()	(Optional parameter) Specifies the amount of indentation from the left or the right (depending on the alignment)

ABOVE()	(Optional parameter) Specifies the amount of space above the table.

BELOW()	(Optional parameter) Specifies the amount of space below the table.

VJTOP()	(Optional parameter) Specifies the amount of vertical justification above the table.

VJBOT()	(Optional parameter) Specifies the amount of vertical justification below the table.

HGUTTER()	(Optional parameter) Specifies the amount of space between columns.

VGUTTER()	(Optional parameter) Specifies the amount of space between rows.

BOX()	(Optional parameter) Specifies the border tag to be used for drawing the grid around the table.

HGRID()	(Optional parameter) Specifies the border tag to be used for drawing the grid between rows.

VGRID()	(Optional parameter) Specifies the border tag to be used for drawing the grid between columns.

KEEP()	(Optional parameter) Specifies whether a table can break across pages, columns, etc. Breaks are allowed (OFF) or not allowed (ON). The default is OFF.

RULE()	(Optional parameter) Defines ruling line overrides for a  range of cells. List all ruling line overrides at the beginning of table in one paragraph separated by commas.

L0()	(Optional parameter)Specifies a hidden line as the border for a certain range of cells.

L1()	(Optional parameter)Specifies a single line as the border for a certain range of cells.

L2()	(Optional parameter)Specifies a double line as the border for a certain range of cells.

L3()	(Optional parameter)Specifies a thick line as the border for a certain range of cells.


Index entries
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

To index information, you can use the Index tag. Insert

<$I[index]Level_1_Entry[sort_key]; Level_2_Entry[sort_key]; etc.>,

where required. Up to 14 levels can be used.

See

To direct to another index entry, you can use the See phrase. Insert

<$S[index]Level_1_Entry[sort_key]; Level_2_Entry[sort_key]; etc.>,

where required. Up to 14 levels can be used.

See Also

To reference another area, you can use the See Also phrase. Insert

<$A[index]Level_1_Entry[sort_key]; Level_2_Entry[sort_key]; etc.>,

where required. Up to 14 levels can be used.

Note

•	Avoid placing entries within words and in words containing commas, semicolons and brackets [ ].


Cross-references
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

A cross-reference consists of two elements: a marker and a reference. The marker identifies the point in the text file you want to refer the reader to. The reference identifies the location of the marker.

Marker

<$M> - Text marker used to provide a reference point in a text stream which may be referenced (forward or backward) by a <$R> code. Syntax:

<$M[label]>

label is the identifying label (name) of the marker. (Note: case will be ignored.)

Reference

<$R> - Reference used to cause a reference substitution into the text stream. Syntax:

<$R[type,label,format]string>

type may be one of the following:

•	C# to designate the chapter number of the referenced frame or marker.

•	P# to designate the page number of the referenced frame or marker.

•	F# to designate the figure number of the referenced frame.

•	T# to designate the table number of the referenced frame.

•	S* to designate the section number string of the referenced marker (e.g., the text is derived from the section number paragraph immediately preceding the paragraph in which the marker appears).

•	C* to designate the caption label text of the referenced frame.

•	V* to designate a string variable substitution.

label is the name of the desired string variable or marker, or the anchor name of the desired frame. This parameter is optional. Refer to restrictions below (note: case will be ignored).

format is a format identifier, using the same syntax as is used for the format identifier for chapter, page, figure, and table counters. This parameter is optional; refer to restrictions below.

string is the text which is last determined to be the appropriate substitution during publication reference generation. Initially, it may be an empty string or any default string. A specified default string will be overwritten when publication cross-referencing is performed. Optional parameters in the <$R> code may be used only when appropriate. Specifically, the following formats are the only valid ones.

•	[C#] or [P#]: substitute the current chapter or page number in the format specified for the current chapter or page.

•	[C#,label], [P#,label], [F#,label], or [T#,label]: substitute the chapter, page, figure, or table number of the object or position referenced by label, using the format currently defined for the object/location's chapter or page. The label must reference a frame for figure and table numbers. It may reference either a frame or a text marker for chapter and page numbers.

•	[C#,label,format], [P#,label,format], [F#,label,format], or [T#,label,format]: as described for the optional syntax immediately above, except that the specified format is to be used.

•	[S*]: substitute the section number string of the current paragraph.

•	[S*,label]: substitute the section number string of the paragraph which holds the marker referenced by label. The label must reference a text marker.

•	[C*,label]: substitute the caption label string of the frame referenced by label.

•	[V*,label]: substitute the variable string referenced (and already defined) by label.


Footnotes and endnotes
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Footnotes can be inserted at any point in a text file by specifying <$Ftext> where text is the footnote text which will appear at the bottom of the page. Within Corel VENTURA, the appropriate footnote number is generated at the location in the text where the <$Ftext> appears.

Endnotes are defined by the <$Nendnote_text > tag, where endnote_text is the information provided in the endnote.


Equations
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Equations are entered in a word processor using VENTURA's equation language. Precede the equation with <$E and end it with >. For example:

<$E2~sqrt { -^{ a over 3 } cos theta sub 1 }>

Greater than and less than symbols should be entered twice, i.e., < would be entered as << and > as >>.

No attributes (e.g., <B>) should be included within the equation. Use font and size instead.

For more information about VENTURA's equation language, click [image].


Formulas
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Formulas can be inserted in tables, by using the <$=formula > tag, where the formula is inserted at formula. All formulas begin with an equals (=) sign.


Variables
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

A variable is a placeholder for text that changes according to the variable's current definition. You can insert just the placeholder in the text file and define the variable in VENTURA or include the definition in the text file.

Variable placeholder

<$V> - String variable used to define a string variable which may later be backward referenced by a <$R> code. The most recent declaration of a string variable is the one used when referenced. Syntax:

Variable definition

<$V[label]string>

Where label is the identifying label (name) of the string variable (Note: case will be ignored).

string is the string which is to be substituted when the variable is referenced. The string is not limited in length and may be an empty string.


Frame anchors
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

A frame anchor is a code inserted into text, that links the frame to a particular location on the page. When you insert a frame, you can specify the relationship between the text and the location.

The VENTURA markup code for a frame anchor is simply the frame name. For example, <$&~Frame1> indicates that Frame1 is inserted at that location in the text. The characteristics of Frame1, such as the type of frame anchor (inline, above current line, etc.), are stored internally, and are not editable outside VENTURA.


Current page number or chapter number
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

The codes for inserting the current page number and/or chapter number are the same as those used to insert cross-references.

Page number

<$R[V*,[P#],,,0]>

Chapter number

<$R[V*,[C#],,,0]>


Hidden text
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

The hidden text allows you to place comments and other text in your files which Corel VENTURA will not display or print. Thus, if you place the following in a text file:

<$!Note: this section revised on June 26, 1996>

This text will not appear in your document, but will still be available to edit within your word processor.

Hidden text appears as a note in documents published in Adobe Acrobat format.


Line breaks
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

A line break begins a new line without creating a new paragraph. Use line breaks when printing large database files to separate individual lines within a record. The fewer paragraphs in a database printout, the larger the database file can be. Make sure, however, that you do not create a paragraph longer then 4-6K bytes.

Key sequence: Shift+Enter


Date and Time
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

You can insert date and time codes that update automatically by typing <$Xenudate&time> where date&time is the format string as is appears in the Insert Date and Time dialog box (Insert menu).

Examples:

To display the date/time as	Insert

10/7/96	<$XenuM/d/yy>

Monday, October 07, 1996	<$Xenudddd, MMMM dd, yyyy>

10/7/96 11:32:43 AM 	<$XenuM/d/yy h:mm:ss AM>

4th quarter, 96	<$Xenuqt 'quarter', yy>


Box characters
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

To place box characters in your document, enter:

<$B0> or <$B1>

Note

•	Box characters in documents from earlier versions of VENTURA won't display unless you have the ZapfDingbat or Wingding font installed on your system.


Discretionary hyphens
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

A discretionary hyphen <-> presents an additional hyphenation opportunity to Corel VENTURA's hyphenation algorithm. If the word which contains a discretionary hyphen is not placed at the end of a line, no hyphen is shown on the screen and no hyphen is printed.

Placing a discretionary hyphen at the beginning of the word disables hyphenation for the one occurrence of that word.


Typographical spaces
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Typographical spaces are entered as follows:

Type of space	Codes

Em	<_>

En	<~>

Figure	<+>

Non-Breaking	<N>

Thin Space	<|>


TrueType font weights
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

The follow table lists the TrueType text attribute weight codes. These codes are entered into text in exactly the same manner as other text attribute bracket codes.

TrueType Weight	Attribute Code

Thin	<W1>

Extra Light or Ultra Light	<W2>

Light	<W3>

Normal or Regular	<W4>

Medium	<W5>

Semi Bold or Demi Bold	<W6>

Bold	<W7>

Extra Bold or Ultra Bold	<W8>

Black or Heavy	<W9>


Formatting override codes
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Corel VENTURA inserts special codes in the text file when local formatting (i.e., formatting that overrides formatting specified in paragraph tags) is applied to paragraphs. The codes can also be inserted manually in the text file from within a word processor. Later, when the text file is imported using the Import Text command in the File menu, the codes are translated and the affected paragraphs formatted accordingly.

This section describes the syntax of the local formatting codes and the rules you must observe when entering the codes using a word processor.

What do you want more information about?

Formatting code syntax

Rules on entering formatting override codes

List of formatting codes

 Related Topics


Code syntax
Formatting override code syntax
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Local formatting codes use the following syntax:

<$Tp=param;[[p=param;]..]>

where

p: parameter identifier (e.g., hAlign for horizontal alignment)

param: the value of the parameter (e.g., L for left)

Each identifier-value set is separated by a ; (semi-colon) spaces, tabs and returns before and after ; or = are ignored. Identifiers are case-insensitive and so too are all values except font name.

Parameters can be of the following types :

•	Boolean: valid values are Y,N,y,n,0,1. Y and 1 stand for Yes, N and 0 stand for No. Example:

<keepnext=Y;italic=0>

•	Enumeration: valid values depend on the parameter. They can be either a single letter (case insensitive) or a single digit. Examples:

<halign=R;weight=3;valign=2>

In the example above, halign=R can also be written as halign=2; it will have the same effect.

•	Strings: only for the face name, NOT enclosed in quotes. A font name may NOT have a semi-colon in it, since it will be construed as a parameter-value separator. Example :

<font=Times New Roman>

•	Integer Values: Most parameters fall in this category. Values must be expressed in whatever units Ventura internally stores. Typical units are 1200 dpi for horizontal measurements and 9600 dpi for vertical measurements. Values can be prefixed with  '-' for negative values. Example :

<size=14;indentlines=2;spabove=960;lpageinleft=1200; >

(font size 14 points, 2 lines of indent, space above 0.1 inch, left page in from left 1 inch)

•	Special Values: color and tabs take multiple values, separated by commas. Example :

<color=1,2,0,0,255;tabs=1200,2400Rx,3600L>

(color is blue, 3 tabs at : 1 inch left aligned, 2 inch left aligned leadered, 3 inch left aligned)


Rules on entering formatting override codes
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

Observe the following rules and restrictions when using a word processor to insert VENTURA formatting overrides in text files.

Measurements

Measurements cannot be specified in decimals, nor can the unit of measurement be specified. All units are expressed using Corel VENTURA's internal measurement units.

Language

The strings for parameter identifiers cannot be translated from English into other languages.

Tag attributes that cannot be overridden

The following paragraph tag attributes cannot be overridden:

•	Ruling lines including custom indent/width

•	Auto Adjust mode for Interline spacing

Half Points

Half points cannot be specified in the Font size markup, since all values are integers only. To specify half points, use the following codes:

<$THalfPt=Y> or <$THalfPt=N>

to indicate the presence or absence of an additional half point, if different from the tag.

Auto Adjustment of Inter Line Space

When the font size is overridden in Corel VENTURA, the spacing values also get adjusted and overridden, but only if Auto Adjust is set to By Percent or By Addition for the tag. Hence, although you change only the font size for the current paragraph, the interline values are also Auto-Adjusted and become overridden values. But the user could override the font size by inserting the appropriate override codes using a text editor. The spacing will NOT get adjusted automatically.

Auto Adjustment of Default parameters (underline size etc. attributes)

The behaviour of this is slightly different from the Inter Line auto adjustment. The reason is that there is hardly ever a need to change these values from the auto-adjusted settings.

If the tag has Auto Adjust for Defaults ON, then the paragraph also has it ON by default. In this case, the dialog does not accept values for the default attributes. It uses values calculated from the Font size.

If the tag has Auto Adjust for Defaults OFF, then the paragraph also has it OFF. In this case the dialog accepts values for the default attributes, and those values that are different from the tag's values will be treated as overridden values.

The auto-adjust mode for the para can be different from that of the tag. In this case it is the auto-adjust mode of the paragraph that decides what values will finally be used.

Example with Auto Adjust ON

Value Overridden in Markup	Value not overridden

Value Calculated from Font Size and used	Value Calculated from Font Size and used

Example with Auto Adjust OFF

Value Overridden in Markup	Value not overridden

Overridden value used	Tag's value used

Note that the markup for Auto Adjust for Defaults has the following format :

<NoAutoDef=Y>

where a value of Y means there is No auto Adjustment, or Auto Adjust is OFF.


List of formatting override codes
(Reference: VENTURA Markup Codes)

The following tables lists the formatting override codes available in Corel VENTURA 7.

Font

Property	String	Units / Values

Face Name	Font	String

Point Size	Size	points

Half Point	HalfPt	y / n

Italic	Italic	y / n

Underline	Ulline	y / n

DoubleUline	DULine	y / n

StrikeThrough	Strike	y / n

Overscore	OverSc	y / n

Weight	Weight	1 to 9

Word Underline	WordUI	y / n

Uppercase	Uppercase	y / n

Alignment

Property	String	Units / Values

Horizontal alignment 	Halign	L (Left), R (Right), C (Center), J (Justified), D (Decimal)

Frame Wide text  	FrameWide	y / n

No Add Space Above  	AddSpAbove	y / n

Vertical alignment	Valign	T (Top), M (Middle), B (Bottom)

Rotation	Rotation	0, 900, 1800, 2700

Maximum rotation height	RotatedHt	1200 dpi

Absolute Y Position	AbsY	Int

Spacing

Property	String	Units / Values

Space Above	SpAbove	1200 dpi

Space Below	SpBelow	1200 dpi

InterLine	SpInterLn	9600 dpi

InterPara	SpInterPar	9600 dpi

Leader Spacing	LeaderSpc	Int

Auto Adjust Spacing	SpAutoAdj	Enum(0,1,2), where 0=None, 1=Percentage, 2=By addition

Tracking	TrackType	Enum(0,1,2,3,4,5), where 0=Custom, 1=Very Loose,

2=Loose, 3=Normal, 4=Tight, 5=Very Tight

Add space only at column top	AddSpAbOnly	y / n

Column-wide fill	ColWideFill	Int

Indents

Property	String	Units / Values

Indent	Indent	1200 dpi +/-

Lines to indent	IndentLns	Int

Relative indent	IndentRel	y / n

In From Left - Left Page	InLeftLPg	1200 dpi

In From Right - Left Page	InRightLPg	1200 dpi

In From Left - Right Page	InLeftRPg	1200 dpi

In From Right - Right Page	InRightRPg	1200 dpi

In From Right Decimal	InRightDec	1200 dpi

Bullet indent first line only	BulIndtFLn	y / n

Tabs

Property	String	Units / Values

Tabs	Tabs	(spl format, 1200 dpi)

Tab Leader Character	TabChar	ANSI char code

Leader space count	LeaderSp	number

Auto Leader On	AutoLeader	y / n

Special effect

Property	String	Units / Values

Special Effect  	Effect	N (None), B (Bullet), D (Drop cap)

Special Effect Face Name	EfFont	String

Special Effect point size	EfSize	points

Special Effect Weight	EfWeight	1 to 9

Special Effect Italic	EfItalic	y / n

Special Effect Color 	EfColor	(spl format)

Special Effect shift Down	EfShift	300 dpi +/-

Special Effect Underline	EfUL	y / n

Special Effect Double Underline	EfDUL	y / n

Special Effect Strike thru	EfStrike	y / n

Special Effect Overscore	EfOvscr	y / n

Use Custom Spacing for Drop Cap	DCCustomLn	y / n

Drop Cap lines	DCLines	int

Bullet Character	BulChar	ANSI char code

Bullet Indent	BulIndent	1200 dpi +/-

Condition	Conditional	string

Decimal Tab Character	DecTabChr	Int

Leader Character	LeaderChr	Int

Columns to span	ColsToSpan	Int

Number of Drop Cap Characters	DropChars	Int

Next Tag	NextTag	String

Text Before	TxtBefore	String

Text After	TxtAfter	String

Breaks

Property	String	Units / Values

Line breaks	BrkLine	N (None), B (Before), A (After), & (Before and After)

Column breaks	BrkCol	N (None), B (Before), A (After), & (Before and After)

Page breaks	BrkPage	N (None), B (Before), A (After), & (Before and After)

Allow Breaks Within Paragraphs	BrkNoWith	y / n

Keep With Next Paragraph 	KeepNext	y / n

Keep With Previous	KeepPrev	y / n

Break to next	BrkToNext	N, L, R

In Line with previous paragraph	InLinePrv	y / n

Typography

Property	String	Units / Values

Letter Spacing On  	LetterSp	y / n

Maximum Letter Spacing	MaxLtrSp	1/1000 ems

Tracking	Track	1/1000 ems

Auto Kerning  	Kern	y / n

Normal Space Width	NormSp	Thousandths

Maximum Space Width	MaxSp	Thousandths

Minimum Space Width	MinSp	Thousandths

Grow Interline	GrowIL	y / n

Top - Vertical Justification	VJAbove	9600 dpi

Bottom - Vertical Justification	VJBelow	9600 dpi

Interline - Vertical Justification	VJInterLn	9600 dpi

Successive hyphens	SuccHyph	number

Hyphenation 	HyphOn	y / n

Hyphenate at column break	HyColBrk	Int

Hyphenation language	HyLang	Int

Hyphenation dialect	HyDial	Int

Hyphenate last word in paragraph	HyLastWrd	Int

Hyphenate capitalized words	HyCaps	Int

Maximum chars to hyphenate	HySize	Int

Maximum chars before hyphen	HyBefore	Int

Maximum chars after hyphen	HyAfter	Int

Hanging Punctuation	HangPunc	y / n

Characters for Hanging Punctuation	HangPuncCh	String

Defaults

Property	String	Units / Values

Auto Adjust Settings to Font Size	NoAutoDef	y / n

Margin wide attribute	MarginAttr	y / n

Underline height	UlineHt	9600 dpi

Underline shift	UlineSh	9600 dpi

Underline2 height	DULineHt	9600 dpi

Underline2 shift	DULineSh	9600 dpi

Strike through height	StrikeHt	9600 dpi

Strike through shift	StrikeSh	9600 dpi

Overscore height	OverscHt	9600 dpi

Overscore shift	OverscSh	9600 dpi

Superscript size	SupSize	points

Superscript shift	SupSh	9600 dpi

Subscript size	SubSize	points

Subscript shift	SubSh	9600 dpi

Small caps size	AltSize	points

Add space only at column top	AddSpAbOnly	y / n


Using the Bar Code Wizard

You can create and edit your own bar codes in Corel VENTURA using the Bar Code Wizard.

To start, choose Object from the Insert menu. When you choose Corel BARCODE Object from the resulting Insert New Object dialog box, the Bar Code Wizard guides you through the process of creating your bar codes.

Using industry-standard bar-coding formats, you can enter your bar code string, choose a corresponding font and point size, and set readability.

Note

·	Bar codes generated by the Bar Code Wizard are OLE objects and as such cannot be rotated in Corel VENTURA. To rotate a bar code, you must enter the bar code digits as regular text and then format the digits using a bar code font [image] for example, PostNet or Upc. You then rotate the bar code as you would a regular paragraph. VENTURA supplies several bar codes fonts in Adobe Type 1 and True Type formats. The Bar Code Wizard installs only one of the available bar code fonts. If you require others, you can install them by running the Bar Code Wizard.


Wizard context-sensitive topics


Choose a bar code type

Enables you to choose from the industry-standard bar coding systems.


Enter your bar code string

Enables you to enter the code you want to use.


Choose a bar code font

The fonts displayed are those commonly used for the type of bar code you chose in step one.

Note

·	Bar codes generated by the Bar Code Wizard are OLE objects and as such cannot be rotated in Corel VENTURA. To rotate a bar code, you must enter the bar code digits as regular text and then format the digits using a bar code font [image] for example, PostNet or Upc. You then rotate the bar code as you would a regular paragraph. VENTURA supplies several bar codes fonts in Adobe Type 1 and True Type formats. The Bar Code Wizard installs only one of the available bar code fonts. If you require others, you can install them by running the Bar Code Wizard.

 Related Topics


Choose bar code attributes

Choose the attributes you want for your bar code.

You can set up the code by font name or by bar code attributes. If you choose Font Name, the next screen displays the fonts associated with the type of bar code you selected in step one.

If you choose Bar Code Attributes, you can select TrueType and the next screen presented contains readability and bar width reduction options.


Set bar code readability or bar width reduction

In option 1, choose whether you want your bar code to be readable to the human eye. Deselect this option if you want the bars to be read by bar-code readers only.

Click the second option if you want to reduce the space between bars.


Choose bar code point size

Choose a font size for your bar code.


Set bar code density

Choose a density for your bar code, measured in characters per inch.


Bar code preview

Preview the numbers in your bar code and click Back if you want to make changes.


Convert previous version styles wizard

The Convert previous version styles wizard appears automatically when you open a pre-version 7 document that uses more than one stylesheet. It also appears when you are adding a chapter to a document and they use different stylesheets. Whereas documents created in earlier versions of VENTURA can use different stylesheets for each chapter, those in the current version use only one per document. The wizard allows you to control how VENTURA merges the tags in pre-version 7 documents into a single stylesheet.

There are three ways to merge the tags; you can

1) Use All Tags

Keeps all tags in the stylesheets by appending a unique prefix or suffix to the names of duplicate tags. You can choose to append the stylesheet name to the name of duplicate tags, producing names such as "Body Text Style1," Body Text Style2," "Body Text Style3" and so on. Or, you can append a number, producing names like "Body Text 1," Body Text 2," "Body Text 3" and so on.

Note: This is the only option available when the document and the chapter you are adding to it use different stylesheets.

2) Use Only One Tag

Keeps the unique tags in the stylesheets and discards the duplicates. You specify which duplicate tags to keep by prioritizing the sheet styles. When VENTURA encounters a duplicate tag, it keeps the one in the stylesheet highest in the order of priority.

3) Custom

Allows you to keep duplicate tags by renaming them. Duplicated tags you don't rename are discarded. If you like, you can also rename tags that aren't duplicated.

By default, VENTURA keeps the first instance of a duplicated tag and discards the rest. To keep a different duplicate tag, click the Keep check box next to its name. To keep the other instance(s) of a duplicate tag, click in the New Name column and type a new name.

The wizard also lets you set the threshold which controls whether VENTURA incorporates (embeds) pictures in pre-version 7 document into the active document, or creates an external reference to them. You can also set this threshold using the Tools, Options command (Save tab). For more information about embedding and referencing files, click Related Topics and choose "Importing and exporting."

Tip

•	If you have many pre-version 7 documents, consider using the VCONVERT script to convert them to version 7 format. For more information about scripts and how to run them, click Related and choose "Scripts and wizards included with VENTURA."

Notes

•	Choosing to keep all tags in a document that has a table of contents (TOC) generated using identically named tags produces a TOC with twice the number of levels as the original. So, if the TOC in a document with two style sheets was generated using tags named "Heading" and "Sub Heading," the resulting TOC would look like this :

Level 1 : Heading

Level 2 : Sub Heading

Level 3 : Heading_1

Level 4 : Sub Heading_1

Since the structure of the TOC may no longer reflect the structure of the document, you will need to redefine it after the conversion. To avoid redefining the TOC, choose the Use Only One Tag option to merge the stylesheets.

•	If the document uses more than one layout style (book, booklet, card etc.), VENTURA takes the layout of the first chapter and applies it to the others.

 Related Topics


Function Wizard


Click the function category you want.


Click the function that you want to insert, then click the Next button. For more information about the functions, click [image].


Describes the selected function. For more information about the function, click [image].


Click this button to return to the previous step of entering a function.


Click this button to fill in the function's arguments.


Click this button to insert the function in the selected cell and close the Function Wizard.


Conversion Wizard page


For more Help on the options in this dialog box, click [image].


For more Help on the options in this dialog box, click [image].


For more Help on the options in this dialog box, click [image].


For more Help on the options in this dialog box, click [image].


Click this button to create a nested function [image] that is, a function within a function.


Type the value you want to convert in this box.


Shows the value produced by the function. The format of the value depends on the option selected from the Numeric Format box. If the value displayed does not seem correct, make sure you are using an appropriate number format.


Specify how numeric values are displayed. For more information, click


Number Formats

The following table shows the built-in number formats available in Corel VENTURA with examples of what displays when the cell contains is a positive number, a negative number, and a fraction.

Format Code	5	-5	.5
0	5	-5	1
0.00	5.00	-5.00	0.50
0.00E+00 (Scientific)	5.00E+00	-5.00E+01	5.00E-01
#,##0	5	-5	1
#,##0.00	5.00	-5.00	0.50
##0.0E+0 (Scientific)	5.0E+01	-5.0E+01	5.0E-01
#,##0;(#,##0)	5	(  -5)	0
#,##0.00;(#,##0.00)	5.00	(  5.00)	0.50
0%	500%	-500%	50%
0.00%	500.00%	-500.00%	50.00%
0.0########	5.0	-5.0	0.5
0.0###### (Default)	5	-5	0.5


Other functions Wizard page


Describes the parameter containing the insertion point. For more information about the parameters, click [image].


For more Help on the options in this dialog box, click [image].


For more Help on the options in this dialog box, click [image].


For more Help on the options in this dialog box, click [image].


For more Help on the options in this dialog box, click [image].


 For more Help on the options in this dialog box, click [image].


Click this button to create a nested function [image] that is, a function within a function.


Shows the value produced by the function. The format of the value depends on the option selected from the Numeric Format box. If the value displayed does not seem correct, make sure you are using an appropriate number format.


Specify how numeric values are displayed. For more information, click [image].


Specify the language you want to use to format the date. Selecting System formats dates in the language specified using the Windows Control Panel. This setting is available when using certain Time and Date functions.


Functions (By Category)
Functions

Which functions do you want more information about?

All

Conversion

Date and Time

Engineering

Financial

Logical

Mathematical

Statistical


Functions (All)

ABS

ACCRINT

ACCRINTM

ACOS

ACOSH

AND

ASIN

ASINH

ATAN2

ATAN

ATANH

AVEDEV

AVERAGE

BESSELI

BESSELJ

BESSELK

BESSELY

BETADIST

BETAINV

BINOMDIST

CEILING

CHIDIST

CHIINV

CHITEST

COMBIN

COMPLEX

CONFIDENCE

CORREL

COS

COSH

COT

COUNTA

COUNT

COUPDAYBS

COUPDAYS

COUPDAYSNC

COUPNCD

COUPNUM

COUPPCD

COVAR

CRITBINOM

CSC

CUMIPMT

CUMPRINC

DATE

DATEVALUE

DAY

DAYS360

DB

DDB

DEGTORAD

DELTA

DEVSQ

DISC

DOLLARDE

DOLLARFR

DURATION

EFFECT

ERFC

ERF

EVEN

EXP

EXPONDIST

FACTDOUBLE

FACT

FALSE

FDIST

FINV

FISHER

FISHERINV

FLOOR

FORECAST

FTEST

FV

FVSCHEDULE

GAMMADIST

GAMMA

GAMMAINV

GAMMALN

GCD

GEOMEAN

GESTEP

HARMEAN

HOUR

HYPGEOMDIST

IF

IMABS

IMAGINARY

IMARGUMENT

IMCONJUGATE

IMCOS

IMDIV

IMEXP

IMLN

IMLOG10

IMLOG2

IMLOG

IMPOWER

IMPRODUCT

IMREAL

IMSIN

IMSQRT

IMSUB

IMSUM

INTERCEPT

INT

INTRATE

INVERSE

IPMT

IRR

KURT

LARGE

LCM

LN

LOG10

LOG2

LOGINV

LOG

LOGNORDIST

MAX

MDURATION

MEDIAN

MIN

MINUTE

MIRR

MODE

MOD

MONTH

MROUND

MULTINOMIAL

NAND

NEGBINOMDIST

NETWORKDAYS

NOMINAL

NORMDIST

NORMINV

NORMSDIST

NORMSINV

NOR

NOT

NOW

NPER

NPV

ODD

OR

PCT

PEARSON

PERCENTILE

PERCENTRANK

PERMUT

PI

PMT

POISSON

POWER

PPMT

PRICEDISC

PRICEMAT

PRICE

PROB

PRODUCT

PV

QUARTILE

QUOTIENT

RADTODEG

RANDBETWEEN

RAND

RANK

RATE

RECEIVED

ROMAN

ROUND

RSQ

SECOND

SEC

SERIESSUM

SIGN

SINH

SIN

SKEW

SLN

SLOPE

SMALL

SQRTPI

SQRT

STANDARDIZE

STDP

STD

STEYX

SUMPRODUCT

SUMSQ

SUM

SUMX2MY2

SUMX2PY2

SUMXMY2

SYD

TANH

TAN

TBILLEQ

TBILLPRICE

TBILLYIELD

TDIST

TIME

TIMEVALUE

TINV

TODAY

TRIMMEAN

TRUE

TRUNC

TTEST

VARP

VAR

VDB

WEEKDAY

WEIBULL

XIRR

XNPV

XOR

YEARFRAC

YEAR

YIELDDISC

YIELDMAT

YIELD

ZTEST


Functions (Date and Time)
Functions

Which functions do you want more information about?

Conversion

Date and Time

DATE

DATEVALUE

DAY

DAYS360

HOUR

MINUTE

MONTH

NETWORKDAYS

NOW

SECOND

TIME

TIMEVALUE

TODAY

WEEKDAY

YEAR

YEARFRAC

Engineering

Financial

Logical

Mathematical

Statistical


Functions (Engineering)
Functions

Which functions do you want more information about?

Conversion

Date and Time

Engineering

BESSELI

BESSELJ

BESSELK

BESSELY

COMPLEX

DELTA

ERF

ERFC

GAMMA

GAMMALN

GESTEP

IMABS

IMAGINARY

IMARGUMENT

IMCONJUGATE

IMCOS

IMDIV

IMEXP

IMLN

IMLOG

IMLOG10

IMLOG2

IMPOWER

IMPRODUCT

IMREAL

IMSIN

IMSQRT

IMSUB

IMSUM

Financial

Logical

Mathematical

Statistical


Functions (Financial)
Functions

Which functions do you want more information about?

Conversion

Date and Time

Engineering

Financial

ACCRINT

ACCRINTM

COUPDAYBS

COUPDAYS

COUPDAYSNC

COUPNCD

COUPNUM

COUPPCD

CUMIPMT

CUMPRINC

DB

DDB

DISC

DOLLARDE

DOLLARFR

DURATION

EFFECT

FV

FVSCHEDULE

INTRATE

IPMT

IRR

MDURATION

MIRR

NOMINAL

NPER

NPV

PMT

PPMT

PRICE

PRICEDISC

PRICEMAT

PV

RATE

RECEIVED

SLN

SYD

TBILLEQ

TBILLPRICE

TBILLYIELD

VDB

XIRR

XNPV

YIELD

YIELDDISC

YIELDMAT

Logical

Mathematical

Statistical


Functions (Logical)
Functions

Which functions do you want more information about?

Conversion

Date and Time

Engineering

Financial

Logical

AND

FALSE

IF

NAND

NOR

NOT

OR

TRUE

XOR

Mathematical

Statistical


Functions (Mathematical)
Functions

Which functions do you want more information about?

Conversion

Date and Time

Engineering

Financial

Logical

Mathematical

ABS

ACOS

ACOSH

ASIN

ASINH

ATAN

ATAN2

ATANH

CEILING

COMBIN

COS

COSH

COT

CSC

DEGTORAD

EVEN

EXP

FACT

FACTDOUBLE

FLOOR

GCD

INT

INVERSE

LCM

LN

LOG

LOG10

LOG2

MOD

MROUND

MULTINOMIAL

ODD

PCT

PI

POWER

PRODUCT

QUOTIENT

RADTODEG

RAND

RANDBETWEEN

ROMAN

ROUND

SEC

SERIESSUM

SIGN

SIN

SINH

SQRT

SQRTPI

SUM

SUMPRODUCT

SUMSQ

SUMX2MY2

SUMX2PY2

SUMXMY2

TAN

TANH

TRUNC

Statistical


Functions (Statistical)
Functions

Which functions do you want more information about?

Conversion

Date and Time

Engineering

Financial

Logical

Mathematical

Statistical

AVEDEV

AVERAGE

BETADIST

BETAINV

BINOMDIST

CHIDIST

CHIINV

CHITEST

CONFIDENCE

CORREL

COUNT

COUNTA

COVAR

CRITBINOM

DEVSQ

EXPONDIST

FDIST

FINV

FISHER

FISHERINV

FORECAST

FTEST

GAMMADIST

GAMMAINV

GEOMEAN

HARMEAN

HYPGEOMDIST

INTERCEPT

KURT

LARGE

LOGINV

LOGNORDIST

MAX

MEDIAN

MIN

MODE

NEGBINOMDIST

NORMDIST

NORMINV

NORMSDIST

NORMSINV

PEARSON

PERCENTILE

PERCENTRANK

PERMUT

POISSON

PROB

QUARTILE

RANK

RSQ

SKEW

SLOPE

SMALL

STANDARDIZE

STD

STDP

STEYX

TDIST

TINV

TRIMMEAN

TTEST

VAR

VARP

WEIBULL

ZTEST